1 
 
 MASTER 
 NEGATIVE 
 
 NO . 91 -80009 
 
 I 
 
MICROFILMED 1991 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 
 
 as part of the 
 "Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project 
 
 Funded by the 
 NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 
 
 Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
 
 Columbia University Library 
 
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 
 
 The copyright law of the United States — Title 17, United 
 States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or other 
 reproductions of copyrighted material... 
 
 Columbia University Library reserves the right to refuse to 
 accept a copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
 would involve violation of the copyright law. 
 
AUTHOR: 
 
 GOODWIN, WILLIAM W. 
 
 TITLE: 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE MOODS 
 
 PLACE: 
 
 BOSTON 
 
 DA TE : 
 
 1875 
 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
 PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 Master Negative # 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 
 
 Restrictions on Use: 
 
 Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 
 
 n:;7.50 
 
 GG71 
 
 Gooclv/in, Y/. Y/ . 
 
 :;vq\l.'ix of Mic mooCii: 
 verb, 1G75 . 
 
 O !.» u J _ 
 
 ."lul tourer; of the Greek 
 
 iipir.:) 
 
 n 
 
 TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 
 
 FILM SIZE:___35_rra_lr^_ REDUCTION RATIO: W_'^>^_ 
 
 IMAGE PLACEMENT: lA JI^ IB IIB 
 
 DATE FILMED: "jl^A INITI ALS___'SJa::l 
 
 FILMED BY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS. INC WOODBRIDGE. CT 
 

 1 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 Association for information and Image IManagement 
 
 1100 Wayne Avenue, Suite 1100 
 Silver Spring, Maryland 20910 
 
 301/587-8202 
 
 Centimeter 
 
 12 3 4 
 
 iiiiliiiiiiiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiii 
 
 11 
 
 TTT 
 
 Inches 
 
 II II T 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 ilmi 
 
 11 
 
 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 mm 
 
 liiiiliMiliiiiliiiiliiiiliiiil|| |||| iiiliiiiliiiiliiiil iNiliiiiliiiiliiiiliin 
 
 M I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 i— 
 
 2.8 
 
 2.5 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 1^ 
 
 3.2 
 
 3.6 
 
 — 
 
 2.2 
 
 i:: III 
 
 4.0 
 
 2.0 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 li u 
 
 
 Uil^u. 
 
 
 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.4 
 
 
 1.6 
 
 1^ 
 
 MflNUFflCTURED TO RUM STfiNDFIRDS 
 BY RPPLIED IMRGEt INC. 
 
E]|[yiJj^J^J^l^J^l^J^M 
 
 l^ 
 
 m 
 
 lu 
 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 
 ii 
 
 11 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 L 
 
 THE LIBRARIES 
 
 OLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 
 
 General Library 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 1 i 
 
SYNTAX 
 
 OF 
 
 THE MOODS AND TENSES 
 
 OF 
 
 THE GREEK VERB. 
 
 BY 
 
 WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Ph.D., 
 
 ELIOT PROFESSOR OP GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD UNTVERSITT. 
 
 
 \ - 
 
 SIXTH EDITION, REVISED. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 GINN BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 1875. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 TO THE SECOND EDITION, 
 
 II 
 
 BDlox«d according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, hy 
 W. W. GOODWIN, 
 ttM Cleik'i Office of the Distnct Court of the District of UasaaehiuMttii 
 
 University Press: Welch, Bigelow, & Co., 
 Cambridge. 
 
 In the first edition of the present work, published in 1860, 
 I attempted to give a plain and practical statement of the prm- 
 ciples which govern the relations of the Greek Moods and 
 Tenses. Although many of these principles were established 
 beyond dispute, there were others (and these often the most ele- 
 mentary) upon which scholars had long held the most opposite 
 opinions. Upon many of these latter points I presented new 
 views, which seemed to me to explain the phenomena of the 
 lan^ruage more satisfactorily than any that had been advanced. 
 The favorable opinion of scholars has confirmed my belief, that 
 some such attempt as I have made was demanded by the ris- 
 ing standard of classical scholarship in this country, and has 
 criven me reason to hope that my labor has not been entirely a 
 
 thankless one. 
 
 The progress in grammatical science in this century has 
 been made^step by step, like that in every other science; and 
 so it must long continue to be. He who imagines that every 
 important principle of Greek and Latin syntax is as well un- 
 derstood and as clearly defined as the rules for addition and 
 multiplication in Arithmetic, has not yet begun to learn. It is 
 no disparagement of even the highest scholars, therefore, to say 
 that they have left much of the most important work to be 
 lone by their successors. 
 
 The vague notions so often expressed on the Greek Moods, 
 even by scholars of otherwise high attainments, are in strange 
 contrast with the accuracy demanded by scientific scholarship 
 in other departments. If the study of language is to retain its 
 present place (or indeed any prominent place) in the mental 
 
 ^.\ 
 
fl FREFACE. 
 
 discipline of youth, it must be conducted on strictly scientific 
 principles, and above all with scientific accuracy. On no other 
 ground can we defend the course of elementary grammatical 
 training, which is the basis of all sound classical scholarship. 
 An elementary grammar should be as short as the best scholar 
 can make it, but it should be as accurate as a chapter in Geom- 
 etry. To those who cannot appreciate the importance of 
 accuracy in scholarship, or even distinguish it from pedantry, 
 to those who cannot see the superiority of the Greek in this 
 respect over Chinese or Choctaw, it is useless to speak ; but 
 surely no scholar can fail to see that an accurate knowledge of 
 the uses of the Greek Verb, with its variety of forms, each ex- 
 pressing its peculiar shade of meaning, must be indispensable 
 to one who would understand the marvellous power of the 
 Greek language to express the nicest distinctions of thought. 
 
 One great cause of the obscurity which has prevailed on this 
 subject is the tendency of so many scholars to treat Greek syn- 
 tax metaphysically rather than by the light of common sense. 
 Since Hermann's application of Kant's Categories of Modality 
 to the Greek Moods, this metaphysical tendency has been con- 
 spicuous in German grammatical treatises, and has affected 
 many of the grammars used in England and America more 
 than is generally supposed. The result of this is seen not 
 merely in the discovery of hidden meanings which no Greek 
 writer ever dreamed of, but more especially in the invention of 
 nice distinctions between similar or even precisely equivalent 
 expressions. A new era was introduced by Madvig, who has 
 earned the lasting gratitude of scholars by his efforts to restore 
 Greek syntax to the dominion of common sense. Madvig is 
 fully justified in boasting that he was the first to give full and 
 correct statements on such elementary matters as the meaning 
 of the Aorist Optative and Infinitive, and the construction of on 
 and iff in oratio ohliqua; although Professor Sophocles dis- 
 tinctly recognized the .<ame principles in his Grammar, published 
 later in the same year with Madvig's (1847). I can hardly 
 express my great indebtedness to Madvig's Syntax der griechi- 
 schen Sprache, and to his Bemerhungen ilber einige Puncte der 
 griechischen Wortfugungslehre (in a supplement to the Pfdlolo- 
 gtUf VoL II.). The works of this eminent scholar have aided 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 •• • 
 
 m 
 
 me not only by the material which they have afforded as a 
 basis for the present work, but also by the valuable suggestions 
 
 with which they abound. 
 
 Next to Madvig, I must acknowledge my obh^tions to 
 KrUeer's Griechische Sprachlehre, which has everywhere sup- 
 plied me with important details and most excellent examples. 
 I have been frequently indebted to the other grammarmns, 
 who need not be specially mentioned. Biium^ems Unter- 
 .uchungen iiber die griechischen Modi reached me ^ter the pnnt^ 
 in<r of the first edition was begun. I have often been indebted 
 to'his valuable collection of examples, and have derived many 
 hints from his special criticisms ; I regret that I cannot agree 
 with the general principles to which he refers the uses of each 
 mood, especially as his criticisms of the prevailing German the- 
 ories on this subject are most satisfactory and instructive. I am 
 indebted to the personal advice and suggestions of my learned 
 colleague. Professor Sophocles, in the preparation of botb 
 editions, for information which no books could have supplied. 
 
 I must acknowledge the following special obligations. Ihe 
 notes on the tenses of the Indicative in Chapter II. are based 
 mainly ou Kruger, § 53. The chapters on the Infinitive and 
 Participle are derived chiefly from Madvig's Syntax (Chapters 
 V. and VI.), and partly from Kruger, § 55, § 56. Tiie note 
 on the Future Optative after Snm, &c. (§ 26, Note 1) contains 
 the substance of Madvig's Bemerhungen, pp. 27 - 29 ; and the 
 account of the various constructions that follow verbs of ktn- 
 drance and preveiUion (§ 95, 2 and 3) is based on the same 
 work pp. 47 - 66. The statement of the principles of mdirect 
 discourse (Chapter IV. Section IV.) was written in nearly its 
 present form before Madvig's Syntax reached me; and I was 
 strongly confirmed in the views there expressed, by finding 
 that they agreed almost exactly with those of Madvig. I was 
 anticipated by him in my statement of the occasional use ot ttie 
 Present Optative to represent the Imperfect, and in my quota- 
 tion of Dem. in Onet. I. 869, 12 to illustrate it. I am entirely 
 mdebted to him, however, for the statement of the important 
 prindple explained in § 74, 2. 
 
 It remains to state what new material the present work pro- 
 fesaes to offer to scholars. The most important and most 
 
 /* 
 
IV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 radical innovation upon the ordinary system will be found in 
 the classification of conditional sentences (§ 48), with its devel- 
 opment in the rules that follow. I have explained the grounds 
 of this classification at some length in the Proceedings of the 
 American Academy, Vol. VI. p. 363, and will therefore merely 
 allude to them here. Tiie great difficulty (or rather the im- 
 possibility) of defining the force of the Subjunctive m protasis 
 as distinguished from the Present Indicative, has arisen from 
 neglect of the distinction between particidar and general suppo- 
 sitions. When this is recognized, the distinction between the 
 Subjunctive and the Present Indicative is seen to be entirely 
 one of time ; whereas all the common distinctions based on 
 possibility, certainty, &c. will apply only to select examples, 
 which of course are easily found to illustrate them. In the 
 first edition, I could not persuade myself to abandon the old 
 doctrines so completely as to exclude the common distinction 
 between the Subjunctive and the Optative in protasis, — that 
 the former implies a " prospect of decision," while the latter 
 does not. Subsequent experience has convinced me that there 
 is no more distinction between lav tovto ttoi^ and d tovto Troioirj 
 than between the English if he shall do this and if he should 
 do this ; and I think every one must see that here there is no 
 distinction but that of greater or less vividness of expression. 
 The simple fact that both could be expressed by the Latin si 
 hocfaciat is a strong support of this view. 
 
 The principles of conditional sentences being first settled, I 
 have attempted to carry out the analogy between these and 
 conditional relative sentences more completely. It seems to 
 me that it is only by adopting the classification of conditional 
 sentences which I have given, that the true nature of the anal- 
 ogous relative sentences can be made clear. (See § 60, § 61, 
 § 62.) Upon a right classification of conditional sentences 
 depends also the right understanding of the forms used to ex- 
 press a wish (§ 82, § 83). 
 
 The frequent use of the Subjunctive with Xva, oirm, &c., 
 after past tenses, instead of the Optative, of which I had never 
 seen a satisfactory explanation, is here explained on the prin- 
 ciple of orntio ohliqua. (See § 44, 2; § 77, 2.) The con- 
 struction of the Infinitive with verbs like xp^^ ^^^ ^^^h forming 
 
 PREFACE. T 
 
 an apodosis, is explained in the present edition on a new prin. 
 ciple, which (it is hoped) will remove many of the difficulties 
 which the old explanation did not reach. (See § 49, 2, Note 3 
 and Remarks.) In the first edition, the usual distinction be- 
 tween the constructions that follow ov filj was adopted with 
 hesitation, including Elmsle/s punctuation, by which the sec- 
 ond person of the Future in prohibitions with ov fifj is made 
 interrogative. In this edition both constructions are explained 
 more satisfactorily upon the same principle. (See § 89, 1 and 2, 
 with Notes and Remarks.) It is hoped that the new statement 
 of the force of the Perfect Infinitive, in § 18, 3, (a) and (b) of 
 this edition, will meet the difficulties which that tense presents. 
 The statement in the former edition was very defective. 
 
 It may seem strange to some that no general definitions of 
 the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative are attempted in the 
 first chapter. I have rather taken warning from the numerous 
 unsuccessful attempts that have been made to include all the 
 uses of these moods in comprehensive definitions, and have 
 preferred merely to illustrate their various uses by simple ex- 
 amples at the outset, leaving the explanations to their propei 
 place in the book. For one, I am not ashamed to admit that I 
 cannot propose a definition comprehensive enough to include 
 all the examples in § 1, § 2, or § 3, which shall stiU be Hmited 
 enough to be called a definition. 
 
 Besides the special changes already mentioned, the work ha« 
 been subjected to a thorough revision, so that in many parts 
 the new edition might claim to be an entirely new work.* 
 
 » Notwithstanding the changes in the second edition, very few alterations 
 have been made in numbering the paragraphs or notes. The followmg are 
 the only changes (except a few omissions) which can affect references al- 
 ready made to the first edition: — § 18, 3 is subdivided into (a) and (6); § 18, 
 3, Rem. takes the place of § 18, 4, Note; § 24, Notes 1 and 2 are rearranged; 
 4 37, Note 2 is omitted, and N. 3 is changed to N. 2; § 45, N. 2 is subdivided 
 into (a) and (6); in § 49, 2, N. 3, the present divisions (c), {d), and (c) were 
 included in (6); § 64, 1 and 2 are rearranged; in § 92, 2, Note 1 is changed to 
 Remark; § 109, N. 9 was included in N. 3. ^ ,. . x jo o 
 
 The following additions have been made in the second edition: — ^9, £, 
 N. 6 (6); § 60, 1, Rem. 2; § 62, 2, Rem.; § 63, N. 4; ^ 64, Rem. 2; § 65, 3, 
 N. 2; § 65, 4; § 69, 6; § 71, Rem. 2; § 89, 2, Rem. 1 and 2; § 92 2 N. 1; 
 4 95, 3, Rem.; § 108, N. 4 (6); § 112, 1, Rem.; \ 112, 2, Rem.; § 113, Rem. 
 after N. 10. The following have been materially changed in subject or m 
 substance in the second edition:—^ 25, 1, N. 6 (6); § 41, N. 4; S 43, Rem.,- 
 Remarks 1 and 2 after ^ 49, 2, N. 3; § 82, Rem. 2; ^89, 2. Notes 1 and 2. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Especially, the collection of examples has heen revised and 
 greatly enlarged, with the object of illustrating every variety 
 of each construction from as wide a range of classic authors as 
 possible. An index to these examples (more than 2,300 in 
 number) is added to this edition. This index includes those 
 which are merely cited, as well as those actually quoted, many 
 of the former being quite as important as the latter. In the 
 new edition, the matter printed in the two larger types has 
 been reduced, and made as concise as was consistent with 
 accuracy, while that printed in the smallest type has been 
 greatly increased. It should be understood that only the first- 
 mentioned portion of the work is intended for use as a gram- 
 matical text-book, while the notes and remarks in the smallest 
 type are intended only for reference : whh this view, the latter 
 are often extended to a greater length than would otherwise 
 
 be justifiable. 
 
 The Dramatists are cited by Dindorfs lines, except the 
 fragments, which follow the numbers in Nauck's edition ; 
 Plato, by the pages of Stephanus ; and Demosthenes, by 
 Reiske's pages and lines. In the Index to the Examples, 
 however, the sections of Bekker's German editions of Demos- 
 thenes have been added in each case, to facilitate reference. 
 Other citations will be easily understood. 
 
 Cambridge, June, 1865. 
 
 PEEFACE 
 
 TO THE FIFTH EDITION 
 
 Since the publication of the second edition of this work ;n 
 1865, several changes of expression and many corrections 
 have been made, which it is impossible to enumerate m full. 
 In preparing the fourth edition in 1870, and the fifth edition 
 in 1873, the work has been carefully revised ; several sections 
 and notes have been rewritten, and some notes have been 
 added. The only changes which can affect references made to 
 the earlier editions (besides those mentioned on page v.) will 
 be found in § 10, 1, Remark; § 11, Note 7 ; § 18, 1, Note^; 
 § 19, Note 6 ; § 66, 2, Note 3 ; § 78, Note ; and § 114, 2, 
 Note : these have been added since the second edition was 
 printed. Changes of expression and additions will be found 
 in the Remark before § 12 ; § 18, 1 ; § 23, 2, Note 3 ; § 37, 
 1 ; § 45, Note 7 (o) ; § 69, 1 ; § 70, 1 ; § 86, Note 1 (h) ; 
 § 88, Remark ; and § 89, 2, Note 1 and Remark 1 ; not to 
 mention others of less importance. The most important change 
 made in the fifth edition will be found in the statement of the 
 classification of conditional sentences (§ 48). This has been 
 adopted to make clearer the position of the present and past 
 " general suppositions " which have the subjunctive and opta- 
 tive in Greek (§ 51), as opposed to the present and P^st " P^^' 
 ticular suppositions " which have the simple indicative (§ 49, 1 ). 
 This distinction of these two classes in protasis is a striking 
 peculiarity of Greek syntax ; most languages having a single 
 form of expression for both particular and general conditions 
 here, as the Greek has in other kinds of conditions. I can- 
 not state too distinctly, that the chief peculiarity of my classi- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 fication of conditional sentences consists in treating present 
 and past general conditions as closely allied to ordinary pres- 
 ent and past conditions (being actually united with them in 
 one class in most languages, and occasionally even in Greek), 
 and as only remotely connected, at least in sense, with the 
 externally similar forms of future conditions which have the 
 subjunctive and optative. This relation is especially obvious 
 when we see that iav iroifj as a general supposition is occa- 
 sionally represented by tl ttoicZ, whereas eap noifj in a future 
 condition is equivalent to ct Troi^aei in the indicative. I have 
 explained this at greater length in the Philologus, Vol. 
 XXVIII. pp. 741-745 (Gottingen, 1869), and in a paper 
 read before the American Philological Association in July, 
 1873. The change in § 48 has made necessary slight changes 
 ofexpressionin§12; §13,1; §20; §21,1; §49,1; §51; 
 § 60 ; § 61, 1 ; and § 62. An index to the examples which 
 have been added in the later editions is given on page 242. 
 
 Cambbidge, September, 1873. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 
 GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. 
 
 § 1. The five Moods . . . . • • • • 1 
 
 §§2-4. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative . .^ .^ 1, 2 
 
 §§6-7. Imperative, Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal in -rios 2, 8 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 § 8, 1. The seven Tenses J 
 
 2. Primary and Secondary Tenses .... • 
 
 § 9. Relative and absolute Time • ' 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 A In the Indicative. 
 
 § 10, 1. Present Indicative ^ 
 
 2. Historic Present ^ 
 
 § 11. Imperfect * 
 
 B. Present in the Dependent Moods, 
 
 Rem. — Distinction between Present and Aorist . • 8 
 
 § 12. Present Subjunctive .....•• 9 
 
 § 13, 1. Present Optative, not in indirect discourse • . 10 
 2. Present Optative in indirect discourse: — 
 
 (a.) Representing a Present Indicative . . . 11 
 
 (6.) Representing Pres. Subj. (in questions of doubt) 11 
 
 § 14. Present Imperative ^2 
 
 §15. Present Infinitive : — 
 
 1. In its ordinary use (indefinite in time) • • .12 
 
 2. In indirect discourse ^^ 
 
 8. As Imperfect Infinitive I^ 
 
 § 16. Present Participle: — 
 
 1. As Present 1^ 
 
 2. As Imperfect . .. • • • • • -l^ 
 
Yiii CONTENTS. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 §17,1 Perfect Indicative !• 
 
 2. Pluperfect Indicative 18 
 
 N. 2. Compound forms (etfil and rfv with Perf. Part) 18 
 
 B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods. 
 
 §18. RelationsofthePerfectto the Present . . . .19 
 
 1. Perfect Subjunctive and Optative .... 20 
 
 2. Perfect Imperative 21 
 
 8. Perfect Infinitive 22, 23 
 
 4. Perfect Participle 23 
 
 Aorlst. 
 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 19. Aorist Indicative . 24 
 
 N. 2. Distinction between Aorist and Imperfect . • 24 
 
 B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods, 
 
 § 20. Aorist Subjunctive 26 
 
 N. 1. Aonst Subjunctive as Future Perfect . . 26, 27 
 
 § 21, 1. Aorist Optative not in indirect discourse . • 28 
 2. Aorist Optative in indirect discourse : — 
 
 (a.) Representing an Aorist Indicative . . . 29 
 
 (b.) Representing an interrogative Aor. Subj. . . 29 
 
 § 22. Aorist Imperative 80 
 
 § 23. Aorist Infinitive : — 
 
 1. In its ordinary use ..,..•• 80 
 
 2. In indirect discourse 82 
 
 N. 2. After verbs of hoping, promising^ &c. . . 82 
 
 § 24. Aorist Participle .84 
 
 N. 1. With \av6dvo>j (}>6dpa), &c 84 
 
 N. 2. With nepieldov, kntlboVf &c. . • • • . .85 
 
 Future. 
 
 § 25, 1. Future Indicative . . . . • • • 86 
 
 N. 5. Future with force of Imperative . • • .87 
 
 N. 6. Future denoting present intention • • • 87 
 
 2. Periphrastic Future (with fjJXka) • • • .88 
 
 § 26. Future Optative 88 
 
 N. 1. After ottos and /i^ ...••• 89 
 
 §27. Future Infinitive , ^^ 
 
 N. 1. Distinction between Future and Present or Aorist 41 
 N. 2. Future used for Present or Aorist . . . 41, 42 
 N. 3. Future after verbs of hoping, promising, &c. . . 43 
 
 § 28. Future Participle 48 
 
 § 29. Future Perfect 43 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 IZ 
 
 N. 3. Expressed by Perfect Participle and ecro/iat . 44 
 N. 6. In the dependent moods ** 
 
 Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. 
 
 1 80, 1. Gnomic Aoris" and Perfect. . • .*. * 
 N. 5. Gnomic Aorist in Infinitive and ParUciple 
 N. 6. Gnomic Perfect in Infinitive ^ . 
 2. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with av , 
 Notes. — Iterative Aorist in -<ricov, -iTKonTjv . 
 
 Dependence of Moods and Tenses. 
 
 5 31, 1-2. General Rules . . * * 'm ' 
 
 Distinction between Primary and Secondary Tenses:— ^^ 
 
 § 32. In the Indicative . . • , • • • * ' -^ 
 
 § 33. In the Subjunctive and Imperative . . • \q_1^ 
 
 6 34. In the Optative . k9 t\A 
 
 §35. In the Infinitive and Participle «>^» ^* 
 
 CHAPTER in. 
 
 . 15 
 
 46,47 
 
 . 47 
 
 47 
 
 47,48 
 
 48 
 
 THE PARTICLE ''AN. 
 
 8 36, 1 - 2. Two uses of Sp. . . *,-,:-•. t j- *• \ 
 I 37 1. *Av not used with the Present and Perfect Indicative 
 
 2. "Av with Future Indicative in early Poets 
 N. 1. In Attic Greek (rare) ^ , • ^: . • 
 
 3. "Av with Secondary Tenses of the Indicative . 
 8 38, 1. "Av with the Subjunctive in Protasis, &c. . . 
 
 2. "Av with the Subjunctive in Apodosis (liipic) . 
 §39. "Av with the Optative ...••• 
 § 40. "Av not used with the Imperative^ ... 
 § 41. "Av with the Infinitive and Participle 
 
 1. Present 
 
 2. Perfect 
 
 3. Aorist 
 
 4. Future . • .•. • • 
 §42,1-4. Position and repetition of air 
 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 . 56 
 
 56 
 . 56 
 
 57 
 . 57 
 
 57 
 57-61 
 
 58 
 . 59 
 
 59 
 
 . 60 
 
 61-64 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS. 
 
 SECTION L 
 
 Final and Object Clauses after "Iva, 'Qf, "Oirwr, 
 
 "0<j)pa, AND M^. 
 
 §48. Classification 
 
 N. 2. Negative Particle . . • • 
 
 .65-67 
 . 67 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 A. Pure Final Clauses. 
 I 44, 1. Subjonctive and Optative after tva, q)S, ojrws, /a^, &c. 67 
 N. 1. Future Indicative after ottws, &c. . * ^' ^^ 
 N. 2 and 3. *Av in Final Clauses . • • •***"'^ 
 
 2. Subjunctive after secondary tenses - ^ ' ' ' jX 
 
 3. Secondary tenses of the IndicaUve after iva,&c. . // 
 
 B. aauses with'Oncos and''OiT<o^ m after Verbs of Striving, &c. 
 
 §45. Future Indicative, &c. after OTTO)? . - • • • ^3 
 N. 2. Homeric construction after (ppaCo^aiy &c. . ^^ ' ' 
 N. 7. EUiptical expressions • • ; ' 11' H 
 N. 8 (and foot-note). Dawes's Canon on oTror, &c. ?», ou 
 
 C. C/awscs with M^ q/?er Fer&s of Fearing, &c. 
 
 § 46. Subjunctive and Optative after ^4 • • • * J^ 
 
 N. 1. Future Indicative after ^rj °^ 
 
 N. 2. Elliptical expressions • ^ • ,.• ^- ,•««!? 
 N. 5. Present and past tenses of the Indic. after fAij »3-»i> 
 
 §47, 
 
 ^48. 
 I. 
 
 §49, 
 
 SECTION n. 
 Conditional Sentences. 
 
 1. Protasis and Apodosis explained^ • 
 
 2. "Av or *c€ in Protasis and Apodosis 
 3 (and Note). Negative particles . 
 
 Classification of Conditional Sentences . 
 
 87 
 
 . 87 
 
 88 
 
 88-92 
 
 Pour Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences. 
 A. Present and Past Conditions, 
 
 1. Simple Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis . . 92 
 N. 3. Future Indicative expressing ;>resennntention US 
 
 2. Secondary tenses of the Indic. (cond. not fulfilled) . »3 
 N. 2. Omission of 5i/ in Apodosis . ^ . • ' .11 
 N. 3. Verbs ofnecessUy, &c. without av, in Apod. »^-i"" 
 N. 6. Homeric Optative for Indicative . . • 101, 102 
 
 B. Future Conditions, 
 
 §50, 
 
 1. Subjunctive with edv in Protasis . 
 N. 1. Future Indicative in Protasis . 
 
 102 
 103 
 104 
 105 
 105 
 106 
 107 
 
 §51. 
 
 N. 2. Homeric peculiarities . , x 
 
 N. 3. El for €dv with Subjunctive in Attic (rare) 
 2. Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis 
 N. 1. Omission of av in Apodosis . 
 N. 2. "Av with Optative in Protasis . . « 
 
 II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 
 
 Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis . . • 107, 108 
 Is. 3. Indicative after ci rts 1^ ^ 
 
 CONTENTS. ^ 
 
 EUipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 
 § 52, 1. Protasis implied in another clause, or expressed in a 
 
 Participle or other word . ^. ,. •,;:!" 
 
 N. 1 and 2. Ellipsis of Verb of the Protasis . ^^^'^\l 
 
 2. Protasis suppressed .. . '^Z, * 'J,, 
 
 N. Optative with au like Imperat. or Fut. Ind. . 1 1 ^ 
 
 S 53. Apodosis expressed in Infinitive or Participle . . 113 
 
 Notes.— Ellipsis of the Apodosis . . . 114- lib 
 
 Mixed Constructions. — Irregularities. 
 
 8 54,1-3. Protasis and Apodosis differing in form . ^^^"JJ^ 
 
 I 55 1. Two or more Protases with the same Apodosis . . ii» 
 
 ' 2. Apodosis in a dependent construction . • • • J^^ 
 
 §56. Et after verbs expressing M?onc?er, indi^Z'ia'ton, &c. . .1^^ 
 
 § 57. Ac in Apodosis 
 
 SECTION in. 
 Relative and TEMroRAL Sentences. 
 
 § 58, 1. Relative and Temporal Words . . . *' ]ll 
 
 2. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent . . • l^i» i^^ 
 
 3. Negative particles 
 
 A. Relative with a Definite Antecedent, 
 § 59. Indicative after Relative with Definite Antecedent . 122 
 
 N. 1. Other constructions 
 
 B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent, 
 S60, 1, 2. Conditional Relative Q^^XdXnQ^ . • • ^23-125 
 3. "hv in Conditional Relative clauses . . . . i^i> 
 §61. Four forms of Conditional Relative clauses correspond- 
 
 incr to the four forms of ordinary protasis . ^^^-^^1 
 
 1. Simple Indicative Gike § 49, 1) • • • • ' \f^ 
 
 2. Secondary tenses of the Indicative (like § 49, 2) . 126 
 
 3. Subjunctive (like § 50, 1) " 
 
 4. Optative (like § 50, 2) . . • • .;. • "^-^ 
 6 62. Conditional Relativeclauseswithj^eneraZ suppositions:- 
 
 ^ Subjunctive and Optative (like § 51) ^ . • • J^^ 
 
 N. 1. Indicative in these sentences (after o(n-tO . i^i 
 N. 3. Subjunctive in Homeric similes ;. • * ' \\i 
 S 63, 1. Relative without &v, with the Subjunctive . • 13^ 
 ^ 2, 3, 4. Peculiarities in Cond. Relative clauses ^ . 133-135 
 6. Parenthetical Relative clauses (o n, itot eanp) 
 AssimUation in Conditional Relative Clauses. 
 8 W, 1. Assimilation after Subjunctive or Optative. . 135 
 ^ 2. Assimilation after secondary tenses of Indicative . 136 
 
 Relative Clauses expressing a Purpose or Result. 
 § 65, 1. Future Indicative after Relatives . • • • ^^ 
 
zu 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 N. 2. Subjunctive and Optative in Homer 
 N. 5. Relative clauses expressing a result 
 
 2. Future Indicative after e^' J, €(f> wrc 
 
 3. Indicative after atrrt .... 
 
 4. Causal Relative Sentences . • . 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 XUl 
 
 138 
 140 
 140 
 140 
 141 
 
 Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before 
 
 that. 
 
 A. *E<»ff,*E<rrf,*Axpt, Mexpi, Etoroicf , *O0pa, Until. 
 § 66, 1. *Ea)ff, &c. with past tenses of Indicative . . . 142 
 
 2. *Ea)s ai/, &c. with Subj. "Ecor, &c. with Optative 142, 143 
 
 3. *E6>r, &c. with secondary tenses of Indicative . .143 
 
 4. "East &c. with Subj. and Opt. after general statements 144 
 
 B. IlptV, Uhtilf Be/ore that. 
 
 5 67. Finite Moods and Infinitive after npiv .... 144 
 
 1. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after npiv . 145 
 
 2. Infinitive after irplv (see § 106) 145 
 
 N. 3. np\v rjj irporepov rj^ wpoaOfv Ij • • • • 146 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 Indirect Discourse. 
 
 § 68, 1. Direct and Indirect Quotations distinguished • .147 
 
 2. Manner of introducing Indirect Quotations • • 147 
 
 3. Indirect Questions 147 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 General Principles. 
 
 § 69, 1. Principles of Indirect Quotations after ort and »;, 
 
 and of Indirect Questions 148 
 
 Secondary tenses of the Indicative . . • ,148 
 Infinitive and Participle 148 
 
 4. "Xv in Indirect Discourse 149 
 
 5. Negative particles in Indirect Discourse • • . 149 
 
 Indirect Quotation of Simple Sentences. 
 
 § 70. Indicative and Optative after on or ©s, and in Indirect 
 Questions : — 
 
 1. Indicative after primary tenses 149 
 
 2. Optative or Indicative after secondary tenses . . 150 
 Rem. 1 and 2. Both Moods in the same quotation . 151, 152 
 N. 1. (a.) Imperfect and Pluperfect retained . . 152 
 
 (6.) Present Optative as Imperfect . • .153 
 
 N. 3. Independent Optative (often with ya^) . . 154 
 
 § 71. Interrogative Subjunctive in Indirect Questions . 154, 155 
 
 § 72. Indicative or Optative with av in Indirect Discourse . 156 
 
 § 73, 1. Infinitive, with or without ai/, in Indirect Discourse . 157 
 
 2. Participle, with or without av, in Indirect Discourse 1 59 
 
 Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences, 
 a 74, 1. Quotation of dependent clauses with a Subjunctive, or 
 ^ ' a Present, Perfect, or Future Indicative . • 1^0 
 
 N. 1. Mixed constructions . . • • • 
 2. Quotation of dependent clauses with Imperfect, Flu- 
 
 perfect, or Aorist Indicative . I^ ,.' • * yaK 
 s 75. Dependent clauses with secondary tenses of IndicaUve 165 
 
 I 76. Dependent clauses with Optative 
 
 Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation. 
 8 77 1 (a^ Clauses depending on an Infinitive after verbs of 
 ^"''- ^\o)^^Zding\c,A^^) Causal sentences stating a 
 cause assigned by others. - (c) Clauses after ct or 
 ^m cL .Aa.'-(^.). Relative and temp^a 
 elates expressing a past intention. -- (OJ^lative 
 sentences containing the thought of another . . 166 
 2. Same principle appUed to clauses after iva, oir«s, &c. lb» 
 
 •Ottcos and "o in Indirect Quotations. 
 
 8 78, 1. "0770,9 for oVt or ^,9. 2. Homeric 5 for 5rt 
 
 Note. — '06ovv€Ka and oweKa tor on ... 
 
 170 
 171 
 
 171 
 
 171 
 171 
 
 § 79. *Ot4 before Direct Quotations. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 Causal Sentences. 
 
 8 80. Causal particles 
 
 8 811 Indicative in Causal sentences 
 
 ^ ' 2. Optative after secondary tenses, to express a cause ^^^ 
 
 assigned hy Others . •.',.• * * * 17S 
 N. 1. Cause expressed by an Apodosis . . . *••» 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 Expression of a Wish. 
 
 Rem. — Two classes of Wishes 
 § 82. Optative in Wishes . 
 
 . 178 
 173, 174 
 
 . 176 
 176, 177 
 
 . 177 
 
 I 83, 1. Secondary tenses of Indicative m Wishes . 
 2. "SKiiikov with the Infinitive ••.••, 
 Rem. — Greek and Latin expressions compared 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhor- 
 tations, AND Prohibitions. 
 
 178 
 8 84. Imperative . • .* . * , \ . • ' * * * 1 79 
 
 § 85. Fii^t person of Subjunctive m exhortations . . ^ • J 'J 
 I 86. Pres. Imperat. or Aor. Subj. m prohibitions with ,x, . 1»0 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 SECTION vni. 
 
 Subjunctive (like Fut. Ind.) in Indepeneent Sentences. 
 — Interrogative Subjunctive. — Ow filj with Subjunc- 
 tive AND Future Indicative. 
 
 § 87. Independent Subjunctive in Homer • • • 
 Note. — With ai/, in apodosis .... 
 
 § 88. Interrogative Subjunctive (with or without ^ovXet) 
 
 §89. Double Negative, ou /iij : — 
 
 1. With Subj. (rarely Fut. Ind.), as emphatic Future 
 **'. With Future Indicative in prohibitions . • 
 
 181 
 182 
 182 
 
 184 
 185 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 197 
 197 
 198 
 200 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 90. Infinitive as a Verbal Noun 188 
 
 § 91. Infinitive as Subject 188 
 
 § 92. Infinitive as Object : — 
 
 1. Not in indirect discourse 189 
 
 2. In indirect discourse 192 
 
 N. 3. Infinitive after Relatives (by assimilation) . 193 
 
 § 93, 1 and 2. Infin. after Adjectives and Adverbs . .193-195 
 
 § 94. Infinitive (with Article) after Prepositions . 
 
 § 95, 1. Infinitive as Genitive or Dative .... 
 
 2. Two constructions after verbs of hindrance^ &c. 
 N. 1. Negative particles. Double Negative, fin ov 
 
 3. Infinitive with to y^rj^ after expressions implying jore 
 
 ventioriy omission, or denial 201 
 
 § 96. Infinitive and its adjuncts preceded by to . • . 202 
 
 § 97. Infinitive expressing a purpose 203 
 
 N. 4. Infin. after Comparative and 7, than . . 204 
 
 § 98, 1. Infinitive after aare (result) 205 
 
 2. Infin. after wore (condition or purpose) • , , 205 
 N. 1. 'Qs for woTf, with Infinitive .... 206 
 
 § 99. Infinitive after (cf J or e(^' Jre 207 
 
 § 100. Absolute Infinitive (generally with its or oaov) • .207 
 N. 1. *0\iyov (dflv), almost, little short of , , , 208 
 N. 2. 'Exwi/ fii/at, TO vvv tXvai, &c. • • • . 208 
 
 § 101. Infinitive used imperatively 208 
 
 § 102. Infinitive in wishes (like the Optative) . . . 209 
 
 §103. \ii^mi\ye,Y[ilavos^ treaties, proclamations, h^, . , 209 
 § 104. Infinitive expressing surprise or indignation . • . 209 
 
 § 105. Infinitive in narration 210 
 
 §106. Infinitive after TrpiV 210,211 
 
 Notes, — nplv 7, npoTepov ^, 7rp6(T0tv fj, ndpos . 211, 212 
 Rem. — Tenses of the Infinitive 212 
 
 contents. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 §107. Three uses of the Participle 213 
 
 § 108, 1. Participle as Adjective ...... 213 
 
 2. Participle (as Adjective) used substantively . .213 
 § 109. Partic. defining the circumstances of an action : — 
 1 — 4. IHme, means, manner, cause, &c. . . • 
 5-7. Purpose, condition, opposition, &c. . 
 
 8. Attendant circumstances 
 
 Notes 1-5. Adverbs, &c. with Part, of § 109 
 N. 7. (a.) Partic. in Rel. or Interrog. sentences 
 (6.) Ti fiaOav ; Ti ira6a)v ; wherefore f . 
 
 § 110, 1. Genitive Absolute 222 
 
 2. Accusative Absolute . . ... . 224 
 
 § 111. Gen. or Accus. Absol. and ordinary Partic. combined 225 
 § 112. Participle with verbs (like Infinitive) : — 
 
 1. With verbs signifying to begin, to cease, &c. • . 226 
 
 2. With biaT€\€(o,\av6dv(o, Tvyxava, <fi6dva, SiC. * . 227 
 § 113. Partic. in indirect discourse (after verbs signifying to see, 
 
 to perceive, to know, &c.) ...... 229 
 
 N. 1. Participle with S^Xo't ((fiavtpoi) et^t . • . 230 
 N. 6. Participle with avvoiha and avyyiyvaxrKto • • 230 
 N. 10. *Qs with these Participles . . . 231, 232 
 
 . 216 
 . 217 
 
 . 218 
 218-221 
 
 . 221 
 221, 222 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -reog, 
 
 § 114. Two constructions of the Verbal in -reosi — 
 
 1. Personal construction 233 
 
 2. Impersonal construction .... 233, 234 
 
 Appendix L 235 
 
 Appendix II 240 
 
 Index to Examples 243 
 
 English Index 257 
 
 Gbeez Index. .. ^ •••••• 261 
 
II 
 
 It 
 
 A 
 
 / 
 
 • 
 
 iR 
 
 
 
 '^"■' 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. 
 
 § 1 . The Greek verb has five Moods, the Indicative, 
 Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive. The 
 first four, as opposed to the Infinitive, are called finite 
 moods. 
 
 § 2. The Indicative is used in simple, absolute as- 
 sertions; as 7pa(jbe^ he writes; lypafev, he wrote; jpafecy 
 he will write ; yey pa(f>€v, he has written. 
 
 The Indicative is used also to express various other 
 relations, which the foUowing examples will iUus- 
 trate : — 
 
 El ToZro i\r)6i, eVr c, xat'po,, if this is true, I rejoice. El typaf^v, 
 iXeov ^u, if he had written, I should have come, Et tovto jr oiT,<r 6 1, 
 Ka\5>, thi/if he shall do thvi, it will he well. *Errt/i6X«rat oircos rovro 
 ^ev^crcrai, he takes care that this shall happen. Ei^6 f'\{^yj''!'l] 
 I Tor. roiroi.oirj<Ta, that thou hadst ^^l^d^methatlrnight 
 nei!^ have done this ! EWe roOro dXrjO^: ?.', that this were true. 
 Aeyet «J roOro iXrje^s iarLV,he says that this is true. ^ Etrrc. ort rovro 
 7rpa|f t, he said that he would do this. Epcora ri typaylr a ii€v, ne 
 asks what we wrote. 
 
 These constructions will be explained in Chapter IV. They are 
 sufficient to show the impossibility of includmg f f « ^^^^.^f*^^ 
 Indicative in one definitfon. Any definition which ;« *« m^^^^^^ 
 these must be comprehensive enough to include even the Imperfect 
 and Pluperfect Subjunctive in Latin ; for €i <ypa>^fi/, riKeov avjA 
 equivalent to si scripsisset, venissem. It would be equally impossibk 
 to give a single definition sufficiently precise to be of any use in 
 pr^tice, including all the uses of the Subjunctive or Optative. 
 
 §3. The various uses of the Subjunctive -— in 
 clauses denoting a purpose or object, after iW, m^ &c. ; 
 in conditional, relative, and temporal sentences ; and 
 
\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. [§ 3. 
 
 in certain independent sentences — may be seen by the 
 following examples : — 
 
 ^Epxfrai jva tovto idrjyhe is coming that he may see this, ^o^drai 
 firi TOVTO y€vr}Tai, he fears lest this may happen. *Eav tovto noieh' 
 ^ovXriTaiy^ livvria-€Tai, if he shall wish to do this^ he will be able. 
 O Ti.av notflv jTovXrjTai 8vv^(r€Tai, whatever he shall wish to do he will 
 be able (to do). 'Edv rt iroulv ^ovXtjtqij toBto Trotet, if he (ever) 
 tcishes to do anything, he (always) does it. "O rt &v noidu /3 o v X 17 r a i 
 TTotfi, whatever he wishes (at any time) to do he (always) does. "Otqu 
 tovto nouiv ^ovXrjTai, SvpTja^Tai^ when he shall wish to do thisy he 
 will be able. "Orav -rroteiv n ^ovXrjTai, Troiet, whenever he wishes to 
 do anything, he (always) does it. "lay fie v, let us go. Mrj 0avfiaar)Tf, 
 do not wonder. Ov firj tovto yti/jy rat, this will (surely) not happen, 
 Tt 6 1 TT ca ; what shall I say ? 
 
 § 4. The various uses of the Optative — in clauses 
 denoting a purpose or object after tva, fi^, &c. ; in con- 
 ditional, relative, and temporal sentences; in indirect 
 quotations and questions ; and in independent sentences 
 
 (in apodosis with av, or in expressions of a wish) 
 
 may be seen by the following examples ; — 
 
 *U\0€v tva TOVTO 1801, he came that he might see this. *E0o/3ftTo un 
 tovto ycvotro, he feared lest this might happen. Ei tovto noielv 
 ^ovAotTo, dvpaiT av, if he should wish to do this, he would be able. 
 O Ti noifiv ^ovXoiTo dvvaiT av, whatever he should wish to do he 
 would be able (to do). Et rt noielv ^oiXocTo, tovt' eVom, if he 
 (ever) wished to do anything, he (always) did it. "o rt nomu 
 (iovXoiTo cTToUi, whatever he wished (at anytime) to do he (always) 
 did. Ore tovto noielu ^ovXoito, dvvaiT &v, ivhenever he should 
 wish to do this, he would be able. "Orf noielu n /3ouXotro, cVot'ft, 
 whenever he wished to do any thin g,he (always) did it. Elnev ort roOro 
 n o I oip he said that he was doing this. EtVr 1/ ort roCro tt o t .^ <7 € t e i.. 
 he said that he had done this. EiVfv Sti toIto noi^aoi, he said that 
 hewoulddothis.'Hp^r<ou tI noLoirj (Troi^aet.p ov 7roir,<roi\they 
 asked what he was doing (had done, or woidd do). 
 
 AiuaiT ^v toOto noulv, he would be able to do this. ElBt uA raCra 
 Tracrxoifv, that they may not suffer these things! *AjroAotro, 
 may he perish I Mfj tovto yeVoiro, may this not happen I 
 
 Note. For a discussion of the relation of the Optative to the 
 Subjunctive, see Appendix. 
 
 § 5. The Imperative is used to express a command, 
 exhortation, entreaty, or prohibition. 
 
 § 6. The Infinitive expresses the simple idea of the 
 
 § 9.] USE OF THE TENSES. 3 
 
 verb without restriction of person or number, and may 
 be considered as a verbal noun with many attributes of 
 a verb. 
 
 § 7. To the Moods may be added the Participle, 
 and the Verbal in ^t€o^ or -reoi/. Both are verbal ad 
 jectives. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 § 8. 1. There are seven Tenses, — the Present, Im- 
 perfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Aorist, Future, and Future 
 Perfect. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occur only in 
 the Indicative ; the Futures are wanting in the Sub- 
 junctive and Imperative. 
 
 2. These tenses are divided into jprimary and second- 
 ary ; the primary tenses being those which refer to pres- 
 ent or future time, and the secondary bemg those which 
 refer to past time. 
 
 The primary tenses of the Indicative are the Present, 
 Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect. The secondary 
 tenses are the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 
 
 Note. This distinction will be more fully explained at the end 
 ofthis chapter, §§31-35. 
 
 § 9. In speaking of the time denoted by any verb, we must 
 distmguish between time which is present, past, or future with 
 reference to the time of the speaker or writer (that is, time 
 absolutely present, &c.), and time which is present, past, or 
 future with reference to the time of some other verb with which 
 the verb in question is connected (that is, time relatively pres- 
 ent, &c.). Thus, when we say tovto aKr}6k eortv, this is true, 
 fWtV denotes time present with reference to the time of speak- 
 
5 10, 1.] 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 5 
 
 i 
 
 \ 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§9. 
 
 ing : but when we say eXe^e toZto aXrjBei civai, or tXe^ep on TOVTO 
 aXr}0€s ioTiv (or ft?;), he Said that this was true (i. e. he said 
 " this is trite "), we use the Present tense ; but this tense here 
 denotes time present with reference to the time of the leading 
 verb, t\f^€, or time absolutely past and only relatively/ present. 
 The same distinction is seen between the Future in tovto 
 y€vr]crerai, this will happen^ and in t\(^€ tovto yevfja-eaOai or ort 
 yevrjaerat (ycvqaoiTo), he said that this would happen ; where the 
 Future in the first case denotes time absolutely future, in the 
 other cases time only relatively future, which may even be 
 absolutely past. Again, in tovto iyivcTo, this happened, the 
 Aorist is absolutely past ; but in eXe^f tovto y^viaOaiy or t\(^€v 
 oTt tovto iyfVfTo (or y/votro), he said that this had happened, it 
 denotes time past with reference to the time of fXf^tv, which 
 makes it doubly past. 
 
 It is to be noticed as a special distinction between the Greek 
 and English idioms, that the Greek oftener uses its tenses to 
 denote merely relative time. Thus, in the examples given 
 above, we translate the Greek Presents elvai and cor/ after 
 ?\f|c by our Imperfect was ; the Futures y^vrja-fo-dai and yepfj- 
 arrai by woidd happen ; and the Aorists yivioBai and iyiv^To by 
 had happened. This principle is especially observed in the 
 Indicative, Optative, and Infinitive in indirect quotations ; in 
 final and object clauses after Xva, ortins, &c. ; and usually in the 
 Participle. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 A. In the Indicative, 
 
 § 10. 1. The Present Indicative represents an action 
 as going on now ; as ypdcjxo^ Ivjrite^ or lam writing. 
 
 Remark. A single important exception occurs when the Present 
 Indicative in indirect discourse denotes time present relatively ta 
 the leading verb. See above, § 9 ; and § 70, 2. 
 
 Note 1. As the limits of such an action on either side of 
 the present moment are not defined, the Present may express 
 a customary or repeated action, or a general truth, E. g. 
 
 r 
 
 nXoiov ^i, A5Xov '\Br)vaioi ni finova lv , the A themans send a ship 
 toDelos (every year). Plat. Phaed. 58 A. Tt <r e t roi Kopos v^piu, 
 oVav <a.c5 5X/3o. eur,Ta., satiety begets insolence, whenever prosperity 
 follows the wicked. Theogn. 1 53. 'Ei/ XP"''^ a tt o <i> ^ t »/ e i to rap^os 
 du6p<onoi(Tiu. Aesch. Agam. 857. 
 
 Note 2. The Present denotes merely the continuance of 
 an action, without reference to its completion : sometimes, how- 
 ever, it is directly implied by the context that the action is not 
 to be completed, so that the Present denotes an attempted ac- 
 tion. Especially, a/Sco/it, in the sense I offer, and 7r6t(9a>, I try 
 to persuade, are used in this sense. E. g. 
 
 mu 5* 5aa T aiTLKa TroXXa StSoi, ^6 offers many things. H. IX, 
 519. UeidovaL Ip^s ivavria Ka\ toIs vSfWts Km to, St^m^ >M>;^«- 
 aOai, they are trying to persuade you to vote contrary both to the laws 
 and to justice. Isae. de Cleon. Hered. § 26. 
 
 This signification is much more common in the Imperfect. See 
 § 11, N. 2, and the examples. 
 
 Note 3. The Present is often used with expressions deno^ 
 ing past time, especially TrdXm, in the sense of a Perfect and 
 Present combined. E. g. 
 
 Kelvop Jvvev'o, TTciXat, / have been tracking him a long time (and 
 still continue it). Soph. Aj. 20. O^ ,rdXat crot X . y a, ort ravrou^^^^^^ 
 elvm ' I e. have I not long ago told you, (and do InotjiiU repeat,) 
 ihati call itjhe same thing? Plat. Gorg. 489 C. So HoXv. xpo^ou 
 
 ToDtO TT O I 0). 
 
 So in Latin, Jam dudum loquor. 
 
 Note 4. The Presents if*©, / am come, and oXxofiai, I am 
 gone, are used in the sense of the Perfect An approach to 
 the signification of the Perfect is sometimes found in such 
 Presents as ^fvyo,, in the sense / am banished, ^laKOfiai, I am 
 captured, pt^au) and KpaT^co, lam victorious, fjTTdopai, I am con- 
 quered, aatKeo), / have been unjust (/ am 5 8 1 k o s). So ikco and 
 Udu'^ in Homer, with SXXv^at and similar verbs and sometimes 
 tUt(o in the Tragedians. E. g. 
 
 eept<rroK\?i, ^^ico, napd crc, /, Themistocles. am come to <^^«- Thuc. 
 I, 137. orxerat «'. SXa dlav, he is gone to the divine sea Jl.^^^ 
 223. 'XKlovd\iaKOiUvov, Ilium hamng been captured. Thuc. VI, j. 
 So Hdt. I, 85. Et Travra ravra eXv/xaiVero tois oXotff , €0)5 averpf^fre, 
 
 Iph. 
 , thii 
 
 uxman is thy mother. EuR. Ion. 1560. 
 
V \ 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 10, 1 
 
 §11-] 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 r 
 
 Note 5. The Greek, like other languages, often allows the 
 use of the Present of such verbs as I hear, I learn, I say, even 
 when their action is strictly finished before the moment at 
 which they are used. E. g. 
 
 Of 2iKiKiQjTai aTa<rui(ov(riv, 0)9 irvvBavo fx€0a., the Sicilians are at 
 discord, as we learn. Thuc. VI, 16. 'Ett* jroXets, eby iycb aKojj 
 aiaOdvofxai, fxeWofnv Uvai fieyaXaS' Thuc. VI, 20. 
 
 Note 6. The Present c'/xt, / am going, through all its 
 moods, is used like a Future. Its compounds are sometimes 
 used in the same sense. (The Poets, especially Homer, some- 
 times use elfu as a Present.) E. g. 
 
 Sev varepos € ifx vno yaiav, I shall go. H. XVIII, 333. E i/i i ttoXcv 
 eV cKflva, I shall recur to that. Plat. Phaed. 100 B. *AXX* e lo-et/Ai, 
 aov d* ov (f)povTiS}. Arist. Nub. 125. *Q (l>l\\ €y(o fi€v air € i fn, avas 
 Koi K€lpa cl>v\d^<ov. Od. XVII, 593. 
 
 (As Present.) Olos 5* dcrrrip eto-i fi€T darpdcrt vvktos d/jLoXya, 
 as a star moves, &c. H. XXn, 317. 
 
 Note 7. In animated language the Present often refers to 
 the future, to express likelihood, intention, or danger. E. g. 
 
 Mevopicv eiwff &v €Kaaroi koto. TroXfty \T](f)6S)fi€v ; shall we waitf 
 Thuc. VI. 77. E* 6c (prja-iv ovros, Sfi^aro), Kayio Kara^aiva>, and 
 J will take any seat. Dem. F. L. 351, 4. 2v d 6 ipxop^vosy ^ htpov 
 7rpoa8oKS>fX€v; art thou he that should come, or do we look for 
 another? Matth. Evang. XI, 3. 'ATrdXXvuat, I shaU perish, 
 (See § 17, N. 6.) r » i' 
 
 2. The Present is often used in narration for the 
 Aorist, to give a more lively statement of a past event. 
 This is called the Historic Present. E. g. 
 
 BovXrjv €7riT€xvdTai oiras p,fi d\i<T0€i€v*AdT)va7oi, he contrives a 
 plan to prevent the Athenians from collecting. Hdt. I, 63. KeX«vf i 
 irepyj/ai avdpas • . . . . drroa-rfWova-iv ovv, koX frepl avrayu 6 
 er}fxi(rroK\?is Kpv(t)a irt flirt i. Thuc. I, 91. Aapetov Koi Uapvadridos 
 iraidesyiyvovrat, fivo. Xen. An. I, 1, 1. 
 
 Note. The Historic Present is not found in Homer. 
 
 §11. The Imperfect represents an action as going 
 on in past time ; as eypa<f)ov, Iivas tvriting. 
 
 Note 1. The Imperfect is thus a Present transferred to 
 the past, and it retains all the peculiarities of the Present 
 
 ^ * 
 
 which are not inconsistent with the change to past time. Thus 
 Ae Imperfect denotes cu^omary or repeated action as opposed 
 to the Aorist, which denotes the nmpU occurrence of an act.on. 
 (See § 19, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 „„ro. •£«.«;) 8c e,«v. '^--^Yn/re'the ]2nperfect« refer to 
 t^^rof reToun^rror the'eisU, the Aorlsts I single actions; 
 iiSaZ^^, became king, !«..;!««, coUecl^d xnto one >tale.) 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect, like the Present (§ 10, N. 2), 
 sometimes denotes aUempted action, being in this case stnctly 
 an Imperfect tense. So especially iSiH^v and .«.flo... t.. g. 
 
 *;X.,nror •AXd.xiTo. iSiSov, PhUip offered ^donr^vs QMJh^d 
 M !^5^i^r Aesch Cor. 5 83. '^Ka<rT0t U€iB€v avrov xmoarriviu. 
 
 till:: Xy'taldTii gold, ift.l 69 '^^^^'Sl 
 
 f:ppen.%n/o:Vi:u. "t :Pw.«, sU .anted to add. Akxst. 
 Nub. 63. 
 
 Note 3. When the Present has the force of the Perfect 
 (§ 10, 1, N. 4), the Imperfect has regularly the force ot a Plu- 
 perfect' (See § 17, N. 3). E.g. 
 
 « -X <ii' * ..^■.. thfi rrnwd were come to look on, Thxtc. 
 
 ^0|xXo^.^a;a..a^.^..^^^ '^0. .ast gone l.y skip to 
 
 Pylos. bd. XVI,' 24. 
 
 Note 4. The Imperfect sometimes denotes likelihood, in- 
 tenlion, or danger m past time. (See § 10, 1, N. 7.) E. g. 
 
 ^i^t^hh rS irevbtada. dnd>\\vro, when he was onthepomtjf[ 
 
 die, and J was about U> perish. Eur. Here. 1 . 538. 
 
 Note 5. The Imperfect is sometimes found in ?!■"# "7**'°"' 
 where the Aorist would be expected, especiaUy in Homer. Ihe 
 mSn' of the verb often mak^ it indifferent which of the two « 
 ^i Vus 0a:«,. and iSij are used without a„y percepUble differ^ 
 cnce in II. I, 437, 439 ; so ^iU^ and Mjro. 11, 43 45 %o^ 
 and riSfL, XXIII. 653, 656 ; 65« and StSov, VII, 303, 305 .«*«»"' ^mi 
 XeiJTf, n, 106, 107 ; compare also ^ton-Uoi/ and aimi<rav, 1, 4b&, 4t,6. 
 
 - . >-.^-^.j>- .^^ 
 
8 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§11. 
 
 Herodotus and Thucydides use Tkeyov and eVeXcvov as Aorists. 
 Compare eX^yov, Tiiuc I, 72, with €i7rov and iXe^e, I, 71). 
 
 Note 6. The Imperfect sometimes expresses a facty which is 
 either the result of a previous discussion, or one that is just recog- 
 nized as a fact by the speaker or writer, having previously been 
 denied, overlooked, or misundei-stood. In the latter case, the 
 particle apa is often joined to the verb. E. g. 
 
 'Q TTOTToi, ov< apa izavra vofjuoufs ovSe dUaioi rja-au ^atTjKap fiyfj- 
 ropes rjSe pihovres, i. e. they are not, as I once imagihed. Od. XIII, 
 209. OvK apa povvou erju epidatv yevos, aXX' cVt yalau ft(rl 6va), there 
 is not after all mereb/ one race of discords, but there are two on earth. 
 Hi:s. Op. 1. "OS' ?ju apa 6 ^v\\a^ii>v /zf, thOi is then the one who 
 seized me. Sopu. PhiL 978. Oii av fxovos ap ^a-6* enoyjr ; are 
 you not then the only epops (as I though/} ? Akist. Av. 280. *Hv ^ 
 povaiKt) dvTLa-Tpocjyos rrjs yvp.vaaTiKrjs-, et pt pLvrjaai, music then (as we 
 proved) corresponds to gymnastics. Plat. Rep. VII, 522 A. At- 
 a(f)6€podp€v €Kf iro, 6 tw pcv dtKaico (SeXriou iyiyvfTo,T<o fie aStKo) 
 flTTcoXXuTo, ?re shall destroy that which (as ice proved) becomes better 
 by justice and is ruined by injustice. Plat. Crit. 47 D. *Ap' ov t6^€ 
 rjv TO bhbpou, €(f) onfp riyes rjpas ; is not thus after all the tret to 
 which you were bringing us f Plat. Phaedr. 230 A. 
 
 Note 7. The Greek sometimes uses an idiom like the English 
 he was the one who did it for he is the one icho did it : as rjv 6 tijv 
 •yvto/zr/i/ TavTTjv dncov Ueicravbpos, TlIUC. YIII, 68 ; ris rjv 6 (ior)0^aas 
 Tois BvCavTiois Ka\ auxras avTovs ; Dem. Cor. 255, 2. (See Note 6.) 
 
 B. The Present in the Dependent Moods, 
 
 Eemark. The distinction of time which marks the Present 
 and Aorist in the Indicative is retained in the Optative and 
 Infinitive of indirect discourse, and usually in the Participles. 
 
 But in all other constructions, this distinction of time dis- 
 appears in the dependent moods, and the Present and Aorist 
 differ only in this, that the Present denotes a continued or 
 repeated action, while the Aorist denotes the simple occurrence 
 of an action, the time being determined by the construction. 
 In these cases the Present and Aorist are the tenses chiefly 
 used ; the Perfect is seldom required (§ 18, 1, N.), and the 
 Future is exceptional (§ 27, Notes). It must b^ remembered 
 that the Greek distinction between the Present and Aorist in 
 the Subjunctive and Optative is one which the Latin could not 
 express ; the Present, for example, being the only form found 
 in the Latin Subjunctive to express a condition which the 
 Greek can express by the Present or Aorist Optative, and some- 
 times by the Present or Aorist Subjunctive, each with some 
 
 §12.] 
 
 PRESENT SCBJONCTIVB. 
 
 peculiar meaning. Thus tJ toCto wo.o.',, if he shovld do this 
 (haUtuaMy), «' ,ro.^.re.., (simply) if he should do this, and 
 sometimes ii^ toCto .ro.S (or ,ro.^<r.,), if he {ever) does this, 
 may each be translated by si hoc facial. 
 
 This distinction, although in general strictly observed, was 
 sometimes neglected even by the best authors : we occasionally 
 find, for example, the Present Subjunctive where the Aorist 
 would have expressed the idea more exactly, and vice versa. 
 In other examples the two seem to be used in nearly the same 
 sense. (See Xen. Cyr. V, 5, 13.) These are to be considered 
 merely as exceptions ; when, however, the Aorist is wanting, 
 as in «/ii, the Present regularly takes the place of both. 
 
 § 19. The Present Subjunctive denotes a continued 
 or repeated action, the time of which is determined as 
 
 follows:— f. H „ 
 
 (a ) In clauses denoting a purpose alter tm, otto)?, 
 
 &c., or the object of /ear after i^v, it refers to time /«- 
 ture relatively to that of the leading verb, 
 
 (6.) In conditional sentences, — in ordinary protasis 
 rS 50 1), the Subjunctive refers simply to the future ; 
 if the' supposition is genial (depending on a verb of 
 present time which expresses a repeated action or a 
 general truth), the Subjunctive is indefinite in its time, 
 but is expressed in English by the Present. This afv 
 plies also to all conditional relative and temporal sen- 
 
 (c V In independent sentences (in exhortations, pro- 
 hibitions, questions of doubt, &c.) the Subjunctive 
 refers to the future. E. g. 
 
 tAe am?/. Xen. An. m, 2' 27. Kai jap P ^ , f g^, ^.^^^ ,Z 
 TrpaTToxrt. 
 
 a.) Ao«I ,.0. KaraKav<ra^ rh, a,«i|«, T.a ,.!,rh i'^M^'."^/^ 
 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 2, 3. 
 
 uJishaU stand opposed to »s, we mil try to subdue him. Xek. An. 
 
 J» 
 
'I 
 
 10 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§12. 
 
 § 13, 2.J 
 
 PRESENT OPTATIVE. 
 
 11 
 
 Vll, 3, 11. Kap TToKffjios ,7, etor &v iir aXXoi' ?;^a)/if v arpaTtvtadaij 
 aov T€ Koi Ta>v aav d<f)€^6fi€da^ and if there shall be tear, so long as we 
 shall be able, &c. Id. Hell. IV, 1, 38. 'aXX' jJoi/ yiyvd)(TK(o ^eXrt- 
 ara epw, but I will speak as I shall think best. Tiiuc. VI, 9. Ovs av 
 /3 o 1/ X t; 7roiT}fra<r9ai <f)i\ovs, ayadov ri Xcyf TTfpl avrcov npos rovs dnay 
 ytWovras, whomsoever you shall wish, &c. Isoc. Demon, p. 9 C. § 33. 
 Anas Xoyoff, av aTrfj ra irpdyfiara, pdraiov ti (^aiVerat koi Kfvay, all 
 speech, if (wherever) deeds are wanting, appears vain and useless. Dem. 
 01. II, 21, 20. ^vpfxa^flv TovTOis fOeXovtriv ajravres, ovs av opaxri 
 Trapfo-Kevaa-pivovs, all are willing to be allied to those whom they see 
 prepared. Id. Phil. I, 42, 1. 
 
 (c.) Heidoypfda TrdvTfS' (f>€vy(op€v avv vrjvari (jyiKrjv (s narpida 
 yalav, let us all be persuaded ; let us Jly, &c. II. II, 139. Ti (^<o ; ri 
 bpit; what shall I sayf what shall I do? Ilajy ovv nepi rovmv 
 voicofiev; how then shall we act about this? Plat. Phileb. 63 A. 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 
 § 13. 1. The Present Optative, when it is not in 
 indirect discourse, denotes a continued or repeated ac- 
 tion, the time of which is determined as follows : — 
 
 (a.) In clauses denoting a purpose after li^a, ottw?, 
 &c., or the object oi fear after /a?;, it refers to time fur 
 ture relatively to that of the leading verb. 
 
 (6.) In conditional sentences, — in ordinary protasis 
 (§ 50, 2), the Optative refers to the future (only more 
 vaguely than the Subjunctive) ; if the supposition is 
 general (depending on a verb of past time which ex- 
 presses a repeated action or general truth), the Optative 
 refers to indefinite past time. This applies also to all 
 conditional relative and temporal sentences. 
 
 (<?.) In independent sentences (that is, in expressions 
 of a wish, and in Apodosis with ap^ the Optative refers 
 to the future. E. g. 
 
 (a.) TovTov iircBvpft., Iva e^ ir par rot, he desired this in order that 
 he might be in prosperity. 'Ecpo^elro prj tovto noiolev, he feared lest 
 they should do this (habitually). AtjXos tjv emdvpwv apx^iv, ottws irXdm 
 Xap^dvoi, eiridvpav be Tipdadai, Iva liKfio} Kepdaivoi' (f)i\os r« 
 f^ovkfTo flvai Tois fi€yi<TTa dvvapevois, iva ddiKcov prj dido irj diKtjv. 
 Xen. An. n, 6, 21. (Here the Aorist Optative would have re- 
 ferred to single acts of receiving, getting gain, and suffering punish^ 
 ment, while the present refers to a succession of eases, and to a whole 
 course of conduct.) 
 
 (b.) Ol yap Av iiraivolr) p€, « ^e\avvoipi row cvepyeras, 
 for he would not praise me, if I should banish my benejactors. Xen. 
 An. Vn, 7,11. Elrjs<t>opvroi^ oi;K hv, el rrpdaaois Ka\m, VO^^^ouLd 
 not be endurable, if you should be in prosperity {at any time). Aesch. 
 Prom. 979. Um yap ilv rir, 5 ye p^ eViVratro, rai^ra aofos eir, ; 
 for how could anyone be wise in that which he did not understand f 
 (i. e. et riva pfj inl<rrairo.) Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 7 /AXX « rt p, 
 d^^poipev, irpvveu c^^peiv, but if we neglected to bring anything, he 
 Ihcays exhorted us to bring it. EuR. Ale. 755. Ou< aTreX.tTrero c« 
 ahrd, el pf} rt dvayKalov eir,, he never left hm, unless there was some 
 necessity Yor it. Ien. Mem. IV, 2, 40 '^^^re Evayopavop^ev, 
 i(f>o^odvTo, whenever they saw Evagoras, they were afraid. Isoc. ±.vag. 
 193 D. §24. , 
 
 (c.) Etde TOVTO elf} (utinam sit), that this rnaybe. Ei8eM 
 raCra ndavoi^v, may they not suffer these things (habituaUy). But 
 ewIp^ndeLv, may they not suffer (in a single case). See examples 
 of Apodosis with av above, under (b). 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 2. In indirect quotations and questions, eacJh tense 
 of the Optative denotes the same tune, relatively/ to the 
 leading verb, which the tense (of any mood) which it 
 represents denoted in the direct discourse. (See § 69, 1.) 
 (a.) If 'therefore the Present Optative represents a 
 Present Indicative of the direct discourse, it denotes a 
 continued or repeated action, contemporary with that of 
 the leading verb (that is, relatively present). E. g. 
 
 UepiK\^s nponydpeve, Sti *Apxi^dp6s oi ^,Vo. et,, Pericles an- 
 
 nounced that Archidamus tvas hisjnend (i. e.he said ^evos /^o;/^*^^ 
 
 Thuc. n, 13. ''Eyvaxrav 6ti Kevbs 6 (l>6^os etr,, they learned that their 
 
 fear was groundless (i. e. they learned Kev6si<TTiv). Xen. An. 11, J, 
 
 21. ^EJuOdveTo el oIkoIto ,; x^P-^ ^e asked "'^^^^.^Vl'vTn '^^v 
 inhabited (i. e. he asked the question, Is the country inhabited?). Xej,. 
 
 C>T. IV, 4, 4. 
 
 (6.) But if it represents a Present Subjunctive of the 
 direct discourse, it denotes a continued or repeated 
 action, which is future with reference to the leading 
 verb. E. g. 
 
 KX/apxof i^ov\e{,eTO, el 'i.eptroikv Tivas tfirdvr^s t^'^' ^i^"?. 
 chus wm deliberating whether they should send a few, or should all 
 go. Xen. An. I. 10, 5. (The question was, JJ^/^J-^g*"/*";"^. ^ 
 ndirres Upev; shaU we send a few, or shall we all go t See § 88.) 
 
 Remark. Examples of the Present Optativ** representing the 
 
 ^a^trxtasiitiii^uAi, 
 
 s^S 
 
12 
 
 USE OP THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 13, 2. 
 
 § 15, 2.] 
 
 PRESENT INFINITIVE. 
 
 13 
 
 Present Indicative or Subjunctive m a dependent clause of the 
 direct discourse, to which the same principles apply, may be found 
 under § 74, 1. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen, by a comparison of the examples 
 under (a) and (b), that an ambiguity may sometimes arise from 
 uncertainty whether the Optative stands for the Present In- 
 dicative or for the Present Subjunctive in a question of doubt 
 (§ 88). Thus Tjyvoovv o ri ttoioUp might mean they knew not 
 what they were doing (the Optative representing W noiovfiev ; 
 what are we doing ?) or they knew not what to do (the Optative 
 representing tL rroiafiev ; what shall we do ?). The context 
 must decide in each case. See § 71. 
 
 Note 2. In the few instances in which the Present Optative in 
 indirect quotations represents the Imperfect of the direct discourse, 
 it of course denotes time past relatively to the leading verb. See 
 § 70, 2, N. 1 (6). 
 
 § 14. The Present Imperative refers to a continued 
 or repeated action in future time ; as <f>€vy€, begone ; 
 ')(aipovTa)Vt let them rejoice ; fJ'V vo fitter e^ do not believe. 
 
 § 15. The Present Infinitive has three distinct 
 
 uses : — 
 
 1. First, in its ordinary use (either with or without 
 the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse, it 
 denotes a continued or repeated action without regard to 
 time, unless its time is specially defined by the context. 
 E.g. 
 
 *Ef f oTt fi€veiv, it IS possible to remain. 'E^fcrrai tovto ttouIv^ it will 
 he possible to do this, ^eofiai vfiwv [jl€V€iv, J beg you to remain, Ti 
 TO KtoXvou €T axjTQv t(TTai ^ubiCfiv oTToi /SovXcTat, what will there be 
 to prevent him from going whither he pleases f Dem. 01. I, 1 2, 22. 
 *E<eXcv(ra avrov tovto tt o ( c I i/ , / commanded him to do this. 'E/3oil- 
 XeTo ao(f)6s elvai^he wished to be wise. Afivos fOTi \eyeivtheis skilled 
 in speaking. "Qpa ^afi t^fiv, it is time to be going. Jlav noiovaiv, 
 aare diKTjv fxr) StSoi/ai, thej/ do everything ^ so as to avoid being 
 punished. Plat. Gorg. 479 C. To /xcV ovv eniTiixavlacos (f)TJa-ai ns 
 &v paStov €ivai, TO B* 6 Ti bfl ir paTTeiv dirocpaivfa-dai, tovt fivai 
 avfji^ovKov, some one mag say that fnding fault is easy, but that 
 showing what ought to be done is the duty of an adviser. Dem. 01. I, 
 13, 27. (Here imTifiavj dno(f)aLV(a6aij and irpdrreiv belong under 
 this rule; cfvot in both cases belongs under § 15, 2.) Ov ttXco* 
 
 rl oO "r/^^rf this not from love of gain ^-t because oj thejhebans 
 making juster demands than you. Dem. Phil. I, 69 6 ^r^xf^ 
 8^ ^ATaXduT, v'riao,, too ,x\ X.ot^. KaKovpy^.u Ty Ev^o^au, in older 
 prevent pirates from ravaging Euboea. IHUC. U, rf^. 
 
 Remark. The Infinitive in this its ordinary use has usually no 
 more reference to time than any verbal noun, and the distinction of 
 uTe therefore disappears, the Present differing from the Aonst 
 oX bre™in/a^^^ or repeated action. An Infinitive 
 
 which fnS7has°no reference to time may, however, be referred 
 To t particular time, like any. other verbal -un, by the verb on 
 whiph it depends, by some particle like Sxrre or irpiu, or by some 
 TttrwLd Tn the se^ntence. ^ Thus cS<rre denoting a pur;,o.. refei^ 
 the Infinitive to the future: the Infinitive without a,aT. expressing 
 TJrn^eh likewise future. After a large class of verbs, ^ those 
 Tcoimanding, advising, de^ring. asking 8.C -^o^^ s^^^^^^^^^ 
 noints to the future, the Infinitive necessarily denotes relative luture 
 Sme (For an irregular use of the Future Infinitive after such 
 vSbs see §27, N. 20 The time denoted by the Infinitive m any 
 Jthise constWctions must be carefully distinguished from that 
 which i? denotes in indirect discourse (§ 15, 2), where it^ tense is 
 fully preserved. ^ 
 
 Note 1. For a discussion of tbe Infinitive with the article and 
 a subject, with reference to its time, see Appendix, U. 
 
 Note 2 Xpao), duaipico, e^antC^o, and other verbs signifying fo 
 aivemoracul^^^^^^^^ are sometimes followed by the Present (as 
 
 rilZ thfAorist) Unitive, where we -^f -pect ^e Future on 
 the principle of indirect discourse (§ 15, 2, N. 1). /^^^^/^r^^"^^ 
 takeTe onlinary construction of verbs of commanding, advising, and 
 
 warning. E. g. ^ _ 
 
 utsZdthat Apollo gave a respond to Alcmaeon that he Md .n- 
 taUttMsland. 'thuc. II, 102. The Future .3 someUmcs found. 
 For the Aorist, see § 23, 1, N. 2. 
 
 2 Secondly, the Present Infinitive in indirect dis- 
 course is used to represent a Present Indicative of tlie 
 direct discourse, and therefore denotes a continued or 
 repeated action, which is contemporary with that ot the 
 leading verb, that is, relatively present. E. g. 
 
 , A Jl,oriti.g (i. e/he .aid ^^ I am uniting"); <^^«.yp« <#.»., 
 TwilUay that h!i.Qhen) meriting. 'App^.r^^v ""^"V^Zokt 
 vretends that he i, sick. 'Eli^oo-c ippo>artiv Tovro.-., *« 'f "^«« 
 M^lL this man was sick. Dem. F. L. 379, 15 and 17. Ovk ^<f>i, 
 ^%Z^'t:.o. <rrpar,y.T., he said that not he htmself, but A.c««, 
 
 i 
 
 ^■S^^^g^^^^" 
 
14 
 
 USE OP THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 15, 2. 
 
 was general; i. e. he said, ovk eya airros aXX* €K€7uos (rrpaTrjyei. 
 Thuc. IV, 28. For the Present Infinitive with a*^ (not included 
 here), see § 41. 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse, with 
 its tenses thus corresponding to the same tenses of the Indicative, 
 only when it depends upon verbs implying thought or the expression 
 of thought (verba sentiendi et declarandi), and when also the thought, 
 as originally conceived, would have be^n expressed by some tense 
 of the Indicative, which the corresponding tense of the Infinitive 
 can represent. Thus verbs of commanding, wishing, and others 
 enumerated in § 92, 1, although they may imply thought, yet never 
 introduce an indirect quotation in the sense here intended, as an 
 Infinitive after them never stands for an Indicative, but is merely 
 the ordinary Infinitive used as a verbal noun, without any definite 
 time. See § 73, 1, Remark; where the principle is stated in full, 
 80 as to include all the tenses and the Infinitive with av. . 
 
 Note 2. Verbs and expressions signif^-ing to hope, to expect, to 
 
 promise, and the like, after which the Future Infinitive stands 
 
 regularly in indirect discourse (as representing a Future Indicative 
 
 of the direct discourse), sometimes take the Present or the Aorist 
 Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 'Q/xoXoyftff Kad* ijfias iro\iT€V€(T$ai, you agreed to live according 
 to us (the laws). Plat. Crit. 52 C. SweBov TroXtrf uf o-^at. Id. 
 52 D. Upoaayayujv eyyvrjras rj pfjv nopeve (rOai, having giving 
 securities that he would go. Xen. Cyr. VI, 2, 39. 'EXniCei BvuarSs 
 «"'«». «PX"»'' ^« ^opes to be able to rule. Plat. Rep. IX, 573 C. 
 (But m Hdt. I, 30, iXmCcou eivai oX^iaraTos fneipoDra, means, he 
 asked, trusting that he was, flvai being a regular Present Infinitive of 
 
 indirect discourse. So I. 22, ^\niC<ou eluai Kal rbv X^^v rerpv- 
 
 Croat.) 
 
 In these cases the Infinitive seems to be used nearly as in § 15, 
 
 1, without regard to time. The Greek makes no more distinction 
 than the English between eXmC^i roCro noiuv, he hopes to do this, 
 and iXnlCei tovto noirja^iv, he hopes that he shall do this. Compare 
 <t>ap.€v TovTov oi)fto\oyT}K€vai ravTa tt o i ^ o- f 1 1/ with (f)d<TK0VT€s ae copoXo- 
 yrjKfvai TToXiTfveaeai. Plat. Crit. 51 E and 52 D. The Future, 
 however, is the regular form (§ 27, N. 3). For the Aorist, see ^ 23. 
 
 2, N. 2. ' ij » 
 
 Note 3. Even verbs of saying and thinking, — as Xtyio, when it 
 signifies to command, and boKfi, it seems good, — may be followed by 
 the ordinary Infinitive of § 15, 1, referring to the future. EtVoi/ is 
 very seldom followed by the Infinitive, except when it si^rnifies to 
 command. (See § 92, 2, N. 1.) The context must distingmsh these 
 :ases from indirect quotations. E. g. 
 
 ^ TovToiff (Xfyov 7r>€ti/, / told them to sail. Dem. F. L. 388, 4. 
 ^TovTovs^ fXfyov TrXflv would mean / said that they were sailing.) 
 Eijr(ov pjjdiya napie vai €ls rrju aKpoiroXiv, having given orders that no 
 
 § 15, 3.] present infinitive as imperfect. 15 
 
 one should pass into the citadel. Xen. Hell. V, 2, 29. Ao^cei fifiiv roCro 
 7roi€li/, it pleases us to do this. (But So/cfi poi vpas tovto ^noitiu 
 means it seems to me that you are doing thi% by § 15, 2.) ESo^f 
 in the sense it was resolved, introducing a resolution or enactment, is 
 followed by the Present or Aorist (not Future) Infinitive. 
 
 3. Thirdly, the Present Infinitive belongs also to the 
 Imperfect, and is used in indirect discourse to repre- 
 sent an Imperfect Indicative of the direct discourse. 
 It here denotes continued or repeated action which is 
 past with reference to the leading verb, thus supplying 
 the want of an Imperfect Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 Tivas oZu €lx^s vTToXap^aveT* eCx^^^""- riv ^iXiTnrov 5t etnrev 
 i(v • what prayers then do you .suppose PhUip made when he was pour- 
 ing the libations f Dem. F. L. 381, 10. (Here the temporal^ clause 
 8t tamvh^u shows the past time denoted by (vx^creai.) UoTtp ouaet 
 jrXeoi; ^cuKear Gr^/SatW ? ^rXiTrrrov lpS>v KpaT^lv t& •noX^p^; do 
 you think that the superiority of the Phocians over the Thebans, or that 
 of Philip over you, was the greater in the war (the war being then 
 past) ? Dem. F. L. 387, 6. (Here the direct discourse would be 
 ^KpdTavu and eKpdr^i.) US>s yap oXeaSe 8v(Txep5>s aKov€iv OXvuBt- 
 0V9, €1 Tis Ti Xeyoi fcard OiXiVttou kut €K€lvovs tovs xpoi^ovff, or 
 'AvdepovvTa avToh d(j>i€L, k. t. X.; . ... Spa npoaboKUP avTovs 
 
 romOra TrciV.o-^at (sc. oUaOe) ; 5p oUaO,, or. tov, Tvpavvov, 
 
 iPl^aXX., {Toi>, e^rraXo^.) -^poaboKavK. t X. ; for how unwdlmgly 
 
 do you think the Olynthians used to hear it, if any one said anything 
 
 against Philip in those times when he was ceding Anthemus to them, 
 
 &c ^ Do you think they were expecting to suffer such things? Vo 
 
 you think that the Thessalians, when he was expelling the depots, were 
 
 expecting, &c. ? Dem. Phil. II, p. 70, 25 to p. 71, 12 (Ihe direct 
 
 discourse here was tt^s . . . . ^kovou, €i . . . • X.yoi ; and Trpocrf 6o<«y ;) 
 
 Ka\ yhp Tohi «Vt ro)!/ rrpoydv^^v hp^v Xeyouras aKOVco rovro) r« €d€t 
 
 Ypna^at, / hear that they used to follow this custom. Dem. Ul. IJl, 
 
 34 17 Ta u€V irph "EXXrjvos ovbe elvai fi inUXTjais avrrj (sc, 
 
 8o«en, in the limes before Hellen this name does not appear to have 
 
 even existed. Time. I, 3. Again, in the same sentence of Thucydi- 
 
 des, Trapevfcr^ai, to have furnished. Mera ravra #^ , o^^a^ Z^^" 
 
 S.tTTV.Tv, t6u 8e 2<0KpdTr, oIk elaievai- rou ovu Ayae<ova^oX- 
 
 XdKi: K€X.v€iP p^ranipyiraadai Thv Sco.parj, . 8c ovk .av. PLAT. 
 
 Symp. 175 C. (He said, ih.mvoZpev, o §^,2. ov<c fta?" oovu A. 
 
 ihxLv .... ey^ be oIk eta>v.) ^vvrvx^elv yhp (e<l>rj) ^ Arp«rr j8? Trapa 
 
 ^tXiTTTTOV TropfvoufVo), KGi p€T airov yvuaia /cat rratbapia PabiQeiy , 
 
 forT said thaWe had met (Aor.) Atresiidas cmimg from Philip, 
 
 and that there were walking with him, &c. Dem. F. L. 439, 3. Tour 
 
 cVco d>npi briv .>e p^ Xad^lu. I say that this ought not to have escaped 
 
 my notice. Dem Cor. 291, 27. (The dm"5t discourse here vas rovr 
 
 tb.iipepnXaeelv, §49, 2, N. 3.) 
 
16 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 15, 3. 
 
 For the Imperfect Participle, see § 16, 2. 
 
 Remark 1. This use of the Present of the Infinitive as an Im- 
 perfect cannot be too carefully distinguished from its ordmarjr use 
 Ser past tenses, where we translate it by the Imperfect, a^^n eXcyc 
 r5 arpdTfvaa aax^(T6ai, he said that the army was fighting, i3ut here 
 XXr^el^t'^) i^mi present, relatively to ?Xcy.; ^bereas if it had 
 C^Jn used as an Imperfect, it would have referred to time past 
 relatively to IX.ye, as in IX.yc rb arpdrevfm rrj ^P'^^'P'''^ f'^K'f.?': 
 he said that the army had been fighting on the fi^Uj'Mf' ^^ ^^^ 
 former case the direct discourse was /iaxf rat, in the latter it was 
 ^uavcro. Such an Imperfect Infinitive differs from the Aorist in 
 the same construction only by expressing a continued or repeated 
 action (as in the Indicative): it gives, in fact, the only means of 
 representing in the Infinitive what is usually expressed by X.y« ori 
 cVot'ct, he says that he was doing, differing from X.y« ori enoirjrT.u, he 
 says that he did. (For the rare use of the Present Optative to 
 represent the Imperfect in the same way, see § 70, 2, JN. 1, {t>).) it 
 must be observed, that this construction is never used unless the 
 context mal.es it certain that the Infinitive represents an Imper- 
 fect and not a Present, so that no ambiguity can arise, bee the 
 examples. 
 
 Remark 2. This important distinction between the ordinary 
 Present Infinitive referring to the past (when it takes its time 
 from a past tense on which it depends), and the same tense used 
 as an Imperfect and referring to the past by ite ojrn signification, 
 seems to be overlooked by those who would call the former also a 
 case of Imperfect Infinitive. But in the former case ,<t>rj rovro 
 nouiv is translated he said that he was doing this merely to suit 
 the Encrlish idiom, whereas the Greeks used the Present because 
 the tim? was to be present (relatively to ^cj^rj), the direct discourse 
 being roOro ttoiS : in the other case, however, e(/)j; rovro Trotcii/ rrj 
 TToorepaia, he said that he had been doing thus the day before, the Greeks 
 used L'.:u as a regular Imperfect (rektiyely to .>,), the direct 
 discourse being roOro inoiovu. So m Latin (Cic. Phil. VIII, 10), 
 Q Scaevolam memoria teneo bello Marsico, cum esset sununa 
 senectute, quotidie /acere omnibus conveniendi potestatem sui. bo 
 (Cic. de Off. I, 30), Q. Maximum accepimus lacile celare, tacere, 
 dissimidare, insidiari, praeripere hostium consilia. ^ . . , , 
 
 The freciuency of such constructions and their principle have 
 been often overlooked, from the fact that they occur only when the 
 context prevents all possible ambiguity. 
 
 16. 1. Tlie Present Participle regularly refers to a 
 continued or repeated action, which is contemporary 
 with that of the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 ToCro rroioOcrtv vofilCovr,: k. r. X., they do this because they think, 
 &c. 'Enoiovv voalCovT€,, they were doing U in the thought, Jke, 
 *EnToiriaav vo/ii'Covres, they did it because they thought, &c. noir,- 
 
 § 16, 2.] 
 
 PRESENT rARTICIPLE. 
 
 17 
 
 aowTiv roui'Covr^, they mill doit in the thought, &fi. Tavr^ eVpdx^7 
 ^ZJarparr^yovuTo,, these things tvere done when Conon was 
 geZal iJc. Evig. p. 200 C. § 56. (2rpar,yo..ro. is Prjntre.- 
 
 tively to ^npdx6n ) Kal ro.a.ra ^ P " ^ -r,7 V^^' ""^ *" ^"^"^ 
 such things what was he doing? Dem. Phil. Ill, lU, 20. 
 
 Note. When the Present Participle is used like an ordinary 
 Adiective or Substantive (as in § 108), it occasionally refers to 
 ^Z absolutely present, even wlien the leacbng verb is not P-se^nt^ 
 This must always be denoted by an adverb Uke vv,^y or by some- 
 thin"- else in the context. E. g. 
 
 TnV viu BoKorlav KaXovfxevrjv ^Krjcrav, they settled in the Country 
 now called Boeotia. TilUC I, 12. 'O roiyvv ^cX^nnos ef apxri^i. ovira> 
 
 nZr^hen J^iopeithes was not yet general, and when the soldiers who 
 ARE NOW in the Chersonese had not yet been sent out seized upon 
 t^num and Doriscus. Dem. Phil. UI, 114 15 (Here crrparj;- 
 yo^;^o. is oresent to the time of Aa,x/3av., while 5vra>u is present to 
 the time of speaking.) 
 
 2 The Present Participle is also used as an Imper- 
 fect* like the Present Infinitive. With the Participle 
 this'use is not confined (as it is with the Infinitive) to 
 indirect discourse. E. g. 
 
 Oi<rviinp€fT^€vovr€S Ka\ 7rap6vrei KaTa^apTvpf}<Tov<Tiv, those 
 who were his colleagues on the embassy and who were present mil 
 7estifu. Dem. F. L. 381, 5. (Here the embassy is referred to as a 
 well-known event in the past.) ^alverai yap n wy E\\as KoKovix^vrj 
 
 np6r,pa, Ka\ pabla>, ^acrrot r^v iavra>u aTToXoTTO vrf ., i. e.the 
 following things are evident, 'EXUs oi 7:d\a. Jie^aico^ ^tItTtp I 2 
 
 Xen. Mem. I, 2, 18. (The direct discourse here was €8€ikw and 
 iaaxppovfirrfV'^ , 
 
 The principles stated in § 15, 3, with Remarks (^^ ; § ^^^^^^^^ 
 gard to the Present Infinitive used as an Imperfect apply equally to 
 the Participle. 
 
 Remark. The rules for the time of the Infinitive and Particip e 
 riven in this chaptor do not include the Infimtive and Participle 
 with Sv. For these see Chapter HI. § 41. 
 
IS 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 LS 17, L 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 A. In the Indicative, 
 
 § 17. 1. The Perfect represents an action as already 
 finished at the present time ; as ^eypa<^a^ I have written 
 (that is, my writing is now finished) , 
 
 2. The Pluperfect represents an action as already 
 
 finished at some specified past time ; as iyeypacpeiv^ I 
 
 had written (that is, my writing was finished at some 
 
 specified past time). 
 
 Note 1. The consideration that the Perfect, although it implies 
 the performance of the action in past time, yet states only that it 
 stands completed at the present time, will explain why the Perfect is 
 classed with ihe Present and Future among the primary tenses, that 
 is, the tenses of present or future time. 
 
 Note 2. The Perfect Indicative and the Pluperfect may be 
 expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Present or Imperfect 
 of flfii. Here, however, each part of the compound generally re- 
 tains its own signification, so that this form expresses more fully the 
 continuance of the result of the action down to the present time (in 
 the case of the Perfect), and down to the past time referred to (in 
 the case of the Pluperfect). E.g. 
 
 UeTToirjKciis eoTiv (or Jv), he is (or was) in ihe condition of having 
 done, — he has done {or had done). 'E/ioO ol vofioi ov fiovov dirfyva- 
 k6t€s fttri fXTi dbiKclv, aWa koI k(K€\€vk6t€S tovttjv rpv diicr)* 
 \afjL^dv€iv, it is the laws which have not only acquitted me of injustice^ 
 but have commanded me to inflict this punishment. Lys. de Morte 
 Erat. p. 95, 4. § 34. Ovpavos yey ovens iari t€ koi tr ecrrat, 
 heaven has been formed {and still exists)^ and will still continue. 
 Plat. Tim. 31 B. 
 
 Remark. The latter part of Note 2 of course does not apply to 
 eases where the compound form is the only one in use, as in the 
 third person plural of the Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and 
 Middle of mute and liquid verbs. 
 
 On the other hand, the simple form very often implies the con- 
 tinuance of the result of the action down to the present time, or 
 down to a specified past time; but not so distinctly as the com- 
 pound form, and not necessarily. (See the last two examples.) 
 t. g. 
 
 *Eirifi€\Sr ot deoi Syu oi avdpa)7roi beovrai KaTtcrKtvaKaaiVj the 
 Gods have carefully provided what men need. Xex. Mem. IV, 3, 3, 
 Ta>u noiTjTciv rivfs vnoBf^KOs KaraXeXoiTracriv, some of the poets have 
 left us maxims. Isoc. Nioocl. p. 15B. §3. * AKrjKoa fxh Tovvojia^ 
 
 §18.] 
 
 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. 
 
 19 
 
 uvrjfjiovfvo;) 8' ou, / have heard the name, hut I do not remember^ it. 
 Plat. Theaet. 144 B. *A <roi rvxrj Ke'xP'y'Cf » ravr d^ciXcro, For- 
 tune has taken back what she has lent you. Men and. Frag. Incei-t 
 No. 41. 
 
 Note 3. The Perfect of many verbs has the signification of 
 a Present, which is usually explained by the peculiar meaning 
 of these verbs. Thus 6vrj<TK€iv, to die, redpr^Kevat, to be dead; 
 KoKflv, to call, K€K\ri(rBai, to be called or named ; yiyveadai, to 
 become, y^yovivai, to be; fnfivT}aK€iv, to remind, {xefivrjaOaif 
 to remember; olda (novi), I know ; &c 
 
 The Pluperfect of such verbs has the signification of the 
 Imperfect ; as olba, I know, ^beiv, I knew, (§ 29, N. 5.) 
 
 Note 4. In Homer and Herodotus the Pluperfect is sometimes 
 found in nearly the same sense as the Aorist. E. g. 
 
 B€^\t)K€1 yXovTov Kara bf^iov. J\. V, 66. (Here two Aorists 
 follow, referring to the same time as /Se^X^nfi.) Tavra a>s iTTvOovro, 
 up fi faro fior}6e€iv, when they heard this, they started to carry aid. 
 Hdt. IX, 61. ''aXXoi be ^ycfwii/aj exovresapfieaTO inl to ipov. Hdt 
 VIII, 35. 
 
 Note 5. In epistles, the Perfect and Aorist are sometimes used 
 where we might expect the Present, the writer transferring himself 
 to the time otthe reader. E. g. 
 
 *A7r€WaX/ca aoi rovbf rov \6yov, I send you this speech. Isoc. De- 
 mon. § 2. MfT *ApTa^dCov, ov (toi ene fiylra, irpdacre. Thuc. I, 129. 
 (Here ov tnepi^a refers to the man who was to carry the letter.) 
 So scripsi in Latin. 
 
 Note 6. The perfect sometimes refers to the future, to denote 
 the certainty or likelihood that an action will immediately take 
 place, in a sense similar to that of the Present (§ 10, N. 7), but with 
 more emphasis, as the change in time is greater. E. g. 
 
 "QoT €1 /If t6^q>v eyKparris alaBfjaerai, oXaXa, I shall perish at 
 once. Soph. Phil. 75. Kav tovto viKtofxev, itdvff r\\uv TrejroirjTai. 
 Xen. An. I, 8, 12. So pent in Latin. 
 
 The Pluperfect can express the same certainty or likelihood 
 transferred to the past. 
 
 B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods, 
 
 § 1 8. As the Perfect Indicative represents an act as 
 finished at the present time, so the Perfect of any of the 
 dependent moods represents an act as finished at the 
 time (present, past, or future) at which the Present of 
 that mood would represent it as going on. 
 
20 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 18, 1. 
 
 1. The Perfect Subjunctive and Optative are very 
 often expressed in the active, and almost always in 
 the passive and middle, by the Perfect Participle with 
 w and eli^v ; and can always be resolved into these. 
 Their time, therefore, in each case, can be seen by 
 applying the principles stated in §§ 12 and 13 to the 
 w or 6t7ii;. Where the Present would denote future 
 time, the Perfect dGwotes future-perfect time. E. g. 
 
 To xpovou yfyevrjaBai nokvv BeSoiKU fxrj Tiva \fj0rjv vfiiv ireTTOirj ktj , 
 I fear lest the fact that a long time has passed may (when you come to 
 decide the case) prove to " have caused in you some forgetfulness 
 Dem. F. L. 342, 10. (M^ noLTJ would mean lest it may cause, the 
 time being the same as before!) Xpi) avra [a TiXevrjaavraiKaTcpov 
 Tre ptfxhei'] dicoOo-at, tva reXeas tKorfpos avrav dTTftX^^j; ra o(f>€i\o- 
 fifva, we must hear what awaits each of them after death, that (tchen we 
 have finished) each may have fully received his deserts. Plat. Rep. X, 
 6 14 A. Toi/y /xei/ oXXous, Kav^ehoiKOTfSuxriv €v6vvas, rrju aeiXoyiav 
 6pc5 TrpoT€ivoii€vovs, I see that other rneji, even if they have already given 
 their accounts, — I e. even if they are (in the state of) persons who 
 have given their accounts, — alwatjs offer a perpetual reckoning. Dem. 
 F.L. 341, 14. 'AvSpeidy ye ndw vopiCopcv, os au TTf TrX^yr; narepa, 
 we always consider one icho has beaten his father very wjan/y. ^Arist. 
 Av. 1350. No/xoi/ df)(r€Lv pi]b€VL T(ov*EX\r]V(ov vpas ^oriBflv bs av pff 
 irpoTfpos ^€^or]er]K(i)s vplv rj, I ^. to assist no one ivho shall not pre- 
 viDusly have asshited you. Dem. F. L. 345, 28. (*Off av pr) Trportpos 
 ^orjdfi would mean who shall not previously assist you. The Aorist 
 iior)ei]ari would differ very little from the Perfect. See § 20, N- 2.) 
 
 "ESct'o-ai/ pr) Xvaaa rjplv i pTreTrraxoi, they feared lest madness 
 might prove to have fallen upon us. Xen. An. V, 7, 26. (M^ epTrinToi 
 would mean lest it might fall upon ;«.) Ucos ovk av oUrpoTaTa 
 irdvTcov eyoi neTrovdcos ftrjv, fl epe ylrT)(j>l(TaivTO civai ^evov ; how 
 should I not have suffered the most pitiable of all things, if they should 
 vote me to be an alien f Dem. Eubul. 1312, 17. (This could have 
 been expressed, with a very slight difference in meaning, Tm ov 
 
 iTfnovOios eaopai, Fut. Perf., cai/ yl/T](f)ia-Q)VTai ; how shall I 
 
 not have suffered, &c.) Et otiovv neTTovBo^s eKarepos rjpav € irj , 
 ov Ka\ dp(f)6T€poi hv tovto ireirovdoipev ; if each of us should have 
 suffered anything lohatsoever, would not both of us have suffered it f 
 Plat. Hipp. M. 301 A. Ovk &v 8ia tovto y fiev ovk fvBvs SfSwKorfff, 
 this, at least, cannot be the reason why they did not pay it at once ; i. e. 
 they would not (on inquiry) prove to have not paid it on this account. 
 Dem. Onet. I, 867, 1. So Soph. Oed. T. 840. *EXfye oo-a ayaBa 
 Kvpof Uepaas neTToirjKoi, he told how many .'services Cyrus had 
 done the Persians, Hdt. III. 75. (n^noifjKoi here represents nenornKf 
 of the direct discourse.) Ovtoi tXfyov as irevTaKia-ioi avTo7s ttrjaap 
 €K Tov neipat<as hehcKatr p€voi . Lys. in Philocr. p. 182, § 12. 
 (Here the direct discourse was TrevraKoa-ioi elaiv bebcKaa-psvoi.^ 
 
 §18, 2.] PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 21 
 
 Note. The Perfect Subjunctive in protasis (§ 50, 1) corresponds 
 exactly to the Latin Future Perfect Indicative ; but the Greek sel- 
 dom uses this cumbrous Perfect, preferring the less precise Aorist 
 (§ 20, N. 2). The Perfect Optative, in both protasis and apodoi^is, 
 corresponds to the Latin Perfect Subjunctive, but is seldom used. 
 
 The Perfect Optative can seUlom be accurately expressed m 
 Enjilish. For when we use the English forms would have suffered 
 Rm] should have suffered to translate the Perfect Optative, these are 
 merely vaguer expressions for will and shall have suffered. (See 
 the examples above.) / should have suffered is commonly past in 
 English, being equivalent to tiraOov av ; but here it is future, and is 
 therefore liable to be misunderstood. There is no more reference 
 to past time, however, in the Perfect Optative with av, than there 
 is in the Future Perfect Indicative in such expressions as pdTr)v tpoX 
 KfKXaiacTai, 1 shall have had my ivhipping for nothing (referring 
 to one received in his boyhood) ; Arist. Nub. 1436. 
 
 2. Tlie Perfect Imperative may express a command 
 that something just done or about to be done shall be 
 chcldve and final. It is thus equivalent to the Perfect 
 Participle \vith the Imperative of el/x/. E. g. 
 
 TavTa pivhh TaiTt} €lpr](r6 a> , let so much have been thus said, i. e 
 'et what has been thus said be sufficient. Plat. Crat. 401 D. But 
 oucos ^eflpnaOco oti, k. t. X., still let as much as this (ivhich follows) 
 he said (once for all), that, &c. Plat. Rep. X, 607 C. Uepi Ta>v 
 i8La>v jcvTo. pot 7rpo€ipr)(Te<o, let this have been said (once Jor all) 
 hi way of introduction. Isoc. Pane^r. p. 43 D. § 14. TaDra ir€7TauTeo> 
 T,{>p'iv,Kal tcro)? iKavu^s ?x'i, let this be the end of the play, kc. Plat. 
 Euthyd. 278 D. Terax^^w fjplv Kara BrjpuKpaTiav 6 toiovtos cwi)p, 
 let such a man remain where we have placed him, &c. Plat. liep. 
 Vm, 561 E. *A7r€ipy daBio B^i rip:v avTT] ^ TToXtrfia, let now thi.^ be 
 a sufficient description of this form of government. Id. 553 A. Mexpt 
 Tovb€ i>pi(r6a> vpS>v h ^pabvTtis, at this point let the limit of your slug- 
 gishness be fixed. Tnuc. I, 71. 
 
 This use seems to be confined to the third person singular of the 
 passive and middle. The third person plural in the same sense 
 could be expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Imperative of 
 et/ii, as in Plat. Rep. VI, 502 A: ovtoi toiwv toOto neTrnarpevoi 
 taTit>v, grant then that these have been persuaded of this. 
 
 Note 1. On this principle the Perfect Imperative is used in 
 mathematical language, to imply that something is to be considered 
 as proved or assumed once for all, or that lines drawn or points 
 fixed are to remain as data for a following demonstration. L. g. 
 
 EtXnd>(9o) fVir^y AB rvxoi^ arjpflov t6 A, Ka\ d^jiprjaBto dn6 
 T?,i AT tJ AA ten? t} AE, let any point A be (assumed ««) '^'^ ^'^ '*« 
 line AB, and AE equal to AA as cut off from AT EuCL. 1, Pr. 9. 
 
il 
 
 I 
 
 » 
 
 i i 
 
 i ! 
 i i 
 I 1 
 
 22 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 18, 2. 
 
 Note 2. The Perfect Imperative of the second person is rare ; 
 when it is used, it seems to be a little more emphatic than the Pre- 
 sent or Aorist. E. g. 
 
 •Hc (TVTov^e dibe^o. D. V, 228. M^ 7r€ (t>6^r) a 6 €. TllUC VI, 
 1 7. Movov av fjfilv nia-Ta Oecou 7r€7ro irjao koi df^iav fidff, only make 
 us (immediately and once for all) solemn pledges and give the right 
 hand. Xen. Cyr. IV, 2, 7. Jlenavaoj stop I not another word I Dem. 
 Timoc. 721, 6. 
 
 Note 3. In verbs whose Perfect has the force of a Present 
 (§ 1 7, N. 3) the Perfect Imperative is the ordinary form, as /xt/ii/T/o-o, 
 K€K\r}<r6a>, iaTdTca, redvaTO)^ itrro). The Perfect Imperative active 
 seems to have been used only in such verbs. Occasionally we find 
 the periphrastic form with the Participle and et/it, as cotw ivyi^c 
 ^T]Kvia. Plat. Leg. V, 736 B. 
 
 3. (a.) The Perfect Infinitive in indirect discourse 
 represents a Perfect Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 and therefore denotes an action which is finished at the 
 time of tlie leading verb. E. g. 
 
 ^rja). TovTo TT€Tr pa\€vaL ^ he says that he has done thvi ; t(^r) tovto 
 TTfTrpaxivaif he said that he had done this; (fyfjafi rovro jrc- 
 vpaxtvaif he will say thai he has done this (the direct discourse in 
 each case being ir€irpaxa)' ^E^j; \pj]p.a6* iavr<a tovs Orj^alovs 
 €7riK€Krj pvx^vai, he said that the Thebans had offered a reward for 
 his seizure. Dem. F. L. 347, 26. In Arist. Nub. 1277, Trpoa- 
 K€K\rja6ai poi BokcIs (according to Mss. Rav. & Ven.), you seem 
 to me to be sure to be summoned to court (to be as good as already sum- 
 moned) ^ the Infinitive represents a Perifect Indicative referring to 
 the future (§ 1 7, N. 6). So K€K<o\va-Bai tdoKei. Thuc. II, 8. 
 
 (5.) In other constructions the Perfect Infinitive 
 represents an act as finished at the time at which the 
 Present in the same construction would represent it as 
 going on (§ 15, 1). E. g. 
 
 Ow ^ov\€V€<rdai crt cSpa, oXXa P€^ov\€V(r6af ttjs yap 
 (iriovcn}s wktos Travra ravra bfl tt f tt p a ;( ^ a t , it is no longer time to 
 be deliberating J but (it is time) to have finished deliberating ; for all 
 (his must be done (and finished) within the coming night. Plat. Crit. 
 46 A. Kai priv Trept av y€ irpoacTd^are .... npoariKei 8i^Kr)K€vaLy 
 and it is his duty to have attended (during his absence) to the business 
 about which you gave him instructions. Dem. F. L. 342, 28. (This 
 refers to an ambassador presenting his accounts on his return.) 
 SvvfTvyxav€ noWaxov 8ia rriv <TT(vox<*>plav to p.kv aWois t/Xj3f- 
 ^\r]Kevai rd S' avroits € p.^€ ^\rja-6ai, bvo re TTfpi piav .... 
 ^vvrfpTTJaOai 1 it often befell them to have made an attack on one 
 side and (at the same time) to have been attacked themselves on the 
 
 S 18, 4.] 
 
 perfect infinitive. 
 
 23 
 
 other, &C. ThuC. VU, 70. *kvdyKr) yap ra ph piyiar ayrav Ijiji 
 KaTaK€XP^o'B(^^ fUKpa de riva 7rapa\€\€l(f)dai, for it must be 
 that the most important subjects have been used up, and that only unim- 
 portant ones have been left. Isoc. Pan. p. 55 D. § 74. Ovk TJ6ikov 
 ftiSaivdv 8ia to *caro7r€7rX^x^«* "^V V^^lJy they were unwilling to 
 embark on account of having been terrified by the defeat. Thuc. VII, 
 /2. To yap TToXXa dTroXwXfKcvat Kara rov iroXtpov r^ff ripertpag 
 dpeXcias av ris Bfirj diKai(os, to 8c pf)T€ ndXai rovro irfirovdcvat 
 TTccjiTjvevai re riva rjplv avppaxtav rovrcov avrippoirovj r^s nap 
 Ueiviov fvvoia? evepyerrjp* dv tyatyf 6fir}v, for our having lost many 
 things during the war any one might justly charge upon our neglect ; 
 but our never having suffered this before and the fact that an alliance 
 has now appeared to us to make up for these losses I shoidd consider a 
 benefaction, &c. Dem. 01. I, 12, 3. (Compare ycyevrjadai in^the 
 fii-st example under § 18, 1.) "Ec^Bacrav TTapoiKodopija-avres, ©ore 
 pi]Keri, prjre avro\ KaXvecrOai vir avrav, fKeivoys re Ka\ rravrdiraaiy 
 
 diTfo-reprfKevai a(f)ds diroretx'i^ai, i. e. they carried their 
 
 own wall beyond that of the Athenians, so as no longer to be themselves 
 interfered with by them, and so as to have effectually prevented them, 
 &c. Thuc. VII, 6. "EirepfXTjOrj Ka\ rav Xoittow, aare rav napovrav 
 Totr dv6pd>7rois dyaOav prjbev p.€v dvev rrjs TroXfws € ivai, ra Sc TrXeiorra 
 did ravrr)v yeyevfjo-dai. IsOC. Pan. p. 48 B. § 38. Toiavra Ka\ 
 roaavra KarfdKfvaa-av r^plv, acrre prjbfvl rav eiriyiyvopevav vn€p^6Xr}v 
 XeXeicpOai, they made such and so great acquisitions as to have no 
 possibility of surpassing them left to any one who should come after 
 them. Dem. 01. Ill, 35, 18. Aidopev avrols npoiKU avyK€K6(l>9ai, 
 we allow them to have cut us up for nothing (i. e. we make no account 
 of their having done so). Arist. Nub. 1426. 
 
 Note. The Perfect Infinitive is sometimes used like the Perfect 
 Imperative (§ 18, 2), signifjring that the action is to be decisive and 
 permanent, and sometimes it seems to be merely more emphatic 
 than the Present or Aorist Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 eIttov TTiv Ovpav KeKXelaBai, they ordered that the door should be 
 shut and remain so. Xen. Hell. V, 4, 7. BovXopevos dyavi Kai 
 biKa<TTT]pl<^ pLOi biapia-Bai nap* vplv on rdvavria €fioi Ka\ rovroLS 
 TrcirpaKToi, i. e. wishing to have it definitely^ and once for all settled in 
 your minds. Dem. F. L. 410, 28. QtXovvai rrpds nvXais nfirra- 
 Ktvai, eager to fall before the gates. Aesch. Sept. 462. "UXayvfv 
 (Vt TOVS M.€vavos, cJor* eKtivovs t kit €TrX rJxO a'' <o\ rpexftv eVi rd 
 oTrXa, he marched against the soldiers of Menon, so that they were (once 
 for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arms. Xen. An. I, 5, 13. 
 (Here tKnenXrixOai is merely more emphatic than the Present would 
 have been.) 
 
 Kemark. The Perfect Infinitive belongs also to the Pluperfect, 
 and is occasionally used to represent that tense in indirect discourse. 
 This occurs chiefly (perhaps only) when the Infinitive is modified 
 by dv. See the fii-st example under § 41, 2. 
 
 4. The Perfect Participle in all its uses refers to an 
 
 f } 
 
 i 
 
 V 
 
y 
 
 !ii 
 
 24 
 
 USE OP THE TENSES. 
 
 [§1&. 
 
 action as already finished at the time of the leading 
 verb. E. g. 
 
 •E.a.«,C<r. roi,, . I pr,.6r a., tUy prai^ tko.e «*» have spolceru 
 
 that Aeschin.s had announced nothing that ^^as true (i. e. / showed, 
 ^vbh dXtieii d7rliyy€\K€u). Dem. F. L. 396, 30. 
 
 AORIST. 
 A. In the Indicative, 
 
 § 10. The Aorist Indicative expresses the simple 
 momentary occurrence of an action in past time; as 
 eypay^a^ I wrote. 
 
 This fundamental idea of simple occurrence remains the 
 essential characteristic of the Aorist through all the dependent 
 moods, however indefinite they may be in regard to time. 
 
 Note 1. The Aorist of verbs which denote a state or 
 condition generally expresses the entrance into that state o" 
 condition. E. g. 
 
 BacriXevo,. / am king, e^aaCKevaa, I became king; ^px«: ^ ^'^ii 
 office, Tip^a, I obtained office : TrXovr J,, eVXovr^cra, / became ^ch^ JV 
 
 CoLarou/.WtVa, <rv.<^Krj<re, she was his wife in ffood faith and 
 
 hasnZven yet been di^r^d ; but she went to lice with him, 
 
 &c. Dem. Onet. I, 873, 8. 
 
 Note 2. The Aorist differs from the Imperfect by denoting the 
 
 momentary occurrence of an action or state, while the ^^V^^^f 
 
 •' .• — «,*:+;«« n.f +Vi» samp, action or staie. 
 
 (BaaiXevov, npvov, cttXoOtovv, I was King, necu ujjl^^, cc»o . ^— v~- 
 especially the last example under N. 1.) The Aonst is therefore 
 thrtense most common in narration, the Imperfect m description 
 The Aorist may sometimes refer to a series of repetitions , but it 
 refL to themU.c/.W,, as a single ^liole, while the Imperfect 
 refers to them separately, as individuals bo the Aons may even 
 refer to a continued action, if (as a whole) it is viewed as a single 
 event in past time. E. g. 
 
 'Eya,8e ?X^ov, .?8o., iviKrjaa, I came, I saw, I conquered 
 (Vem, vidi, vici). App. BelL Civ. U, 91. So i^aaiX^va^ 8«a 
 
 AORIST IN THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 
 
 25 
 
 § 19.J 
 
 rrrj may be used to mean he had a reign of ten years (which Is now 
 viewed as a single past event) ; whereas ejSao-iXfve Scko errj would 
 mean he continued to reign ten years. 
 
 NoTe 3. The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist was 
 sometimes neglected, especially by the older writers. See § 11, 
 Note 5. 
 
 Note 4. (cr.) The Aorist is sometimes found where we 
 should expect the Perfect or the Pluperfect ; the action being 
 simply referred to the past, without the more exact specifi- 
 cation afforded by the Perfect and Pluperfect. E. g. 
 
 T(ou oIk€T(ov ovSeva KareXiirev, aXk* airavra neirpaKfv, Ae- 
 8CHIN. Timarch. § 99. 'Erpa-novro es rbv Udvopfiov, odevnep avrjyd' 
 yovro, they turned towards Panormus, lohence they had set sail. 
 Thug. H, 92. Kvpov be /ieraTreV^frat cxTro Trjs apxrjs 5ff ayrov 
 aarpdirriv fnoirjaev, of which he had once made him satrap. Xen. 
 An. I, 1, 2. 
 
 (b.) Especially the Aorist is generally used, even where we 
 should expect the Pluperfect, after particles of time like iirti, 
 eiTfibf}, CDS (when), ore, €Q)S, irpiu, &C. E. g. 
 
 'E7r€i8^ €T€\€VTT}(r€ AapcTo? Kai Karicrrr) "hpra^kpir^s, after Darius 
 had died and Artaxerxes had become eatablished. Xen. An. I, 1, 3. 
 Ou vpoaOfv €^€V€yicflv iroX^rjaav npos T)fxas TroXefiou, irplu roi/s 
 oTpaTTjyovs rjfiau avviXa^ov, before they had seized our generals. 
 Xkn. An. Ill, 2, 29. Ot b' ore bq \i^i€Pos nokv^cvOios €vt6s ikovto, 
 when they had entered. H. I, 432. So in Latin, postquam venit, after 
 he had come. 
 
 Note 5. The Aorist is sometimes used in colloquial language 
 by the poets (especially the dramatists), when a momentary action, 
 which vi just taking place, is to be expressed as if it had ah-eady 
 liappened. E. g. 
 
 "Enrjvecr* epyov koi npovoiav fjv edov, I must approve your act, &c. 
 SoPII.Aj. 53G. "WaOriv dnfiKah, eyeXaaa ylroXoKOfnrlais, I am 
 amused by your threats, I cannot help laughing, &c. Arist. Eq. 696. 
 
 Note 6. The Aorist sometimes refers vividly to the future, like 
 the Present or Perfect (§ 10, N. 7; § 17, N. 6) ; as dircoXo^irjv €i 
 /if Xei^iis, I perish if you leave me, Eur. Ale. 386. 
 
 So in questions with ri ov expressing surprise that something is 
 not already done, and implying an exhortation to do it ; as ri ovv 
 ov birjyrjaa; why then do you not tell us the story? Plat. Prot. 
 310 A. See also W ovif ovk cKaXeaapcv; Prot. 317 D. 
 
 B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods, 
 
 Remark. The Aorist of the dependent moods differs from 
 the Present as is explained in the Remark before § 12. 
 
5~ 
 
 il 
 
 26 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§20. 
 
 li 
 
 §20. The Aorist Subjunctive denotes a single or 
 momentary action, the time of which is determined by 
 the rules that apply to the time of the Present Subjunc- 
 tive, § 12 : — 
 
 That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or object^ after 
 tva, iiri, &c., it refers to time future relatively to the 
 leadmg verb ; in conditional sentences (including con- 
 ditional relative and temporal sentences),— in ordinary 
 protasis (§ 50, 1), the Subjunctive refers to i\\^ future; 
 in general suppositions after verbs of present time (§ 51), 
 it refers to indefinite time represented as present. In 
 independent sentences it refers to tho future. E. g. 
 
 £,eboiKa ^;) £7riX a ^co/i 6 ^a rJjff oUabe 6bov, I fear lest we may forget 
 the road home. Xen. An. Ill, 2, 25. Aiayofirai rrjv yecjyvpav \varai, 
 iy /i^ StajS^rf aXV diro\T}<pe^r€ , he intends to destroy the bridge, 
 that you may not pass over but be caught. Id. II, 4, 17. ^ Hi/ ttjv (iprjurjtf 
 7roiT]aa>fi€Ba, fiera ttoXX^? ao-(^aX€tay rrju iroKiv oi\^o-o/x€i/, if we 
 shall make the peace, &c. Isoc. Pac. p. 163 A. § 20. 'Gr Sj/ einru) 
 Tret^wue^a, let us obey as I shall direct. II. IX, 704. Uv tyyvs eXdrj 
 edvaros, ovMs jSovXfrai 6vfiaK€iv, if death comes near (the moment that 
 death comes near), no one wants to die. EuR. Ale. 671. Ov piv hv 
 iBrj dyvwra (sc o K^av), xa^f'^a'*'"* o" ^' av' yviapifxou (sc. idrf), 
 dtrrrdC^Tai, I e. whomsoever the dog sees {at anytime). Plat. Rep. II, 
 376 A. 'AvaXoyttrw/iie^a TO wfio\oyr]fX€va rjfilv, let us enumerate 
 the points which have been conceded by us. Plat. Prot. 332 D. 
 Mrjbiv (t>o(Br]0rjs, fear not (in this case). (But firjbev (^o^ov,be not 
 timid.) Tt TToi^o-o; what shall I do (in a single case)? (But ri 
 TToiw; what shall I do (generally)?) Ov fifj tovto eiTr.^s, you will 
 not saythL^. Ov nfj yevrjrai, it will not happen. So in the Ho- 
 merie ovbi iBafiai, nor shall 1 ever see. 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 
 Note 1. When the Aorist Subjunctive depends on tnttr 
 bdu (iirdv, inliv), after that, it is referred by the meaning of the 
 Darticle to a moment of time that precedes the action of the 
 leadin"" verb, so that cVeiSay tovto Ida), tXeva-opai means q^fter 
 J shall have seen this, I will come; and inttSav tovto iSa, 
 impxoixai, after I have seen this, I (always) depart. In such 
 cases it is to be translated by our Future Perfect, when the 
 leading verb is future ; and by our Perfect, when the leading 
 verb denotes a general truth and is translated by the Present 
 As the Subjunctive in this construction can never depend 
 
 § 20.] AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE AS FUTURE PERFECT. 27 
 
 upon a verb expressing simply present time, it is obvious that 
 it can never refer to time absolutely past: we use the Perfect 
 Indicative in translating such Aorists after verbs expressing 
 general truths, merely because we use the Present m translat- 
 ing the leading verb, although that is properly not merely 
 present, but general in its time. _ 
 
 In like manner, after .'<«, V". and other particles signify- 
 ing until, before thai, and even after the relative pronoun 
 or°.-av, the Aorist Subjunctive may be translated by our Future 
 Perfect or Perfect, when the context shows that it reters 
 to a moment of time preceding that of the leading verb. 
 
 X^'n SJ Stovu^p ner-ree Tois w/iovf, mold Ttw't tlirtv aKorrtiv, 
 
 Ztyo'mustlookVseeof.hat Und they are -hut af^ S'"" A"^" 
 enacted them, you mxcst guard and use them. Dem. >M ^25, 11. 
 (Here the Preient T.^iafl. after Srav, uMe, refers to f ^ctmn con- 
 Luino- through the time of the leadmg verb ; but V^f after 
 TmI aXrrhat, refers to time;,as( relatively to the lea<^ng_ verb ) 
 
 j;r^A- r.L« *«- -'A- «*-' %t'i' i3o"3 tnuZMi 
 
 hear I wiU speak of these things. Dem. Eubul. 1303, 25. (tlere tne 
 S X;, W absolutel? future, denotes t™e /.a.< w.A refe^ 
 
 have accomplished what I desire, I ml come Xen. An. U, 3, 29. 
 'E«.8A^ s/«ot.l^a)cr. 77, i>d,p HPW«Vos <m6 T,t TroXfat Xfy« e^ 
 awtLaL/rlJnpi.oll JeJLy have covered them <-^h earth 
 
 &c thuc. n, 34. '^•Ec., hv .rcif^Ta. to «ri<|.o., tot. xw ^po^;;/;"^ 
 
 TremaZin safely (Present) ; -i«< the moment that the sea has over- 
 JZed it (Aorist). Dem. kil. UI 128, 22. '£.,&- ..Mafls.. 
 ?Y- i\nlha, untU you have learnt fully, have hope. bovB. O. 1. 834. 
 Mia% Kiivn Jvi, <bh"-" ^iyv i^cLvi,v, o{ &p f,), ,vp^eo>j>v .s 
 lalotL andonebieris always earned empty in honor of the mm- 
 "7»*-a bodies have not been' found. Thuc. U,^ »*• T« «---. 
 
 thi^ of having ar.%al share in those things wheh Mers bytheu- 
 vat hive ae/mV.</»'xEN. Cyr. U, 3, 5. nivO' oV &v f^'^^l^ 
 ...-.vauivnt (lohvm TTpofflS, toOto Tolt ip(M<'°<'^^ ajToXXurm, aU 
 IZlTZcCZVLve ten) abandoned when p-.^^-"^ ^1 
 always lost to those who abandoned them. Dem. F. L. 888- 9- »" ? 
 Soa Koi rav nupa ad,aX5„riv, a.^eX^.VavTef SKXa .,rX,p«>(7a./ t,.. 
 lZaTif7heyhave bin disappointed in anything, they always supply 
 ¥ ,'J'- * 8,« Tuiir- T 70 ("See 5 30, 1) Oiyi navvopai, 
 the deficiency, &c. IHUC. 1, i». t^ee s " j'-.j „., J^^se before 1 
 
 C (shall have) made you masUr of your chddren. Soph. O. C 
 
 i 
 
I 
 
 28 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES 
 
 [§20. 
 
 1040. M^ .rrcVaf. ^ph ^iBnu do not groan untU you lave heard. 
 Soph. PhU. 917. . ,. • • w„.., i 
 
 Note 2. The use of the Aorkt S"^J"f ^'^ "Jl'^fp^erfect S^^ 
 eo.eti.es see- to app™^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 lunctive (§ 18, 1 ) < .f °'i,^J\,„^.M the idea of an action completed 
 L EngUsh. But w,th the Perf^'^he .dea o. a ^^^ ''^.^^^, 
 
 context. (See §18,1, Note.) i^-g- , , ;i' ;^„ ^^iomoi. 
 
 § 18, 1- 
 
 §21. 1. The Aorist Optative, whea it is not in in- 
 direct discourse, denotes a single or momentary action, 
 the time of which is determined by the rules that apply 
 to the time of the Present Optative, § 13, 1 : — 
 
 That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or oJy,ect, alter 
 Iva, S-,rm, M, &c., it refers to time future relatively to 
 the leading verb ; m conditional sentences (mcludmg 
 conditional relative and temporal sentences),— in ordi- 
 nary protasis (§ 50, 2), the Optative relers to the future 
 (only more vaguely than the Subjunctive) ; in general 
 suppositions after verbs of past time (§ 51), it refers to 
 indefinite past time. In independent sentences it refers 
 to the future. E. g. 
 
 ■ Vr':::\7wlLh\yZtecmeoJif danger and it was m thetr 
 «l/rTrr^l) to sT^o other commander., (in aU such cases) many 
 ^Ufim. XS?. An. k 6, 12. -Avev yap ipT^^<^v «M« a. o«« KoKov 
 
 § 21, 2.] 
 
 AOKIST OPTATIVE. 
 
 29 
 
 .^.^a6'o.yi^o.ro,r>omgcoum^^^^^^^ 
 
 '^eofeh^:^-^-^--^--. , ., 
 
 KoTE. When the Aorist Optative depends jon..«8,or^«^ 
 ofier, hat, it is referrf by the mea„„g of he gart.ele t^^^^^ ^^^ 
 of time preceding that of the ^'^''^^ \'"'°^' means after he 
 
 junctive \n § 20, N. 1, so *^'*7'«?rifsliv^ The Aorist in transla- 
 krf^^l«i"Te^e:rSoX^.. -«. and in the othe. 
 rases mentioned in § 20, N. 1. E.g. '/j„,^„ 
 
 > ' . TiP n<iked any ^chom he saw marcnuiy I'^y ^ y 
 
 fTT^i/fi, Ae os^ea ""^ ascertained, he praised them. Aen. I^jt*. v, 
 were; and after he had ascertainea i^ . , ^, 8ecr,io>r^pto.- 
 
 3, 55. mpie/AtJ'OfXfV c<a(rTor€ €0)5 ,"^°^ ^ tee trainee/ ea^ 
 LtS^ hi dvo.xO^t,^ ''""^''^''TCJZblTJ^^^^^^^ and after 
 marring unlil the prison was opened (o^ ^fj'' Ph^d. 59 D. olba- 
 itu^as ipened, -^ ^-^^ ^^l',^^^^^^^^^^^ before they had 
 
 %ced breakfast before them. Xen. An. IV, o, 30. 
 
 2 From the general rule for indirect discourse (§ 69, 
 1 ^ wP derive the following special rules :— 
 
 with reference to the leading verb. li. g. 
 
 •vniuici^ . fl„„A,i;o /Aev said rtanA« fenff *ad 
 
 then U became known that the *«™"«"' T -^ \i^oi^v,he dared to 
 n, 4, 22. 'Er.iXj«. X.y«. a,. ^oXXa to., c^-v A^ P ^^^^ ^5. 
 
 my that they had taken much of my P^"^'/^ jYm whether he had set 
 saUO.e.Iaskedh.m,heques^u,n^^nX^vja,)^^^ ^^^ ^ ^_ 
 
 21. ■E«.piTO Wm 'S"'' W„T I 31 So I, 116: ^'v^o K6e» 
 a^i, whom did you see ♦). Hdt. 1, dl. do , 
 
 ^"a'^ But if it represents an Aorist Subjunctive of the 
 dirt^dfs^ourse, it'denotes a -ment^y or -ge acUon 
 which is future with reference to the leading verb. 
 E. g. 
 
80 
 
 USE OP THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 21, 2. 
 
 Ol "ErrtSd/bivtoi tov Bebv iirripovTo «t Trapa^o^ev Kopivdlois r^ir 
 iroXtv, ^Ae.v os^-ec? whether they should deliver up their city to the Co- 
 rinthians (i. e. they asked the question^ napabayfifv t^v ttoXiv; shall 
 we deliver up our city ?). Thuc. I, 25. 'Eo-kottovi/ otras koWktt 
 fviyKaip.* avTovy I looked to see hoio I could best endure him (i. e. / 
 asked, TTcoy fveyKco ai/rov; how can I endure him?). EuR. Hipp. 
 393. Ateo-KUTTTyo-e aKonu>v o ri airoKplvairo , he continued silent, 
 thinking what he should answer (i. e. thinking, tI dTroKpivajjLai;)* 
 Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 10. 
 
 Remark. Examples of the Aorist Optative representing tlie 
 Aorist Subjunctive in a dependent clause of the direct discourse, to 
 which the same principles apply, may be found under § 74, 1. The 
 Aorist Indicative is, however, generally retained in dependent 
 clauses of indirect quotations: see § 74, 2, with N, 1. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen by a comparison of the examples 
 under (a) and (b), as in § 13, 2, Note 1, that an ambiguity 
 may sometimes arise from uncertainty whether the Aorist 
 Optative stands for the Aorist Indicative, or for tlie Aorist 
 Subjunctive in a question of doubt. Thus, fjyvoow on ttoiiJ- 
 o-ftav might mean, they knew not what they had done (the 
 Optative representing ti iiroiria-afiep ; what did we do ?), or they 
 knew not what they should do (the Optative representing ri 
 noif](Ta)fi€v ; what shall we do?). The context must decide in 
 each case ; but in most cases the latter construction is intended. 
 (For the manner of avoiding a similar ambiguity, see § 74, 2, 
 N. 1.) 
 
 § 2tJ, The Aorist Imperative refers to a momen- 
 tary or single action in future time ; as eiire fiot, tell 
 me; Bore fiot tovto, give me this. 
 
 § 23. The Aorist Infinitive has two distinct uses, 
 corresponding to the first two uses of the Present Li- 
 finitive (§ 15) : — 
 
 1. First, in its ordinary/ use (either with or without 
 the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse, 
 it denotes a momentary or single action without regard 
 to time, unless its time is especially defined by the con- 
 text. E. g. 
 
 UoXcox eWi B^varos dvaaraTov yeveaBat, it is death for a city to 
 he laid waste. Lycurg. in Leocr. p. 155, 35. § 61. "Qanep t&p 
 
 % 23, 1.] 
 
 AORIST INFINITIVE. 
 
 31 
 
 ssJtp s>;£"£ r-sx^-s '.^.^ 
 
 bring about a reconciliation. . . .and to P"^«^^J* , ^^^^ i, 
 
 1, Z4. .^^r^**,'. Ptat Theaet. 200 E. Udvres to KaraKiitiiv 
 to acquire knowledge. Flat. -Lheaet^ / ^^^^. 
 
 ?Snc^ Y'n' II: K^v:: aVr/jn^lt trc'oZands hJ to go 
 Tunc. Vil.,»*- ,»^'«i' j^g commanded him to go. KAtverci oi-roi. 
 
 tt'.'Xtaixi^i'rovs Aware, "^^''^f;^'^"'-"!', "tUZ 
 %eembal.v,he mZmed the capHves. D-M. F L. 4 2 21. Ec^^o 
 
 IS' Co/236, ^0 j^^p :^z^::;, rr."r-xi: 
 
 ^„„ .-I -°" ;°''-7J/f '23! C'S. Cor. 295, 13 ; EcR. Ore.t. 
 reason, why, occ. liiuc. i, ^o. v^i. 
 
 1529 
 Kemark. The Eemark which Mows § 15, 1 appUes ako to the 
 
 Aorist Infinitive. 
 
 Note 1 For a discussion of the time denoted by the Infinitive 
 when it hi the article and also a subject, see Appendix, tt 
 
 NOTE 2. xpa.. i.a.,i., ^^^^jh^:\^::j'^^^x^:^i^ 
 
 '\ZZt: FZZ) hlnrv: XltxTressel the command 
 'r.TTTr- T T>6 But we find auaXev ecreadai \n xti^^- , 
 
 •E xp'vo yip "o7.. s.ap.5..-,.., ? ^rizrn:rvn: ^20. 
 
82 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 r§ 23, 1. 
 
 painful disease at home, or perish at the hands of the Trojans. JL 
 Xin, 667. So after xPWl^'^^^ Plat. Rep. Ill, 415 C. 
 For the Present see § 15, 1. N. 2. 
 
 Note 3. The Present of ahioi dfii, I am the cause, is often used 
 with reference to the past, where logically a past tense should be 
 used ; as oLtios coti toxJtio Oavdv, he is the cause of his deaths instead 
 of airtoff ^v TovTio Oavelv, he ivas the cause of his death. This often 
 gives an ordinary Aorist Infinitive after this fomi the appearance 
 of a verb of past time, like the Aorist Infinitive in indirect discourse. 
 This will be explained in each case by mentally substituting a past 
 tense for the present. E. g. 
 
 A IT tot ovu elai koX vyiiv itoKkuiv rjhr) ylrfva-drjvai Ka\ bf) dbiKan 
 ye Tivas aTToXeaOai, they are the cause why you were deceived 
 and some even perished (i. e. they caused you to be deceived and 
 some even to perish). Lys. de Arist. Bon. 156, 28. § 51. TfOvaariV 
 oi de ^a)PT€S a IT 10 1 Baveiv. SoPH. Ant. 1173. "H fxoi fiTjTpl fiev 
 davelv fiovrf /ierairioff. SOPII. Trach. 1233. 
 
 For the construction of the Infinitive see § 92, 1, Note 2 (end). 
 
 2. Secondly, the Aorist Infinitive in indirect dis- 
 course is used to represent an Aorist Indicative of the 
 direct discourse, and therefore denotes a momentary or 
 single action, which is past relatively to the leading 
 verb. E. 
 
 g- 
 
 ^i](t\v tovto TToirja'ai, he says that he did this (i. e. he says tovto 
 f7roir}<ra). *E<^;; tovto TToi^aai, he said that he had done this (i. e. 
 he said tovto inoir)(Ta). ^T](rei tovto noirja-ai, he will say that he 
 did this (i. e. he will say tovto (Troirjaa). 'O Kvpos Xeycrai yeveaBai 
 Ka/ij3i;o-f Q>, Cyrus is said to have been the son of Cambyses, Aen. C}t. 
 I, 2, 1. IlaXatoraTot XeyovTai iv p-tpei Tivi Trjf ^oiypas KvAcXwTres 
 1 K^(T at, they are said to have settled. Thuc. VI, 2. Haav vTroTrroi 
 avTols fXTj TrpoOvfitos (r^iVi TreyL-^ai a t'nfp.^\rav, they were suspected 
 of not having sent tliem with alacrity what they did send. Tuuc. 
 VI, 75. 
 
 Note 1. The principle stated in § 15, 2, N. 1, will decide in 
 doubtful cases whether the Infinitive stands in indirect discourse or 
 in the construction of § 23, 1. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to ex- 
 pecty to promise, and the like, after which the Infinitive in 
 indirect discourse would naturally be in the Future (§ 27, N. 
 3), as representing a Future Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 sometimes take the Aorist (as well as the Present) Infinitive. 
 (See § 15, 2, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 'EcXirrro Kvhos dpiadaif he toos hoping to obtain glory. H. XH 
 
 AORIST INFINITIVE. 
 
 83 
 
 I 
 
 § 23, 2.] 
 
 407. naXiv tfxoX A ndpo, oHiTore ifX^iaev^aOeXv. EuR. Here. F. 
 
 IVtp^aaleaL^thei hoped to subdue Rhegium 'luvc. IV, 24 Ovb 
 
 the^r booming better. Dem. Phil. I, 40, 18 'Ek ^h tov Ka.o,. trpar- 
 
 „avTd7ra(n yeveaBai dvaaTUTOV Ka\ tS>u KOtv(ov €\irida>v aT€ prjGrjvai. 
 LyTuno iHeocr. p. 155, 30. § 60. (Cf below, iXf. iyov .a... 
 
 alTov, KUTaydyoc ot<a8f, having promised not to stop until he had re- 
 Toredihem I Jheir homes. Xex. An. I, 2, 2. 'Y^r.Vx.ro po. ^ovXev- 
 traaeai. Id. II, 3, 20. *H7rftX»7crai/ auoKTeivai arravrai tow ep 
 Tn oiKia. Xen. HeU. V, 4, 7. , , , 
 
 ' Note 3. In all the cases which belong under Note 2, the lead- 
 in- verb by its own signification refers to the future, so that the 
 expression is seldom ambiguous: thus Wecrxfro Troijaai can neyer 
 mean rnything but /ieprom1..rf to ^o, although the Aorist Infinitive 
 rpT^aHo represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 roEv to U5, 2, N. 1. The case is different, however, when the 
 rrisffnfiniWfohows verbs whose ^'^^'^^-'^'l^^^,^ 
 to the future, like voplC^, otopac, or even <t>ripi, and still appears to 
 represent a Future Indicative; e. g. where m Arist. Nub. 1141 
 \ZlaM<t>aai poc is said to mean, they say they wUl bring an 
 aS a^mnLn., while just below, vs 1180, ^iicr«.rd^^^ 
 uoL means, they say they wUl deposit the Prytaneia. Still, unless we 
 S^cide to corricti lar|e number of passages, against the authon y 
 of the Mss. (which i? actually done by many critics, especiallv 
 Madvt) we must admit even this anomalous construction ;ai. 
 fhorftistobe considered strictly exceptional, and is, moreover 
 ver^l-are in comparison with the regular one with the Future or the 
 
 Aorist with ai/. E. g. , , , , • i <i^ 
 
 *aro vap T.Vao-fla. ii\^ira,,for U said that he should puntsh the 
 
 nfflXr Od XX, 121. (In It. m, 28, we have in most Mss. and 
 
 tftiotiaVo #p ;.Vc<r()L ax«'r,., in precisely the same, sense 
 
 Cf II. Ill, 3GC;) Kal airA oi fi.>f aaflat 'Xnpivv (f • """"P""'"']: 
 
 tap^^'^e^iyhp KcX airosKai 5XXo« 5^.., and (he answered) 
 
 7<aAprks^hold not blame him ; for he would not only be present 
 
 itdf, but wouUl bring others. Hdt. II, 162 (NoUce the strange 
 
 transiiion from the Aorist (?) to the two futures.) ♦,a^ov8.^. 
 
 Atit 'Edii. 7riB(0 HKfifa^m tpno&i>v •rx'Seiv. Aesch. °ept- 4/»- 
 
 OlL vripJii.r.cVa. rik I think of imploring. EuR. Iph. AuU 
 
 462 (Tiere Hermann reads U^tiauv, by conjecture.) Emfu<ra. 
 
 •1V« 1^8-' .parii.a., they thought theyshouUgmn thev^tory 
 
 Xen Cvi. IV, 3, 15. ToCro 8^ oUrai oi piXicrra yti-tcrflat, u <ro. 
 ^ X and he thints that </m u,ouldbe mo.^ 'ft.fcTHe™ 
 *im 5/- he should join himself wUh you. Plat. Prot. 316 C. (Here 
 we should expect yfyitrSai Sv, to correspond to « avyyivoLTo.) 
 
 * I find 5«d.T£(r9a. here in Cod. Par. 2712, and by correction in 2820. 
 (1872.) 
 
84 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 23, ?s. 
 
 Note 4. Verbs like Xey<» or eiTrov, when they signiiy to com- 
 mandj can be followed by the Aorlst (as well as the Present) Infini- 
 tive in Its ordinary sense, referring to the future : as has beiin stated 
 in § 15, 2, N. 3. E. g. 
 
 ^ Q 0tXot, ^8rj fi€p K€V iyoiv etnotfii koI afifiiv fivrjaTripcov is ofxiKov 
 n*^*^ YY^?*' ^^^ /m?owW command you to Join me in hurling, &e. 
 Ud. AXII, 262. Uapadovvai Xe'yet» he tells us to qive her uv, 
 Arist. a v. 1670. i^ F 
 
 § 24. The Aorist Participle regularly refers to a 
 momentary or single action, which is past with refer- 
 ence to the time of the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 TaCra iroir]<ravTts oTreXdelu ^oCXovrai, having done tJil^, they 
 utsh to go away. Tavra f iVo'i/rf y in?i\6ov, having said thb, they 
 went away. Ol xroXXol (^alvovrai ^vveXeovrfs, not many appear 
 to have joined in the expedition. Thuc. I, 10. Bota,rol ol i$ "Apvns 
 avaa-ravTes rrjv Boitoriav yKrja-av, Boeotians who had been driven 
 from Arne settled Boeotia, Thuc. I, 12. 'A^tVero b.ipo t6 TrXoIot/, 
 
 the CephaMenians having determined to sail in, although this man op- 
 posed It Dem. m Zenoth. 886, 1 . (Here yv6ur<ou denotes time past 
 relatively to acpiKcro, and avrmparrovroi time present relatively to 
 yj/oi/Twv, which IS its leading verb. See § 16, 1. 
 
 Note 1. When the Aorist Participle is used to contain the 
 leading idea of the expression, with \ave^vu>, to escape the 
 notice of, rvyxav<i,, to happen, and 0^ava), to get the start of 
 (§112, 2), it does not denote time past with reference to the 
 verb, but coincides with it in time. Thus t\a6ov dne\e6in-€s 
 means thet/ went away secretly ; oIk t(t>dncrau dn^xedirres, no soon- 
 er were they gone; trv^ov ,\<TiK66vT,,, they came in by chance, or 
 they happened to come in. E. g. 
 
 r,wi r" fT'^^'A^^^^J'' '^V&op^^, nor did we come without 
 Circes knowledge Od. XII, 17. ^EXa^.. [avr^i.] &^6^vra navra 
 
 1Z ^"''''•^ r^^^'T^r ' ^^«'*y'^«'"5' took fire and teas consumed before 
 
 t/ TxvA^22^^^ "^^f.' 3p.^H;...o., heaimedailow 
 
 /irst. n, XVI, 322. Ov yhp 7(f>dfj fxoL <Tvp^a<Ta h drvxla, Ka\ 
 
 riT.r^/'' n""" 'T'r f ^ '^'^ rnisfortune come upon me, than they 
 undertook, &c. Dem. Eubul. 1319, 8. 2rpar,h ov noW^ e^vc u/J 
 lo-^^ou ,rap6X^ov<ra, an army of no great size had by chance 
 marched as far as the Isthmus. Thuc. VI, 61. ^Ervx. 8e .L rovrl 
 Tov Kotpov *X ^c. v,^ and he happened to come Just at that nick of time. 
 
 ^.ZIT-^' ^'^J^l- '%^«^^ ^^<^^^ed to accomplish only a Utile in 
 comparison with their expectations. Id. I, 70. " 
 
 §24.] 
 
 AORIST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 35 
 
 1 
 
 BovXoifirjv hv Xa^eiv avrov dirtXBavy I shoula tike lo getaicay 
 without his knowing it. Xen. An. I, 3, 1 7. Tovs dvdpaynovs Xria-op-ep 
 €7rin€a6vT€s. Id. VII, 3, 43. EvXa/Seto-^ai TrapcuceXfiia-fade aX- 
 XiJXois, firj nepa tov Beovros <To<^ccT€poL y€v6p.€Voi Xf)(T€T€ 8ia<l)6ap€V' 
 Tfff, lest, having become vnser than is proper, you shall become cor- 
 rupted before yot. know it. Plat. Gorg. 487 D. (Here yevoptvoi is 
 an ordinary Aorist, past with reference to the phrase Xrjaere 6ia(^^a- 
 p€VT€s.) 'OirTTOTfpos K€ (^6fi(Tiv 6pf^dp.€vos xpoo KoKov, wMchcvcr 
 shall first hit, &c. II. XXUl, 805. 
 
 The last four examples show that this use of the Participle was 
 allowed even when the whole expression referred to the future. 
 
 Note 2. A use of the Aorist Participle similar to that 
 
 noticed in Note 1 is found after irepiopda and f(l>opdai (nepieldop 
 
 and cVelSoi/) to allow, and occasionally after other verbs which 
 
 take the Participle in the sense of the Infinitive (§ 112, 1). 
 
 In this construction the Aorist Participle seems to express 
 
 merely a momentary action, the time being the same that the 
 
 Aorist Infinitive would denote if it were u^ed in its place 
 
 (§ 23, 1). E. g. 
 
 npocrb€x6p€vos TOVS *A9r)vaiovs KaTOKvfj(r€iv Tr^pubtlv avTrjV [rriv yrju^ 
 TanOelirav, dvfix^v, expecting that they would be unwilling to allow their 
 land to be ravaged, &c. Thuc U, 18. But in n, 20, we find the 
 Aorist Infinitive, TjXinCfv ttjv yrjv ovk au TrepuSeii/ Tp,rj6fjvai, refer- 
 ring- to precisely the same thing. M^ irepiidrjre fipeas diacpdapev- 
 rar, do not allow us to be destroyed. Hdt. IV, 118. Ov p.r) <r iya 
 rrepio^opai dTreXOovTa, I will by no means let you go. Arist. 
 Ran. 509. "ErXr^aav iniBelv .... tprjpr}^ f^^^ "^h^ ttoXiv yepoptvTjV, 
 TTjv be xo>paunopdovfjL€VTjv, .... aTravra be tou Tr6X€pov irepX ttjv 
 iraTplda Trjv avTcov yiyvofievov. Isoc Pan. p. 60 D. § 96. (Here 
 the Aorist Participle denotes the laying waste of the city (as a single 
 act), while the Presents denote the continuous ravaging of the coun- 
 try, and the gradual coming on of a state of war. This is precisely 
 the difference that there would be between the Present and Aorist 
 Infinitive in a similar construction. See note on the passage, added 
 to Felton's 3d ed. p. 99.) So irpaeivja rX^mi, endured to be sold. 
 Aesch. Agam. 1041 ; and (nrfipas erXa, Sept. 754. 
 
 Instances occur of the Aorist Participle in this sense even with 
 other verbs, denoting that in which the action of the verb consists; 
 as fu y €7roir)(ras dvap.vr](Tas }i€, you did well in reminding me. 
 Plat. Phaed. 60 C. So KaTayl^rjcpicrdpevoi, Apol. 30 D. 
 
 Remark. If a reference to the past is required in the Participle 
 with the verbs mentioned in Notes 1 and 2, the Perfect is used. 
 The Present can of course be used to denote a continued action or 
 state. E. g. 
 
 "ETvyxavov ^pTiir a p € iX rj (j) 6 t € s ttju dpxh^^ they happened to hav 
 
36 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 L§24. 
 
 iust received their authority. Teuc. VI, 96. 'Eav ris ri^iKrjKas n 
 Tvyxainj rrjv itoXlv. Dem. Cor. 268, 23. 'EXddo^ev rjfias avrovi 
 irai8a>v ovbiu Sta</)«poi/r f ff . Plat. Crit. 49 B. 
 
 Note 3. In such passages as cDfioXoyrja-ap rdls *AdT)vaiois rfixi 
 Tf TTcpif Xoi/rcff Koi vavs irapadovres (popov re ra^d/xfi/ot, 
 Thuc. I, 108, the Aorist Participle is used in its ordinary sense, 
 being past with reference to the time of the beginning of the peace 
 to ^vhich o)iio\6yr]<Tav refers. The meaning is, they obtained terms 
 of peace^ on condition that they should first (i. e. before the peace 
 began) tear down their laalls, &c. (Such passages are Thuc. I, 101, 
 108, 115, 117. See Kriiger's Note on I, 108, and Madvig's Bemer- 
 kungeny p. 46.) 
 
 Note 4. For the use of the Aorist Infinitive and Participle with 
 av, see § 41, 3. For the Aorist Participle with c^ci), as a circumlo- 
 cution for the Perfect, as ^av/xaW? ex«' see § 112, N. 7. For the 
 rare use of the Aorist Participle with ea-ofiat, as a circumlocution for 
 tlie Future Perfect, see § 29, N. 4. 
 
 Future. 
 
 § 25. 1. The I'\iture denotes that an action will 
 take place in time to come ; as ypayjrco^ I shall write^ or 
 I shall he writing. 
 
 Note 1. The action of the Future is sometimes continued, 
 
 and sometimes momentary: thus e^w may mean either I shall 
 
 have, or / shall obtain ; ap^a, I shall rule, or / shall obtain 
 
 power, E. g. 
 
 npayfiarevovrai ottcoj ap^ovaiv , they take trouble to gain power. 
 Xex. Rep. Laced. XIV, 5. Aiaiperc'oi/ oinvfi ap^ovalv t€ ical 
 ap^ovrai, we must distinguish between those who are to rule and 
 those who are to be ruled. Plat. Rep. Ill, 412 B. 
 
 Note 2. The Future is sometimes used in a gnomic sense, to 
 denote that something will always happen when an occasion offers. 
 E.g. 
 
 *Avfip 6 (f>€vyaiv koi irdKiu fiaxr}<r€rai. Menand. Monost. 45. 
 
 Note 3. The Future is sometimes used to express what will 
 hereafter be proved or recognized as a truth. This is analogous to 
 the use of the Imperfect, § 11, N. 6. E. g. 
 
 ^i\6(ro(f>os tiplv €(Trat, 6 fifWav koKos KciyaBbs €(r€(rdai (f>v\a^, he 
 ** will prove to be a philosopher. Plat. Rep. 11, 376 C. See Od. II. 270, 
 
 Note 4. The Future is sometimes used in questions oj doubtf 
 where the Subjunctive is more common (§ 88). E. g. 
 
 future indicative. 
 
 37 
 
 S 25, 1.] 
 
 T/ «^a ipS>pi.u; fxrjrep' ? c^o.cvVo^cv; whatcan we do f shall 
 we kiU our mother f EuR. El. 967. Hol n, rpeylr€rai; whither 
 shall one turn ? A e ^ <r ^ € , ^ a7rl<ofx,v ; wUl you receive him, or shall 
 we go away? Plat. Symp. 212 E. EiV ey^ <^«" feiaopai; Ari^t. 
 Acharn. 312. Ti o^i/ rroi ijcro /if v; iroTfpoi/ eis rrju ttoXip nauras 
 Tovrovs 7rapab,^6peea; what then shall we do f A re we to receive 
 all these into the state f Plat. Rep. Ill, 397 D. 
 
 Note 5. (a.) The second person of the Future may express a 
 concession, permission, or obligation, and is often a mild form ot 
 imperative. E. g. 
 
 Dpi. ravra rrpa^^i^ oXov hv BeXrj,, you may act as you please 
 Soph. O. C. 956. Udvr cos be Tovro bpda.is , but by all means do 
 this Arist. Nub. 1352. So in the common imprecations, airoXfurde, 
 oi>a)|e(r^6, may you perish, &c. Xetpl d' ov yjraiaeis noTt. EUR. 
 Med. 1320. 
 
 (b.) A few instances occur in which the Future Indicative with 
 u,7 expresses a prohibition, like the Imperative or Subjunctive with 
 
 uH§86). E.g. . . , . ^ 
 
 TaCrnv, &v fiot XP^^^^ (rvp^oC\<o, <^vXa|rre rrjv moTLV, Kai jir, 
 
 fiovX^V.cr^e «6eW, <• r. X., if you foUow ^U J^/^^^^^ ^^fP ^^^1 
 
 faith, and do not wish to know, &c. Dem. Anstoc. 6o9, 15. Eav dj 
 
 &hZ hixT.r.. Lys. Phil. §13. (In the preceding examples 
 d)vXa^€r. and Troc^aere belong under a) Kat ra^a^ ''%ll^X\ 
 
 672. S.Vo. dBiKlja.i, ^r;i'7rore Kaipbu Xa^^u. Menan. Mon 
 397. So perhaps iirjbiu t^vS' cpeU Kara tttoXlv. Aesch. bept. 
 250. . ... . 
 
 These examples are sometimes explained by supposing an eUipsis 
 of oTTcoff from the common construction ottws p.rj tovto epeis [sc. 
 (TKOTret)- ^e § 45, N. 7. 
 
 Remark. The use of the Future stated in Note^ 5 gives the 
 most satisfactory explanation of the Future with ov prj ,\n^^prohibi- 
 tions, especially in such expressions as ou pn XaXr^aeis, a\\ aKo^Qv- 
 eh(T€L, €>€, do not prate, but follow me, and ou pri 7rpo(roi(7«9 x"P«; 
 r^?5V« 7r.'7rXo,.,^/o not bring your hand near me, nor touch mt 
 garments. See § 89, 2, with Notes. 
 
 Note 6. The Future sometimes denotes a present intention, 
 expectation, or necessity that something shall be done, in winch 
 sense the periphrastic form with ^'XXo> is more common. 1^. g. 
 
 Ti' biacbepovtTL rS>v i^ dvdyKTi^ KOKcmaBovvrcou , « y* ttov^ctoviti 
 
 they are to endure hunger and thirst, &c. Xex. Mem. H, 1, 17. 
 (Here .1 p^XXova. ^«4 kuI BiVn^, &c. would be more common as 
 in the last example under § 25, 2.) Alpe 7rXrjKrpou,<n /x a x . i^ra^^ 
 tfovr spur, if you are going to fight. Arist. Av. 7a9. The impii> 
 
88 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 25, I. 
 
 tance of this distinction will be seen when we come to conditional 
 sentences. (See § 49, 1, N. 3.) 
 
 ^ A still more emphatic reference to a present intention is found 
 in the question W Xe^ets; what dost thou mean to say? often found 
 
 in tragedy; as''Qfioi, rl Xt^eis; 7i yhp iyyvs iarl irov ; EuR. Elec. 
 1124. I I r tt 
 
 Note 7. For the Future Indicative and Infinitive with 5i/, 
 see § 37, 2, and § 41, 4. For the Future Indicative in protasis, 
 Bee § 50, 1, N. 1 ; in relative clauses expressing a purpose, &c., see 
 § 65, 1 and 2 ; with oh ^ifi, see § 89. 
 
 2. A periphrastic Future is formed by /xeWo) and the 
 Present or Future (seldom the Aorist) Infinitive. This 
 form sometimes denotes mere futurity7 and sometimes 
 intention, expectation, or necessity. E. g. 
 
 MAXet TovTo irpcLTTfiv (or irpa^tiv), he is about to do this, or he 
 intends to do this. So in Latin, facturus est for faciet. M e X X « Ifxas 
 di8d^€iVj odev fxoi rj Bta^oXfj yfyov€. Plat. Apol. 21 B. A€T}(r€i 
 Tov ToiovTov Tivos dfl fViOTarou, ft fxeWei fj TToXtrfta (rcb^fo-^at, 
 if the constitution is to be preserved. Plat. Rep. lU, 412 A. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Infinitive after ^i\\a> forms the only 
 regular exception to the general principle of the use of that 
 tense. (See § 27, N. 1.) The Future and the Present seem 
 to be used indiscriminately. 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect (seldom the Aorist) of fX€\\<o is 
 used to express a past intention or expectation. E. g. 
 
 Ki;<X<i)ifr, ovK ap f/xeXXfff dvakKibos dvdpos eraipovs fSfifvai iv 
 oTrfji y\a<j>vp^, you surely were not intending to eat, &c. Od. IX, 475. 
 E/if XXo'i/ (T apa Kivfjcreiv cyo), / thought I should start you off'. 
 Arist. Nub. 1301. See II. 11. 36. 
 
 § 26. The Future Optative in classic Greek is used 
 only in indirect discourse after secondary tenses, to 
 represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. 
 Even here the Future Indicative is very often retained 
 in the indirect discourse. (See § 69.) E. g. 
 
 Y7r«7ra>i/ raXXa on avros rd^fet Trpa^ot, ^x^ro, having suggested 
 as to what remained, that he would himself attend to the affairs there, 
 he departed. Thuc. I, 90. (Here Trpa^oi represents 7rpa^<o of the 
 direct discourse, which might have been expressed by Trpa^ft in 
 the indirect quotation. See in the same chapter of Thucydides, 
 iiroKpivdfxevoi on 7r//x>/rov(rii/, having replied that they would send^ 
 
 §26.] 
 
 FUTURE OPTATIVE. 
 
 39 
 
 where Trefiyf/oiwv might have been used.) Et nva (fxvyovra X 4 >^ o i r o , 
 irpoTjyopevfv on cos TToXc/rn'o) xprjaoirO' Xex. Cyr. Ill, 1, 3. 
 (Here the announcement was et nua \r]y^opxu^ asTroXiplco xpr)(Topai.^ 
 *EXeyfi/ on eroipos tirj r^yfladai. avToli tis to AeXra, €v6a noWa 
 Xrj-^oivTo. Xen. An. VII, 1, 33. AlpcSevrts €(f> WTf ^vyypdyjrai 
 vopovs, KaO^ ovoTivas iroXiTevaotvTo, having been chosen for the 
 purpose of making a code of laws, by which they were to govern. Xex. 
 Hell, n, 3, 11. (Here we have an indirect expression of the idea 
 of the persons who chose them, of which the direct form is found 
 just before (II, 3, 2), eSo^f rpidKovra avdpas iXiadait oL tovs irarplovs 
 pofiovs ^vyypdylrovai, Kaff ov? 7roXtTfV(rovo"t.) 
 
 Remark. The term indirect discourse here, as elsewhere, must 
 be understood to include, not only all cases of ordinary indirect 
 quotation, introduced by on or ©s or by the Accusative and the 
 infinitive, after verbs of saying and thinking, but also all dependent 
 clauses, m any sentence, which indirectly express the thoughts of 
 any other person than the writer or speaker, or even former thoughts 
 of the speaker himself. (See § 68.) 
 
 Note 1. The Future Optative is sometimes used in final 
 and object clauses after secondary tenses ; but regularly only 
 with oTTcof or oTTOJs pri after verbs of striving, &c., occasionally 
 with ixri (or oiTfus prj) after verbs o£ fearing, and very rarely (if 
 ever) in pure final clauses. As these clauses express the pur- 
 pose or fear of some person, they are in indirect disooune 
 according to the Remark above. (See § 44, 2.) 
 
 (a.) The most common case of the Future Optative in sen- 
 tences of this class is with oTrwr or oirwi fi^ after secondary 
 tenses of verbs signifying to strive, to take care, and the like ; 
 the Future Indicative in this case being the most common 
 form in the construction after primary tenses, which here cor- 
 responds to the direct discourse. Thus, if any one ever said 
 or thought, aKona> onois tovto yfuffatTai, lam taking care that 
 this shall happen, we can now say, referring to that thought, 
 icTKOTTfi oTTWff TOVTO y€vf}(roiTo, hc was taking care that this 
 should happen, changing the Future Indicative to the Future 
 Optative (§ 77). E. g. 
 
 *Eo"/c(57rft 6 M€V€kK^s oiras firj tcroiTO airais-, aXX* ta-oiTO avr^ 
 oaris ((ovrd t€ yr\poTpo^r](Toi Ka\ T(\(VTT](TavTa Bd-^ot avTov, 
 Koi fls Tov cTTCira xpovov ra vop.i(6p€va avTM iToir}a'oi . ISAE. de 
 Mcnecl. Hered. § 10 (11). 'Eprjxavapfda oiras firjdfts . . . . 
 yvtixroiTO, vop.tov(n 5c Travrcf, k. t. X., we were striving that no one 
 should know, &c., but that all should think, &c. Plat. Tim. 18 C 
 (Here the second verb, voynovin, is retained in the Future Indicar 
 
40 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§26. 
 
 tlve, wlule the other, yvaxrrrat, is changed to the Optative.) See 
 also Plat. Tim. 18 E. MijSeV oiov SXXo firjxavaadai, rj otto)? .... 
 b€$oivTo. Plat. Rep. IV, 430 A.^ (See § 15, 3.) *E7r€ fitXtlro 
 de OTras ^rjTf aciToi fjLTjre ihrtyroi irore ZaoivTo- Xen. Cyr. VIII, 1, 
 43. Other examples are Plat. Apol. 36 C ; Xen. Cyr. VIII, 
 1, 10, Hell. VII, 5, 3 ; Isae. de Philoct. Ilered. p. 59, 41. § 35. 
 
 In this construction the Future Indicative is generally retained, 
 even after secondary tenses. See § 45. 
 
 (b.) The Future Optative is seldom found with /iij or ottws 
 liri after secondary tenses of verbs of fearing, as here the 
 Future Indicative is not common after primary tenses. E. g. 
 
 Ov fiouov TTfpi TTjs ^aa-dvov Koi rrjs BUrji e5«SoiK€t, aXXa *cat TTfpt 
 Tov ypafifJMT€iov, oTrcoy fi^ imb tov M(P€^6vov a-vWT](p6T}(ToiTO , 
 Isoc. Trapez. p. 3G3 B. § 22. (Here the fear was expressed origi- 
 nally by oTTWff fif) (jv\\rj(j)dr}(T€Tai.) Kare^aXe to 'UpaKKfcoriov Tftxos, 
 ov TovTO (po^ovpevos, M Ttves . . . • TTOpevcroivro eirl ttjv tKeivov 
 dvuaniu. Xen. Hell. VI, 4, 27. *AXXa koi tovs 6€ovi au fdfiaas 
 7rapaKivdvv€V€iVy ^.rj ovk 6p6(li)S avTO irotTja-ois- Plat. Euthyplu*. 
 
 15 D. 
 
 Here the Present or Aorist Optative, corresponding to the same 
 tenses of the Subjunctive after primary tenses, is generally used. 
 See § 46, 
 
 (c.) In pure Final clauses (§ 44, 1) It would be difficult to find 
 an example of oiras with the Future Optative, in which the weight 
 of Mss. authority did not favor some other reading. Such is the 
 case in Xen. Cyr. V, 4, 17, and in Dem. Phaenipp. 1040, 20. Still, 
 there can be little doubt of the propriety of such a construction, as 
 the Future Indicative with 6n<as was m use (though rare) after 
 primary tenses. (§ 44, 1, N. 1.) ^ ^ 
 
 The single example cited for the use of the simple fif) with the 
 Future Optative in a pure final clause is Plat. Rep. HI,^ 393 E : 
 *Ayap^pva>v r)yplaiv€v, tureWopevos vvv re diruvai koi avdis p^ iXdelvy 
 prj avT^ TO T€ a-K^TTTpov Ka\ TO, TOV Ofov areppaTa OVK firapKeaoi. 
 (Here there is another reading, enapKiafiev^ of inferior authority, 
 which is adopted by Bekker.) If the reading enapKeaoi is retedned 
 (as It Is by most editors), it can be explained only by assuming that 
 Plato had in his mind as the direct discourse pfj ovk cVapKcVet. 
 We must remember that Plato Is here paraphrasing Homer (11. 1, 
 25-28), and by no means literally. The Homeric line is MiJ vv 
 TOt OV xpat<r pu aKfjirrpov kol artppa ofOLO. 
 
 The Other final particles, Iva and ws, which seem never to take 
 the Future Indicative, of course do not allow the Future Optative. 
 (See § 44, 1, N 1.) 
 
 Note 2. Many authors, especially Thucydides, show a decided 
 preference for the Future Indicative, even where the Future Opta- 
 tive might be used. As the tense was restricted to indirect dis- 
 
 S27.J 
 
 future infinitive. 
 
 41 
 
 course, it was a less common form than the Present and Aorist, and 
 for that reason often avoided even when it was allowed. 
 
 § 97. The Future Infinitive denotes an action 
 which is future with reference to the leading verb. 
 E.g. 
 
 "Ea-fcrdai (prjai, he says that he will he ; ea-caOai tcjyrjy he said that he 
 noidd he ; iaccrOai (Prjaeiy he icill say that he will he. HoWovi yt 
 fo-ecrOaL tXeyov tovs edf^rjaovTasi they said that there loould he many 
 who would he willing. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 2, 26. 
 
 Note 1. The most common use of the Future Infinitive 
 is in indirect discourse, after verbs of saying^ thinking, &c., to 
 represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. (See 
 the examples above.) In other constructions, the Present and 
 Aorist Infinitive, being indefinite in their time, can always 
 refer to the future if the context requires it (§§ 15, 1 ; 23, 1) ; 
 so that it is seldom necessary to use the Future, unless 
 emphasis is particularly required. 
 
 Therefore, after verbs and expressions whose signification 
 refers a dependent Infinitive to the future, but which yet do 
 not introduce indirect discourse, as verbs of commanding, 
 wishing, &c. (§ 15, 2, N. 1), the Present or Aorist Infinitive 
 (not the Future) is regularly used. Thus the Greek would 
 express they tcish to do this not by ^ovXovrai tovto 7ronja-€ip, 
 but by ^ovXovrai TOVTO iroifiv (or iroirjaai). See examples 
 under §§ 15, 1 and 23, 1. So, when the Infinitive follows 
 &<jT€ and other particles which refer it to the future, or is used 
 to denote a purpose without any particle (§ 97), — and when 
 it is used as a noun with the article, even if it refers to future 
 time, — it is generally in the Present or Aorist, unless it is 
 intended to make the reference to the future especially em- 
 phatic. See examples in Chapter V. 
 
 A single regular exception to this principle is found in the 
 Future Infinitive after fiiWa (§ 25, 2). 
 
 Note 2. On the other hand, when it was desired to make 
 the reference to the future especially prominent, the Future 
 Infinitive could be used in the cases mentioned in Note I, 
 contrary to the general principle. 
 
 (a.) Thus we sometimes find the Future Infinitive aftei 
 
42 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§27. 
 
 verbs and expressions signifying to msh, to he unvnUtngy to 
 intend, to ask, to he ahle, and the like, where we should expect 
 the Present or Aorist. This was particularly a favorite con- 
 struction with Thucydides. E. g. 
 
 *EB€r]6r)crav be Koi tS>v Meyapeau vavai (r(f>as ^v/i7rpo7re/x^^e tf . 
 Thug. I, 27. *E^ov\ovto irpoTifKoprja-fo-dai. Id. VI, 57. T6 
 GTOfia avTov di€voovvTo kX 17 ere 1 1/. Id. VII, 56. E<f>t,en€voi fiev rfji 
 7rd<TT]s ap^ftVj fiorjBelv de apa evirpfnuis ^ovXopevoi rois eavTotu 
 ^uyyei/fo-i /cat ^vppdxois. Id. VI, 6. (Here ^ot]3(Ip follows the rule.) 
 Toi) Ta7s vaval prj ddvpfiv err ixeipr)a-fiv^ to prevent them from being 
 without spirit to attack them in ships. Id. VII, 21. Ovr dnoK(o\v- 
 aeiv dvvaroi ovres. Id. Ill, 28. Et ny ety tovto dva^oKKtrai Trot^- 
 a-€iv Ttt hiovra^ if any one postpones doing his duty as far as thui. 
 Dem. 01. Ill, 31, 1. (The ordinary construction would be dva^dk- 
 Xerat Troteli/ or notrjaai.) Ovre tu>v wpoyovcov pfpvrjaOai [Set] ovrt 
 rav XfyovTOiv dve^ftrdaiy vopov t€ 6t]<T€iv koI ypd'^eip ^ /c. r. X. 
 Dem. F. L. 345, 27. (Here we have Set B^treiv.) UoWov Sew 
 e/Liavrdv ye dbiKrjaeiv Koi kqt ipnvTov ipelv avros. Plat. Apol. 
 37 B. In Arist. Nub. 1130 we find, lo-wy /SouX^o-erat kclv iv 
 AtyvTTTO) T V ;^ e T 1/ a>v paWov fj Kplvai KaKoas^ perhaps he will wish that 
 he might (if possible) find himself by some chance in Egypt, rather than 
 wish to Judge unfairly. (Here rvx^^v av is use<l in nearly the same 
 sense as the Future in the second example. In this example and 
 some others here given there seems to be an approach to the con- 
 struction of indirect discourse.) 
 
 See also Thug. IV, 115 and 121 ; V, 35 ; VII, 11 ; VIII, 55 and 
 74. In several of these passages the Mss. vary between the Future 
 and Aorist, although the weight of authority is for the Future. See 
 Kriiger's Note on Thug. I, 27, where the passages of Thucydides 
 are collected. 
 
 (h.) In like manner, the Future Infinitive is occasionally 
 used for the Present or Aorist, after wore and in the other 
 constructions mentioned in Note 1, to make the idea of futurity 
 more prominent. E. g. 
 
 UpoKaXfcrdpevos eV \6yovs ^iTrntav, ware rjv prjBev dpeaKOv Xey7, 
 TraXti/ aiiTou Karaa-TTj ae iv e'y to Tei;(Off, on condition that he 
 tvould in that case restore him. Thug. Ill, 34. Tovs 6pj]povs nape- 
 doaav ro) *Apyeia)z/ drjpa dia ravra 8 tax pr] a € a 6 at , that they might 
 put them to death. Thug. VI, 61. So Treuo-eo-^m, III, 26. '^EXnidi 
 TO d(f>av€s Tov KttTopB utae iv (niTpi-^avTis-, having committed to hope 
 what was uncertain in the prospect of success. Thug. II, 42. (Here 
 KaTop$6i<r(iv is more explicit than the Present KaropOovv would be : 
 TO d(pav€s TOV KOTopOovv would mean simply what was uncertain in 
 regard to success.) To pev ovv e^eXe'y^eti/ avTov dappa kqI ndw 
 niaT€va>, I have courage and great confidence as to my convicting him. 
 Dem. F. L. 342, 2. (Here most of the ordinary Mss. read c^eXeyx**"') 
 
 §29.] 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 43 
 
 Note 3. The Future Infinitive is the regular form after 
 verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c., since it stands here 
 in indirect discourse (§ 15, 2, N. 1). E. g. 
 
 Tpcocriv 8 eXTrero 6vp6s vrjas €vnrp^a-€iv Krevefiv & TJpcDas 
 Axaiovs. II. XV, 701. 'Yiro t t(T\fro kol KOTeveva-eu dcoa-e pevai. 
 11. XIII, 368 Uaidd re aou npocrboKa toi dnovoa-Trjaeiv . Hdt. 
 1,42. Km TTpoa-boKCLv xpn deanoa-eiv Zrjvos Tiva ; Aesgh. From. 
 930.^ "HXinCfu yap pdxrjv e(r6(r<9ai. TilUG. IV, 71. *Ev fXnl8i 
 uv TO. Tflxrj aipr)(T€iv. Id. VII, 46. Toy (TTparrjyvu irpo(r8oKoi) Tavra 
 7rpa|etj/. Xen. An. Ill, 1, 14. *Eac tovtov vnfaxfTo prixavf)V 
 jrape^etv. Id. Cyr. VI, 1, 21. 2v yap vneaxov CrjTliaeiv . Plat. 
 Rep. IV, 427 E. So 8i(opoToi ^ fi^u&^eiv, Soph. Phil. 594. 
 
 Yet all of these verbs can take the Aorist or Present Infinitive 
 without apparent change of meaning. They form an intermediate 
 class between verbs which take the Infinitive in indirect discourse 
 and those which do not. For examples of the Present and Aorist, 
 see § 15, 2, N. 2 ; and § 23, 2, N. 2. 
 
 § 28. The Future Participle denotes an action 
 which is future with reference to the leading verb. 
 E.g. 
 
 TovTO not,Tj(r<ov epx^rai, ^\0€v or e'Xevcerat, he comes, went, or 
 will come, for the purpose of doing this. Oi8a avrov tovto 7roiT)<TovTa, 
 J know that he will do this : olda tovto noirja-av, I know that I shall 
 do this. So jfSeij/ avrov tovto TroLTjaouTa, I knew that he would do 
 this. 
 
 Note. For the various uses of the Future Participle, and ex- 
 amples, see Chapter VI. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 § 20 • The Future Perfect denotes that an action 
 will be already finished at some future time. It is thus 
 a Perfect transferred to the future. E. g. 
 
 Knt pe (av e'^eXey^r^y, ovk axOfcdrjaopai (roi, dWa peyiaros eCep- 
 yeTijs nap* epol dvayeypa>/ret, you will hove been enrolled as the 
 greatest benefactor. Plat. Gorg. 506 C. *Hv Se pri ytvrjTai, paTr^v 
 tpo\ K€ K\av(r€Tai, av 8' €yxav<i>v t€ 0ptj ^e is . I shall then have 
 had my whipping for nothing, and you will have died, Arist. Nub. 
 1435 
 
 Note 1. The Future Perfect often denotes the cent in- 
 
44 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 L§29. 
 
 § 30, 1.] 
 
 GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 
 
 45 
 
 nance of an action, or the permanence of its results, in future 
 time. £. g. 
 
 TVS Bvudufcos is al^iov roTs imytyvofi^vois HvrjM ^araXcXfi- 
 >i..rai, themeinon/ of our poicer ivUl be left to onv posterity Jorever. 
 Tiiuc. II, 64. (Compare § 18, 2.) 
 
 Note 2. The Future Perlect sometimes denotes the cer- 
 tainty or likehhood that an action will immediately take place, 
 which idea is still more vividly expressed by the Perfect (§ 17, 
 Note 6). E. g. 
 
 \€\Ca€rai, all the present fear will be at once dispelled. J)lm. 
 Symmor. 178, 17. (Here the inferior Mss. have X.Xvrm, which 
 would have the same force, like 5Xa,Xa quoted m § 17, JN b.; 
 ^pdC^, Ka\ TT.Trpai.rat, speak, and it shall be no sooner said dian 
 done. Arist. Tlut. 1027. Evdvs 'Apiaios a(p€(rrTi^(t, u)(rr€ (pihos 
 Jiiuv ovSets XeXei'^jrerat. Xen. An. U, 4, 5. 
 
 Note 3. The Future Perfect can be expressed by the 
 Perfect Participle and eaoyim. In the active voice this com- 
 pound form is the only one in use, except in a few verbs. 
 
 E. g. . X , 
 
 *Ai/ raCr* «8c5/i€»', KaXrhhiovra icrS^i^ea iyv<0K6T€S Kai Xoy<ov 
 uara.W dnrj\\ay^.iuoi. we shall have already resolved to do ow 
 duty and shall have been freed from vain reports. Dem. i iul. 1, M, 
 22. (See § 17, N. 2). 
 
 Note 4. A circumlocution with the Aorist Participle and 
 ZiTOfuu is sometimes found, especiaUy in the poets. E. g. 
 
 Oi5 aK^irncTOS cVet; SoPH. 0. T. 1146. Avnrjeels ?(r«. SoPH. 0. 
 C. 816. 
 
 Note 5. (a.) When the Perfect is used in the sense of a Present 
 (§ 17, N. 3), the Future Perfect is the regular Future of that tense. 
 
 'K«X4(ro;iat, fi^^iuliaofuu, a<^e(rrii5«, / shall he named, I shall re- 
 fuemher, I shall toithdraw, &c. 
 
 (b.) With many other verbs, the Future Perfect differs very 
 slightly, if at all, from an ordinary Future. Thus, rr^Trpaaofiai is the 
 regular Future Passive of mnpdtTK<o. StiU, where there is another 
 fo?m, the Future Perfect is generally more emphatic, and may be 
 explained by Note 1 or Note 2. 
 
 Note 6 The Future Perfect of the dependent moods is rare, 
 except m the verbs referred to in Note 5. When it occurs, it 
 presents no pecuharity, as it bears the same relation to the Indicative 
 which the corresponding forms of the Future would bear. J!., g. 
 
 Tavra (<^»;trO ircnpa^eaBai 8voiv fj rpiav fjfifpiiv, he says that 
 these things will have been accomplished ivithin two or three days. 
 I)em. F. L. 364, 18. (Here the direct discourse was 7r€7rpd$€Tai) 
 
 Remark. It must be remembered tliat, in most cases in which 
 the Latin or the English would use a Future Perfect, the Greeks 
 use an Aorist or even Perfect Subjunctive. (See § 18, 1, and § 20, 
 N. 1, with the examples.) 
 
 Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. 
 
 § 30. 1. The Aorist and sometimes the Perfect In- 
 dicative are used in animated language to express 
 general truths. These are called the gnomic Aorist and 
 the gnomic Perfect, and are usually to be translated by 
 our Present. 
 
 These tenses give a more vivid statement of general truths, 
 by employing a distinct case or several distinct cases in past 
 time to represent (as it were) all possible cases, and implying 
 that what has occurred will occur again under similar circum- 
 stances. E. g. 
 
 Kdreav" ofias o t depyos dvr}p o T€ TToXXa eopyas, bath alike must 
 die. II. IX, 320. "Oare koI uKKip-ov avhpa (bofiel Koi dcjyeiXfTo 
 vUriv, who terrifies, and snatches away. II. XVII, 177. (See Note 2.) 
 Bt'a hi Ka\ pL^yoKavxov eacfiaXeu iv xpov<^' ^^^^' ^^l*^'* V'« 
 2o(bo\ §€ /ic'XXoi/ra rpiTolov dvepov ifiadov, ovb' vno K€p6€i ^Xa^ev. 
 PiND. Nem. VII, 25. Kal ^ <f)iXov TiseKvav" dyvoias vtto. Aescii. 
 Supp. 499. 'AXXa rd Toiaira tls fiiP dna^ koi ^paxvv xP^vov 
 dvT€Xfti fat a-(t)68pa ye r}v6rj(T€u eVt rais eXniaiv, dv rvxv^ ''« 
 Xpovtii de(j)a>pdTat koi nfpl avrd Karappcl. Dem. 01 II, 21, 1. 
 (See' Note 2.) *Hi/ dpa .... a<j)aXoi<Tiv, dvTeXTrlaavres aXXa firXr}' 
 oioaav t}}u xpfiav, they supply the deficiency (as often as one occurs). 
 Thug. I, 70. *Hi/ 8e rts tovt(ov Ti napa^aivrj, Crjfilau avrois fTTc- 
 Seaav, i. e. they impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. 
 Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 2. Aeivav r dr^pa irvevpdroiv €Koip.ia-€ aT^vovra 
 itdvrov. Soph. Aj. 674. Mi* rip4pa rhv ptv KaOelXev v^oOey, rov 
 8' ^p' ai/o). Eur. Ino. Fr. 424. "Orav o^Epas iyKparea-rfpos yei^Tat, 
 hia(be€lp€i T€ rroXXd Koi ^8iKrj<T€v. Plat. Symp. 188 A. ^ Orau 
 Tis I(nr€p oItos i(TXV<rv^ V Tpa>r7; Trp6(\)a<ns Ka\ p,LKphv irraiapa anavra 
 duexairi<T€ KaX bUXv<rev. Dem. 01 II, 20, 27.^ Eneibav ris 
 nap' €uo0 pddrj. idu ph ^ovXrjrai, dnobeb<oKev o eyco nparropai 
 dpymov, idu 8e p^, iXeiov ,ls iepbu dpoaas, ouov dv (t>v «|m cii'ai ra 
 Auara, rocrovrov KariBrjK.v. Plat. Prot. 328 B. (Here the 
 Perfect and Aorist are used together, in nearly the same sense, /i« 
 pays.) HoXXoi 8ia b6$av Ka\ ttoXitiktiv 8vi/a/itv fieyaXa kuku TreiropGa' 
 

 46 
 
 USE OP THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 30, 1. 
 
 § 30, 2.] GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 
 
 47 
 
 <rtv, 1. e. mariT/ always have suffered, and many do suffer. Xen. 
 Mem. IV, 2, 35. T6 de nff (fxnobcov dvavrayoivia-TO) evpoia rcri- 
 IJLr}Tai. Thuc. II, 45. 
 
 Remark. The gnomic Perfect Is not found In Homer. 
 
 Note 1. The sense, as well as the origin of the construc- 
 tion, is often made clearer by the addition of such words as 
 TToWaKiSt rjbri, or outto). Such examples as these form a simple 
 transition from the common to the gnomic use of these 
 tenses : — 
 
 IloXXa arpaToneha rjhr} € ire (rev vir iXaa-a-ovav, i. e. many cases 
 have already arifen, implying, it often happens. Thuc. II, 89. Me\- 
 \q)u y larpos, rfj voaa 8i8ovs ;^pdi/oi/, Idaar* rjSrj fiaWou ^ rffxtbu 
 Xpda. Eur. Frag. 1057. noXXaxts e^av ris ovde rdvayKala vvv avpiou 
 €ir\ovTr}a\ aare x^iTcpovs Tpe(f>€iVy i. e. cases have often occurred 
 in which such a man has become rich the next day, &c. Philem. Fr. 
 Inc. 29. ^AdvpovvT€s avBpcs outtco rponatoif earrja-av. PLAT. Crit. 
 108 C. OvSels enXovrrjaeu rax^cos Bikuios a>v. Men AND. Col. Fr. 
 6. (Kriiger, § 53, 10, A. 2.) 
 
 Note 2. General truths are more commonly expressed in 
 Greek, as in English, by the Present. (See § 10, N. 1.) 
 Examples of the Present and Aorist, used in nearly the same 
 sense in the same sentence, are given under § 30, 1. The 
 gnomic Aorist is, however, commonly distinguished from tlie 
 Present, either by being more vivid, or by referring to an 
 action which is (by its own nature) momentary or sudden, 
 while the Present (as usual) implies duration. See the second 
 and sixth examples under § 30, 1. 
 
 Note 3. An Aorist resembling the gnomic Aorist is very 
 common in Homer, in similes depending on past tenses, where 
 it seems to stand by assimilation to the leading verb. It is 
 usually to be translated by the Present. E. g. 
 
 "Upiire 5' &>ff 0T€ Ttff Bpvs fjpiirev, and he fell, as when an oak falls 
 (literally, as when an oak once fell). H. XVI, 389. 
 
 Note 4. It is very doubtful whether the Imperfect was ever 
 used in a gnomic sense, so as to be translated by the Present. 
 
 Note 5. An instance of the gnomic Aorist in the Infinitive la 
 fcund in Soph. Aj. 1082: — 
 
 "Ottov S* v^pi^fiv bpdv ff , h. ^ovXerai, nap^f 
 E^ ovpioiv dpafiovaav is }iv66v 7re<r€iv. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Here irtfrtiv represents tirtfTtv In the direct discourse ; the sense 
 being, believe that that city must at some time fall. (See Schneide- 
 wln's note.) So probably In Plat. Phaedr. 232 B : Tjyovfievip .... 
 bia^opds y€vop€in)s KOivqv dp(f)or€pois KaTaa-rrfvai t^i/ avp<popdv. 
 
 Even the Aorist Participle seems to be occasionally used in the 
 same sense; as in Thuc. VI, 16: oJBarovs rotovrovs iv /xcV rw kot 
 avTovs iSio) \vnrjpovs ovras, t5>v be cTTftra dvBpoiiraiV rrpoaTroiTjaiv 
 ^vyy fV€iasTi<r\ Koi p.f} ovaav KaraXirrovras ^ J know that such men^ 
 although in their own lifetimes they are offensive, yet often leave to some 
 who come after them a desire to claim connexion with them^ even where 
 there is no ground for it. 
 
 Note 6. Tlie gnomic Perfect Is found In the Infinitive In Dem. 
 01. II, 23, 14: ft Zens a-oi)(f)paiv fj StVatoff, . . . . napeaaBai Koi 
 €v ovbfvos €ivai fiepci top toiovtou ((prja-iu)) such a man is always thrust 
 aside, and is of no account. 
 
 2. The Imperfect and Aorist are sometimes used 
 with the particle au to denote a cmtomary action^ 
 being equivalent to our phrase in narration, " he would 
 often do this^^^ or " he used to do itJ^ E. g. 
 
 Air]pu>T(ov av avrovs ri X/yoifi/, / used to ask them (I would ask 
 them) ichat they said. Plat. Apol. 22 B. Ei rivfs tboUv -rrt} rovf 
 (r(l)€T€povs eiriKpaTovvras, dveBapariaav av, whenever any saw their 
 friends in any way victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were 
 encouraged in all such cases). Thuc. VII, 71. rioXXa^iff tjkov- 
 aapev av Tt KOKas vpds ^ovXfvcrdpevovs fieya npdypa, we used veiy 
 often to hear you, &c. Arist. Lyslst. 511. Ei rt? avra irepi tov 
 avTiXeyoi prjbcv exoiv (Ta<f)es Xkynv, iirl rffv vrroOfaiv iiravrjyev hv 
 Ttavra tov \6yov, he always brought the whole discussion back to the 
 main point. Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 13. 'Onore npoa^XeylreU rivas rav iv 
 
 raii To^fo-t, rork pkv flirev av, cJ avbpfs, k. r. \ Tore 6* av iv 
 
 axUis^v ? Xe^f V. Xen. Cyr. VII, 1, 10. ^ 
 
 This construction must be carefully distinguished from that with 
 av In ordinary apodosis (§ 4D, 2). For the iterative Imperfect 
 transferred to the Infinitive, see § 41, N. 3. 
 
 Note 1. (a.) The Ionic iterative Aorist in -o-kov and 
 -aKopLrjv expresses the repetition of a momentary action; the 
 Imperfect with the same endings expresses the repetition of a 
 continued action. E. g. 
 
 "aWov? ph yap nalbas ipovs nobas uiKvs 'A^iXXev? nipvaa-x » ov 
 Tiv €\€(TK€. D. XXIV, 751. "Okios fX(9ot 6 NflXof im OKTa 
 irfjxiasi dpbecTKe Aiyvirrov rqv evepOe M//i(^tof. IIdt. H, 13. 
 
 (b.) In Homer, however, the iterative forms are sometimes 
 used in nearly or quite the same sense as the ordinary forms ; 
 thus €<ricf in Homer does not differ from Ijv. E. g. 
 
pi 
 
 48 
 
 USE OP THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 30, 2. 
 
 
 4 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 Aafjp avT ffios taKe kwchttiSos, ft nor erjv ye. 11. Ill, 180. Os ol 
 fr\r)aiov i^e, fiaXiara 6e /xii/ ^tXefO-fcev. 0(1. VII, 171. 
 
 Note 2. Herodotus sometimes uses the iterative forms in -(tkov 
 and -a-KOfirjv with aj/, in the construction of § 30, 2. (He uses the 
 iterative Aorist in only two passages, in both with ov.) E. g. 
 
 ^OLT€OV(Ta K\ai€<TKe av Koi ohvpe (TKfTO. Hdt. hi, 119. Es 
 rovTovs oKa>s €\6oi 6 2Kv\r)S, rfju fitv aTpaTirjv KaraXe iirea-Ke tv t(o 
 TTpoaa-Teia), avros 5c okcoj fXdoi ts to T€1)(0S . . . . Xa/Sctrxc aw 
 'EWrjvlda iaOPjTa. Hdt. IV, 78. 
 
 Dependence op Moods and Tenses. 
 
 §31. 1. Ill dependent sentences, where the con- 
 struction allows cither a Subjunctive or an Optative, 
 the Subjunctive is used if the leading verb is primary ^ 
 and the Optative if it is secondary. (See § 8, 2.) E. g. 
 
 UpcLTTovcTiv a av ^ovXavrai, ihei/ do whatever they please: but 
 titparrov a (iovXoivTOy they did whatever they pleased. 
 
 2. In like manner, whore the construction allows 
 either an Indicative or an Optative, the Indicative 
 follows primary, and the Optative follows secondary 
 tenses. E. g. 
 
 Aeyovanv on tovto ^ovXavrai, they say that they wish for this , 
 eXe^av oti tovto ^ovXoivto, they said that they wished for this. 
 
 Note 1. To these fundamental rules we find one special 
 exception : — 
 
 In indirect discourse of all kinds (including sentences 
 denoting a purpose or object after ti/a, /i»i, &c.), either an In- 
 dicative or a Subjunctive may depend upon a secondary 
 tense, in order that the mood and tense actually used by the 
 speaker may be retained in the indirect discourse. (See § 69.) 
 
 E-g- 
 
 EtTTfi/ oTt ^ovXfral, fbr eTirev oti ^ovXoito^ he said that he 
 fcished (i. e. he said ^ovXofiai). *E<^o36tro p.rj tovto yfvrjTait for 
 €<^oj3€iro p.f) TOVTO yduoiTo^ he feared lest it should happen (i. e. he 
 thought, ^o}iovp.ai fxf] ycvijTai). (See § 44, 2.) 
 
 Note. 2. An only apparent exception to these rules occurs 
 when either an apodosis with av, or a verb expressing a wish, stands 
 in a dependent sentence. In both these cases the form which would 
 
 m 
 
 I IvN 
 
 § 32.J DEM-NDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 49 
 
 have been required in the apodosis or in the wish, if It had been 
 independent. Is retained without regard to the leadm- verb It 
 will be obvious from the principles of such sentences (Chapter IV), 
 that a change of mood would in most cases change the whole 
 nature of the apodosis or wish. E. g. 
 
 'Eva, ovK old' Snm &u ti9 aa(t>ecTTepov cVtSW^ie.^, / do not 
 know how any one could show this more clearly. Dem. Aph. 1, 828, 
 23. Ac! yhp Uelvi^. toZto iv tjj yv^pr, Trapacrr^trat, ^s? ^f^J^^// ^1^ 
 a^Ae/a. ravr,. . . • • tcrco. hv 6p,x^cratr.e. Dem. Phil. I, 44, 2o 
 eJ 8* hpel^ aXXo rt yvixTeade, h pfj yevoiTO, Tiva ouaOe avrrjv fvxrju 
 
 (^eiv; Dem. Aph. II, 842, 14. . ^ ^ i *i,« 
 
 The learner needs only to be warned not to attempt to apply the 
 rules § 31, 1, 2 to such cases as these. See § 44, 1, N. 3 {b). 
 
 Note 3. A few other unimportant exceptions will be noticed 
 as they occur. See, for example, § 44, 2, Note 2. 
 
 Remark. It is therefore of the highest importance to ascertain 
 which tenses (in all the moods) are to be considered primary, and 
 which secondary; that is, which are to be followed, in dependent 
 sentences, by the Indicative or Subjunctive, and which by the 
 Optative, where the rules of § 31 are apphed. The general prin- 
 ciple, stated in § 8, 2, applies chiefly to the Indicative, and even 
 there not without some important modifications. 
 
 § 32. 1. In the Indicative the general rule holds, that the 
 Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are primary 
 tenses, and the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist are secondary 
 tenses. 
 
 2. But the historical Present is a secondary tense, as it 
 refers to the past ; and the gnomic Aorist is a primary tense, 
 as it refers to the present. 
 
 See the first example under § 10, 2, where an historical 
 Present is followed by the Optative ; and the sixth, seventh, 
 and eighth examples under § 30, 1, where gnomic Aorists are 
 followed by the Subjunctive. 
 
 3. (a.) The Imperfect Indicative in protasis or apodosis 
 denoting the non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 49, 2), when it 
 refers to present time, is a primary tense. E. g. 
 
 "Eypafbop hv ijXlKa vp^s €^ Troiijcro), el ed rjSfiv, I would tell you 
 in my letter how great services I would render you, if I knew, &c. 
 Dem. F. L. 353, 24. Uduv hv ecfyo^ovpn^, prj airofiriaoxri Xoywv. 
 Plat. Symp. 193 E. 'Ecpo^oiprju hv <T<j)6bpa Xeyuv, prj d o ^<o , 
 K. T. X., 1 should be very much afraid to speak, lest I should seem,^ &c 
 Plat. Theaet. 143 E. Tavr '&v rjbrj Xiytiu eTrex^lpow, iv eiSi^TC. 
 Dem. Aristocr. 623, 11. 
 
 3 l> 
 
 / 
 
 V 
 
 X 
 
50 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§32. 
 
 I 
 
 §34.] 
 
 DEPENDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 51 
 
 (h.) On the other hand, the Aorist Indicative in the same 
 sense in protasis and apodosis, and also the Imperfect when it 
 refers to the past, are secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 *AXXa KOL rovs Bcovs &v tdeia-as izapaKivhvv€V(iv^ yLX) ovk 6p6(os avro 
 noiriaoiS' Plat. Euthyph. 15 D. *AXX* ovbe fifra ttoXXwi/ fiapTv- 
 pQ)v dnoBtdovs elKjj tis ^ irriorfvci/, iv €i ris ylyvoiro bia<f)opa, 
 KOfilaaaBai pabias nap vptv bvvriTai. Dem. Onet. I, 869, 18. 
 (Here the Suhjunctive bivrjrai will be explained by § 44, 2, but the 
 Optative shows that the leading verb is secondary.)* 
 
 § 33. AH the tenses of the Subjunctive and Imperative 
 are primary, as they refer to present or future time. E. g. 
 
 *E7r€o-^' orrt] av tis t] y^T a i,^ follow whithersoever anyone leads 
 the way. Thuc. II, 11. 
 
 § 34. As the Optative refers sometimes to i\iQ future and 
 sometimes to the past, it exerts upon a dependent verb some- 
 times the force of a primary, and sometimes that of a secondary 
 
 tense. 
 
 When it refers to the past, as in general suppositions after 
 ft and relatives, depending on past tenses (§§ 51 and 62), it is 
 of course secondary, like any other form which refers to past 
 
 time. 
 
 When it refers to the future, it is properly to be considered 
 primary. In many cases, however, a double construction is 
 allowed : on the principle of assimilation the Greeks preferred 
 the Optative to the Subjunctive in certain clauses depending 
 
 * It is difficult to determine the question whether the secondary tenses 
 of the Indicative in this construction (^ 32, 3) are primary or secondary in 
 their effect on the dependent verb, as sentences of nearly every class de- 
 pending upon them take by assimilation a secondary tense of the Indica- 
 tive. (So in most final clauses, § 44, 3 ; in protasis after d, § 49. 2 ; and 
 after relatives, § 64.) There remain only indirect quotations, and the few 
 cases of final clauses that do not take the Indicative l)y assimilation ; hut 
 both of these have the peculiarity of allowing the Indicative and Subjunc- 
 tive, when the writer pleases, to stand as they were in the direct discourse, 
 instead of being changed to the Optative. 'Madvig {Bemerkungen, p. 20) 
 chisses them all as primary forms, considering the two examples of the 
 Optative after the Aorist, quoted above, § 32, 3 (6), as exceptions. But 
 these cannot be accounted for on the supposition that both Aorist and 
 Imperfect are primary : they are, however, perfectly regular, if we con- 
 sider the present forms primary and the past forms secondary (as in other 
 cases) ; while the other examples in which the Indicative or Subjunctive 
 follows the past forms may all be explained on the principle of § 31, 
 Note 1. 
 
 "l 
 
 w 
 
 ^ 
 
 on an Optative, the dependent verb referring to the future like 
 the leading verb, and differing little from a Subjunctive in 
 such a position. This assimilation takes place regularly in 
 protasis and conditional relative clauses depending on an 
 Optative ; but seldom in final and object clauses after ha, oiras, 
 firj, &c., and very rarely in indirect quotations or questions. 
 
 The three classes of sentences which may depend on an 
 Optative referring to the future are treated separately : — 
 
 1. (a.) In protasis and in conditional relative sentences 
 
 depending upon an Optative which refers to the future, the 
 
 Optative is regularly used to express a future condition, rather 
 
 than the Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 EXtjs (popTjTos OVK av, fl TTpdaaois ica\S>s, you would he unendur-^ 
 able, if you should ever prosper. Aesch. Prom. 979. 'Ai/Spi Sc k 
 OVK fi^ftf peyas TeXa/iwi/to? Aias, os Bvtjtos t etrj Ka\ eboi ArjpfiTepos 
 dKTTjv. II. XIII, 321. UoiS yap av tis, a ye pr) erridTaiTO, ravTa 
 a-o<l)6s ciT] ; for how should any one be wise in those things which he did 
 not understand? Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 7. Aeoiro av avTov peveiv, core 
 av direXdois. Xen. Cyr. V, 3, 13. El diroOvrjo-KOi pkv Trdvra, oaa 
 Tov Cv^ pfTaXd^oi, fiTfLbr) Se d7ro6dvoi, ptvoi iv tovtco .... 
 Sp* ov TToXX^ dvdyKTj T€\€VTQ)VTa TvdvTa Tedvdvai ; Plat. Phaed. 72 C. 
 *Qs dnoXoiTo KOI oXXof, o tis Toiairrd ye peCoi, may any other man 
 likewise perish, who shall do such things. Od. I, 47. Tedvalrjv, ore poi 
 prjKeTi Tavra peXoi, may I die, when I (shall) no longer care for 
 these ! Mimn. Fr. I, 2. (Here orav priKhi peXrj might be used with- 
 out change of meaning. But ore peXei, found in the passage as 
 quoted by Plutarch, would refer to the present in classic Greek.) 
 
 (b,) On the other hand, the dependent verb is sometimes in 
 the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative with €t), on the ground 
 that it follows a tense of future time. This happens especially 
 after the Optative with av used in its sense approaching that of 
 the Future Indicative (§ 52, 2, N ; § 54, 1, b.) E. g. 
 
 *Hy ovv pd0rjs poi TovTov, ovk clv aTToboirjv, if then you should 
 (shall) learn this for me, I would not pay, &c. Arist. Nub. 116. "Hv 
 ae d^eXapaiy KUKiaT dnoXoiprjv. Id. Ran. 586. 'Eyco Se Tavrrjv 
 pev TTjv flpTjvrfv, €(os av els ^A6r)vaia)V \e iirrjTai, ovBeiror av avfi' 
 Bov\eva-aipi Trotrjoraadai Trj rrdXct, / loould never advise the city to make 
 this peace, as long as a single Athenian shall be left. Dem. F. L. 345, 
 14. (Here eas XelnoiTo would be the common form.) "Qanep av 
 vpo)V tKaoTOS aldxvvQelt) ttjv Ta^iv Xinelv ^v av TaxOrj ev t<5 noXepto, 
 as each one of you would be ashamed to leave the post at which he might 
 be placed in war, Aeschin. Cor. § 7. (Here riv TaxSeirj would be 
 the more conmion expression.) Twi^ aTonoTaTav av eirj, ei Tavra 
 dwrjOeXs pf} npd^ei Dem. 01. 1, 16, 25. Many such examples myy 
 be explained equally well by § 54, 1 (a). 
 
52 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 [§ 34, 1 
 
 Note. It wIU be understood that no assimilation to the Optative 
 can take place when the protasis (after d or a re ative) consists of a 
 present or past tense of the indicative as m this case a change to 
 the Optative would involve a change of time, bee § 64, Kern I. 
 
 2. In final and object clauses after tva, onm, /xii, &c., the 
 Subjunctive (or Future Indicative) is generally used when the 
 leadin^r verb is an Optative referring to the future; the 
 Optative, however, sometimes occurs. The preference for the 
 Subjunctive here can be explained on the general principle 
 (§31, Note 1, and § 44, 2). E. g. 
 
 urju B' s/rcS iiyc/xdvi eTrecr^at, /x^ v^^a, dyayj, o6.v ovx oto. re etrrai 
 %\e€lv. ±E-i. An. 1, 3, 17. Oio/xai au v^ias fxeya ovrjaai to arpa- 
 Tfvaa, cZ ^mfie\r}e,irjTe Sncos d,^\ r^u drro\<o\6r<ov ^^'r^X^<^^ <^P^^T 
 yo\ Ka\ Xovayol dpTiKaTaaraeSxriv. Xen. An. Ill, 1, ^». ^ ^ 
 
 (Opt.) Ueipc^fXTiu tip tif) Trpoo-o, lfia>v eimt, lua, fi ttov Kmpo? ftr;, 
 eVt/avet'T^v. Xex. Cyr. II, 4, 17. *H c^vXaKn yeW r*. auja^- 
 voiTO, €l ixh <rvy€ eVt/xfXoIo OTTO)? tiwOeu Ti €i(r<^epotro. AEN. 
 Oecon VU, 39. Other examples of the Optative are Aesch. 
 Eumcn. 298 (?X^ot, oVo,. ye.otro) ; Soph. Aj. 1221 (ottcw jpocrci- 
 'HOLixev) ; Soph. Phil. 325; EuR.Uec. 839; Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 22. 
 
 Note. In relative sentences expressing a purpose the Future 
 Indicative is regularly retained, even after past tenses of the Indica- 
 tive For exceptional cases of the Optative m this construction, 
 depending on the Optative with 5v, see § 65, 1, Notes 1 and 3. 
 
 3. In indirect quotations and questions, depending upon an 
 Optative which refers to the future, the Indicative is the only 
 form regularly used to represent an Indicative of the direct 
 discourse. But in indirect questions the Optative is sometimes 
 found representing a duUlative Suhjwiciive of the direct 
 question (§ 88). E. g. 
 
 0^8' *au eU avretVot i. oi (rv;i(/)€p.i r^ TroVt. Dem. Megal. 202, 
 24. Et o^. vdu aTToSctx^ftT, riva XPV vy^t^^^at, . . . • ovk au onore ot 
 TToXeVoi JX^oifv ^ov\€v€ueai was BeoL. Xen. An. HI, 2 3b. 
 
 OU^auho^s i^eXe^u 5 rt xP^o aavrf ^pou sJ^onldi^^^^^^ 
 you would not know what to do with yourself. Plat. Crit. 45 B. Ovk 
 L tvoLS 5 ri xph<raio fravra, aW IXcyyicfr}^ hu »cai xacr^^o ovk ^x^v 
 o r. e cTToi. Id Gorg. 486 B. The direct questions here were r. 
 lIL^;-^ri xph^-^-^-^-rUU.; The Subjunctive can always 
 be retained in this construction, even after past tenses, bee § 71. 
 
 Note. In Dem. Megal. 203, 12, we find a case of the Optative in 
 an indirect quotation : OZ yhp U,\v6 / Sv .cfrot^.v, co. ^^^^^^/l^ 
 /3ovXo4>€d* airrntaKovs Aa«Sat/ioriovff awi eT)^aL<ov ihere are 
 
 > 
 
 ) 
 
 4 
 
 5 35, 2.] DEVENDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 53 
 
 no other readings : and It is doubtful whether we must consider it as 
 Z eXtional^ase of assimilation iu^couU not ..ay f-,^^ 
 wMed Lx or emend it, either by reading ^ovXofifea (as P'oposea 
 hf{L%:Bemerk. p. 21),orby inserting 5., wnch may easdy have 
 been omitted in the JIss. before either ivraXUfy^Sat or avri^aUv. 
 Trp.Tr R™ VII 515 D, we find in the best Mss Ti .V o.« totoi. 
 
 ftX/^o7 wJuU do you think he would say, ./ any one should iM him 
 ^kaUlth^fmthlhad leen seeing foolish phantom, but that now he 
 sees more correctly f Some Mss. read fiXiitfi. 
 
 In II. V, 85, Tviiliri' oJk &v yooir,, noT^poi<n fitTilr,, the Optar 
 tive in the indirect question represents ^cVfOTi^, but o« av yi.o.,f 
 he,^ Tefer^ to the pa^t, meaning you would not have known, (bee 
 § 49, 2, N. 6.) 
 
 § 35 1. The Present, Perfect, and the Futures in the 
 Infinitive and Participle regularly denote time which is merely 
 relative to that of the leading verb of the sentence. They are 
 therefore primart/ when that is primary, and secondart/ when 
 that is secondary. E. g. 
 
 BoiXcTo. Xiy«v ri roiri Unv, he wishes to tell what to «. 
 •eSto X/y«. ri roCro .1, , Ae wUlied to teU what this was *,<r»^ 
 aWVa. Ti)„riv,he says he has heard ,ohat U is '£0, aK^Koe.;. 
 Ti\t„, he said he had heard what it was. *^« f"")"""/ " ^ 
 8 o iJ X n <r fl « , Ae says he wiU do whatever you shall wish. E(f.j) .ro.,- 
 „iv6ri^o<,XoJe., he .aid he would do whatever you should wish 
 
 W ,tn. nivov„iv iKr,KO&T,, ri ijrriv. •Em^vo. a«,«oor« r. e.,. 
 UivovTiv dK0U(7dM«''<» "' i (T ri » . 'Eiifvoo a/couao,if TO. ti f 1 1- 
 
 Note. When the Present Infinitive and Participle represent 
 the Imperfect (without &) they are secondary without regard to 
 the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 nS. yhp oUae. Bvax^pS>. a.ov.cv, .T rh r* ^ < V <> » '* J?^^ .~ 
 inqly do you think they heard it, when any one said anything t bee 
 this and the other examples under § 15, 3, and § 7d, z. 
 
 2. When the Aorist Infinitive in itself does not refer to any 
 definite time, it takes its time from the leading verb (like the 
 Present), and may be either primary or secondary. But when 
 it refers to time absolutely past, it is always a secondary tense. 
 
 E. g. 
 
 BovXcrai yv5>vai ri roOro' .Vriv, he wishes to learn what ths is. 
 •EloTxTrr/r/a! ri roOro et„ he wished to learn what this was. 
 
 ^^But'icrl yvS>m. W roCro eXrj, he says that he learned what thii 
 
THE PARTICLE AN. 
 
 [§ 35, 2. 
 
 54 
 
 «^, rS23 2-> 'Ed.., v.£.a. Ti' toCto .t,, lie said that he had learned 
 teas (.| iiii, -:;• ^9^ r""'" „ !. primary tense in the first 
 
 ahat this was. (Tvavai has tne lorce m a v' j 
 example, that of a secondary tense in the others.; 
 
 8. The Aorist Participle refers to time past relatively to the 
 leadin- verb. It is therefore secondary when the leading 
 vert, i^s past or present and the Participle refers to time 
 afootoe?/past; but it maybe primary when the leading eb 
 is future, if the Participle refers to time absolutely future. 
 
 E.g. 
 
 'I„Te ma, i\06vra: Jm roCro 'iBoip^.v, you know that ice came 
 IkaZe Tom see ,kis. <Y...^i>. rtAXa on aM, -^' JP^f; ; 
 
 917 E. •f!)<l>av S«"<raf fii) SfijAdi? . • • Tp«<?>". akisi. i- 
 
 4. The tenses of the Infinitive and Participle with S> are 
 followed, in dependent clauses, by those constructions that 
 would have followed the finite moods which they represent, in 
 the same position. See § 41, § 32, 3, and § 34. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE PARTICLE 'AN. 
 
 § Ue. The adverb av (Epic ice, Doric ko) has two 
 uses, which must be carefully distinguished. 
 
 1 ' In one iise, it denotes that the action of the verb 
 to which it is joined is dependent upon some condition, 
 expressed or implied. This is its force with he 
 secondary tenses of the Indicative, and with the 
 Optative, Infinitive, and Participle: with these it 
 forms an apodosis, and belongs strictly to the verb. 
 
 2. In its other use, it is joined regularly to el, f, and 
 to all relatives and temporal particles (and occasionally 
 to the final particles w, Sttw. and o<^pa,) when these 
 
 § 37, 2.] 
 
 THE PARTICLE "AN. 
 
 55 
 
 words are followed by the Svhjunctive, Here it seems 
 to belong entirely to the^ relative or particle, with which 
 it often coalesces, as in eav, orav, kireihav. 
 
 Remark 1. The rules, § 36, 1, 2 include only; the constructions 
 which are in good use in Attic Greek. For the Lpic fe of «„ with 
 The Suljunctive in apodosis, see § 38, 2 ; for &u with the Future In- 
 dicatlvc, see § 37, 2. 
 
 Remark 2. There is no word or expression in English which can 
 be us^d t^ translate &>. In its fifit use (§ 36, 1) we expr^ it by 
 the mood of the verb which we use; as (3ovXo.ro 5., hewoM wish^ 
 In ite second use, with the Subjunctive, it has no force that can be 
 Lad^ pTeptibi; in English^ It« peculiar -«.««« be -de^^^ 
 only bV a study of the various constructions in which it occurs. 
 These are enumerated below, with references (when it is necessary) 
 to the more full explanation of each in Chapter IV. 
 
 § 37. 1. The Present and Perfect Indicative are 
 never used with av, 
 
 AVhen this seems to occur, there is always a mixture of eonstnic- 
 tionV Thus in Plat. Lejx- IV, 712 E, ey^ 5^ oGra, vw ^^^^'^^^-^ 
 tZei^TL... oVp .hov. ovK rx- aV.I., c1. was used with a view 
 ZouTu Zo';. or some such construction, for which ovk .x- «7r... 
 was substUute^i : the meanin, is (/" / ./..uW^-f -^^/ j- -^^^^ 
 could not .say, &c. So in Plat. Men. 72 C, k^u « '^<>^^°' -„' "^"^^ 
 
 Zi^'ould seem to follow that) they all have. &c. Examples ike the 
 last are very common in Aristotle, who seems to use kuv^i. almost 
 like Ka\ €l, without regard to the mood of the leading verb. 
 
 Remark. Constructions like those mentioned in § 42, 2, Note, 
 must not be referred to this head. For ovk av ^oi ^ok.c.ivo^ s 
 never it would not seem to me to he ; but always, it does not seem to 
 me that it would he; av belonging to cimi. 
 
 if 
 
 2 The Future Indicative is often used with av or 
 Ki by the early poets, especially Homer. The addition 
 of av makes the Future more contingent than that 
 tense naturally is, giving it a force approaching that of 
 the Optative with av in apodosis (§ 39). E. g. 
 
 Toa^J in€Pnvope6vT<ov, perhaps some one will thus speak, il. 1 V , 1 /b. 
 ^r^TZTxo X 0, . cr a t , oC «. Wa. and he wUl perhaps he angrp 
 to whom I CoL n. 1, 139. Et f «>, ro^. hv ey<ov^ e^co^o^^ o* 
 de ,ri^eV(9a)V. E. IX, 167. Hap' e>tye Kai aXXoi, 01 k€ /xe ri/iij- 
 
56 
 
 THE PARTICLE *AN. 
 
 [§ 37, 2. 
 
 
 
 crovo-t, i. e. tc^o trii/ honor me when occasion offers. B. I, 174. Ei 
 d' 'OSvo-eyy tXdoL kqi 1<oit es narpida yalav, alyj^d k€ aiiv <o 7rai8\ ^tas 
 diroTiaerai dvbp^u. 0(1. XVll, 531). (In this passage the Future 
 with Ke is used nearly in the sense of the Optative, corresponding to 
 the Optatives in the Protasis. 'ATronVerai may also be Aorist Sub- 
 junctive, by § 38, 2.) Madoiv be ns ap eptl, PlND. Nem. VII, 68. 
 Kav €T €Ti (poviov 6\lrofiai al^. EUR. Elect. 484. (So the 
 
 Mss.) 
 
 Note 1. The use of 5v with the Future Indicative in Attic Greek 
 is absolutely denied by many critics, and the number of the ex- 
 amples cited in support of it have been greatly diminished by the 
 more careful revision of the texts of the Attic writers. Still several 
 passages remain, even in the best prose, where we must either 
 emend the text against the authority of the Mss., or admit the con- 
 struction as a rare exception to the general rule. E. g. 
 
 AlyvTTTiovi §€ . . . . ovx opa iro'ia Bwdfift (rvpp.dx<^ xP'?^"/^''^' 
 fidWov av Ko\da-€cr6f ttjs vvv avu cfxol ova-rji- Xkx. An. II, p>^13. 
 'ATTKTYvpto-d/xei/oi fie aacpis civ lKaTa<TTr](T€T€'\ avrois dno tov i<tov 
 ipTiv iidWov Trpo(T4)€p€adai. Thuc. I, 140. (Here mosj; editoi;s read 
 KaTa<TTl)aaiT€, on the authority of inferior Mss.) "E^pT] ovu tou 
 €p<OTu>u€vov eiVeli', oi'x r]K€i, (pdvai, ov5' av rj^€i, dfvpo, nor will he be 
 likely to come hither. Plat. Rep. X, 615 D. (Here the only other 
 reading is rj^oi, which is of course corrupt.) "E^t^ .... Xeyo)!* 
 irpos vfiai wff, €4 8i.a(f)€v$oifir]Vj rjdrj av vfiav oi viels .... irdvT€S 
 vavrditaai diacpdaprjaovTai, Id. Apol. 29 C. 
 
 The construction is perhaps less suspicious in the dramatic chorus, 
 which belongs to lyric poetry. See the last example under^§ 37, 2. 
 
 See § 41, 4, on the Future Infinitive and Participle with av. 
 
 Note 2. The form « is much more common with the Future in 
 Homer than the form av. 
 
 3. The most common use of av with the Indicative 
 is with the secondary tenses, generally the Imperfect 
 and Aorist, in apodosis. It here denotes that the condi- 
 tion upon which the action of the verb depends is rwt or 
 was not fulfilled. See § 49, 2. 
 
 Note. The Imperfect and Aorist are sometimes used with 
 ap in an iterative sense ; which construction must not be con- 
 founded with that just mentioned. See § 30, 2. 
 
 §38. 1. In Attic Greek the Subjunctive is used 
 with av only in the cases mentioned in § 36, 2 ; never 
 in independent sentences. See § 47, 2, § 50, 1, § 51, 
 
 ? 
 
 THE PARTICLE AN. 
 
 57 
 
 I 
 
 §41.] 
 
 and § 60, 3. For the occasional use of av in final 
 clauses, see § 44, 1, Note 2. 
 
 2. In Epic poetry, when the Subjunctive is used 
 nearly in the sense of the Future Indicative (§ 87), 
 it sometimes takes tee or av. The combmation forms an 
 apodosis, with a protasis expressed or understood, and 
 is nearly or quite equivalent to the Future Indicative 
 with av, E. g. 
 
 El hk K€ fi^ Scooxnv, iyib be k€v avrhs eXa>/iat, and if they do not 
 give her up, I will take her myself. H. I, 137. (Cf. D. I, 324.) 
 See § 50, 1, Note 2 («). 
 
 Note. This Epic use of k€ or av with the Subjunctive must 
 not be confounded with the ordinary construction of § 38, 1. 
 In the latter the &v is closely connected with the particle or 
 relative, while in the former it is joined with the verb, as it is 
 with the Indicative or Optative. It in fact bears more resem- 
 blance to the ordinary Optative with S.v in apodosis in Attic 
 Greek, than to any other Attic construction. 
 
 § 39. The Optative vrith av ahvays forms an apo- 
 dosis, to which a protasis must be either expressed or 
 implied. It denotes what would happen, if the con- 
 dition (expressed or implied) upon which the action 
 of the verb depends should ever he fulfilled. See § 50, 
 2, and § 52, 2. 
 
 Remark. Such constructions as are explained in § 44, 1^, N. 3, 
 a, and § 74, 1, N. 2, are no exception to this rule, as there av does 
 not belong to the verb. 
 
 Note. The Future Optative is not used with &v. See § 26. 
 
 § 40. The Imperative is never used with av. 
 
 Note. All passages formerly cited for &v with the Imperative 
 are now emended on Mss. authority, or otherwise satisfactorily ex- 
 plained. See Passow, or Liddell and Scott, s. v. hv, 
 
 §41. The Infinitive and Participle can be used 
 with av in all cases in which a finite verb, if it stood in 
 their place, would be accompanied with av. This com- 
 l 3* 
 
6S 
 
 THE PARTICLE *AN. 
 
 [§ 41, 1. 
 
 bination always forms an apodosis (except in its itera- 
 tive sense, Note 3) : it can never form a. protasis, as the 
 finite verb never has av joined to itself in protasis. (See 
 
 § 36, 2.) , . 1 V 
 
 Each tense of the Infinitive and Participle with av 
 forms the same kind of apodosis which the correspond 
 ing tense of the Indicative or Optative woukl form in its 
 place. The context must decide whether the Indicative 
 or the Optative is represented m each case. 
 
 1. The Present Infinitive and Participle (which represent 
 also the Imperfect, by § 15, 3, and § 16, 2), when they are 
 used with 5»/, may be equivalent either to the Imperfect Indica- 
 tive with &v or to the Present Optative with &v. They can 
 represent no other form, as no other form of the Present is 
 used with av in apodosis in the finite moods. E. g. 
 
 ^na\v airois eX^vO^povs ^v eXvai, €X roCro tirpafyv. Tie says that 
 they would (now) be free, if they had done this (.tvai av representing 
 ?i(Tav^v, § 37, 3). ^r]^\v avrovs i\€vdepovs av civai, €i rovro 
 Ipdhiav, he says that they would {hereof ter) he free if they should do 
 thisUIvac &v representing etficrav &v, § 39). Oifcr^e yap tou •narepa 
 oiK hv d>v\dTT€iv Ka\rf]v TLixfjv \ap.^dv€LV Tii>viv\<ov; do you 
 think he would not have taken care and have received the payj 
 Dem. Timoth. 1194, 20. (Here the direct discourse would be 
 id>v\arr,v tiv Ka\ iXd^i^av^v.) OlfUiL yhp Sv ov< axap|(rra,ff^/xot 
 tx^ IV, for I think it would not ha a thankless labor; i. e. ov<av €xoi. 
 Xen. An. n, 3, 18. Maprvpico ^xP^vto, /xj) hv ^v<rTpaT€V€iv, « 
 un Tt hbUovv oU eirriecTav, that they would not join in expeditions unless 
 those against tchom they were marching had wronged them, iiiuc. 
 111,11. (Here luorpaTfVfiy ai/ represents lui/ecrrparfvoj/ ai'.) 
 
 OlbaavToifS iXfvBepovs ^v 6vTas, el rodro tnpa^av, I know they 
 would (now) be free, if they had done this. Oi8a avrovs €\€vd€povi 
 &v &^as, « roiro Trpa^iav, / know they woxdd {hereafter) be jree, 
 if they should do this. (In the former Svras av represents r}<Tav av, 
 in the latter eXrjirav 3i/.) T^u \a,x^av6vTcov bUrjv Bvt€S av diKauos 
 (i. e. ?iu€v av), whereas we should Justly be among those who injtict 
 punishment. Dem. Eubul. 1300, 8. '^OTr^p t(Tx^ ^ • • ^- '^j' ^'^"^ 
 Uwriaov iTope^lv, dbvvdrcov hv 6vt<ov {Ip^v) im^orje^iv, ivhen you 
 would have been unable to bring aid (sc. if he had done U). |huc. l, 
 73. noXV av €x<ov €T€p flnelv TTfpt avrTjs 7rapaX«7ra>, alt hough I 
 might be able {if I should wuih) to say many other things about it,^ I 
 omU them. Dem. Cor. 313, 4. 'Att^ navrbs av (^ikpiov \oyov diKaiov 
 firjxavrj,xa noLKikov (i. e ts w ^pois), thou who wouldst derive, &c 
 Soph. O. C. 761. 
 
 § 41, 3.] 
 
 THE PARTICLE *AN. 
 
 59 
 
 f 
 
 \> 
 
 2. The Perfect Infinitive and Participle (which represent 
 also the Pluperfect, by § 18, 3, Rem.), when they arc used 
 with civ, may be equivalent either to the Pluperfect Indicative 
 with av or to the Perfect Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 El firj ras dperas VTrcp avT^v Uelvas oi Mapa6avi j:a\ 2aXa/xm tto- 
 piaxovTO, .... irdvra raid' vtto t^v ^ap^dpav av ia\<oK€vai 
 (so. <6no-eiei/ avris), if those at Marathon and Salamis had not ex- 
 hibited those deeds of valor in their behalf any one would say that all 
 these would have been captured by the barbarians. Dem. F. L-,441, 
 21. Here iaKa>K€vai av represents idkci>K€aav av, Plup. Ind.) AAA 
 OVK av r)yovaai avrovs Blktjv d^iav bediOKevai, el aKpoaaafifvoi. 
 avT^v Karaylrrjcpiaataee, hut I do not believe they would (then) have 
 suffered sufficient punishment, if you after hearing them should con- 
 demn them, Lys. XXVII, § 9. (Here the protasis in the Optative 
 shows that SeSwKei/ai av represents SeScoKoreff av eiev (§ 18, U ? b^* 
 if the protasis had been d KaT€yirrji>^(Taa6€, if you had condemned them, 
 Se6a)K6i/ai ai/ would have represented ebebdiKcaav ^v,jhey would have 
 suffered.) See also, in § 8 of the same oration, ovk av dnoKioXevai. 
 .... aXXti SfSoxeVm. 'AvbpaTTobuydets av biKalcos KeKXTjO-dai 
 hyelro. Xen. Mem. I, 1, 16. (Here /c€AcX^<r(9at av represents ic^kXt;- 
 
 yiivoi av €i,€V.) /• v /? • 
 
 These constructions are of course rare, as the forms of the finite 
 moods here represented themselves seldom occur. 
 
 3. The Aorist Infinitive and Participle with &v may be 
 equivalent either to the Aorist Indicative with &v or to the 
 Aorist Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 O^K &v hy^laff alrhv k^v inibpafielv; do you not believe that (if 
 this had been so) he would even have run thither? i. e. oi;< av fire- 
 dpaiiev; Dem. Aph. I, 831, 10. "Avfv Be aeiafxov ovk av ixoi 6o«t ro 
 Toiohro $vpi^?ivaL yeveaOai (ov'< &v ^vfi^n^at representmg ovk av 
 hveM, ^"^ ««^«5*' there had been an earthquake, it does not seem to 
 me that such a thing could have by any chance happened. Thuc. Ill, 
 89. Tovy 'hdrivalovi ^XmC^v tonos hv ene^eXOeiV Ka\ Trjvjrjv ovk 
 tiv irepiibelv rp-r^dnvai (i. e. icrtoj av iire^eXeoiev Kai ovk av irepw 
 doiev). Id. II, 20. Ov8* av Kpar^itrai. avrovs r^s y^s T}yovp,ai {i. e. 
 Kparrjaeiav (iv). Id. VI, 37. , , , » 
 
 'AXXa padiios hv d(t)e e)s, el Ka\ fierpicos Tt rovrcov eTTOiijcre, irpoei- 
 Xero dnoOavelv, whereas he might easily have been acquitted^, &c. Aen. 
 Mem. IV, 4, 4. Kal el dnf^x^rjaee aairep rjfieis, ev lapev fir) av 
 ^aaov viids Xv7rrjpoi>s yevofievovs rols ^vfifxdxois, kol avayKa- 
 adevras av fj Hpx^iv, k. r.X. (i. e. ovk hv iyeveade, Kai r}vayKa(rer}r€ 
 ■ Av), if you had become odious as we have, we are sure that you woutd 
 have' been no less oppressive to your allies, and that you would have 
 been forced, &c. Thug. I, 76. 'Op^v t6 iraparelx^apxid'iTXovvhv, kox 
 
 I emKparliaeu m . . . • paStW Sv avr6 X rjH e v (i. e- poS"^^ «» 
 ivTO XTj(t>deiTj), seeing that it would easily he taken, &c. 10. Vll, 4^ 
 
60 
 
 THE PARTICLE AN. 
 
 [§ 41, 3. 
 
 iM 
 
 ') 
 
 OuTc ovra ovre av yev6^€va \tyy<moiov(nv, they relate things which 
 are not real^ and which never could happen (i. e. ovk au ytvoiro). Id. 
 VI, 38. 
 
 4. The Future Infinitive and Participle with av would be 
 equivalent to the Homeric construction of av with the Future 
 Indicative (§ 37, 2). As, however, av is not found in Homer 
 with either the Future Infinitive or the Future Participle 
 (see below, Note 2), this construction rests chiefly on the 
 authority of passages in Attic writers, and is subject to the 
 same doubt and suspicion as that of the Future Indicative 
 with &v in those writers. (See § 37, 2, Note 1.) In the 
 following passages it is still retained in the best editions, with 
 strong support from Mss. 
 
 fiouiCovT€iy el ravrrjv 7rpd)Tr]V Xa/3otfi/, paStwff av (T<j)i(Ti rakXa 
 npo(Tx<opri(^ftv. Thuc. II, 80. (Here the direct discourse 
 would regularly have been either in the Fut. Ind. without av, or m 
 the Aor.t)pt. with iiv.) The same may be said of Tiiuc. V, 82, 
 voulCav ueyiarov av acfiis i>(t>f\i](T€iv. (Here one Ms. reads by 
 correction a,</)«XF/(7ai.) See also Thuc. VI, 66; VIII, 25 and 71. 
 2xoX5 iroff ijieiv bevp av €^r)vxovv iyo>, I declared that J should be 
 very 'slow to come hither again. Soph. Ant. 390. *A(^ieTf ^ pr] d(t>ifT€, 
 U ipov OVK av iroir)(Tovroi aXXa, ovS' (I peWa TroXXoKir Tfevdvai. 
 Plat Apol. 30 C. Tovs otiovv a v fKfivcj^ iroi^aovras dvTjprjKores fK 
 T^i 7rdX«a)9 cVecr^e. Dem. F. L. 450, 27. (Here Cod. A. reads 
 jrotijcravraj.) 
 
 Note 1. As the Future Optative is never used with ay (^ 39, 
 Note), this can never be represented by the Future Infinitive or 
 Participle with av. 
 
 Note 2. The Participle with av or Kf is not found in Homer or 
 Pindar. The Infinitive with av occurs in these poets very seldom, 
 and only in indirect discourse. E. g. 
 
 Km b* av toU aXkoiaiv t<^r) 7rapapvdf]a-a(r3ai. II. IX, 684. 
 (The direct discourse is given in the words of Achilles m vs. 417, 
 Ka\ S' av . . . . 7rapa^v6riaaipT]v.) 
 
 Note 3. The Infinitive with av sometimes represents an iterative 
 Imperfect or Aorist Indicative with 5v (§ 30, 2). This must be 
 carefully distinguished from an apodosis. E. g. 
 
 *\KOva> AaKfbaipovLOVS totc €/x/3aXoWaff av Ka\ KaKaxravras rrfv x^ipaP 
 ai/avwoelv €V oUov iraKiv, I hear that the Lacedaemonians at that 
 time, after invading arid ravaging the country, used to return home 
 again. Dem. Phil. Ill, 123, 16. (Here dvax^p^lv av represents 
 avix^povv av in its iterative sense, they used to return.) 
 
 I 42, 2.] 
 
 the particle an. 
 
 61 
 
 Note 4. The Infinitive with av commonly stands in indirect 
 discourse after a verb of saying or thinking, as in most of the ex- 
 amples given above. Occasionally, however, it is found in other 
 constructions, where the simple Present or Aorist Infinitive is regu- 
 larly used. E. g. 
 
 Ta 8f eWof ovTOii €KaUro, »<rT€ {jbiara av is vbap yjrvxpov <T(j)ds 
 avTovs piirreivy so that they would most gladly have thrown themselves 
 into cold water. Tiiuc. II, 49. ("Qort plnT€Lv would be the ordi- 
 nary expression here: with ai/ it represents an Imperfect Jndicative, 
 (ppiTTTov av.) 'EKfivovs dTTcarepTjKevai, ft /cat KparoUv, prj av €TI acpds 
 dnoT€ixi<Tai,to have deprived them of the power of ever again walling 
 them in, even if they should be victorious. Id. VII, 6. See § 27, N. 2 
 (a), for an example of ^ovXopai and the Infinitive with av. We 
 have given examples of verbs of hoping, &c. with the Present, 
 Aorist, and Future Infinitive; they sometimes take the Infinitive 
 with av, as a slight change from the Future ; as in Thuc. VH, 61 : 
 TO TTji Tvxns Kuv /xf^' Tjpav iXirio-avTcs crTrfvai. (See § 27, N. 3.) 
 EXTTt'Co) is found also with as and the Future Optative in Thuc. 
 VI, 30 ; and with as and the Aorist Optative with av in V, 9. 
 
 Note 5. The Participle with av can never represent a protasis, 
 because there is no form of protasis in the finite moods in which av 
 is joined with the verb itself. For examples of apparent violations 
 of this principle, incorrectly explained by Matthiae and others as 
 cases of the Participle with av in protasis, see § 42, 3, Note 1. 
 
 § 42. 1. When Sv is used with the Subjunctive, if it does 
 not coalesce with the relative or particle into one word (as in 
 idv, orav), it is separated from it only by such words as f^h, de, 
 Tc, ydpj &c. See examples under § 62. 
 
 2. When av stands in apodosis with any verbal form, it may 
 be either placed near the verb, or attached to some more em- 
 phatic word in the sentence. 
 
 Particularly, it is very often placed directly after inter- 
 rogatives, negatives, adverbs of time, place, &c., and other 
 words which especially affect the sense of the sentence. E. g. 
 
 *AXXa Tis Bf} Seoiv OfpaTrtia €irj av fj oaiorr^s;^ Plat. Euthyph. 13 
 D. 'AXX' o/iws TO K€(f)d\aiov avrav pabias av etirois. Id. 14 A. Ovk 
 av bf) TovS' avdpa pdxr]S tpCaaio piT€\6(^v, Tvbeibriv, 6? viv ye av jcai Au 
 narpl /xaxoiTO. II. V, 456. Ua>s av rov aip.vXu>TaTov,ex^pov aXrjp^, 
 Tovs T€ dia-adpxas oXeVo-ay jSao-iX^y, rtXos ddvoipi kovtos. Soph. Aj. 
 389. Taxto-T av t€ TroXtv oi TotouTOt iripovs ireiaavTes dnoX^afiav. 
 
 Thuc. U, 63. 
 
 Note. For the sake of emphasis, av is often separated 
 from its verb by such words as oto/ioi, BoKeo), (prjpi, oi5j, &c. In 
 
62 
 
 THE PARTICLE AN. 
 
 r§ 42, 2. 
 
 such cases care must be taken to connect the av with the verb 
 to which it really belongs. E. g. 
 
 Kat vvv Tjdeas av fioi doKO) KoiVKOv^aai, and now I think I 
 should gladly take part (ay belonging to Koiv(ovTJa-ai). Xen. Cyr. 
 VIII, 7, 25. Ovd' av vfiels oiS' 3ti fnavtraaOe TToXffiovvTfi^ nor 
 would you (/ am sure) have ceased Jiyhiing, Dem. Phil. II, 72, 
 25. Ti ovv av, f^T/i/, €17 o^Epwy; Plat. Symp. 202 D. This is 
 especially irregular in the expression ovk oJda a v ci, or ovk a u olda 
 ft, followed by an Optative to which the av belongs ; as ovk otS' a v 
 el Tre/o-at/Ltc, I do not know whether I could persuade him (so. if I 
 should try). EuR. Med. 941. The more regular form would be 
 OVK oi8a ei TTficrat/it av. See Elmsley ad loc. (vs. 911). 
 
 3. *Av is sometimes used twice, or even three times, with 
 the same verb. This may be done in a long sentence, to make 
 the conditional force felt through the whole, especially when 
 the connection is broken by intermediate clauses. It may also 
 be done in order to emphasize particular words with which it 
 is joined, and to make them prominent as being affected by the 
 contingency. E. g. 
 
 "Qar av, el adevos Xa^oi/nt, brjXcocraifi* hv oi avrois (^povOt. 
 Soph. El. 333. Ovk av Tjyd.a-G' avrov kclv err i^ pafxelv . 1)em. 
 Aph. I, 831, 10. OvT av iXovres avOts dv6a\oiev a v. Aesch. 
 Ag. 340. "aWovs y av ovv olofxeda TarjfieTepa XajSovras del^ai av 
 fidkKTTa et Ti perpidCofiev. Thuc. I, 76. (See §4^2, 2, N.) OCt 
 av KeXcva-aifij ovt av, el deXois en npaaaeiv, ep-ov y av ^^/ws 8p<^T]s 
 pera. SoPH. Ant. 69. Aeyco Kad* eKacrrov 8okuv av pot rov avrov 
 dvbpa "nap rjpoiv eVt nXelaT av eldr) kol perd ;^apiTa)i/ paXiaT av 
 evTpa7reX<t>s to (T<i>pa avrapKes nape x^O'^ai. Th UC. II, 4 1 . ( Here 
 av is used three times, belonging to irapexea-dai.) *Yp(ov be eprjpos 
 c^v OVK av Ikovos oipai eivat ovt av (f)iXov u}(f)eXi]a-aL oxjt av e^Opov 
 dXe$aa6ai. Xex. An. I, 3, 6. (Here dv is used three times, be- 
 longing to etvai.) 
 
 Note 1. This principle, taken in connection with that 
 stated in § 42, 2, by showing that dv can be joined to any 
 word in the sentence which it is important to emphasize, as 
 well as to its own verb, and even to both, explains many 
 cases in which dv and a Participle appear to form a protasis. 
 (See § 41, Note 5.) If a Participle takes the place of a 
 protasis, it is of course one of the most important words in 
 the sentence, and one to which the particle dv is especially 
 likely to be attached. The dv, however, does not qualify 
 Buch a Participle, any more than it does a negative or in- 
 
 S 42, 4.] 
 
 IHE PARTICLE AN. 
 
 63 
 
 ' 
 
 terrogative with which it is connected for the same purpose ; 
 but it always belongs to the principal verb of the apodosis. 
 E. g. 
 
 NoaiVaTf TO t€ (bavXov Ka\ r5 peaov Ka\ to irdvv aKpi^es av (vy 
 KpxBev pdXiaT Sv 20-XV61I/, believe that these, if they should be 
 uni'ed, would be especially strong. Tnuc. VI, 18. (Here ^vyKpaOep 
 alone (not with dv) is equivalent to el ^vyKpaOeiq (§ 52, 1), and the 
 dv is placed before it merely to emphasize it, as containmg the pro- 
 tasis to the verb laYvetv, to which this dv, a^s weU as the other, 
 belongs.) "kyavai av tis ftoi boKel, e(f)T], <o Trare^, TrpoeiTTWv 
 €Kd(rrois Ka\ dOXa irpoTiOeXs paXicrr hv noielv ev avKelcreaL, it 
 seems to me, said he, father, that if any one should proclaim contest.^, 
 &c., he would cause, &c. Xex. Cyr. I, 6, 18. (Here^ the protasis 
 implied in the Participles is merely emphasized by av, which be- 
 lonn-s to noielv.) AeyovTos dv tivos Triarevaai oteade; (i. e. ci 
 Tis'^rXeyev, enlaTevaav dv ;) do you think they would have believed 
 it, if any one had told them? Dem. Phil. II, 71, 4. (Here too the 
 dv stands near XeyovTos only to point it out as the protasis, to which 
 its own verb ma-Tevaai, is the apodosis.) . . , . «. x i 
 
 In these cases, the protasis expressed by the Participle is affected 
 by the dv, only as the ordinary protasis with et is affected m the 
 example from Sopn. El. 333, quoted above, under § 42, 3. 
 
 Note 2. "Av is sometimes used elliptically without a verb, 
 when one can be supplied from the context. E. g. 
 
 01 olKerai ^iyKovatV aXV ovk dv irpo tov (sc. ^ppeyKov), <^e/(«^'f 
 are snoring; but they wouldn't have done so once. Arist. ^ub.5. 
 *Qs OVT dv aGTUiV Tcii/S* dv e^eirroipi ro), ovt av reKvoiai rois epols, 
 aripycov 5ua)ff. SOPH. O. C. 1528. So ttcS? ydp av (sc. eir});Jiow 
 could itf TToSs OVK dv; and similar phrases; especiaUy ^oxrTrep av ei 
 (also written as one word, wcnrepavei), in which the av belongs to 
 the verb that is understood after el; as (l)o^ovpjvos (oanep av ei 
 vaU, fearing like a child (i. e. (po^ovpevos aanep dv ecpo^^Orj el irais 
 ^p). Plat. Gorg. 479 A. (See § 53, N. 3.) 
 
 In like manner dv may be used with el in protasis, or with a con- 
 ditional relative, the verb being understood; as in Xen. An^ I, 3, 
 6: u>s epov ovv Iovtos dirj] dv Ka\ vpels, ovto) ttiv yva>pr}V ex^Te. 
 (That is, OTTT} dv Ka\ vpe7s it]T€.) 
 
 Note 3. Repetition of k€ is rare ; yet it sometimes occurs. E. g. 
 TaKe pAX* TJ Kev epetve Ka\ e(T(n>pev6s irep oSoio, 
 *H ice fie Te6vr)v'iav evi peydpoiaiv eXenrev. Od. IV, 733. 
 
 On the other hand, Homer sometimes joins dv and ice' in the same 
 Bentence for emphasis. E. g. 
 
 Kaprepai, as ovt dv Kev " Apr]s oi/ocraiTO peTeXBav, 
 Ovre K *A6rjvair} Xaoaaoos. II. XIU, 127. 
 
 4. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses 
 
64 
 
 THE PARTICLE *AN. 
 
 [§ 42, 4. 
 
 with the same mood, 5v is generally used only in the first, and 
 imderstood in the others ; unless it is repeated for emphasis, or 
 for some other special reason. E. g. 
 
 Oud* &u €/i€, fjvUa bfvpo dnoTrXcIv f/SovXo'fiT/i/, Korf /cwXuev,^ ovBe 
 Toiavra Xe'yc**' "rovroi irpoaeTaTTtv^ €$ hv rJKKrd' vfif^s (fiiWfr 
 €^i€vat. Dem. F. t. 357, 3. (Here av is understood with Trpoo-c- 
 TaTT€u.) OvT(o 5e Spav ovbiv av did<f)opov tov irepov ttoioI, dXX^ 
 «Vt ravTou a/i(^oTfpoi loi€v. PlaT. Rep. II, 360 C. Ovkovv^ kuVj et 
 TTpos avTo TO (pas dvayKciCoi aCrov /SXerreti/, dXyelv re av to. op-para 
 Ka\ (t)€(>y€iv dTro(rrpe(f)6p€vov (oUl) ; Id. VII, 515 E. (This ex- 
 ample illustrates also the principle of § 42, 3, Kav bejonging to the 
 Infinitives.) See also Xen. An. 11, 5, 14. ndvra rjpfio ^iXnnros, 
 TToWa \eyovTOS tpov Ka\ dpvXovvros aei, to pev irparov i>s av fis kolvov 
 yvayprjv dnocfMivopevov, p.€Ta raZra 8' cos dyvoovvras 8idd(TK0VT0S, reXev- 
 ravTos di wr av irpos ireirpaKOTas avrovs Ka\ dvoa-iardTovi dv0pu)7rovs 
 ovSeV vno<TTf\\op€vov. Dem. F. L. 390, 5. (The first dv belongs to 
 dnecfyaivopriv implied, as I should have declared it, if I had been speaking 
 to inform my colleagues ; in the following clause the same tense {ihiha- 
 tfKov) is implied, and av is not repeated ; in the third clause, on 
 the contrary, an Optative is implied, 6)s av Xeyot/xt, and therefore 
 the dv again appears.) In Plat. Rep. Ill, 398 A, we find dv used 
 with two co-ordinate Optatives, understood with a third, and 
 repeated again with a fourth to avoid confusion with a dependent 
 Optative. "Av may be understood with an Optative even in a 
 separate sentence, if the construction is continued from a sentence 
 in which dv is used with the Optative; as in Plat. Rep. I, 352 
 E: — "Eirff oTQ) av aXXo) iSoiff tj d(j)da\pois; Ov d?)ra. Ti 8e; 
 aKOvaais d\\<a fj iaaiv ;*So with Trpdrroi, Id. IV, 439 B. 
 
 Note. The Adverb rdxa, in the sense of perhaps, is often 
 joined with dv, in which case the phrase rdx dv is nearly 
 equivalent to ta-an. This, however, cannot be used unless the 
 dv would form an apodosis with the verb of the sentence, if the 
 rdxa were not joined with it. Thus rdx ^ yivono means it 
 viight perhaps happen. So rdx dv fykv^ro means it would per- 
 haps have happened; but it can never (like t<ra)s eyhero) mean 
 perhaps it happened. 
 
 143.] 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 65 
 
 <» 
 
 4 
 
 J 
 
 t 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS. 
 
 This chapter includes all those constructions which 
 require any other form of the finite verb than the 
 simple Indicative expressing an absolute assertion (§ 2). 
 The Infinitive and Participle are included here only so 
 far as they are used in indirect discourse, or in Protasis 
 and Apodosis. 
 
 These constructions are divided into the following 
 classes : — 
 
 I. Final and Object Clauses after tva, a>9, otto?, 
 
 o(f)pa^ and fJ'V' 
 II. Conditional Sentences. 
 
 III. Relative and Temporal ;:5entences. 
 
 IV. Indirect Discourse, including Indirect Quota- 
 
 tions and Questions. 
 
 V. Causal Sentences. 
 
 VI. Expressions of a Wish. 
 
 VII. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, 
 
 Exhortations, and Prohibitions. 
 VIII. Subjunctive (like the Future Indicative) in 
 Independent Sentences. — Interrogative Sub- 
 junctive. — Ou p>rj with the Subjunctive or 
 Future Indicative. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Final and Object Clauses after "Iw, 'fls/Owcos/Oc^pa. 
 
 AND M^. 
 
 § 43. The clauses which depend upon the so- 
 called final particles, «/a, «?, otto)?, o<f)oa, that^ in 
 
 E 
 
66 
 
 FWAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§43. 
 
 § 44, 1.] 
 
 PURE FINAL CLAUSES. 
 
 67 
 
 order that, and Mt l^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^> ^^7 ^^ divided into 
 three classes : — 
 
 A. Pure final clauses, in wliicli the eyid, purpose^ 
 or motive of the action of any verb may be expressed, 
 after any one of the final particles ; as epx^'^f^'' ^^« 
 rovTo i8p^ he is coming that he may see this; airepx^- 
 rat firj tovto chjf, he is departing that he may not see 
 this, 
 
 B. Obiect clauses with ott©? or ottox? ^irj after verbs 
 
 If// 
 of striving, <fec. ; as o-KOTrec ottg)? y€vrj<r€Tai, see that it 
 
 happens; CKOTrec ottq)? firj yevrjaerai, see that it does 
 not happen. These clauses express the direct object of 
 the verb of striving, &c., so that they may stand in 
 apposition to an object accusative like tovto ; as a-Koirei 
 TOVTO 07r&>9 fjLr) ae o-^eTai, see to this, viz., that he does 
 not see you. They also imply the end or purpose of the 
 action of the leading verb, and to this extent they par- 
 take of the nature of final clauses. 
 
 C. Object clauses with m after verbs of fearing, 
 &c. ; as <j)o^ov/jLaL /jl^ yevrjTac, I fear lest it may happen; 
 ^o^ovfjLai firj TOVTO eyeveTo, I fear lest this happened. 
 These express simply the object of fear, without even 
 implying any purpose to prevent that object from being 
 reahzed. Thus if we say <l)ofiovfiat> tovto, fir) kokqx: 
 irpa^co, I fear this, lest I may fall into misfortune, the 
 clause with fi^ merely explains tovto, the direct object 
 of <j)ofiovfiai„ 
 
 Remark. Although the object clauses of the class B par- 
 take slightly of the nature of final clauses, so that they some- 
 times allow the same construction (the Subjunctive for the 
 Future Indicative, § 45), still the distinction between these 
 two classes is very strongly marked. An object clause, as we 
 have seen, can stand in apposition to a preceding tovto; 
 whereas a final clause could stand in apposition to tovtov 
 
 4> 
 
 „ 1 
 
 » 
 
 * 
 
 €W/ca, as epx^rai tovtov eveKUy tua ruiiv ^orjOrjcrrj, he COmeS for this 
 
 purpose^ viz., that he may assist us. The two can be combined 
 in one sentence; as cTroiiSd^et oTrwj TrXovTi/crtt, Iva tovs (f)i\ovs 
 €v TToifj, he is eager to be rich, that he may benefit his friends. 
 
 Care must be taken not to mistake the nature of an object 
 clause, when its subject is attracted by the leading verb ; as 
 «r/c»7rcti/ T^i/ irokiv onas crco^ijcrfrai for atcoTr^iu ottco? 17 ttoKis cca^if" 
 (TtTai, to see that the city is saved. 
 
 Note 1. "Ocjipa is found only in Epic and Lyric po- 
 etry. 
 
 Note 2. The regular negative adverb after iva, as, ottos, 
 and 6(l>pa is fiij ; but after /iij, lest, ov is used. E. g. 
 
 * \TT€pxfTai, Xva firj tovto ibj], he is departing that he may not see 
 this. OojSetrai firj ov tovto ytmjTai, he is afraid lest this may not 
 happen. This use of ov as the negative after firj seems to have no 
 other object than to avoid repetition of fif). Where, however, the 
 sentence is so long that this repetition would not be noticed, we find 
 firi repeated ; as in Xen. Mem. I, 2, 7 : iOavfia^e 8' a rt; . . . . ^x)- 
 /SoTro lit} 6 y€v6fi€vos koXos Kayados t<5 to, fiiyicTTa €V€py€T^a-aim 
 ft ^ T^v peyiarrjv X^P'-^ e^oi, 
 
 A. Pure Final Clauses. 
 
 § 44. 1. In pure final clauses the Subjunctive is 
 regularly used, if the leading verb is primary ; and the 
 Optative, if the leading verb is secondary, E. g. 
 
 NCi' 8* €p\fcr6^ eVl heinvov, Xva ^vvaycofiev "hprja. II. II, 381. 1o\ 
 8* 2)8f fiVTjarr^pes VTTOKpivovrai, iv clbfis avTos a^c^ 6vfxa, eidSxTL de 
 7rdvT€s *AxatO(. Od. II, 111. Eitto) ti drJTa koKX , tv opyiCj) nXfOv; 
 Soph. O. R. 364. Kal yap ^aa-iKcvs atpftrat, ov^ *"" iavrou Ka\ci>s 
 6 7rt/ifX^Tat, aXX' tva /cat ot (kofievoi bC ovtov €v Trpdrrtoai, 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 2, 3. AokcI fioi KOTaKavcrai tus dpd^as, ha fxrf to. 
 ^fvyx) r]pLa>v (TTpaTTjyfj . Xex. An. Ill, 2, 27. "Qpwd', Iv ddavdrotai 
 0oa)ff ipepoi rjbe ^poTo1(nv. Od. V, 2. ^iKos f^ovXcTO elvui toIs 
 fiiyiara 8vvafi€vois, Iva ddiKav fiff diboirj biKTjv. XEN. An. II, 6, 
 21. 
 
 BovXrjV S' *Apy€iois v7ro$T]fr6p(d\ ij tis ovryo-et, a>s p.fj ndvTes oXoiv 
 rat obvaa-apevoio Teolo. II. VIII, 36. AiavodTai Tqv y€(f)vpav Xvaai, 
 cos p^ 8ia/3i)Tf, dXX' eV /xeVo) dnoXrjcpOfJTe . Xex, An. II, 4, 17. 
 ne(JE)i/« 8' ECpvYOv, oj? Avyi'av Xdrpiov fiiadov n pdaaoiTO . PiND. 
 01. XI (X), 34. TovTov €V€Ka ^iXo)v a€To beladai, as avv€pyovs 
 €xoi' Xen. An. I, 9, 21. 
 
68 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§ 44, 1 
 
 11^ 
 
 \ 
 
 Top ^€ fivrjOTTjpes Xo^eSo'ti', onas dno ^v\ov oXrjrai e^ ^WaKtjs. 
 Od. XIV, 181. Mid€S Tob' ayyos vvv, oncos to nau fiddrjs. SoPH. 
 El. 1205. Els Kaiphu rJKds, oncos ttjs dUrjs aKova-jjs. Xen. Cyr. 
 Ill, 1, 8. na/.)aKuXfis larpovs. orrwy pq aTroOavrj. Xex. ^leni. II, 
 10, 2. Oipai 8€ Tiivra yiyueaOaty ovx oinos rovs avTovs xopouy xptj 
 voi<TLV ol TToXirai, ovd' onojs rovs auTovs avXrjriis inaivdi^iv , ovd 
 6n(t>s Tovs avToifi ttoitjtcis aipcoi/rai, ovb' lua rms avrols T/Scoi/rat, 
 aXX' tm To'is v6poLS tt e i ^ a> i/t a i . Xen. Mem. IV, 4, IG. 'Ev ^f t>fO-- 
 aiv t6j)K€v, 6n(os ert TrlJ/xa (fyvyoifxt. Od. XIV, 312. ^ 'ETrpfO-^ei'oirro 
 iyKkripaTa noiovpevoL., oTTooy acpiaiv on fieyiarTrj 7rp6(j)a(ris firj rod 
 iroXfpftv. Tiiuc. I, 126. ^ 
 
 Ke(f)a\fj KaravevcTopai, off)pa 7r€7roldrjS' H. I, 524. Opcreo 87 
 vvv, |fi»/V, TToXti/S' i/xfv o(^pa o-e Treixyjro). Od. VI, 255. Ao/io»/ 
 ^€p(T€(f)6vas eXdi, o^p ldoi(r viou flrrrjs. PiND. 01. XIV, 30. 
 
 *AXXa (TV /x€i/ vDf a vrtff aTroarixf , prj ri vorjai] "Hprj ' €/xot Se <e raCra 
 fifXfjdfTai, ocppa T € X € o- o- 0) . II. I, 522. Ov 8^r avVoi/ d$us dfvpo, pfj 
 Tis dvapTrda-rj; SoPH. Aj. 986. Av(rirfXet eaaai fV t<» irapovriy p-rj 
 Koi TovTov noXtpiov 7rpoa6a)p€6a. Xex. Cyr. II, 4, 12. Acyrrat 
 eiTTfiv oTt dirupai /SouXotro, /n^ 6 Trari^p rt axOoiTO koi tj TrdXty /if/i-- 
 ^oiro. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 25. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Indicative sometimes (though rarely) 
 takes the place of the Subjunctive in pure final clauses, after 
 oTTODs and 6(f>pa {ona>s fijj, ocjypa prj) ; — 7}ever after tva or wr, and 
 very seldom after the simple /xtJ. (MiJ with the Future is 
 commonly found only after verbs of the next two classes; 
 §§ 45, 46.) Here, as well as after verbs of striving and of 
 fearing, the Future differs from the Subjunctive only by being 
 a more vivid form of statement. E. g. 
 
 Atei hi paXaKoicri koi aipvXioiai Xoyoiai ^eXyft, oncos *l6dKT]S iTriXr}- 
 aerai. Od. I, 56. Ovbe 8i iv aXXo TpfCJyovrai rj oncoi paxovprai 
 
 VTTfp tS>U Tp€<t)6vT(0V. XEN. CyT. 11, 1, 21. XpTf dvQ^l^dCdP eVl TOP 
 
 Tpo-xhp Tovs dvaypa(\)iPTas^ onai prj irpoTfpop pv^ t <rra t rrpti/ nvdtadai 
 T0V5 apbpas diraPTQS. Andoc. dc Myster. I, p. 6, 38. § 43. 'Ett* 
 avTovs TOVS irpoXoyovs aov Tpi'<^opxii^ orrtos to irpioTOP ttjs Tpayadias 
 pfpos 7Tpa>Ti(rrop ^acrapioi. Arist. Ran. 1120. In Nub. 1466, otto)! 
 diroXels fJLfTfXeoiP (not per epov eXd') is to be explained^ by § 45, N. 
 7. Odpavpop be ol rjTop eVt (ppicrXv, o(f)pa Ka\ "EKTcop eio-erat. H. 
 XVI, 242. So Od. IV, 163. '*Q(tt' eUos fjpds pt} ^pabvvtip €<tti, pfi 
 Kai Tiff 6\lr€Tat Yhpo)P taas KaTeinrj. Arist. Eccles. 495. So pri 
 KfxoXdnarrcUf IL XX, 301. This construction is very rare in Attic 
 prose. 
 
 Note 2. The Particle av («) is sometimes joined with 
 
 § 44, 1.] 
 
 PURE FINAL CLAUSES. 
 
 69 
 
 <> 
 
 ^ 
 
 >ki 
 
 «s, oTTwff, and o<^pa, before the Subjunctive in final clauses; 
 especially with cas and 6(l)pa in Homer. The up here is always 
 joined to the particle, and (as in protasis) it adds nothing to 
 tlie sense which can be made perceptible in English. E. g. 
 
 TLdBco, as UP pot Tiprjp peydXrju Kai Kvbos tipr^ai^ obey, that thov 
 mayest gain for me great honor and glonj. II. XVI, 84. (Here o)s 
 av aprjai seems to be merely a weaker form of expression than ws 
 t^prjai would have been.) 'AXX* Wi, pf) p epedi^c, aaoiTcpos w s kc 
 perjaiy that thou mayest go the more safely. II. I, 32. *AXX' ovtos pev 
 pvp aol dp! ey\r€Tai^ 6<ppa K€p evbrj (toIo-lp €p\ peydpoiaip. Od. Ill, 
 359. IIpoabeopfBa .... (Tvpircp^ai riplp, ois up piP e ^€X(ap€P 
 fK T^s X^P^^' HdT. I, 36. *AXX* fdo-co/if i/, 0iXot, tKrjXop avTOP, cds 
 ap (Is vTTvop 7re arj . SOPII. Phil. 825. Tovti Xa(i<i>p pov to uKidbfiop 
 viT€p€x^ dv(ti6fv, u)S UP pi] p op (OCT IP 01 6foi. Arist. Av. 1508. 
 Km <^aT€ avTov TOiovrov (Ivai, ottcos ap (fyaiprjTai cos koXXkttos kui 
 dpKTTos. Plat. Symp. 199 A. *Av -ye Tipas vTrmrTevj] (Xevdepa 
 (l>popf)paTa exovTas pf] €7rtrpe\|rfii/ avr^ apx^iPy {rroXf povs Kipel) OTrox 
 UP TovTovs p€Ta 7rpo<^aa-fa)9 dnoXXvjj, that he may destroy them. 
 Plat. Rep. VIII, 567 A. *Qs ap p-dBris, dpTdKovaov, Xen. An. 
 II, 5, 16. See also An. VII, 4, 2; Aesch. Prom. 10 {L>s dp), 824 
 (oTTcos ai/), Eumen. 573 (otto)? dp). 
 
 Note 3. (a.) Homer and Herodotus sometimes use ap or k€ in 
 final clauses with the same particles before the Optative, with no 
 apparent effect upon the verb. E. g. 
 
 Kai piP paKpoTfpop KaX irdaaova 6r]K€P IbeaBaij ^s k€P ^aiKTjKeaa-t 
 <f)iXos Trdi/Tfo-o-t yepoiTO, Od. VIII, 20. 'Epvnpap 6* eV Tflxos Ui 
 poop' v€ 8* upa Z(vs avP€X€S, ocppa K€ Bda-aop aXinXoa Teixea 6 fin. 
 II. XII, 25. 2v hi p€ npoifis (S iraTtpa, ocjyp' dp iXoiprjp 8wpj. 
 Od. XXIV, 334. Aiwpvxa (u>pvaa€p), ok<os dp to aTpaToirfbop 
 ibpvptpop Kara pdiTOV Xd^oi. Hdt. I, 75. TaOra bi rrepl eavrop 
 
 €(T(pVV€ Tiopbf ftvCKfP, 6 K (O S UP pTf OpiOPTfS Ol 6pr}XlK€S XvUfoiaTO 
 
 Ka\ iiri^ovXevoifP, dXX' fT€ polos <T(f)i boKfoi eipai prj opeaxri, in 
 order that his campanions might not be offended by seeing him and plot 
 against him, but that he might appear to them to be of another nature by 
 their not seeing him. Id. I, 99. 
 
 (b.) Apart from this use, however, the Optative can be reo^ularly 
 joined with up in anv final clause, if it forms an apodosis with the 
 verb; to which there is a protasis expressed or distinctly understood. 
 Such Optative with dp can follow primary as well as secondary 
 tenses. (§ 31, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 *Uyfi<T6a) dpxv^poio, as k€P tis (t)air) ydpop eppfpai (ktos dKovap, 
 let him lead off the dance, so that any one icho should hear icithout 
 would say there was a marriage. Od. XXIII, 1 34. ^ Qs b dp 
 TJbiara Tavra (paiPoiTo, avTos tis avra ravra napaaKcvdafi, hi. but 
 each one must acquire these things for himself, to cause that they would 
 appear most agreeable {if any one should experience them). Xen, Cyr, 
 
70 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 L§ 44, 1 
 
 :^ 44, 2.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER SECONDARY TENSES. 
 
 71 
 
 VII, 5, 81. "eBoxc XPhy'^^O' ^A^vTokKiBa, ojrcof Si/,^ TrKrjpaBevrot 
 vavTLKOV VTTO AaKcSatftoi/i'cov, oi 'Adfjvaioi fxaXXou rrjs (lpi]vr]S irpod' 
 deoivTo. Xex. Hell. IV, 8, 16. (Here irXr^poiBevTos vavriKov,^ if 
 the navy should be manned, stands as a protasis to the Optative 
 npoaBeotvTO av.) 
 
 Such sentences as Dem. Phil. II, 66, 15, wf fie KaXixrair" au 
 €Kflvov irpdrrciv raOra, iravT€\S>s a/jyws exfrf, but as to any measures 
 by which you could prevent him from doing these things, you are wholly 
 inactive, are not final clauses, but relative sentences with an ante- 
 cedent implied. See § 65, 1, N. 4. 
 
 Remark. M 17 , lest, can be followed by a verb with av only^in a 
 regular apodosis after verbs o^ fearing, &c. (See § 46, N. 3.) "iva 
 is never used with av, except when it means lohere. A single case 
 of Iva with k4 in a final clause occurs, Od. XII, 156 : — 'AXX* ep/aj 
 yitv iyu>v, Iva dboTCi fj k€ 6dv(OfJi€V, rj k€V d\€vdp,fvoi Odvarov Ka\ 
 K^pa <f>vy(opL€v. But here the /ce belongs not to Iva, but to the 
 Subjunctives: see § 87, Note. 
 
 Note 4. A purpose can be expressed by a relative and the 
 Future Indicative (§ 65, 1), or by the Future Participle (§ 109, 5). 
 For the use of cbotc to express a purpose, see § 98, 2. 
 
 2. As all filial clauses express the purpose or motive 
 of some person, they admit of the double construction of 
 indirect discourse (§ 77, 2) ; so that, instead of the Op- 
 tative after secondary tenses, we can have the mood and 
 tense which the person himself might have used when he 
 conceived the purpose in his own mind. That is, we 
 can say either rjXdev iva IBoc, he came that he might see 
 (by § 44, 1) ; or ^XOev iva Ihrj, because the person himself 
 would have said ep^ofiat ha tBco, I come that I may see. 
 
 Hence the Subjunctive in final clauses after second- 
 ary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular 
 Optative. E. g. 
 
 'ErreKXcoo-avTO §' oXedpov dvdpoDnois, Iva rjai Ka\ e aero fie voia-iv 
 doibl}. Od. VllI, 579. Kat eirirrj^es (T€ ovk rjy€ipov,lva 0)9 jJStora 
 hidyiii. Plat. Crit. 43 B. nXoZa Kare/cavo-ev Iva p.i) Kvpos 
 diaidfj . Xex. An. I, 4, 18. ' Ax^vv 5' av rot utt' 6(\)6aKp.Q)v f\ov, 
 11 irpXv eirrjfv, o(pp' €V ytyvoiO-Krji r}p.€V 6ibv r)bk Ka\ avbpa. li-^^? 
 127. 'ApiOTfi;? ^vvf^ovXevfv eKnXfvaai, 07ra>y eVi nXfov 6 (Ttros 
 dvTia-xV' TilUC. 1,65. '*li\6ov npfa^eva-onevoi, oiras firj (T(f)ia-i to 
 'Attikov {vavTiKov) irpoa-yevofievov ifjurodiov yfvqrai. TlIUC. I, 31. 
 *Ex<iypovv €K Ta>v ot<ta)i/, ottcds p-rj Kara (pcbs tt poa(j)€ poivrai ku4 
 achiaiv sk tov taov yiyvccvrai,, aXX* .... rjaaovs <oai. iHUC. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 H, 3, Tavras iva Ka>\vr)d* oi vofioi avvrfyayov vfids, ovx Iva Kvpias 
 Tois dBiKovai 7roiTJT€. Dem. F. L. 341, 12. Kat TTfpi rovTav €p,v^- 
 adrjv, iva firj ravra nddrjTt . Dem. 01. lU, 30, 10. (Here the pur 
 pose was conceived in the form, iva ^rj ravrd irddcocriv.) 
 
 Remark. This principle applies equally well to the clauses 
 which follow oTTws and oTrwy ixi] after verbs of striving (§45), and 
 /ij) after verbs of fearing, &c. (§ 46). 
 
 This is a favorite construction with certain authors, as Thucy- 
 dides ; who also, on the same principle, prefer the Indicative to the 
 Optative in ordinary indirect quotations aft;er secondary tenses. 
 See § 70, 2, Remark 2.* 
 
 Note 1. This use of the Subjunctive instead of the Op- 
 tative makes the language more vivid, by introducing as nearly 
 as possible the exact words or thoughts of the person whose 
 purpose is thus stated. 
 
 As the two forms are equally correct (the only difference 
 being that just stated), we find them both in the same sen- 
 tence, as we find the Indicative and Optative interchanged in 
 indirect quotations. (See § 70, 2, Remark 1.) E. g. 
 
 E^aKoo'LOVs \oyd8as i^€Kpivav, oircos rav re 'ETrtTToXaii' fXrjaap 
 <pv\aK€Sy Ka\ rjv es aWo ti derj, raxv ^vvearaTfs napayiyvavTai, 
 they selected them, that they might be guards of Epipolae, and that they 
 might be on hand if they should be needed for anything else. Thuc. 
 VI, 96. ILapavlaxov be (f)pvKTOvs, ottcos da-a^rj to. arjfiela rots noXffiiois 
 y Koi fi^ ^OTjOolfv, they raised f re-signals at the same time, in order 
 that the enemy*s signals might be unintelligible to them, and that they 
 (the enemy) might not bring aid. Thuc. IH, 22. 
 
 The ordinary interpretation of the latter and similar passages, 
 proposed by Arnold, viz. " that the Subjunctive mood indicates the 
 immediate, and the Optative the remote consequence of the action 
 contained in the principal verbs, the second being a consequence of 
 the first," manifestly cannot apply to the first example. 
 
 Note 2. (a.) The use of the Optative for the Subjunctive Id 
 final clauses after primary tenses is, on the other hand, very rare, 
 and is to be viewed as a mere iiTegularity of construction. It oc- 
 curs chiefly in Homer. E. g. 
 
 "A^a TTJX ^IddKTjs, tva /xoi ^Iotov ttoXvv aX^ot. Od. XVII, 250. 
 
 bo II. I, 344, OTTTTCOff fxaxfoivTo. 
 
 * Madvi*; remai-ks {Bemerkungen, p. 12) that he finds in the first two 
 books of Thucydides no example of the Optative after oncos or p-rj depend- 
 ing on a secondary tense of a verb of striving or fearing ; although he 
 cites yjyieen examples of the Subjunctive from the same books. In pure 
 final clauses after secondary tenses, the usage in Thucydides is nearly 
 equally divided between the Subjunctive and the Optative. Xenophon, 
 on the other hand, generally follows the rule, § 44, 1. 
 
72 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 44, 2. 
 
 <1 
 
 ! 
 
 (h.) Sometimes the Optative is used because the leading verb 
 implies a reference to the past as weU as the present. E. g. 
 
 ToCtoi/ fvet Tov toottov 6 vofios, Xva fir]b€ irfKrO^jvai firjb" J^arraTr]' 
 envai yivoLT- €7rl r« fi/y/io,. Dem. Androt 596, 17 (Here e^ft 
 implies also the past existence of the law ; the idea bemg, the law 
 teas made as it is, so that it might not he possible, &c.) 
 
 \ 3. The secondare/ tenses of the Indicative are^^used in 
 final clauses after iva, sometimes after co? or otto)?, to 
 denote that the end or object is dependent upon some 
 unfulfilled condition, and therefore is not or was not 
 attained. This construction is peculiar to Attic Greek. 
 These tenses of the Indicative have here the same difference 
 in meaning as in conditional sentences (§ 49, 2), the Imperfect 
 referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in 
 past time, the Aorist and Pluperfect to past time. Tlius Iva 
 Tovro €TrpaTT€v means in order that he might he doing this {but 
 he is not doing it), or that he might have been doing this {but he 
 was not) ; Ua rolro €7rpa^€v means that he might have done this 
 {but he did not) ; ha tovto iTreirpaxfi means that he might have 
 done this {but he has not). E. g. 
 
 OuK av f(rx6fir)v, it.r.X., if* rj rv(/)Xos re Ka\ k\v<ov firjbev, in that 
 case I should not have forborne {to destrorj my hearing), so that I 
 should be both blind and devoid of hearing (implying that really he is 
 not so). Soph. O. T. 1387. *fO, dxi, to m to. irpdyfMaT dvOpdiTroif 
 (X^iu <\>iovr)v, Xv' Tiaav fxrjdeu oi dfivol Xoyot, Alas! alas! that the 
 facts have no voice for men, so that words of eloquence mighty be as 
 nothing. EuR. Hippol. Frag. 442. *Exp^v daKaXeaavras fiaprvpas 
 noWovs napa<rr)p.r}vaaOai KeXfvaai raff fiia^^xaff, iv\ €i ri eyiyvfTO 
 du(t>i(T^nTf)(rtuov, TJp 6iff TO ypdppaTtt TavT (TraveXedv. Dem. Aph. 
 II, 837, 11. (This implies that they did not have the will thus 
 sealed, so that it is not now possible to refer to it in case of dispute.) 
 'Exp^v avTOvs CrjTfiv, Iva aTrr/XXay/xe^a tovtov tov Brjpaycoyov, 
 they ought to have made an investigation, in order that we might have 
 been already freed from this demagogue {but we have not been Jreed 
 from him). Dinarch. in Demosth. p. 91, 24. 'EC^rrjafu dv im€t6v 
 TralSa, iv' ft pfj napedlbovv firjbiP bUaiou Xcy"'' iBoKoyv. Dkm. Aph. 
 Ill 849, 24. Ti /a' ov Xajiiou (KTeivas fvdvs, wff fdei^a prjiroTt 
 iJivrbv duOpoinoLaiv ZvBcv ^ yfycbff; that I might never have shown as 
 I have done. Soph. O. T. 1391. El ydp fi vivo y^iv ^kcv, cos fxrjTi 
 e^os p^T€ Tiff dXXoff Tolab' iyeylie^i, would that he had sent me 
 under the earth, so that neither any God nor any one else should have 
 rejoiced at these things {as they have done). Aesch. Prom. 152. (K 
 we read cVeyij^ei, we must translate, might be rejoicing, as they 
 
 § 45.] SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 73 
 
 T 
 
 are.) Ti 8rJT .... ovk tppiyjr ffiavrfjv Trjarb^ dno TrtVpaff, 07ru)f 
 T»i/ wavrav novav dTrTjWdyrjv; why did I not throw myself from this 
 rock, that I might have been freed from all my toils f Id. 747. 
 
 Remark. This construction is especially common when a final 
 clause depends either upon an apodosis which contains a secondary 
 tense of the Indicative (§ 49, 2) implying the non-fulfilment of the 
 condition, as is the case in examples 1, 3, 4, and 5, above, or upon 
 a verb expressing an unfulfilled wish, as in examples 2 and 7. In 
 these cases the Indicative seems to be used by a sort of assimila- 
 tion. 
 
 Note 1. The particle av is very rarely joined with the second- 
 ary tenses of the Indicative in final clauses. When it is used, it 
 denotes that the sentence is an apodosis (as well as a final clause), 
 with a protasis expressed or understood. E. g. 
 
 ZavTi cSei (iorjOflv, 6ira>s on SiKaioTaTos wf koL oaiararos t^r] rt 
 (av Ka\ reXevT^o-aff aTtfid)pj;roff av kukSv ajxapTrfparav iyiyvfro, 
 i. e. that he might be exempt from punishment after death {as he would 
 be, if he had so lived). Plat. Leg. XII, 959 B. 
 
 Note 2. The Indicative can never be used in this construction, 
 unless it is distinctly implied that the result is not (or was not) 
 attained, that is, unless the final clause refers either to the present 
 or to the past (as in the examples given above) : if it refers to the 
 future, it must be expressed in the ordinary way by the Subjunctive 
 or Optative, even although it depends on one of the class of verbs 
 mentioned above (Remark). Both constructions may occur in the 
 same sentence. E. g. 
 
 OCff {rav v€(t>v Toifs dya6ovs) ^/iftff av €(f)v\dTTOfi€V h cKpoTroXfi, 
 Xva p.r]hi\s avTOvs hif^Oeiptv, dXX* ^ireibfj dcfyUoivro ciff Tr)V r}\i- 
 Kiav, xp'?<Tt/zoi ylyvoLVTo Tals troKfcnv, we should have kept them 
 {in that case) in the Acropolis, that no one might corrupt them {as 
 they are now corrupted), and that when {in the future) they should 
 become of age they might become useful to their states. Plat. Men. 89 
 B. TaxjT av TJdr] Xfyfii/ wpos vfids incx^ipovv, iv* (IB^re, #c.r.X., / 
 should {if that were so) be now undertaking to say this to you, that you 
 might {hereof er) know, &c. Dem. Aristocr. 623, 11. See also the 
 examples under § 32, 3 (6.). 
 
 B. Object Clauses with "Onas and 'Ott©? fxrj after Verbs of 
 
 Striving f Sfc. 
 
 § 45. After verbs signifying to strive, to take care, to 
 effect, and the like, the Future Indicative is regularly 
 used with otto)? and ottw? fn^, if the leading verb is 
 frimary. The Subjunctive also occurs, but much less 
 frequently than the Future. 
 
74 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§45 
 
 §45.] 
 
 "Onm AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING. 
 
 75 
 
 If the leading verb is secondary, the Future Optative 
 mai/ be used, to correspond to the Future Indicative 
 after primary tenses ; but generally the Future Indica- 
 tive is employed here also, on the principle of § 44, 2. 
 The other tenses of the Optative are sometimes used, to 
 correspond to the same tenses of the Subjunctive after 
 primary tenses ; or the Subjunctive itself may be em- 
 ployed (§ 44, 2). E. g. 
 
 'ETri/xfXctTat onays (or oircas fxfj) yevrjaerai or yeurjrai, he takes care 
 that it. may (or may not) happen. 'ETre/ifXfTro ottws yev^o-CTat, yew}- 
 aoLTo^ or yevoiTo, he took care that it should happen. 
 
 (Fut.) "Qairep top iroifieva bfl eTrt/xeXflo-^at oiras aaal ret (row 
 rat m oUs Koi ra eiriTTjbfia f^ovaiv, ovtch /cat top orpaTriyovem' 
 /ifXcio-^at fifi oiras acooi T€ oi orpaTtwrat €<TOVTai Koi to. (niTTjBfia 
 e^ovo-t, »cat, ov €V€Ka (rrparfvovTai., tovto ta-rai. Xen. Mem. Ill, 
 2, 1. KaXov TO TrapaaK€vd(€iv ottws as ^eXTioTai eaovTai TavnoKi- 
 Tav ai y^rvyai Plat. Gorg. 503 A. MUpav ivpovotav €X€lv So<ft oiruis 
 6 vofios Kvpios ea-Tat Koi pr)T€ avyxvOrjaeTai firjT' av fitTW 
 7roir)6ri<T€Tai; Dem. Aristocr. 640, 10. KaXas Se 8Tjp.ay(oyf)(Tfis, 
 
 TJV (TKOirjis OTTCUff Ot /ScXtIOTOI fl€U TaS TipMS € ^ O V O" t V ,^ 01 d^ <lXXot 
 
 firjbiv dhiK^a-ovrai. IsOC. Nicocl. p. 18 A.^§ 16. "Opa^oKots prf 
 d'iro<TTf](TOVTai. HdT. Ill, 36. 2ot /leXero) oKm pr) at oylrerat. 
 IIdt. I, 9. ^povTiC on<o£ prjbeu dpa$iov t^? riprjs TavTr)s^ irpd^eis. 
 Isoc. Nicocl. p. 22 B. § 37. Tt ftaXtor* iv anaai bi€(T7rov8a<rrai toIs 
 vopoLs; oiras pff yfurjaovTai oi irfpX aXX^Xovff ^ovoi. Dem. Lept. 
 505, 9. Aft fvXa^flaSai, pLaXiara piv oirm M fyyevrjaftrdov, av 
 di eyyevTjadoVj oTras ort Tax^ora tKTfT pj)a€(rdov . Plat. Rep. 
 VIII, 564 C. (For the force of the Future Perfect, see § 29, N. 1.) 
 
 (Subj.) "AXXou tov iiripfXf](Tfi, ^ otto)? oti ^eXTtoroi TroXirai 
 fopep; Plat. Gk)rg. 5 1 5 B. JJapa<TKfvaC€a3ai ottws (tvp 6f<^ dyuiPi' 
 ((apeda. Xen. C>t. I, 5, 14. Ou yap 6n(o$ rrXeiopos a^ios yeprjTat 
 eTTi/icXetrat, dXX' otto)? avTos otl TrXfio-ra wpaia Kapnai(T€Tai. 
 (Subj. and Fut. combined.) Xen. Symp. VUI, 25. 
 
 (Fut. Opt.) "ECn vno TToXXJjy eVtfifXetas oTTWff o)ff Adxtora p(V 
 o\/rotTO, fXdxtora S* d/covo-otTO, Aaxtora 8* epoiTO. XeX. 
 Oecon. VII, 5. (Here the construction after a primary tense would 
 be, OTTO)? oyfr€Tai .... d^ovo-erat .... (prjTai.) ^EnfpeXdTO oncas 
 pff ruTiToi iroT( €(roiPTo. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 1, 43. See the other ex- 
 amples of the Future Optative under § 26, Note 1 (a). 
 
 (Fut. Ind. after Secondary Tenses.) "Eirpaaaop onas ti9 ^of}0€ia 
 fj^d. Thuc. Ill, 4. UpoBvprjBfUTos €p6s UdaTov oiras fj pavs npo-^ 
 f ^f t. Thuc. VI, 31. EvXalidcrBai 7rap€KfX(v€a6€ dXXrjXois, on(os prj 
 Xr)(r€T€ 8ia(l)3ap€PT(s. Plat. Gorg. 487 D. Ovd* oira>s opOp wXev- 
 (Tcrat rrpoeideTO, dXXa Ka0* avTOP onus cVt TOtff ix^poU eorai 
 irap€(rKfva<T€P. Dem. F. L. 419, 28. 
 
 (Pres. or Aor. Opt.) *E7rf /tcXero alrcip, ontos del drSpdrroSa St a- 
 
 \ 
 
 .► 
 
 
 TeXoltv- Xen. C^t. VIIl, 1, 44. ^AneKpipaTo, oti uvtm ptXM 
 oTTcos KaXas ex®'* Xen. An. I, 8, 13. *Ep€peXr)Kfi Se avrols orrcof 6 
 iTnrayp(Tr)s eldeir} ovs 8eoi Trepneip. Xen. Hell. HI, 3, 9. 
 
 (Subj. after Secondary Tenses.) "Enpaa-a-fP onas noXe pas yeprj- 
 Tat, Thuc. I, 57. "E-npaaraop onas dnoa-TT)(r(i}<Tip *AdT]paia>p ttjv 
 noXip. Id. Ill, 70. *Qi/€ti/at Trap* avTotp otto)? pr) diricopep €K Ma/ce- 
 fion'aff, he bribed them to effect that we should not leave Macedonia. 
 Dem. Cor. 236, 12. (Subj. aft«r Historic Present.) 
 
 It will thus be seen that the Future Indicative is the most 
 common construction in these sentences, after both primary and 
 secondary tenses ; the Future Optative, which is theoretically 
 the regular form after secondary tenses, being rarely used, for 
 the reason stated in § 26, Note 2. 
 
 For the distinction between these object clauses and final 
 clauses, see § 43, Remark. 
 
 Remark. "Oiras (like as) is originally a relative adverb, mean- 
 ing as. See Thuc. VH, 67, ovt^s^ oiras dvpapraif as they can. 
 Then it is used in indirect questions, in the sense of oTa Tpona^ howy 
 in what way, and is followed by the Future Indicative ; as aKonelv 
 on as fi TToXis <r(a6T}<r€Tai, to see how the city shall be saved. So 
 Totff TTOPrjpo^s, oiras pri baaovat biicrjPy obop SeUpvai, he shows them 
 how they can avoid suffering punishment (oTa Tpona prj Saa-ovtri). 
 Dem. Timoc. 733, 20. (See below, Note* 2.) Tlien, by a slight 
 modification in sense, it may denote also the object to which the 
 striving, &c., is directed ; so that a-Korreip (or a-K07r(7v tovto) onas 7 
 rroXis a-a6r)(T€Tai may mean to see {to this, viz.) that the city shall be 
 saved. Here, however, the Subjunctive is sometimes allowed, as 
 the interrogative force of orras is lost sight of, and its force as a 
 final particle, meaning in order that, begins to appear. E. g. 
 
 SKOTTct on as pr} t^appos €<t€i a vvp Xeyeis, see that you do not 
 deny what you now say. Plat. Euthyd. 283 C. 2K€nT€0P itrriv 
 on as tXdx^o^Ta piP Tpavpara Xd^apev, as tXdxio^a Sc aapaTa 
 dpBpap dno^dXapep, we must see that we receive as few wounds as 
 possible, and that we lose as few men*s lives as possible. Xen. An. IV, 
 6, 10.* 
 
 From this it becomes established as a final particle, and denotes 
 the purpose in ordinary final clauses. From the original force of 
 onas as a relative, used in indirect questions in the sense of hoto, we 
 
 * Compare Dbm. Megal. 207, 5, (TKonelv «| otov Tponov pfj yci/^- 
 (T OPT at (^iXot), to see in what way they can be prevented from becoming 
 friends; and Thdc. I, 65, tnpacra-fP onrj dx^fXta tis yeprjO-eTai, he 
 ivas effecting that, &c. ; quoted by Madvig, Syntax, p. 125, whose views in 
 the main are given in the text, above. See also Thuc. IV, 128, enpao' 
 aep OTa Tp6n<p Taxtora rots pip ^v/ij3^<r€rat toZs be djro)Xd^e 
 rat. 
 
76 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§45 
 
 §45.] 
 
 ^OttcuS after verbs of STRIVINa. 
 
 77 
 
 .ust explain Its occasional use in Incllrect quotations In the sense 
 of ^. or 5n (§ 78). See also § 65, 1, Rem. 
 
 1 *n o In this construction sometimes (though rarely) 
 Note 1. 07r«s m tms co"^" "^ , , , Subiunctive ; never, 
 
 denotes an ordinary apodosis, as in § 44, 1, JN. W, 
 
 simolv interrogative. E. g. , . • _„, „ir' 
 
 i.6fi,. H. Gorg. 481 A. ""^^"■"yTP^X"^! i, 17. (Here 
 
 ,V.M^X«a or some sueh ^1 ' o^J^; S S.- M^"'™ S."i*P°r, 
 S^orri, 5^<»f S" «« l^r"'.^"}V,lseeh>w thefmiqIU (if they diould 
 cioos^) /iue (Ae easiest Uves, &c. Xen. bj mp. v ii, 
 tfijva. i,ra,t «.■ 7«'«"™' ^-i- ^J-^" '' «' ^- , . ^ ^, ^^ 
 
 Note 2. (a.) The Homeric construction .vluch most re- 
 semWes that of § 45 is found after such verbs as ^paCo.a , 
 
 , r V . „r a,our,oiC<o, to consider, and ir«pao, to try. 
 
 ^„„W, ^-7;.°;;j;^J he Subjunctive (sometimes with 
 SXrp'rr; tenU and with the Optative after secondary 
 
 *~ af '/kv-t 2-^ f/jf;r.r?^Jd°'xiYi:sGrt:- 
 
 ^.onsirfcr Aw </»« Of ;/ best things may be done^U ' ^ j ^ 
 
 f,;M.fl- (imp«rf-);Apv"»«"''»"''f "J "P'f^^^od.i.ass. n.p.- 
 
 129. <I.paC.<rfl'" S-rT"' «, ''TfxL^.v' i e. Ao«; Ae n.«y come. 
 
 i. e. he looks to see how &c. f^^^\]lX.^ S^^^a i.'Av.X^a 
 nuno-j (or TiM1<rfO. >• •>• ;""" ^rl TX 420. Tlfioa ojras ««■< 
 
 ^Tn-^ie^f tS exampl^J- -^^^^^^^^^ ^'^ ^ ^n 
 terrogative, meanm- *»'": theJ-^^JJ^'^^^^ gT. (For the Sub- 
 being the eo--- f ^7™^ lutTn othe/exam^les. esj^cially 
 unctive with «, see § »', -^^"'^-^ .nnmach to the construction ol 
 'those with «.pa»., there is a »«^f^ W^ ^hcr illustrate the 
 8 45. The two following e^^^mp'^s mu imx ..A<,.i„„ 
 
 Homeric usage :-?8., yip M<» «"»'<" "'"^<^'"' '"P'' "*' ** 
 
 I 
 
 J. 
 
 Tpcofo-ctv, B. VI, 361; (f)pa((a-6oi firf tis oi dficivav areto iia\TjTaif 
 n. V, 411. See also Od. VI. 113. 
 
 (b.) In Homer ottcos takes the Future Indicative chiefly when it 
 is used merely as an Indirect interrogative, with no reference to a 
 purpose, as in II. II, 252, ov8€ ri ttw (rd<j)a i5/ufj/ otto); ctrrat rddt 
 c/iya, we do not yet even know certainly how these things are to he; or 
 in Od. XIII, 376, (f)pa^€V otto)? fiin]aTTJp(Tiv duaidfai ;^fipaf €(f)r)a€ is t 
 consider how you will lay hands on the shameless suitors. It may take 
 the Future (as well as other tenses) when it is used as a simple rela- 
 tive; as in U. I, 136, onas dma^iov ? o-rat, as shall be an equivalent. 
 (See Remark, above.) Occasionally also we find the Future aflcr 
 onos in final clauses (§ 44, 1, N. 1). 
 
 Note 3. As many verbs of this class imply caution, they 
 may be followed by the simple /atJ (without otto)?), like verbs 
 of caution Siud fearing (§ 46). See especially 6pS) and uKona. 
 Here, as elsewhere, pi] takes tlie Subjunctive more frequently 
 than the Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 S/coTrel 8fj prj rovroLf avrou € ^airrja-rjTai /cat KaraycXdo'T), 
 Dem. Mid. 563, 26. *Opa ovv pf) ti koi vvv € pydarjrai. Plat, 
 Symp. 213 D. "Opa pfj ttoWSv f/caorw rjpau ;(fi/>(i5i/ Bfrjafi* 
 Xen. Gyr. IV, 1, 18. 2fco7r6t, pr] aoi irpouoi jj tov deov <j)v\aKT€<u 
 Soph. 0. C. 1180. "Opaavj pr] vvv piu ns ev^epffs nap^s- SoPll. 
 Phil. 519. 
 
 (See the corresponding use of ottqjs prj. Instead of prf, after verbs 
 o£ fearing, &c., § 46, Note 2. It is often difficult to draw the line 
 between the two constructions of § 45 and § 46.) 
 
 Note 4. *Qs is sometimes, though rarely, used instead of oiras 
 after verbs of striving. Here the Subjunctive is more common than 
 the Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 *E7rtp€\ovvTai u>s fxv ovtoh. Xen. Oecon. XX, 8. *Qs 5e KoKaig 
 €$(t ra vp€T€pa, epol /LieXjJo-fi. Xen. Cyr. HI, 2, 13, ^Enf pfXrjdq ws 
 Tvxot-cv iravrav rciv Kokav. Id. VII, 3, 1 7. 2ir€v8ovT€S a> s ZfifS prinoT 
 ap%€i€v 6(S)v, Aesch. Prom. 203. Occasionally we find the Sub- 
 junctive with av: TO oaa av yva dyada €ivai eViftfXfto-^at ci)s &v 
 TrpaxOf}' • • • • Ov d)€p€i Kapnovj rjv prj tis (nipfX^rai a)ff fiv 
 ravra jrepaivrjTai,. Xen. Hipparch. IX, 2. (See above, N. 1.) 
 
 Note 5. Some verbs which are regularly followed by an 
 Infinitive of the object occasionally take an object clause with 
 oncDs (rarely with other particles), in nearly or quite the same 
 sense : — 
 
 (a.) Verbs of exhorting, entreating, and commanding are 
 sometimes followed by ottws, and those of forbidding by ©«■•# 
 fii{, after the analogy of verbs of striving, E. g. 
 
78 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§45 
 
 t 
 
 §45.] 
 
 •Ottcos after verbs of striving. 
 
 79 
 
 AiWecr^ai 8« fiiu airW Sttcoj vr;wr/a cittt;, onrf imp ore ?iim 
 fAz/S6//^o speak the truth. Od. Ill, 19 (Compare the regular con- 
 
 'HcbatcTTou K\vro.py6u 5n<o, \v<re i.v "Apw. he implored him to 
 liberate Ares. Od. VIII, 344. KecVa> r c/xr,.. ayyfrXar e,/ToX;?i^, 
 
 rtaa,pn(76rac Travra. ro^-. rotouVovr. PlAT. Rep. VIII, 549 E. bo 
 
 pevc/oVaJS ^;? toCto dfTOKptvoiM^' (^ut. Opt.) Id. I, 339 A. 
 
 tZay award of what hebelL^es. Id. I, 337 E. See Soph. Trach. 604 
 In Od Xm 362, we find &Tpvu€U i>s ^p iwpva Kara fivrfimjpai 
 ayWpoc\VvLrethe5.isusedwrth the particle as m the examples 
 
 under § 44, 1, N. 3 (a). 
 
 (b) "lua is used in the same sense in a single passage of the 
 Odyssey, III, 327 : — AiVcrfcr(9at be p.Lv aMs Lva vrjfx^pres tviaitr,, 
 and implore him yourself to speak the truth. ^ ^ . 
 
 This use of iJa is not found in Attic Greek, but it reappears in 
 the later language. E. g. « ,. ^ ,^ ..„ ^^^ 
 
 w^ndme2t I give unto you, that ye love one another ^Z\nll^i 
 xm, 34. So ii^h^nv Iva h^n^xTiy, Luc. IX, 40. So in Latin, 
 rogat ut liceat, 
 
 (c.) A case of i. and the Subjunctive (instead of an ol^ect In- 
 finitive) after a verb implying apromise is found in 11. 1, Sas • — 
 
 „oKia, cV. rival- 'Ax<"£i', that you promised by your nod to honor 
 Achilles y &c. 
 
 Note 6 (a.) On the other hand, some verbs which regularly 
 taktoW aA^Llsionally found witli an Infimtive of the object, 
 sometimes with the article. (See § 46, JS. 8.) Ji.. g. 
 
 •Ar/ rtm eV./xc'Xorro acba,v avr&v iv rals ipx^U ,lva,, they always 
 toot:ai:iToZ7 tkefr own number should be in the offices (.l.e 
 we should expect Stto)? ns tarai, or eaotTo). Ihuc. Vi, 04. yvo 
 
 Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 4. So the Infinitive with ro, Mem. IV, d, i. 
 
 (b.) Verbs of this class can be followed by an indirect question 
 introduced by «i, whether, E. g. 
 
 EJ |v;..o4<r«. .al ^-pya.e. ..oWc, ..e whether thou wdt assist 
 me, &c. Soph. Ant. 41. (See § 46, Note 6, c.) 
 
 Note 7. (a.) Both Stto,. and oVo,. /*!/ are sometimes used 
 
 elliptically with the Future Indicative in exhortations and pro- 
 
 himons, depending on some Imperative like cr.(57rct, t^e care, 
 
 understood. "Ott^^ y^h allows also the Subjunctive. K. g. 
 
 ^OTro,. a^p ?<r.c (sc. a.uTret), pro.e %se//a man. ''Otto,, /xoi, 
 
 i I 
 
 Z avBpajrey fifj epftff ort fori ra SwScica fity e^, see that you do not 
 tell me that twice six are twelve. Plat. Rep. I, 337 A. "Ottw^ uvp 
 €a€(r6e avdpes d^ioi rrjs iXevOepias (sc. aKomlre) , prove yourselves men 
 worthy of freedom. Xen. An. I, 7,3. "On as ye, av n rovrav yiyvrf 
 rat, TovTOvs enaivf (T€<t6 € Koi Tip,T}<r€T€ koX aTfcfyavoaareTf f 
 €fj,€ di fj.f] ' Koi fievTOi Kiiv rt rSiv tvavriayv, on as tovtois opyielcroe. 
 Dem. F. L. 355, 17. "On (OS toivvv n^pl rov no\tpov prfdiv iptiSt 
 see therefore that you say nothing about the war. Id. 370, 22. "Onas 
 ye fiTj f'^anarriarj rjpias. Plat. Prot. 313 C. (See § 46, N. 4.) 
 
 (b,) We occasionally find the Future Indicative with fi^ in an 
 independent sentence, expressing a prohibition. This may be ex- 
 plained by supposing an ellipsis of on-wf from the construction j'ust 
 mentioned (onas firi tovto epets becoming fir) tovto epfls) ; but it 
 seems more natural to consider it as an independent construction. 
 See § 25, 1, N. 5 (6), and the examples. 
 
 Remark. The construction of Note 7 (a) is confined almost 
 exclusively to the second person of the verb ; yet the first and third 
 persons are sometimes found. E. g. 
 
 Koi 7ro)ff, (ocrnfp fparSxTi npoOvpays, ovra> koi noieiv e^cXi;- 
 a-ovtriv. Dkm. Chers. 99, 14. "On as §c to (rvfi^oXov \a^6vr*s 
 €n€iTa nXrja-iov KaOebovfitda. Arist. Eccles. 297. 
 
 Note 8. When an Aorist Subjunctive active or middle was to 
 be used with onas or onas fif} alter a verb of striving, the second 
 Aorist was preferred to the frst, if both forms were in use. This 
 arose from the great similarity in form between these first Aorists 
 and the Future Indicative (as fiov^fvarj and )3ovXevcr«, ^ouXevoT/rai 
 and ^ovXfva-fTai) : this made it natural for a writer, if he intended 
 to use the Subjunctive at all, to avoid those forms of it which were 
 nearly identical with the more regular Future Indicative. This of 
 course did not apply to the first Aorist Subjunctive passive, which 
 has no resemblance to the Future Indicative. The same remark 
 applies to the Subjunctive after ov fit}, in the construction described 
 in § 89. In both constructions the Subjunctive differs from the 
 Futui'e only by being a less vivid form of expression.* 
 
 * The general rule, first laid down by Dawes (Misc. Crit. pp. 222 and 
 228), which declared the first Aorist Subjunctive active and middle a sole- 
 cism after onas p.^ and ov p,fij was extended by others so as to include 
 onas (without p.^), and the Greek authors were emended to conform to it. 
 As this rule has no other foundation than the accidental circumstanco 
 mentioned in Note 8, it naturally fails in many cases, in some of which 
 even emendation is impossible. Thus in the example, k(\€vov(ti npoarw 
 T€v(rai onas €Kn\€V(rTf ff (rrpaTidy Xen. An. V, 6, 22, eicTrXevcriy 
 cannot be a mistake for eWXevo-«, as the Attic Future is iiarXfvaopai, 
 or fKnXfva-QvpLcu. So in Soph. Phil. 381, ov p.r) nor is t^u S/cOpoy 
 €Kn\tv<rrjSy no emendation is possible. See also Plat. Rep. X, 609 
 B. ovfii) dnoXtajjj where the Future would be oTroXci. The rule of 
 
 I 
 
80 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§46. 
 
 ii! 
 
 C. Ohject Clauses with fi^ after Verbs of Fearing, S^c. 
 
 § 46. After verbs and phrases which express or 
 imply /ear, caution, or dan(/er, M-, l^st or that, is used 
 with the Subjunctive if the leading verb is primary, and 
 with the Optative if the leading verb is secondary. By 
 the principle of § 44, 2, the Subjunctive can also follow 
 secondary tenses, in order that the mood in which the 
 object of the fear originally occurred to the mind may 
 
 be retained. 
 
 Mri (like the Latin ne) denotes fear that something 
 may happen which is not desired; M ov (ut=nenon^ 
 denotes fear that something may not happen which in 
 desired, E. g. 
 
 <Po3ovucu uh y^mjTai (vereor ne accuUt), I fear that it may hap- 
 peT%o%vP. l^ov y^^vrac (vereor ut accidat), I fear that it may 
 not happen. NOv 8' alvm dddoLKa Kara (jypiva iir) (re 'rapeiir?/ • 11^ i, 
 
 4^pouriC<o f.^ Kpar^arou ^ fwc crry5.. Xen. Mem. IV, 2 39. *uXar- 
 
 dnayopleiu. PIat. E^p. H, 368 B. Ta rrepX rrjs yjrvxn^ ttoXXi?. 
 
 Dawes is now generally abandoned ; but most editors still hold to it (at 
 least in practice) so far as to exclude the prohibited forms with 07ra,i 
 when it follows verbs of striving, &c., and with ov pr,- Even here, how- 
 Tver the rule is maintained only by changing many passages agams 
 u7s. authority. Thus in Dem/oI. I, p. 9. 17, all Mss. except one read 
 
 while nearly all editions have ^or]6n<r€T,, In the Third Philippic of 
 Demosthenes two similar examples occur: p. 128, 25, orrcof prjd^Ls 
 ai/arpe'ifi, tovto (TKOirfladai, v^here all Mss. have amrpcV^/y, which 
 Schaefer emended to avarpe^fi ; and p. 125, 10, Bnco, pf, 8o vXe vaov- 
 a IP TrpaTTovrer, where the weight of Mss. authority decidedly favors 
 douXf uo-a>o-iv. For ov pi], see § 89, 2, Rem. 2. 
 
 Whatever view is taken of these last examples, there certainly seems to 
 
 be no reason for extending the rule of Dawes to ^Trcor in />"re final clauses, 
 
 as in these the Future is used only by exception (§ 44, 1, N^ 1). i nere 
 
 is no objection, therefore, to such sentences as these :-&v ei/«a .Trira- 
 
 dnvai, OTTO)? cLTtoXaiaoipfv Ka\ oira>s y^vtopfda, Xen. Cyr. Vll, 
 
 5,82; and eK*cX,7(ri'ai/ ^vvi^yayov, 6n<os vnopvr}(T(o '^«' /* ^ ^ ^^^^ "'» 
 
 Thuc. II. 60. So with oTrws apiaTonoLfjO-cavTai, Thuc. VII, 39. 
 
 In elliptical prohibitions with 57ra>9 pi} (§ 45, N. 7) the Subjunctive seems 
 
 to be allowed from the analogy of ordinary prohibitions (§ 86). 
 
 §4G.] 
 
 M7 AFTER VERBS OF FEARING. 
 
 81 
 
 i 
 
 dmartav naptxei roTf dv3pd>irois, p,rj cVftSai' aTraWayfj tov aoipaxos 
 ovhapov €Ti 17, dWa dia(f)6€ipr}Tai re Koi dnoWvrjrai, Plat, 
 Phaed. 70 A. Ovkovv vvv KaX rovro Kipdvuos, p^rj Xa^oxrt irpoardras 
 avTfov Tivas TovTojv, there is danger of this, that they may take, &c. 
 Xkn. An. Vn, 7, 31. Kivbvvos i<m, prj fitra^dXavTaiKalye- 
 pcDvrai pLtra t<ov TroXepicav. Isoc. Plataic. p. 303 E. § 38. 'Okvo) pfj 
 p.01 6 Avaias raneivos <l>avfj, Plat. Phaedr. 257 C. EvXa/SoO be pr/ 
 <i)avfis KQKos ycyas. Soph. Trach. 1129. Ovbiv betvol eaovrai pn 
 (ior]d€Q>ai TavTTj. Hdt. VII, 235. *YitoTn€vop€v koi vpds pfj ov 
 Koivoi dTTo^TJTe'. Thuc. Ill, 53. Ala-xwopevos prj <f>opTiKcos (TKO' 
 napfv. Plat. Theaet. 183 E. 
 
 Aeiaas pr) 7ro)S oi ipvaalaro vcKpov *Axaioi. H. V, 298. A^tro 
 yap pr) Nv/cTt 6otj aTToOvpia epSot. H. XIV, 261. 'Eyw yap Tjprfv 
 
 Soph. 
 
 fKnenXjjypem) (f)6^cOj pf) poi to koXXos aXyos i^evpoi ttotc. 
 Trach. 25. "Edeia-av ofEWrjvei prj irpoadyoiev npos to Kfpat Kai 
 avTovs KaTaKo^fiav . Xen. An. I, 10, 9. OvKeTi iiriTWfVTO, 
 deboiKOTes pr) drroTpTjOeirja-av, Id. UI, 4, 29. "Edeiaav p^ \vTTa 
 Tis Sxmfp Kvaiv Tjplu ipimTTonKOi, Id. V, 7, 26. YTroimvcras prji 
 TTjv 6vyaT€pa X e 7 o i , rjpeTo, having suspected that he might mention his 
 daughter. Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 9. 'Hdvprjadv tiv€s, iwoovpfvoi pr\ to. 
 dmTTjdfia ovKfx^'-^^ cmodev \ap^dvoi€u. Xen. An. Ill, 5, 3. OvSets 
 yap KLvdvvos edoKfi fivai, px] tis dva iropevopxprnv €< tov oniadep €7ri- 
 CTroiTo. Id. IV, 1, 6. 
 
 Ot ^cDKaues rds pfjcrovs ovk €^ov\opto TTcaXceti', beipaiPOPTa prj 
 (pnoptop y€P(OPTai. Hdt. I, 165. Tw yap debupai prj Xoyois fja-' 
 arovs c5 tr I , ToXprjpois npos Ta epya ^x^povp. Thuc. Ill, 83. Hepiher^s 
 yepoptpos pfj iTTtTrXevaoio-tP ai p^(S. ThuC. Ill, 80. ESetcra ptj 
 
 4, 2. 
 
 It will be seen by the examples that the construction with prj is 
 very often used when the leading verb only implies the fear, cau- 
 tion, or danger, as after vironTfixo and 6kpq). On this principle we 
 must explain passages like II. X, 100; ovdjeTi t8p€P, pi] Trcay koX hia 
 pvKTa p€Poiprj(ra>a-i pdxfoSai, where the idea is tee know of no security 
 against their deciding tofght during the wiV/Af, — implying we fear lest 
 they may. 
 
 Remark. These clauses with px), when they follow verbs of 
 caution like (t>v\dTTopai, €v\a^ovpai, &c., partake of the nature of 
 final clauses to the same extent with the construction of § 45, since 
 they imply the end or purpose of the caution. (See § 43, Remark.) 
 On the other hand, when they follow <t>o^ovpai and other verbs 
 expressing fear or danger, no purpose is expressed or implied, but 
 there is merely an apprehension that something tcill happen, or, in 
 some cases, that something is now taking place or has already 
 happened. We should hence expect that these verbs would follow 
 the analogy of verbs o{ thinking, &c., and take either the Indicative 
 with as or the Infinitive, to denote the object of the fear. (This 
 
82 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§46. 
 
 §46.] 
 
 MiJ AFIER VERBS OF FEARING. 
 
 83 
 
 actual!}' happens in a few cases ; as ov d>o^oC^(6a iXaaaaa-faBai^ 
 Thuc. V, 105; /i^ d)o^oO m diropfjafis, Aen. Cyr. V, 2, 12. See 
 below, Note 6.) Still, verbs of fearing, when the object of the 
 fear is future, as it commonly is, are closely connected in sense 
 with those like <j)v\dTTOfiai i as they imply at least a desire 
 (though not a purpose) to prevent the result. The Greeks 
 generally apply to both the same construction, and as they say 
 (jivXaTTOfiat, fjt.^ yevTjraij they say also <f)o^ovfiai fi^ yeurjTai. When 
 the object of the fear is ahesidy past or actually jore^en/, so that no 
 desire of preventing a result can be implied, verl^ of fearing are still 
 followed by firj as before ; but now all analogy to final clauses dis- 
 appears, and the dependent verb is put in the proper tense of the 
 Indicative, as in ordinary object clauses after on and as- (See be- 
 low, Note 5.) 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes, though seldom, fi?} takes the Future 
 Indicative after verbs of fearing, &c. E. g. 
 
 ^^ovfiai 8e, fiTi Tivas rjbovas fjdovais €vpfj(rofifv (vavTias. PlaT. 
 Phil. 13 A. ^o^€p6v Koi a(j)a\(p6v, ^f} a(f>a\€\s jcei <TO/iai. Plat. 
 Rep. V, 451 A. 
 
 The Future seems to differ from the Subjunctive in these cases, 
 as in final clauses, only by expressing the result more vividly and 
 marking its futurity more strongly. Thus (po^ovfiai /x^ €vp(Ofi€v 
 would not differ from d>o/3o0/iat fxr} fvprjaofxcv quoted above, ex- 
 cept in the manner oi expression ; just as tav p,h €vp<t>p.€v would 
 differ from ft /X17 €vpr]aoy^(v. (See § 44, 1, N. 1.) For the rare use 
 of the Future Optative after verbs of fearing, &c., see § 26, Note 
 
 1(b). 
 
 Note 2. Verbs denoting fear and caution are sometimes 
 followed by ottws /xiJ, with the Future Indicative or the Sub- 
 junctive after primary tenses and the Optative after secondary 
 tenses, like verbs of striving, &c Many verbs (like opSi and 
 aKOTTQ}) belong equally well to both classes (§§ 45, 46). It 
 will be noticed, that ottws /xiJ here is exactly equivalent to /xij, 
 
 6O that ^ojSoC/xat OTtas p.r] y^vrja-trai (or yttnjrai) means I fear 
 that it will happen (not, I fear that it will not happen), (See 
 Note 6, a.) E. g. 
 
 ToO baipLOvos hiboi\ oiras p^rj rtv^opxu KaKobaipx)vo9- Arist. Eq. 
 112. "EvXa^ovp^voi oirois p-rj ol\r](TopL(u. PLAT. Phaed. 91 C. A«- 
 boiKa on (OS p-fj dvdyKT] y€vr)Tai, 1 fear that there may he a necessity, 
 Dem. Phil. HI, 130, 14. Ov (\>o^€l, ottos p-ff dvoa-iop irpdypa 
 Tvy\dvris Trpdrroav ; Plat. Euthyphr. 4 E. ^uXarrov, owas fi ^ fls 
 rovvavTiov tXdjjS' Xen. Mem. Ill, 6, 16. *H8«(i)5 av {Bpiy^aipi top 
 mvbpa), ft p.f] <^o^olpr)v onas /a^ fV* avrov pe rpdnotro, Xen. Mem. 
 II, 9, 2. 
 
 Note 3. The particle av is never used with pLTf and the Sub- 
 
 
 junctive. It is sometimes joined with an Optative depending u|)on 
 fif^ after verbs of fearing, in which case it always forms an apodosia 
 with the Optative. Such an Optative with av can of course follow 
 primary as well as secondary tenses, by § 31, Note 2. (See § 44, 1, 
 N. 3, Rem.) E. g. 
 
 AeboiKa yap prj Trpo) Xeyois av rov iroBov rov i^ ipov, I fear thai 
 you might tell {if you should have an opportunity). Soph. Trach. 631. 
 (Cf. Philoct. 493.) OvT€ TrpoadoKia ovSf^ia ^v pfj av Trorf 01 TroXe/itoi 
 €7ri7r\€V(r€iav. Thuc. II, 93. "Ek€Ivo ewom p.r^ Xiav liv raxif 
 a-axjypoviadeiTjv, lest (in that case) I should be very soon brought to 
 my senses. Xen. An. VI, 1, 28. 
 
 Note 4. Mi} with the Subjunctive, and orras pltj with the 
 Future Indicative (seldom the Subjunctive), are sometimes 
 used elliptically, depending upon some verb of fear or caution 
 understood. (See § 45, N. 7, a.) This expresses an appre- 
 hension or anxiety, sometimes a mere suspicion. It is espe- 
 cially common in Plato. E. g. 
 
 *AXXa prj ov tovt rj xaXfirov, Bdvarov (^tvytlv, but (/ fear) lest this 
 may not be thejiifficult thing, to avoid death. Plat. Apol. 39 A. M^ 
 dypoiKOTfpov fi TO dXrjSfs f tVf ti/, (/ fear) lest it may be too rude to 
 speak the truth. Plat. Gorg. 462 E. *AX\d p.^ ov^ ovras exn , aXV 
 dvayKoiov y fiSo'ra TididOai. tov TiOtpevov tol ovopiaTa. Plat. Crat. 436 
 B. Oi^ot TdXas, 6 Zevs ottos prj p.* o^trat. Arist. Av. 1494. 
 (This example belongs equally well under § 45, N. 7, a.) "Chras 
 ovv fif] cTToXf t piaariyovpevos. Xen. Cyr. I, 3, 18. *AXX' oiras p.Ti 
 f 1/ Toh C<^ypa(prjpa<Tiv rj tovto, to pfj 6p6as diav€p€iv, (iri Be Tols ovopaaiv 
 ov, dXX' dvayKaiov r; aft opOas. Plat. Crat. 430 E. 
 
 In Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 12, /n,) ovv, e^yrj, ov dvvapiai fyo) ra r^s 
 biKawavvrjs firjyijaaaBai, (I fear) that I am not able to explain, &c., 
 the Present Indicative belongs under Note 5 (a.) 
 
 Note 5. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear 
 which are past or immediately present; so that no desire or 
 even possibility of preventing the result can be implied. (See 
 Rem. before Note 1.) Here, therefore, all analogy to final 
 clauses disappears, and pij is followed by the present and past 
 tenses of the Indicative, as on or &s would be in indirect 
 quotations. The following cases occur : — 
 
 (a.) M7 with the Present Indicative expresses a fear that 
 something is now going on, E. g. 
 
 'Op£fi€v prj Nuctar o if rat rt X/yf**', let US be cautious lest Nicias 
 ^thinking that he says something. Plat. Lach. 196 C. (Here tho 
 Subjunctive oiiyrat would have meant lest Nicias may think, refer, 
 rmg to the future.) AfSot/ca firj nXrjyav d«€4. Arist. Nub. 493 
 
84 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§4C. 
 
 li! 
 
 (where the Subjunctive ..^ - - > 'o 
 
 may be). Plat. Phaed. 84 E. 'EttiVx^, wr hv Trpov^pfvi/T/trco arifiou, 
 an Tis iroXtr«»' eV rpt/3a, (t>avrdC^rai , *ta/xol ^€V eX^i? 4>av\o, wi 
 aovXco >^(J7os. Eur. Phoen. 92. (Here ^4 (|)ai/TaC€rat means lest any 
 one Is now to be seen; and /x^) JX^?,, lest any report may come here- 
 after.) "Ami, €Voi TOt, /iii ri Ka\ Be^Xarou roHpyop rod , rj Jvvvoca 
 ^ovx4t TraXai. SoPH. Ant. 278. (The idea ^.mymmd has omf 
 been anxious, lest thb is the work of the Gods, eariv being understoocl 
 after uh*) "Opa ^x^ U^ivov ic o) X v 6 1 . Plat. Charm. 163 A. AXX 
 
 do'A ^apalrr^ixo^.,. SoPH. Ant. 1253. (The idea ^, we shall 
 learn the result of our anxiety lest she is concealing^ &c.t; 
 
 (6.) Ml/ with the Perfect Indicative expresses a fear lest 
 something has already happened. The difference between 
 this and°the Perfect Subjunctive is often very slight, the 
 latter expressing rather a fear that something may hereafter 
 prove to have happened. (See examples, § 18, 1.) E. g. 
 
 ^Zv hk <bo^ovii€6a, fxfj afi(l)orep<ov afia ^^«P;,^/?if «»'l^"^ 'L^/'t 
 fear lest we have missed both at once. Tn uc. Ill, 53. (The Perfect 
 Subjunctive here would strictly have meant lest it may hereafter 
 prove that we have mmed.) A^doiKa p^^ XfXT/^a/ifi/ \rrjp €Lpfjvrju\ 
 iir\ iroXX<5 ayovT€s, I fear that we have been unconsciously enjoying a 
 peace borrowed at high interest. Dem. F. L. 372, ^' ffov^iai /xij 
 Xdyoi J rial >(.evSeVtv ivr^rv xh«^i^^^ . Px^AT. Lys. 218 D. 
 
 * That this is the correct explanation of the passage, Soph. Ant. 278, 
 and that we need not emend it with Nauck, so as to read roHpyov ro8 ?;, 
 tvvvoia ^ov\ev€i irdXai, is evident from the Scholion on the passage : 
 •H avwoia poi ^ovX^Cerat Koi oUrai fi^ Ka\ e^fjXarou tan to irpaytia. 
 So perhaps we should read m i'Kavv€i in Dem. Phil. Ill, 124, 25. 
 
 t In this passage, if anywhere, it would seem necessary to admit the 
 
 interrogative force usually ascribed to ftij, which would make it equivalent to 
 
 «' ov', whether not. But here, as in the other passages quoted, it is plam 
 
 that the dependent clause after m expresses the object of an apprehension. 
 
 To establish a purely interrogative force in /xi), it would seem necessary to 
 
 find examples in which m "«* only follows a verb like oi8a, hut also j 
 
 followed by a clause in which no object of apprehension is contained 
 
 (Such a sentence would be €l(r6p€(T6a /z^ oi <t>iXoi C^aiP, we shall learn 
 
 whether our friends are not living; but no such example can be found, ai 
 
 least in any classic writer. The Greeks would have said f taopf a^a ci ot 
 
 C^KTiv or €l C^fTiv.) The use of €t, whether, after verbs of fearing (Note 6. 
 
 c). usuallv adduced as an argument to prove the interrogative force of pj, 
 
 rather seems to show that, when the Greeks wished to introduce an indi 
 
 rect question after verbs of fearing, they had recourse to ct, as in othel 
 
 cases. 
 
 I 
 
 i ' 
 
 T 
 
 46.] 
 
 M^ WIIH THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 85 
 
 (c.) Mi; can be used with the Imperfect or the Aorist In- 
 dicative, to express fear lest something happened in past time. 
 This can be expressed only in this way, as the Subjunctive 
 and Optative would refer to (relatively) future time. E. g. 
 
 Afi'So) firi Bfi iravra 6(a vrjfiepTta elirevy I fear that alljhat the 
 Goddess said was true. Od. V, 300. *AXX* opa fxri naiCiou cXeyei', 
 but be very careful lest he was speaking injest.^ Plat. Theaet. 145 B. 
 (This impUes a fear that he was speaking in jest.) 
 
 Note 6. {a.) As verbs of fearing, &c., imply thought, 
 they sometimes take the construction of ordinary indirect dis- 
 course. Here wy (and even oirm), that, may be used to intro- 
 duce the object of the fear, thus taking the place of p-ri in the 
 common construction. ("Ort seems to be used only in the case 
 mentioned in Note 7.) E. g. 
 
 *AvBpbs M (po^ov as d7ropr)(r€is djiou, do not fear that you mil 
 le at a loss. Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 12. (Here the direct discourse would 
 be diropTjaa), I shall be at a loss.)' M^ dfiar^re u>s ovx ^Sc'wff >c a ^ € v - 
 df)a-€T€, do not fear that you will not sleep sweetly. Id. VI, 2^30. 
 (Here pr) ovx ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ordinary expression.) M^ TpftrrjSj oitan 
 ae Tis aTTOcTTrdo-ci )3ia, lest any one shall tear you away by force. 
 Eur. Heracl. 248. Mff (f>o^€v pfjre tpe, as crfo irfipjopcvos Xtym 
 Xdyoi/ Tdi/86, prire yvvaiKa rrfv epqif, prj ri roi €$ avrrjs yivr^rai 
 fiXd^os, do not fear either that I am saying this to try you (wy Xcyw), 
 or lest any harm shall come (firf ytvTjTai). Hdt. I, 9. (Here the two 
 constructions afler <t)o^€v make the principle especially clear.) 
 
 In all these cases p^ or onm fifi would have been more regular, 
 and exactly equivalent to as and diras here. (See Note 2.) 
 
 (h.) We also find the Future Infinitive after verbs of 
 fearing, standing in indirect discourse to represent a Future 
 Indicative of the direct discourse. (See § 73, 1, Rem.) 
 
 E. g. 
 
 Ov (l>o^ovfi€da fXaaaaaea-dai, we are not afraid that we shall 
 he defeated. Thuc. V, 105. (Here pfj with the Subjunctive or the 
 Future Indicative would have been more regular.) 
 
 (c.) Verbs of /eanw^ may also be followed by an indirect 
 question introduced by «t, whether, or by some other inter- 
 rogative particle. "Oiras used interrogatively in such sentences 
 is not to be confounded with 07ra>ff in its use explained above 
 (a). E.g. 
 
 Ov BfBoiKa €1 *iXt7r7ro? (Vy aXX' f i r^* rroXfas rcBvrjKt rit rovt 
 dbucovvras piafiv kui Tifwapeia^oi, / have no fear (on the question) 
 
^6 
 
 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 
 
 [§4G. 
 
 I ! 
 
 whetJier Philip is alive ; but I have fear (about this), whether the cus- 
 tom of the city to hate and punish evil-doers is extinct. Dem. F, L. 
 434, 6. ^o^os €1 fiot, ^a>at.v ots iyio 6e\a. EuR. Heracl. 791. *«- 
 povcd aroi v€ovs tJko) \6yovs, (f)6^a) fiiv €i ris bianoToiiV alarOrjafraif 
 through fear whether any one will perceive it (where /i^ ala-Orjo-eTai or 
 ata&TjTai might have been used, meaning lest any one shall, perceive 
 i7). Eur. Androm. 61. ^of^ovvrai o n o i ttotc tt po^Tjartrat r} rov 
 Mpos bvvafxis. Xen. Hell. VI, 1, 14. (The direct question would 
 be TToi 7rpo^T)(T€Tai ;) Trfp Beov S* oxrox \a.6(a deboiKa^ I am in fear 
 (about the question) how I shall escape the Goddess. EuR. Iph. T. 
 995. (The direct question was ttws Xdda ; § 88.) 
 
 Note 7. Verbs of fearing may be followed by ort, because, and 
 an ordinary causal sentence with the Indicative (§81). E. g. 
 
 OvK a^iop bta ToijTO (jyo^eltrOai tovs iroXffiiovs-, ort TroXXot rvy 
 
 Jdvovaiv ovTfs, to fear them, because they happen to be many. 
 SOC. Archid. p. 128 C. § 60. *o/3ov/Ltew;r r^y fJ^rjTpbsj on to 
 \aiplov envuOdveTo voaiodfs fivai. Isoc. Aegin. p. 388 D. § 22. 
 "Ort §€ TToXXo)!/ apxovai , pf) (I)o^tj6^t(, dWd ttoXv paWnv dia rovro 
 6app€iT€, do not be afraid because they rule many, &c. Xen. Hell. 
 Ill, 5, 10. (M17 apxovaiv (f)o^f'ia6ai would mean to fear lest they 
 rule.) ^o^ovpfvos to Kdeadai koI to TtpvfcrOat,, on dXyetvov, fearing 
 them, on the ground that they are painful. Plat. Gorg. 479 A. JiBut 
 for the analogy of the preceding examples, we might be inclined to 
 translate this J^anw^ that they are painful, like pfj dXyavov.) 'E<^o- 
 /Sftro, ort 6(f>6f]a€(r6ai €/tf XXc to. ^acrtXeia olKobop^lu dpxop€vos, he 
 was afraid, because he was about to be seen beginning to build the 
 palace. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 1, 1. 
 
 Note 8. (a.) Verbs of fearing may be followed b^ an Infinitive 
 (without pi)), which is sometimes preceded by the article. Such an 
 Infinitive denotes the direct object of the fear, as in English, / fear 
 to go. E. g. 
 
 ^o^ovpai ovv SieXeyx^tv ae, pfj vnoXd^DS, <c. r. X., / am afraid to 
 refute you, lest you may suspect, &c. Plat. Gorg. 457 E. (Here 
 both constructions occur.) 4»oi3^o-erat dbiKelv, he will be afraid to 
 do torong. Xen. Cyr. VIH, 7, 15. (But (f)o^r)(T€Tai pr) ddiK^, he 
 will fear that he may do wrong.) U^(f>piKa 'Epivifv r f X « o- a t Tht 
 Kordpas, I shudder at the idea of the Fury fulfilling the curses. Aesch. 
 Sept. 720. (But in 790, Tpca pfj TeXea-Tf means I tremble lest sh^ 
 may fulfil them.) See also Xen. An. I, 3, 17. To dTro6vr)<TK€i9 
 ovbfis <f)o^€lTai, TO be dbiKelv (jyo^e'iTcu. Plat. Gorg. 522 E. 
 
 See § 92, 1, Remark 2, and Note 3. 
 
 (b.) Verbs of caution may be followed by an Infinitive (urith or 
 without pj]), which is sometimes preceded by the article; the In- 
 finitive having the same meaning as a clause with pi] and the Sub- 
 junctive or Optative. E. g. 
 
 IIci>( OVK a^uiv avrov y€ (fivXd^aadat rotoOrov yeveaOai; why 
 
 § 47, 2.] 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 87 
 
 •i 
 
 ought he not to guard against becoming such a man himself f Xen. 
 Mem. I, 5, 3. (Here ytvicrOai is equivalent to pri yiinjrai.) ^vXar- 
 
 773, 1. (For pij see § 95, 2, N. 1.) In Thuc. VH, 77, 5, we find 
 the Infinitive with Sxn-f after (pvXdcraa. 
 
 (c.) KlvBvvos €OTi, the principal expression denoting (/an<7er which 
 takes pij and a finite verb, is quite as regularly followed by tho 
 Infinitive (without prj). E. g. 
 
 Ov apiKpoi KivBvvos etrriv €^aTraTr}0rjvai, there is no little danger 
 of their being deceived. Plat. Crat. 436 B. 
 
 Kiv8vv€VQ) is regularly followed by the Infinitive, by § 92, 1. 
 
 Remark. All the Infinitives referred to in Note 8 belong regu- 
 larly under the rule, § 92, 1. For the article before such Infinitives, 
 see § 92, 1, Note 3. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 47. 1. In conditional sentences the clause con- 
 taining the condition is called the protasis, and that 
 containing the conclusion is called the apodosis^ Tho 
 protasis is regularly introduced by the particle eZ, if^ 
 negatively et firj. 
 
 Note. At is the Doric form for et. It is sometimes used 
 also in Epic poetry, but only when « immediately follows. 
 
 2. The adverb av (Epic tee or Kev, Doric ko) is regu- 
 larly joined with et in the protasis, when the verb is in 
 the Svhjunctive (§ 50, 1) ; et with av (a) forming the 
 compound lav, av (a), or fjv. See § 38, 1.) The simple 
 6i is used in the protasis with the Indicative and the 
 Optative. 
 
 The same adverb av is regularly used in the apodosis 
 with the Optative (§ 50, 2), and also with the secondary 
 
88 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 47, 2. 
 
 §48.J 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OP CONDITIONS. 
 
 89 
 
 tenses of the Indicative in the construction explained in 
 § 49, 2. (See § 37, 3, and § 39.) 
 
 3. The negative particle of the protasis is regularly 
 firi^ that of the apodosis is ov. 
 
 Note. When the last rule is violated, and ov is found in a 
 protasis, it is always closely connected with a particular word 
 (generally the verb), with which it forms a single negativci 
 expression ; so that its negative force does not (like that of /*»} ; 
 affect the protasis as a whole. E. g. 
 
 HavTas briTTOV (ourcoy ?X^*)» ^^^ "^^ ^ *^* Amrros ov (f>TJr€ tav t€ 
 <f>rJT€, if you deny itj as well as if you admit it. Plat. Apol. 25 B. 
 (Here iav firj (prjre would mean unless you admit it.) Et fiev o v 
 voWo\ ^aav, Kad* eKaarou av irepi rovrav r]Kov€T€, if there were only 
 a few, &c. Lys. Agorat. p. 135; § 62. Cf. p. 137; § 76. (Here 
 oh TToXXoi are used together in the sense of oXi'yot.) Twvfie /acV ovhiv 
 Xaov iariv, etye d(f> T}fia>v ye tcov tu /leVo) ovBels ovdfTTOTf ap^f 
 rat, there is no fairness in this^ if {it is the plan^ that) no one is ever 
 to begin with us. Xen. Cyr. H, 2, 3. 
 
 The following example makes the difference between ov and fx^ 
 particularly clear, ov affecting merely the verb, and /x^ affecting 
 the whole (including the ov): « ftij Jlpo^fvov ovx virebe^avro ^ 
 f(Toi6r](Tav ai/, if it had not been that they did not receive ProxenuSj they 
 would have been saved. Dem. F. L. 364, 11. 
 
 When several clauses, introduced by fjJv and 8«, depend 
 upon a single tl which precedes them all, ov is used even more 
 frequently than fxfi ; as such clauses have their own construc- 
 tion independently of the «t, which merely introduces each of 
 them as a whole, not affecting the construction of particular 
 words. E. g. 
 
 Afti/Of av 6117, ft oi fjL€U €K€ivaiv ^vp.fia)(oi iirX BovXela rfj avratv ^e- 
 povTfi ovK ampoxxTiv^ Tjfius 6' €7ri T<5 avTol a<t}^€adai ovk apa danauri' 
 aofiev, it would be a hard thing, if (it is a fact that) their allies will not 
 refuse, &c., while we will not contribute. Thuc. I, 121. Err* ovk 
 alaxP^^y ** ''^ /**" 'fipyelcav TrKijdos ovk e<f>o^T)6rj ttjv AaKebaifioviav 
 dpxr}Vi vfiels §€ ^ap^apov (f>o^Tja€(rd€ ; is it not then disgraceful, if {it 
 is true J that) the Argive people did not fear, &c. Dem. Rhod. 197, 9. 
 
 Classification of Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 48. The supposition contained in a protasis may 
 bo either particular or general, A particular supposi^ 
 
 tion refers to a definite act or a definite series of acts. 
 A general supposition refers to any one of a class of 
 acts, which may occur (or may have occurred) on any 
 one of a series of possible occasions, — if having the 
 force of if ever or whenever. 
 
 The following examples contain particular suppositious ; 
 
 If he is (now) able to do this, he is doing it, el tovto rroiflv 
 dvvarai, TToifl. If he was able to do this, he did it, el tovto not- 
 eiu thvvQTo, enoiei. Jf he (shall) be able to do this, he will do it, 
 eav TOVTO noielu dvur)Tai, noiriaei. If he should be able tO do this, 
 he would do it, ei tovto noieiv dvuaiTo, Trowirj av. 
 
 The following contain general suppositions : — 
 If he is {ever) able to do this, he (always) does it, iav tovto 
 TToieiv dvvTjTai, noiel. If any one (ever) wishes to go, it is {always) 
 permitted, idv ny ^ovXijtoi Uvai, e^eaTiv. If he was {ever) able to 
 do this, he {always) did it, el tovto Troielv 8vvaiTo, inoiei. If any 
 one {ever) icishcd to go, it was {always) permitted, eX tis ^ov- 
 XoiTo levai, i^fjv. If any one shall (ever) wish to go, it will {al- 
 ways) be permitted, idv tis livai ^ovXtjtoi, del i^iaTai. If any 
 one shoidd {ever) wish to go, it would {always) be permitted, el 
 TIS levai ^ovXoiTO, del av e^firj. 
 
 Although this distinction can logically apply to all suppositions 
 (present, past, and future), yet the Greek distinguishes the two 
 classes in construction only in present and past conditions, even 
 here excepting those which imply non-fulfilment of the condition. 
 Therefore all the classes under L, except A. 1, include both partic- 
 ular and general suppositions. 
 
 I. Excluding from A. 1 the past and present general sup- - 
 positions, which have a peculiar construction, we have four 
 forms of ordinary conditional sentences: — 
 
 A. If the protasis refers to the present or the past, the 
 question as to the fulfilment of the condition which it ex- 
 presses has been already decided {in point of fact) either 
 ailirmatively or negatively ; the speaker, however, either may 
 or may not wish to imply by his form of statement how that 
 question has been decided. He will, therefore, state such a 
 condition in one of two ways ; — 
 
 .■n»«1l°Mlft. I n 
 
90 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§48. 
 
 §48.] 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONS. 
 
 91 
 
 1. If he refers to a present or past condition, expressing no 
 opinion as to its fulfilment, he may say if he is doing this, ci 
 rovTo TTpao-o-cc, — if he was doing it, ft enpaaaev, — if he did it, 
 €1 inpa^€v, — if he has done it, el irenpaxev, — if he had already 
 done it, *t ineirpaxfi- The apodosis, expressing the result of 
 the fulfilment of such a condition, may refer to the present, the 
 past, or the future. Thus we may say. 
 
 El TrpciTo-ft toOto, KokSis exfiy if he is doing this, it is well. 
 
 E( TTpaaa-ci tovto, i]pApTr)Kfv, if he is doing this, he has erred. 
 
 Et irpd(Ta-€i rovro, KaXas f|ft, if he is doing this, it will he toeU. 
 
 Ei eirpa^f tovto, koXws e^ft (f^X^v, tax^v, or c^et), if he did this, it 
 is (was or will be) well ; and so with the other tenses in the protasis. 
 (See § 49, 1.) 
 
 So in Latin, Si hocfacit, bene est; Si hoc fecit, bene erit, 
 
 2. If, on the other hand, he refers to a present or past con- 
 dition, wishing to imply that it is not or was not fulfilled, he 
 may say if he were now doing this, ft tovto tirpaaa-tv ; or if he 
 had done this (although he did not do it), fi eirpa^ev. The 
 apodosis here denotes what would be or would have been the 
 result, if the false supposition in the protasis were a valid one. 
 The apodosis here contains the adverb av, which distinguishes 
 it from those forms of apodosis belonging under 1 in which past 
 tenses are used. Thus we may say, 
 
 Et (irpaaae tovto, koK^s av flxfv, if he were (now) doing this, it 
 would be well. Et enpaaae tovto, koXkos hv eix^v may also mean if he 
 had been doing this, it would have been well. 
 
 Et enpa^e toijto, KaXas &v eaxtv (or av flx^v), if he had done this, 
 it woula^ have been well (or it would now be well). On the other 
 \iand, et eirpa^e tovto, KaXcir tax^'' (without av) would mean if he 
 did this, it was well. (See § 49, 2.) 
 
 In Latin : Si hocfaceret, bene esset ; Si hocfecisset, benefuisset. 
 
 Remark 1. The Greek has thus a special form (A, 2) implying 
 that a condition is not or was not fulfilled, and another (A, 1) im- 
 plying nothing whatever as to its fulfilment. There is no special 
 form implying that the condition is or was fulfilled, — a force often 
 erroneously assigned to the form A, 1. If this is to be expressed at 
 all, it must be done by the context, not by the form of the verb. 
 
 B. If the protasis refers to the future, the question as to 
 the fulfilment of the condition is, of course, at present unde- 
 cided, and a speaker may state such a condition in either of 
 two ways (B, 1 and 2), which differ more in the form of state- 
 ment than in their meaning : — 
 
 ' 
 
 1. He may say if he shall do this, ihv npacrarj tovto (or, 
 still more vividly, et* npd^ei tovto), making a distinct supposi- 
 tion of a future case. The natural apodosis to such a protasis 
 expresses what will be the result, if the condition shall be ful- 
 filled. We may therefore say, 
 
 *Eav npdaari tovto, #caX<Sf e|et, if he do this, it wiU be well; or «' 
 irpa^et tovto, Kokats e|et, if he shall do this, it will be well. (See § 50, 
 1.) In Latin : Si hoc faciei (more frequently si hoc fecent), bene 
 ent; rarely si hoc faciat, bene erit, 
 
 2. He may also say, if he should do this, et npdaaoi tovto, 
 still supposing a case in the future, but less distinctly and vividly 
 than before. The natural apodosis to such a protasis is a simi- 
 lar indefinite expression, it would be. We can therefore say, 
 
 Et npda-aoi tovto, Ka\os &v e^ot, if he should do this, it would be 
 well. (See § 50, 2.) In Latin : Si hoc faciat, bene sit. 
 
 Remark 2. The two forms of protasis which the Greek ex- 
 presses by the Subjunctive (tav npdaayi tovto) and the Optative (et 
 npdaaol tovto) have only one equivalent form in Latin; si hoc 
 faciat meaning if he shall do this (eai/ toOto Trpdaarj), as well as if he 
 should do this (et tovto npdira-oi). (See § 50, 2, Rem. b.) But in 
 the former sense the Latin commonly employs the Future Indica- 
 tive, si hoc faciei (corresponding to et to^to npd^ei, if he shall do 
 this), or the Future Perfect, si hoc fecerit, leaving the form si hoc 
 faciat to represent the Greek et roirro npdaaoi, if he should do this. 
 
 II. In general suppositions the two following classes are 
 distinguished in construction from the corresponding jt?ar^icM/ar 
 suppositions (I. A, 1). 
 
 A. First, when the apodosis contains a verb of present 
 time, expressing a customary or repeated action or a general 
 truth, and the protasis refers to indefinite time represented in 
 English as present. We may then say, 
 
 Edv Tis TOVTO irpdaaji, KoKas e;(et, if any one (ever) does this, it is 
 (in all such cases) well. 'Eav tovto noiflv bvvrjTai, Trotei, if he is 
 (ever) able to this, he (in all such cases) does it. *Edv tis tovtov nlu, 
 dnoBv^aKet, if any one (ever) drinks of this, he dies. 
 
 B. Secondly, when the apodosis expresses a customary or 
 repeated action or a general truth in past time, and the pro- 
 tasis refers to indefinite past time. We may then say, 
 
 Et TIS TOVTO irpdaaoi, icdXas eix^v, if any one (ever) did this, it was 
 (in all such cases) well. Et tovto voulv dvvaiTo, eVotet, if he was 
 (ever) able to do this, he (always) did it. Et tis tovtov moi, dmSim' 
 VK€v, if any one (ever) drank of this, he died. 
 
92 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§48. 
 
 Remark 1. General suppositions referrinjT to the future (see 
 p. 89), as well as those refemn^j to the present or past with non- 
 fulfilment of the condition implied, not beino^ distinguished by their 
 form from particular suppositions, are included under the rules of 
 § 4f), 2 and S 50, 1 and 2. 
 
 Rf.mark 2. Althouixh the Latin occasionally aqrees with the 
 Greek in the construction oi (jeneral conditional sentences, — usintjj 
 si facint and si faceret like iav npaaarj and el Trpda-a-ni above, — it 
 commonly agrees with the English in not distinguishing this class 
 from I, A, 1. 
 
 U 
 
 I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences. 
 
 A. Present and Past Conditions, 
 
 § 49. 1. (^Particular Suppositions.^ When the 
 protasis in a particular supposition simply states a 
 present or a past condition, implying nothing as to tho 
 truth of the supposition, the verb is in one of the present 
 OT past tenses of the Indicative, after eJ. Any tense of 
 the Indicative may be used in the apodosis, to express 
 the result of the fulfilment of the condition. E. g. 
 
 Et f^p6vrr)(r€, Koi rjoTpaylrevj if it thundered, it also lightened. (This 
 does not imply that the speaker has any knowledge or opinion on 
 the question whether it actually thundered.) E* 8* ovt<o tovto 
 tarlvj e/iot /xeXXct (f)i\ou tivai. II. I, 564. See I, 178. £t t6t€ 
 Kovpos «a, vifv avT€ pe y^pas oTrafet. H. IV, 321. Ei $(oi ri 
 bpuKTiv al(rxpov, ovk flalv Oeoi. EuR. Beller. Fr. 294. Et eyto 
 ^aidpov ayi/ocS, /cat tpavrov eTrtXeXrjapai' dWa yap oufieVepa f<rTi 
 TovT(ovj if I do not know Phaedrus, I have forgotten myself; but 
 neither of these is the case. Plat. Phaedr. 228 A. (See § 48, 1, A, 
 Rem. 1.) Et p€v ('Ao-KXr/TTtoff) Beov ^i/, ovk rju alaxpoKfpdfjs, ei d* 
 al<T\poKep8^Sj OVK rjv 6tov. Plat. Rep. Ill, 408 C. Ki prjbeu rovruiv 
 TrenoirjKasj rl (^o^T]<rTii 
 
 Note 1. The Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations 
 or prohibitions, or the Optative in wishes, may stand in the 
 apodosis. E. g. 
 
 *AXX* el d o K f t (rot, oT6t;(f , if thou art resolved, go. SoPH. Ant. 
 98. (Here edv 8oKJj would refer to the future, while el doKti is 
 strictly present in its time. Cf. Antig. 76.) 'aXX' ft 8oK€t, ttXcw- 
 liev, 6ppda0(o raxvs. Sopil. Phil. 526. 'AXX' ft nov nra>xi^v ye 
 6eoi Kcu epivves el<r\v, ^hvrlvoov irpo ydpoio reXog Bavdroio Kiyf'"^. 
 Od. XVII, 475, *AXX' ft 8oKei aoi Tav6% xmai ris dp^v\as Xvoi 
 raxps, but if this pleases you, let some one quickly loose the shoes^ &c. 
 
 § 49, 2.] PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS. 
 
 93 
 
 1 
 
 Aesch. Agam. 944. KdKurr dnoXolpriv, SavBlav el ^^ (bi\£. 
 Arist. Ran. 579. In the last three examples the Optative ex- 
 presses a wish (§ 82), and must not be confounded with the Opta- 
 tive with au in apodosis (§ 50, 2). 
 
 Remark. A protasis of this class may also be followed by an 
 apodosis m the Optative with Su, as el roCr* aXiy^fV fWti/, fjd^ais & v 
 diTe\6oip.i,ifthis is true, I should be glad to depart. But such an 
 apodosis always implies a protasis with an Optative, which is inde- 
 pendent of the one expressed ; so that these examples belono- under 
 the mixed constructions of § 54. See § 54, 1 (a). '^ 
 
 ^ Note 2. Under this head belong all cases of particular supposi- 
 tions referring to the present or the past in which the non-fulfihneut 
 of the condition is not implied. We must be careful not to include 
 in this class the general suppositions explained in § 51 ; which require 
 a Subjunctive or Optative in the protasis, although we commonly 
 translate them in English by the simple Indicative. 
 
 Note 3. The condition may still be present, even when 
 the Future Indicative stands in the protasis, if that tense ex- 
 presses merely a present intention or necessity that something 
 shall happen hereafter ; as when et tovto noi^aet means if he is 
 (now) about to do this, and not (as it does in an ordinary 
 future condition) if he shall do this. E. g. 
 
 Aipe lA^KTpov, el paxei, raise your spur, if you are going to fight. 
 Arist. Av. 761. (Et fiaxfi in protasis commonly means if ijou shall 
 pght being eqmvalent to edv pdxj]-) Ol eh t^v ^aaCKiK^^v Texvr)V 
 rraidevopevot . . . . rt 8ia(f)epov(n tSw e^ avdyKX)^ KaKO-naBovvTUiV, e\ 
 yt neivijaova-i koi St^j^aovo-t /eat piydxrovtri koi dypvirvi]- 
 vovai Koi ToKka ndvTa poxBrj <rov(riv eKuvTes ; how do they differ, 
 &c., if they are to suffer hunger, thirst, &c. (i. e. if it vi necessary that 
 they should suffer) ?^ Xen. Mem. II, 1,17. 'h pi>u iy^ ph oZk du^p, 
 avTT) 6 avrjp, el tovt dvaTel TrjSe Ketaerai KpdrT), if thvt is to pass 
 unpunished Soph. Ant. 484. So el ndXeuos 8aua, II, I, 61; and 
 €t' 8ta^X77^^(ro;tai, Eur. Hec. 863. /*.»>» » 
 
 This use of the Future must be carefully distinguished from that 
 found in future conditions, where it is equivalent to the Subjunctive. 
 (§ 50, 1, Note 1). The periphrastic form of the Future with peWa 
 and tne Infinitive (§ 25, 2) is more common in this construction. 
 Here the tense of pi\\a> (as in ft* pJWovm toCto noielu for ft* Toirra 
 noiTja-ovaiv) shows that the condition is really present and not future. 
 So with the Latin periphrastic Future, si hoc facturus est. 
 
 2. In sentences containing present or past conditions, 
 when it is implied that the condition of the protasis is 
 not or was not fulfilled, and when the apodosis expresse? 
 
u 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 L§ 49, 2. 
 
 what would he (or would have been) the result if thai 
 condition were (or had been) fulfilled, the secondary 
 tenses of the Indicative are used in both protasis and 
 apodosis. The apodosis regularly contams the adverb 
 
 
 The Imperfect here refers to present time or to a con- 
 tinued or repeated action in past time, the Aorist to an 
 action simply occurring' in past time, and the (rare) 
 Pluperfect to an action completed in past or present 
 time. E. g. 
 
 El rovro tirpaaat, Ka\S>s hvAx^v.ifhe were {now\ doing this, 
 it would be well (implying that he is not doing it). This may also 
 mean if he had been doing this, it tcould have been ivell (implying that 
 he was not doing it). The context must decide, in each case, to 
 which time the Imperfect refers. Ei toZto enpa^t, Ka\5>s av 
 €<rxfv, if he had done this, it would have been weU (implying that he 
 did not do it.) Et toZto iimtpax^^. «a^^ff ^^ "X**'* if j\^ 7" 
 finished doing this (now, or at any past tijne), it would be well (imply- 
 ing either he has not, or he had not finished it), 
 
 Tavra ovk au ibvvavro TroKlv, fi firj koi biaiTrj fierpia €Xpo>vTOy 
 they would not be able to do this, if they diii not lead an abstemious 
 life. Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 16. Uo\v hv 6avyLa(n6r€pov ? »/, €t €Tip.S)VTo, 
 it would be much more wonderful, if they were honored.^ Plat. Kep. V I, 
 4 89 B . Ov Y ovTa 8' av irpoBvyim eVi rbv -nokfpov v^ias 7rap€Kd\ovv^ 
 fl uh rhv flpnvTjv kcoptov alaxpav tao^i^vrjv, I should not exhort you, did 
 J not see (as I do), &c. Isoc. Archid. p. 134 A. § 87.^ Atyovcri 
 TTUi/ra n evff kgl toi ft pt) (Tvyx^vtv avTols kincrrripr) ivovva, ovk 
 hv oloirfi<Tav toZto noirjcrfLv, they tell everything as it is: and yet ij 
 knowledge did not chance to be in them, they could not do this. i^LAT. 
 Phaed. 73 A Ev Uff on fi ti epov fK^jbov, ovbtvos av ovra p€ 
 ii7foaT€p€lv€(f>v\drTov i>sd^i^paTos Kai TLp?)s, if yoKcared for me 
 at all, you would take care, &c. Xen. Cyr. V, 5, 34. Ei pr}^ mrKr^arros 
 r€ eas Ypnuaro)!/ Ka\ alirxpoKepbrji, ovk av v€Kpav OfiKas dv(<oy€S. 
 Hdt. I, 187. (This implies &7r\r^<rros ci, thou art insatiable, and 
 dvcci}y€s, thou didst open.) 
 
 Ovk hv vT}(TU>v eKpdrei, el prj ri Ka\ vavriKhv ttx^^, he WOuMnot 
 have been master of the uilands, if he had not had also some naval force 
 (implying vavriKov fJx^v and vrjaiav Updrfi, he had^ a navy, and he 
 was master of the islands). Thuc. I, 9. (Tavra) ovk av irpotXeyev, 
 ft ph €7r iarfvfv dXrjBfCafiv, he would not have declared these things 
 (referring to several), had he not been confident that he should speak 
 the truth!" Xen. Mem. I, 1, 5. El rjaav avdpes dyaeo\, U <rv (pjjs, 
 oU Siv iTOTi raOra t'ira<Txov,if they had been good men, as you say, 
 they would never have suffered these things (referring to several eases). 
 Plat. Gorg. 516 E. 
 
 Ill 
 
 I 
 
 §40, 2.] secondary tenses op the indicative. 
 
 95 
 
 4 
 
 Kai vv K Zri rrXeovas Avkicdv Krdvt bios ^Obvcaevs, fl pff ap 6^x1 
 v6rf(T€ peyas Kopv$aio\os "EKTtop, i. e. Ulysses would have killed still 
 more, had not Hector perceived him. II. V. 679. Kai vv k€v fjia ndvra 
 KaT€(f)3iT0 Ka\ pivf dvbpav, fl prj tis pe Otatv 6\o<f)v para Kai p* 
 fordaxrev. Od. IV, 363. Kai lacas av bia ravr diredavop, flp^ 
 ^ dpx^ bid raxf<ov KareXvOrj. PlaT. Apol. 32 D. Ti ttot* av 
 tiradov VTT avTCiv, d TrXfio) ;^pdi/oi' tirfrpoirevBrjv; . . . . tl 
 KaT€\€i(f)dr]v piv iviavaios, 1^ trr) Si ir poa-fir €T pontvOriv vn* 
 avrav, ovS' av to piKpd ravra Trap aitrav arreXajSoi/. Dem. Aph. I, 
 833, 12—19. Et Tolwv 6 ^iXiinros t6t€ Tavrrjv ecx^ "rrjv yvatprju, 
 ovdev av a>v wv\ TrenoirjKfV en pa^ev, ovde roo'avTrjv €KTri<raTO 
 bvvapiv. Dem. Phil. I, 41, 18. (See below, Remark b; and § 42, 
 
 4.) , _ ^ ^ 
 
 El p^ V pels rj\6€T€, ejropevopeda av eiii ^aviKea, if you had 
 
 not come, we should (now) be on our way to the King. (Aor. and Im- 
 perf.) Xen. An. II, 1,4. Et yap €k tov TrapeXrfKvBoros XP^^^^ '"^ 
 hiovra ovroi awe ^ovXfvtrav, ovbev av vpds vvv ebei ^ovXeveaBcu, 
 if they had given the necessary advice in time past, there would now be 
 no need of your deliberating. Dem. Phil. I, 40, 9. Tovro el dnt- 
 KpivoD, iKavas hvrjhr) napd aov rr^v oa-iorrjTa epepa6r]Kr), if you had 
 answered this, I should have already learned, &c. (implying dXX* ov 
 nepd6r}Ka, but now I have not learned). Plat. Euthyph. 14 C. 
 Aoiirov 8* av ^v rjplv en rrepX t^s 7r6Xe<os diaXexO^vai rrjs fjperepas, el 
 pq TrpoTepa rwf dXXoiv ttjv tlprjvrjv enenoirfTO. (This implies dXXd ttjv 
 elprjvTjv npoTepa TrfnolrfTai.) Isoc. Phil. p. 93 C. § 56. Tav dSiKrf 
 pdrav av e pe pLvrjro rmv avrov, et ti irepl epov yeypa<^ev, Dem. 
 Cor. 251, 28. 
 
 Different tenses can of course be used in the protasis and apodosis, 
 if the sense requires it. See especially the example quoted above 
 iroin Dem. Phil. I, p. 40, 9, and the preceding one. 
 
 This construction is the exact equivalent of the Latin Imperfect 
 and Pluperfect Subjunctive in protasis and apodosis. With regard 
 to the tenses, the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek 
 Imperfect Indicative referring to present time ; while the Latin 
 Pluperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek Aorist and Pluperfect 
 Indicative, and also the Imperfect referring to past time. 
 
 Remark, {a.) It will be seen by the examples, that this 
 construction usually implies, not merely that the condition of 
 the protasis is not (or was not) fulfilled, but also that the 
 action of the apodosis does not (or did not) take place : thus, 
 el TovTo (irpa^ev, eaadrj av, if he had done this, he would have 
 been saved, implies not merely that he did not do this, but also 
 that he was not saved. The denial of the apodosis is not, how- 
 ever, inferred as a necessary consequence from the denial of the 
 protasis, which would often be an illogical inference ; for (in 
 the example above) the person might have been saved in sonao 
 
96 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 49, 2. 
 
 V 
 
 Other way, even if he did not do the thing referred to. Indeed, 
 where it is not implied that the action of the apodosis depends 
 as a result upon that of the protasis as its condition, the action 
 of the apodosis is not denied: this happens when the protasis 
 expresses a concession^ introduced by koX ft, even if, although^ 
 or ovd' €1, not even if; as Koi tl roiro Znpa^fv, k(Tu>6r) av, even ij he 
 had done this, he would have been saved, where it may be 
 implied that he was saved. 
 
 (b.) In this form of conditional sentence, therefore, the verb 
 of the protasis alwaj/s (and the verb of the apodosis generally) 
 implies its opposite ; the Imperfect always implying a Present 
 or Imperfect, the Aorist an Aorist, and the Pluperlect usually 
 a Perfect or Pluperfect. Thus «t tirpaaaf, when it means if he 
 were doing, implies aXX* oh irpdaaei, but really he is not doing; 
 when it means if he had been doing, it implies aXX' ovk tirpaaat, 
 but really he was not doing: d fifi cwpa^i/, if he had not done, 
 implies dX>C tTrpa^eu, but really he did do : d fTr^TroirJKd tovto, if 
 he had already done this, implies either aXV ov Tr^noirjKfv, but 
 really he has not done it, or aXX* oi'< intnoii/JKei, but really he had 
 not done it, according to the context. This principle will 
 show which tense of the Indicative is to be used in any given 
 case, in writing Greek. 
 
 The Aorist, however, is very often used here, as elsewhere, 
 where the Pluperfect would express the time intended more 
 exactly (§ 19, N. 4) ; as in the sentence above quoted, ovbiv 
 hv l>v wv\ 7r€iroir)K€v €7rpa^€v, where the Perfect nenolrjKev shows 
 that the Pluperfect might have been used for Zitpa^tv, 
 
 Note 1. In Homer, the Imperfect in this construction 
 refers to past time, and is to be translated by our Pluperfect. 
 E.g. 
 
 "^vBa K€ \oiy6s tr) v jeal ap-^x^va tpya ylvovro.d ph ¥ of/' ^^V/ 
 narhp dvbp^u t€ B^^v t€, then there would have been, &c. 11. Vlll, 
 130. Et yhp €yio rabt iJSf' fv\ (^pfffi 7r€VKa\ipr}aiv, ovk av vire^ecpvyt 
 2rvyus vdaros alna pUBpa, if I had known, &c. Id. 366. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes av is omitted in the apodosis, although 
 the non-fulfilment of the condition is still implied. This merely 
 gives a more emphatic expression, as when we say it had been 
 for it would have been. The 5v can be omitted only when the 
 
 
 S 40, 2.J 
 
 APODOSIS WITHOUT ^AN. 
 
 97 
 
 context shows conclusively that the construction is not that of 
 § 49, 1. E. g. 
 
 Nat pa Ala rjo'xvvo prjv pevroi, el viro noXepiov ye ovros i^r)ira- 
 rj]dr)v, yes, by Zeus, I were indeed ashamed, if I had been deceived, 
 &c. Xen. An. VII, 6, 21. KaXoi' tjv auro), fl ovk eyepvTjdi] 6 av 
 BpcoTTos fKeluos, it had been good for that man, if he had not been born, 
 Matth. Evang. XXVI, 24. 
 
 Compare Verg. Aen. XI, 115: Aequius huie Tumum /weraf se 
 opponere morti, it had been more just, &c., where fuisset would have 
 been the regular form. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) An apodosis without av, but implying the 
 non-fulfilment of a condition, is often formed by an Infinitive 
 depending on the Imperfect of a verb denoting necessity, obli- 
 gation, propriety, possibility, or the like. This combination 
 merely expresses in other words what might have been ex- 
 pressed by the verb of the Infinitive in a past tense of the 
 Indicative with av. Thus edci ere tovtov (piXflv means you ought 
 to love him (or ought to have loved him), — implying, but you do 
 not love him (or did not Im^e him), — and is equivalent to 
 ToitTOv av e^/Xftf, ft ra bkovra iiroUit, you would love him (or 
 would have loved him), if you did (or had done) what you 
 ought. So flKos Tjv (T€ TovTo TToi^aat meaus you would properly 
 have done this (but you did not), being equivalent to cIkotos 
 TovT av inoirja-ai. 
 
 This construction occurs chiefly after the impersonal Imper- 
 fects XPV^ ^^ 'XP^"' eSft, f^rjv, fvrjv, TrpoaiJKev, fiKos ^v, ijppoTTtp 
 (decebat), rjv or vnripxtv (it was possible), and ^v with nouns and 
 adjectives expressing necessity, propriety, &c. So when rjif is 
 used with the verbal in -t€ov (equivalent to tdei with the Infini- 
 tive). When the Present Infinitive is used, the construction 
 refers to present time or to continued or repeated action in past 
 time ; when the Aorist Infinitive is used, it refers to a single or 
 momentary action in past time. E. g. 
 
 Et fir Tjpeas povvovs iaTpaTrfKarfe 6 Ilfparji, XP^^ avTov navrav 
 rSiv aWav diTfx^l^^^^^ ovt(o Ifvai eir\ t^v r)p€T€pr)v' koi av €8r}\ov 
 nda-i Q>ff cTTt iKvOas iXavvfi, if the Persian were making his expedition 
 against us alone, he ought, letting alone all others, to be marching 
 directly into our country ; and then he would show that he v^as march' 
 ing against Scythians. Hdt. IV, 118. Here xPV^ t*'*^* means he 
 would be marching into our country (like rjiev av), if he were doing what 
 would be expected under such circumstances^ — implying that this 
 
 5 G 
 
 ii 
 
98 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 49, 2. 
 
 condition is not fulfilled. (See below, Rem. 1 .) 'E x p ^ v^ /*«»' ov» 
 jcat diKaiov rfv rovs rov a-Tf(f)avov olofievovs SfTv Xa^flu alrovs d^ioys 
 fTTibeiKVvvai TovTov, fifj e/x€ Kaicws Xt'yfii/* cneidrf Se tovto irapev- 
 r(9 (Kflvo TTOLova-iv, K.r.X., i. e. thof^e ivho think they ought to receive the 
 crown would {if they did what is right and Just) be showing that they 
 deserve it themselves, and not he abusing me; but since now they have 
 neglected the former and do the lattei', &c. Dem. Cor. Trier. 1228, 
 28. El yap xm obovros rot fiTTf r^XfunJo-fii/ p€, XP^*' ^^ ^* irouav 
 TO. 7roL€€is' vvv U vTT oixP-T}^, f ^6 had Said that I was to be killed by 
 a tooth, then you would have to do as you now do. Hdt. I, 39. ^ (See 
 below, Rem. 1.) *E§€t ph rovs Xeyovras anavras fifjre irpos fx^pap 
 froieXaOai \6yov firjdeva prjTf irpos x^P*"' '^' ^' '^^ speakers ought not 
 to say a word out of regard either to enmity or to favor (and yet they 
 do so). Dem. Chers. 90, 1. Uorepou avrrju ixph^ ^^ J.V OeTToKoiV 
 Kcu AoXoTTWi/ Ta^€i (T V y K OT a KT a (T a I *tXtWG) TTjU tS)v 'E\Xfiva>u 
 apxhv; i. e. ought she to have helped Philip acquire his dominion over 
 the Greeks (sc. as she would have done by your policy) f Det^i. Cor. 
 246, 1. *Ep.i ft /xeV eu aXXais riaiv rjpepais rj^U-qai rt tovtohv IdtQyrrjv 
 Svra, Ibia kqI biKrjv n po(r?i k€v avrS 8i86vai, I e. he would properly 
 have given satisfaction by a private suit (as if he had said rrpoariKoirras 
 Ibia dUriv av ebibov). Dem. Mid. 525, 3. ^ Kai ttoXXoTs 8d|o), u>5 olos 
 T a>v <T€ o-to^f ti/ ft rjdfXov avaKl<TKfLV xpnpiaTa, a^fX^trat, i. e. where- 
 as J might have saved ijou, if I had been willing to spend money,^ &c 
 Plat. Crit. 44 C. Ov yap fvrjv pifj napaKpovadevrov vp.u)v p.flvat. 
 *iXi7r7ra), for Philip could not have remained, unless you had been 
 deceived (implying he did remain). Dem. F. L. 379, 2. (See § 52, 
 1 ) Km pLokiara elKos rjv vp.as npoopaadat avra /cat p,r) /xaXa<a)ff, 
 wo-Trfp vDi/, $vfitiax€lv. Thuc. VI, 78. (The orator adds, aXX 
 ov6' iz/zf Iff vvv y€ TTO) ovd' ot oXXoi f TTi TavTU &pfiT]ad€.) Et /ifV Toivv9 
 aiaxpov Ti f/xfXXoi/ ipyaafvOai, Bdvarov avr avTov 7rpoaip€Tfov rfV 
 (i. e. irpoaip^laBai fSft). Xex. Mem. 11, 7, 10. So in Latin: Quern 
 patris loco, si ulla in te pietas esset, colere debebas. Cic. Phil. II, 38. 
 
 (b.) The Aorist and Imperfect of o^ft'Xo) (oc^fXXo)) are 
 sometimes used with the Infinitive like xp^^* «^**> <^c. ; as in II. 
 1,353, Tt/iTij/TTfp/xoi o(^f XX ev*0Xv/i7r tor fyyvaXi|ai Zf uf l'^l^pf- 
 fifTTjs ' vvv 5* aide /xf rvT06v eriaev, i. e. Zeus ought to have secured 
 me honor ; hut now he has not honored me even a little. From 
 this comes the common use of this form in expressions of a 
 wish; as c5</)fXf KZpos C^v, would that Cyrus were living (lit. 
 Cyrus ought to he living). This is an apodosis, implying as a 
 protasis if it were possible, or something similar. See § 83, 2. 
 
 (c.) Similar to this is the occasional use of i^ov\6p.r)v (with- 
 out av) to express what some one wishes were now true (but 
 which is not true). E. g. 
 
 'EjSovXo/iijv /ifV ovv Koi rr)v Pov\i)v koL ras tKKKrjcriai opOnt 
 
 § 49, 2.] 
 
 APODOSIS WITHOUT *AN. 
 
 99 
 
 8toiK€i(rdai Ka\ rovs vofxovs Icrxvfiv, would that both the Senate 
 and the assemblies were rightly managed, and that the laws were in 
 force (implying the opposite of 6p6c^s SioiKeladai and tVxvfti/). 
 This is analogous to a>(f)e\fv elvai, would that it were, and f 5fi fti/at, 
 it ought to be (but is not). Aesciiin. Cor. § 2. 'E^ovXofirjv ph 
 ovK ipl^fiv iv6dh€, would that I were not contending here {as lam). 
 Arist. Ran. 866. See below, Rem. 2. 
 
 (d.) KivBvv€V(o is used with the Infinitive, as a periphrasis 
 for the verb of the Infinitive with av. E. g. 
 
 H noXis € Kivbvv€v (re nda-a diacpdaprjvai, ft avepos fVryf- 
 vfTo, the city was in danger of being utterly destroyed, if a wind had 
 arisen. Thuc. Ill, 74 . Ei pr) (^€(f){fyop€v €ls Af Xt^ovy, €Kiv8vv(V' 
 o-apev drroXea-dai, if we had not escaped to Delphi, we were in 
 danger of perishing (or there was danger that we should perish) 
 Aeschin. Cor. § 123. (If the meaning had been that there would 
 have been danger, we should have had €Kivbvv€vaapfv dv.) 
 
 (e.) The Imperfect of p,i\\a> is sometimes used to express 
 
 a past intention or likelihood which was not realized. E. g. 
 
 MfXXfv/x«»/ TTOTf oiKos o5' d(j)V€i6s Ka\ dpvpLOiv eppevai' vvv 6' f re- 
 pois €^6\ovTo 6eoi, this house was destined to be rich and faultless ; but now 
 the Gods have willed it otherwise. Od. I, 232. *AXXa ra pev nov /if X- 
 Xfi/ dyd(ra€<r6ai Beos avrus, but even a God might have grudged u,s 
 this (ht. was likely to grudge us this), if we had obtained it. Od. IV, 
 181. So€</)iji/in Od. IV, 171 : Kai piv €(j)r]v (Xdovra 0tX^o-f/ifv 
 f^oxov aXXoiv *Apy€ioiv, ft vci>iv virdp oka voarov fSw/cfv (Zfi/y), i. e. 
 / intended to love him (had Zeus allowed us to return). See Dem. 
 F. L. 391, 11 : ov avarparfvaetv f /xf XXoj/, they would not have joined 
 him. So in Latin : Hoc facturi erant, nisi venisset, they were intend- 
 ing to do this (and would have done it), had he not come. 
 
 Remark 1. It will be seen that in the construction of Note 3 a 
 protasis is implied with the apodosis ; f Sfi at tovtov </)iX^o-at being 
 strictly equivalent to tovtov &v €(f)L\7]aas ft ra deovra ftToirja-as, you 
 would have loved him, if you had done what you ought, or simply you 
 should have loved him. (See § 52, 1.) This form therefore com- 
 monly stands as an apodosis with no other protasis expressed ; and 
 even if another is added (as in the first example under a), the im- 
 plied protasis always remains the prominent one. Especially, this 
 implied protasis expresses the condition, the non-fulfilment of which 
 prevents the action of the apodosis from taking place. The whole 
 expression xpr^v tovto noiflv, &c. thus becomes the apodosis to the 
 expressed protasis, if one is added. In the third example under a 
 (Hdt. I, 39), the real apodosis may be you icould then do from 
 necessity what you now do (implying that now you do not do it from 
 necessity) ; or we may perhaps explain xpr}^ better by Note 2. 
 
 In this construction the Infinitive (of course modified by the lead- 
 ing verb, as showu above) contains the main idea of the apodosis. 
 
100 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 L§ 49, 2. 
 
 When the main idea is contained in the verb of necessity/, &c-, so 
 that the non-fulfibnent of the condition of the protasis^ affects this 
 rather than the infinitive, we have xp^^ ^v, edfi av, Trpocn^Ktv liv, &c., 
 forminfc an ordinary apodosis (§ 49, 2). Thus ei to. dtovra ovtoi 
 vvvf^ovXfvaav, ovbev av vfias vvv fbei ^ovXfveaOai, if these men haa 
 given the necessary advice, there would now be no need of your deliber^ 
 ating, implies hid now there is need of your deliberatinrj. Occasion- 
 ally both constructions can be used to express essentially j^he same 
 aiX)dosis: thus in Lys. in Erat. § 32, we find, xp^\^*^ ^^^ ^J-"^^? W^,°- 
 Xpr)(TT6s^ rois fieWovaiu dbUois dnoOavflaBai fMrjwTrju yevf arOai, if 
 you had been an honest man, you ought to have become an informer in 
 behalf of those who were about to suffer death unjustly (implying but 
 you did not do so, ovk iyivov firfwrl}:); but in § 48, referring to the 
 same thing, the orator says, elnfp rjv avfjp dyaOos, ^xpjiv &v irpdrov 
 ixkv yLT] irapavofxcas apx^iv, fTrftra rfj ^ov\^ pTjwTrjv yfueadai, ic.r.X., 
 if he had been a good man, it would have been his duty, &c. (implying 
 OVK fXPn^)' "^^^^ latter construction, however, is very rare where 
 the former would be admissible. 
 
 The distinction between edfi <t€ tovtov ^iXfTi' and cSft av are tovtov 
 <f)iXeiv would be expressed in Latin by te oportebat hunc amare and 
 te oporteret hunc amare. 
 
 Remark 2. The greatest difficulty in understanding the forma 
 explained in Note 3 is caused by the defect in the English verb 
 oughtj which makes it impossible to translate them accurately. 
 Thus we translate ovk cSet <t€ tovto Troirjaai (or Trotfti/), non oportuit 
 te hoc facere, you ought not to have done this, expressing the past 
 time by the tense of the Infinitive, which we should express by the 
 past tense of ought if there were one. ( You oughted not to do this 
 would represent the Greek and Latin idiom. The vulgar ex- 
 pression you had n't ought comes very near it.) 
 
 A further trouble appears when such phrases as ovk edei ae tovto 
 noiflv refer to present time, meaning you ought not to be doing this 
 (as you are). The Imperfect here refers to present time, as it does 
 in the ordinary construction of § 49, 2. The Latin luis the same 
 idiom, non oportebat te hoc facere. But in Enghsh, owing to the 
 defect in the verb ought, we are obliged to use the simple present; 
 8o that we cannot distinguish in translation between eSei ac (jiiKdu, 
 oportebat te amare, and 8f I ae c^tXeli/, oportet te amare, — both be- 
 in"- expressed by you ought to love, although the former implies but 
 you do not love, while the latter implies no condition. 
 
 It needs perhaps to be added, that the tenses of the infinitive here 
 express no time of themselves, but are used in the ordinary con- 
 structions of § 15, 1, and § 23, 1. The equivalent Latin forms 
 (J'acere representing both Troidv and Trot^o-ai) will make tliis clear. 
 
 Remark 3. It must not be understood that the Imperfects txP^^ 
 cSft, &c. with the Infinitive are always used in the construction of 
 Note 3. Thus cSet Sc fieVctv, in Dem. F. L. 379, 14, means simply 
 but he was obliged to remain {and did rem,ain). 
 
 i 49, 2.] secondary tenses op the indicative. 101 
 
 Note 4. (a.) In II. XXIII, 526 k€ is used with a secondary 
 tense of the Indicative in protasis, apparently adding nothing to the 
 sense. (See § 50, 2. N. 2, b.) ^ & b 
 
 Et de K ert irpoTepa) ye v€to dpopos dp.<^oT€poi(Tiv, 
 To) K€v fxiu irapeXaaa oiS' dp.<^r]pi<rTov iOrjKfv, 
 
 (b.) When av stands in the protasis with a secondary tense of the 
 Indicative in Attic Greek, the expression is so obviously an apodosis 
 at the same time, as to jpresent no difficulty. "Av can never coa- 
 lesce with ft to form idv in these sentences, as it always belon^rs to 
 the verb. E. g. '° 
 
 Et Tolwv tovto laxypov ^v hv tovt<o TfKfirjpiov, Kofiol yevf o-^w TeKfirj- 
 ptov, K.T.X., if then this would have been a strong proof for him (sc. had 
 he had it to bring forward), so let it be also a proof for me, &c. Dem. 
 Timoth. 1201, 19. (This sentence properly belongs to the class of 
 § 49, 1 ; for the protasis really is if it is true that this would have been 
 a proof, to which the apodosis in the Imperative corresponds.) In 
 Dem. Cor. 260, 2, *cai tIs ovk av direKTeive p.€ diKalois, €i ti tiov xmafy 
 2(pvTO)v Tjj TToXet KoKodv Xoyo) p.6vov KaTaia-xvveiv intx^'^PV^* ^^i — 
 if we retain the final av (which is strongly supported by Mss. autho- 
 rity), we must translate ft encx^^pw' «»' V ^ ^ irue that I would 
 (under any circumstances) have undertaken, &c., and not simply if I 
 had undertaken (et eTrexeiprja-a). See § 50, 2, Note 2, a; and § 
 63, 2. 
 
 Note 5. In some cases the Aorist is found in the apodosis refer- 
 ring to present time, after a protasis in the Imperfect; it always 
 denotes, however, a momentary or sudden occurrence, or some other 
 idea wliich the Imperfect would not express so well. E. g. 
 
 Et fiev ovv (TV fjL€ fjp^Tas ri tS>v vvv ^, einov av, /c.r.X., if then 
 you were asking me any one of the questions before us, I should (at 
 once) say, &c. Plat.^ Euthyph. 12 D. Et /neeCfieis ravTrji (t^js 
 ao(j>iai), Ka\ eyco ac ervyxavov dveptoToiv, k.t.X., ti av /not dire- 
 Kpivco; if you desired this kind of loisdom, and I happened to be asking 
 you, Sfc, what should you reply? [Plat.] Theag. 123 B. See also 
 Plat. Prot. 318 A; Gorg. 447 D; Symp. 199 D. 
 
 Note 6. (a.J In a very few passages in Homer we find the Op- 
 tative with K€ m the apodosis referring to the past, where we should 
 expect a secondary tense of the Indicative. E. g. 
 
 Kai vv K€V€v6' dnoXoiTo ava^ dvbpoiv Aiveias, (t fii] ap 6$v vorfirt 
 Aios Ovydrrjp *A(f)po8LTr}, Aeneas would have perished, had not Aphrodite 
 quickly perceived him, H. V, 3 1 1 . Kai vv k€v ivff dnoXoiTo "Apr^s 
 &TOi noXefioio, ei jir) ^HfptjSota *Ep/iea c^^yyfiXev. II. V, 388. (In 
 both these cases aTrwXfro would be the regular form, in Homeric as 
 weU^as in Attic Greek.) So II. XVH, 70, €vda k€ (fie pot is used 
 for evBa k tcfxpev, he would have carried. So II. V, 85, Ivhflhriv d* 
 QVK hv yvoirjs rroTepoKTi fieTciij, you would not have known to which 
 army he belonged: fur the dependent Optative, see § 34, 3, Note. 
 
102 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 49, 2. 
 
 (b.) The Imperfect Indicative is not used in Homer in the cou- 
 Btruction of § 49, 2 referring to present time. (See Note 1.) In a 
 few cases where the Attic Greek would use that form, we find the 
 present Optative in Homer. E. g. 
 
 El fi€UTts Tov oueipov *AxaiS)v aXXos ei'tcTTrf , yjrevSos K€V (^alynv^ 
 Koi voa(f)tCoifif6a fxaXXov, i. e. if any other one had told it^ we 
 should call it a falsehood^ and should rather turn away from it. D. II, 
 80. In II. XXIU, 274, we find the Optative in both protasis and 
 apodosis, where the Attic Greek wouhl use the Imperfect Indica- 
 tive: ft vvv €irl aXXo) adXevotfifPy rj t av eycb ra nprnra Xa/^wv 
 k\i.<tit)v8€ (f)(poifiTjv, i. e. if we were note contendinfj in honor of 
 another {than Patroclus), I shoidd take the first prize and hear it to my 
 tent. The present Optative in Homer is used also in its regular 
 sense, referring to the Future (See § 50, 2.) The constructions 
 included in this note seem to be a relic of an ancient use of the 
 Optative in conditional sentences like that of the secondary tenses 
 of the Latin Subjunctive. (See Appendix I.) For the similar 
 Homeric use of the Present Optative in expressions of a wish, see 
 § 82, Rem. 2. ^ r 
 
 B. Future Conditions, 
 
 § 50, 1. When a supposed future case is stated dis- 
 tinctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go), the 
 protasis takes the Subjunctive with edv, av (a), or fjv 
 (Epic €0 K€ or at /ce). 
 
 The apodosis denotes what will he the result, if the 
 condition of the Protasis shall be fulfilled. It therefore 
 takes the Future Indicative, or some other future form, 
 like the Imperative. E. g. 
 
 'Eap Tt Xa^o), daxrto aoi^ if I (shall) receive anything, I will give it to 
 you. *Edv Tt \d^T]Sy dos /xoi, if you receive anything, give it to me. El de 
 K€v uiS€p$ps Kal ToiTTfiBavrai *Axaio\, yvtaay} eneid* os 6' rjyfpoucov 
 KOKos OS T€ w XaoJi/, but if you shall do thus and the Achaeans obey 
 you, you will then learn both which of the leaders and which of the 
 soldiers w bad. D. H, 364. (For ei k€ see § 47, 2.) Ai *c' avrou 
 yvaxa vrjfifprea ndvr fVcVoi/ra, ecraa pav ')^alvdv re ;^ir(5i/a re, clpara 
 Kokd. Od. XVII, 549. So at k€ ScSo-i, II. I, 128. (See § 47, 1, 
 Note.) Elpev K€v Mf U€\aov 'A\€$av8po? Karane <t)VTi , avros €7rfid' 
 'EXsurjv e;(ero) koi KTrj/xara ndura, fjpcU 5' fv vljfaai V€a>pf6a now 
 TOTTopoio-ti/- €1 5f K 'A\€^av8pov KTfivTj ^avdos M(v€\aos, Tpaas enci^ 
 *E\€VTju Koi KTripara irdvr aTroBovvai. II. HI, 281. Here e;^eVa), 
 vtayptda (Subj. in exhortation), and dnohovvai (Infin. for Impera- 
 tive) are in the apodosjs. At /co r^vos eXi; Kfpaov rpdyov, atya tv 
 Xa^^. Theoc. I, 4. *Av h( Tis avdiarr^Taif avv IpXv ntipa- 
 
 § 50, l.J SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE. 
 
 103 
 
 V opt 6 a xftpov(r6ai, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we will try 
 to overcome him. Xen. An. VII, 3, 11. *Av prj vvv i6i\<j!ip.ev Uti 
 noXfp.f'iv auTO), ivOdK Lcr(os dvayKaadrjo' opeda tovto ttouIv, if we 
 shall not now be willing tofght him there, we shall perhaps be forced to 
 do so here. Dem. Phil. I, 54, 20. Here vvv refers to time immedi- 
 ately following the present : if Dem. had meant if we are not now 
 willing, he would have said et pr] vvv iQ^Xopev (§ 49, 1). *Hi/ 
 yap ravra KaXa>s 6pi(ro}p.€ da^ apeivov ^ovXevaopeda koi irepl Ta>v 
 aXX(cv. IsOC. Pac. p. 162 D. § 18. Hv di Trjv elprjvrjv Troi-qa-oipeda, 
 Kal ToiovTovs Tjpas avrovs irapdaxiapcv, p€Ta ttoXXtjs da(j)aX€ias ttjv 
 TToXiv olKr](rop.iv. lb. p. 163 A. § 20. *Eai/ ovv irjs vvv, nore eo-f t 
 oXkoi; Xen. Cyr. V, 3, 27. Km ypw avrols, eav S f rj ri, and use 
 them, if there shall be any need. lb. V, 4, 30. *Hv p.iv TrdXepov 
 aiprj(Td€, prjKfTL tJk€T€ dfvpo av€v oTrXav, €i cra)0poi/€tre * rjv Sc 
 (IprjVTjs doKrjTf dela-daij avfv onXav rJKiTf' as 5e KaXwy e^fi to. 
 vp,€Tfpa, rjv (f)iXoi yevrjaOi , ep.o\ /xeXiytrft. lb. Ill, 2, 13. *Eav 
 ydp tL ae (^avSa 'AaKov 7r€TroiT}Ka>s, 6poXoyci> dBiKflv' eav p^vroi prjdev 
 <f)aiv<opai KaKov irenoiTjKics prjBe ^ovXrjdfls, ov Ka\ av av opoXoyrf 
 ire IS prjbiv vn ipov d8iK€l(r6ai ; lb. V, 5, 13. (Here opoXoya must 
 be understood as referring to the future, like opoXoyrja-fis. § 10, 1, 
 N. 7.) 'Eav pf) fj oi (j)iX6(ro<})OL ^aaiXeva-axriv^ ol ^aa-iXrjs 1 X o - 
 (ro(f>fja-o>a- IV, oiiK fori KaKau navXa rals TToXcaiv, unless either the 
 philosophers shall become kings or the kings philosophers, there is no 
 escape from troubles for states. Plat. Rep. V, 473 D. ^ihaxr iKotv 
 KTfivfiv tavTov, ^v rdbe yj/fvcT dfj Xeycov. SoPH. Phil. 1342. *Ea»» 
 p.Tj Tjpiv ^€^otj6t] KOTcs (OCT IV, OV del Tjpas avTols ^oTjOflv, if they 
 shall not have assisted us, there is no need of our assisting them. "Hv 
 a€ TOV Xonrov ttot d(f)€X(opai xP^^^^i KaKiar dTrQXoiprjVy i. e. 
 may I perish, if I ever take you again. Arist. Ran. 586. (See §34,1.) 
 
 Remark 1. It will be seen that the apodosis in this construction 
 may take any form of the verb that refers to the future, — the 
 Future Indicative, the Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations 
 and prohibitions, the Infinitive in any future sense, or the Optative 
 in unshes. It may also contain a Present Indicative including a 
 reference to the future (like xp^ or Set) or a Present merely used 
 emphatically for the Future, like opoXoya above quoted from Xen 
 Cyr. V, 5. 13, or iravXd etrri from Plat. Rep. 473 D. 
 
 Remark 2. The English (especially the colloquial language) 
 seldom expresses the important distinction between this form of 
 protasis and that of § 49, 1. Thus modern usage allows us to use 
 the inexact expression if he wishes, not merely for et ^ovXerai (if he 
 now unshes), but als© for eav ^ovXrjrai (if he shall wish). The sense, 
 however, generally makes the distinction clear. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Indicative with « i3 very often used 
 in the protasis in the same sense as the Subjunctive with idv^ 
 Bometimes alternating with it in the same sentence. This is 
 
104 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 50, I 
 
 merely a more vivid form of expression than the Subjunctive, 
 both corresponding to the English if I shall do this, &c. E. g. 
 
 Et yap *A;^£XXevff oios fTTt Tpcoeo-fft /Mo^f irat, ovde fiivvvO^ i^ovai 
 iro8d>K€a IlrjXeiiom, if Achilles shall ffjht, &e. H. XX, 26. Ei 8c av y 
 €S TToXe/xof ir(o\rj(T€aiy ^ t€ a 6t<o piyrja-eiv noXffiov ye, kol it x' «t«" 
 p<aBi TTvdrjai. II. V, 350. Et Se npos tovtokti €ti reXevrrja ei top 
 ^iov fu, ovTOS cKfivos Tou <rv Cr)T€'is oX^ios K(K\^a6aL a^tos fori. Hdt. 
 J, 32. (See Rem. 1.) Elp.T)Ka6($€is yXwo-trai/, torat aoi KaKa. 
 Eur. Aeg. Frag. 5. Ei 5c pr} tovt eVtSf i|f t, iras xph Tavrrj Tfl 
 npoK\rj(Tfi TTpoa-ex^iv vpias top vovv; Dem. Aph. I. 829, 28. Et 8* vpds 
 «XXo Tt yvaxrea-de , 6 prj yevoiro, rtva oUaOt avrrjp y\rvxr]v e^tiv ; 
 Dem. Aph. II, 842, 15. (Referring to the same thing, p. 834, 24, 
 Demosthenes had said av yap airo<PvyTj pt ovtos, o fir) ytVotTO, ttjp 
 (ira^fXlav 6(p\j]<T(o.) *Hv i6t\u>pL(v dnoOvrja-Ketu Irrep rav fiiAcatcoi/, 
 tvdoKip,fjaop€v' 61 6e (fio^Tja-opLf da tov? Kivdvvovs, fis noWas rapa- 
 Xas KaTa<TTTj(Top€v vpas airrovs. ISOC. Archid. p. 138 A. § 107. 
 
 This use of the Future must not be confounded with its less com- 
 mon use in present conditions, § 49, 1, N. 3, where it is not equiva- 
 lent to the Subjunctive. 
 
 Note 2. In the Homeric language the following peculiari- 
 ties appear in this construction : — 
 
 (a.) The Subjunctive with k€ is sometimes used in the 
 
 apodosis instead of the Future Indicative, thus making the 
 
 apodosis correspond in form to the protasis. E. g. 
 
 El 8€ K€ pri dwTjaiv, cyo) 8e k€v avros eXca/xat, and if he do not 
 give her up, I will take her myself. II. I, 324. (Compare I, 137.) 
 This gives a form of sentence analogous to that in which the 
 Optative is used in both protasis and apodosis. See § 87, Note. 
 (For the use of 8c in apodosis, see below, § 57.) 
 
 (h.) "Kv is the only contraction of ct av found in Homer. 
 The most common Homeric form is, however, ci k€ (sometimes 
 €1 8e icc). Et Slv is rarely found, as II. Ill, 288. 
 
 (c.) El K€ or at K€ is sometimes found even with the Future 
 Indicative in Homer. E. ft. 
 
 At K(v av(v ipeOfv .... *lXiou 7r6</)i8^<rcrat, o^8* edeXrjat 
 €K7rfp(rat, loro) tovto. D. XV, 213. 
 
 For K€ (and even av) with the Future in apodosis, see § 37, 2. 
 
 (d.) The simple ct (without av or «) is often used with the 
 Subjunctive in Homer, apparently in the same sense as « « or 
 the Attic idv. E. «:. 
 
 El 8 av Tii pairja-L Bttov (vi oivotti ttoi/tw, TKrja-opai iv aTrjdfo-a-iv 
 JX®" raXoTrci/^ca Bvpov. Od. V, 221. Oi^8€ noXivde cp^o/xttt, el fxrf 
 row Ti irept0/)a)j/ Xl^i/cXdzreta t\6fp.€v orpiivrjaiv. Od. XI V, 37 2. 
 
 § 50, 2.] optative in protasis and apodosis. 
 
 105 
 
 Note 3. (a.) The Homeric use of the simple tl with the 
 Subjunctive continues in lyric poetry, and is found in the 
 chorus of the Attic drama, and even in some passages of the 
 ordinary dialogue. E. g. 
 
 ^Et yap 0avT}9 Ka\ TeXevrrja-as d<t>^s, SoPH. Aj. 496. AvtrroXaiwi 
 rap iytii, fltrov (TTeprjBa. SoPH. O. C. 1442. Ei fir) <t (K(^dym 
 €K rrjaSe ttjs yrjs, ovhiirore /Stoxro/iai. Arist. Eq. 698. Ei tis ev 
 itd(rx<av Xoyov €(rX6v aKOva-rj. PlND. Isth. IV, 16. 
 
 (ft.) In Attic prose, this construction is extremely rare, and its 
 existence is denied by many high authorities; if we follow the Mss., 
 however, we must admit it in a few passages, as Thuc. VI, 21 : Ou 
 vavTiKTJf arparids p,6t/ov 8ct, dXXd Ka\ irt^bv noXvv ^v/xttXcii/, aXXo); re 
 Ka\ ft $v a- TO) a- IV ai iroXeis (fio^ijdcia-ai. (Here only a few of the 
 worst Mss. read rfv for ct.) 
 
 Note 4. For the change from the Subjunctive to the Optative 
 after secondary tenses in indirect discourse, see § 74, 1. 
 
 2. When a supposed future case is stated less dis- 
 tinctly and vividly than it would be stated by the Sub- 
 junctive (as in English, if I should go)^ the protam 
 takes the Optative with el. 
 
 The apodosis here denotes what would he the result if 
 the condition of the protasis should be fulfilled, and 
 takes the Optative with av, E. g. 
 
 El TKBoi, irdvT hv T8ot, if he should go, he would see all. Et a 
 ourtuff edeXoi ^tXeW Krjdoiro t€ Bvpcd, ra K€v rts Kfivcov ye /cai 
 eicXeXa^oiTO ydpoio, if she should be willing thus to love you, &c 
 Od. Ill, 223. 'H k€v yrjBrja-ai JJpiapos IIpidp,oi6 re iraides, AXoi 
 re TpStes peya kcv ifex«poiaro ^u/ig), et a(f)a>iv rdSc rrdvra nvBoiaro 
 fxapvap,€vouv. II. I, 255. (See § 47^ 2.) *AXX' ft fwi ri irlBoio, to 
 
 KfV TTOXV KfpblOV €ITJ. H. VII, 28. El7/ff (pOpTJTOS OVK hv , ti IT p do"' 
 
 aois KaXaf. Aesch. Prom. 979. Et 8e' ris tovs Kparovvras rod 
 irXfjBovs eV* dp€Tr)V tt poTpcyjre i€v, dp.(f)OT€povs av ovrfcrete, IsOC. 
 ad Nicocl. p. 16 C. § 8. Et rty twi/ o-ot (rvvovrtov eTrapBeirj noieip 
 a av Tvyxdvfis evXoyav, nas ovk av dBXicnTaTos €irj; Isoc. Busir. p. 
 230 C. § 47. Ovdi yap av Mt^^okos fie 6 ^aaiXevs eTraivoirj, ei 
 e^eXavvoip,i tovs evcpyeTas, Xen. An. VII, 7, 11. Et /zj) Swotop 
 \m avrav eirj acoBijvai, diroKTe ivaip.* av epxivTov. Dem. Enbul. 
 1320, 25. Ou8* ei irdvTes eXBoiep Uepa-ai, jrXrjBei ye ovx vnep^a* 
 Xolp.eB* &p TOVS TToXe/itovff. Xen. Cyr. II, 1, 8. Ov noXX^ &v 
 aXoyia eiiy, et (^o^oIto top Bdvarov orotovTos; Plat. Phaed. 68 
 B. OiKOS 8* avTos, ei (l)Boyyrjv Xd^oi, aa(l)eaTaT av Xe^eiev. 
 Aesch. Ag. 37. IIq>s ovp ovk av oixTporuTa TrdvTtov eyw TreTrovBas 
 
 6* 
 
106 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 50, 2. 
 
 ftrji/^ fi €fjL€ '^rj(f>i(raivTo fii/ai ^hov; how then should I not hav€ 
 suffered (lit. be in the condition of having suffered) the most pitiable of 
 all things, if they should vote me a foreigner? Dem. Eubul. 1312, 17. 
 (See § 18, 1, and examples of the Perfect Optative there quoted.) 
 
 Kemark. (a.) This form of the conditional sentence must be 
 especially distinguished from that of § 49, 2 ; the more so, as we often 
 translate both ilri av and ^v av by the same English expression, it 
 would be; although the latter implies that the supposition of the 
 protasis is a false one, while the Ibrmer implies no opinion of the 
 speaker as to the truth of the supposition. 
 
 (b.) On the other hand, the distinction beween this form and that 
 of § 50, 1 is less marked, and it is often of slight importance which 
 of the two is used in a particular case. Thus it is often nearly in- 
 different in English whether we say if we shall go (or if we go), it 
 will be well, or if we should go , it would be well; in Greek, the Ibrmer 
 is iav €\du>fiev, koXcos e^ft, and the latter is et (X6oififv, KaXas av 
 €xoi. (See § 48, I, B, Rem. 2.) In writing Greek, this distinction 
 can generally be made, by first observing the form of the apodosis 
 in English ; if that is expressed by would, it should be translated by 
 the Greek Optative with av ; if it is expressed by will, it should be 
 translated by the Future Indicative. (Other forms of the apodosis, 
 as the Imperative, will present no difficulty.) The form to be used 
 in the protasis will then appear from the rules for dependence of 
 Moods (§32 and § 34) ; the Optative will require another Optative 
 with ft in the dependent protasis (i. e. the form of § 50, 2, ti eXdoi- 
 fiev, KoXas av c^ot) ; while the future Indicative or any other 
 primary form will require a Subjunctive with tdv, or a Future Indi- 
 cative with «t (i. e. the form of § 50, 1, €av eXdafiev, KaXws e^ft, 
 or ft eXevaofxeda, KoXas e^f »)• 
 
 In indirect discourse we often find an Optative in protasis, which 
 merely represents the same tense of the Subjunctive or Indicative 
 in the direct discourse. See § 69, 1 ; § 74, 1 ; and § 77. 
 
 Note 1. Cases of the omission of av in an apodosis of this class 
 are rare ; they occur chiefly in Homer, less frequently in the Attic 
 poets (even then chiefly in questions, and after such expressions as 
 ovK iad' oTTwff), and seldom or never in Attic prose where the text 
 is beyond suspicion on other grounds. E. g. 
 
 'O ht ■x^pyiahiov XajSe X**P'* TuSft'Sj^f, /xcya tpyov, o oiJ bvo y av8p€ 
 <l>fpoi€v, which two men could not lift (if they should try). II. V, 
 303. (See § 52, 2.) Ttav, ZeO, hvvaaiv ris dvbpav imep^aaia Kara' 
 c^f^oi; Soph. Ant. 605. 'AXX* vTrfpToXfiov dvdpos (^pov^fia ris 
 Xeyot; AesCH. Choeph. 594. "Ear ovv ona>s "^ AXKrjaris €s yrjpas 
 fioXoi; Eur. Ale. 52. Ovk (crff onas Xc'lat/xi to. ylrevdrj KoXd. 
 AesCH. Ag. 620. Ovk tariv orat fifi^ova poipav i^et/xat/x' rj aoi, 
 Aesch. Prom. 292. II<Sff ovv Tab', i)s f ittoi rty, i^rjpdpraves ; i. e. 
 as one might say. Eur. Andr. 929. "Qanep eliroi rts Tonos, as one 
 would say tottos. (?) Arist. Av. 180. 
 
 §51.] 
 
 •an in protasis. 
 
 107 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 Note 2. (a.) The adverb av is sometimes used with the Opta^ 
 tive in the protasis, but only when the protasis is itself at the same 
 time an apodosis, with another protasis expressed or implied. This 
 is, of course, no exception to the general rule (§ 39) ; and it is to be 
 noticed that the av in this case always belongs strictly to the verb, 
 and never joins the ft to form idv. E. g. 
 
 OvTOi TravTfXaSi ovS' ft p^fj fr on) a a it* h.v tovto, €VKaTa(f>p6vr}T6v 
 ioTiv, it is not wholly to be despised, even if you would not do this {if 
 an opportunity should occur). Dem. Phil. I, 44, 30. Kat iyut, tlittp 
 oXXo) TO) dvOpdoircov TTftdoiprjv av, Ka\ aoi neidopai, if I would trust 
 any other man (if he should give me his word), I trust you. Plat. 
 Prot. 329 B. Ei yf prjSe bovXov dKparrj de^aiped' hv^ 7r<»ff ovk 
 a^iov avTov ye ^vXd^aadai toiovtov yfutcrdai ; if we would" not take 
 even a slave who was i)itemperate (sc. if one should be offered), &c. 
 Xen. Mem. I, 5, 3. (Such conditional sentences as the three pre- 
 ceding belong properly under § 49, 1. Compare the last example 
 under § 54, Kem.) See § 49, 2, N. 4, b. 
 
 So occasionally in Homer; as II. V, 273, ft TovTiii k€ Xd/3ot/xfv, 
 dpoiptdd K€ KXeos iaOXov, if we could (in any case) obtain these, we 
 should gain great glory; and II. I, 60, Et k€v BdvaTov yt (jivyotpev, if 
 we would escape death (where ft ddvuTov (^vyoipev would mean if we 
 should ever escape death). 
 
 (b.) Commonly, however, when ft k€ occurs in Homer, k€ belongs 
 to the ft, and no force of an apodosis is perceptible. Here, as m 
 final clauses (§ 44, 1, N. 3, a), the k€ adds nothing to the sense that 
 can be expressed in English. E. g. 
 
 Uois av f yo) df ot/it fif r ddavdToiai Oeolaiv, el k€v Aprjs oixotTO 
 XP^os /cat dca-pov dXv^as. Od. VIH, 352. Tail/ k€V toi x^piVatro 
 TraTrjp dnepfia-i' dnoiva, fi k€v f/xf ^aov ireirvdoiT* em vrjvalv 
 *AxaiS)v. n. VI, 49. 
 
 J5ut if the K€ is separated from the ft (except by fifV, 5f , rt , ydp, 
 &c.), or if the sense shows clearly that it belongs to the verb, it is 
 the sign of an apodosis, as in the Homeric examples under (a). 
 See § 49, 2, N. 4, a. 
 
 Note 3. It follows from § 26, that the Future Optative cannot 
 be used in protasis or apodosis, except in indirect discourse to rep- 
 resent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. 
 
 Note 4. For a rare Homeric use of the Optative for the Imper- 
 fect or Aorist Indicative, see § 49, 2, N. 6. 
 
 II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 
 
 §51. A present or past supposition is said to be 
 general, when the protasis refers indefinitely to any one 
 of a series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or 
 
¥ 
 
 108 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§51. 
 
 a definite series of acts. The apodosis must express a 
 customary or repeated action or a general truth. 
 
 Here the protasis takes the Subjunctive with lap 
 after primary tenses, and the Optative with el after 
 secondary tenses. The apodosis may take the Present 
 or Imperfect Indicative, or any other form which im- 
 plies repetition. E. g. 
 
 "nviTOTt daafiosiKrjraiy ao\ to ycpas no\v /ici^oi^ (sc. (orlv), if 
 ever a divunon comes, your prize is always much greater. II. I, 166. 
 *Hi/ iyyvs eXBrj Bdvaros, ovdfU ^ovXfrai Oinjaxeiv, if (or when) death 
 comes near, iw one is (ever) willing to die. EuR. Ale. 671. "Airas 
 ><oyos, av aTTTJ Ta npdyfxaTa, /xdraiov ti (paivcrai Ka\ K€v6v, all speech, 
 tj deeds are wanting, appears mere emptiness and vanity. Dem. 01. 
 II, 21, 20. AiarfXfl /xktwi/, ovk fjv ris ri avrou ddiKT}, aXX' (dv riva 
 vnonT(V(rrj ^fkriova eavrov eiVat, he continues to hate, not if an?/ 
 one wrongs him, but if he ever suspects that any one is better than hini- 
 self. Xen. Cyr. V, 4, 35. EvXafiov ras Bia^oXdi, k^v ylr€v8€ls ^aiu, 
 beware of slanders, even when they are false. Isoc. Demon, p. 5 
 C. § 17. 
 
 Et de Tivas dopv^ovfxevovs aXaOoiro, rh atriou tovtov aKonciv 
 KaTaa^fviwvai ttjv Tapaxrjy cVfipoTo, whenever he saw any making a 
 disturbance, he always tried, &c. Xen. Cyr. V, 3, 55. OiK dnfiti- 
 n€To en avrov, el prj n dvayKoiov eirj, he never left him, unless there 
 was some necessity for it. Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 40. EtTisdvreinoi, 
 evdvs reevriKei, ij any one refused, he was immediately put to death. 
 iHUC. VIII, QQ. *Hi/ Toiff pev 6(f)ea\pols emKovprjpa ttjs x^ovos, et ris 
 peAau Ti ex<ov ttpb rutv 6(pea\p^v nopevotTo, rau de nodciu et ris 
 icivoZro. Xen An. IV. 5, 13. 'aXA' et n pf^ <t>epoipev, &rpvveu 
 fepetu, Eur. Ale. 755. 'Eneidfj 8e eldou avrou rdxifrra, avWa^ovres 
 ayovaiv avriKpvs o)s dnoKTevovvres, olnep Kai tovs dXXovs d7re<T<t>aTrov, 
 ei Tiva Xrjarrjv fj KUKovpyov avWd^oiev, i. e. where they had been 
 in the habit of killing any others whom they took. Lys. Agor. p. 
 137, g 7o. 
 
 The Optative in these examples, referring to past time, must 
 be especially distinguished from the Optative in ordinary protasis 
 (§ 50, 2), referring to the future. Et and edv in this construction are 
 almost equivalent to ore or orav (which are the more common ex- 
 pressions), and the protasis has precisely the same construction as 
 the relative sentences of § 62. 
 
 ^■I^^ ^^^'''^"' ^^ ^f^'i^t Subjunctive and Optative here do not 
 differ except as explained in Remark before § 12. 
 
 Remark. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and 
 iterative tenses of § 30, can be used in the apodosis of these 
 general propositions. The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is con- 
 sidered d^ primary tense (§ 32, 2). E. g. 
 
 i 
 
 \^ 
 
 
 
 §51.] 
 
 QENEUAL SUPPOSITIONS 
 
 109 
 
 Hi/ a(pa\<a(riVs dvreXnlcravTei aK\a enXfj pavav Trjv vp* tai', 
 if they fail, they always supply the deficiency, &c. Thuc. I, 70. *H» 
 he T« TovTa>v Ti napa^alvrj, (T}piav avrols eireQecrav, they 
 (always) impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. Xen. 
 Cyr. I, 2, 2. Ei rti/fs tdotev ttij tovs acfyeTepovs eniKpaTovvras, 
 dyeddpa-rjaav av, whenever any saw their friends in any way 
 victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were encouraged in all 
 such cases). Thuc. VII, 71. (See § 30, 2, and Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 
 13, there quoted.) 
 
 Note 1. The Optative in this construction is not found in 
 Homer, although it is very common in the equivalent relative sen- 
 tences (§62). 
 
 Note 2. Here, as in ordinary protasis, the poets sometimes use 
 the simple ft with the Subjunctive instead of edv. (See § 50, 1. N. 
 8.) E.g. 
 
 XEiTTep yap re ^oXoi/ ye koI avrrjpap Karaireylrrj, 
 *AXXa ye koi peTomarOev exei kotov, o(f>pa TcXcVcriy. H. I, 81. 
 El de (f>vyT} pev Krjpa TuvrfKeyeos OavdToio, 
 
 f^iKr)<Tas 5' alxprjs dyXaou evxos eXrj , 
 ndures piv Tipaaiv 6pa>s veoi f]8e waXaiol, 
 
 noXXa de Tepnvd Tradwv epx^rai els *Aidrju. TyrT. XU, 35, 
 AXX avbpa, Ket ris ^ (ro(f)6s, to pauddveiv 
 IIoXX' alaxpov ovdev Koi to pr] relveiv ayav. SoPH. Ant. 710. 
 
 Note 3. The Indicative is sometimes found in the place 
 of the Subjunctive or Optative in a general protasis of thia 
 kind. Here the speaker merely refers to one of the many 
 cases in which the event may occur, as if it were the only 
 case, — that is, he states the supposition as if it were paHicular, 
 and not general. E. g. 
 
 El Tis bvo 5 Koi ttXcous tis rjpepas Xoyi^erai, pdraios eariv, if 
 any one counts upon two or even more days, he is a fool. Soph. Trach. 
 944. 'EXevdepas noXiTevopep, ov 8i opyrjs tov TreXa?, el Kad' ridovrjv ri 
 ^P9i fxo*^**' i* 6. not (having a habit of) being angry with our neigh- 
 bor, if he acL^ in any case as he pleases. Thuc. H, 37. (Here the 
 Indicative hpa is used as if some particular act of some one neighbor, 
 and not any act of any neighbor, were in the speaker's mind.) Ei 
 m Ti eTTTjpoiTa, dneKpivovTo, if any one asked anything, they replied (tc> 
 all such). Thuc. VII, 10. *Epi(rei ovk etris KaKa>s Trao-Ycoi/ rjpvve^ 
 TO, aXX* et TLS evepyerovpevos dxdpiarros (f)alvoi.TO. AEN. Ages. 
 XI, 3. (Here, witliout any apparent reason, the writer chano-es 
 from the Indicative to the Optative.) See § C2, N. 1. 
 
 This use of the Indicative is exceptional in Greek, but it is the 
 regular construction in Latin and English. See § 48, H. Rem. 2. 
 
110 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 52, 1. 
 
 Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 
 
 § 52. 1. Yery often the protasis is not expressed 
 in its regular form with el or edv, but is either implied 
 in somethmg that precedes or follows, or expressed in 
 a participle, a preposition with its case, an adverb like 
 oSto)?, or some other part of the sentence. 
 
 When a participle takes the place of a protasis, it is 
 always in the same tense in which the finite verb which 
 it represents would itself have stood after el or edu, in 
 the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative. (See § 109, 
 6.) The Present participle stands for both Present and 
 Imperfect, and the Perfect for both Perfect and Pluper- 
 fect. (See § 16, 2 ; § 18, 3, Rem.) E. g. 
 
 ^ OvT€ ^aOiovat TrXfto) tj dvvavrai (jy^peiv, diappayelfv yap tip' ovt 
 aficpuvjwvTat irXeico ^ 8vvauTm (pepdv, aTroTri^iyflev yap ,1^, the?/ do 
 not eat more than the^ can bear, for (if they should) they would burst, 
 &C. Xen. Cyr. VIII 2, 21. Airol hv ^nope^Orjaau'S oi .TAXor rh 
 vnoQvyia ovk tju aWrj rj ravrrj tK^^uai, theij would have gone them- 
 selves where the others went; but the animals could not qo otherwise 
 K I, 232!''^ c//rf. Xen. An. IV, 2, 10. ^oT, yhp hv \<.^{^aato, 
 
 .^•'^''i'r°,.^°*'!VT"/^ Trpa'^ovo-ti/ (\.Q.ihvTroLS>aiv), if they shall do 
 this (habitually), they will prosper. ToOro not^iaaure, eJ npd^ovaLP 
 {^.e. tav noiT](r<o(riv),if they shall (once) do Mw, they wUl prosper. 
 Wo TTotovvT^ €v hv rrpdrrouv (i. e. tU o tale p), if they should do 
 this (habUually), they would prosper. Tovro Trot^trapr.s ei hu irparroi.p 
 (1. e. ft TTotjyo-at^ei/), If they should (once) do this, they would prosper 
 TovTo 7roioipr€s,v&p eTrparrop (i. e. ,1 iiroiovp). if they were doing 
 this (or if they had been doing this), they would be in prosperity. Tovro 
 nmr^aapT.s ev ^p ^nparrop (i. e. ti €7roirjaap), if they had done this, 
 they would be m prosperity. ^ ^ ^f , 
 
 n«r dfJTadUrjs opcTTisS Zfls oIk ajroXtoXep rbp nar^p' ahrov hnaasi 
 
 ^■^\ 1^ f^""^ f f "^ ^""^ ''''^ ^^^^ ^^^^royed, if Justice exists f Arist. 
 JNub. J04. (Here diKrjs oCcttjs represents tl BUij iarlp.) *AXX' ^laou,- 
 (T0a dofiovi 7rapa<rT€ixopT€s (I e. ,'^p 7rapa<rrelx<^^,p), but we 
 shall know, if we shall enter the house. Soph. Ant. 1 255; 2,:, 8^ xXxiayp 
 ficret Taxa (1. e. €ap kXvtjs), but you will soon know, if you listen, 
 ^^l^'^:^^'^' ^V^' ^ t"^ ''°^'^*'' ^"^^^^ I ^^^rn, for f'iip uA ud0a>, 
 
 .^f V'f 7/r "''' T'- '^'}'''^' ^^- y^ ^'^"-- apSar'nd 
 this 1 should Idee to obtain, if Zeus would only give it. Od. I 390 
 
 (Here At6ff hhopros = €lZ,ls dcbolrj.) TomCra rhp yvpac^l avppaiayp 
 
 €Xots (1. e. €1 avppaiois), such things would you suffer, if you should 
 
 § 52, 1.] ELLIPSIS OR SUBSTITUTION IN PROTASIS. Ill 
 
 live with women. Aesch. Sept. 195. OvS' ap (noiirriaaip.i ttjp drrjv 
 op Sap OTfixova-ap da-rois (i. e. el opapi). So PH. Ant, 185. *Adr)paiaiV 
 0€ TO avTO TOVTO TTadoPTtop, diTrXaalap ap ttjv hvvapip fiKa^eaBai 
 (oifxai), but if the Athenians should ever suffer this (iradoPTcop = el 
 7rd6oi(p), I think it would be inferred that their power was twice as 
 great. Tiruc. I, 10, (Here nothing but the context shows that 
 nadopTciP does not represent ft firoBup, if they had ever suffered.) 
 Mapp.dp 8* ap aiTr)(raPTos iJkop aoi (f)fp(op ap apTop, and if you ever 
 asked for something to eat, I used to come bringing you bread. Arist. 
 Nub. 1383. (Here alTrja-apros represents ei nirj^o-etas- in a general 
 supposition, § 51. For rjKOP ap see § 30, 2, and § 42, 3.) Ilptr 
 yepea-dai rjiriarrjo-ep ap ris aKovcrag (i. e. ft rJKova^ep), before it hap- 
 pened, any one would have disbelieved such a thing ^ i/Zje had heard it, 
 -i-HUC. VII, 28. Ov yap hp peTairelOeip vpas fC^rei prj ToiavTTjs 
 ovarjs Tjjs v7rapxova-T]s vTroXryxZ/'fcoff, for he would not be seeking to 
 change your minds, if such were not the prevailing opinion (i. e. <i /xij 
 ToiavTT] ^p). Dem. Cor. 304, 1. M^ KaTrjyoprjo-apTos Puax'ivov 
 prjdfp f^o) TTJs ypa(f)rjs ov8^ ap eyoi \6yop ovbepa knoiovprfp cTepop (i. 8. 
 ft pf) KaTTjyoprja-ep). lb. 236, 28. Ta avra ap eirpa^e Ktxi Trpcor;/ 
 \axov(ra (i. e. et npcoTr] eXax^p), it (the soul) would have done the 
 same, even if it had been the first to draw the lot. Plat. Rep. X, 620 D. 
 SoThuc. VII, 13, 1. 
 
 To p€P f TT* €K€ ipoj> TToXXaKis UP h(.iKv6r](Tap, if it had depended on 
 him, they often would have been disbanded. Isoc. Pan. p. 70 B. § 142. 
 A t a ye v pas avTovs ndXat ap aTroXtaXf trf , if it had depended on your- 
 selves, you would long ago have been ruined. Dem. Cor. 242, 10. (So 
 Kad^ vpds.) HdXai yap ap € p e K d ye ylrT]<f)ta-pdT(M>p eSfSoo/cft BiKrjv, 
 for, if decrees were of any avail, he would long ago have suffered 
 punishment. Dem. 01. Ill, 32, 16. (Here the protasis is implied in 
 epfKa y\rT](f)iapdT(ji)P.) Ovroa yap ovKtTL tov Xolttov ndaxotpep ap 
 KOKcos^for in that case we should no longer suffer, Dem. Phil. I, 44, 
 12. So Q>s ovT(i) irepiyepopepos ap, Xen. An. I, 1, 10. Ovd^ av 
 hiKaioos es KaKOP Treaoipi ti. Soph. Ant. 240. 
 
 In these cases the form of the apodosis will generally show what 
 form of protasis is implied. When the apodosis is itself expressed 
 by an Infinitive or Participle (§ 53), as in Thuc. I, 10, the form of 
 the protasis is shown only by the general sense of the passage. 
 
 Remark. The Future participle is not used in protasis to rep- 
 resent the Future Indicative, as it would denote time future rela- 
 tively to the time of the apodosis (§ 28), which the Future Indica- 
 tive in protasis does not do. The Present and Aorist participles, 
 representing the Present and Aorist Subjunctive, express future 
 conditions, thus making the Future participle unnecessary. The 
 Aorist participle in protasis can always represent an Aorist Subjunc- 
 tive in the sense explained § 20, N. 1. 
 
 Note 1. An ellipsis of the verb of the protasis takes place 
 in the Homeric ft 8* aye, for ft de ^ovXei, aye, and in such ex- 
 pressions as ft p^ dia TOVTO, had it not been for this, E. g. 
 
 
112 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 52, 1. 
 
 Et 8* ayf, Toi K«})aKfj Karavfixrofiat. H. T, 524. Ei 8' tiy€ firjv^ 
 nfipTjaat, iva yvaxoai Koi. oiSf , but if you ivish, come now, try it, 11. 1, 
 302. Kai CI fif) dia top npvTaviv, fvfneaev ai/, and^ had it not been for 
 the Prytanis, he would have been thrown in. Plat. Gorg. 516 E. 
 (Compare did ye vfias, Dem. Cor. 242, 10, quoted § 52, 1.) Ov yap 
 iis fi pri dia AuKtbaipovlovsy ovd* cos fl pfj Upo^evov ovx vneBe^avro^ 
 ov8* a>s €1 pfj di 'Hyfjamnrov, ovS" as fl pfj bia to koi to, iaadrjaav au 
 oi *«ic€ty, ovx o^<" ''^'■* dirnyyeikev, for he did not then report that, if 
 it had not been for the Lacedaemonians, — or if they had not refused 
 to receive ProxenuSj — or if it had not been for Hegesippus, — or if it 
 had not been for this and that, — the Phocians would have been saved. 
 Dem. F. L. 364, 12. So ft /xi) Kpfpdaas, had I not done it by hanging 
 up, &e. Arist. Nub. 229. So in alternatives: see Note 2. (Cf. 
 § 53, Note 1.) 
 
 Note 2. In alternatives, et 8c pij, otherwise, regularly intro- 
 duces the latter clause, even when the former clause is negative. 
 Et de pri is much more common than idv di /xi}, even when tav 
 piv with the Subjunctive precedes. E. g. 
 
 Ilpos TavTa pfj TVTTT' ct 8e p.r] , aavTov iroT airtacrct, therefore do 
 not beat me; but if you do, you will have yourself to blame for it. 
 Arist. Nub. 1433. HoKcpov ovk (t<ov ttoiciV ci di /i^, Ka\ avrol 
 dvayKaa6r](T€a6ai €(f)a(Tav (piXovs TroidaOai ovs ov ^ovXovrai, they said 
 that otherwise (ct hi pr)) they should be obliged, &c. Thuc. I, 28. 
 "Elitov (llavaravia) toC KtjpvKOs pi) XelneaBai • fldepr}, iroKepov atrai 
 IvapTiaTas irpoayopevdv, they ordered him not to be left behind by the 
 herald: and if he should be (ct 8e px]), {they told him) that the Spartans 
 declared war against him. Id. I, 131. *Eav piv tl vplv 8oKa> Xcycti* 
 d\r]deSf ^vvopokoyr]aaT€ ' et 8c px), iravTi \6yto dvTiTtivfTt. Plat. 
 Phaed. 91 C. So in Dem. Phil. Ill, p. 129, 14, kdv /xcV irdcnriTiy . - . 
 ct dc p.r], /c.r.X. 
 
 2. The protasis is often altogether suppressed, leaving 
 only an Optative with av or an Indicative with av as an 
 apodosis. Here some indefinite or general protasis is 
 always implied ; as if he pleased^ if he could, if an 
 opportunity/ should offer, if it were necessary, if it were 
 true, if we should consider, if what is natural should 
 happen, &c. E. g. 
 
 *Io-o)ff av ovv ris iiririprjaeie vols €lpr)p€vois, perhaps some one 
 might (if he pleased) fnd fault with what has been said. IsOC. Areop. 
 p. 146 E. § 36. Toi OVK av ^aaiX^as dvd arop! €\u)V dyopevotff, 
 therefore you should not take kings upon your tongue and talk (i. e 
 you would not, if you should do as you ought). II. II, 250. Tovto ovt 
 \v ovTos e^ot Xcyetj/ ovff vpels neiadeirjTf , neither would he be 
 
 §53.] 
 
 suppression of the protasis. 
 
 113 
 
 able to say this (if he should try), nor would you believe it. Dem. 
 Andr. 598, 20. *liHe<os d' av eytoy €polpj)v AfirTivr)v, but I would 
 gladly ask Leptines (if an opportunity should offer). Id. Lept. 496, 8. 
 Aet^arco o)? oi GcrraXoi vvv ovk av iXfvdepoi yevoiVTo dapfvoi, let 
 him show that they would not now gladly become free (if they could). 
 Id. 01. 11, 20, 18. BaoriXcia oiKobopfiv fjpxfTo, ois hv iKava diropdxe- 
 adai €tT}, so that it might be strong enough tofghtfrom (if it should be 
 necessary). Xex. Cyr. Ill, 1, 1. 
 
 Ov yap rjv o Tl av cVotctre, for there was nothing that you could 
 have done (if you had tried). Dem. Cor. 240, 15. Hoiatv d* av (pyoiv 
 Tl TTovcivfj Kiv8vv(ov diT 4 (TT T] (T av ; and from what acts, Sfc, would they 
 have shrunk (i. e. if they had been required) f Isoc Pan. p. 57 C. 
 § 83. IIoXXoO yap 01/71/ n$ia, for they would be worth much (if that 
 were true). Plat. Rep. II, 374 D. So ^ovXoiprjv dv (velim), / 
 could wish (in a certain future case) ; f^ovXoprjv av (vellem), / should 
 now tvish (on a certain condition^ not fulfilled). 
 
 Note. The Optative with dv, used in this way, often has 
 
 the force of a mild command or exhortation, and sometimes 
 
 a sense approaching that of the Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 Acyotff dv, you may speak (lit. you could speak, if you should desire 
 it), implying et ^ovXoto. 2v pev ko pilots dv atavTov rj ^cXety, you 
 may take yourself off whither you please. Soph. Antig. 444. (This 
 is merely a milder expression than <cd/xi^c.) K X v o t s dv 787, ^oi/Se 
 Trpoorarjjptc, i. e. hear now. Id. El. 637. Xcopols dv citro). Id. 
 Phil. 674. So Antig. 1339. Ilot ovv, ((prjv c'ycl), Tpairoipcd' dv 
 cTt ; in lohat other direction then, said I, shall we turn (Ht. should we 
 turn, if we should wish) ? Plat. Euthyd. 290 A. Ovk dv p€d€ip.rjv 
 Tov dpovov, I will not give up the throne. Arist. Ran. 830. 
 
 Remark. In such examples as Hdt. I, 2, *E\\t)V{ov tivos (paat 
 dpndaat Evpa>irr}v' €lr]<rav 8' dv ovroi KpfjTfs, there is no excep- 
 tional use of the Optative with dv referring to the past; but the 
 meaning is these would prove to be Cretans (if we should examine the 
 case). So avTai Si ovk dv TroXXat eiT/aav, these would not prove (on 
 investigation) to have been many. Thuc. I, 9. 
 
 § 53. The apodosis may be expressed by an Infini- 
 tive or Participle, where the construction of the sentence 
 requires it; each tense of the Infinitive or Participle 
 representing its own tenses of the Indicative or Optative. 
 (The Present includes also the Imperfect, and the Per- 
 fect also the Pluperfect.) 
 
 If a finite verb in the apodosis would have taken au, 
 that particle is joined with the Infinitive or Participle. 
 The Present Infinitive or Participle with au represents 
 
Ill 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§53. 
 
 either an Imperfect Indicative with av, or a Present 
 Optative with av ; the Perfect, either a Pluperfect Indie- 
 ative^ or a Perfect Optative ; and the Aorist, either an 
 Aorist Indicative or an Aorist Optative, (See § 41.) 
 The context must decide in each case, whether an In- 
 finitive or Participle with au represents the Indicative 
 or the Optative. E. g. 
 
 HyoO/iat, (I TOVTO TTOictre, navra /coXwy e;^eti/, / believe that, i/vnu 
 
 are doing this, all is well. 'Hyovfiai, i^v toZto 7roi?iT€, Ttdm-a koKC^s 
 
 c^etv, I believe that, if you (shall) do thL'^, all will be well. 'HyoO/xai, 
 
 €1 TOVTO TTototre, ndvTa KaXcby av €x<ti/, / believe that, if you should 
 
 do this, all would be well. 'HyoC/iat, ei tovto €7rotr)aaT(, izdvTa KaXojs 
 
 "r/\**/» /6e/t^^t»e that, if you had done thuf, all would {now) be well. 
 
 Oipa vfxas, idv tovto noiriTf, ev irpd^ovTos, I know that, if you do 
 
 this, you will prosper. S/ce/x^ara twi/ ^abicos diroKTivpvirrcov Kai dva- 
 
 ^io)aKOfi€va)v y &v, el oloi t€ ^arav, considerations for those who 
 
 read'dy put men to death, and who would bring them to life again too, ij 
 
 they could. Plat. Crit. 48 C. (^ kva^it^(TKoiJLivu>v rw = du€^ta><TKoirro 
 
 av.) See the examples of each tense of the Infinitive and Participle 
 
 with av, under § 41 and § 73. 
 
 nwff yap oUaBi dvcrxep^s aKovctv "OXvvdiovs, el tIs ti Xtyot Kara 
 ^iXiTTKov KCLT €K€ivovs Tovs xP^vovs ; how unwHUngly do you think 
 they heard it, if any one said anything against Philip in those tunes f 
 Dkm. Phil. II, 70, 25. (Here dKoveiv represents the Imperfect 
 rfKovov, § 15, 3.) For an example of tiie Perfect Infinitive with au, 
 representing the Pluperfect, see § 41, 2. 
 
 Note 1. The apodosis is sometimes omitted for effect, 
 when some such expression as it is well can be supplied, or 
 gome other apodosis at once occurs to the reader. E. g. 
 
 AXX €1 fiiv daa-ova-i yepas peyddvpoi *Axaio\, apaavTts <cara OvfxoVf 
 OTTCDS avTa^iov earai, — €t de K€ pi) fiwoxrti/, «ya) be K€V avTos eXoypai. 
 11. I. 135. (Here we must understand ev e^ei, it will be well, or 
 something similar, after eorai.) Ei nep ydp k edeXnaiv 'OXv/xttios 
 aa repoTnjTTjs €^ iht(ov aTv(l>€Xi$aL • — 6 ydp iro\v ^epTCLTos ianv. 11. 
 I, 580. (Here we must understand he can do it after the protasis. 
 The following ydp refers to this suppressed apodosis.) Et pAv eyu> 
 vpds Uavag 5tda<r/c« olovs del npos dXXrjXovs eivai ' — ei de /nj}, koI napd 
 Ta>v TTpoyeyevTjpevav pavddveTe. Xen. C)T. VHl, 7, 23. Compare 
 Aesch. Prom. 835. 
 
 Note 2. Very often the apodosis is not directly expressed 
 by the verb on which the protasis depends, but is merely im- 
 plied in the context Here the form of the protasis is deter- 
 mined by the implied apodosis. In such sentences « or Uv 
 
 §53.] 
 
 ELLIPSIS OR SUBSTITUTION IN APODOSIS. 
 
 115 
 
 may generally be translated by supposing that, or in case that, 
 E. g. 
 
 TovvtKa vvv TO, ad yovvaff iKavopai, ai k edeXrjo'da Keivov Xxrypov 
 oXe&pnv evKTuelv, therefore I am now come to your knees, in case you 
 shall be willing to tell me of his sad death (i. e. that you may tell me, in 
 case you shall be willing). Od. HI, 92. See Od. I, 94. (Here Udvo- 
 pai does not contain the apodosis to at k eSeXrjaBa, which is rather 
 implied in what follows.) Tiov vvv piv pvfjaaa-a nape^eo /cat XajSc 
 yovvcov, at Kev UTas edeXrjcriv eVi Tpaeaaiv dp^^ai, grasp his^knees, 
 171 case he shall be willing to assist the Trojans (i. e. that you may cause 
 him to assist them, if he shall be willing). 11. I, 408. So at Kev ttw? 
 jSovXerai (often explained as an indirect question), 11. 1, 66. Ovkovv 
 en eXXeineTai to fjv ireiaoipev vpds ojs xph VP-^^ dcpelvai; is not 
 this then still left to us, — in case we shall persuade you that you must 
 let us go (sc. to have you do this) f i. e. to have you let us go, if we 
 shall persuade you that you must? Plat. Rep. 1, 327 C. ''Akovo-ov koi 
 epov, edv aoi TavTa doKjj, hear me also, in case the same shall please 
 you, i. e. that then you may assent to it. lb. U. 358 B. ^Eri jtai vvv 
 dpds TToiovvTai, et tis en ikt} pv KeveTai Hepa-ais, even to this day 
 they invoke curses, if there is any one who sends heralds to the Persians. 
 Isoc. Pan. p. 73 D. § 157. 'l/ceVai npos ae SeOp' d(f)iyp(6a, et Tiva 
 TToXiv ^pdcreta; rjplv evepov, toe are come hither as suppliants to you, 
 in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (implying thinking that we 
 might go and live in such a city, if you should tell us of one). Arist. 
 Av. 120. Ot S' ^KTeipov, el dXwaoivTo, and others pitied them., 
 in case they should be captured (i. e. thinking what they would suffer 
 if they should be captured). Xex. An. 1, 4, 7. Ilpof Tr]v ttoXiv, el 
 fiti^or)6olev, exoopovv, they marched towards the city, in case they 
 {the citizens) should rush out (i. e. that they might meet them, if they 
 should rush out). TiitjC. VI, 100. O^S* rjv tov roXepov nepas ovB' 
 ti7raXXayi7 4>iXi7r7rci), fl pr} Qrj^aiovs Kal QerraXovs ex^povs Troirjaeie 
 Tjj TToXei, i. e. Philip saw that he could neither end nor escape the war, 
 unless he should make the Thebans and Thessalians hostile to the city. 
 Dem. Cor. 276, 1. See Soph. O. C. 1770 ; Plat. Rt-p. IV, 434 A. 
 
 In the examples from Homer and Plato the protasis belongs under 
 § 50, 1, the implied apodosis referring to the future; in the example 
 from Isocrates the protasis belongs under § 49, 1; in that from 
 Aristophanes, under § 50, 2, the implied apodosis being in the 
 Optative with av or some equivalent form ; while in the next three 
 the protasis has been changed (on the principle of indirect discourse) 
 fi'om ft dXaxroiTai, edv eTrt^orjdcoaiv, and edv prj Troirjaa} of the direct 
 discourse, on account of the past tense of the leading verb. For a 
 further explanation of this construction, and other examples, see 
 § 77, 1. c. See also § 71, N. 1, and the examples, which are to be 
 explained on the principle of this note. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the adverb av stands alone to represent the 
 apodosis, when the verb to which it belongs can be easily supplied 
 ^m the context. In like manner ei alone may represent the pro- 
 
116 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§53. 
 
 tasis. The expression Sxnrtp cLv e? (sometimes written as one word, 
 aajrepavei, quasi) includes both cases. See § 42, 3, N. 2, with the 
 examples. 
 
 "QtrTTfp with the participle (§ 109, N. 9^ generally belongs to an 
 apodosis understood. So m such expressions as axmep el X/yoty, as 
 {it would be) if you should say. 
 
 Note 4. When -riK^v ei is used for ci /xi}, unless^ there is an 
 ellipsis of an apodosis alter likriv. E. g, 
 
 Ovbi TO. ovojiara olov re avrcou eiScVat, ttX^i/ et tis KafKo^oirotot 
 Tvyxdvfi (ov, it is not possible to know even their names^ except (it is 
 possible) in case one happens to be a comedian. Plat. Apol. 18 C. 
 
 Remark. Expressions of a wish like « yap yevoiTo^ that it 
 might be^ and «t yap kyivtTo, that it had been^ are protases with the 
 apodosis suppressed. See Rem. at the end of Sect VL 
 
 Mixed Constructions. — Irregularities in Protasis or 
 
 Apodosis. 
 
 § 54. The regular forms of protasis and apodosis ex- 
 plained above (§§ 49, 50, 51) include by far the greater num- 
 ber of the examples found in the classic authors. Many cases 
 remain, however, in which the protasis and apodosis do not 
 belong to the same form. These admit of various explana- 
 tions : — 
 
 1. (a.) When an Indicative in the protasis (in either of the 
 constructions of § 49, 1 or 2) is followed by an Optative with 
 av in the apodosis, the latter properly belongs to an implied 
 protasis in the Optative (on the principle of § 52, 2). Thus, in 
 the sentence «t ravra ovtws fx**? ^vk av diKalas icoXci^oiro, if this 
 is sOy he would not jiistly be punished, Ko\d(oiTo av belongs to a 
 protasis in the Optative, if justice should be done, implied in 
 biKalois ; while the protasis f • . . . . c^et belongs as a condition 
 to the expressed apodosis with its implied protasis. The sense 
 therefore is, if this is so, (the result is that) he would not be 
 punished if justice shoidd be done. The same principle applies 
 to a primary tense of the Indicative in protasis, followed by a 
 secondary tense with av in apodosis. 
 
 This is sometimes the meaning, when a Subjunctive or 
 Future Indicative (§ 50, 1) is in the protasis, with an Optative 
 with a» in the apodosis. (See the last two examples.^ E. g. 
 
 MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 117 
 
 § 54, 1.] 
 
 Et h€ Tiff deaidr<av y€ kot ovpavov fiX^Xov^a?, ovk &v tyatyf 
 ^.oW cWpa..Wc i.axoiiiriv,butifthou art one of the immomls 
 come from heaven, I would not fght against the Gods of heaven. 11. 
 VI, 128. (Here the principal protasis to fiaxolprjvav is imphed, r/ 1 
 should have my choice.) UoWx) yap av (vbatpovia 6 ir; Trfpl tovs veovsy 
 (I ds iilv fiovos avrovs Sia(^^6 I'pf t, ot 8' aXXoi ^><PeXovaiVyJor 
 there would (naturally) be great happiness, &c. Plat. Apol. -o B. 
 "Qot' €1 fWL Ka\ fi€(Ta>s r]yovp€voi paWov ir(p<ov tvpoaravai avra TToXf/xeiv 
 €Tr€ la Or] T€ J ovk av siVoTxas viv toC ye ddiicflv alriav (jx poi p.rjv, if 
 vou were persuaded to make war by thinking, ^c, I should not now 
 justly be charged with injustice. Thuc. II, 60. (Here a protasis 
 to (bepolanv Hv is implied in f t\oVa>ff.) El yhp ovrot op<9o,9 aiztary 
 <rav'vp.:, hvoi xP^-" "PXotr., for if these had a right to secede, 
 it would follow that your dominion is unjust. Id. Ill, 40. Et vw ye 
 bvarvvoip-fv, TT^s rdvavri &v irpdrrovT^s «^ y^>"*^^^ , "^' // 
 now we are unfortunate, how should we not be safe if we should do the 
 opposite? Arist. Ran. 1449. (Here Trparroi/rf s = « TrpaTToip^v 19 
 the principal protasis to which the optative refers.) Ei tovt eTre- 
 Ytlpovv Xcyai', ovk €(t0' Btrrii ovk &v «i<ora)? eVtrt/i^cretc /iot, if 
 J were undertaking to say this (§ 49, 2), every one would censure me 
 with reason (i. e. d rh ^Uora noirja^i^v). Dem. Cor. 296 24. (Here 
 many Mss., and Dion. Hal. p. 1054, read cTrertM^tre, the ordinary 
 apodosis.) Ei ixrjbeva Tii>u A\\<ov l7nr€V€LV eiaaav, ovk av SiKatcoir 
 dpyiCoKrOe avTols. LyS. Alcib. II, § 8. ^ - .^^ 
 
 KaiTOi t6t€ rhv '^ir^p^l^v, ftnep d\r)6?i pov vw Karr^yopii, paKKov 
 h V clKorcoff h rdvb' ebicoK€v, and yet, if he is now making true charges 
 aaainst me he would then have prosecuted H y per eides with much more 
 reason than this man. Dem. Cor. 302, 24. (Here .Sta>.e. av refers 
 chiefly to the implied protasis, if he had done what was more reason- 
 able.) Such examples seldom occur. ^ 
 
 OOac^ yhp &v TToXXal y.>pat ^aiv ,Jxoip^P av onoL <?>yyo^« 
 ^McTff aJe^p^u. Xen. AnU, 4, 19. (Here the imphed protasis is 
 it'ioe should wish to escape.) See An. V, 1, 9. 
 
 •^ ^povpiov .1 ^oiljaovraL, ri)ff ph yrj^ /SXaTrrotfV ^^ ^cpepo^;' 
 ^ ^ ^araLK<o\v€tv{)pas,K.T.\.,iftheyshallbudda 
 
 worable circumstances) injure some part of 
 I sufficient to prevent us, &c. Thuo. I, 142. 
 
 (b) A Subjunctive or Future Indicative in the protasis 
 sometimes depends on an Optative with &v in the apodosis, 
 when no other protasis can readily be supplied. This expresses 
 the protasis more vividly than the regular Optative, (bee 
 § 50, 2, Rem. b, and § 34, 1, b.) It must be remembered also 
 that the Optative with Sv is sometimes merely a softened ex- 
 pression for the Future Indicative (§ 52, Note). E. g. 
 
 ^EhvTovro 7rotii<ra>, Ka\5>s hvtxoi. ifIdothv;,itwouldbeieeU, 
 (Here thoTrregulLity is the same iS English as in Greek : the regu- 
 
 ^povpi 
 ov pevToi 'iKavov 
 
 y^ 
 
 fort, they might (under 
 our land; but it will noi 
 
118 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 54, 1. 
 
 this, It Will he well; or d roiro rroiljaatfxt. Ka\^: A. e>t, if I should do 
 
 this, U would be well.) Ka\ oCr<o, Au decu6rara ndir<ouid6oc.., el 
 
 ovTo, o^ofr)(l>oi Kar tK€iu<ou r<5i/ dp8pSv toU TptaKoirra y€vh<T0VTai. 
 
 Lys. Agor. p. 139, 6. § 94 (Here we should expect dyivo.vro.) 
 
 To>»/ aronorraruyv j,,vT huetrj, ,1 A viu Hvouiv ScfyXtcrKducop sLs eVXa- 
 
 X€i,TavTa8vpr]e€istxr]7rpd$ei. Dem. 01. I, 16, 25. *Uuo^l;nd^vs 
 
 fim Tou abiKov roZrov \6yov, ovk hv dnobolrjv olh' hv 6^o\6v oibevL 
 
 if you shall learn this for me, I will not (or / laould not) pay even an 
 
 obolto any one Arist. Nub. 1 1 6. (This and many other examples 
 
 might be explamed equally weU on either principle, a or h.) 
 
 2. (a.) An Optative in the protasis sometimes depends 
 upon a primary tense of the Indicative or an Imperative in the 
 apodosis. This arises from the slight distinction between the 
 Subjunctive and Optative in protasis, as ihu ^^n and ,1 .>t, for 
 which the Latin has but one form, si haheaL (See § 48, I, B 
 Kem. 2.) In fact, the irregularity in ,1 rodro yeuotro,' rrdpra 
 ica\S>s €$€i, is precisely the same as in the English if this should 
 happen, aU will be weU, where the more regular apodosis would 
 be aa would he well, as in Greek, navra KaX^s &u txoi, E. g. 
 
 'AXV fi rls fjioi dvfipdfijTToiTo Ka\ SKXos, pdWou eaXnccph Koi 
 eap<TaX,a>T.pou earai. II. X, 222. Et* ^eXot/ic^ aKon.lu rd, d>Lc, 
 Tos ro>v avepc^mov, €vprjao^€u, k.t.X. IsoC. ad Nicocl. p. 23 D 
 ^45. EiTiSTad€napa^alvoi,€vayrjS€(TT(o. Aeschin. Cor. S 110 
 In such cases the Optative is a less animated form of expression than 
 the regular Subjunctive. 
 
 (h.) The Optative sometimes stands in the protasis, when 
 the apodosis contains a primary tense of a verb denoting' 
 necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, &c., with an Infinitive" 
 the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in 
 sense to an Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 nyhp ^tr^aavbioTivJi emurlot udfiot, oU dfict>OT,'pois €vl hWov 
 ylfr}(f>,craaeai,/or if there should be two laws opposed to each other, 
 ?/^>'^ could not surely vote for both. Dem. Timocr. 711,8. (See § 63 
 4, b) This IS analogous to the use of the Imperfect of the s^ame 
 yerl^s, explamed in § 49, 2, Note 3. There, for example, eV^. alr^ 
 .Xe.ip, he coidd have gone IS nearly equivalent to ?,X6,u du, and here 
 ii^€OTcv avT<p eXdeiv, he could go, is nearly equivalent to HXBoi dv. 
 
 3. A few irregular constructions remain, which can be ex- 
 plamed only as cases of anacoluthon, in which the speaker 
 adapts his apodosis to a form of protasis different from that 
 which he has actually used. E. g. 
 
 !5 55, 2.] 
 
 MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 119 
 
 *Eya) pL€V hv,fl ?x <>*/**» ®f raxt^ra oTrXa iiTOiovp.r)v rraat II/p- 
 aais. Xen. Cyr. II, 1, 9. (Here i'noLovp.r]v av is used as if €t tlxov, 
 if I were able, had preceded. We should expect Troioiprjv dv, which 
 is found in one Ms.) Ei p.€U yap ds yvvaiKa <ra)(l)pov€(rT€pav $i(pos 
 ^i(d€7fi€u, bvaKXefis dv riv (pdvos. EuR. Orest. 1132. (Here we 
 should expect tlrf.) 
 
 Remark. The same apodosis, in either the Indicative or Opta- 
 tive, may take one protasis in the Indicative referring to present or 
 past time, and another in the Optative referring to a supposed /Mfurff 
 case. E. g. 
 
 *Eycl) ovv dfim dv etrjv fipya(Tp,€vos, et, dT€ (jJv ix€ oi dpxovrts trar- 
 
 TOV, t6t€ fliV €fl€VOV, TOV Sc BfOV rdrTOVTOS, XtTTOt/it Tr)V rd^iv, I 
 
 should therefore (prove to) have behaved outrageously, if when the state 
 authorities stationed me I stood my ground, but if now when God sta- 
 tions me I should desert my pout. Plat. Apol. 28 E. (Here the 
 combination of the two acts is the future condition on which the 
 apodosis depends.) *En€vxofiai irdai, tovtois, ft dXrjOrj rrpos vjias 
 eiTToifxi. Kai flirov Ka\ tot €v6vs iv rca brjpcp, evrvx^av fioi 8ovvai, 
 i. e. if I should speak the truth and did speak it then, &c. Dem. Cor. 
 274, 28. El d« firjT ta-rt pfjTe riv yii]T dv elnelv ex©* firjbeU firjbeno) 
 Ka\ rfinepov, ri tov avpi^ovXov e'xP^" noiflu; but if there neither is nor 
 was (any such thing), and if no man yet even at this day could possibly 
 tell of any, what ought the statesman to have done (which was not 
 done) f lb. 291, 28. (See § 50, 2, N. 2, and § 49, 2, N. 3.) 
 
 § t>5. 1. Two or more protases, not co-ordinate, may be- 
 long to one apodosis. E. g. 
 
 Kat yap dv ovtos rt irdOri, raxfos vfifU erepov ^IXiTnrov noir}(T€T€, 
 uvTTfp ovTa> Trpoo-e'x'?'"^ ''''*^ irpayf-iaai tov vovv. Dem. Phil. I, 43, 
 12. Et 5' ?/A€i/ veoi d\s Koi yepovres, ei ris € ^rj p.dpTav€ , dinXov 
 ^lov XaxovTfs (^(opdovfjLfff dv. EuR. Suppl. 1084. Ei rU ae avi- 
 poiTO TovTO, Ti eoTi (TxnpLa ; ei avTO) fJires on arpoyyvXoTTjs, ei crot 
 elirev drrfp cyo), ciires Bfjirov dv on crx^fia t** Plat. Men. 74 B. 
 
 2. It sometimes happens, that the apodosis is itself in a 
 dependent sentence (as in a final clause), which determines its 
 mood without reference to the preceding rules. In this case, 
 if the leading verb is in a secondary tense, so that the apodosis 
 takes the Optative, the protosis also takes the Optative by the 
 general rule (§ 31, 1), even if it would otherwise have the 
 Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 Tavra S' elirev, 1v ft /xeV Ka\ vvv tt poa-boKrjO-aipt avTov ipflv, 
 d7roXoyovp.(vos ir€p\ avTOiv biaTpi^oip.i, f i 5e irapaXirTOip.it vvv 
 avTos fiTTot, and he said this, in order that, if on the one hand I 
 should still expect him to tell it, I should waste time about it in my de-- 
 fence ; but if on the other hand I should omit it. he might now WU it 
 
 i 
 
120 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 55, 2 
 
 I! 
 
 himself. Dem. Apli. I, 830, 8. (If a primary tense stood for (IntVy we 
 BliouM have, e. g. ravra Xcyrt, Iv ihv fikv n poadoKfjao) avrov cpfti/, 
 diarpt^o), t'ai/ 6e TrapaAiTTO), vvu ftnr].^ 
 
 Remark. For the forms assumed by such sentences when con- 
 structed on the principle of indirect discourse, see § 77, 1. 
 
 § 56. After many verbs expressing wonder, delight, 
 contentment, indignation, disappointment, and similar 
 ideas, a protasis wilh el may be used wbere a causal 
 sentence would seem more natural. Such verbs are 
 especially Oaufia^co, atcr'^vvo^av, afyairacti, and ayava^ 
 KT€(0, E. g. 
 
 opav, K.T.X.j I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or anqry^ 
 when he sees, &c. (lit. if no one is cither concerned or angry ^ I wonder). 
 Dem. Phil. I, 52, 17. (See Rem. below.) 'aXV fVrii/o ^au/idta>, ft 
 AaKfhaiyLOvloii pev rrore dvrfjpaTe, wi/t 8' oKvelre e^ievai kqi /leXXfre 
 fla(j>€p(iu, but I wonder at this, that you once opposed the Lacedaemo- 
 nians, but now are unwilling, &c. Id. 01. II, 25, 2. (The literal 
 meaning is, if (it is true that) you once opposed, Sfc, then I wonder.) 
 OvK dyajra ft p.f) bUrjv tScoKfi/, dXX* ft fir] Koi XP^^^ OTf^dvo) are- 
 (f>aua>$rj(r€Tai dyavaKTc'i, he is not content if he was not punished ; but 
 if he if not also to be crowned with a golden crown, he is indignant. 
 Aeschin. Cor. § 147. (Here the former protasis belongs under 
 § 49, 1, and the latter under § 49, 1, N. 3.) 
 
 Kat (OS a\r]6(os dyavaKTO), ft ovToxn a uoo) pr) oidff r* dpi fiVfti/, 
 I am indignant that (or if) I am not able, &c. Plat. Lach. 194 A. 
 Ov^ 8fj Bavpaa-Tov tariv, f I (TTparfvopfvos Ka\ novSiv fKflvos avros 
 vpaw peWovrav koi •^r)^i.^op€V(i}v Koi irvvdavoptvoiv nepiyiyytrai, it is 
 no wonder that he gets the advantage of you, &c. Dem. 01. II, 24, 23. 
 MrjBf pfPToi TOVTo p(7ov dn^r)T€ f ^f ti', f t ol Kvpeloi irpoaBfv <tvv fjplu 
 TaTTopevoi vvv dcpfaTrjKaaiv, i. e. do not be discontented, if (or that) the 
 Cyraeans have now withdrawn. Xex. An. Ill, 2, 1 7. 
 
 These verbs may also be followed by ort and a causal sentence, 
 as in Plat. Theaet. 142 A, fBavpaCou on ovy ol6s t rj fhpflv. The 
 construction with ft gives a miMer or more polite form of expression, 
 putting the object of the ivonder, &c. into the form of a supposition, 
 instead of stating it as a fact, as we should do in English. The forms 
 of protasis quoted above belong under § 49, 1. For the form some- 
 times assumed by these sentences on the principle of indirect dis 
 course, see § 77, 1, c. 
 
 Remark. This construction must not be mistaken for that in 
 which ft is used in the sense of whether, to introduce an indirect 
 question ; as, eTrvBero ft av rrapeirjs, he asked whether you were present 
 For this see § 68, 3, and § 70. 
 
 Ai IN APOD SIS. 
 
 121 
 
 § 58, 2.J 
 
 § 57. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by the con- 
 junction be, as if the apodosis formed a sentence co-ordinate 
 with the protasis, instead of being (as it is) the leading sen- 
 tence. This is especially common in Homer and Herodotus, 
 and rare in Attic prose. It occurs when the apodosis is to be 
 emphatically opposed to the protasis. Instead of de we some- 
 times find dWd or avrdp. E. g. 
 
 El Sf K€ ph huxoaLv, fVa> 5f K,v alrhs ?Xa,,xat, butiflhey do not give 
 it up, then I will take it myself II. I, 137. 'AXXa is found m II. 1, 
 82, quoted § 51, N. 2. EJ: Trfp ydp r 5XXot yf J['P'\\''^^(''^^^l'''^!^ 
 ,nvX fV 'Apyft'a,., ao\ 8* ov 8fo. fW dnoKeaBa^. 11. Xll, 245 Et 
 be Bav6uT<ou nep KaTaXljBour ftV 'Ai8ao, avrap eyco Kat. Kft^t (^iXov 
 pepv;]aop' iraipov. 11 XXII, 389. El vplu fWt rovro pr, dv^rov 
 TTot^trat, vpees 8 f f rt Ka\ vvu eK roO peaov ripiv eOcrBe.^ llDT. V ill, 
 22. 'AXX* ft prjbi TodTO ^ouXfi dnuKpivaaBai, ov he rovvreveev \ey(. 
 
 Xkn. Cyr. V, 5, 21. , . -n v i .a 
 
 This Sf in apodosis cannot be expressed in Enghsh; as our ad- 
 verbs theji, yet, stUl, &c., necessarily fail to give the force of the txreek 
 be, which is always a conjunction. 
 
 Remark. Ar may be used in the same way to in^oduce the 
 sentence upon which a relative clause depends. See Remark be- 
 fore § 65. 
 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 Eelative and Temporal Sentences. 
 
 § 58, 1. Kelative sentences may be introduced not 
 only by relative pronouns and pronominal adjectives, 
 but also by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner. 
 They include therefore all temporal clauses, except 
 those introduced by ^rplu and other particles meaning 
 until, which are treated separately (§ 6Q and § 67). 
 
 2. Relative sentences may be divided into two 
 
 classes: — 
 
 First, those in which the antecedent of the relative is 
 definite; that is, in which the relative pronouns refer to 
 definite persons or things, and the relative adverbs to 
 definite points of time, place, &g, 
 
 6 
 
122 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ o8, 2. 
 
 Secondly, those in which the antecedent is indefinite , 
 that is, in which no such definite persons, thuigs, times, 
 or places are referred to. 
 
 Both the definite and the indefinite antecedent may 
 be either expressed or imderstood. E. g. 
 
 (Definite Antecedents). Tavra h €xa> opas, you see these things 
 which I have ; or a €xa> opas. "Ore i^ovXero rjXBfP^ (once) when he 
 wished, he came. 
 
 (Indefinite Antecedents.) Uavra a av ^ovXavrai e^ovaiVy they 
 will have everything ivhich they may want ; or a &v ^ov\Q>vTai, i^ovaiv, 
 they will have whatever they may want, "Ore jSouXoito rjpxfroy wheii- 
 ever he wished^ he came, 
 
 3. When the antecedent is indefinite, the negative 
 particle of the relative clause is m ; when the ante- 
 cedent is definite, ov is regularly used, unless the general 
 construction requires m^ as.in prohibitions, wishes, <fec. 
 (See § 59, Note 1.) 
 
 A. Relative with a Definite Antecedent, 
 
 § 50. When the relative refers to a definite ante- 
 cedent, expressed or understood, it has no effect upon 
 the mood of the following verb ; and it therefore takes 
 the Indicative, unless the general sense of the passage 
 requires some other construction. E. g. 
 
 At'-yoi a otSa. Aey'^ a rJKnvcra, Ac^g) h aKrjKoa. "EXe^av & rjKoy- 
 trav. ndvra Xeyd a yevrjaerai. Upda-a-ovaiv a ^ovXoprai (or o)? 
 /aoOXovrai), they are doing what they please. (On the other hand, 
 Trpdaaovaiv & iiu ^ovXiovrai, (or U av ^oy\a>vTai,) they always do 
 whatever they please ; the antecedent being indefinite.) A/yw a ovk 
 dyuoS), 1 am saying that of which I am not ignorant. 
 
 'AXX* ot€ drj p €K Toio bvabeKdrrj yever rjuis, Koi t6t€ brj irpos 
 OXvpnov Xaav B^oi aUv iovres. H. I, 493. Ti's taff o x^^P^^ ^jl"^'^ «»' 
 to ^€^r]Kap€V. SOPII. O. C. 52. "Etoy eVrt /caipoy, dvriXd^fuBe 
 T^v npaypdrayv, i. e. now, while there is an opportunity, &c. Dem. 01. 
 I, 15, 6. (If the exhortation had been general, he might have said 
 Tco? av jj Kaipos, (on all occasions) so long as there is an opportunity,^ 
 § 62.) 'O h€ dva^ds, etos pev ^daipxi rjv, firljov ittttov riyeV fire] 8e 
 o3aTa rj v , KaraXnrliv tov innov eairfvbe rrtf^. Xen. An. Ill, 4, 49, 
 So 11. I, 198, €(os o)ppaiv€. Olirep 8e koi rav a7ro^aii/oi/ra)v to wXeov 
 rris cuTias €|o/iev, olroi kcu Kuff riavx^av t* avrav iipotbuituv, we 
 
 § 60, 1.] 
 
 DEFINITE ANTECEDENT. 
 
 123 
 
 who are to hear the greater part of the hlame, &c. ThX'C. I, 83. "Odev 
 8' ovv paara padrjaea-Be irfpi avrSv, ivrevBfv vpds koi eyat irparov 
 ir€ipdaopai diddaKdv, Dem. Aph. I, 814, 4. (Here evreveiv refei-s to 
 a particular point, at which he intends to begin.) Compare the 
 first example under Note 1 . *H 69 Xoi'yto epy, ore p c'x^oSoTr^o-at 
 €(t>ri<r€ IS "Hpji, oT av p epiOrfaiv oveibfiois t-nUfrciv, surely there will 
 be sad work, when you shall impel me, &c. II. I, 518. (Here ore refers 
 to some time conceived as definite by the speaker ; whereas or hv 
 ipedrjaiv, whenever she shall provoke me, is indefinite, and belongs 
 under § 61, 3.) Nu^ 8* earm ore 8fj aryye pos ydpos dvri^oXri<T€i 
 ovXopevTjs iptOfu, TTJs t€ Zfvs oX^ov dirt] v pa, Od. XVHI, 272. 
 
 Note 1. When the sense requires it, these clauses admit 
 all the constructions allowed in independent sentences. E. g. 
 
 *Ap£ouat 8* ivrfZOiv odev Ka\ vpels paar av pad o ire Kayo) rdxitrT 
 ^vBidd^aipi, Dem. Aph. HI, 846, 15. (Here the relative 
 clause contains an apodosis with av, with a protasis ei dp^aiprjv im- 
 plied. This must not be confounded with the use of the Optative 
 tvithout av, in the other class of relative sentences. See § 61, 4.) 
 tivv 8« roCro ovk inoir](T€v, iv a tov b?)pov tTiprjcrfV av, but he did 
 not do this, in which he would have honored the people (if he had done^ 
 it). Id. Mid. 536, 25. Els KaXov vpiv "Avvtos o8€ irapeKaOeCfTo, <p 
 p(Tah^p€v T^j Ciri]<Tf<^i- I*^AT. Men. 89 E. (Subjunctive in 
 an exhortation.) Ovkovv a^iov toIs rcw/ KaTr}y6p<ov Xoyoiff iriarfvcrat. 
 uaXXov rj toIs fpyois Kai rw XP^^V^ ^^ ^^"^ aacpfaTaTOV tXeyxov tov 
 dXr^Bovs vopiaare, Lys. de Bon. Arist. p. 157, § 61. (Here the 
 Imperative vopi<TaT€ is used in a sort of exclamation after ov, where 
 ordinarily del vopia-ai would be used.) *\v yap dno(f>vyn pe ovros, o 
 pfj yevoiTO, Tf]u eira^eXiav 6(I)X^(T(0. ^Dem. Aph.^ 1, ^834, 25. 
 (Optative in a wish.) "Eaaerai, rjpap or av rroT oXayXrj iXioy tpi/, 
 a day will come when sacred Ilium will fall. II. VI, 448. (Here 
 6Xa>Xrj dv is used like a Future Indicative, § 87, Note ; and the ante- 
 cedent of ore is definite. If av belonged to ore, the clause would be 
 a protasis, meaning when Ilium shall fall, a day will come.) 
 
 Note 2. The relative may be used to express a purpose (§ 65, 1), 
 or in a causal sense (§ 65, 4). The antecedent may then be either 
 definite or indefinite. 
 
 B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent. 
 
 § 60. 1. When the relative refers to an indefinite 
 antecedent, expressed or understood, the action of its 
 verb is not stated absolutely as a definite fact, but con- 
 ditionally as a supposed case; and such a relative sen- 
 tence has many of the essential qualities of a conditional 
 sentence. 
 
124 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 60, 1. 
 
 Thus, when we say d vonlCei ravra X/yet, he IS saying what he 
 {actually) thinksy or a ivofju^f ravra eXfyci/, he was saying what he 
 thought, the actions of vofiiCfi and ipofxi^e are stated as actual 
 facts, occurring at definite times ; but when we say a &v vofiiCif 
 (ravra) Xtyci, he (always) says whatever he thiiiks, or A rofj.i(oi 
 (ravra) JXfyey, he (always) said whatever he happened to be think' 
 ingy vojjLiCrj and voyLi^oi do not state any such definite facts, but 
 rather what some one may think (or may have thought) on any 
 occasion on which he is (or was) in the habit of speaking. So, 
 when we say & vofxi^^i ravra Xff ft, he will say what he (now) 
 thinks, vo/itfct denotes a fact ; but when we say & av vofil^i] Xc'^ft, 
 he will say whatever he happens to be (then) thinking, vo^l^rf 
 denotes merely a case supposed in the future. Again, — to 
 take the case in which the distinction is most liable to be 
 overlooked, — when we say h ovk oida ovk oXojxai tlbkvai, what 
 I do not know, I do not think that I know, ovk olba^ as beibre, 
 denotes a simple fact, and its object, a, has a definite antece- 
 dent ; but when Socrates says h firf oi8a ovde otofiai eldfvai, the 
 meaning is if there are any things which I do not know, I do 
 not even think that I know them. In sentences like this, unless 
 a negative is used (/i?/ being the sign of an indejijiite, ov of a 
 definite antecedent), it is often difficult to decide whether the 
 antecedent is definite or indefinite: thus d, olba oXofxai dbkvak 
 may mean either what I (axitually) know, I think Uiut I know, 
 or if there is anything which I know, I think that I know it. 
 
 The analogy of these indefinite relative clauses to conditional 
 sentences will be seen at once. The following examples will 
 make this clearer : — 
 
 "Ort )3ovXcrat da>ara>, I icill give Mm whatever he (now) wishes. 
 El ri fiovXerai^ ficbo-o), if he wishes anything^ I will give it. (§ 49, 1.) 
 
 *0 Tt i^ovkiro (dcuKa av, I should have given him whatever he had 
 wished. "O ri fir) fyfvero ovk av flirdv, I should not have fold what 
 had not happened. Ei rt e/3ovX ero, e8a>Ka av, if he had wished any- 
 *hing, I shoidd have given it. Ei rt yiT} iyiviro, ovk tiv flnov, if any 
 thing had nut happened, 1 should not have told it. (§ 49, 2.) 
 
 *0 T* av ^ovXrjrai, dclxrco, / will give him whatever he shall wish. 
 *Edv ri ^ovXrjrai, Scuao), if he shall wish anything, I will give it. 
 (§/0, 1.) 
 
 *0 Ti ^ovXoiro Boirjv av, I should give him whatever he might 
 wish. Et rt /SovXotro, boirjv av, if he should wish anything, I shoulu 
 give it. (§ 50, 2.) 
 
 § 61, 1.] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 125 
 
 'O ri av ^ovXrjrai biba>fii, I (always) give him whatever he wishes. 
 'Ot4/3ovXoito (bidovv, I always gave him whatever he wished. *Eav 
 Ti ^ovXrjrai, didafii, if he ever wishes anything, I {alwa?/s) give it. 
 Et n ^ovXoiro, ididovv, if he ever wished anything, I (always) gave it. 
 
 (§ 51.) 
 
 2. Tho relative with an indefinite antecedent may 
 therefore be called the conditional relative, and tlie 
 clause in which it stands may be called the protasis 
 (like clauses with el or €av^, and the antecedent clause 
 may be called the apodosis. 
 
 3. The particle av (Epic /ce) is regularly joined with 
 all relative words, when they are followed by the Sub- 
 junctive. The particle here (as always in protasis) is 
 joined to the relative, never to the verb. (See § 38, 1, 
 and § 47, 2.) 
 
 Note. With ore. Snore, eVei, and eneibri, av coalesces, forming 
 orav, OTTorav, inav or iirr^v (Ionic cVeai/), and incihav. In Homer, 
 where k€ is generally used for av, we have ore k€, &c. (hke ei kc), 
 where in Attic we have orav, &c. 'Etttjv, however, occurs often m 
 Homer. 
 
 Remark. The classification of common conditional sentences, 
 given in § 48, applies equally to conditional relative sentences. 
 The distinction between those containing general suppositions 
 (§ 62) and the correspondinn; forms containing particular supposi- 
 tions (§ 61, 1) is especially imjwrtant. 
 
 § do We have four forms of the conditional rela- 
 tive sentence which correspond to the four forms of 
 ordinary protasis (§ 49, 1, 2, and § 50, 1, 2) : — 
 
 1. When the relative clause refers to a definite act 
 in the present or the past, and no opinion of the speaker 
 is implied as to the truth of the supposition, the verb 
 is put in one of the present or past tenses of the In- 
 dicative. (§ 49, 1.) 
 
 The antecedent clause can have any form allowed in 
 an apodosis (§ 49, 1, Note 1). E. g. 
 
 *A fJLT] ol8a, ovbi otofiaL ctSeVai (like et riva /A17 oiSa). Plat. Apol. 
 
126 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 61, 1. 
 
 21 D. (See above, § 60, 1.) Xprjadav o ri ^ovXovrai, let them 
 deal with me as they please (i. e. el ti ^ovXovrai). Arist. Nub. 439. 
 *Em<rTa(jiaL opav ff a 6ft /xe, koIx opav A fif] TrptVet, / know how to 
 see anything which I ought to see, and not to see anything which I ought 
 not. Eur. Ino. Fr. 417. (*A Set is nearly equivalent to el nva fift, 
 and a p,f) TTpeVet to ft nva fi^ TrpeVei.) Tovs ifKfioTOVs tvQairep eneaov 
 fKaarovs edayjrav' ovs 8e prj €vpi(TKOV^ K€voTd(f>iov avrois (iroir}(rav, 
 j. e. they raided a cenotaph for any of them whom they did not find 
 (like fi Tivas prj evpiaKou). Xen. An. VI, 4, 9. Ti yap; oaris ^aira- 
 VTjpos (ov fxf) avrdoKTjs €a'T\vy aXX' aet rav itX-qalov 6f irai, Koi Xa^- 
 ^dvoiv fiT) 8 V vara I dnobibovai, fxrj Xapfidvoiv 8i top pf] didovra /xtcret, 
 
 ris px) avrdpKTjs eorli/, k. t. X.). Id. Mem. II, 6, 2. ^ So rJTn 
 
 pT)8ap,ov $vp,pax€li ThUC. I, 35. "A rts prj Trpoa-eboKYjaev, 
 ovdi (fyvXd^aadai iyx^opfh '^e'*« ^ ^0 opportunity to guard against 
 what we did not expect (like et nva p^ irpofrehoKrja-i ns)- Antiphon. 
 p. 131, 36. § 19. Ets TO. liKoia rovs re dadfuovvras €V€^i^a(rav Kai 
 ra>v (TKfvSiv oaa pr) avdyKt) tj v fX^iv (like ft nva tS>v a-Kfvcov pfj dvdyKtf 
 rjv fx^*")' ^' ^' ^^y ^f *^ ^^'^*<^^ ^^^y ^^^ ''^' need. Xen. An. V, 3, 1. 
 *Av6pd)7rnvs bU(^6eipfv (Jq 6d\aa<Ta) oaoi pfj ibvvavTO <l>3r]vai irpos 
 TO. p,€T€(i)pa dvadpapovTfSi i. e. if any were unable to escape soon enough 
 to the high land., so many the sea destroyed. TiiUC. Ill, 89. Oiy ph 
 atpeais yeyevr^rai roXXa fvTvxov(Tiy ttoXX^ avoia TroXf/x^trat • €t 
 dvayKalov rjvy K.T.\.,for any who have had the choice given them, whUe 
 they are prosperous in other respects, it is great folly to go to war (i. e. 
 €1 Tto-ti' alp^a-ts y€yiVT]Tai). TlIUC. II, 61. Ila^Tfff lapfv Xa^piav 
 ovT€ TVTTTovTa ovd' opird^ovTa Tov aTi<f)avov ovd' o\a)S npo<Ti6v6 onou 
 pr) irpoarjKfv avra, nor going anywhere at all where it was not law- 
 ful for him (i. e. ei Trot pfj TrpoarjKfv). Dem. Md. 535, 15. Xlwy oyv oi 
 dya6o\ TOif dyadois <|)iXoi taovrai, ol p-rfre dirovrfs nodeivol aXXrjXotff 
 pT]T€ irapovTfs xP^'^o^ avT(ov ex^vai ; (i. e. €i /xr) . . . exovcrt). Plat, 
 Lys. 215 B. Nkw/; 6' o n nda-iv vpiv /xeXXf t avvoicreiv (i. e. ct ri 
 ufXXft), may any plan prevail which will benefit you all. Dem. Pbil. 
 I, 65, 7. So SOPU. Ant. 375, 6s rod* «p6«. 
 
 Note. Care must be taken here (as in conditional sentences, 
 § 49, 1, Note 2), not to include under this class the general suppo- 
 sitions of § 62, which require the Subjunctive or Optative. On the 
 other hand, the examples falling under § 62, Note 1, in which the 
 Indicative is allowed, might properljr be placed here, as they state a 
 
 feneral supposition for emphasis as if it were a particular one (§51, 
 Tote 3). See also § 61, 3, Note. 
 
 2. When a relative clause, referring to the present or 
 the past, implies that the condition which it expresses 
 w not or was not fulfilled (like a protasis of the form 
 § 49, 2), its verb is put in a secondary tense of the In- 
 dicative. 
 
 ■!■ 
 
 h 
 
 § 61, 3.] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 127 
 
 The antecedent clause also contains a secondary tense 
 of the Indicative, implying the non-fulfilment of a con- 
 dition, which may be in an apodosis with av or a pro- 
 tasis (§ 49, 2), or in an expression of a wish (§ 83). 
 
 •A uA e' 3 oiJXf TO SoCmt, oIk hv e8a><fi^, he would not have given 
 what he had not wished to give (i. e. el nva ptj i^ovXero 8ovmt, ovk av 
 ^ba>Kev). O^re ydp Slv avroi eirex^ipovpev irparreLV a p.r) fjirnTra- 
 ueBa'o^e rols oXXots eTrerpeiropev, hv ^pxopev^aXXo n n^arreiv p 
 ^ n nodrrovres dpOmepi^XXov •npd^eiv' Tovrob rjvav^ov eTrtari,- 
 ur^v efyov. for (if that were so) we should not be undertaking (as we 
 are) to do things which we did not understand nor should ^epermU 
 any others whom we were ruling to do anything else than what they 
 were likely to do properly; and this would be whatever they had knowl- 
 edqe of Plat. Charm. 171 E. (Here a /xi, rjmarape6a=^eL nva 
 uh hr^^rrdpeOa, if there were any things which we did not know --hv 
 ToYOuev ==el nviv i^pxop^v^ - o rt ep.Wov = el rt e>XXov, - and ov 
 'ZrLu dxou = .Ut.o. elxc. It is implied that none of the cases 
 here supposed ever actually arose, as the whole passage refers to an 
 unfulfilled condition expressed in the preceding sentence.) Et 6* 
 otKOt ehov «a(rrot rhs bcKa,, tovtovs *av d7ti>\\y<Tav otrt,/€S <|)tXot paKi- 
 aralTav ^Kdr^val^v roi 6/;^-, (/^«^'^ ^<'^ ^'^ %'^^ ^ home they 
 would ruin any who were especially friendly kc. Xen. Rep. Athen. 
 i, le . (Here oZrt.« Tjaau, = el nves ^r^crav, forms a second protasis to 
 tiie apodosis d-ntoWvijav av. See § 55, 1.) , , , , 
 
 nYivos ir<>yX^vov &v, ^vv^yiyvcoaKere brjTrov av poi, e,ev eKeivrj rri 
 ch^v^reL Jrp6n<o IX.yo. Iv olanep er ed pap prjv, if I happened 
 To be a foreigner you would surely pardon me, /^.^^^^ C^^) «//^^^^^^^ 
 inq you in both the language and the manner m which I had been 
 brought up. Plat. Apol. 17 D. 'O. bn W o4>^}ov ^Kapo^vvrev 
 taJvaivL dvepo,, hv Kredreaa^v iois em yr}pas erer pev, O that I 
 were die son of some fortunate man, whom old age had Mf^^poi^^^. 
 own estate (i. c. if old age had found any such man, would that I had 
 been his son). Od. I, 217. .!•.•• c ^y 
 
 So when the relative sentence depends on an indicative m a final 
 clause r§ 44, 3) ; as in Dem. Arist. 635, 15 : raZra ye brjirov TrpoarrjKe 
 yndia.;lairJnore rov>yo. eVpcix^^' rovro) ri « to,, .o^v vnnpx^ 
 sScaTa, he ougit to have wriiten it in this way in order that any one by 
 whom the deed had been done might have his rights according to he 
 ZwT. (This implies that the law was not so written, so that the 
 case supposed in ot^ cVpax^^; never arose.) 
 
 Remark. All examples of this form fall equaUy weU under the 
 general rule for assimilation, § 64, 2. 
 
 3. When the relative clause refers distinctly and viv- 
 idly to the future (like a protasis of the form § 50, 1), 
 
128 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 61, 3. 
 
 aud the verb of the antecedent clause also refers to 
 the future, the relative is joined with au (or /ce) and 
 followed by the Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 Tda>v rjif k ed^XiOfii (f)iXTjv 7roirj(TOfi ukoitiv (like ft k€ riva eW- 
 Xo)fit), whomsoever of these I jnmj wish I shall make my mfe. 11. IX, 
 397. Ek yap 'Opicrrao Tiats (aafrai ^Arpeldaoy onnor av ij^rja-jj re 
 Koi ^s Ipe ip€Tai airjs, i. e. vengeance will come from Orestes, when 
 he shall grow up, &c. (like edv nore rj^rjari). Od. I, 40. ToVf 8" avTf 
 
 yaxTjarfTai, OTTTTore Ktv piv Ovpos €vl (rrjjdecra-Lv dva>yij koi Bfos opa-^. 
 1. IX, 702. 'AXX' ay€d\ Ids av iyuiv fXiru^^ TifiOatp^'Qa jrarrfy, let us 
 obey as I may direct, i. e. if I give any direction (fdv tto)? fiTro)), let us 
 obey it. II. II, 139. 'H/ifl? avr oKoxovi re (f)i\as Ka\ vrfnia TiKva 
 a^opfv €v vrjeaaiv, fnrjv irToKUOpov 6 X a> /a f i/ , lohen we shall have taken 
 the city. 11. IV. 238. ^ So (Zt Au mnTaaiv, II. I, 242. Ovkovv, orav 
 Bfj prj (rdfva), nenaixropai, therefore, when I shall have no more 
 strength,^ 1 will cease. SoPii. Ant.' 91. TaOra, cnfiddv irfpi rod ytvovs 
 €i7r(o, ipa>, I will speak of this, when I shall have spoken about my 
 birth. Dem. Eiibul. 1303,* 25^ (See § 20, Note 1.) 'Enfi8av dia- 
 7rpd$a)p.ai a dtop.ai, jj^w. Xex. An. II, 3, 29. Tiva oUaOe aiirrju 
 >\rvxr]v e^€ii/, orav epe i8tj rSiv TraTp(poiV dneaTfprjpfPov ; what feelings 
 do you think she will have, when (or if at any time) she shall see me, 
 &C.? Dem. Aph. II, 842, 16. TovT(ov 8i 'AOrjuaiovs (Prjpl 8uv dvai 
 TTf rra<o(nous', e^ rjs du rivos vplv rjXiKias KoXois fxfiv 8ok jj,from whatever 
 age it shall seem good to you to take them (i. e. if from any particular 
 age, &c.) Id. Phil. 1, 45, 27. Twi/ 7rpaypdT(ov tovs ^ovXevopevovs 
 (JjydaOai Set), Iva a av €K€lvois 8oktj ravra npaTTTjTai, in order that 
 whatever shall seem good to them shall be done. lb. 51, 19. Ou poi 
 <P6^ov piKaBpov eXms epnarflv, fas av aiBj} niip e(f)' iarias (p^s Atyt- 
 aBoi, so long as he shall kindle fire, &c. Aesch. Again. 1435. 
 
 ^ Note. The Future Indicative is rarely, if ever, used in condi- 
 tional relative clauses, as in common protasis (§ 50, 1, Note 1), in 
 the plaxje of the Subjunctive ; as it would generally be ambiguous, 
 appearing as if the antecedent were definite. "Ocrot /SovXijo-otTat, 
 Thuc. I, 22, is perhaps to be explained in this way. See Xex. 
 Cyr. I, 5, 13. In such examples as (a pfj ns aiirbs irap/arai, un- 
 less he was to be present himself, the I^uture is used as it is in the 
 form of protasis explained § 49, 1, N. 3. 
 
 4. When the relative clause refers to the future less 
 distinctly and vividly (like a protasis of the form § 50, 
 2), and the antecedent clause contains an Optative re- 
 ferring to the future, the relative is followed by the 
 Optative (without ai/). 
 
 The Optative in the antecedent clause may be in an 
 
 §62.] 
 
 GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS. 
 
 129 
 
 apodosis with av or a protasis (§ 50, 2), in an expres- 
 sion of a wish (§ 82), or in a final clause. E. g. 
 
 MaXa Kfv 6pa<TVKdp8ios ei?/, off rore yrjdrja'eifv Idotv novov ovb 
 dKdxoiTO (i. e. fiTis yr]df](r€i€, pdXa k€v 6pa(ruKdp8iof eti/), any one 
 who should then rejoice would be very stout-hearted. H. XIII, 343 
 So II. VI, 329 and 521 ; XIV, 247 : Arist. Nub. 1250. Ovk av ovu 
 6p4y\rais dv8pa, ocrris e'^e'Xoi re /cat bvvaiTO aov dnepvKfiv tovs 
 (TTixeipovvras dbiKflv ae ; would you not support any man who shoula 
 be both willing and able, &c. ? Xen. Mem. II, 9, 2. Ueivatv <f>dyoi av 
 oiTOTf /SovXotTo, when he is hungry, he would eat whenever he might 
 wish (like ei TTore ^ovXolto), lb. 11, 1,18. So Mem. I, 5, 4 ; I, 7, 
 3 ; IV, 2, 20. Ilaif ovv av elSfirjs nepi rovrov tov irpdyparos, ov irav- 
 rdiraaiv uireipos ftrjs ; how then could you know about that thing of 
 which you had no experience at all? Plat. Men. 92 C. *Ap' ap 
 T]yo7o ravra era €ivai, a (rot e^firj /cat dnobocTdai /cat dovvai /cat Oxxrai 
 oTto ^ovXoio 6€(ov; Id. Euthyd. 302 A. Tl av iraSflv {bvvaiTo), o 
 prj /cat vcj) avTov ird6oi; what could he suffer, unless he .should snuffer 
 it also from himself f (i. o. et pi) nddoi)' Plat. Lys. 214 E. *6 di 
 pfj dyairmr}, ovb^ av (ftiXol (i. e. ei rt pi) dyantorj, ovd' hv (f>iXoi rovro). 
 lb. 215 B. "Ocra 5e 7rp€cr^vT€pos yiyvotro, pdXXov aet ao"»ra{btro 
 &v (xprjpara), the older he should grow, the more he would always cling 
 to it (i. e. ei rt npea^vrfpos yiyvoiTO, roo-o) pdXXov da-nd^OLTO av). 
 Plat. Rep. VllI, 549 B. So 111, 412 D; VIII, 557 B. ^Ijtropev 
 pr)8^7TOT€ prjbcv av pei^ov pr)bi eXarrov yeveadai, ecor to'oi' eii; avro 
 iavTM, so long as it should remain equal to itself Plat. Theaet. 
 155 A. So ^ovXoipr)v k€, . . . a pf) eij;, Od. XI, 489. 
 
 Ei 5e /SouXoto Ttiyv (f)iXo>v rii/a TrpoTp^yj/'aaBai ottotc d7ro8r)poiT]s 
 €TvipiKfi(r6ai tov (tcm/, tI av noioir)S ; Xen. Mem. II, 3, 12. EiKoras 
 hv /cat Trapa 6€a>v TrpaKTiKoorfpos €ir), oortf pr) oTrdre €V anopots eiT) Tore 
 KoXaK€voi, aXX' ore rd dpiara Trpdrroi rore pAXiara rav Beav 
 pepvaro. Id. Cyr. I, 6, 3. 'Q? aTroXotTo /cat akXos, d ris rotaura 
 ye pe'^ot, O that any other man might likewise perish who should do 
 the like (i. e. ei rty rotavra piC^i)- Od. I, 47. *Eytyi'a>o';ce bflv tovs 
 V7rr)p€Tas tovto da-Kflv, ats irdvra vopi^oiev Trpeireiv avTols TrpdrTCiv oaa 
 6 dpx^ov Trpoo-Tarroi. Xen. Cyr. U, I, 31. 
 
 Remark. All these examples fall also under the general rule for 
 assimilation, § 64, 1. 
 
 § 62. A conditional relative sentence (like a pro- 
 tasis, § 51) may express a general supposition. This 
 happens when the verb of the antecedent clause denotes 
 a customary or repeated action or a general truth, while 
 the relative clause refers indefinitely to any one of a 
 series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or a 
 definite series of acts. 
 
130 
 
 KELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§62. 
 
 Here the Subjunctive with 09 av, orav, <fec. is used 
 after primary tenses, and the Optative (without av) 
 after secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 'ExOpoi yap fioi k€7pos ofim *Atdao TrvXj/o-tf, oi x ^Tfpov fih k€v6tj 
 cVt (bpealu, SX\o de tX'jrrjJor that man (i. e. any man) is hated by me 
 like the very gates of Hades, who conceals one thing in his mind and 
 speaks another. II. IX, 312. Nf/ifcro-di/xai yf /xei/ ovbev K\aUiv or m 
 Bavjiai ^porav Ka\ nor^iov iviairrj, I am never at all indignant at 
 weeping for any mortal who may die, &c. Od. IV, 195. Km yap o-v/i- 
 uavflv TovTOis €6f\ov(Tiv auavTfS, oviavopaxri izapecTKfvaa^ivovi, Jor 
 ad men are (always) willing to be allies to those whom they see prepared. 
 Dem. Phil. I, 42, 1. KaiTrep rav dv6p(i}Tr(ov, fv <} ph av tt o X f /i « o" i , 
 Toi/ TraptH/TO (TToXf/io^) a« (XfyioTou Kpivoirrcov, although men always 
 consider the present war the greatest, so longjxs they are engaged in it.^ 
 Thug. I, 21. Uopcvovrai t€ yap at dyeXat, rj &u avras €v6vvoi<Tivoi 
 vo/x<iy, vtpovrai re ^wpia <<^* o^oia av avras e(>tw(rti/, drre'xoi^at re 
 2)1/ Ai/ avras dneipyaai' Ka\ rols Kapnols ewo-t Tovy w^c'as XP^<^^«* 
 ovras oTTWff av avroi fiov\<ovrai' av6pQ)iroi 6c fir ovdtvas naWov 
 avvicrravraitjem rolrovs ots &v aiaOcovrai Jpx"" a^^'W" {^^X^'P^^^ 
 ras. XeN. Cyr. I, 1, 2. No^i'Co) npoardrov epyov fivai oiov fiti, o$ 
 &v 6p^v rovs (jylXovs f^anarapevovs pff cVirpcTTT;, i. e. such as one ought 
 always to be, who, &c. Id. Hell. U, 3, 51. ^ Kara(l>p6vr}a is be (eyyi- 
 yverai), os av Ka\ yvaprj ir la r e v rj ra>v (vavri(av irpoex^iv, o rjplv xmap- 
 Xei. Thug. II, 62. (Here the o refers to all that precedes, as a 
 definite antecedent.) ^ ^ , 
 
 O^ U6I/ yap pelCov kUos dvipos, ocppa k erja-iv, i? o rt iroaaiv re 
 ^e$r} Ka\ x^P^''^' ^'^' ^^^^^ ^^'^' CO(ppa k erjaiv, SO long as he 
 lives.) (jOeovs) iraparpairaa av6p<oiroL Xnraopevotj ore K€v rts virep- 
 ^ifj) Ka\ dpdprrj. H. IX, 500. "Upicrv yap r^ dperjis oTroatWai 
 elpvona Zfvs dvepos, fvr av piv Kara bovXiov rjpap eXrjaiv. 0± 
 XVII, 322. *tXe€i Be kcos Trpoa-rjpaiveiv, evr av /xc'XXt; peyd\a Kaica 
 fj TToXt Tj eOvei eaeaeai. Hdt. VI, 27. ^e{r^ov(n yap roi xo* Opaaels, 
 orav ireXas v^rj rhv "AiBrjv elaopaxri rov ^iov. SoPH. Ant. 580. 
 ^UviK av fi* oiKOi yevavrai, !ipa><Tiv ovk dvawx^rdj AriST. rac. 
 1179. 'Eneibav be t) eK(\>opa 17, \dpvaKas ayov(TLV apa^ai. Thuc. 
 n, 34. "Eneihav be Kpvyjraxri, yfj, dvrjp fjprjpevos viror^s noXeas, 
 OS av yvatpj} re doKTJ prj d^vveros elvai, Xc'-yft cV avrols e-rraivoy rov 
 npenovra. Ibid. "Ews av ad>Cr)rai to <rKa(^os, rore xph "^poOvpovs 
 eivai' eneibav be 17 Bakarra vnepaxv^ fJ^araios rj anovbf). Pem. 
 Phil. Ill, 128, 22. So ear av bela(oaiv, Xex. Mem. Ill, 5, 6. 
 
 00 riva yap rieaKOV emxOovioov dvOpiairatv, ov KaKov ovbe pev ecr&kov, 
 o rls a(t>eas elfTai^iKoiro, i. e. they were never in the habij ofhonor- 
 ing any one who came to them. Od. XXII, 414. KaX^ovsptviboi 
 evraKras /cat a-iamfj tovras, irpotreXavviov avrols rives re elev r]pa>ra, Kal 
 cWi TTvBoiro en^vei. Xen. Cyr. V, 3. 55. (Here rjpayra and enrjvei 
 denote the habit of Cyrus.) Ka\ roly pev "AOr^vaiois rjv^ero to vavriKOP 
 dno rr)s baudvrjs f]v Uelvoi $v p(})e poiev, avroi be, orrore diroaraleVf 
 dnapdcicevoi Kal direipoi es rbv noXepov KaOicrravro, and the Athenian 
 
 62.] 
 
 CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES, 
 
 131 
 
 - 
 
 navy continued to increase from the money which these contiibuted, and 
 they, whenever they revolted, always found themselves unprepared and 
 inexperienced for war. Thug. I, 99. 
 
 'EttI Motpios jSao-iXeos, okcos cX^oi 6 norapbs eV oKra Trfjxfas, 
 apbeaKe Aiyvirrov rrjv evepBe Mep^ios, i. e. ivhenever the river rose. 
 Hdt. II, 13. Tov be xp^v rbv eK(f>ope6pevov, okws ylvoiro vi/^, et 
 rbv Tiypiv e$e(f)6peov, 1. e. they carried it away every night. Id. II. 
 150. Ot be (Kapfff), ok(os Mlvws beoiro , enXripovv oi ras veas. ^ Id. 
 I, 171. 'ETTfiSi) be dvoixBeit), elarjeipev trapa rbv ^aKpan], i. 6. 
 each morning, when the prison was opened, &c. Plat. Phaed. 59 D. 
 *Ore e^to rov beivoi yevoivro, ttoXXoi avrbv drreXenrov, many {always) 
 left him, when they were out of danger. Xen. An. H, 6, 12. (If 
 eyevovro had been used, the whole sentence would refer to a^ particu- 
 lar case in which many left him.) 
 
 Remark. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and 
 Iterative tenses of § 30, can be used in the antecedent clause of 
 these general propositions. The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is a 
 primary tense. (See § 32, 2.) E. g. 
 
 "Os ice 6eo7s eiriireiOrjrai, paXa r eKXvov avrov, whoever obeys 
 the Gods, to him they are ready to listen. H. I, 218. "Orav ris Sxrirep 
 ovros I <T x^ (^ V y V 'rrpa)rT] 7rp6(f)aa-is anavra dvexairia-e Kal bieXv- 
 aev. Dem. 01. II, 20, 27. 'OTroTe Trpoa^Xeyjrete rivas roiv ev rais 
 rd^ea-i, elitev av, Z avbpes, K.r.X., i. e. he used to say, &c. Xen. 
 Cyr. VII, 1, 10. (See § 30, 2.) Out akXore TroiTrore npbs xap'*' 
 eiXoprjv Xcyeir, o ri &v pfj koi avvoiaeiv Treneiapevos w, / have never on 
 other occasions preferred to say anything in order to please, unless I 
 have been convinced that it would also be for your advantage, Dem. 
 Phil. I, 54, 27. (Here eiXoprjv is used in a sense approaching that 
 of the ffnomic Aorist, so as to be followed by a Subjunctive. Sea 
 § 30, l,2i. 1.) 
 
 Note 1. The Indicative is sometimes used instead of the 
 Subjunctive and Optative in relative sentences of this class. 
 (See § 51, N. 3.) Here the speaker refers to one of the cases 
 in which the event in question is liable to occur, as if it were 
 the only case, instead of referring indefinitely to all possible 
 cases alike (as when the Subjunctive or Optative is used). 
 This use of the Indicative occurs especially after the indefinite 
 relative oaris ; as the idea of indefiniteness, which is usually 
 expressed by the Subjunctive or Optative, is here sufficienUy 
 expressed by the relative itself. E. g. 
 
 'ExBpbs yap poi Ke\vos opois Aibao TrvXrjcriv 
 Tiyverai, os neviij eUav dirarrjXia iSa^f *• ^d. XIV, 15& 
 Compare this with the 'first example (U. IX, 312) under § 62. 
 
132 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMTORAI, SENTENCES. 
 
 tS62 
 
 P 
 
 Efioi yap ooTii natrav €vdvva)v noXiv 
 
 Ml) rav dpioToyv anTfrai (iovXfVfidraVy 
 
 AXX €K (po^ov Tov y\(o(T(Tau eyKXelaas €X * * » 
 
 KaKicrros fivai vvv t€ koi ndXai 8oKfl ' 
 
 Kal fxei^ov ocrris dvrl rrjs avrov Trarpac 
 
 ^iXou vofii^ei, tovtov ovdafwv Xeya. SoPH. Ant. 178. 
 
 (Here we might have had os au , . . . firj dirTrjTai, dXX* .... ?x.7» ^^^ 
 hs dv pofiiCr}^ %vithout any essential difference in meaning.) 
 
 OiTivfs npos rds ^vp(f)opds yvafirj piv TjKioTa XvTTOvvraiy fpy^ Sc 
 ftaXiara duTex^ovaiv, ovtoi koi noXecov koi Idiarat/ KpdTioToi elaiu, 
 Thuc. II, 64. So in the same chapter, oaris Xap^dvei. "Edairrov 
 TOV avrov rporrov onoaovs encXap^aveu fj orparid^ they coil' 
 tinned to hnry in the same way as many as the army took up. Xen. 
 An. VI, 5, 6. (Here firiXap^duoi might have been used.) "Oaris 
 o d<f>iKU€lTo Twi/ nupd ^aaiXeays npos avrou, Trduras dnenepnfTo. 
 lb. I, 1, 5. "Ottov de )(^iX6s crndvios ndiw ctrjy avros 8' ebvvaro rrapa- 
 aK€vd(ra<r0aif diaTTcpncov fKfXfvt rovs (jiiXovs InTTois (p^dXXfiv tovtov. 
 lb. I, 9, 27. (In the last two examples there is some Ms. authority 
 for the more regular dcftiKvolro and dyi/atro.) See also An. I, 9, 13. 
 
 All these examples fall under the first class of conditional relative 
 sentences, § 61, 1. So in common protasis, § 51, N. 3. 
 
 Note 2. The Greek generally uses the Indicative in relative 
 clauses depending on general nerjative sentences, where in Latin a 
 Subjunctive is more common. E. g. 
 
 Hap €po\ de ov8e\s pi(rdo(f)opel, ooTts prj 'tKavos €<ttlv laa rrovelv ipoi^ 
 i. e. no one who is not able (no one unless he is able)^ nemo qui non 
 possit. Xen. Hell. VI, 1. 5. These sentences are regular protases, 
 and belong under the rule of § 61, 1. (See Note 1.) 
 
 Note 3. (a.) In Homer, similes and comparisons are often 
 expressed by the Subjunctive after ©?, &s re, as ore, as os 
 (seldom, as dv, &c.), where we should expect the Present In- 
 dicative, which sometimes occurs. Besides the singular use of 
 the Subjunctive in these expressions, the omission of ai/ or Ke is 
 especially to be noticed. (See § 63, 1.) E. g. 
 
 Qs 8e yvvr) KXairja-t (f>iXov ttoctlv dp^nreiTOvaa^ 
 Os T€ fTJs 7rpoa6ev noXios Xaatv re Tre crrjo'iv, 
 Qs Odvaevs eXfeti/6i/ vn d(f)pv(Ti daKpvov ei^ev, 
 Ulysses wept as a wife weeps, &c. Od. VIH, 523-531. 
 
 Qs d or drrapivos Boperjs <l)op€ rjaiv dKavdas 
 
 Ap TTfSioi/, TTVKival be npos dXXr)Xi](Tiv e\ovTai, 
 
 Q? Tr)v dp neXayos dvepot (pe'pov ev6a Ka\ ev6a. Od. V, 328. 
 
 Qs b or dv daT pdiTTT] 7r6<ris''llpr]s rjVKopoio, .... 
 
 Qs TTVKLV ev (rrT]6ea(nv dvearevd^iC 'Ayapepvav. H. X, 5 — 9. 
 
 Ot d\ Sit T dprjTTJpes evavrioi akXTjXoicriv oypxiv iXavvtoaiv % at 
 
 § 63, 2.] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 133 
 
 ' 
 
 Tpaes Ka\ 'Axatot en dXXrjXoKTi Oopovres brjovv. H. XI, 67—71. See 
 idsoll. Xn, 167-172. 
 
 (6.) In many cases the Subjunctive or the Present Indica- 
 tive is followed by the gnomic Aorist in the same simile, the 
 Aorist being merely a more vivid form of expression than the 
 others. (See § 30, 1, Notes 2 and 3.) E. g. 
 
 *Qs S* ore Kanvos lav els ovpavov evpvv iKrjrai 
 "Aareos aWopevoio, 6eav be e prjvis dv^Kfv, 
 
 Udtn b' eOrjKe ttovov, ttoXXoIo-i be Kfjbe* e(j>rJK€V^ 
 
 ^Qs *AxiXevs Tpaeaa-i novov koi Krjbe* eOrjKev. II. XXI, 522. 
 
 *0 5* ev Kovir}(TL X^H^'- t^^<rev, atyeipos ojff, 
 *H pd T ev eiapevfj eXeos peydXoio 7re(f)vKri 
 \fii/, drdp Te ol d^oL err dKpoTdrrj Tr€(l)vaariv 
 Trjv pev ff appaTonr^ybs dvfjp aWavi (Tibr]pa 
 *E$eTap*, d<Ppa Xtvv Kap^rj nepiKaXXei 6i</)pa)* 
 *H pev T d^opevT) KeiTai noTapoio nap' ox^as ' 
 To7ov dp* ^AvOepibijv 2ipoeiai,ov e^evdpt^ev 
 Aias bioyevTjS. H. IV, 482. 
 
 § 63. 1. («.) In Homer, the relatives (like el) often take 
 the Subjunctive without dv or ««, the sense being apparently the 
 same as when dv is used. (§ 50, 1, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 *OTTt pdX* ov brjvaios, os ddavdroKTi pdxTjrai, D. V, 407. 
 *AvBpa7rovs e<})opa, Ka\ Tiwrai os tis apaprrj, Od. XIH, 214, 
 Zevs 8' avTos vepei oXjSov 'OXv/xttios dvdpanoKTiv, 
 'EadXols Tjbe KaKoltriv, onas edeXrjaiv, eKdara. Od. VI, 188. 
 Ov pfjv <roi TTOTe laov ex(>> y^po-S-, ottttot A;i^aiot 
 Tpaav e icTTe paao"* evvaiopevov TrroXiedpov. H. I, ln3. 
 Ov pev yap iroTe ^r](r^ kukov ireiae(rdat o7ri<r(ra>, 
 "Ocfyp dpeTTjv napex<*>(ri 6eol Ka\ yovvar opapff , 
 SO long as the Gods shall supply valor, &c. Od. XVIII. 132. 
 
 {b.) The same omission of dv is not uncommon in the Attic 
 poets ; and even in prose a few exceptional cases occur, if we 
 follow the Mss. (§ 50, 1, N. 3). E. g. 
 
 Tepovra d' dp6ovv (^Xavpov, os veos irearj. SoPH. O. C 395. Tg>p 
 be TTTjpMvav pdXia-TaXvnova at (f)ava(r* aiidaipeToi. Id. O. 1. 1231. 
 Tolat yap prjTe darea prjre reix^a J eKTiapeva, .... Kas ovr. av eirjaap 
 OVTOI, dpaxoi; Hdt. IV, 46. (See § 63, 4, a.) 'Emx^piov hv Ijfxlp 
 ov pev ^paxels dpKacri prj noXXols XP^o-^a^ ^ ^^^^9 (^^^ national habit 
 not to use many words where few suffice. Thuc IV, 17. (Yet the 
 sentence continues, nXelocn be ev a dv Kaipos jj, k.t.X.) See §66,4,N. 
 
 2. The adverb dv is sometimes used with the Optative or 
 Indicative in conditional relative clauses, when the relative 
 
 A 
 

 134 EELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 63, 2. 
 
 clause is itself an apodosis, with a protasis expressed or im- 
 plied. In Homer « with the Optative sometimes occurs where 
 there is no apodosis, as in common protasis. (See § 50, 2, 
 N. 2, a, h.) E. g. 
 
 ^*Ef 2)v ai' Ttff eu X/ywi/ 5ta/3aXXot, eV rovrcoi' a^rovy TrdafcrBai 
 (€(t>Tf)i he said that they would form their opinion upon any slanders 
 which any good speaker might {if he pleased) chance to utter. Tnuc. 
 
 VII, 48. But in Od. 11, 54, &i k€ bolrj ta k idiXoi, that he 
 
 might give her to any one he pleased, « k e^fXot'does not differ from 
 the ordinary « ie(\oi = €l nvi eOeXoi. In Dem. Phil. I, 41, 3, olov 
 &v ^ovXoiadek merely a conjectural emendation for olov au^ov- 
 \r)(r6(, which is a re^lar example illustrating § 62. "Ovriv av 
 VfifU etr TavTrjv ttjv rd$iv KaT€(TTTj(TaT€, ovtos rav laav aiTios rjv av 
 Kaicav oa-avnep «cat olroi, any one soever ichom you might have ap- 
 pointed {if you had chosen) to this post would have been the cause of 
 as great calamities as this man has been. Dem. F. L. 350, 3. (With- 
 out the av after ovTiva, this would hav<j been a regular example 
 under § 61, 2, ovriva KaT€(rn)(raT€ being equivalent to ft riva aWov 
 icaT€<TTrjaraT€, if you had appointed any one else {which you did not do). 
 With the avj it is itself an apodosis with a suppressed protasis ; un- 
 less we can suppose that the av was used, like k€ in the Homeric ex- 
 ample, without affecting the sense. See § 49, 2, N. 4.) 
 
 3. A conditional relative clause, like a common protasis, 
 may depend upon an Infinitive or Participle (with or without 
 Sv), or upon a final clause. See the last three examples under 
 § 61, 3. (Compare § 53 ; § 55, 2.) 
 
 4. The conditional relative clause may have a form different 
 from that of its apodosis. This happens under the same cir- 
 cumstances as in common protasis. (See § 54.) 
 
 (a.) An Indicative or Subjunctive in the relative clause may de- 
 pend upon an Optative with av in the apodosis, either when the 
 expressed apodosis belongs to an implied protasis (§ 54, 1, a), or 
 when the Optative with av is considered a primary tense, from its 
 resemblance in sense to the Future Indicative (54, l.b). See also 
 §34,1,6. E.g. V » » y 
 
 OvKovv Ka\ TO vyiaiveiv Ka\ to voaelv, orav dya3ov rivos alria yi- 
 yvijTai, dyaOa av ttr), i. e. when they prove to be the causes of any goody 
 they would be good things {if we should accept your doctrine). Xen. 
 Mem. IV,^ 2. 32. So Mem. II, 2, 3; and Plat. Rep. II, 379 B. 
 *Eyo> 5e TavTTjv fih ttjv elpffvriv, tios av eir ^A6rjvaia>v \finrjTai, ovde- 
 noT &v a-vp,^ov\€v<Taifii iroirjaraadai rfj rrdXfi, / would never advise the 
 city to make this peace, so long as a single Athenian shall be left. Dkm. 
 F. L. 345, 14. (Here cwy XeiVotTO, so long as one should be leflf 
 would be more regular.) So Arist. Nub. ll'51 ; Soph. El. 697. 
 
 § 64, l."| CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 135 
 
 I 
 
 /■ 
 
 (&.) The Optative (without av) in the relative clause occasionally 
 depends upon & primary tense in the apodosis. Thi^ may arise from 
 the slight distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in such 
 sentences (§ 54, 2, a) ; as in II. XIII, 317, alnv oi itradrai i/^as eVt- 
 Trp^o-at, OTC fifj avTos yf Kpovitov f/x/3dXoi aWopevov da\6v vi]€<T<Ti, it will 
 be a hard tank for him, unless the son of Kronos should hurl, &c. 
 (More regularly, ore k€ pfj ep^dXi] , unless he shall hurl, &c.) 
 
 The Optative in the Relative clause sometimes depends on a 
 verb of necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, &c. with an Infini- 
 tive, the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in sense 
 to an Optative with avj which would be expected in their place 
 (§54,2,6). E.g. 
 
 'AXX' ov TToXis (TTTjatK, ToOSe xpn ii><v€iv, we should obey any one 
 whom the state appoints {if the state should appoint any one, we ought 
 to obey him). Soph. Ant. 666. (Xp^ Meiv is followed by the 
 Optative from its resemblance in sense to StKaitos av kXvoi, tis) 
 *AXXa Tov fi€v avTOV Xc'Yfti' a pri (Ta(\)m flBeir} </)eiSe(r^at dd, i. e. we 
 ought to abstain, &c. ; like (jyeidoiTo av tis. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 1 9.^ Ovs 
 he iroifiaaaBai TIS /SovXotTo avvfpyovs irpoBvfxovs, tovtovs iravTanaaiv 
 €poiy€ doK€l dyadols erjpaTeov dvai. lb. II, 4. 10. ^ (Here (9r;par€o^ 
 (Ivai = 6r]pdv hflv.) 'Ynepopdv ov dvvaTov vpS)vdvbp\ os €l be irj Kvpiovs 
 ovras o tl ^ovXeade avT^ xprjo-dai. Id. Hell. \ H, 3, 7. 
 
 5. The Indicative is generally used in Greek (as in Latin) 
 in parenthetical relative clauses, like o ti nor cVnV, whatever tt 
 is (quidquid est), oaris ttot Io-tIv (or eaTat), &c. L. g. 
 
 Zei/s, 6<TTis 1T0T i(rT\v, ft Tob" aiiTS (piXov K€Ki\rjpev(^, tovto viv 
 Trpo(Tevv€n(o, Zeus, whoever he may be, &c. Aesch. Agam. 160. 
 AovXeCopev Beols, o ti ttot elalv 6€oi EuR. Orest. 418. 
 
 The Subjunctive, however, sometimes occurs ; in which case the 
 expression belongs under §62or§61,3:asin Aeschin.^ Tim. § 127, 
 aXX* 6 irpoiia^dpivos avTav /cat napaTVx<ou, o<ms hv 5, \6yov iraptx^^ 
 So Dem. Phil. I, 47, 24. 
 
 Assimilation in Dependent Relative Clauses. 
 
 § 64. 1. When a conditional relative clause referring to 
 the future depends on a Subjunctive or Optative referring to 
 the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same mood 
 with its leading verb. Such a leading verb may be in pro- 
 tasis or apodosis, in another conditional relative clause, in 
 the expression of a wish (§ 82), or in a final clause. E. g. 
 
 'Eai^ Tivts oX hv bvvcjvrai tovto ttoiwo-i, icaXws e^fi, if any who shall 
 be able do this, it tcUl be well. Ei tiv€s 01 dvvaivTo rom rroLoitv, 
 Kokas iv €xoh if d^y ^ho should be able should do this, U would *>€ 
 
136 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ C4, I. 
 
 tvell. Etde 7rdvT€s oi ^vvaivro tovto iroidiev, that all who may he 
 able tvould do this. (Here the principle of assimilation makes o! 
 dwaiPTo after an Optative preferable to ol av bvvfjavrai, which would 
 express the same idea.) bo in Latin : Si absurde canat is qui se 
 haberi velit musicum, turpior sit. — Sic injurias fortunae quas I'erre 
 nequeas defugiendo relinquas. 
 For examples see § 61, 3 and 4. 
 
 2. When a conditional relative clause depends on a secondary 
 tense of the Indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condi- 
 tion, it regularly takes a secondary tense of the Indicative by 
 assimilation. The leading Indicative may be in protasis or 
 apodosis (§ 49, 2), in another conditional relative clause 
 (§ 61, 2), in an expression of a wish (§ 83), or in a final clause 
 f^44, 3). E. g. 
 
 Et Tivcs otidvvavTo tovto enpa^av, koXSjs av fax^v, if any who had 
 been able had done thisy it would have been well. ElOe Trdirres ot ebC- 
 vavTo TOVTO €7rpa$av, that all who had been able had done this. So 
 m Latm: Nam si solos eos diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset, 
 neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent exciperes. 
 
 Remark 1. It will be seen that tliis principle of assimilation 
 accounts for the Indicative and Optative in a conditional relative 
 sentence, which have been already explained by the analo^ry of the 
 ordmar^r forins of protasis. (See § 61, 2 and 4.) In fact, wherever 
 this assimilation occurs, the relative clause stands as a protasis to its 
 antecedent clause, although the latter may be itself a protasis to 
 another apodosis. (See § 34.) Occasionally this principle is dis- 
 regarded, so that a Subjunctive depends on an Optative. (See the 
 examples under § 34, 1, by and § 03, 4, a.) 
 
 Remark 2. The Indicative in the construction of § 61, 1, refer- 
 ring simply to the present or past, cannot be afiected by assuuila- 
 tion, as that would change its time. E. g. 
 
 M»;r' f/zol napiaTios yevoiTo, filjT Xaov (bpovwv, os Tab* epdet (l e. 
 €1 Tis Td8' epdd). Soph. Ant. 372. /' v 
 
 Note 1. The principle of § 64 appUes only to conditional rela- 
 tive clauses. If the relative refers to a dejinite antecedent, so that 
 Its verb denotes a fact and not a supposition, the principle of assimi- 
 lation does not apply, and the Indicative (or any other construction 
 required by the sense, § 59, N. 1) is used. E. g. 
 
 Et] T^v TToXiT^u ol<Ti vdu niaTfCo^fv, TovTois dm(TTfi(raiix€v, ols 
 6 ovxptofxtda, TovTOKTL xPn<^a[p€ada, a(oe€lT]fX€v ^v. AiaST. Ran. 
 1446. Eld; rjada dvvaros dpdv oaov Trpodvfioi; d, that thou couldst 
 do as much as thou art eager to do. EuR. Heracl. 731. (If the Im- 
 perfect had been used by assimilation, the meaninfr would be Ok 
 ^uch as thou wert (or mightest be) eager to do.) ** 
 
 § 65, 1.] ASSIMILATION. — Ae IN APODOSIS. 
 
 137 
 
 Note 2. Conditional relative clauses depending on a Sub- 
 junctive or Optative in a general supposition (§ 51, § 62) 
 are generally assimilated to the Subjunctive or Optative ; but 
 sometimes they take the Indicative on the principle of § 62, 
 Note 1. E. g. 
 
 Ovb , (TTfidav a>v av jrpiTjTai Kvpios yevrjTat, too TrpoboTrj avfi^ovXa 
 ir(p\ Tmv Xotniav cri XP^'""'* I^KM. Cor. 241, 15* See Plat. Rep. 
 VI, 508 C and D; Charm. 164 B. 'O Se t6t€ pdlitrra (x^tpev, onoTt 
 Taxta^Ta Tvxdvras Z>v bioivTo dnoTrfpnoi. Xen. Ages. IX, 2. 
 
 Atria iM€v ydp eVrti/, orav tis \(rtXa) xPW^t^^^oi Xoyo) pr) irapdcTxqTa^ 
 moTLv Sdv Xeyet, eXeyxos 5e, orav oiv av fliri] rty Ka\ TaXrjdfS opov 
 8ei$rj. Dem. Androt. 600, 5. (Here Sjv X/yft and S}v av eiTTj; are 
 nearly equivalent.) *E>caXet 8e Kai eTipa onoTt Tivds idoi toIovtov 
 noi^aavTas o iravras €/3ovXero noiflv. Xex. Cyr. II, 1, 30. (Here 
 ^ovXoiTo for f/3ouXfro would have corresponded to bloivro in the 
 second example quoted.) 
 
 Remark. The conjunction fie is occasionally used to intro- 
 duce the clause on which a relative depends. Its force here is 
 the same as in apodosis. (See § 57.) E. g. 
 
 OXt) TTfp ^v\\q>v y€vcr), toIt) Se koi dvbpatv. E. VI, 146. *E7rei re 6 
 7roXe/io9 KaTfCTTT}, 6 Se <f)aiv€Tai Ka\ iv tovt<o rrpoyvovs Trjv dvvapiv, and 
 when the tear broke out, (then) he appears, *&c. Thuc. H, 65. Mevot 
 p€v ovv Ol To^oTat fixov re Ta peArf aurois /eat oioi re ^aav xp^(T6ai, oi 
 S e dvT€ixovj so long as their archers both had their arrows and were 
 able to use them, they held out. Id. HI, 98. "Qa-i^ep oi oTrXirat, ovtoh 
 Se Kai oi TreXrao-rat. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 5, 12. So (j>aivovTai Se, ThuC. 
 I, 11 ; and iyiyvovTo Se', Aeschin. Cor. § 69. 
 
 Eelative Clauses expressing a Purpose, Result, &c. 
 
 § 65, 1. The relative is used with the Future In- 
 dicative to denote a purpose or object, E. g. 
 
 Upea^fiav Se Tre'/zTreti^, tJth ravT epel /cat Trape'orat roif Trpa- 
 ypacrivy and to send an embassy to say these things, and to be present at 
 the transaction. Dem. 01. I, 10, 1. <Prjp\ 8fj delv rjpds npos OtTTa- 
 Xoi/s Trpeo-jSeiav Tre'/xTreti/, ^ tovs pev StSci^ei TaiiTa, tovs Se irapo 
 ^vv€l. lb. U, 21, 10. *ESo^e Ta drjp(p TpidKOVTa dvbpas iXeadai, o\ 
 TOVS naTpiovs vopovs ^vyypd^ovaiy Ka$* ovs 7ro\iT€V(rovai. 
 Xen. Hell. 11, 3, 2. Ov ydp tori pot xpw^'^^i dnoOtv fKTiiroiyfor I 
 have no money to pay thejine with. Plat. ApoL 37 C. 
 
138 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 65, 1. 
 
 V- 
 
 The antecedent of the relative, in this case, may be either definite 
 or indefinite ; but the negative particle is regularly /*^, as in final 
 clauses (§ 43, N. 2). 
 
 Remark. "Ottws as a relative is sometimes used in this construc- 
 tion in a way which illustrates its use as a final particle. (See § 45, 
 Rem.) E. g. 
 
 UoUe be ovra oiccoff rav aau evbefjaei firjbev^ and act so that there 
 shall be nothing wanting on your part ; lit. act in that way by which, 
 &C. Hdt. Vn, 18. To ovT(Oi iiriaraadat. avSpcanaiv aWcav Trpoararfv 
 (IV OTTOiS e^ovai ndvra ra eVtriJfieta, . . . tovto BavixatTTov e^aii/CTO, 
 i. e. in such a way that they shall have, &c. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 7. So 
 Cyr. IT, 4, 31. 
 
 Note. 1 . (a.) The Future Indicative is the only form regularly 
 used in prose after the relative in this sense. It is retained even 
 after secondary tenses, seldom being changed to the Future Opta- 
 tive, which would here be expected by § 31, 2, and by the analogy 
 of clauses with oitcds (§ 45). The F'uture Optative, however, is 
 found in Soph. O. T. 79G, f^cuyoi/ €v6a fxr)noT oyfroifiTju oveibr},—- 
 and probably in Plat. Rep. Ill, 416 C, <f>aiT) av m hdv koL ras oIkt)- 
 a-fis Koi Tf)v aK\r]v ovfTiav ToiavTTju avrois irapaa-K^vdaaaOm, rJTis prjTe 
 Tovs (f>v\aKas as dpiarovs dvai nava-oi avrovsj KOKOvpyelv t€ pn 
 en a pot irepi tovs aWovs iroXiras. 
 
 (b.) When, however, this Future is quoted indirectly after a past 
 tense, or depends upon a clause expressing a past purpose (which 
 is equivalent to standing in indirect discourse, § 26, N. 1), it is 
 sometimes changed to the Future Optative, like any other Future 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 *Eo-/co7rfi OTTO)? tfToiTO avT(o ooTis ^avrd re yrjpoTpo(j)r)<Toi^ kqi 
 TfXfVTijaavTa ddyjrot avrov. IsAE. de. Menecl. Her. § 10. AipfOevret 
 e(^' <u T€ ^vyypdyjrai vopovs, Kaff ovarivas TroXiTevaoiifTO, having 
 been chosen with the condition that they should compile the laws by which 
 they were to govern. Xen. Hell. II, 3, 11. (This is a sort of indirect 
 
 Quotation of the sentence which appears in its direct form in Hell. 
 [, 3, 2, the example under § 65, 1.) 
 
 Note 2. In Homer, the Future Indicative is sometimes use<l 
 in this sense ; as in Od. XIV, 333, fnaprias, ot di} piv ntp-^ov 
 a-iv. Sometimes the Optative with #cf, as an apodosis, takes 
 the place of the Future ; as in Od. IV, 167, oXXoi oX k€v d\d\' 
 Koifv. The more common Epic construction is, however, the 
 Subjunctive (generally with k€ joined to the relative) after 
 primary tenses, and the Optative (Present or Aorist, never 
 Future), without k€, after secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 *EXicof S* Irjrrjp €7ripda<T€Taty »;d' e7ri6fj(r€i 
 
 ^PH^Xi ^ '^^^ iravarja-i p,€\aivd(i)v odwdav. H. IV| 191* 
 
 I, 
 
 { 
 
 § 65, 1.] relative clauses expressing a purtose. 139 
 
 *AXX* ayerf , kKtjtovs orpvvopev, ot K€ rdxiora 
 
 "EXdaxr* €S kKktItjv Ili^Xijiadfo) 'A;(tX^o5. II. IX, 165. 
 
 ''E/cdoTC, Koi Tipriv dnoTivepev rju rtv* coi/cci^, 
 
 *H T€ Koi eaaopfi/OKTi per* ddavdroia-i neXrjTai, H. HI, 459. 
 
 "AyyfXov rjKav-, os dyyeiXeie yvvaiKi. Od. XV, 458. 
 
 HaTmivfv 5* dva nvpyov 'A;(at«i/, €i tii/' iSotro 
 
 'Hyc/ioVcoj/, OS Tis ot dpfju irdpniaiu dpvvai. H. XH, 332. 
 
 Remark. It will be noticed that the earlier Greek here agreoi 
 with the Latin (in using the Subjunctive and Optative), while the 
 Attic Greek differs from the Latin by using the more vivid Future 
 Indicative. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) The Attic Greek allows the Subiunctive in such 
 phrases as f^«t o ti eTiri/, he has something to say; where the irregu- 
 larity seems to be caused by the analogy of the common expression 
 ovK fx^i o TL (or Tt) et7ri7, equivalent to ovk olbev o ri eiTr^, he knows 
 not what he shall say^ which contains an indirect question (§ 71). 
 E. g. 
 
 TotoCroi/ i6os Tvapiho(Tav, wore . . . eKarepovs ex^iv c^* as ^iXon- 
 u.rj6a)(riu, that both may have things in which they may glory. Isoc. 
 Pan. p. 49 C. § 44. (Here there is no indirect question, for the 
 meaning is not that they may know in what they are to glory. See 
 note added to Felton's Isocrates, p. 135.) Ovdev en SioiVci avra, 
 fav povov €X7l o'"^ 8iaX«yi/rai, if only he shall have some one to talk 
 with. Plat. Symp. 194 D. To7s peXXovaiu e^eiv o ti ela-cfyepaxriv. 
 Xen. Oecon. VH, 20. (Compare dwopeis on Xeyjjs and cvTropets 
 o Ti Xeyrjs in the same sentence. Plat. Ion. 535 B.) 
 
 (fe.) The Present or Aorist Optative very rarely occurs in Attic 
 GrecK after a past tense, but more frequently after another Opta- 
 tive. E. g. 
 
 "Avbpa ovSeV evroTrov {6pS)v)y ovx oorty apKea-eicv, ov8 oarit 
 voaov KapvovTi (rvXXa/Soiro, i. e. when I saw no one there to assist 
 me, &c. Soph. Pliil. 281. Tovipov de ttoitjttjv av ovx evpots en ^tjtS>v 
 &v, Boris pripua yevvalov XaKoi, i. e. a poet to speak a noble word. 
 Arist. Ran. 96. (Yet in vs. 98 we have the regular ocrns (pdey^e- 
 rat, depending on the same ovk hv €vpois.) So in Plat. Rep. HI, 
 398 Bjts pi pal TO KoiXeyoi, depending on XPW^^°^ ""• '^fl ^P^' 
 Tepa iroXei ovbev av evbei^aiTO ToaovTov ovde Troirjaeiev, v(f)' ov ireiaBev 
 TesTivas *EXXrfvo>v eKeiva 7rpo€tcr^€,i. e. nothing so great, that you 
 would be persuaded by it to sacrifice any of the Greeks to him,. Dem. 
 PhU. H, 67, 20. 
 
 Note 4. *Q.s as a relative, in the sense of by which (with an 
 antecedent like anything understood), is sometimes followed by an 
 Optative with av in apodosis, expressing a purpose or object. E. g. 
 
 *Qs fiev av etiroiTe biKaiovs Xoyovs Ka\ XeyovTOS aXXov (rvveirjTtf 
 apieivov ^iXiTTTTOV napeaKevaadej as be KaXwatT* &v eKeivov irpoT' 
 
140 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 65, 1. 
 
 Tdv ravra ecf} &i/ fOTt vvv, TravriKS)? dpyws ?XfTf , !• C as to means hy 
 which you could make Just speeches^ &fc.y you are better prepared than 
 Philip ; but as to anything by which you could prevent him from doing 
 what he i.s note about, you are tvholly inactive. Dem. Phil. II, 66, 15. 
 So at the end of tlie same oration, as d' av i^fraaddrj /idXior' 
 aKpifioos, fJiTf yivuiTo, i. c. Jnay nothing come iipon us by which the truth 
 oj' what I say would be thoroughly tested. 
 
 Note 5. The relative with any tense of the Indicative, or 
 even with the Optative and av, can be used to denote a result j 
 where ware might have been expected. (§ 65, 3). This 
 occurs chiefly after negatives, or interrogatives implying a 
 negative. E. g. 
 
 Ttff ovras fvfjBrjs cariu v/Mavy oams ayvoei rov €KflSeu Trokffxov 
 Bfvpo rj^oura, av upeXijcroififu ; i. e. who of you is so simple as not to 
 hnowy &c. ? Dem. 01. I, 13, 16. (Here wore ayvotiv might have 
 been used.) Tty ouro) Tr6pp<a tSuv nokiTiKoijv rfv npaypdrtov, oortr ovk 
 iyyvs TjuayKdaOrj yeveadai tcoi/ avp<pop(i>u ; Isoc. Pan. p. 64 B. 
 § 113. TtV ovTCii padvfios foriv^ oaris ov pfTaaxElv ^ov\r}a'€Tai 
 ravrrjs rrjs arpaTfias ; lb. p. 79 D. § 185. 0118615 au yivovro ourox 
 abafiavTivoiy os av fi(lv€i€v iv rrj diKaioavinj, no one would ever be- 
 come so adamantine that he would remain firm in Justice. Plat. Rep. 
 H, 360 B. 
 
 2. *E(t>* a or c<^* «r«, on condition that, which is commonly 
 followed by the Infinitive (§ 99), sometimes takes the Future 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 tTTi TOVT(o oe vire^iOTapai tt]s apxris, €(p <pT€ vn ovOfvos vfitiou 
 ap^opai, I withdraw upon this condition, that I shall be ruled, &c. 
 Hdt. Ill, 83. TouroKTi 8' <ov ttiovvos foDV Karrjyaye, fV wre oi arroyo- 
 voi airrov ipo(f)dvTai ratv $€civ eaovrai. IIdt. VII, 153. Kat rj;y 
 "BoidiTlav t^eXiTTov *K6rjva1oi naaau, (rirovdas Troirja-dfJLevoi i^ co tovs 
 avbpai KOfiiovvrai. THUC. I, 113. Svvf^rjcrav 6<^' o>rf €^ia(riu 
 fK neXoTrowfjaov imoaTropdot Koi fxridiiroTf €7rt/iij<roi'Tat avr^s- Id. 
 I, 103. 
 
 It will be noticed here (as in Note 1) that the Future Indicative 
 generally remains unchanged even ailer a secondary tense. 
 
 3. flare (sometimes «?), so that, so as, is usually 
 followed by the Infinitive. (See § 98.) But when the 
 action of the verb expressing the result after doo-re is 
 viewed chiefly as an independent fact, and not merely 
 as a result, the Indicative can be used. 
 
 The Infinitive is sometimes used even here, when the Indic- 
 
 § 65, 4.] CAUSAL relative sentences. 
 
 141 
 
 ative would seem more natural ; and it often makes quite ag 
 little difference which of the two is used, as it does in English 
 whether we say some are so strange as not to be ashamed {ovt«m 
 aroTToi (oa-Tf ovk alaxvveadai, Dem. F. L. 439, 29), or some are so 
 strange that they are not ashamed (^coare ovk aicrxvi'oi/rai). Here, 
 although both expressions have the same general meaning, the 
 former expresses the result merely as a result, while the latter 
 expresses it also (and more distinctly) as an independent fact. 
 E.g. 
 
 OvTws dyvapoucos exere, wart eXrr i^€T€ avra XRV^"*"^ yevriafaOatj 
 K.T.X. are you so senseless that you expect, &c. Dem. 01. II, 25, 19. 
 (Here ojare cXTri^eij^, so senseless as to expect, would merely make 
 the /ac< of their expecting less prominent.) Ovtohs ypiv Sokci iravros 
 a^ia €Lvat, cooYe ndprcs to KaTaXinelv avrd paXiara ^€vyop€v , so 
 that we all especially avoid, &c. Xex. Mem. II, 2, 3. Ovxh'^ev' Sxrd' 
 ol "EWrjvfs i(\>p6vTi^ov. Id. An. II, 3, 25. Eif rovr' a7rX;;<m'af 
 TjXdov, (offT OVK f^TjpKeaev avTois txeiv t^v Kara yrjv dpxrjv, aXXu 
 Ka\ TTjv Kara OdXarrau bvvaynv ovt(os CTredvprjaav Xalie'iv, worf tovs 
 avpfxdxovs tovs rjfieTfpovs dfjiiO'Taa'aif. Isoc. Panath. p. 254 A. 
 § 103. So after as, § 98, 2, N. 1 : Ovtch 8q rt kkftPT) tycveTo, as koI 
 irdvTfS ofEWrfVis ''Pobanios Tovpopa i^ipaQov, i. Q. so that all the 
 Greeks came to know well the name of Rhodopis. Hdt. H, 135. 
 
 Note. As Cxn-e in this construction has no effect whatever upon 
 the mood of the verb, it may be followed by any construction that 
 would be allowed in an independent sentence. (See § 59, N. 1.) 
 It may thus take an Optative or Indicative in apodosis with av, or 
 even an Imperative. E. g. 
 
 yvofiT)] 
 
 <TT€V€. Id. El. 1172. So with ov fifj and the Subjunctive (89, 1) ; 
 ovToiS iniTfOvprfKa aKOvaai, CxTTt . . , ov pr] aov d7ro\€i<f)6a. Plat 
 Phaedr. 227 D. 
 
 4. The relative has sometimes a causal signification, being 
 equivalent to or*, because, and a personal pronoun or demon- 
 strative word. The verb is in the Indicative, as in ordinary 
 causal sentences (§ 81, 1). E. g. 
 
 eavpa(TT6v TTOifty, OS ripiv ovbh blbas, you do a strange thing in 
 giving us nothing (like oti av ovbev bidas). Xen. Mem. II, 7, 13. 
 Ao^as dpadfjs civai, os - . . € KeXeve , having seemed to be unlearned, 
 because he commanded, &c. Hdt. I, 33. Trjv pr)Ttpa epuKdpiCov, otav 
 T(Kvo)v €KVpr)(r€ (hke on Toiav). Id. I, 31. Ev8aip(ov (^aivero, as 
 dbfas Ka\ yevvaias cTeXevra, i. c. because he died so fearlessly and 
 nobly (wv being e(iu!valeut to oti ovTas). Plat. Phaed. 58 E. 
 
142 RELATIVE AND TEMPORA^ SENTENCES. [§ 65, 4. 
 
 TaXar7ra>pos ^l ^ M^rf BeoX Trarp^oi «Vi fi^fflepd.l e. since you 
 have no ancestral Sods! &c. Plat, ^uthyd. 302 B. (See Remark.) 
 Hws hv dpOS^i e>oO KaTayiyv<i>aKOiT€, ^ t6 irapanau npos tovtovl jxrideu 
 avtx^6\ai.6v i<mv ; i. e. since I have no contract at all, &c. Dem. 
 Apat. 903, 22. So Arist. Ran. 1459. 
 
 Remark. The ordinary negative particle of a causal relative 
 sentence is oi, as in the first example above. (See §81.) iiut it a 
 conditional force is combined with the causal, pr) can be used. ^ Ihus 
 in the last examples above, in which pr) is used, © pt) (9foi ctaii/ 
 (besides its causal force) implies if, as it appears, yon are icithont 
 ancestral Gods; and J pr^hiv cVrt., if, as it appears, I have no con- 
 tract. The same combination of a causal and a conditional force is 
 seen in the Latin siquidem. 
 
 Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before 
 
 that. 
 
 A. "Eo,?, "Eo-rf,*'Axpt, M^'xpt, EiVoKf, "Oc^pa, Until. 
 
 § 66. 1. When 60)9. 6(7X6, axpt, f^^xRh and ocfipa, 
 until, refer to a definite point of past time, at which the 
 action of the verb actually took place, they take the 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 Nnvoi. ndXiu, e<o, en?i\enu ,k 7roTap6u, I sicam on again, until I 
 came to a river. Od. VII, 280. Uivfi, €<os ideppriv avrov ap<i>i^a(Ta 
 ch\6^ oti/ou. Eur. Ale. 758. Swdpov am6vT€s, tart €m rais aKrjvais 
 t^LTxEN. Cyr. VII, 5, 6. (So An^ III 4 49^ Kal ra.ra 
 
 •Qff ah epmKai avBpas err^x'TO Tv8/os vl6,, o(t>pa fivajS^^ €rrf 0yf v. 
 11. X, 488. 'Hpx V^''' o^P a(i>Uovro Kara arparov, jj piv avwyci. 
 IL Xin, 329. 'Hifi/, o^pa ph^ aireos iKf ro. Od. V, 57. 
 
 Note 1. "Axp^ ot and p.expi ol are used in the same sense as 
 axpi and p€xpi" E. g. 
 
 T^. 8.^ raDra npa^dm-<ou HxP^ oZ oh. 6 Uyo, hpf^oT.ol^ovo, 
 
 lW"EXXT,.a. aTreXO^Taro hovX.la,, Sxrr' .Xcv^cpouj ct^at /x^xpt ov 
 ndKiu alrol alrovs ,car€8ot.Xo)(ra,/To. PlaT. Menex. 245 A. 
 
 Note 2. Herodotus uses cs o or is at, unt'd, like eo)f, with the 
 Indicative. E. g. > « ' 
 
 *Air€b€Upvaau naiba irarphs «acrrov iSvra, is o aireBtiav diraaat 
 tivrds. Hdt. U, 143. 'Es oZ At'x^J aveCpe. I, 67. 
 
 2. When these particles refer to the future, they are 
 
 t 
 
 § 66, 3.] "Ews, ETC. WITH INDIC, SUBJ., AND OPTATIVE. 143 
 
 loined with av or fce and take the Snbjnnctive, if the 
 leading verb is primary. (See § 61, 3.) But if such 
 clauses depend upon an Optative in protasis or apodosis, 
 or m a wish, they usuaUy take the Optative (without 
 iv) by assimilation. (See § 61, 4.) E. g. 
 
 * MaxniTopm aZBi piv<ov, «u,s Ke tAoj itoXipoco k i x e i « , untU I shall 
 come to an end of the war. II. Ill, 291. ^Ea,. b' hu oZu npos rovnapov 
 roc iKpdOvs, Ix ^'^'^^'S«- Soph. O. T. 834. '^max^s, ecrr av Ka. 
 rXL^k npoafAdv^. ^oaU untU you shaU learn, &c. Aesch. Prom. 
 
 24. *A\\hpiv, 5#a Ki rot p.\ir,8ia olvou e'vc/Ko,, hutwaU, untd 1 
 shall bring, &c. H. VI, 258. So 6(l>p hv rtacoaiu, U. I, 509. 
 
 Km rb u€v hv i^oKt'K^ouv, rh U itaKiv iyypd(i>oi€U, ecos o ri /xoXiora 
 Mp<i>rr.ca ^er, ^eoc^tXi} nocr]aecau, until they should^ make, ^ &c. 
 Flat. Rep. VI, 501 C. Ei hi irdw <nrovbaCoL (t>ay€iv, €i7roi/i av ori 
 napa rals yvvai^lv ecmv, eW TrapareivaipL rovrov,i. e. I would 
 tell him this, until I put him to torture. Aen. i^yr. 1, 6, ii. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen by the examples, that the clause ailer 
 c-cosand other particles signifying tznfiZ sometimes imphes a future 
 purpose or object, the attainment of which is desired. When such a 
 sentence, implying a purpose or object which would have been 
 originally expressed by a Subjunctive, depends upon a past tense, 
 I lenerally t^akes the "Optative (§ 31, 1) ; but t^^ Subjunctive also 
 mfy be ied, in order to retain the mood m which the p^pose 
 would have been originally conceived (as in final clauses, § 44, 2). 
 For the general principle, see § 77. E. g. 
 
 pova, they made a truce, {to continue) untU what had been said should 
 I announced at Sparta. "Kex. Hell. 2, 20. (Here co,. av anj 
 y,\en might have been used; as m Thuc. I, 90, «^^"'"' ([^^ 
 lpea^€is)imax^lv, Z<.s &v rb r«xo? «a,.6». atpcocriv.) See § 77, 1, rf. 
 Note 2. Homer uses .U 5 k. (or «VokO, ^ritiUvnth the Sub- 
 junctive, as Herodotus uses is 5 with the Indicative (§ 66 1, N. 2) 
 is pipv^r,. .Is 5 K.V &arv piya Up^dpoLo eXcop.v, 1^- H- 332. Els o 
 K€ may take the Optative, retaining « ; as in 11. AV , 70 
 
 Note 3. "Av is sometimes omitted after ^ays, &c. (including Trptv, 
 § 67, 1) when they take the Subjunctive, as in common protasis 
 Ld in relative sentences (§ 50, 1, N. 8; § 63, 1);, after /xexptancl 
 npiv this occurs even in Attic prose. Thus car cya> /zoXo,, bOPH. 
 Aj 1183; pixp^ ttXov. yiinjrac, Thuc. I, 137: see Tiiuc. IV, 16; 
 Aeschin. Cor. § 60. 
 
 3. When the clause introduced by eo)?, to.., until, 
 refers to a result which was not attained in past time in 
 consequence of the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes 
 a secondary tense of the Indicative. (See §63, 2.) E.g. 
 
144 
 
 KELATIVE A.ND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 66, 3. 
 
 *H5c'a)S av TovTto en BifXfyo^rjv, €u>s avrto rrju tov *Afi(^lovos airt- 
 BfOKa prjaiu dvrl r^s tov ZtjOov, I should (jladly have continued io talk 
 with him, until I had given him, &c. Plat. Gorg. 50G B. OU tv> 
 tiravofiTjv, €a>s dTrerre ipddrjv ttjs (ro(j)Las Tavrrjo-i. W. Crat. 396 
 *E7rio-;(U)i/ av, ecos oi TrXelaroi ribv elcjOorayv yvoiprjv drre (f)!) vavTO ^ 
 .... rjavxiav av rjyov, i. e. / should have ivaited until most of the regu- 
 lar speakers had declared their opinion, &c. Dem. Phil. I, § 1. (For 
 av here, see § 42, 3.) 
 
 The leading verb must be an Indicative implying the non-fulfil- 
 ment of a condition. 
 
 4. When the clause introduced by eo)?, &c., until^ de- 
 pends upon a verb denoting a customary action or a 
 general truths and refers indefinitely to any one of a 
 series of occasions, it takes av and the Subjmictive after 
 primary tenses, and the simple Optative after secondary 
 tenses. (See § 62.) E. g. 
 
 *A S* ai/ davvraKTa rj, dvnyKrj ravra dfl Trpdyfxara irapix^iv, tcoy au 
 Xa>pav Xa3r;, theif niust always male trouble, until they are put in 
 order. Xkn. Cyr. IV, 5, 37. *07rore (opa eXr) dpiarov, dvififvfv av- 
 roi/i €0T€ ffKJydyotev ti, wff fMr] ^ov\ip.iu>ev. lb. VIII, 1, 44. Ilfpi- 
 (fM(vofi(v oZv €Kd(TTOT€, cu>£ dvoixOdf} TO 8e(Tp(OTf)pLov, wc limited 
 everq day, until the prison was opened. Plat. Phaed. 59 D. (This 
 may mean until the prison should be opened; § 66, 2, N 1.) 
 
 Note. "Av is sometimes omitted after ciwf, &c. and irpiv, when 
 they take the Subjunctive in this sense, as well as in the other con- 
 struction (§ 6G, 2, N. 3) ; as tv tw cPpovelv yap fir)8iv rySiorroff ^los^ 
 €0)? TO xaip€iv Ka\ ro Xvirda-Oai pd6r]S, StUMi. Aj. o55. So o</)/)a tc- 
 XcVo-i;, 11. I, 82; and c'y ov dno6dvo)ai, Uirr. Ill, 31. 
 
 Remark. When eas and o(ppa mean so long as, they are rela- 
 tives, and are included under §§ 58-64. ''0(f)pa in all its senses is 
 confined to Epic and Lyric poetry. (See § 43, N. 1.) 
 
 B. Up IV J Until J Before that. 
 
 § 67. lip IV, before, before that, until, besides taking the 
 Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, on the same principles 
 with c«ff, &c (§ 66), may also take the Infinitive (§ 106). 
 The question of choice between the Infinitive and the finite 
 moods generally depends on the nature of the leading clause. 
 
 Upiv regularly takes the Subjunctive and Optative (when 
 they are allowed) only if the leading clause is negative or 
 
 § 67, 2.] 
 
 constructions after npiV. 
 
 145 
 
 interrogative with a negative implied ; very seldom if that ii 
 affirmative. It takes the Indicative after both negative and 
 affirmative clauses, but chiefly after negatives. 
 
 In Homer the Infinitive is the mood regularly used with 
 TrpiV, after both affirmative and negative clauses; in Attic 
 Greek it is regularly used after affirmatives, and seldom after 
 negatives. 
 
 1. The Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after 
 irplv follow the rules already given for em, &c. (§ Q^^- 
 E.g. 
 
 (Indic. § 66, 1.) OvK riv dXe^qp! ovbev, d\U (^ap/iaKo)./ xp€iq 
 KaTetTKiWovTO, irplv y €yJ> acptdLU idei^a Kpdaea ^jnicou aK€<rpaTu>v, 
 unfd I showed them, &c. Aesch. Prom. 481. UdXiv TovTOTepv<o» 
 ovK inav?,Ke, nplv . . . . AotSdp^cr. pd\' dv diKjj. Plat. Phaedr. 
 266 A Oi-< h^iioaav vfcor^poj/ ti noulv is avrhv, irpiv y€ dr} avTOn 
 
 XoKiPOV Ila^Adff ijvty 
 6 pa. Euii. Med. 1173. 
 
 (Subj. and Opt. § 66, 2.) OC k^ ae ey^ X/vto (^Ibaipova), jrpiif^ 
 ra KaXios tov aloiva TrvOapai. Udt. I, 32. Ovde 
 
 So irp\v e^fX<,^(r«ei/, depending on a protasis (fi prjavtiri)^ rLAT. 
 Rep. VII, 515 E. "OUio pl)n<o, irplv pddoip 6i koi nakiv yvaprjv 
 a€ToiaeiS. SoPH. Phil. 961. (Hpiv alter Opt. in wush.) ATn/yopruf 
 un6.Va iSdXXetv, Trpl. Kvpos e p7r\v<r0^ ir) Br^pC^v, untd Cyrus should 
 be safisjied. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 14. (§ 66, 2, N. 1.) ^ ^ 
 
 (Indic. §66,3.) 'ExPV^ ovv tovs oKXovs ph ^porfpov rrtpi rtov 
 6uo\oyovp€va>v iTvp^ov\€V^iv, irplv ir^pX t^v dp(l>ia^r,rovpeva>v rjpas 
 fdida^av, they ought not to have given advice, Sfc, until tliey tiaa 
 instructed us, &c. Isoc Paneg. p. 44 C. § 19. 
 
 (Subj. and Opt. § 66, 4.) 'Op^ai tovs Trpea^urcpovf oi irpoaBtv 
 dmovras yaarpos €V€Ka, irp\v av dcp^aiv ol apxovres. Xen. ^}J- ^y 
 2, 8. Ov yap npoT^pov KaTr)yopos Trapa toIs aKovovaiv lax^fi, npiv av 
 6 <h€vy<0V dbvvarr)<Tri ras npo€iprjp€vai ahlas diroXyaaadcu, ABS- 
 cmN. F. L. § 2. Oibapde^v d(t>i€<Tav, irplv Taoa^eic^ avroiS api- 
 arov, before they had placed before them. Xen. An. IV, 5, 30. 
 
 (Subj. without riv. § 66, 2, N. 3.) M^ arivaC^, '^P'IJ'^?V^ ^^^' 
 FHl. 917. So Od. X, 1 75 ; Udt. I, 136 ; Plat. Phaed. 62 C. 
 
 2 For irpiv with the Infinitive, see § 106. 
 
 7 ' 
 
146 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPOS AL SENTENCES. [§ 67. 
 
 § 68, 3.] 
 
 I! 
 
 Note 1. In Homer, rrplu Is not found with the Indicative, nplv 
 y oT€ taking its place ; a few cases occur of the Subjunctive (with- 
 out av) and the Optative ; but the most common Homeric construc- 
 tion, in sentences of aU kinds, is that with the Infinitive (§ lOG). 
 E. g. 
 
 "HfifO* cLTvCofKvai, aavibfs 5' fX^v cv dpapvlat, irpiv y ore ^jieaos 
 vios dno fifydpoio KaXeaaev, i. e. before the time when, &c. Od. XXHI, 
 43. So II. IX., 588 ; XU, 437. *Q (^I'Xoi, ov ydpira Karahvaoiifff axw- 
 fifvolirfp fls *Ai8ao dopovsj "irpiv fiopaipov ^fiap eireXOrj. Od. X, 175. 
 Oi/K €d(\€V <^(i>y€ii' irplv ne tprjaair" "A^iX^os. H. XXI, 580. IIpiv 
 y oT av with the Subjunctive is found in Od. II, 374, and IV, 477. 
 
 Note 2. nplv with the Infinitive after negative sentences is most 
 common in Homer (Note 1), rare in the Attic poets, and again more 
 frequent in Attic prose. (See Kruger, Vol. H, p. 258.) For ex- 
 amples see § 106. 
 
 Examples of the Subjunctive or Optative with irpiv aft^er affirma- 
 tive sentences are very rare. One occurs in Isoc. Paneg. p. 44 A, 
 § 16; oo-Tiff ovv oierat tovs aWovs Koivfj ri irpd^fiv dyaBbv, nplv av 
 roifs »rpo€OT<»raff aiir^ StaXXd^i;, "Kiav dfl-Xoij tx*** 
 
 Note 3. Upiv rj, irportpov rj (priusquam) , and irpoaOev rj may be 
 used in the same constructions as nplv, Uplv rj is especially common 
 in Herodotus. E. g. 
 
 Ov yap ht) irpoTfpov dnaviarr], irpXv rj <T(l>€as VTroYftpiovr eVoi^- 
 o-aro. Hdt. VI, 45. So Thuc. VI, 61. 'ASt^c* dvantiedpevos 
 irpiv fj arpf*c€0)S eKfidOrj. Hdt. VH, 10. ECx^to ^r^b^ixiav ol ayvrv- 
 Xir]v TOiavTTjv yeveaOaiy fj fiLV iravafi KaraaTpi^aaOai. Tr}V Evpa)TTr)v, 
 
 TTpOTfpOV fj in\ T€pfUl(Ti ToItTl (KflvTJS y € V T] T a I - Id. \ JJ, 54. 
 
 Uporepov rj with Indie, Plat. Phaedr. 232 E. UpoaOev fj ay 
 t(balvov, Tovr eKrjpvxBrj- ^OPU. O. T. 736. 'AneKpivaro OTiirpo- 
 aOfv av dnoBdvotcv ^ to. OTrXa irapadoirjaav , that they would die 
 before they would give up their arms. Xen. An. U, 1, 10. (See 
 
 § 66, 2.) 
 
 For examples of the Infinitive after all these expressions, see 
 § 106. Even voTepov rj is found with the Infinitive. 
 
 Note 4. Uplv or nph fj is very often preceded by irpoT^pov, 
 irpoaOev, irdpos, or another nplv (used as an adverb), in the leading 
 clause. E. g. 
 
 Ov nporepov npos fifids tov nokfp.ov (^€(l)rjvavy irplv fv6p.i(rav, 
 K.T.X. Xen. An. Ill, 1, 16. Ov toIuw dnoKpivov^i irportpov, 
 np\v av irvBo)fiai. Plat. Euthyd. 295 C. Kai ov irpoadfv eamiaav, 
 vplv fj rrpos to7s ire^ols rav ^Aaavplcov tyivovro, Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 23. 
 
 For examples with the Infinitive, see § 106. 
 
 Note 5. When nplv appears to be followed by a primary tense 
 of the Indicative, it is an adverb qualifying the verb. E. g. 
 
 Tfiv S* cy« ov Xvo-o)* nplv fiiv /cat yrjpas cTreta-tv, i. e. sooner 
 thaU old age come upon her. II. I, 29. 
 
 indikect discoursb. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 147 
 
 Indirect Discourse, including Indirect QuotatiOxSS 
 
 AND Questions. 
 
 § 68. 1. The words or thoughts of any person may 
 be quoted either directly or indirectly, 
 
 A direct quotation is one which gives the exact words 
 of the original speaker or writer. 
 
 An mdirect quotation is one in which the words of 
 the original speaker conform to the construction of 
 the sentence in which they are quoted. Thus the ex- 
 pression ravra ^ovXofiav may be quoted either directly, 
 as Xeyet w '* ravra ^oiXofiat" or indirectly, as Xeyec rt? 
 in. radra fiovXeTav or Xeyet Tt9 ravra ^oiXeaOai, some 
 one says that he wishes for these. 
 
 2. Indkect quotations may be introduced by Sn or 
 c^9 (negatively Stl ov, m oi) or by the Infinitive, as in 
 the example given above ; sometimes also by the I'arti- 
 ciple (§ 73, 2). 
 
 3 Indirect questions follow the same rules as indirect 
 quotations, in regard to their moods and tenses. (For 
 examples see § 70.) 
 
 Note. The term indirect discourse must be understood to 
 apply to all clauses which express indirectly the words op 
 thoughts of any person (those of the speaker himse f a^ well 
 as those of another), after verbs which imply thought or the 
 expression of thought {verba sentiendi et declarandi), and even 
 after such expressions as d^Xdv iarcv, craves iariv, &c. 
 
 The term may be further applied to any .i^^ dependent 
 clause in any sentence, which indirectly expresses the thought 
 of any other person than the speaker (or past thoughts ot the 
 speaker himself), even when the preceding clauses are not in 
 indirect discourse. (See § 77.) 
 

 148 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 69, 1. 
 
 General Principles of Indirect Discourse. 
 
 Remark. The following are the general principles of in- 
 direct discourse, the application of which to particular cases is 
 shown in §§ 70 - 77. 
 
 § 69. 1. In indirect quotations after on or «? and 
 in indirect questions, after primary tenses, each verb 
 retains both the mood and the tense of the direct dis- 
 course, no change being made except (when necessary) 
 in the person of the verb. 
 
 After secondary tenses, each primary tense of the 
 Indicative and each Subjunctive of the direct discourse 
 may be either changed to the same tense of the Opta- 
 tive or retained in its original mood and tense. The 
 Imperfect and Pluperfect, having no tenses in the Opta- 
 tive, are regularly retained in the Indicative. (See, 
 however, § 70, Note 1, 6.) The Aorist Indicative re- 
 mains unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause 
 of the direct discourse (§ 74, 2) ; but it may be changed 
 to the Optative, like the primary tenses, when it be- 
 longs to the leading clause (§ 70, 2). The Indicative 
 with av belongs under § 69, 2. 
 
 2. All secondary tenses of the Indicative implying 
 non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 49, 2), and all Opta- 
 tives (with or without ai'), are retained without change 
 in either mood or tense, after both primary and second- 
 ary tenses. 
 
 3. When, however, the verb on which the quotation 
 depends is followed by the Infinitive or Participle, the 
 leading verb of the quotation is changed to the corre- 
 sponding tense of the Infinitive or Participle, after both 
 primary and secondary tenses (av being retained when 
 there is one), and the dependent verbs follow the pre- 
 ceding rules. (See § 73.) 
 
 SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
 
 149 
 
 S 70, 1.] 
 
 4. The adverb av is never joined with a verb in in- 
 direct discourse, unless it stood also in the direct form : 
 on the other hand, av is never omitted with a verb in 
 indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form. 
 When av is joined to a relative word or particle before 
 a Subjunctive in the direct discourse, it is regularly 
 dropped when the Subjunctive is changed to the 
 Optative in indirect discourse. (See, however, § 74, 1, 
 N. 2.) 
 
 5. The indirect discourse regularly retains the same 
 negative particle which would be used in the direct 
 form. But the Infinitive and Participle occasionally 
 take M in indirect quotation, where oi would be used 
 in direct discourse. See examples under § 73. 
 
 Simple Sentences in Indirect Quotations after on or m 
 
 and in Indirect Questions. 
 
 § 70. When the direct discourse is a simple sentence, 
 the verb of which stands in any tense of the Indicative 
 (without ai/), the principle of § 69, 1, gives the follow- 
 ing rules for indirect quotations after otl or m and 
 for indirect questions : — 
 
 1. After primary tenses the verb stands in the In- 
 dicative, in the tense used in the direct discourse. 
 E.g. 
 
 Myti Znyp&tb 1 1, lie says thai he is writing; X^'yft oTi 'ypa^^*"* 
 hesays that he was writing ; X«Vt 5r* ye'ypa^^fv, Assays fAoi /le /icw 
 wntten; Uyn 5ri e'yfypa<^€i, he says that he had written; X.yet 
 oTieypa^fVjhe says that he wrote ; Xiyfi otl ypay\t€i, he says tnai 
 
 he shall write, ^ ^ rr.* i 
 
 A/y« yap i. oi8.V cVrtv aStKcircpov (/)w^ Aeschin. TimarcK 
 
 5 125. Ouyap hv roCro y etrro^, m eXaOev. Id. I. L. § I'^l O^O). 
 Jl5 8* icrrf, oTt TrXtlcrrov diaipepd 4>nM '^«» (rvKofavria. lb. § 140 
 
 (153). 'AXX* cVi/oeii/ xpn ^o^^-^ f*«^»'' v^^^^x' »" ^T^T*!'*! -^ • 
 
 Ant. 61. Kol raiO' a>s dKrjOn X « y a, , Ka) on o0re ebodrj n ti?<?>o« €P 
 
150 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 70, 1 
 
 ^Tracrt n\€iovs t ey^vovro twu yjrTj<f>i(rafjL(va)v, yLaprvpai vfiiv na^H^O' 
 fiaiy I will bring witnesses to show that, &c. Dem. Eubul. 1303, 2. 
 
 *Epa>Ta TL jSouXowat, he asks what they want; ipa>Tq. ri rroirja-ov 
 iriVy he asks what they ivill do. 'EpcoTwi^rey fl Xrjarai elatv^ asking 
 whether they are pirates. Thuc. I, 5. Eu/3oiis • S>v 6' e^Tiaarev^ 
 ovK €xa> Xeyeiv. SoPii. Trach. 401. Ei ^t p-irovrjat is Koi ^wtp* 
 yd(T€i (TKOTTfi. Id. Ant. 41. So Eur. Ale. 784. 
 
 Kemark. It Is to be noticed that Indirect questions after primary 
 tenses take the Indicative in Greek, and not the Subjunctive as in 
 Latin. Thus, nescio quis sit, / know not who he is, in Greek is simply 
 ayvooi ris eariv. This does not apply to indirect questions which 
 would require the Subjunctive in the direct form (§ 71). 
 
 2. ASter secondary tenses the verb may bo either 
 changed to the Optative or retained in the Lidicative. 
 The Optative is the more common form. In both 
 Lidicative and Optative, the tense used in the direct 
 discourse must be retained. E. g. 
 
 *EX€^ei/ oTiypd<j)oi (or on ypd(l>€i)y he said that he was writing ; 
 i. e. he said ypd(p(a. "EXt^eu on, yfypac^ioi €lr) (or on yiypa- 
 (j>fv)y he said that he had written; i. e. he said yey pa(pa. "EXt^fv on 
 ypdyjroi (or on ypd\lr€i)y he said that he should write; i. e. he said 
 ypdyj/^o). ''EX€^€v on ypd'^€i€v (or on eypa>/^ei/), he said that he had 
 written ; i. e. he said eypa^a, 
 
 (Optative.) 'EvinXrjae (f)povT)ixaTos tovs *ApKdbas, Xiytop as fxo- 
 vois fifv avTols Trarpls UeXoTTOvvrjaos firj^ TrXflarov de rav EXXrjviKoip 
 (f)i>Xov TO ' ApKoSiKov «it; , Kol aapara iyKparkcrTara ^xoi. Xen. Hell. 
 VII, 1, 23. (He said povois fiiv vfiiu .... ea-Tii nXelarov 6c ... . 
 €any KOI aoifiara .... e vet : these Indicatives might have been used 
 in the place of 617, €17, and cxot.) "EXe-ve 8e 6 neXonibas on 
 *ApyeIot /cat 'ApKadfS pdyrj rjTTr] p,€Voi eiev ino AaKedaifiovlcov. 
 lb. Yll, 1, 35. (He said jJm/i/Tat, which might have been 
 retained.) So Hdt. I, 83. 'XTrfmcop raXXa on avros tokci 
 npd^ot, ^x^ro, having hinted that he would himself attend to the 
 affairs there. Thuc. I, 90. (He said tumI irpd$a>t and irpd^d 
 might have been used for npd^oi. Cf. dTroKpipdiifPoi on ncfi'^ov- 
 o- 1 1/ , from the same chapter, quoted below.) For the Future Oi>- 
 tative in general, see §26. 'O 8e dnep on taoiPTo. Xen. Cyr. 
 VU, 2, 19. (He said eaoprai) "EXe^ap on irip.'^tK <r^ds 6 
 *\vha>p /SaatXcvr, k€X(v(op epoordp «^ otov 6 noXffios «i7» they said 
 that the king of the Indians had sent them^ commanding them to ask 
 on what account there was war. lb. II, 4, 7. (They said en-f/x- 
 yjrep fjpdsy and the question to be asked was e< tipos € or tip 6 noXt- 
 fJLOSi) "EXeyop on ovTroanoB' ovros 6 iroTapMS hia^iarbs ytPoiTO TTf^^ 
 (I /x») TOTCy they said that this river had never been {tyipero) fordnble 
 except then. Id. An. I, 4, 18. IlfpiKX^s Trporjyoptve toIs 'AdrjpaloiSt on 
 
 § TO, 2.J 
 
 INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
 
 151 
 
 vo^oX^riOuJed that A. rcas his friend, but that he had not been 
 made his ^end to the injury of the state. Thdc. II, 13 (He said ^epos 
 y^i eVrfv, oh ^^W • • . iy^v.jo.) So Hdt. I, 25.^ Eyp<.<rap or* 
 7.phs6<^o^os €t^. Xen. An. II, 2, 21 HpotSovT^ %%''°'r ^ 
 7r(5Xf/io£, i^ovXoPTO Tf}V UXdTaiap TrpoKaraXa^eiv. ThuC. 11. 2. ETret- 
 pa>lJir]P airra b€iKP<fPai, oTtoioiro y€P eipai aotpos, €itj 6 ov. rLAT. 
 Apol. 21 (3. s . . ^ "c 
 
 (Indicative.) ^EX^yov 5ri iXirlCovaiP <^«„f"^ '"'?»' JL'^T «V." 
 uot ydptp, they said that they hoped, &c. Isoc. Phil. p. 87 A. § 23. 
 (They said c'XTri'Coftev, which might have been changed to eXmCaep.) 
 *Hk€ d' dyy€XX<op ris m tovs 7rpvT<iv,LS ^s 'EXarcta '^^y'^V^J-at^ 
 some one had come with the report that Elatea had been taken. Dem. 
 Cor. 284, 21. (Here the Perf. Opt. might have been used.) Af i- 
 voif X6yovs iT6Xixa n^pX c'/xoO Xeyet./, i>s €y^> r^ ^pByp. f tfti tovto 
 d€8paK6>s. Id. Mid. 548, 17. Atnaadpfvos yap p€ a kul Xeyeipap 
 6Kvri<T€ik m, TOP naT€pa i>s dniKTOPa ^yic top ipavTov, k.t.X. la. 
 Andr. 593, 14. <lfaP€p5>s iln^v 5rt r) fiep TroXtj <^<^"'' ^-^J^^'X*^^"/ 
 ^Sn, he said that their city had already been Jortifed. l^l^C. l,Jl. 
 'AiroKpipda€Poi 5n 7r€ firlro vat p irp^a^^ts, ^lOvs anrjXXa^ap. Id. 1, 
 90. (Cf 5ri Trpa^ot, quoted above from the same chapter.) 
 "Hibeaap 5n To{js dnep^yKdpTos oiVcras i^aiTijaop^P. DEM, Unet. 
 L 870, 11. ('E^aii^(roi/xfi' might have been used.) ^ EToXpa Xty^iv 
 L Inep ip^p ix^pois i<^' ^avThp fZX<v(re Kal pvp €P rois ecrxaroiff 
 i(TT\Ki.vbvpois. Id. Andr. 611, 10. , . , 
 
 (Indirect Questions.) 'Yip(OTr)<T€P ovtop Tiiroiolr} (or ti tt o i f t ), 
 he asked him what he was doing', i. e. he asked ^*' "-otfty; Hptorr^frfi; 
 avTbpTl n.TroirjK^s .trj (or rt' tt^ 7rot><€v), Ae asked htm what he 
 had done; i. e. he askedTi Treirolr^Kas; 'Up<i>Trj(T(pavToPTL no ip a 01 
 
 (or W TToino-eOi ^« «^^"^^ ^'^ "^^^^ ^^ ^^'^"^^ ^^' '• ®" '^ ^^^'t " 
 ioi^o-fts; 'Yip^Tr)(T€P oMp n 7toii]<Tei€P (or W €7roirj(r€p), he 
 
 asked him what he had done ; i. e. he asked tI (iroirja-as ; 
 
 "Hpero, €t Tis ipov ^Irj ao<t>a>Tepos, he asked whether any one^was 
 
 wiser than I. Plat. Apol. 21 A. (The direct question was c err i 
 
 TLS aocb^repos ;) "O n be TroiTJcrot oi a^ai^/i^ve, but he dui not 
 
 indicate what hewoulddo. Xen. An.H, 1, 23. (The direct question 
 
 was W TTot^cra,;) *E7r«pa>ra, nW b.xn.pop p^T .k.ipop idoi, he 
 
 asked whom he had seen who came next to him. Hdt.1, iJl. (^-ine 
 
 direct question was tIpu crSff ;) Etp€To k66€p Xa/3oi rov TraiSa, he^ 
 
 asked whence he had received the boy. Id. I, 116. ,Hpcora>v avTOP « 
 
 dpair\fv(T€i(v, I asked him whether he had set sad. Dem. Polycl. 
 
 1223,20. (The direct question was avtVXfvo-off ;) 
 
 'Hndpovp Ti TTore Xcyci, / was uncertain what he meant. Plat. 
 
 Apol. 21 B. (Here X^'yoi might have been used.) E^ovX6vo^(9' 
 
 oJrot Tip airrov KUTaX^l^ovaip, they were considering the question, 
 
 whom ihey should leave here. Dem. F. L. 378, 23. Epomojrr«. tcp<op 
 
 liaTidn€eav€Vy napayykXXfip UiXevcp, k.t.X. AEN. UeU. 11, l, 4. 
 
 Remark 1. After secondary tenses the Indicative and 
 
152 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 70, 2. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 Is 
 
 Optative are equally classic; the Optative being used when 
 the writer wishes to incorporate the quotation entirely into his 
 own sentence, and the Indicative, when he wishes to quote it 
 in the original words as far as tlie construction of his own 
 sentence allows. The Indicative here, like tlie Subjunctive in 
 final and object clauses after secondary tenses (§ 44, 2), is 
 merely a more vivid form of expression than the Optative. 
 We even find both moods in the same sentence, sometimes 
 when one verb is to be especially emphasized, and sometimes 
 when there is no apparent reason for (he change. E. g. 
 
 OvToi tXfyop^ori Kvpos fiev redvrjKev, 'Aptalos de TTf (/jcuywf tV 
 T^ aradfia €??;, Koi. X«'yot, k.t.X. Xen. An. II, 1, 3. (Here 
 W^j/j^Kfz/ contains the most important part of the message.) *E/c 8e 
 TOVTOV iirvvQavcTO rjbr^ avTci>u koi OTToarjv 686v dirjXacraVj kqI ft 
 oUoiTo f) x<^pa. Id. C}T.^ IV, 4, 4. 'EruXfia Xtyfiv, o>s xp«« t€ 
 irdfXTroWa CKTfTiKfv vnep cpov Kai cop noWa tChv iptov Xd^oifp. Dem . 
 Aph. I, 828, 26^ (See Rem. 2.) "O/tiotoi rjaau eavfidCfiv 6noi nori 
 Tpt-^ovrai ofEWrjucs Kai rl iv v(o € ^ottv . Xen. Ah. Ill, 5, 13. 
 
 Remark 2. The Perfect and Future were less famihar forma 
 than the other tenses of the Optative ; so that they were frequently 
 retained in the Indicative after secondary tenses, even when the 
 Present or the Aorist was changed to the Optative. (See the last 
 two examples under Rem. 1.) In indirect (questions the Aorist In- 
 dicative was generally retained, for a reason explained in § 21, 2, 
 N. 1. Some writers, hke Thucydides, preferred the moods and 
 tenses of the direct form, in all indirect discoui-se. (See § 44, 2, 
 Rem.} 
 
 Note 1. (a.) An Imperfect or Pluperfect of the direct 
 
 discourse is regularly retained in the Indicative, after both 
 
 primary and secondary tenses, for want of an Imperfect or 
 
 Pluperfect Optative. E. g. 
 
 IIk€V ayyfXoff Xcycov on Tpirjp€ii rJKovt TrfpnrXfovaaSy he came 
 saying that he had heard, &c. ; i. e. he said rJKovou. Xen. An. I, 2. 
 21. AKOvaas di Afvo(f>a)v fXeytu on dp6ci)s ^t iStvro Kai avro to 
 fpyov avTols fJiaprvpoiT] , he said that tliey had accused him rightly, 
 and that the fact itself bore witness to them ; i. c. he said dp6ais rJTia- 
 ar6f Ka\ to fpyov vp.lv papTvp€i. lb. Ill, 3, 12. Ei;^f yap Xeytiv. 
 Kai on povoi Tav EXXrjv<ov fiaaiXel (tvv€ pd\ovTO (v nXaroiais, Ka\ 
 on voTfpov ovdenoTf <tt partvaaivTO e/rl iiacriXea {he said pcToi 
 a-vv€ pa\6p€da, . . . koi . . . ovdinore eaTparcva-dpfda). Xe\. 
 Hell. VII, 1, 34. TovT<ov €Kaarov fjpoprjv, 'OvrjTopa fitu kui TipoKpdrqv, 
 €1 Tivfs €iep pdprvp€s wu evavrlov ttjv npoiK aTrtdoaau, avrov 3' " \<po- 
 ^oi/, €1 Tiv€i irap^a-av or dnfXdfi^aufu, I asked each of these men, — ■ 
 
 § 70, 2.] 
 
 INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
 
 153 
 
 Onetor and Timocrates, whether there were any witnesses before tvhom 
 they had paid the dowry ; and Aphobus, whether there had been any 
 present when he received it. Dem. Onet. I, 860, 10. (The two 
 questions were dai p-dpTvpes nvts ; and napija-dv nvcs ;) 
 
 (6.) In a few cases the Present Optative is used after 
 
 secondary tenses to represent the Imperfect Indicative. The 
 
 Present may thus supply the want of an Imperfect Optative, 
 
 as the Present Infinitive and Participle supply the want of 
 
 Imperfects (§ 15, 3 and § 16, 2). This can be done only 
 
 when the context makes it perfectly clear that the Optative 
 
 represents an Imperfect, and not a Present. E. g. 
 
 Top Tipayopav dir€KT€ivav, KaTrjyopovvTOS tov Af ovtos as ovt€ <rv(r«ci;- 
 rovu edeXoL tavrco, perd T€ UiiXonidov iravra /SouXtvotro. Xen. 
 Hell. VII, 1, 38. (The words of Leon were ovt€ (tvo-ktjvovv rjBeXf 
 poi, pfrd re IlfX. ivdvra i^ovXfvero.) Td nfirpaypfva birjyovvro, 
 on avToi piv em toIs noXeplois nXeoifv, rrjv be dvaipeaiv rtov vavayoiv 
 
 antKpivavTO 
 
 ^oiTo di Xap^dvav Kad' onoaovovv deoiro *A<^0j3oy Trap' avrav, they 
 replied, that no witness had been present, and that Aphobus had received 
 the money from them, taking it in such sums as he happened to want. 
 Dem. Onet. I, 869, 12. (The direct discourse vfd& ovbeXs pdprvs 
 7rapfjv,€Kopi^€TO be Xap$duaiv Kad' onoaovovv Bcolto. Uapeirj con- 
 tains the answer to the question ft nves Traprjaau in the preceding 
 sentence, which is quoted as the last example under a. The Im- 
 perfect in the question prevents the Optatives used in the reply 
 from being ambiguous.) So Plat. Rep. IV, 439 E. 
 
 Note 2. In indirect discourse after secondary tenses, each 
 tense of the Indicative or Optative is to be translated by its 
 own past tense, to suit the English idiom. Thus eiirev on 
 ypd(f)oi (or ypd(f)€i) 13 he said that he was writing ; einev on 
 y€ypa(j>o>s eirj (or yey pa<t)ep) is he said that he had written. 
 
 In a few cases the Greek uses the same idiom as the Eng- 
 lish, and allows the Imperfect or Pluperfect to stand irregu- 
 larly with on or at after a secondary tense, where regularly 
 the Present or Perfect (Optative or Indicative) would be re- 
 quired. In such cases the context must make it clear that 
 the tense represented is not an Imperfect or Pluperfect (Note 
 1, «). E. g. 
 
 *Ep 7roXX,7 dnoplq ^crap ol "EXXj/vf?, eppoovpevoi ptv on fVi rais 
 ^aa-iXfas dvpais ^a-ap, kvkXo 5e avrols . . • TrdXeis iroXeuMU naav 
 
 1* 
 
154 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 70, 2 
 
 dyopau Sc ovSeir trt itap€^€iv tfieWev, aTTf^xov §€ rrjs *EXXa5of 
 ov fiflop ^ fivpia arabia, . ...rrpovSfSayKfcrav de iivrovs Koi 0* 
 ^dp^apoi, fxovoi be KaTa\f\fip.fi€voi ^aau oiibe inn fa ovbfva 
 avfifiaxou fx^vres. Xex. An. Ill, 1 , 2. (In all these cases the direet 
 discourse would be in the Present or Perfect Indicative.) Acyaat 
 8* avTov yvatvai f<f)* a e x^ypei, it is said that he kneiofi»r what he wa.> 
 coming. Thuc. I, 134. (Here x^P^h ^^ X^P^^ would be the regulai 
 form.) Ata rov x^^Cf-^ov avdpmnov, oy r)p,as fiteSuer', (^anarav Koi 
 \fyQ>v a)ff <f)i\aOT)vaios rj v Koi rav '2dfi(o npojTOs Kareinoi, l. e. saying 
 <f>t\adr{vai6s elfii koi rdv Sd/xa> npcoros Karelnov . ArisT, Vesp 
 283. (Here et/xi is changed to ^i/, and not to €lt} : Karelnov could 
 have been changed only to Karcinoi.) 
 
 In these examples the principle usually observed in indirect dis- 
 course, — that the tenses employed in the quotation denote relative 
 not absolute time (§ 9), — is given up, and the Imperfect and Plu- 
 perfect denote absolute time, as in causal sentences (§81, 1). See 
 § 81, 2, Rem. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) An indirect quotation, with its verb in the Opta- 
 tive after ort or wy, is sometimes followed by an independent sen- 
 tence with an Optative, which continues the quotation as if it were 
 itself dependent on the ort or wy. Such sentences are generally 
 introduced by yap, E. g. 
 
 "Hkovov S' fycoyc rivav a>s ovBe rovs \ifUvQS Ka\ raf dyopas rrt 
 daxTOifv avT^ Kapnovadai ' to. yap KOiva ra GfrraXcoi/ dno tovtqjv 8eoi 
 dtoiKflv, for (as they said) they must administer, &c. Dem. 01. I, 15, 
 22. *An€KpivavTO avr^ ort ddCvara (r(l)i(nu (Xtj nou'iv a npoKaXdrai 
 avfv *A6r]vaia>v * naldfs yap (TC^oiv kcu yvvalKfs nap* (Kfivois f irjaav. 
 Thuc. II, 72. "EXeyov oTt navTos d^ta Xeyoi 2€vdr]s' ;(ei/iw»' yap 
 €ir)y K.T.X. Xen. An. Vn, 3, 13. 
 
 (ft.) Such independent sentences with the Optative are sometimes 
 found even when no Optative precedes, in which case the context 
 always contains some allusion to another's thought or expression. 
 E.g. 
 
 'Ynecx^TO rov avBp A;^atotff rovBf brfKaxreiv ayoav* otoiro fitv 
 fiaXiaff fKovaiov Xa3a>v, d fxfj BeXoi 8\ aKovray i. e. he thought {as he 
 said), &C. Soph. Phil. 617. 'AXXa yap ov8ev n fiaWov rfv dBdvarov, 
 aK\a Koi avro to fls dvdpanov aojia fXOflu dpxrj rjv avTjj okiOpov, 
 &<Tnfp v6(T0S' Ka\ rd\aina>povp.eur] re d^ tovtov tou ^iov C^Vi *"* 
 TfXfVTCBtra ye ev T<a KaXovfieva Bavdrto dnoXXvoiro, and {according 
 to the theory) it lives in misery, Sfc, and finally perishes in what is 
 called death. Plat. Phaed. 95 D. (Plato is here merely stating 
 the views of others. For the Imperfects in the first sentence, see 
 § 11, Note 6.) 
 
 § 71. When a question in the direct form would be 
 expressed by an interrogative Subjunctive (§ 88), indirect 
 
 §71.] 
 
 interrogative SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 155 
 
 questions after primary tenses retain the Subjunctive ; 
 after secondary tenses the Subjunctive may be either 
 changed to the same tense of the Optative or retained 
 in its original form. E. g. 
 
 Up6sdfx(t>6Tepa dnop^ ravrrju ff onas eKba Ka\ raXX* onoQev 
 bio I Km, I am at a loss on both questions, how I shall give her a dowry 
 (nois TavTTjv eKda;), and whence I shall pay other expenses (nodev 
 raXXa StoKw;). Dem. Aph. I, 834, 18. BovXevofiai on<os tre 
 dnodpci, lam trying to think how I shall escape you (ncis ae dnodpa ;). 
 Xen. C)t. I, 4, 13. Ovk ex^ ^t Xe'yo), / know not what I shall say. 
 Dem. Phil. Ill, 124, 24. So in Latin, non habeo quid dicam. In 
 Aesch. Prom. 470, ovk exo (rocpiap.' oro) . . . dnaXXaya may be 
 explained on this principle as interrogative; or by § C5, 1, N. 3, as 
 a^ relative clause. Ou ydp 8fj di dneiplav ye ov (f>i](TeLs tx^iv o n 
 etnrjs, for it is not surely through inexperience that you will declare 
 that you know not what to say (i. e. W elnay;). Dem. F. L. 378, 4. 
 So o Tt 5(5 and ot? ScS. Xex. An. I, 7, 7. Ta he eKnaipara ovk oib* 
 el Xpva-dvra tovt<o 5o>, / do not know whether I shall qive them, &c. 
 Id. Cyr. VIII, 4, 16. 
 
 Ei^ be oi rjTop .... p,eppr}pi^ev, ^ o yf . . . rovs p.ev dva(TTr](Teiev^ 
 t o ArpeibTju iva pi, ^oi, rje xdXov navaeiev , e p-qrvare it re 6vp6v. 
 [1. I, 1 9 1 . (The direct questions were rovs fiev dvaarrjcrci), *ATpei- 
 trjv 6' evapi^at; — ^e navao), eprjTvao) re;) KXr'jpovs ndXXoVy 
 vnnoTepos drj npoaOev d(})eir] x^^^^^ov eyxos, i. e. they shook the lots, to 
 decide which should first throw his spear, the question being norepos 
 np6a-6ev dcpjj ; II. Ill, 317. 'Enfjpovro, el napabolev KopivOiois rfju 
 noXiv, they asked whether they should glee up their city, the question 
 being napadwfjiev Trfv noXiv ; Thuc. I, 25. ^E^ovXevovro el to 
 aKevo(f>6pa ivravda dyoivro fj dnioiev eVt ro OTparonedou. Xen. 
 An. I, 10, 17. (So An. I, 10, 5.) *H7ropft on ;^pj7(ratTo tw npd- 
 yfiari, he was at a loss how to act in the matter, i. e. ri xP»?o"<»/Aai ; 
 Id. Hell. \ II, 4, 39. Ou ydp eixop.ep .... orro)? bpcovres KaXas 
 TTpd^aifiev, for we could not see how we should fare well, if we did 
 it. Soph. Ant. 272. 
 
 AnoptovTos be ^aaiXeos o ri XPV^V'^'- '"^ napeovri npTjyp,aTiy 
 *EmdXTr]s rjX6e oi es Xoyovs- Hdt. VII, 213. 'Hnopqa-e pev onore- 
 p<oae biaKivbvueva-r) x^^PV^a^- Thuc. I, 63. Oi UXarairjs e^ov 
 XevovTo eire KaraKava-ajo-iv axrnep exovaiv, e'lre ti dXXo xp^o-tov 
 Tai, whether they should burn them as they were, or deal with them in 
 some other way. Id. II, 4. ^Anoprjaavres onrj Ka6opp,i(ra)PTat, es 
 UpoiTTjp TTiP p^aou enXevaap. Id. IV, 13. 
 
 Remark 1. The context must decide whether the Optative in 
 indirect questions represents a Subjunctive (§ 71) or an Indicative 
 (§ 70, 2). The distinction is especially important when the Aorist 
 Optative is used (§ 21, 2, N. 1). See also § 74, 2, N. 1. 
 
 Bemark 2. When the leading verb is in the Optative with Spj 
 
9^ -f 
 
 156 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 L§71 
 
 the Optative may be used in indirect questions of this class. See 
 examples in § 34, 3. 
 
 Note 1. The particle commonly used in the sense of whether in 
 indirect questions is ft, which can introduce a Subjunctive, as well 
 as an Indicative or Optative. (See Xen. C}t. VIII, 4, 16, quoted 
 above.) 'Edv cannot mean whether; and when this introduces a 
 clause resembling an indirect question, the expression is really. a 
 protasis, with an apodosis suppressed or implied (§ 53, N. 2) . E. g. 
 
 Et de (Toi fjifj doKft, (TKe'ylrai €av robe (toi /aoXXov api<TKri' <})r}iu yap 
 cyu) TO vopifiop dUatov elvai. Xen. Mem. IV, 4, 12. (The meaning 
 here is, but if that does not please you, examine, in case this shall suit 
 you better (that then you may adopt it) ; and not, look to see whether this 
 suits you better. It' iav apidKji is an indirect question, it can represent 
 no form of direct question which includes the av. Even apiaKjj 
 alone could not be explained as an interrogative Subjunctive, by 
 § 88.) 'Eav dpea-KT) in the passage just (juoted is similar to idv 
 (vh€i^oi)p€6a in Plat. Rep. V, 455 13 : BoJXf ( oZv dfotpfOa tov ra 
 TOiavra dvTikfyovTos aKoXovBrja-ai fjpiv, edv ttcos ^/xeis e<€tVa) fvdfi- 
 ^apeBa, on ovd^v eariv (niTrjdfvpa i8iov ; shall we then ask the one 
 who makes such objections to follow us, in case we can in any way show 
 him that, &c.? See Xen. An. II, 1, 8; and Arist. Nub. 535. 
 (Such sentences belong under § 53, N. 2. See also § 77, 1, c.) 
 
 Note 2. El k€ with the Subjunctive in Homer sometimes forms 
 an indirect question, representing the Epic Subjunctive with k€ in 
 the direct question. (See § 87, Note.) E. g. 
 
 Mev€T€ o<f)pa idrjr at k vppip virtparxrj X^^P^ Kpovia>v ; are you 
 toaiting that you may see whether the son of Kronos will hold his hand 
 to protect youf II. IV, 249. (The direct question would be wrc'p- 
 axTi <€ x^'^P^ Here the k€ always belongs to the verb, so that this 
 Epic construction is no authority for the supposed Attic use of cav 
 and the Subjunctive in the same sense. See Note 1. 
 
 § 72. When the verb of the direct discourse stand? 
 with ap in the Lidicative or Optative (forming an apo- 
 dosis), the same mood and tense are retained in indi- 
 rect quotations with on and i? and in indirect questions, 
 after both primary and secondary tenses. (See § 69, 2.) 
 E.g. 
 
 Aeyft oTi TovTo av eye vera, he says that this would halt, happened: 
 tXeyev on tovto av iyevero, he said that this would have happened. 
 A«yei (or eXeytv) on ovtos diKaiQ>s av Bdvoif he says (or $aid) thai 
 this man would justly be put to death. 
 
 (Q€p4,<TT0K\^s) dnfKplvaro, on ovt a v avros 2(pi(f)ios a>v ovopaaros 
 iy*v€To OUT eKclvos ^ABTjvalos, he replied that he should not have 
 
 § 73, l.J 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 157 
 
 become famous himself if he had been a Seriphian, nor would the other 
 y he had been an Athenian. Plat. Rep. I, 330 A. *EvvoelT€, on 
 ^TTOv av (TTaais eti] ivos apxovros i) noWcov. Xen. An. VI, 1, 29. 
 AircKpivaro, on irpocrdfv av dnoOdvoiev ^ ra ottXo irapaboiijaav. 
 ^b. II, 1, 10. (The direct discourse was irpoadev av dnoddvoi- 
 U€v.) Uapf\6a>v ns bei^dra), cas ot eerraXoi vvv ovk av eXfvBepoi 
 yevoivTo dapfvoi. Dkm. 01. II, 20, 18. Ou5' elUvai (jyrjai n at 
 fotwj/ vplv xapiVatTO. Id. F. L. 356, 13. Ovk ex© m av yevoi 
 ^av. Aesch. Prom. 905. So 907. 'Hpoirav el bolev av rovrwi 
 TO. TTtord. Xen. An. IV, 8, 7. 
 
 Note. The same rule applies when a secondary tense of the 
 ndicative in apodosis with av omitted (§ 49, 2, N. 2) is quoted. 
 
 (^EXfyci/) on .... Kpelrrov ^ v avrm t6t€ dirodave'tv, he said that it 
 -jere better jfor him to die at once. Lys*. X, p. 117, § 25. (The direct 
 discourse was Kpeirrov rj v pot-) 
 
 § 73. 1. When the Infinitive is used in the indirect 
 quotation of a simple sentence, which had its verb in 
 the Indicative (with or without av) or the Optative 
 (with ai/), the verb is changed in the quotation to the 
 same tense of the Infinitive, after both prunary and 
 secondary tenses. If av was used in the direct dis- 
 course, it must be retained with the Infinitive. 
 
 The Present and Perfect Infinitive here represent the 
 Imperfect and Pluperfect (as well as the Present and 
 Perfect) Indicative. (§ 15, 3 ; § 18, 3, Rem.) E. g. 
 
 ^(t\ ypd(p€iv, he says that he is writing ; €<l)r} ypdcpeiv, he said that 
 le was writing ; (pr'jaeL ypd(j)€iv, he will say that he is (then) writing.^ 
 (The direct discourse is here ypdcfxo.) ^rjal (icpn) 7pn0">' av, el 
 fdvvaro, he says (or said) that he should now be tvriting, if Ae tcere 
 able. (He says €ypa<f)ov dv.) ^rjal (((prj) ypdcpeiv dv, el bvvaiTO, 
 he says (or said) that he should write, if he should (ecer) be able. (He 
 says ypd(f)oipLi dv.) 
 
 ^qal ypdyj/ai, he says that he wrote ; e(^ri ypd^ai, he said that he had 
 written ; (jyljaei ypdylrai, he will say that he wrote. (He says eypa^a. 
 See § 23, 2.) *;;(ri (^t]) yfid^ai dv, el edwljerj, he says (or said) 
 that he should have written, if he had been able. (He says eypayjra 
 dv.) ^Tjal (ecpri) ypdylrai av, el dvvrjeeir], he says (or said) that he 
 should write, if he should (ever) be able. (He says ypd^aip.i. dv.) 
 
 ^r)a\ (<Pn<^€i) yeypacpevai, he says (or will say) that he has written ; 
 *4>n y(y pacfyevai, he said that he had written. (He says yey pa(j)a.) 
 For the Perfect with dv, see below. 
 
 *j/o-J (0^o-€t) ypdyjreiv, he says (or will say) that he will write ; e^n 
 ypd^ewy he said that he would write. (He says y o d ^ w •) 
 
158 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 73, I 
 
 .- A 7^^^*'? *Appo>(rT€7v Trpocftaa-iCerai, he pretends that he is sick. 
 ^(Ofioaev appcoarflv tovtovI, he took his oath that thui man woi 
 sick. Dem.F.L. 379, 15 and 17. oU ^rj aM, dXX ,\uuop 
 arpaTTjyeiv, he said that not he himself, but Nicias, was general; 
 1. e. he said, ovk tyui aCrof aW (Kelvos arpaTrfyfl. Thuc. IV, 28. 
 TivasTTOT €ixas vnoXafilSdi^er' fCxctrOai t6u ^iXimrou ot ?(nr€v8(u ; 
 what prayers do you suppose Philip made, &c. ? Dem. F. L. 381, 10. 
 (Ev^fo-^ai here represents rfUx^To: for other examples of the Im- 
 peHeet, see § 15, 3 ) Ot>at yhp hv ovk dxapiarco, fim ^vet,., for I 
 think itwould^ not be a thankless labor; i. e. o^< &u ?;^ot. Xen. An. 
 
 ' , ' X i^/**^^^ y^P '■^'^ ^aT€pa OVK&P (t>v\dTT€iu Ka\Tr)v 
 
 TifXT]v\afi^av€ivTS>v naiXovfiiucou ^CXcov, do you think that he would 
 not have taken care and have received the pay, &c. ? i. e. ovk dv 
 
 €0uXarr6v Koi €\dfi^au€u; Dem. Timoth. 1194, 20. (See 
 § 41, 1.) 
 
 (Aonst.) KaratTxetv 4>r^(n tovtovt, he says that he detained them, 
 Tovsd aixtxa\<oTovs old' euOv firjdfivai </);;(n XiaaaOat, but he says 
 that he did not even think of ransoming the prisoners. Dkm. F L 353 
 14 and 18. ^ (He says Kar^axov, and ovh' ,'p€dvfxfj$r]u.) *0 KOpor 
 XeyfTai yeu^adai Kafx^6<T«o, Cyrus is said to have been the son of 
 Cambyses^ Xen.^ Cyr. 1, 2, 1. To,^^ 'Aer]vaiov, fjXniC^p taco, dp 
 f/^ j/z • ^'^ 'cai r;;i/ y?jv ovk dv irepiihflv TpirjB^vai, he hoped that 
 the Athenians would perhaps march out, and not allow their land to 
 he laid y^aste;i.^.Xaa>, dv ^^.^iX6oi.v Ka\ oIk du neptidoiep. 
 J-UUC. 11, 2U. Anrjecrau vufilaavres fir} du Zri Uavo\ ytv^crdai 
 K^Xv^airov r.LxicTixov Id. VI, 102. (Here oIk du yeuoifieOa would 
 be the direct lorm. (See §69, 5.) Sol, 139. OvKdu^yelaO^avrou 
 K&u tiTidpapeiu, do you not believe that (in that case) he would 
 have run thitherf i. e. ovk du inibpaix.v; Dem. Aph. I, 831, 12. 
 ^oee § 41, 3.^ 
 
 (Perfect.) ^r)a\v alroi atrioi yeyfv^a-dai, he says, airios vev/- 
 vvfiac. Dem. F. L. 352, 26. EUaCou ? Stoxor^a o?;^eor(9at ? Jra- 
 Xr]ylrofi(vou rt TrpotXrjXaKevai. Xex. An. I, 10, 16. (Their 
 thought was tj S.a,.a>. otx.rae, fj . . , n poeXr^XaK.p, See § 10, 
 Ih'J/t, ^^n XPnH'^^O €avT<o Tovs er,(iaiovs iniKf Krjpvx^vai , he said 
 that the Ihebans had offered a reward for him. Dem. F. L. 347 26 
 For examples of the Perfect Infinitive with du, representing the 
 Pluperfect Indicative and the Perfect Optative, see § 41, 2. 
 
 (Future.) ^EnayyeXXtTai rd diKaia Troirjaeiu, he promises to 
 do what IS right l)EM. F. L. 356, 10. So II. I, 161. \cbrj .'^6. 
 flfX€pu>u uKoaiu ijaieiu AaKedaifioulovs Cruras ^ ai^rov diroKTeuriu, 
 he said that wUhin twenty days he would either bring them alive or kUl 
 them where they were. Thug. IV, 28. (Cleon said ? a^a, . . . J^ 
 CTToicreva, ) Tavra ((t>r]a\) n.ir pd^.aOa, bvolu § rptJi;..nJ,. 
 he says that this will have been accomplished within two or three days. 
 I)EM. F. L 364, 18. (See §29, Note 6.) For the rare Future In- 
 fimtive with du, see § 41, 4. 
 
 ^ Remark. For the meaning of each tense of the Infinitive in 
 indirect discoui-se, see § 15, 2; § 18, 3; § 23, 2; and § 27. It will 
 
 § 73, 2.] 
 
 rARTICIPLE. 
 
 159 
 
 bo seen that these tenses (especially the Aorist) in this use differ 
 essentially from the same tenses in other constructions ; it is there- 
 fore important to ascertain in each case to which class the Infinitive 
 oelongs. This must be decided by the context ; but in general it 
 may be stated that an Infinitive stands in indirect discourse, when 
 it depends upon a verb implying thought or the expression of thought^ 
 Rnd when also the thought, as originally conceived, would have been 
 expressed by some tense of the Indicative (with or without dv) or of 
 the Optative (with dv), which can be transferred without change of 
 tense to the Infinitive. (See § 15, 2, N. 1, which applies only to 
 ftic Infinitive without du.) Thus X«y<o avrbv iXOiiu means / say that 
 ke came ; but ^ovXcrai eXBe^u means he wishes to come, where eXBtlw 
 V merely an ordinary Infinitive, belonging under § 23, 1.^ In the 
 former case eXO^lu represents ^XOev, but in the latter case it repre- 
 lents no form of the Aorist Indicative or Optative, and is therefore 
 not in indirect discourse. So with the Infinitive afler all verbs of 
 commanding, advising, wishing, and others enumerated in § 92, 1. 
 
 2. When the Participle with the sense of the Infini- 
 tive (§ 113) is used in the indirect quotation of a 
 simple sentence, it follows the rules already given for 
 die Infinitive (§ 73, 1), in regard to its tense and the 
 use of av. E. g. 
 
 *Ay7eXXfi rovTovs fpxofi^uovs^ he announces that they are com- 
 ing; rjyyfiXf tovtovs epxofieuovs, he announced that they were 
 coining. (The announcement is ovrot epxovrai.) ^AyyeXXct 
 TOVTOVS iXdovTas , he announces that they came; rfyyeiXe tovtovs 
 iXdovTas ,he announced that they had come. (The announcement 
 \srjXdov.) 'AyyeXXf I tovtovs (XrjXvdoTas , he announces that they 
 are come ; fjyyeiXf tovtovs eXrjXvdoTas , he announced that they were, 
 come. (The announcement is eXrjXvdaa-iu.) 'AyyeXXti (rJyyeiXf) 
 rovTo y€VT]a6p.€uou, he announces (or announced) that this is (or 
 t)as) about to happen. (He announces tovto ycurjO-eTai.) 
 
 To7s T€ yap eTrix^ipfjp^a-iu ioapcou ov KaTopdovvT€S koi tovs arpa- 
 riwTas dxOofi€vovs TTJ povfj, they saw that they were not succeeding, 
 and that the soldiers were distressed; i. e. they saw, ov KaTopBovp.€u 
 Koi oi (TTpaTicovai dxOovTai. Thuc. VII, 47. 'Efipfvopeu ols ayp-o- 
 i(yyr](Tafi€v diKaiois ovaiu; do we abide by what tve acknowledged to 
 ^e just (i. e. bUaid torn/) ? Plat. Crit. 50 A. Ilai'^' €V€Ka iavToy 
 voioyu e^fXrjXfyKTai, he has been proved to be doing everything for his 
 »wn interest. Dem. 01. II, 20, 12. AvT<a Kvpov aTpaTtvovra 
 npSiTos TJyyeiXa, I first announced to him that Cyrus was marching 
 against him. Xen. An. II, 3, 19. 
 
 *E7ri(Tra/i6z/ot kcu tou ^dp^apov avTou irfpX avrto ra TrXfto) <r<pa' 
 Xeira, Koi npos avTovs tovs *A3i]vaiovs noXXd r]p.ds rjOt] tois dfiapr 
 rr)p,a(nv avToav paXXov 77 ttj dcj)* vpa>v Tifiaypla Tr€piyfy€urfp,€vovS' 
 Thuc. I, 69. (The direct discourse would be 6 ^dpfiapos . . . 
 ia<f>aXr), Koi 17/ietff . . . TrepiyeyevrifieBa.) So in the »ame chapter, 
 
160 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 L§ 73, 2. 
 
 i 74, 1.] 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 161 
 
 rbv M?)8oi/ avToi itrfiev €k ireipdrcov yrjs fVt r^v IlfXon-oi/wjoroi/ eX ^oi»Ta, 
 i. e. 6 M^Soff ?X^ei/. Ou yap Ijbfffav avrov t( 6vr^ Kora, for they did 
 not know that he wa,^ dead (i. e. ri6vr)Kfv). Xex. An. I, 10, 16. 
 *l£.i7ih€i^a ovbev aXriBes dnrjyyfXKOTa dWa ^evaKiaavO* v/xar, I have 
 shown that he has reported nothing that is true, and that he deceived 
 you. (Perf. and Aor.) Dem. F. L. 396, 30. 
 
 El f iJ ffheiv Koi TTju (TUfifxaxiav fxoi yevrjaofievrjv, if I were sure that 
 I should obtain an alliance also (i. e. crv/i/xaxia fioi ycurjafrai). lb. 353, 
 25. So Xen. Hell. IV, 7, 3. 'O S' dvTo(p€i\a>v dfi^Xvrcpos, el8u)S ov< 
 is Xdpiv aXX* es ©(^ftXiy/xa rfjv dp€Tf)u a7ro8<oo-toi/, knowing that he shall 
 return the benefit, &c. Thuc. II, 40. Tv6vt€s ovt dnoKoikvafiu bvva- 
 Toi ovTes, €1 T dnofjLov<odr)<TOPTai t^s ^vfi^da-foiSi KivdwevaovTeSi 
 iroiovurai 6/xoXoyiav. Id. Ill, 28. (The direct discourse would be 
 ovT€ dwaroi eafxev, et r d7rofiov(odr}(r6fi€6a, KivbvvfvaoufP.) 
 
 Ev 5' 10-^1 p.T)beu dv fi€ tovtiov iirix^ '■P^^^^'^^ ^^ irflQtiv, (I 
 bvvaarelau fiopov tj ttXovtou iaypcov «^ avrcov ye vr)<T6p.€V0U . IsOC. 
 Phil. p. 109 B. § 133. (Here firjbev av kmxf^ph^avra represents ovhiv 
 av trrex^^pn^^^ § 69, 5 ; and yevrja-ofievov represents yevrjafrai.) 
 ^KOTTOVfMfvos ovu fvpiCTKOv ovdap,ci>s cLv aXXcoff TOVTO b L ait p a^a p. ( V O i ^ 
 I found that I could accomplish this (diaTrpa^aifxrjv dv) in no other way. 
 Id. Antid. p. 311 C. § 7. 
 
 "Oiras be ye tovs TTo\ep.LOVS bCvaiade KaKoi)S irotelv, ovk oiaBa fiav 
 Bdvovras v/xas ttoXXo? KUKovpyias, do you not know that you learned, 
 &c. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 28. (Here the Optative bvvaiade, as well as 
 the whole context, shows that pavddvovras represents ep.av6dveTCy 
 § 16, 2.) Mefivrjfuu be ey(t)ye /cat Traiy u>v Kpiria rabe ^vvovra ae, I 
 remember that you were with this Critias. Plat. Charm. 156 A. 
 {Zvvovra represents ^vvriaOa.) See § 16, 2, and the examples. 
 
 Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences. 
 
 § 74. Wlien a compound sentence is to be indi- 
 rectly quoted, its leading verb is expressed according to 
 the rules given for simple sentences (§§ 70-73). 
 
 1. If the quotation depends on a primary tense, all 
 the dependent verbs of the original sentence retain the 
 moods and tenses of the direct discourse. 
 
 If the quotation depends on a secondary tense, all 
 dependent verbs of the original sentence which in the 
 direct discourse stood in the Present^ Perfect^ or Future 
 Indicative, or in any tense of the Subjunctive, may (at 
 the pleasure of the writer) either be changed to th© 
 
 /' 
 
 same tenses of the Optative, or retain both the moods 
 and tenses of the direct discourse. The Optative is 
 the more common form. E. g. 
 
 * ( Aftej- primary tenses.) *Av S' v^iels Xeyrjre, iroiqaeiv ((fyrjai) 
 o fxfjT al<Txvvr]v p,t)t ddu^iav avrta (j)epei. Dem. F. L. 354, 8. (Here 
 no change is made, except from noujaet to notfjaeiv.) No^i'^co yap, 
 dv TOVT UKpifiSis fidOrjre, pdWov vfids tovtois peu dir larrjae iv 
 ffolje (iorj6ii(reiv.^ Id. Onet. I, 870, 27. 'Eai/ eKe'ivo eld^peu, 
 oTi dnavra oaa iroinoT rjXTr icra p.€ u rtva npa^eiu virep Tjfi^v Ka6* rjpoyv 
 eyprjTai, . . . kcip fxfj vvv e6e\(o^ev eKel 7roXe/xai/ avr^, ev6dd' laics 
 dvayKa(T6r]a6p.(da tovto ttokIp, k. t. X. Id. Phil. I, 54, 18. npo- 
 Xc'yo) ort, oirorep du dno KplpT)Tai, e^eXeyxOljaerai. Plat. Eiithyd. 
 275 E. See Dem. Mid. 536, 1, where two such conditional sce- 
 tences depend on el TrpobrjXou yevoiro. (See § 34, 3.) 
 
 Op<5 aoi TovTa>v berjaov, otqu eiriOv p-Tja-rji (f>i\iau irpos rivas 
 TToietcr^at. Xex. Mem. H, 6, 29. napdbeiyfxa aacfyes KaTaarfiaaTe, os 
 dv d(f)ia-T?iTai, OavaTtp ^J^/xtwcroacvoi/. TUUC. Ill, 40. See 
 § 73, 2. 
 
 (Opt. after secondary tenses.) Eiire on dvbpa dyot ov etp^ai de'oi, 
 he said that he was bringing a man whom it was necessary to confine ; 
 i. e. he said dvbpa dyo) ov elp^ai del, Xen. Hell. V, 4, 8. 'ATre- 
 Kplvaro on p.avddvotev oi p.avddvovTes a ovk eir iaraivroj i. e. he 
 replied, fiavedvova-i a oU eiriaTavrai. Plat. Euthyd. 276 E. (Here 
 a has a definite antecedent, § 59, and is not conditional ; it takes the 
 Optative only because it is in indirect discourse. So with ov in the 
 preceding exaniple.) 'AyrjaiXaos eXeyev ort, el ^Xa^epd Treir pax<os 
 tiri, bUaios etrj ^r)ixiov(TdaL, i. e. he said el ^Xa^epa ireirpaxfy 
 diKaios ea-Tt (rffiioCa-dai. Xen. Hell. V, 2, 32. So An. VI, 6, 25. 
 
 El 8e Tiva (f)evyovra X^>/rotro, irporjyopevev on as TroXe/xio) XPV' 
 a-oiTo, Id. Cyr. HI. 1, 3. (This is a quotation of a conclitional 
 sentence belonging under § 50, 1, N. 1 ; «? nva X^yj^ofiai, . . . xpnfro- 
 /iat.) Tvovres de . . . on, el baxroiev evdvvas, Ki.vbvvevaoi.ev 
 arroXeaOai, nefiirovanv koI bibda-Kovaiv tovs Orj^aiovs ©y, (I p.f) arpa- 
 Tevaoievj Kivbvveixroiev oi 'ApKabes TrdXiv XaKwviaau Id. Hell. 
 VH, 4, 34. ^ (See § 32, 2.) "Hibei ydp on, el fmxrjs TTore beljaoi, eK 
 Tovrav avrS itapaardras Xr^irreov etrj. Id. Cyr. VIH, 1, 10. 
 (The direct discourse was el n berfaei, . . . Xr^irriov earlv) 
 
 EXoyii^ovTo cds, el fir) fiaxoivro, diroarriaoiVTo ai nepioiKibes 
 TToXeis. Id. Hell. VI, 4, 6. ('Eai/ pirj fiaxafieda, dTToaTTjaovrat.) 
 Xprjfiad* xmiaxvelTo baxreiv, el roO trpdyparos alriavro ejxe. Dem . 
 IVIid. 548, 20. (Acoo-cd, eav alndaOe.) 'Hyeiro ydpairav rroirjaeip 
 avToy, elns dpyvpiov bibolrj. Lys. in Erat. p. 121, § 14. Ev^avro 
 a-QJTrjpta 6vaeiv , ev6a npoiTov els cf)iXiav y^v d(f>iKoivTO. Xen. An. 
 V, 1, 1. (The dependent clause is found in the direct discourse in HI, 
 2, 9 : boKel fioi ev^aadai roi 6ea tovtio Ovaeiv (rarripia onov dv irpajTov 
 els (l>iXiav yrjv d^iKafxe Oa.) Tovto enpayfiarevero vop.i(a>v, oaa ttjs 
 noXeas TrpoXdfioi, navra ravra pie^aias ei^eiv. Dem. Cor. 234, 5. 
 C'Oa dv irpo^d^o), ^e^aias e^ca.) "HXmCov vtto rav iraibav, eneibf] 
 
 i 
 
162 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 74, 1. 
 
 § 74, 1.] 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 163 
 
 T€\€vrTi<r€iav rhv ^lov, rat^ijo-f <r^at. Lys. Agor. p. 183, § 45. 
 fETTftdav r€\€VTria<ofi€v, Ta(t)T)a6fifea.) K6vo>v idi8a,TK€V(os ovra /xev 
 jrotoOirrt naaai avT& ai iroXeis <^iXiai tcroti/To, €i St dovXovadai 
 ^ov\6fi€vos (pavtpbs'eaoLTO, (\eyev ays fiia (Kdarr) rroWa npayfiara 
 Uavri €iT] Trape'x^iu, koi kIv^vvos fir) firi Koi oi "EWrjpfS, (i ravra 
 aiadoiuTO^ (rv(TTa7(v. Xkx. Hell. I V, 8, 2. ^ ^ ^ 
 
 "Eti d€ yiyv<i)(rK€iv e(f)a(Tav (pBovovvras fi€V avTovs, (i Ti (T(pi(nv 
 ayaeovyiyvoiTO, €</)r;So/xe'i/o us 8\ (i ris avficpopa tt poan itttoi, 
 they said they knew that they were enviom if any good came to 
 them, hut pleased if any calamity befell them lb. V, 2, 2. (* ^ o v f i r € 
 ah, idvri iiplv dyaebv yiyvrjrai, i<^i)h€(r6( b\ idv ris av^icpopa 
 npoaTriTTTT), See § 51.) T^u alriav, finp6bn\osrjP ,rr ^k^lvovs 
 fi$ov(ra, <i ri ndBoi Xapibrjfios. Dem. Anstoc. 624, 20. 
 CH|€t, €dv Ti nddi] Xapidrjfios.) See § 73, 2. 
 
 (Subj. and Indie, after secondary tenses.) "EXeyov on aKpa ri 
 
 ivTLV €vh0V Ka\ oi TToXifXlOl TToXXoi, Ol TTaioVfTlV TOVS €V60U CV- 
 
 epanovs, then said that there wan a height, &c. Xen. An. V, 2, 17 
 (Here €Uv and iralouv might have been used.) , , „ , 
 
 *E8oK€t liot ravTTj TTfipaaBai (T<oe?}vai, cV^u/xov/xeVo) on, eav fitv 
 \dd<o, fTo>er)(ToyLai, k.t.\. Lys. Agor. p. 121,^^15. /Here « 
 Xd^oi/xi, (ra)6r]<Toitir]v might have been iLsed.) <^daK(ovT€, rjva<oeT] 
 olKabc, Kara y€ to avr^ bwarop SiaXXa^eii/ 'A^;/!/aioyff koi Aa«- 
 daifiouiovs, dneTrXevafu! Xex. Hell. I, G, 7. (He said ijp <ra>ea>, 
 which might have been changed to ft (raSdr].) 'Yrrccrxovro avroiSy 
 hv fVi noTibaiau icoaip ' k6r]paloi, €S ttjp 'ArnKqp eV/^aXfli/. ThUC. 
 I, 58. CHi' l(o<np, €<T^aXov^l(p.) So TllUC. I, 137. Kai ovk ((paaav 
 Up at, idp firj ns avroU xpht^cira 8iSw. . . 'O 8' vniax^ro dvbpX Uaara 
 boxrevp 7rePT€ p.vds, enav els Ba/^uXwrn ijKtoai, koI top fiiadop 
 epT€X?i, fiexp^ aP KaTa<rT^<TT] Tovs''EXXT]vas €is 'lapiap ndXiP. Xks. 
 An. I, 4, 12 and 13. *E0»7 XP^''^*' • * * °' "" fXeyx^^ao-t dia^aX- 
 XoPTfS TW 'EXXrjPOiP, a>s vpoboras opras TifKopTjOrjpai. lb. II, 5, 27. ^ 
 
 Et fie urn Km avTol ((paaap avru^P rovs Cipbpas diroKT€P€iP ovs 
 ?Xov(TtC<S./ra5. Thuc.U,5. ("Exoiei' might have been used.) Ka- 
 r a a X t cr f t J' I'as TruXas ((jyacrap, et fi/} eVdiTes Gvoi|ov<7ti/. AEX. An. 
 VU, 1, 16. (Ei fif) dpoi^oifp might have been used.) AvtoIs Toiavrrj 
 d6$a TTapeiaTTjKei, a>s, el flip irpdrepop eV aXXrjp irdXtp laaiv. Uupois 
 jcat 'Xeripalois iroX^tiriaovaiP' et 8' eV<9a8e Trpwrov a^^^^o^^V 
 oeSeVas 5XXovs roX/xiycreti', ic.t.X. Lys. Or. iun. p. 192, § 22. 
 (ToOro) npobrjXop ^p eaofifpop, ei /xi? t-fiets <a)Xu<reTe, li tt'as 
 already manifest that this woidd he so, unless you should prevent it {i.^. 
 taTO,, ei p.}) Ka>X^(TeT,). Aeschin. Cor. § 90. (KojXvtroire might be 
 used ; and KaXvaaire, representing eai/ fir) Ka)Xv<njT€, is found in one 
 Ms. and many editions.) See § 73, 2. 
 
 Note 1. The dependent verbs in indirect discourse may 
 be changed to the Optative, even when the leading verb re- 
 tains the Indicative; and sometimes (though rarely) a de- 
 pendent verb retains the Subjunctive or Indicative, when the 
 
 leading verb is changed to the Optative. This often gives 
 rise to a great variety of constructions in the same sentence. 
 E.g. 
 
 AjyWaff Sn ^roifiol etV» fidx^adai, e? ns i^epxoiro. Xen. 
 JUyr. IV, 1, 1. ( Erot/xot etVtJ/, edp ns f^epxrjrai.) Avaapbpos etVe 
 on napaanopbovs vfids exot, Kal on ov nepi TroXiretaj vpTiv tar at 
 oAAa Trepi (T(OTr}pias, ei firj noiijaaiff ^ Qr^papepr^s AceXevoi. Lys. in 
 ^w p. 127, § 74. (-Exo), Ka\ oi . . . eVrat, e'^„ ^^ Trot^'?^' a 0. 
 KeXevet. There^is no need of the emendations 7rot,5a-er' and /ceXeuet.) 
 ESoKet S^Xov eti/at on aiofjaopTat airhp, ei rts eVti/^TiAiYot. 
 Xen. An. VI, 1, 25. ^ OU Jyi^cJet El^ovXibrjs Brt, el X6yos Inobodrj- 
 trotro, Kat napayepotPTo p.ot irdptes oi brjfiorai, Kal j} ^^<f)os 
 diKaia)s bodeirj, ovbapoO yePTjaoprat ol perd toCtov ovpfaTrjKOTes, 
 Dem. Eubul. 1303, 22. (E^ aTroSo^iJaerat, Kal idp irapayipcoPTat, Kal 
 y\rp<pos bodn^ovbapov yeprjaopTat.) 'AyrjaiXaos ypods on, ei /xeV ixrjbe- 
 TeptoayXXrjylrotTO. HiaObp ovbirepos Xvtret toIs "EXXrjatP, dyopdp 
 6e ovSerepoff Trape^ei, onorepos r hp KpaTrjarj, oItos hOpbs 
 eaTat'ft fie ro) eVepo) (rvXXi}>/rotro, otros ye (blXos eo-oiro, 
 k.t.X. Xen. Ages. II, 31. 
 
 ^ "EXeyopoTi eiKora boKolep Xiyeip ^aaiXel, Kal rJKOtep fjyrjfiopas 
 fXOVT€s, oL avTovs, idp a-iropbal yi pap rat, d$ov a tp epOep e | o u o- 1 
 rdimTTjbeta. Xex. An. II, 3, 6. 'Enrjp^Ta, nola etrj t^p dpicop 
 OTTodep 01 XaXbaiot KaraOiopres Xrjt^oPTat. Id. C^t. Ill, 2. 1. 
 Touroiff Trpoi^Aeyoi/, on el papevaoto Kal ndpra pdXXop Trotr)'aois^ 
 a 17 OK ptp o\o, ei tIs tI ae ipara. Plat. Rep. I, 33 7 A. ('Epwra 
 in the direct discourse would belong under § 51, N. 3, the Futures 
 denotmg a hahit,) "EXe^as on p.iyi<TTOP etr, fiadelp 5nu>s 6el e^ep- 
 yaQecreat eKaara ' ei be fi^, ovbi r^s impLeXeias ec^rjaOa SieXos ovbep 
 wpeadat, ei fi^ ns imaratTO a bet Kal ws bel noielp. Xex. Oecon. 
 Xv, 2. 
 
 ^ In Dem. Cor. 276, 23, we have both the constructions of § 74, 1 
 m the same sentence: elfiePTodTo twp iKeipov <TVfifidx(op eiarjyolTo 
 ns.vTrdylreaOatTd irpdypa epopn^e irdpTas, dp b' 'Adr^palos rj 6 Todro 
 TTotayp, evnopcos Xrjcrfip. (Here et eto-j/yolro represents idp eton- 
 yrjTatf corresponding to idp ^.) 
 
 Note 2 According to the general rule (§ 69, 4), all relatives 
 and particles which take dp and the Subjunctive lose the dp when 
 such Subjunctives are changed to the Optative in indirect discourse 
 alter secondary tenses. In a few cases, however, the dp is irrecru- 
 larly retained, even after the verb has been changed to the Opta- 
 tive. This must not be confounded with dp belonging to the 
 Optative Itself, making an apodosis. E.g. 
 
 Ovk eaff oans ovx rjyelro tup elboroyv biKrjp pe Xi}^ eo-^at nap* av- 
 Ttop, enetbdp Taxiara durjp eipat boKtpLao-Be Itjp. Dem. Onet. I, 
 865, 24. (The direct discourse was ineibdp boKipLaaOfi, and the 
 regular mdu-ect form would be either inetbi) boKtp.aa6eirip or iwetbdw 
 doKifxaaeu). Here the verb is changed, while the original particJe 
 enetbap is retained.) See also § 77, 1, Note 8. 
 
 >'■: 
 
 ft 
 
164 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 74, 2. 
 
 $76.] 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 165 
 
 2 The Imperfect aiid Pluperfect remain in the In- 
 dicative unchanged, even after secondary tenses, in vhe 
 dependent (as well as in the leading) clauses of indirect 
 discourse, from the want of those tenses in tlie Optative. 
 
 (§ 70, 2, Note 1, a.) , , • 
 
 The Aorist Indicative also regularly remains un- 
 changed after secondary tenses, when it stood in a 
 dependent clause of the direct discourse ; not heing 
 changed to the Aorist Optative (as it may he when it 
 stood in the leading clause, § 70, 2). E. g. 
 
 .i^Z^L .Vo.'ov. M.>.#.o.-o airoj,<halthey sent "^^""0 sa^that 
 Tey blamed them for what they htid done before ; .. e. X.. ^pocrfl.- 
 
 aitT«aOa., they hoped that the SikeU whom they had sent for 
 ZmZet them Aere/THUC, VII, 80. '^^iUy.. .. . X.yo-« M 
 dTPjvvAfiai TTo, rhi anoMt, ir' Uintj^^av rout ottX t«. Id. V, 
 
 Dem. Onet. I, 869, 9. 
 
 Note 1 The Aorist Indicative is not changed to the Aorist 
 Ontatlve n the case just mentioned, as the latter tense in such de- 
 
 direct discourse.io that confusion might anse. Thus ,<p,,a tvpoi 
 t^. means .« sai<ljhatj,e ^"^^r^^X^M Z're^^^^^^ 
 
 f'rj:oTTSt\i:o'7eri'A'laf/'A«"'^« V^ ^'.- '*«' "\ 
 
 rptained for the same reason. (See § /O, 2, item. -.; 
 
 When no ambicniity can arise from the change of an Aonst In- 
 die Jt^erthToptati've, this tense may follow the S^-^-l,^^^^^^^ 
 (§ 69, 1), even in dependent clauses of a quotation. Th« <^^?^ 
 chiefly in causal sentences after on, &c., because (§ 81, 2), in wtucli 
 the Subjunctive can never be used. E. g. 
 
 Erve yhp X.V«. i>9 Aa«8at;xoVtot b^h rovro ,ro>.^V^^?^ «^;«J^; ^^ 
 ov< ^^^^.r^'/^.x'^r Xfn Hell VII, 1. 34. (The direct discourse 
 
 ZZ T'T2,yi,,rZeal {<t>aa,) i. ivo<r.i,rarov f"'" «^/W"f'«-'",";^' 
 
 n, 121. (Heie on Karakva-fif represents on KareXvaa, because I 
 took down; 6t€ diroTufiot (so the Mss.) may also be understood in a 
 causal sense, since he had cut off. Madvig, however, reads on in 
 both clauses.) See also § 77, 1, e, and examples. 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect or Pluperfect sometimes stands irreon- 
 larly in a dependent (as well as in the leading) clause, after a 
 secondary tense, to represent a Present or Perfect Indicative, which 
 would regularly be retained or changed to the Present or Perfect 
 Optative. Such clauses really abandon the construction of indirect 
 discourse. (See § 70, 2, N. 2; § 77, 1, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 ^EXf-yoi/ ovKoKois Tr)V*EWdha iXevBtpovv avrov, et dvhpa^ biecfidd' 
 pfvovrexflpai dirraipopevovs ovre TroXfplovs. Thuc. Ill, 32. (Ou 
 KaXSis iXfvdfpois, ft 5 1 a (^ ^ f I p f I r .) OCre yap to7s Bfols €<pr] Kn\Q)5 
 <;^€ti/, €t rats p€yd\ais Ova^iais pdWov fj rals piKpais e^aipov. Xex. 
 Mem. I, 3, 3. (Ei xaipovaiv.) Kal €<f)T] dvai trap iavTua oaov p-rj rju 
 ai/jyXtu/ifW Dem.^ Olymp. 1172, 1. ("Otroi/ plj eanu 'dvT}\a>p^i/bv.) 
 A peu €i\T)<f)ei TTJs noXfcos aTroSoxrfti/ (rjyovprjv), I thought that he 
 would give back what he had taken from the city; i. e. a t tXnd)ev 
 oTToSwo-f t. Id. F. L. 388, 17. 
 
 § 75. When a dependent clause of the original sen- 
 tence contains a secondary tense of the Indicative im- 
 plying the non-fulfilment of a condition, the same mood 
 and tense are retained in the indirect discourse, after 
 both primary and secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 *ESo*c«, fl pfj e(f>daa-av ^vWa^ovres rovs audpas, irpoBoBrjvai &v rrjp 
 nokiv. Thuc. VI, 61. (If €0^ao-aj/ had been changed to the Opta- 
 tive, the construction would have become that of § 76.) Otfade top 
 •nan pa, €i fiff TipoBeov rjv rd ^vXa koi ib€r)6rj ovtos avrov . . . napa- 
 a^flv TO vavXov, iaaai dv nort, k.t.X., aXX' ovk av (^vXdrrdv Ka\ rrfP 
 nprjv Xap^dvfiv, fas tKoplvaro to eauroO. Dem. Timoth. 1194, 
 13. Tovroiv finrjv dXrjdts, olfad* ovk dv avTt)v Xa^eiv ; Id. Aph. I, 
 831, 6. Hifios dv vpoiv 7rv0oipT]v, tip dv irorf yvayprjp n€p\ fpov 
 f cx«rf , €1 p,f] €jr€Tpii]pdpxT]ara dXXd nXeap (oxdfiijp. Id. Polycl. 
 
 M J^ ^ i • £t m 
 
 § 76. An Optative in a dependent clause of the 
 original sentence (as in the leading clause) is retained 
 without change of mood or tense in all indirect dis- 
 course. E. g. 
 
 EiTTfj/ on tXQoi dv eh Xoyuvs, (I opfjpovs Xa/3oi. Xen. Hell. HI, 
 1, 20. Htt3i/ dv Bid Tovro rvyxdveiv (doKel fioi), (in bioKrOt trap 
 uvroiv. Xen. An. VI, 1, 26. ''EXfytj/ ort ovk dv norf irpoolro, imX 
 nira^ ^iXos avrols iyevero, ov8* et en pev peiovs yevoivro en he ku- 
 
 i 
 
166 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§76. 
 
 Ktop IT pa ^€ lap. lb. I, 9, 10. Aeivbv av ri iraQelv aavrov rfKnt^fS, (2 
 TTvOoivd^ ovroL TO. TTfTvpayyikva aoi. Dem. F. L. 416, 11. 
 
 Remark. Sentences which belong under § 76 are often tians- 
 lated like those which in the direct discourse were expressed by a 
 Future and a dependent Subjunctive, and which belong under § 74, 
 1. Thus %\€y€v on t\6oi &p^ ft roOro ylvoiro (or t\€y€P ikQiip aPy et 
 Tovro yfPOiTo), as well as eXeyfP on fXf vcrotTO, €i tovto yepoiro (or 
 €\eyop eXevo-fo-^ai, €i tovto yepoiTo), may be translated he said that he 
 would come if this should happen ; although in the first two sentences 
 the direct discourse was eX^ot/xi ai/, €i tovto ytVoiro, / would come if 
 this should happen ; and in the last two, (XtvaofuUf tap tovto yevrjTai^ 
 I toUl come if this shall happen. 
 
 ijli 
 
 Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse. 
 
 § 77. The principles which apply to dependent 
 clauses of indirect discourse (§ 74, 1 and 2) apply also 
 to any dependent clause in a sentence of any kind (even 
 when what precedes is not in indirect discourse), if such 
 a clause expresses indirectly the thought of any other 
 person than the speaker, or even a former thought of 
 the speaker himself. 
 
 After primary tenses this never affects the construc- 
 tion ; but after secondary tenses such a clause may 
 either take the Optative, in the teme in which the 
 thought would have been originally conceived, or retain 
 both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse. 
 Here, as in § 74, 2, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and 
 Aorist Indicative are retained unchanged. 
 
 1. This applies especially (a) to clauses depending on the 
 Infinitive which follows verbs of commanding, advising, wish- 
 ing^ &c; these verbs implying thought or the expression of 
 thought, although the Infinitive after them is not in indirect 
 discourse. (See § 73, 1, Rem.) It applies also (6) to the 
 Optative (though not to the Indicative) in causal sentences in 
 which the speaker states the cause as one assigned hj othert 
 (81^ 2) ; — (c) to clauses containing a protasis with the apodo- 
 sis implied in the context (§ 53, Note 2), or with the apodo- 
 
 § 77, 1.] SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 
 
 167 
 
 sis expressed in a verb like $avfid{<o, &c. (§ 56) ; — (d) to 
 temporal sentences expressing a past intention or expectation, 
 especially those introduced by «<os and irpip, until, after past 
 tenses (§ 66, 2, Note 1) ; — and sometimes (e) even to ordi- 
 nary relative sentences, which would otherwise take the In- 
 dicative. E. g. 
 
 (a.) *E^ov\oPTo fX^fii/, (t TOVTO yfPotTo, they wished to go, if this 
 should happen. (Here €ap tovto yei/i/rat might be used, as the 
 form in which the wish would originally be conceived.) TabaTUP de 
 Kol r<o^pvap €K€\(v<r(P o n bvpaiPTO XajSowrar \i€Tahia>K€i.p ' kcu. 
 oo-Ttff flxf Tag iirofiepas dyeXas, firrf TovT<a koI dpa irpo^aTa noXXa 
 iXavvfiP, oTqj a.p ovtop 7rvv6dvT]Tat ovTa, q>s tVicrc^ayei/;. Xen. Cyr. 
 VII, 3, 7. (Here o rt dvpaivTo represents o ti up dvvrjade in the 
 direct command, while oirrj ap irvpddprjTai represents otp? dp irvpOdprj.) 
 *E(iovXoPTO yap acbiaip, ei npa Xd^oifp, virdpxfi'V dpT\ t<op €pBop, tjp 
 
 M ' > yy ' T*,,,-,^ TT K /*TiT.. \ '/3 QT>rl t,. 
 
 X'^pfl-) 
 
 Upoflnop avToXs prj pavpa\€lp KopipBiois, fjp prj eVi KepKvpap ttXc- 
 0)0-4 Kal pe XX a a IP dno^aipcLP. Id. I, 45. (*Hi/ prj nXerjTf^ Ka\ 
 u€XXr)T€.) Kai irapriy^'eiXap eVetSn dempriae lap avPfCTKCvaap^Povs 
 TvaPTas apairaviO'dai, Kai eTTfcroai tjpik up nt TrapayyeAAr]. -aji.n. 
 An. Ill, 5, 18. (^Eirtibap tenrprjO-rjTf, and rjPiK dp tis irapayyeXXri.) 
 Hfpi avTOiP Kpv(^a TTepnei, kcXcvodp • - - prj a^f ii/ai 7rp\p dp avTOi TraXii* 
 KopiaOaaip. Thuc. I, 91. (Up\p KopiaOfup might have been 
 used.) Kai ttoXXukis toIs *A$r}paiois irap^pei, fjp dpa noTC Kara yrjP 
 ^laaBaio-i, Kara^dpTas ts ovtop toIs paval npos dnaPTas dpBlaTaaOai. 
 Id. I, 91. (Et ^laaOfiep might have been used.) *H^iovi/ avTovs 
 fjyfpopas <r(f)a>p yeptaOai Ka\ Ilavaapia pij erriTpeirtip, rjp ttov /Stafjyroi. 
 Id. I, 95. (El irov /3ta^oiro might have been used.) ^AtpiKPovp- 
 "ai a)f 2iTdXKr]P, ^ovXopcpoi Treicrat ovtop, €i dvpaiPTO, aTpoTfixrok 
 in\ TTjp UoTidaiap. Id. II, 67. "Eroi/xoff ^p dnoTipeip, ei KOTaypoiep 
 avTov. Isoc. Trapez. 361 E. § 16. (This example might be placed 
 also under c.) Eittoi/ prjbfpa t<5i/ oiria-dep Kipeladai, irplp dp 6 TvpoaSiv 
 Tjyi]Tai, I commanded that no one, &c. Xen. Cyr. II, 2, 8. 
 
 Ilapi/yyeXXero yap avTols beKa ficV ovff Qrjpapiprjs aTTcSfi^e X^*P®" 
 Tovrja-ai, d€Ka di ovi ot etpopoi KtXevoiep. Lys. in Erat. p. 127, 
 § 76. (Ovs aTTcSei^e, and ovs dp KeXevuiaip. See § 74, 2.) 'EKeXtvai 
 p€ TTJP €maToXr}p f^p eypa-^a oUaBe dovpai, the letter which I had 
 written. Xen. Cyr. H, 2, 9. ('Hi/ ypdylraipi would mean whatever 
 letter I might write, representing ^p dp ypdyjrTjs.) So ddep ^X6op, 
 Thuc. VU, 27. 
 
 (b.) ^EkokiCop on (TTpaTTjyos ciP ovk eTreJayoi, they abused him 
 because he did not lead them out (as they said). Thuc. II, 21. 
 See other examples under § 81, 2. See also § 81, 2, Rem. 
 (f.) "QiKTcipop, €1 dXaxToiPTOt they pitied them, in case they 
 
 I 
 
168 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 77, 1. 
 
 fit 
 
 should he captured: the idea in full is, they pitied them^ thinking of 
 what icould befall them if they should he captured. Xex. An. I, 4, 7. 
 (Et akaaovTai might have been used.) Ai5oi/to9 8' avrcd 7rdfnro\\a 
 dcdpa Tidiyavarov, et OTreX^ot , dneKpiparo, offering him many gifts, if 
 he would go away. Id. Ages. IV, 6. (Eav direXdrj might have been 
 used.) ^vXaKus (TVfi7r€fnr€i^ onois ^vKdrToitv avrou, koi el twv dypioiv 
 Ti(f)av€iT} 6T)pi(ov, and (to be ready) in case any wild beasts shoula 
 appear; his thought being fdv rt ^av^. Id. Cyr. I, 4, 7. See 
 other examples of the Optative under § 53, N. 2. 
 
 Hv df Tis (iTTTj ^ €niylrr](l)i(rrj Kivelvra XpripLara ravra €S aXXo rt, 
 Bdvarov C^fiiau iiriOfVTo, they set death as the penalty, if any one shordd 
 move, or put to vote a motion, to divert this money to any other purpose. 
 Thuc. II, 24. (El ewrot ff €iriylrr)<pia€i€v might have been used.) 
 TaXXa, ^v frt vavp-a^fiv oi ^ABrjvaloi ToXfifjaaxri, Trapea-Kfvd^ovro, i. e. 
 they made their other preparations, (to.be ready) in case the Athenians 
 should dare, &c. Id. VII, 59. (Their thought was, we will be ready, 
 in case they shall dare, fjv To\firj(T(oai.) So rjv iaxriv, IV, 42. Ov to 
 "kotnou €fif\\ov €^€iv, (I firj vavKparr)(Tov(T iv , they were not likely 
 to have them (provisions) for the future (as they thought), unless they 
 should hold the sea. Id. VII, 60. 
 
 *E3avp.a^€ 8* €1 Tis dpfrfju eTrayycXXo^fvor dpyvpiov trpdrrotro , 
 he ivondered that any demanded money, &c. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 7. 
 (But in I, 1, 13, we find i6avpxi^€ 8' ft /z^ ff)avfpov avrols ta-rtv, he 
 wondered that it icas not plain.) "Exaipov dyanav ti ris edaoi, I re- 
 joiced, being content if any one would let it pass. Plat. Rep. V, 450 
 A. O^K V^X^^^^ ** roiovTo KOKov fVayet r<a, he was not ashamed 
 that he was bringing such a calamity on any one. Dem. Mid. 548, 24. 
 T(o de firfdiv iavra avveibori dfivov elajjft, ft 7rovripa>p epyiov Bo^ci koi- 
 vofvfiv T<» a-i<i)7rTJ(rai, it seemed hard, if he was to appear to be impli- 
 cated, &c. ; he thought, dfivov tariu, el Sd^w (§49, 1, N. 3). Id. 
 F. L. 351, 18. (Here id^oi might have been used, like tdaoi above.) 
 So Aeschin. Cor. § 10. Kai cyo) top Evtjpop e^iaKapicra, el las aKri6S>s 
 e^ei, TavTr)p ttjp tc^ptjp koI ovt(os efifie\ci>s StSaor/cft, / congratulated 
 him, if he really had this art (as he thought). Plat. Apol. 20 B. 
 (Here exoi and diBda-Koi might have been used.) 
 
 (d.) 'Erropbas e-noii](TaPTo, etoi dirayye\6elrj to. \ex6ivTa els 
 i\aKedaifjMpa, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said 
 shotdd be announced at Sparta; i. e. eas ap dTrayyfX^,^, which 
 might have been retained. Xen. Hell. lU, 2, 20. *Qpae 8' eirl 
 KpaiTTPOV Boperjp, irpo he KVfiaT ea^ep, ecus o ye ^air)Kea(n ^tXT/pcV/iotcrt 
 fi ly e I rj, until Ulysses should be among the Phaeacians ; i. e. eois av 
 /ity^. Od. V, 385. So ficor 6epp.alpoiTOy Od. IX, 376. * hirr^yopeve 
 fiT]depa ^dWeiP, 7rp\p Kvpos e fiTrXrjade irj Orjpwp, until Cyrus should 
 be satisfied. Xex. Cyr. I, 4, 14. (His words were -npXv &p ep.- 
 ir\r)(T6^.) Ol be p.epnpTes earaaap, oinvore nvpyos *A;(aicoi/ aXXof eneX- 
 6(op Tpdxop 6pp.j](Te if KCLi, ap^eiap TroXc/xoio, i. e. they stood wait- 
 ing for the time when, &c. U. IV, 335. (Here ottotop opprjcrr], &c. 
 might be used.) So II. II, 794. UpovKiprjcrap to aTl(l>os, ats navao- 
 fAfPovs Tov btcoypov, cTTft a(f)ds tboi'v Trpoopprjcraprasy when they 
 should ite them, &c. Xex. Cyr. I, 4, 21. 
 
 § 77, 2.] 
 
 SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 
 
 169 
 
 1 
 
 Ot yap br) acj^ai dwlei 6 Beos Tj)y drroiKirjs, ivpXp brj dniKavTai eg 
 avTqp Ai^vTjp. Hdt. IV, 156. ("AniKoivTo might be used.) Ot 
 be KopLpdioi ov TrpoedvpfjOrjaap ^u/xTrXeij/, nplp to. "ladfiia, ci Tore 5i», 
 bieopTda-axTLP. ThuC. VIII, 9. 
 
 (e.) Kai ^ree (rrjpa IbeaBai, 6 tti pa ol ya/xjSpoio irdpa npotToio 
 (pepoiTO, he asked to see the token, which (he said) he was bringing 
 from Proetus, i. e. he said (fytpopai. II. VI, 177. KaTrjyopeop Tcav 
 Alyipr)Te(OP to, ireTTOir) Koiep Trpobopres r^i/'EXXaSa, i. e. they accused 
 them for what (as they said) they had done. Hdt. VI, 49. So ra 
 ire'nopda>s eirj, I, 44. KaXel top Adiop, tivfjprjp iraXai&p aireppidTaiv 
 exov(T\ v<f> S)P 6 dp 01 p,ep avToi, tt^p be TiKTOVcrap Xiiroi, by which 
 (as she said) he had perkhed himself, and had left her the mother, &c. 
 Soph. O. T. 1245. (If the relative clause contained merely the 
 idea of the speaker, eOape and eXme would be used. Here no am- 
 bifTuity can arise from the use of the Aorist Optative. See § 74, 2, 
 N^l.) 
 
 Note 1. Causal sentences are usually constructed without re- 
 ference to this principle. See § 81, with Rem. 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occasionally represent 
 the Present and Perfect Indicative in this construction, as in § 74, 2, 
 N. 2. Such clauses are simply not included in the indirect discourse. 
 
 'Eroiftoff TJp, el fiep tovt(op rt tipyaarroy biKr}P bovpai, el b* airoXv 
 Oelrj, npx^iv, he was ready, if he had done any of these things^ to be 
 punished; but if he should he acquitted, to hold his command. Thug. 
 VI, 29. (EipyaaTo represents eipyaap-ai, while el dno\v6eiii repre- 
 sents edp dwoXv^o).) 
 
 Note 3. ^Ai/ is occasionally retained with relatives and temporal 
 particles in sentences of this kind, even when the Subjunctive to 
 which they belonged has been changed to the Optative. See § 74, 
 1, Note 2. E. g. 
 
 Touff be \ap.^dvoPTas T?)ff ofiiXlas p-iaBop dpbpaTrobiaras eavTu>p mre- 
 KaXei, bia to dpayKalop avTols eipai biaXtyeadaL nap ayp ap Xa^oieu 
 TOP pnaQop, because they were obliged (as he said) to converse with those 
 from whom they received the pay. Xex. Mem. I, 2, 6. (Here lap hv 
 XdfSoiep represents 2)i/ ap Xd^aaip.) Kai p,oi Tdb' ^p npooprjTa, ... to 
 (fidppxiKOv TOVTO aco^eip ep,e, eas ap dpTixpi-<rTOP app.oaaip.1. nov. 
 Soph. Trach. 687. (See Schneidewin's note.) 'Hiiovp avTovf fia- 
 fTTiyovp TOP eKboQePTa, ea>s a v TaXrjBrj bo^etep avTols Xtyf ti/. IsOC. 
 Trap. 361 D. § 15. Xaipeip ((orjs ap Ka\ ovic dnoKpipaio, ecos ap ra dn 
 eKeiprjs oppriBepra iTKey\taio, 'you would not answer, until you should 
 have examined, &c. Plat. Pliaed. 101 D. (The direct thought of 
 the person addressed would be, ccoy ap o-/c€\|/^<«)/xat.) See § 34, 1, 
 
 It is doubtful whether idv was ever used with the Optative in this 
 way. 
 
 2. Upon this principle (§ 77) final and object clauses with 
 8 
 
 < 
 
 I 
 
 
 'i 
 
 II 
 
 ;1 
 
 :.| 
 
1 
 
 170 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 [§ 77, 2. 
 
 i 
 
 11^ 
 
 II 
 
 Iva, oTToof, /A»i, &c., after secondary tenses, admit the double con- 
 struction of indirect discourse. This appears in the frequent 
 use of the Subjunctive or the Future Indicative instead of 
 the Optative in these sentences, after secondary tenses, when 
 either of these is the form in which the purpose would have 
 been originally conceived. Thus we may say either ri\$tv Xva 
 Xboi or ri\&€v Iva XBrj, he came that he might see; the latter 
 beino" allowed because the person referred to would himself 
 have said epx^M^* tva i8(». See § 44, 2, § 45, and § 46, with 
 the examples. 
 
 Note. The principles of § 74 and § 77 apply to clauses which 
 depend upon final and object clauses, as these too are considered as 
 standing m indirect discourse. E. g. 
 
 *E\66vT€S es Aaicfbaifiova (enpaa-aov) otto)? eTOifidcraivTO rifxto- 
 plav, fjv derj. Thuc. I, 58. (Here el Sc'oi might have been used. 
 See § 55, 2.) 'Ecpo^elro yap fifj oi Aa»c«Sat/xoi/toi acjyas^ onore aacpSyg 
 aKova-eiav, ovKeri d<f)a}(Tiv. Id. I, 91. (RGTe oirorav dKov(Ta>a-iv 
 is changed to onore aKoixreiavy although dfpcocriv is retained by § 77, 
 2.) Mcyo TO Se'off iyivcro firj irapaiiKiovrfs oi UeXonowfja-ioi, €t Koi u)S 
 fiTj bi€voovvTo fifveiv, TTOpBcoaLV rai TroXctf, the fear teas great lest 
 the Peloponnesians as they sailed hy, even if under the circunistances 
 they had not been thinking of remaining, might destroy the cities. Id. 
 in, 33. (Here diepoovvro is retained by § 74, 2.) 
 
 *'0'ira}<; and"0 in Indirect Quotations. 
 
 § 78. 1. In a few cases otto)? is used in indirect quo- 
 tations where we should expect m or otl. This occurs 
 chiefly in poetry. E. g. 
 
 Tout' avro fii) fioi <f>pdC\ oiras ovk ct KaKos- SoPH. O. T. 548. 
 
 "Ava^y €pS> fjL€v ovx oTTcoy rdxovs vno Bvottvovs iKavto. Id. Ant. 223. 
 
 So Ant. 685 : on<os av fir) Xcyfiy. 'Avdneiaop ok cos /xoi a/zftVo) earl 
 
 Taira ovtu> noieo^ieva. Hdt. 1, 37. So IH, 115. So ontos navra 
 
 imara^i, Plat. Euthyd. 296 E. 
 
 2. In a few passages in Homer we find o (the neuter 
 of 09) used for otc. E. g. 
 
 TiyvaxTKcov o ol avros vnelpexf x^ V«" 'AttoXXwi/, knowing thatApoUo 
 Idmself held over him his hands. II. V, 433. Eu w Koi rjfxeU Up-ev o 
 Toi adevos OVK (ttkiktov. II. VHI, 32. Afvcraere yap to ye irdvTfs, 
 o /iot yepas epx^rai ak\ri, that my prize goes elsewhere. II. I, 120. 
 So Od. 5ai, 295. 
 
 § 81, 1.] "On BEFORE DIRECT QUOTATIONS. 171 
 
 Note. *O0ovv€Ka and ovvfKa in the tragedians, and ovveKa in Ho- 
 mer, are sometimes used like on or ojff, that ; as ayyeXXe 66ovv€Ka 
 Tt6vT)K *Ope(m]s, Soph. El. 47 ; tadt tovto, ovucku "EXXijves iapeVf 
 Id. Phil. 232. See Soph. El. 1478, Trach. 934 (ovv€Ka with Opt.); 
 and II. XI, 21 ; Odyss. V, 216 ; XIII, 309. 
 
 '^Oti before Direct Quotations. 
 
 § 79. Even direct quotations are sometimes introduced by 
 oTt, without further change in the construction. "On thus 
 used cannot be expressed in English. E. g. 
 
 k 
 
 ^^ on(o9 T^S diKTjs dK0va-r]s" lb. Ill, 1, 8. *U €povp.€v npos avTovs-> oti 
 " *HSt/cfi yap ijpds 17 TroXtff, kqI ovk dpBu>£ tj]v SIktjv cKpive" — Tavra fj 
 rt fpovfiev; Plat. Crit. 50 B. So Phaed. 60 A. See also Hdt. 
 II, 115. _ 
 
 / V - i \ 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Causal Sentences. 
 
 ., i-^4j l-i^^ 
 
 I 
 
 § 80. Causal sentences express the caitse or reason 
 of something stated in the leading sentence. They 
 may be introduced by ore, Biorc or Bcoirep, ovveKa or 
 60ovp€Ka^ and «?, because; or by eirei^ eTrethr)^ ore, 
 oirore^ eure, and sometimes ottoi;, since^ seeing that, 
 
 Rkmark. "On and u>s in this causal sense must not be con- 
 founded with oTi and coy, that, in indirect quotations; and cVfi, 
 fTvahi], oT€, and oTTore must not be confounded with the same parti- 
 cles in temporal sentences. 
 
 § 81. 1. Causal sentences regularly take the In- 
 dicative, after both primary and secondary tenses ; past 
 causes being expressed by the past tenses of the Indica- 
 tive. The negative particle is ov. E. g. 
 
 Kijdfro yap Aamwi', ori pa BinjaKoyras oparo. H. I, 56. Xa>o^c 
 
 Iti 
 
172 
 
 CAUSAL SENTENCES. 
 
 [§ 81, 1. 
 
 voSj OT apiaTov*Axai5>v ovbev fTiaas- 11.1,244. Arjfxn^opos ^aai' 
 Xfi»ff, fTTfl ovTibavolaiv dvaaa-f is . 11. I, 231. Mq d^ ovras KXeTrre 
 voco, (ne\ ov TrapeXeutrf at ovde fie ireia-fis* II. I, 132. NoC(roy 
 apa arparov (opae kukiju, 6\(kovto 5c \aoi^ ovveKa rbu Xpvarjv r^Tlp,r)(T 
 apT^TTipa ATpfidrjs. II. I, 11. Kai Tpii]pr]s de tol r) <T€(rayp,evr) avdpijiTTOiV 
 8ia tI oKKo (f)o^€p6u cVri j) on. raxv ttX f i ; 8ia ri be a\\o aXviroi dWrj" 
 Xotff €1<t\v oi ffiirXeoPTts rj diori iv Td|ft Kadr^vrai; Xkx. Oec. VIII, 
 8. Oi tpoX ^iXot ovTUis f-xpvTfs fiepi epov diareXoixTiv, ov 8ia to (biXtlv 
 €fie, dWa SioTTfp Koi airoi av oi out a i (ieXriarot yiyveaBat. Id. Mem. 
 IV, 8, 7. (Seti § 42, 2, Note.) Upos ravra Kpvnre prjdev, as 6 itdvff 
 6pa)v Kai irdvT oKovav ndifT dvairTixTa € i xpot^os, i. e. since time 
 develops all things. SoPH. Hippon. Fr. 280. Mt'-ya be to opov Tpa- 
 ^^vaiy €7rei koI toIs drjpiois nodos tis eyyiyveTai tq)v awTpocfycov. 
 Xen. Mem. II, 3, 4. "Or ow napaivova- ovbiv es TrXt'oi/ ttoio), 'kc'tis 
 ddnypai.^ SoPH. O. T. 918. *07r(>rf ovv iroXis pev tcis Ibias ^vp(f)opas 
 oia T€ (jytpeiVj els be eKacrros ray eKelvr^s dbvvaros (so. eort), ttcos ou 
 Xpr) irdvTas dpvveiv avrfj ; ThuC. II, 60. "Ore toivvu Toxiff ovtcos 
 €X'*» irpocrriKei irpoBvpais eOeXeiv dKOveiv touv ^ovkopevioif (rvp^ovXeveiu. 
 Dem. 01. 1, 9, 3. For evrey sinccy see Soph. Aj. 715, O. C. 84; for 
 Sttou, see Hdt. I, 68. 
 
 2. Wlien, however, it is implied that the cause is as- 
 signed by some other person than the speaker, the prin- 
 ciple of indirect discourse (§ 77, 1) applies to causal 
 sentences. 
 
 This has no effect upon the form after primary tenses ; 
 but after secondary tenses it allows the verb to stand in 
 the Optative, in the tense originally used by the person 
 who assigned the cause. E. g. 
 
 Tof UepiKXea eKOKi^ov, oti (TTpaTrjyos c^v ovk eire^dyoij they abused 
 Pericles^ because being general he did not lead them out. Tnuc. II, 
 21. (This states the reason assigned by the Athenians for reproach- 
 ing Pericles : if Thucydides had wished to assign the cause merely 
 on his own authority, he would have used on ovk ene^fjyev.) Tovs 
 trvvovTas eboKei Trotelv direxeaBai. reSi/ dvoaicovj etveiirep r)yrj(raiVTo 
 p.r]bev av noTe 5)i/ TrpdrTotev 6eovs biaXa6eiv. Xen. Mem. I, 4, 19, 
 (See § 74, 2, N. 1.) OlaOa eiraiveaavra avTov (J'Oprjpov) tqu 'Ayape- 
 p.vova, a>s ^aaiXei/s eirj dyadosi because {as he said) he was a good 
 king. Id. Symp. IV, 6. Sowpcvp^icot, because (as he said) he 
 had found, Hdt. I, 44. 
 
 Kemark. We should suppose that in causal sentences of the 
 second class (§81,2) the mood and tense by which the cause would 
 have been originally stated might also be retained, as in ordinary 
 indirect discourse; so that in the first example above (Tiiuc. II. 21) 
 on OVK (n-(£dyc( mi^ht also be used, in the same sense as ort ovk 
 
 §82.] 
 
 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 
 
 173 
 
 iire^dyoi. This, however, seems to have been avoided, to pre- 
 vent the ambiguity which would arise from the three forms, ene^riyev, 
 fire^dyoi, and ene^dyei. It will be remembered that the fii-st form, 
 which is the regular one in causal sentences of the first class (§ 81, 1), 
 is allowed only by exception in indirect quotations (§ 70, 2, N. 2) ; 
 for in indirect discourse the tenses of the Indicative regularly de- 
 note time present, past, or future relatively to the leading verb ; while 
 in causal sentences (as in most other constructions) they regularly 
 denote time absolutely present, past, or future. (See § 9.) 
 
 Note 1. The Optative in causal sentences appears to have been 
 used only after on, ws, and eneL It is not found in Homer. 
 
 Note 2. If a cause is to be expressed by an apodosis in which 
 the Indicative or Optative with av is required, those forms can of 
 course follow the causal particles. E. g. 
 
 Aeopai ovv (rov napapelvat rjplu' wf eyco ovb i.v evos rjbiov aKOv 
 aaipi ff <rov, I beg you then to remain with us; as there is not one whom 
 J should hear more gladly than you. Plat.^ Prot. 335 D. NOi/ be 
 fireibr} ovk c^f'Xei? /cat f/ioi ns daxoXia earl Ka\ ovk au olos t ftr}v (rot 
 irapapeluai dnoTeivovn p^Kpovs Xoyovs — iXdelu yap iroi pe bel — et/it* 
 inel Koi tovt hv Xaoas ovk drjbas crow tJkovov. lb. 335 C 
 
 Note 3. For relative causal sentences, see § 65, 4. For the 
 caused use of the Participle, see § 109, 4. 
 
 r 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 Expression op a Wish. 
 
 Remark. The Greek has one form to express a wish re- 
 ferring to SL future object, and another to express one referring 
 to a present or past object which (it is implied) is not or was 
 not attained. To the former class belong such wishes as 
 that he may come ! — thai this may happen ! — Utinam veniat ; 
 to the latter, such as that this had happened! — that thit 
 were true I — Utinam hoc factum esset, — Utinam hoc verum 
 esset. 
 
 § 82. If the wish refers to the future, the Optative is 
 iisel after the particles of wishing eioe or « yap (nega- 
 
 fi 
 
174 
 
 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 
 
 [§82. 
 
 lively, ecOe fiij, el yap fiij, or simply fiv), that, if, 
 would that ( that not, <fec.). EtOe and el yap may, how- 
 ever, be omitted ; and thus the Optative often stands 
 alone to express a wish. 
 
 The Present Optative refers to a continued or re- 
 peated action or state in the future ; the Aorist (which 
 is the most common) refers to a momentary or single 
 act in the future. E. g. 
 
 At yap €fio\ Toa(rT)v8€ deoi dvvafiiv napadelev, that the Gods 
 would clothe me with so muck strength! Od. Ill, 205. Ai^ ovtcos, 
 Evfiaie, <f)i\ov ^ii narpl yivoio, mayest thou become in like manner 
 a friend to father Zeus. ^ Od. XIV, 440. 'YfTiir ^^u 6fo\ dolfv 'OUfi- 
 ma dafuiT (xof^^s CKiripaai Upidfioio ttoXip, ev d" oUaS' iKiaQai, may 
 the Gods grant you, &c. D. I, 18. M^ iiav daTrovdi y€ Kai okX^^s 
 aTToXoifirju.ll. XXII, 304. To fjL€P vvv raOra Trp^aaois Tanfp iv 
 X^pari fx^is, may you for the present continue to do what you now have 
 in hand. Hot. VII, 5. e^o-o) wpvTavfV, tj prjKert ^arjv fyw, or may 
 I no longer live. Arist. Nub. 1255. Nko)); d^'o rt ivdaiv vpTiv 
 fifWei (TwoiadVy and may that opinion prevail, &c. Dem. Phil. I, 
 55, 6. TfdvaiTjVy ore p.ou firjKfTi ravra fieXot, MiMNERM. I, 2. 
 nXovaiov 8€ vofiiCoifii tov (ro(f)6v. Plat. Phaedr. 279 C. *Q nai. 
 y iv o t o Trarpoff €VTvxk(TT€po^. So PH. Aj. 550. Ovt(o viKrja aipi r 
 «ya) Ka\ vop.i(oip.rjv a-o(f)6sy on this condition may I gain the prize 
 (in this case) and be (always) considered wise. Arist. Nub. 520. 
 (See Note 4.) Eld\ J Xwore, (plXos rjpiu yivoio. Xen. Hell. IV, 
 1,38. Ei yap y€Uoip.Tjv, tUvou, dvri arov v€Kp6s» EuR. Plippol. 
 ^1^?* , ^ *',»'< »'«^yfo* H-^v ravra q)s ^ovXofifda. Thuc. VI, 20. 
 Avros dfi cTTiarrjaft Kai airavra, av iya ^ovXa)fiai. — 'AXXa /SovXiy- 
 6€irjs, may you only be willing! Plat. Eutliyd. 296 D. So ciVi;, 
 be it so, — well. 
 
 Mr)K€r fiTfir *08va-TJi Kdprj cofWKTiv eVfij;, firj^ tri TiyXf/xa;^©*© 
 narrip K€KXrfp,€vos eti;i/, then may the head of Ulysses no longer 
 remain on his shoulders, and no longer may I be called the father of 
 Telemachus. H. II, 259. (See Rem. 1.) 
 
 From its use in wishes the Optative Mood (ey«Xt<rtff fvKriKn) 
 received its name. 
 
 Remark 1. The Future Optative was not used in wishes in 
 classic Greek. The Perfect was probably not used except in the 
 signification of the Present (§ 17, N. 3), as in the last example, ii 
 such a phrase as fXBf v€vi,kt)koi were used, it would mean that it 
 may prove (hereafter) that he has been victorious ! See § 18, 1. 
 
 ^ Remark 2. In Homer we occasionally find the Present Optative 
 in a wish referring to present time, where later writers would have 
 med the Imperfect Indicative. E. g. 
 
 §82.] 
 
 optative. 
 
 175 
 
 Et yap (yiov ovra yf Aios iraii alyioxoio ^ 
 Eirjv fjparandvra^reKOt, de /lic 7r(5Twa *Hpi7, 
 Tioip>T]P 6' wy Tier 'Adrjvalrj Ka\ 'ArroXXmv, 
 *Qs vvv Tjpepr) rj^e kokov <f>(p(i 'ApydoiaiVy 
 
 that I were the son of Zeus, and that Hera were my "^^^^^^^li^ ^^ 
 
 1 were honored as Athene and Apollo are honored, &c. II. XIU, 825. 
 (Here rUoi is nearly equivalent to piirr^p elr): cf. a> T€/co€<ra, mother. 
 quoted under § 83, 1.) 
 
 *Q yepov, €i<9', o)ff 6v^lbs fvi (Trr]B€(T(ri ^iKoktiv ^ 
 "Qs roi yovvaO' cttoito, ^It) be roi ^fXTrfbos €Itj' 
 *AXXd o-c yrjpas reipfi ofxouov • o)S o(|)€XcV ris^ 
 *AvbpS)V dXXos ^X^iv, aif Sc Kovporepoia-i ^(relvai. 
 ITie idea is, that thy knees equalled thy heart in strength, &c. IL 
 IV, 313. At the end we have the more regular form, ocfytXtv nt 
 SXXos €xfiv, would that some other man had it (yrjpas). § 83, 2, N. 1. 
 El6^ wff ^jScboifit, /Sit; be /xoi fpnfbos eii]' 
 T« K€ rax* avrr](TfU fidxrjS KOpv6aLoXos''EKra>py 
 that I were again so young, &c. II. VII, 157. See VH, 133. 
 
 For a similar exceptional use in Homer of the Present Optative 
 in protasis, see § 49, 2, N. 6 (b). The optatives in the examples 
 quoted above may perhaps be explained as referring to the future, 
 and translated, that I might be, &c. 
 
 Note 1. In the poets, especiaUy Homer, the Optative without 
 6^6 or el yap sometimes expresses a concession or permission; and 
 sometimes an exhortation, in a sense approaching that of the Impera- 
 tive. E. g. 
 
 AZris 'Apyeirjv 'EXevrjv Ueve^aos ^yotro, Menelaus may take back 
 Arqive Helen. II. IV, 19. T€6valr)s, ^ Upolr , Ji KaKxave BeXXe- 
 pod>6vrnv, either die, or kill Bellerophontes. II. VI, 164. AXXa rif 
 AoX'iov KaXeo-ete, let some one caU Dolios. Od. IV, 735. bo 
 Aesch. Prom. 1049 and 1051. 
 
 Note 2. The poets sometimes use the simple ct (without -Be or 
 yap) with the Optative in wishes. E. g. 
 
 *AXX' ei Tiff Ka\ rova-be fxeroixopevos KaXeaeiev, H. X, 111. 
 El ftot ycvot TO (f>66yyos iv ^pax^oaiv. EuR. Hec. 836. 
 
 Note 3. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes use as before 
 the Optative in wishes. This a>s cannot be expressed in Engbsh ; 
 and it is not to be translated so (as if it were written ws), or con- 
 founded with ovras used as in Note 4. E. g. 
 
 'Off a,r6XoiTO Kai SXXos, Stij ToiaOTa ye peCot, that any other abo 
 may perish, &c. Od. I, 47. See Od. XXI, 201. Qs o rabe jrop^p 
 oXoiT , €1 /ioi ^€>iff rdb' avbav. SoPH. El. 126. 
 
 Note 4. OvTwff, thus, on this condition, may be prefixed to th« 
 Optative in protestations, where a wish is expressed upon some con- 
 dition ; which condition is usually added in another clause, h, g. 
 
 I 
 
 'i ij 
 
176 
 
 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 
 
 [§82. 
 
 OvTos ovai(r0€ Tovrav, fifj 7rfpu8r]T€ /if, may you enjoy these on this 
 condition, — do not neglect me. Dem. Aph. 11, 842, 9. 
 
 Note 5. The Optative in wishes belonging under this head never 
 takes the particle av. If a wish is expressed in the form of an ordi- 
 nary apodosis, as irm av oXolfiriv, how gladly I would perish (i. e. if 
 I could) ^ it does not belong here, but under § 52, 2. 
 
 § 83. 1. If the wish refers to the present or the 
 past^ and it is implied that its object is not or was not 
 attained, the secondary tenses of the Indicative are 
 used. The particles of wishing here cannot be omitted. 
 
 The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist In- 
 dicative is the same as in protasis (§ 49, 2) ; the Imper- 
 fect referring to present time or to a continued or 
 repeated action in past time, and the Aorist to a mo- 
 mentary or single action in past time. E. g. 
 
 Eid€ TovTo cTTOict, would that he icere now doing thi% or would 
 that he had been doing this; (We tovto ciroirjafVy would that he had 
 done thif ; €id€ rjv dXrjOts, would that it were true; fWt firj ty^'i/ero, 
 would that it had not happened. 
 
 Eiff etx<ff» « Tf/covo-a, /SfXrtouff (fypevasj would that thou, 
 mother, hadst a better understanding. EuR. El. lOGl. Et yap roaav- 
 TTjv dvvafiiv fixovi would that I had so great power. Id. Ale. 1072. 
 Elde <rot, CD n*pt*cX«t5, t6t€ avveyfvofirjv. Xex. Mem. 1, 2, 46. 
 'I«, fiTj yas €ir\ $(vas Oavfiv expnC^^i ^ l^^^^ thou hadst not chosen to 
 die in a foreign land. Soph. O. C. 1713. 
 
 Remark. The Indicative cannot be used in wishes without tlOt 
 or ft yap, as it would occasion ambiguity ; this cannot arise in tlie 
 case of the Optative, which is not regularly used in independent 
 sentences without av, except in wishes. The last example quoted 
 above shows that the Indicative with /a^ alone can be used in nega- 
 tive wishes. (This passage is often emended ; see, however, Her- 
 mann's note on the passage, and on EuR. Iph. Aul. 575.) 
 
 2. The Aorist oi<l>€\ov and sometimes the Imperfect 
 w(l>€XKov of o(^€/\g), debeo, may be used with the In- 
 finitive hi wishes of this class, with the same meaning 
 as the secondary tenses of the Indicative. The Present 
 Infinitive is used when the wish refers to the present or 
 to continued or repeated past action, and the Aorist 
 (rarely the Perfect) when it refers to the past. 
 
 S 83, 2.] "QcpeUv WITH THE INFINITIVE. 177 
 
 ''n(f>e\ov or co<l>€\\ov may be preceded by the particles 
 ofwishing,€?^€, eJyaV, or/i^(notou). E.g. 
 
 *Och.\^To^o7roiriv, would that he were (now) doing this (lit. he 
 ouaUwirilqili or would that he had (habitually) done this 
 (^oi^rto. ion. to). ''a<t>.X. roOro .ocDcra., would that 
 
 6p.?;df/LM.Trc7t ror' Lvro, that I were living wUh even a 
 thirdVart Z, and that those men were safe who then perished OA. 
 TV oT Mr^r^Xo. v.Kav toc<5S* eV ae^Xo,, ^^at I had not been 
 IJctorLl^sL a contest. Od XI 548. ^ee B XVHI 86, ac 
 
 Sc^.Xc. a^p^va^6c vaUcv. ^t't^Yth^t'^l^t^m^^^^^^^^ 
 5$€V evvfieaa^KaraKTapeP Apr(pi9L<o, ^ l^r^ j'^^q fj^^t I had 
 her &c n. XIX, 59. 'OXeV^ai 6i<|)€Xoi/ rrjb ^p^pa,Uthatinaa 
 pJrlhedonLday. Soph. O. T. 1157. Elff ^4>^X Apyo^^M 
 
 Soph. P^'l- ^69 A^» "^ f^^^,^ ^^j /,,„ , J„ i„„ead of Hector. 
 
 " ^CtroriS of"S — ucTii'n!fee /f^ i I 3 (.') and /.). 
 xr^^i. 1 The secondary tenses of the Indicative are not used in 
 
 Sr§t2:rn>:Vy-"lh:^ir tUtrL used oUe,y by the 
 
 poets. 
 
 Note 2 Neither the secondary tenses of the Indicative nor the 
 fo^Tth ^ATin wishes can (like the Optative) be preceded by 
 the simple et (without Sf or yap). ti„„o, 
 
 •C„ used as In § 82. N. 3, often precedes i^Aov. &c. in Homer, 
 and rarely in the Attic poets. E. g. ti m ioa 
 
 •Ot A4,cXX- •EX^.^s ii^i -/"-Xo- oX«rfla.. Od. ^^^ , bS. 
 
 Remark. Expressions of a wish with the Optative or In- 
 
 diS Ir .'Zl rap, &c were on^^^'Jy^Vro^^Z:!^ 
 apodosis suppressed. Thus, «' yip y-o.ro. Olhat Umay hapj^ 
 Jul if it wZdordy happen), implies an apodosis Uke^«-rvx,. «» 
 
 i 
 
178 IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS [§ 83, 2. 
 
 ttijvy I should J)€ fortunate^ or I should rejoice ; tl yap eytutro, 
 that it had happened, implies one like €VTvxrii ^v rjv (if it had 
 only happened, T should have been fortunate). It will be seen 
 that the use of the moods and tenses is precisely the same as 
 in the corresponding classes of protasis (§ 50, 2 ; § 49, 2). The 
 analogy with the Latin is the same as in protasis : — €t -ya/j 
 rovTo TToioir) (or itoiriarfifv) , O si hoc faciat, that he may do this ; 
 (I yap TovTo litoUi, O si hoc faceret, that he were doing this ; 
 el yap tovto t7rolr)(T€v, O si hoc fecisset, that he had done this ; 
 tl yap p^ €y(V€To, utinam ne factum esset, that it had not hap- 
 pened. 
 
 The form with SxjtiKov and the Infinitive, on the other hand, 
 is an apodosis with a protasis implied. See § 49, 2, N. 3, b. 
 
 §85.] 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 179 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhorta- 
 tions, AND Prohibitions. 
 
 § 84, The Imperative is used to express a com- 
 mand, an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g. 
 
 Aeyf, speak thou. ^eOyf , begone ! 'EX^ero), let him come. Xat- 
 povToiv, let them rejoice. "Y.p^ea-Oov Kkia-iTjv HTJXrjiddea 'AytX^oy. 
 D. I, 322. ZeO, Zfv, deojpot TcovSf irpaypdrav yevov. Aesch. 
 Choeph. 246. 
 
 Note 1. The Imperative is often emphasized by aye (or 
 5^6 re), (f>€p€, or to I, come. These words may be in the sin- 
 gular when the Imperative is in the plural, and in the second 
 person when the Imperative is in the third. E. g. 
 
 "Elir aye poi icat rovBe, (fiiXov T€K09y oorty od* (ariv. II. Ill, 192. 
 'AXX' aye pipvere Trdures, evKvrjpiSes 'A;^atoi. H. II, 331. Bd(T<' i^i, 
 ovXe oveipe^ 6oas en\ vrjas 'Axaiav. II. II, 8. *Ayf 817 aKOvaaTe. 
 Xex. Apol. § 14. *Ayere beinvfja-are. Xen. Hell. V, 1, 18. **p' 
 eln€ dq poi. Soph. Ant. 534. <Pepe Bt) poi rode eiire. Plat. Crat. 
 385 B. ''I^t 8rj Xe^ov fjplp irparrov tovto. Xex. Mem. Ill, 3, 3. 
 "l^t wv iraplaraadov. Arist. Kan. 1378. *I^t wu Xi^avoiTov devpo 
 Tig Ka\ nip dJro). lb. 871. 
 
 I 
 
 Remark. *e'p€ is not used in this way in Homer. 
 Note 2. The poets sometimes use the second person of the Im- 
 perative with TT a s in hasty commands. E. g. 
 
 - h.nr- P^^Pri, one ' Arist. Thesm. 372. Xipei Sevpo 
 
 •Ayt Btl (Ti'i'ra jris avr,p. Id. Ban. Uia. 
 
 Note 3. Tlie Imperative is sometimes used in relative 
 clauses depending on an interrogative (usually ol.6a) where 
 we should expect the relative clause to be completed by 8« 
 with an Infinitive, and the Imperative to stand by Uself. i.. g- 
 
 '^\Vol„ff t Spa<rov, rS,^Ki\n6kv,rnv^lTpav,h,ldoyoulcjmo 
 
 ^1 i3?l;o.:v87a<^;. 'X ZJL. .J o.j'a. woo 
 
 XT A Ti,a Tmnprative sometimes denotes a mere concession, 
 jTmeiimriSrorCwhere something is supposed to be 
 
 true for argument's sake). E. g ^^^. 
 
 lie pTivale man address, &c. Xen. Hier. VIU, 3. 
 
 § 85. The first person of the Subjunctive (usually 
 in the plural) is used in exhortations, supplymg the 
 want of a first person to the Imperative. Aye 
 C^YeTs) or <^ 6 p€,com«, often precedes. K g. ^ ^ 
 
 K0pO9 KfXfVfl, a(T K(0 p€ V Te Ol fo J* yjjj J 5 
 
 ^Ivov ep^pe6a. Od. VIII, 133. 
 
 ;jt I 
 
 I 
 
180 niPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS. [§ S5. 
 
 Note 1. The first person singular of the Subjunctive, when it Is 
 nsed in this way, almost always takes aye (oyere) or ^epe, unless 
 some other Imperative precedes. E. g. 
 
 AXX aye 8ff ra xpr)}iaT apiO firj (t oi koI iboifiai. 0(1. XITI, 
 215, AXX* ayeB' Vfilu Tfv)(^e eueiKio B(i)pr])(6^vai, 0(1. XXII, 1.3f). 
 Qdirre fif om rdx^iOTa, nvXas 'Ai'dao nc prjaay bur// me an 
 quickly as possible; let me pass the gates of Hades. II. XXIII, 71. 
 ^c'p* aKovo-co, co/ne, let me hear. Hdt. I, 11. St-ya, nvoas fidOai' 
 <t>€p€ Trpoff o*ff /SaXo). Eur. Here. F. 1059. 'ETrio-xfr* avdqu tchv 
 €(r<adfu €Knd$a>. Id. Hippol. 567. Aevf 8fj, Ida. Plat. Rep. V, 
 457 C. 
 
 Note 2. The second and thii-d persons of the Subjunctive are 
 not regularly used in affirmative exhortations, the Imperative being 
 the regular form in these persons. (For the Aorist Subjunctive 
 with fit) in prohibitions, see § 86.) 
 
 In some cases the Optative in wishes, in the second and third 
 persons, has almost the force of an exhortation. (§ 82, N. 1.) 
 
 In a few exceptional cases, we find even the second person of the 
 Subjunctive in exhortations, like the first person, but always accom- 
 panied hy (j)€pf. E. g. 
 
 ^€p\ a TCKVOV, vvvKoi TO TJjs vrj(rov p-ddr^s. SoPH. Phil. 300. 
 
 For the Future Indicative used elliptically in exhortations after 
 oTTfosy see § 45, Note 7. 
 
 Remark. The preceding rules apply only to affirmative exhorta- 
 tions: these should be carefully distinguished from prohibitions with 
 fiT} (§ 86). The use of the Imperative in prohibitions is generally 
 confined to the Present tense. 
 
 § 86. In prohibitions, in the second and third per- 
 sons, the Present Imperative or the Aorist Subjunctive is 
 used after m and its compounds. The former expresses 
 a continued or repeated, the latter a smgle or momen- 
 tary prohibition. 
 
 In the first person (where the Imperative is wanting) 
 the Present Subjunctive is allowed. E. g. 
 
 M^ noifi TovTo, do not do this (habitually) ; prj it o it) a- r}s tovto, 
 do not do this (single act). 'E^auda, pf] K€vBe wo), iva eidofifv ap(p<a. 
 H. I, 363. *ATpeidT), prf ^evhf fma-rdpevos <rd(f)a eiirfiv. H. IV, 
 404. * Apyeloi, prj iroi ri pediere Bovpidos uXk^s. II. IV, 234. Elne 
 uoi flpoptua vrjpeprea, pT}8' eiriKeva-jjs. Od. XV, 263. "Hdrj twv 
 aS naidl enos (l)do, prjb* firiKevOf. 0(1. XVI, 168. MrjKiTi vvv br]ff 
 avdi \€ya>p.€0aj pijb' trt drjpov dp^a\\u>pfda epyov. II. II, 435. 
 Y/xfts de rg yg r^Bt p,Tj ^apvv kotov aKri^T](r6€y pifj 6vpov<rd€^ 
 
 §87.] 
 
 prohibitions. 
 
 181 
 
 unb'dKuonlaurei^rire. AeSCH. Eumen. 800. ''Oi^ pfjr' dKvelrt , 
 
 r^/ r;pZo. Ji soph. o. c. 731. m^/j)-^3^;7- 7^;- 
 
 dlu roi^. ^Unroura, ipd, \vcrar. Dem 01. H. 31, H. (Here 
 eiaOe would not be allowed by § 86 ; a though Xvaar., m a mere 
 exhortation, is regular, by § 84.) M^ Kara rov. ^^/^^^^^ * ?^° J ^8^ 
 ahBorjenaarer^ nenovedn 5«m ; pf, .^op^.tre Id Mid 58., 
 15 Mn lain, Tral, fi^Sa. AlUST. Nub. 613. Kal prjbei, yno\ai^r, 
 pl'^ofxlXlaeei: ISOC. Phil. p. 101 A. § 93. Kal p,8e\, oU.6<. 
 p: dyvoelv. Id. Paneg. p. 5o C § 73. 
 
 Note 1. (a.) AVith the exception of the first person (§ 86), the 
 Present Subjunctive is not used in prohibitions. 
 
 An elliptical use of the Subjunctive (sometimes the Present) after 
 .4 or ottJs p^, with a verb of fearing understood, must not be con- 
 ounded with this. (See § 46, N. 4.) 
 
 (b.) The second person of the Aorist Imperative is very seldom 
 found in prohibitions ; the third person is less rare. h. g. 
 
 aexio-iro,. Aesch. Prom. 332. So Prom. 1004. Kai /iijScic 
 Lo),/ 'rrpoa8oKn<rdTu> rlXXcos. Plat. Apol. 17 C. 
 
 M^ ^^vaov, S ZeD, r^s imovarjs i\m8o9. Arist. Thcs. 870. 
 
 Note 2. The first person singular even of the Aorist Subjunc- 
 tive in prohibitions is rare, and is found only in the poets. h.Q. 
 Mi) (re, ycpoi/, Koi\r,<Tiu iyib irapa vrjval 'CiXJ/^,- ?• I; 26. *AXXa 
 
 Tr! 801. % ^L, A V a6*.^^«. Id. O. C. 174. (This may 
 be explained also by § 46, N. 4.) 
 
 SECTION YIIl. 
 
 Subjunctive (uke Future Indicative) in Independent 
 Sentences. — Interrogative Subjunctive. —Ou m 
 WITH Subjunctive and Future Indicative. 
 
 § 87. In the Homeric language the Subjunctive is 
 sometimes used in independent sentences, with the 
 force of a weak Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 Ou ydp TTO, rot'ov. Ibou duepa,. old^ ^^^^^'0/0' ^.J""""^ ^'^' '''"'' 
 nor shall I (or can I) ever see such men. II. I, 262. rpLU€P Train-ca- 
 rt 7rrpi<Xvra bS>p 6poixliva>, I will enumerate the gifts, &c. 11. lA, 
 
 « 
 
 I 
 
 >i\ 
 
 i 
 
 H 
 
 ^ ,i 
 
 fs 
 
182 
 
 INDEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 [§87. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 183 
 
 121. Ava-ofiat €s *Ai8ao, /cat «V vfKvf<r<ri ^aftvo), I will descend to 
 Hades, and shine among the dead (said by the Sun) . Od. XII, 383. 
 (Here the Future dva-ofiai and tlie Subjunctive (f)afiv<o hardly differ 
 in their force.) Kai irore ris finrja-iv, and some one will perhaps 
 say. II. VI, 459. (In vs. 462, referring to the same thing, we have 
 SiS TTore rii iptd.^ Ovk €(rff ovtos avrfp, ovd* tcrcrfrai, ovde yevr}- 
 rat, Off K€v Trj\ffid)((o a(a vUi )(€7pas cVoiVfi. Od. XVI, 437. Mvrj- 
 irofiat ov8€ "K a 6 a) fiat 'knoWcovos Udroio, I will remember and will 
 not forget the far-shooting Apollo. Hymn, in Apoll. 1. 
 
 Remark. The Aorist is the tense usually found in this construc- 
 tion. The first person singular is the most common, and instances 
 of the second person are very rare. 
 
 Note. This Homeric Subjunctive, like the Future Indica- 
 tive, is sometimes joined with av or kc to form an apodosis. 
 This enabled the earlier language to express an apodosis with 
 a sense between that of the Optative with av and that of the 
 simple Future Indicative, which the Attic was unable to do. 
 (See § 38, 2.) E. g. 
 
 El be K€ fir] hoir)(TLV^ eyo> he k€V avros eXw/iai, hut if he do€S nol 
 give her up, I will take her myself II. I, 324. (Here eXutfiai k€v has 
 a shade of meaning between eXoifirju k€v, I icould take, and alprjo-o- 
 /xat, 1 will take, which neither the Attic Greek nor the English can 
 express.) Compare rjv x vfiiv (rd(f)a e itto) , ore nporepos ye 7rv6oip.rfu^ 
 Od. II, 43, with iju \ Tjfiiv <Td<f>a ft Trot, ore nporepos ye nv6oio, II, 
 31, — both referring to the same thing. See also II. UI, 54 ; and 
 VI, 448, the last example under § 59, N. 1. 
 
 § 88. The first person of the Subjunctive is used in 
 questions of doubt, where the speaker asks himself or 
 another what he is to do. The negative particle is fiv- 
 In Attic Greek this Subjunctive is often introduced by 
 fiovXec or povXeaOe (poetic Oe\€L<i or OeXere^, E. g. 
 
 ETtto) rovTo ; shall I say thisf or /SouXft etna tovto; do you wish 
 that I should say this f Mrj tovto noicafif v, shall we not do this f Tt 
 eiTTO) ; or ri fiovXeade eiTTO) ; what shall I say f or what do you want 
 me to say f For the Future in such questions, see § 25, 1, N. 4. 
 
 Ufi yap eyiii, (^iXe TeKvov, t6>; reC bcapxiff iKcop.ai dvbpa>v oi Kpavaf]V 
 'idaKTjv Kcfra Koipaveovaiv ; *H I6vi a^s fXTjTpos to) *cat aoio do/xoto; 
 whither shall I gof to whose house shall I come f &c. Od. XV, 509. *H 
 avTos Kevdo); (jxiadai be fxe 6vp6s dvcoyet. Od. XXI, 194. Q ZfC, 
 TtXe^ca; ttoi (^pevau eX6(o, Trdrep; SOPII. O. C. 310. *Q/Liot eyo), 
 jra/Sco; Trao-rw; na KeXa-<o ; EuR. Hec. 1056. Uol t pan a> fiat ; 
 jroi TTopevOS) ; lb. 1099. Etna Tt tw' elaOoTtov, a> beanoTa ; 
 Abist. Ran. 1. TtVa yap fiapTvpa fiei(oi napd(T\(MHiai.i Dem 
 
 §88.] 
 
 F. L. 416. 7. Urib\ eav rt wi/w/xm, ...eoapai onoaov Tr&Xet; may 
 I not ask,'kc/? Mrjb' dnoKpiuapai ovu, av tis pe epaTa veos, eav 
 elba ; and may I not answer, &c. Xen. Mem. I. 2, 36. M i o- ^ co or co - 
 ueda oZvKi]pvKa, fj a'vTos dveina; Plat. Rep. IX, 580 B. Me- 
 SvovTa Sivbpa ndw (T<p6bpa be^eaOe avpnoTrju, fj aniapev; will you 
 receive him, or shall we go away f Id. Symp. 212E. Apa pt) aiaxw- 
 Bauev Tov Uepaav ^acriXea pipfjaaaSai ; shall we then be ashamed 
 to imitate the king of the Persians? Xex. Oecon. IV, 4. 
 
 noO bn ^ovXei KadiCopevoi dvayvapev; where will thou that we 
 sit down and read? VLA'T.-Phiiedr. 22SE. (So 263 E.) BovXet 
 oZu emaKonapev onov ijbrj to bvvaTdv eVrt ; XEN^Mem^. lU, 5, 1. 
 BouXet Xa/3a,Liat S^ra Ka\ Blya tI (TOV ; SoPH. Phil. ^61. Bou- 
 Xeaff enetanecrcopev ; EuR. Hec. 1042. OeXets peivjopev avTov 
 KdvaKOV(r<opeuy6cov; SoPH. El. 81. Ti aoi eeXets brjr €t<a^a); 
 Id. O. T. 651. eeXeTe er)paad)pe0a Uevdecos Ayavrjv /x^rep €K 
 ^uKx^vadrav, x^P^^ r .W<rt Bapev; EUR. Bacch. 719 So with 
 
 KeXeieTV: 'AXXa ttcSst ; etna KeXeveTe Ka\ ovk opy^eiaOe ; do you 
 
 command me to speak, &c. ? Dem. Phd. Ill, 123, 1. 
 
 In Plat. Rep. II, 372 E, we find ^ovXeaBe and a Subjunctive with 
 
 ft' in protasis: ei b" av ^ovXeaOe Ka\ (pXeypaivovaav noXiv Oeapr]' 
 
 aapev, olbev duoKaXiec, I e. if you will have us examine, &c. 
 
 (§ 49, 1.) 
 Remark. In this construction there is an implied appeal to some 
 
 person (sometimes to the speaker himself), so that ^ovXei or some 
 
 similar word can always be understood, even if it is not expressed. 
 
 Homeric examples in which this is not the case fall naturally under 
 
 8 87 
 
 In the later Greek the classic form OeXeTe etna ; was developed 
 
 into OeXeTe tva (or 6nas) etna ; — from which comes the modern 
 
 Greek BeXere va etna; or va etna; will you have me speak? 
 
 Note 1. The third person of the Subjunctive is sometimes 
 used in questions, but less frequently than the first. This 
 happens chiefly when a speaker refers to himself by Tts. Ex- 
 amples of the second person are very rare. E. g. 
 
 noTepbv ae ny, AtVxt'x^, r^js n6Xeas ex^pov ? epbv etvai <t>v I \^' 
 shall we call you the city's enemy, or mine f Dem. Cor. 268, 28^. Etra 
 radB' ovTOi n eta Baa IV vnep avTav ae noielv, Ka\ Ta T^i arjsnovrj- 
 pias epya ecf)' iavTovi dvabe ^avTai ; I e. are these men to believe, 
 &c. ; and are they to assume, &c. Id. Androt. 613, 3. Tt tis eivai 
 Toin-o(bfi; Id. F. L. 369, 12. QiyaTep,no'iTti (i>povTibos eXBn; SoPll. 
 O. C. i70. nol rt? oZv (bvyvi Id ^j- ^^^^ ^'^^^'^ ovv th Tovrrji 
 &p$TjTai pdyjis; Plat. Phil. 15 D. n«r m neiBrfTai; II. I, 
 150. (Uasovv er etnrji ort avvearaXpai KaKois; EUR. Here. ±. 
 141 7.) See Kriiger, Vol. I, § 54, 2 ; Notes 4 and 5. 
 
 Note 2. The Subjunctive is often used in th«3 question 
 
 I 
 
184 
 
 DOUBLE NEGATIVE Ou /iij. 
 
 [§88. 
 
 § 89, 2.] 
 
 DOUBLE NEGATIVE Ov firf 
 
 185 
 
 Ti va6a); what will become of me ? or what harm will it do me f 
 literally, what shall I undergo f E. g. 
 
 *0 fioi eyo), TiTrdda); ri vv fioi fir}Ki<rTa yfvrjrai ; Od. V, 465. So 
 II. XI, 404. Ti TTdea; W di dpa ; ri be ^f)aa>nai ; Aesch. Sept. 
 1057. Ti irdda tXtj^kou; Id. Pers. 912; ArisT. Plut. 603. Ti 
 WiiOo; Ti dt fx^<TOfiai; oi/xot. Soph. Trach. 973. To /xeXXoi/, ft xpr)^ 
 irfi<rofxaL' riyapTrdBo}; I shall suffer what is to come, ij U nmst 
 be ; for what harm can it do met EuR. Phoen. 895. (The diiTer- 
 ence between tliis and the ordinary meaning of 7rao-xa> is here seen.) 
 *Q,io\dyrjKa- ri yap Trddfo; Plat. Euthyd. 302 D. So m the 
 plural, HdT. IV, US\ Tiydp Trddafxev firj ^ov\op.iv(ov vp.i(ov ti/xco- 
 
 § 89. The double negative ov firf is sometimes used 
 with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative in inde- 
 pendent sentences, being equivalent to a strong single 
 negative. The compounds of both ov and m can be 
 used here as well as the simple fbrms. 
 
 1. The Subjunctive (sometimes the Future Indica- 
 tive) with oif p.r) may have the force of an emphatic 
 Future with ov. Thus ov ^ir) tovto yevrjTai (sometimes 
 ov fif/ TovTo yevrfaeTac') means this surely will 7iot hap- 
 pen, being a little more emphatic than ov tovto yev^- 
 aeTai, E. g. 
 
 (Aor. Subj.) Ov firi iri0rjTai,he will not obey. Soph. Phil. ^103. 
 OvTf yap yiyv€Tai ovre yiyoviv ovhk ovv p.f) yfvrjTai dWo'tov rjdoSy 
 for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, &c. Plat. 
 Rep. VI, 492 E. (Here ovSe p.r] yevrjTai is merely more emphatic 
 than the ordinary ov yt i/^o-t rai.) Kai twi/S' oKovaas ov ri pf)\r]<i>6<jii 
 boKoa. Aesch. Sept. 38. *AXX* ov ttot «! «>oO ye pf} jrderjs Tobe. 
 Soph. El. 1029. Ovroi a *Axata>v, oiba, p.r) rts v^pio-/;. Id. Aj. 
 560. 'AXX' oxi Ti pf) (t)vyTjTe Xai>^^pw Troai. EuR. El. 1039. Tau 
 fjv KpaTf}(r(op€v, ov prj ris rjplv aXXoy orpaTos dvTKTTjj Kort dv0paiiroiu. 
 Hdt. VII, 53. So I, 199. Ov p^ ae Kpvylro) irpos ovrtva ^ovXopai 
 d(^iKk(j6ai, Xen. Cyr. VII, 3, 13. Oi y( 'Appeviot oij prj Se^wi/rat 
 Tovs TToXf/xiovf. lb. Ill, 2, 8. *Av pivroi Ka66yp€ea oXkoi, ovbenor 
 ovbiv fjp'iv ov iiri yevTjrai rav beovrcov, Dem. Phil. I, 63, 4. So 
 Phil. lU, 130, 11. 
 
 (Pres. Subj.) Uu yap dna^ bvo fj rpiStv jpfpav obou dn6(rxa>ti€Vy 
 QVK€Ti pri bvvrjTai f^acrikfvs rjpas KaraXa^flv. Xex. An. II, 2, 12. 
 So ov pff bCva>vrai, Id. Hier. XI, 15. Upos radra KCKovpyei jal 
 <TVK0(f)dvTfi, €1 TI bvvaa-ai • ovbev (Tov -napUpai ' aX\' ov p.rj oios T jj St 
 but you will not be able. Plat. Rep. I, 341 B. 
 
 (Fut. Ind.) 00 o-ot p^ pLfBeyfropai Trore. SoPH. El. 1052. 
 Tovs yap 7rovr)pov9 ov pi) 7roT€ iToii](T€r€ 3f Xyiouff. ^ AesCHLN\ Cor. 
 § 177. Oi; Tot pi]iTork a (K twi/ ibpdvav, cS y€pou, uKOvra tis «^ei. 
 'SoPH. O. C. 1 76. So ovK ovv px] 6boinopi](r€ti, O. C. 848 ; and IlDT. 
 Ill, 62. Ma TOV 'AttoXXcd ov pi) a eyio nfpi6ylropdnf\6ovT (i. e. 
 ,rfpio>^o/xai dneXedura). Arist. Ran. 508. EiTTfi/ oti t; Srrapr/, 
 cvbeu pi) KaKiov otfcieirai avTov dnoeavovTos. Xen. ilell. 1, b, 3_. 
 (See § 70, 2; and below, Note 1.) 
 
 The Aorist Subjunctive is the most common form in this con- 
 struction. 
 
 Note 1. Ov pi) with the Future Optative, representing a Future 
 Indicative of the direct discourse, occurs in an indirect quotation 
 after U: Ta t aXXa TrdvT €dea7na€u, Kai Tarn Tpoias rrepyap cos ou 
 pii) TTOTf TT^paoiei/, €l pi) Tovbc &yoivTo. SoPH. Fhil-^^ll. (Ihe 
 direct discourse was ov /x// Trore ufpa-eTe, idv pi) Tovbf ayT)a6€.) in 
 the last example under § 89, 1, the Future Indicative is retained in 
 the same construction. The Future Infinitive can be used m the 
 same way; as, EiVe Tetpfo-ias ov pi) ttotc, aov Tijvbt yifv oikowtos, 
 ev irpd^€iu TToXiv. EuR. Phoen. 1590. ^ ^ 
 
 Ov pi) witli the Subjunctive occurs in a causal sentence after wr, m 
 Arist. Av. 461: Acye Oappijaas' ws tos airovbas ov iii) npoTfpov 
 napa^atp-iv. 
 
 Note 2. This construction is often explained by supposing an 
 ellipsis of bewov icrriu or (j)6^os ((ttIv between the ov and the pr) : 
 this is based on such passages as Xen. Mem. II, 1, 25, ov ^o^osm 
 o-f ayayo), there is no fear lest I may lead you, which with the <^o/ios 
 omitted would be oi, pi) ae dydy<o. This theory, however, leaves the 
 foUowing construction (§ 89, 2) entirely unexplained ; and the sup- 
 posed ellipsis fails to account for the meaning in many cases, as m 
 the first example under § 89, 1. 
 
 2. The second person of the Future Indicative (some- 
 times the Subjunctive) with ov fii^ may express a strong 
 prohibition. Thus ov fifi Xa\?;Vei9 means you shall rwt 
 prate (or do not prate), being more emphatic than m 
 \a\€o, E. g. 
 
 noiosZfVf; ov pi) Xrjpijcrfis (Xt/p^ot;?)- ovS* €<rrt Zevs, I e. stop^ 
 your nonsense! Arist. Nub. 367. 'Q Tral, ti 6po€7s ; ov pr) nap 
 o*xXa) Tdb€ yr)pv(r€i,donot (Ibeg you) speak out in this way before 
 the people. EuR. Hippol. 213. 'Q BvyaTfp, ov pi) pvQov in\ noXXovi 
 cpfty. Eur. Supp. 1066. Ov pi) yvvaiKav bfiXov flaoiatis 
 Xoyov, do not adopt the cowardly language of women. EuR. Andr. 
 757. Ov pi) €^ey€pf'is tov vttvco kotoxov KdKKivi)(rfis Kavaa-Tr)- 
 cretff (boiTaba b€ivi)v voaov, <a tckvov, do not wake him. SoPH. Trach. 
 978. Ti TToiels ; ov jn^ k a r a jS i) o- € i , don't come down. Arist. Vesp 
 897. 
 
 II 
 
 11 
 
 i 
 
 '^ 
 
186 
 
 DOUBLE NEGATIVE Ov fi^. 
 
 L§ 89i 2. 
 
 § 89, 2.] 
 
 DOUBLE NEGATIVE O v /i?J. 
 
 187 
 
 For the use of the future, see § 25, 1. N. 5. For the Subjunctive 
 in this construction, see below. Rem. 2. 
 
 Note 1. A prohibition thus begun by ov ^rj may be con- 
 tinued by /iT/Sf with another Future (or Subjunctive). An 
 affirmative command may be added by another Future or an 
 Imperative, after aXXa or bL E. g. 
 
 Ov ^t) KaXtls fly a>p0pa><f) , ticereva), firjbe KaT€ pels rovvofia, do 
 not call to me, I implore you, nor speak my name. Arist. Ran. 298. 
 Ov fir) 7rpo<Toi(r€ IS X^^P^ H-V^* a>/ret neTrXoiv, do not bring your 
 hand near me nor touch my garments. EuR. Hippol. 606. Ov firj 
 irpocroiore IS x^'P^' ^aK\€V(r€ t,s S' loi>v, firjB^ i^op.6 p^ti ficopiav 
 Trjv a-fjv fpoiy do not Irring your hand near me ; hut go and rage^ and 
 do not wipe off your folly on me. Id. Bacch. 343. 
 
 Ov fiTj \a\ria€is (XaXrjarjs) , aXX' dKo\ov0rja€is «/ioi, do not 
 prafe, hut folloio me. Arist. Nub. 505. Ov prj dtaTplyfreis , dWa 
 yevo-ft r^ff 6vpas, do not delay, hut knock at the door. Id. R<ui. 
 462. Ov fiff <f)\vap^a€is €)(Uiv, o Sai/^ia, dXX' apa/xfi/oy oio'etr 
 irakiv TO. arpoifiaTa. lb. 524. Ov pf) dvafieurjs ear fi (f)i\ois, iravafi 
 di dvpx)v Ka\ irakiv (rrpe^eis Kapa, . . . de ^e i 8i Bojpa Koi irapai- 
 Tr}(T€i narpos, he not inimical to friends, hut cease your rage, &c. 
 Eur. Med. 1151. Ov pfj (ncwr/rjy? PV^^ noiTjarjs direp oi rpvyobai- 
 fiou€s ovToi, dW* evihri pe I , do not .scoffs nnr do what these wretches 
 do; hut keep silence I Arist. Nub. 296. (Here tlie Imperative is 
 used precisely hke the Future with dWd or 5e in the preceding ex- 
 amples.) 
 
 The Future in the clauses with dWd or Be will be explained by 
 § 25, 1, N. 5 (a); in the clauses with pT)be it may be explained by 
 § 25, 1, N. 5 (6), or we may consider the construction a continua- 
 tion of that with ov p.rj, the pfj being repeated without the ov. 
 
 Note 2. In a few cases ov with the Future is used interroga- 
 tively expressing an exhortation, followed by another Future with 
 firjde or koi pfj expressing a prohihition. E. g. 
 
 Ov aly dp€$€i, prjbe BetXiau apr t (r), keep silence (lit. unit you not 
 keep .silence?) and do not hecome a coward. Soph. Aj. 75. (Here 
 perhaps we should punctuate ov aly due^ei; prjBe deiXiav dpel. 
 See Rem. 1. But the first clause, although strictly interrogative, is 
 really an exhortation, and was so considered in the construction of 
 the following clause, where the Future is to be explained on the 
 principle of § 25, 1, N. 5 (h). Compare the examples under Note 
 1.) Ou Bdaaov ola-eis, prf8* dvia-Tifae is epol, i. e. extend your 
 hand, and do not distrust me. Id. Trach. 1183. Ovk ei uv t oIkovs-, 
 uv T€ Kf)ea>v Kara areyaSj Koi firf to prfbev dXyos els fiey* oicrerc Id. 
 O. T. 637. 
 
 Remark 1. The examples under § 89, 2 and the notes are usu- 
 ally printed as interrogative, in accordance with the doctrine of 
 Elmsley, stated in his note to Eurip. Med. 1120 (1151) and in the 
 
 Quarterly Review for June, 1812. He explains ov pf) \a\rj(reis ; 
 as meaning will you not stop prating f Ht. will you not not prate f and 
 when a second clause in the Future with prfde or dWd follows, he 
 considers the interrogative force of ov to extend also to this. But 
 this explanation requires an entirely different theory to account for 
 the construction of § 89, 1 ; whereas the rules given above consider 
 the Subjunctive there a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive 
 (§ 87), and explain the Future in § 89, 2 by the principle stated in 
 § 25, 1 , N. 6, — ov pr} having the same force of a strong single negative 
 in both constructions. As to the examples in N. 1, the last one (where 
 the Imperative instead of the Future follows dWd) seems to be de- 
 cisive against the interrogative force commonly ascribed to the 
 Future in the others. The examples in N. 2 are the strongest sup- 
 port of Elmsley's theory, where the first clause is clearly interroga- 
 tive, at least originally ; but the force of the question as an exhorta- 
 tion seems to have guided the construction of the sentence, which 
 is finished after the analogy of the examples in N. 1. The explana- 
 tion given above (N. 2) is supported by Aesch. Sept. 250, ov aiya ; 
 fir)8ep T(5>/S' epels Kara rrr6\iv,will you not keep silence? (ov <riy dvl' 
 fft ;) say nothing of this kind through the city. 
 
 We may explain the examples in N. 2 as interrogative, by con- 
 sidering the first clause a question with ov (implying an affirma- 
 tive answer) equivalent to an exhortation, and the second a 
 question with prj (implying a negative answer) equivalent to 
 a prohibition. Ov crly due^ei, prjbe deiXiav dpel; will thus mean, 
 will you not keep silence ? and you will not become a coward, zvill 
 you f 
 
 Remark 2. In modern editions of the classics the Subjunctive is 
 not found in the construction of § 89, 2. But in many of the exam- 
 ples quoted there and in the notes the first Aorist Subjunctive in 
 -arjs has been emended to the Future, against the authority of the 
 Mss., in conformity to Dawes's rule. (See § 45, N. 8, with foot- 
 note.) Thus, in the three examples from the Clouds, the Mss. have 
 the Subjunctive; and in the last (vs. 296) ov prf o-icw^iyy could 
 not be changed to ov pi] crKu>y^eiSi as the Future of a-Ka>7rTa> is 
 aKayjrofiai. Elmsley's emendation <rKa>y\rei is therefore adopted by 
 most editors. But this seems too violent a change to allow in tiie 
 text, merely to sustain an arbitrary rule, which at best has nothing 
 but accident to rest on. K both constructions (§ 89, 1 and 2) are 
 explained on the same principle, there is no longer any reason for 
 objecting to the Subjunctive with ov fitf in prohibitions; and it 
 seems most probable that both the Future and the Subjunctive were 
 allowed in both constructions, but that the Subjunctive was more 
 common in that of § 89, 1, and the Future in that of § 89, 2. 
 
 
m^- 
 
 188 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 r§9o. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 90. The Infinitive mood expresses the simple idea 
 of the verb, without limitation of number or person. 
 It has the force of a neuter verbal noun, and as such it 
 may take the neuter of the article in all its cases. 
 
 It has at the same time the attributes of a verb, so 
 that (even when it takes the article) it may have a 
 subject, object, and other adjuncts ; and, further, it is 
 qualified not by adjectives, but by adverbs. 
 
 § 91. The Infinitive may as nominative be the sub- 
 ject of a finite verb, or as accusative be the subject of 
 another Infinitive. The Infinitive is especially common 
 as the subject of an impersonal verb, or of eVr^. It may 
 also be a predicate nominative, or it may stand in appo- 
 sition with a substantive. 
 
 Such Infinitives stand regularly without the article ; 
 but if they are to be especially prominent as containing 
 the leading idea of the sentence, the article may be 
 used. E. g. 
 
 2vv€^Tf avTci iXdeiVjit happened to Mm to go. Ovk evecrri toZto^ 
 ■jToiriaai. "'Abvvarou earn tovto rrot^o-at. 'E^^i^ fitpeiv. Act 
 avTov fiivetv. Ov fi€v yap ri KaKou ^aaiXfvtfifv.foritisno had 
 thing to be a king. Od. I, 392. eU ol<ov6s apiaros, dfMvveadai 
 nepl Trarpi/f. II. XIT, 243. *A« yap Tj^a toU yepovcriv ev^fiaeflv^ 
 AescH. Ag. 584. noXu yap paou ^xoi/rar <f>v\dTT€iv rj KTrja-a- 
 aOai ndura Tr((t>vK€v. Dem. 01. II, 25, 24. (Compare 01. I, 1^6, 3: 
 Ao/cfi TO (f)v\d$ai rdyadd tov KTrjaaadat xa^fTTcorepoj/ eimt.) 
 'HSv noWovs exdpovs ex^t"? ^^^^'- F. L.^409, 25. Ao<fi oi<o- 
 vopiov dyadov dvai fv olKelu tov iavTou olkov. XeX. Oecon. I, 
 2. *7(ri Bdv TOVTO TTOi^o-at, he sai/s that it is nece.^sary to Jo this. 
 (Here noirjoai as aceus. is the subject of ScTi/ : for 6fli/, see § 92, 2.) 
 T6yvi)vai ini<TTr)p.rjv novXa^flv €(rriv, to learn is to aapiire knowl- 
 edge. Plat. Theaet. 209 E. To bUT)v hibovai. TroTfpov 7ra<rx<ti' 
 
 
 \ I 
 
 INFINITIVE AS OBJECT. 
 
 189 
 
 § 92, 1.] 
 
 rt'eWtvWot.tv; Plat. Gorg. 476 D. q^ the last two examples 
 the sxihiect Infinitive has the article to emphasize it^ while the fre- 
 
 dicate infinitives stand alone.) OiJrot ^«^^^^Vn/ri9 ^TnnT 
 o^vT<.,mdv.apouThd^o^d\\.iv. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 3 42.^ (Com- 
 pare the two examples above from Demosthenes.) Tovto e<rrt ro 
 SSCK.I., Th n\iov rJ). dXK.. ir^T.U ?x-. PlAT. Gojg. 483 C. 
 ' \\r oiaai, vvv ah imoKOT^i. tovtoi? to KaTop6 ovviJi.M. Ul. 11, 
 23 27. n yhp6dvaTov b^biivai ovUv dWo ioTiv rjboK.iU aocf^ov 
 cL m4 ItI^ok.Iv ydp elbiua. eWi. ^ oi< o?Se.. Plat. Apol. 
 29 A. 
 
 § 92. The Infinitive without the article may be the 
 object of a verb. It stands generally as an object accu- 
 sative, sometimes as an object genitive, and sometimes 
 as an accusative of kindred signification. The classes 
 of verbs after which the Infinitive is thus used must be 
 learned by practice ; but the Infinitive without a sub- 
 iect follows 'in general the same classes of verbs m 
 Greek as in English. The following, however, may be 
 specially mentioned : — 
 
 1. In general, any verb whose action directly implies 
 another action or state as its object, if such action or 
 state is to be expressed by a verb and not by a noun, 
 takes the Infinitive. Such are verbs signifying to teach, 
 to learn, to accustom, to desire, to ask, to advise, to entreat, 
 to exhort, to command, to persuade, to urge, to propose, to 
 compel, to need, to cause, to intend, to begin, to attempt, to 
 permit, to decide, to dare, to prefer, to choose, to pretend; 
 those expressing fear, unwillingness, eagerness, cau- 
 tion, neglect, danger, postponement, forbidding, hindrance, 
 escape, &c. ; and all implying ability, fitness, desert, 
 qualification, sufficiency, or their opposites. E. g. 
 
 ^.UoKovcTiv alThv ^dW^^v, they teach him to shoot "Epadou tovto 
 TTotncrat, they learned to do this. BoCX.Tac eXOe^u. Uapatvovpeu aoc 
 leXadac. ^o^odpa. ph..v. MpovvTa. noX.pe.u. H ttoXc. .t.Su- 
 lie. b.a4>9ap',.aS A^ara. dn.Xe.lu. 'E.eXevaeu «-- .^X/^^ 
 a.. ^eopaii>pS>u<Tvyyva>prjv po^h^iv EtTT. crrpar^/you. cX.cr^at A^ 
 proposed to choose generals. 'AnayopevovajuavTOi, pr^ tovto 7rot,,jat. 
 rSee below, § 95, 2 ) Ti kcdXvV^ alTov ^aH^iv ottoi ^ovX«rat, what 
 it// prevent him from marching, ^c. f 'A^^ Xa/x^az/av. A^iovro* 
 
 I 
 
 u 
 
190 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 L§ 92, 1. 
 
 § 92, 1.] 
 
 INFINITIVE AS OBJECT. 
 
 191 
 
 6av(1v. Ov 7r<0u*cf bovkfvfiv, Tie is not horn to he a slave. *Ava^aK'- 
 Xcrat TOvTo TToteii/, he postpones doing this. 
 
 This use of the Infinitive is too common to need illustration by 
 more particular examples. 
 
 Remark 1. The Infinitive in this construction Is generally equiv- 
 alent to the English Infinitive after the same class of verbs ; and it 
 refers to indefinite or to future time. (See § 15, 1.) The Present 
 and Aorist are the tenses usually found, with the distinction stated 
 in the Remark before § 12 : for the Perfect, see § 18, 3 (6) ; and for 
 the occasional use of the Future Infinitive (or even the Infinitive 
 with av) after some of these verbs, see § 27, N. 2. 
 
 Rp:mark 2. Verbs of fearing and caution are included in the list 
 given above, althouojh they are generally followed by /x^, lest, and 
 the Subjunctive or Optative. (See § 46.) The Infinitive, however, 
 sometimes occurs ; and, when it is used, it belongs regularly under 
 the rule, § 92, 1. (See § 46, N. 8, a and h.) 
 
 Verbs expressing danger take the Infinitive more frequently than 
 fXTf with the Subjunctive or Optative. (See § 46, N. 8, c.) 
 
 Note 1. Some verbs which do not regularly take an In- 
 finitive may be used in unusual significations, so as to allow an 
 Infinitive by § 92, 1. E. g. 
 
 Svve^rja-au toIs U\aTai€v<Ti napa^ovvai a(t)a9 avrovs Ka\ ra oTrXa, 
 they made an agreement with the Plataeans to surrender, &c. Tiiuc. 
 11, 4. Tivi d' av Tis fiaWov TTtOTf virf t€ napaKarad €(r6ai \pr)fiara ; 
 to whom would any one sooner dare to commit money? Xen. Mem. 
 IV, 4, 17. 'OBvpovrai oik6v8€ vefo-Bai, they mourn to go home. II. 
 11,290. *E7r€v(f)r]fir](rav'A.xaioi albtlcrdai Up^a. 11.1,22. 
 
 Note 2. When a noun and a verb (especially (ari) to- 
 gether form an expression equivalent to any of the verbs of 
 § 92, 1, they may take the Infinitive without the article. 
 Some other expressions with a similar force take the same 
 construction. E. jr. 
 
 ^AvdyKr} earri navras aireXBelv. KivSvvos ^v avrco iraBeiv ri. 
 'Okpos ia-Ti pot TOVTO TToirja-ai. *o'i3off iaTiv avT<o eXOdv. "Apa^a 
 (V avTois ^v, KooXvpa ovaa (tcis nvXas) tt poadflvai, a wagon, which 
 prevented them from shutting the gates. Tnuc. IV, 67. So iirtyfvtTo 
 Be akXois T€ (iXXodi KoiXvpaTa pi] av^r)6r)vai. , obstacles to their in^ 
 crease.^ Id. I, 16. (See § 95, 2, N. 1.) ToTs (rrpartcoraty 6ppi) tW- 
 TTfo-f (KT€ixi(Tai TO x^P^ov. Id. IV, 4. Ov pavTif dpi Tacpavrj 
 yv^vai, I am not enough of a prophet to decide^ &c. Eur. Hippol. 
 346. (Here the idea of ability is implied in pdvns elpi.) To d(r(t)a\€s 
 Koi p€V€iv KoX direXOelv ai vTjfs nape^ovaiv. Tn UC. VI , 1 8. ( See 
 § ^3, 1.) "Exovra Tida<T€V€a6ai (pixriv, capable by nature of 
 
 being tamed (=7rf(pvK6Ta TiBaaevecrdai). Plat. Politic. 264 A. Tit 
 pr^xavr] pf) ovxi irdvTa KaTavaXcoBrjuai fts to T(6vdvai ; (i. e. ri 
 K(a\viTf.i pr) ovx^ irdvTa KaTauaXaBrfvai ;) Plat. i haed. 72 U. At- 
 6oi<a pfj noXXa Ka\ ;(aX€7ra els dvdyxrjv eXdoapev noLelv, lest we may 
 come to the necessity of doing. Dem. 01. I, 13, 25. "Qpa dirievai, 
 U is time to go away (like xph amevai, we must go away). P^at. 
 Apol. 42 A. 'EXiribas e^fi tovto TroiTJa-ai (^iXniCfi toOto ttoi^- 
 arat), he hopes to do this. But eXms rod iXelv, Tiiuc. II, 56. 
 Ol 6c ^eoj/Tfff atrioi Bavelv, and the living are those who caused them 
 to die. Soph. Ant. 1 1 73. We might also have atrioi roO rovrovs 
 Oavelv or atrioi rb rovrovs Baveiv. (See § 23, 1, N. 3.) So in phrases 
 like troXXov (or ptKpov) Sfo> ttouIv ti, I want much (or little) of doing 
 anything; napa piKpov rjXBop noielv rt, they came tvithin a little of do- 
 ing anything; where the idea of ability, inability, or sufficiency 
 appears : so in Thug. VII, 70, ^paxv yap dneXnrou diaicoaiat yci/e- 
 aBni. So epirodau rovrco idTiv eXBeiv {=K(oXv€1 rovrov eXBeiv), it 
 prevents him from going; where rov eXBelv may be used. (See § 94, 
 and § 95, 1 and 2.) 
 
 The Infinitive depending on a noun is generally an adnominal 
 genitive with the article rov. See § 94 and § 95, 1. 
 
 Note 3. Although the Infinitive depending on the verbs in- 
 cluded in § 92, 1 regularly stands without the article, yet ro is some- 
 times prefixed to give the Infinitive still more the character of a 
 noun in the accusative. The Infinitive is sometimes placed for em- 
 phasis apart fix)m the main construction, like a synecdochical accu- 
 sative. E. g. 
 
 Kal TTWff 817 T i apxiKOvs elvai dvBpairoov irai^eveis ; Xex. Oecon. 
 XIII, 4. (So iraiSeixo rivd rt.) To d* av ^vvoiKelv rfjb* opov ris 
 hu yvvi) hvvairo ; i. e. as to living ivith her, what woman could do it f 
 Soph. Tr. 545. To dpdu ovk riBeXrjcrau. Id. O. C. 442. 
 
 Ovbels p av ireiaeiev ro pr) ovk iXBelv, no one could persuade me 
 not to go. Arist. Ran. 68. (For pr^ ov, see § 95, 2, N. 1, b.) So 
 Xen. Hell. V, 2, 36. So BeX^ei to prj Krelvai avvevvov (Uke 
 TTctVet TO pfi KTflvaL), Aesch. Prom. 865. Compare Soph. Phil. 
 1253, ovBe roi afj ^ftpt neiBopai ro 8pdv, i. e. / do not trust your 
 hand for action (like ov TreiBopai aot ravra, I do not trust you in 
 this.) 
 
 Note 4. Other active verbs than those included in § 92, 1 may 
 take the Infinitive like an ordinary noun, as an object accusative. 
 Here, however, the Infinitive takes the article ro. E. g. 
 
 To reXevrrja-ai irdvrcov ^ nfirpcopevrj KarUpivev, fate awarded 
 death to all. Isoc. Demon, p. 11 C. § 43. 
 
 Note 5. A few of the verbs included in § 92, 1, which govern 
 the genitive of a noun, allow also the genitive of the Infinitive with 
 Toi), as well as the simple Infinitive. (See § 95, 1.) This appliei 
 chiefly to dpeXe<d, impeXeopai, and to the verbs of hindrance, &c in- 
 cluded in § 95, 2. E. g. 
 
192 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 92, 1. 
 
 § 93, 1.] INFINITIVE AFTER RELATIVES, ETC. 
 
 193 
 
 *AfiiKr}(ras rov opylCeaBai. XeN. Mem. IT, 3, 9. (But a/ifXiio-aJ 
 Xeyfii/, Plat. Phaed. 98 D.) Most verbs oidesiring and neglectinc, 
 take only the simple Infinitive. *Emfx€\€Ofiai, which usually takes 
 ona)s with the Future Indicative (§ 45), allows also the simple In- 
 finitive (Thuc. VI, 54), and the Infinitive with rov (Xen. Mem. 
 111,3, 11). See§45, N. 6, a. 
 
 Remark. For the use of the Infinitive without to after verbs as 
 an accusative by synecdoche (usually found only after adjectives), 
 see § 93, 2, Note 3. 
 
 2. Another case in wliich the Infinitive appears as 
 the object of a verb occurs in indirect discourse, after 
 verbs implying thought or the expression of thought (verba 
 sentiendi et dedarandi) or equivalent expressions. Here 
 each tense of the Infinitive, instead of referring indefi- 
 nitely to the future (as in the former construction, § 92, 
 1), represents the correspondins; tense of the Indicative 
 or Optative 
 
 Remark. For this construction see § 73, 1 ; where also exam- 
 ples of the Infinitive with av in indirect discourse are given. For 
 the distinction between the Infinitive in this construction and the 
 ordinary Infinitive (92, 1), see § 73, 1, Remark. For the Infini- 
 tive, not in indirect discourse, after some verbs which usually be- 
 long to this class, see § 15, 2, Notes 2 and 3 ; see also § 23, 2, Notes 
 2 and 3. 
 
 Note 1. Of the three common verbs signifying to say, <f)r)yLi is 
 regularly followed only by the Infinitive in indirect discourse, d-nov 
 only by on or wy and the Indicative or Optative, while X/yo) allows 
 either construction. A singular exception in regard to flnov is 
 found in Eur. Phoen. 1590, quoted § 89, 1, N. 1. (See § 15, 2, 
 N.3.) 
 
 Note 2. After many verbs of this class in the passive both a 
 personal and an impersonal construction are allowed : thus, we can 
 say XeyfToi 6 Kipos yfviadai, Cyrus is said to have been, or Xcyfrat 
 Tov Kvpov yevcaOai, it is said that Cyrus was, AoK€a> in the meaning 
 / seem (videor) usually has the personal construction, as in English ; 
 as ovTos doKfl elvai, he seems to be. When an Infinitive with av fol- 
 lows (§ 73, 1), it must be translated by an impersonal construction, 
 to suit the English idiom : thus, BokcI tis av ^x^'-^ must be translated 
 it seems that some one would have, although riy is the subject of do/cfi ; 
 as we cannot use would with our Infinitive, to translate ix^iv 5i» 
 (See § 42, 2, Note.) 
 
 Note 3. (a.) When an indirect quotation has been intro- 
 duced by an Infinitive, a dependent relative or temporal clause 
 in the quotation sometimes takes the Infinitive by assimilation, 
 where we should expect an Indicative or Optative. The tem- 
 jx)ral particles «?, ore, livfi, lirtibrj, as well as the relative pro- 
 nouns, are used in this construction. Herodotus also uses ci, 
 if, and even 8ior*, because, in the same way. E. g. 
 
 Mcra 5f, o)f ov Trav€(T6at,aKfa dl^Tja-Bai (\4yovai),and aftenixirds, 
 when it did not cease, they say that they sought for remedies. Hdt. I, 
 94. (Here we should expect wy ovk eiravero.) 'Qs 8' uKovaai 
 Tovs Trapovrai, Bopv^ov yeveaOai {(\>acrlv), they say that, when those 
 present heard it, there was a tumuli. Dem. F. L. 402, 8. *E7r€i5j) hi 
 ycvt cdai €7rL rfj oIklcl ttJ *Ayd6<t)vos, (^<pf]) avfoiyp.evrjv KaraXap^d- 
 vdv Trjv Bvpav. Plat. Symp. 174 D. See Kep. X, 614 B. Atyfrai 
 *A\Kpai<t>vi, oT€ 8r] aXdaOai avrov, rov AttoXXo) ravrrjv rrjv yrjv 
 XPno-at oUflv. TilUC. II, 102. (See § 15, 1, N. 2.) Kal 6aa av per 
 (Keivcav ^ovXeveadai, ovdcvos vcrrepov yvoaprj (f)av^vai {€cf>aaav). 
 Id. I, 91. (Here e/3ouXfu'oi/ro would be the common form.) *H-you- 
 pevTjs dfj dXrjde'ias ovk av ttotc (balpev avrfj x^pov KaKcov dKoXov6fj(rai, 
 d\X* vyifs T€ Koi diKatov rjBos, to Kal aoxPpocrvvTjv ene adai. Pl\T. 
 Rep. VI, 490 C. 
 
 El yap br) belv iravToas nepiBflvai nXXw t/o) ttjv ^aa-iXrjirjv, (^€<Prf) 
 biKaioTcpov fivai Mr]d(ov rt'o) Trepi^aXelv tovto. Hdt. I, 129. (Here €t 
 8eoL or (I 8(1 would be the ordinary expression.) So Hdt. Ill, 105 
 and 108; doubtful, II, 64 and 172. See Ki-iiger's note on I, 129. 
 Tipdv 5e Sa/xtovs e^iy, 8 ion Ta(p^vai oi rov irdmrov dijp^airt vtto 
 2api(ov. Hdt. Ill, 55. 
 
 (b.) In some cases, particularly when the provisions of a law are 
 quoted, a relative is used with the Infinitive, even when no Infini- 
 tive precedes. E. g. 
 
 ''e6t]K€v (<P* ols i^eluat diroKTLvvvvai, he enacted on what conditions 
 it is allowed to kill. Dem. Lept. 505, 19. Kal dia ravra, av tis dno- 
 KTeivr) Tivd, Tr]V fiovXrjv biKd^dV typa^f, Koi ovx dnep, av aXo), dvai^ 
 and he did not enact what should be done if he should be convicted. 
 Dem. Aristocr. 629, 2. (Here fivai is the reading of the Cod. 2, 
 amply defended by the preceding example, in which all editors 
 allow (^flvai.) A€Ka yap avbpas •npoelXovTO avT^ ^vpj3ovXovs, av€V 
 liv pr] Kvpiov (Ivai dndyeiv arrpaTiav €K rfjs TroXewy. TllUC. V, 63. 
 
 § 93. The Infinitive without the article may limit 
 the meaning of certain adjectives and adverbs. 
 
 1. Such are particularly adjectives denoting ahility^ 
 fitness^ desert^ qualificatmi, sufficiency^ readiness y and 
 
 9 M 
 
194 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 93, 1. 
 
 § 93, 2.] INFINITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES, ETC. 
 
 195 
 
 their opposites ; and, in general, those denoting the 
 same relations as the verbs which govern the Infinitive 
 (§92,1). E.g. 
 
 AvvaTosTToielvyable to do, Aeivos Xt'yeii/, skilled in speaking, 
 "A^ios eWi Tovra Xa^fli/, he deserves to receive this. *Ava^ios OavfidCe- 
 (rOai, unworthy to he admired, "A^ios Tifia<r0ai, worthy to be honored. 
 Ovx olos T€ rjp Tovro iSfiv, he teas not able to see this. Upodvfios 
 X(y€ip, eager to speak, 'Eroifios Kivbwov vnofi€V€iv^ ready to endure 
 
 danger, ^ * - * t a 
 
 eeuKTTOKKtay UavaraTOV fiVcti/ Km ypavai Kaiirpa^ai. L.Y8. 
 Or. Fun. p. 194, § 42. Tou 8" (mrijbfiov raira nadflv f<^r), the 
 people said that he was a suitable person to sujfer this, Dem. Phil. Ill, 
 126, 19. At yap cvVpa^tai B€iva\ (rvyKpvy\rat. ra Toiavra oveitrj. 
 Id. 01. II, 23, 29. Kvpiav inoirjirav inifi^XflcrOaL rat evra^ia?, they 
 gave it (the Areopagus) power to superintend good order. Isoc. Areop. 
 p. 147D.§39. BiV S« abvvaroi rjaav n poacpe p€ ip, Hdt. Ill, 
 138. MaXaxoi Kaprepelp, too effeminate to endure. Vl AT. Rep. 
 VIII, 556 B. Tan€ivri vpoiP fj bidvoia tyKapr^pelp & tyv<dT€, your 
 minds are too dejected to persevere, &c. Tnuc. II, 61. (In the last 
 two examples paXaKoi and Tairtipl) govern the Infinitive by the idea 
 of inab'dity implied in them.) Xpij/xara iroplC^'-v evnopuirarop yvvrj. 
 ArisT. Eccles. 236. 2o(/)a)rfpoi brj (TV^(popas ras roiP nfXas napres 
 iiaip€ip n rdxas ras olKoOfp- EuR. Alcmen. Fr. 103. •ETrio-ri^fio)!' 
 Xcyftv r€ Ka\ <riyai/. Plat. Phaedr. 276 A. T^XXa €vpT^(r«f 
 virovpyelp opras r)pas ov KaKOvs- AriST. Pac. 430. 
 
 For examples of nouns followed by the Infinitive, see § 92, 1, N. 2. 
 
 Note 1. The use of the Infinitive after oloff in the sense of 
 appropnate, likely, capable, and ocroff in that of sufficient, with or 
 without their antecedents, is to be referred to this head. (O tor re, 
 able, like bvparos, regularly takes the Infinitive.) E. g. 
 
 Ou yap ?iu S^pa ola ro ntbiop tipb^ip ,forit was not the proper season 
 for irrigating the land, Xex. An. II, 3, 13. Toiavrai omi: x«/xa)i/os 
 re ariyeip Kal Btpovs Uavas tlpai. PlaT. Rep. Ill, 415 E. Toiou- 
 TOff olos 7r€id€(Teai. Id. Crit. 46 B. NfpW^'ot rh avr^p eKaaroi 
 i<TOP dnoCvv. cullicating their own land to an extent sufficient to live 
 in,on it. Thuc. I, 2. 'EXeiTTffo liji vvktos octop aKoralovs bieXOeiP 
 76 TreSiov, there was left enough of the night for crossing the plain 
 in the dark, Xkn. An. IV, 1, 5. ''Ec^^aae roaovrop oaop nax^r/* 
 dpeyp<oK€Pai rh y\rii<i>^<rpa, it came so much inadvance(ofthe other 
 ship), that Paches had already read the decree. Inuc. Ill, 49. (bee 
 § IS, 3, b.) Examples like the last strongly resemble those under 
 § 98, 1 in which wore has roaovroi for its antecedent. 
 
 Other pronominal adjectives (as toTos, roioo-Se, ttjiovto?, ttj\Uosj 
 nolos) sometimes take an Infinitive in the same way. 
 
 Note 2. (a.) Certain impersonal verbs (like ?i/f o-ri, 7rp€7r*t, 
 wpoariKti), which regularly take an Infinitive as their subject 
 
 (§ 91), are sometimes used in the Participle in a joerwnaZ sense, in 
 which case they may be followed b^ the Infinitive, the Participle 
 having the force of one of the adjectives of § 93, 1. Thus to. ivopra 
 (Ineip is ei^uivalent to & ipeari clnelp, what it w permitted to say ; ra 
 npoa-fjKOPTa prjdrjvai is equivalent to a 7rpoa-f]K€i prjd^pai, what is proper 
 to be said, as if Trpoa-rjKd were a personal verb, and as if we could say 
 ravra Trpoa-rjKei, these things are becoming. E. g. 
 
 KaTiSojj/ TO nXrjdos twp cpoptcop elneip , IsoC. Phil. p. 1 04 D. 
 § 110. Top Ofop KoKfl ovBcp irpoa^KOPr ip yoots irapaa-TarfiPf 
 she is calling on the God toho ought not to be present at lamentations, 
 Aesch. Agam. 1079. (Tlpoa-fiKOPra is used like adjectives meaning 
 /it, proper, as if we could say 6s ov 7rpo(rf)K€L napaa-Tareip.) ^pnC'j 
 fVet np€ira>p f(f)vs irpo rwi/Sf (jxopelp. SoPH. O. T. 9. So ra 
 Tjpip napayyeXOfPTa dif^eXdelp ( = « TrapTjyyeXdrj ^plp du^€Xd€lp), 
 Plat. Tim. 90 E. 
 
 (&.) In the same way certain adjectives, like btKaios, iiriKat' 
 
 ftoff, eTTir^Sfiof, inlho^os, may be used personally vf\i\\ the 
 nfinitive ; as bUaios tori tovto iroicip, it vs right for him to do this 
 (equivalent to SiKaiop icrrtp avrop tovto ttoic'ip), E. g. 
 
 ^rjpl /cat TToXXo) p€L^6pa>p en tovtcop bapeiop biKaios fipai rvy 
 vai/fiv, i. e. that it is right for me to receive, &c. Dem. Cor. 243, 6. 
 EboKovp kiTiTr]h€ioL €LpaLV7r€$aip€$TJpai, they seemed to be co?!- 
 venient persons to be disposed of, Thuc. VIII, 70. QfpanfvfaBai. 
 emKaipiot, important persons to be taken care of. Xen. C)t. VIII, 2, 
 25. TdSe Tot i$ avrecop iiribo^a yepea-Oai, it is to be expected that 
 this will result from it. Hdt. I, 89. (IIoXXol cViSo^ot Tavro tovto 
 Treia-fo-dai, it is to he expected that many will suffer this same thing^ 
 Id. VI, 12, is an example of the Future Infinitive, § 27, N. 2. So 
 in English, many are likely to suffer.) 
 
 These examples resemble those under § 93, 2. 
 
 Note 3. Rarely the Infinitive with to Is used after adjectives of 
 this class. (Compare § 92, 1, N. 3.) E. g. 
 
 To TrpoaraXanraypdp ovBels 7rp63vfios ^v. ThuC. H, 53. 
 
 2. Any a^'ective may take the Infinitive without the 
 article as an accusative by synecdoche^ showing in what 
 respect the adjective is applicable to its noun ; as Oea^ 
 al(T)^pou opavt a sight disgraceful to look upon. 
 
 The Lifinitive is here regularly active or middle, sel- 
 dom passive, even when the latter would seem more 
 natural ; as %aX,€7roi/ irocelv, hard to do, seldom X^Xe- 
 wov IT tela 9 a c, hard to be done. E.g. 
 
 hlaxiiov yap roSe y' earl (cat faaopepoiai TTV^cV^at, i. 6. disgrace* 
 
196 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 03, 2. 
 
 ful far them to lear. H. H, 119. So H. I, 107 and 589. Toi, y^ 
 
 W^JZTIrlZTiTotaa.a^-most necessary fir ,ne to say, and 
 
 t^JtZ^ul for you to hear. ^f\-^^''-.'f',fo^f'^^I iro'i'a 
 \,a-nAi, a terrible man to fght against. Id. O . II, 24,1 A o«m 
 iMarn ivSiairaaeai, a house most pleasant to hoe in. Xf.n. Mt.n. 
 f\\ I 8 TivaWiraTa ,ip€\v,the things hardest to Jind: ra 
 &a ;v;vyxa-.., the things easiest to ohtain. lb. I, C 9 IIoX.t«« 
 %A .vRv, a for^n of government hard '» '-^ -*; , -"^^ B 
 
 convenient both for speaJcmg and fir heinrig.U. ^'"L J there 
 
 colder fir bathing f Xen. Mem. lU, 13, 3. 
 
 (Paiive.) Ki;.« a;.rxpa. op 3^ 0a. (instead of op...). Xen 
 
 airiji^pos. IsOC. Antid. p. 70, § 115. 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitive may be used after adverbs which corre- 
 spond to the adjectives just mentioned (§ 93, 2). Ji. g. 
 
 iiCZiT<i,o%pi>rara, in a manner most delighlfil for the friendly 
 tobehM, and most terrible for the Ul-dkposed. Xex. Cyr. VIII, 3, 5. 
 
 Note 2. Cert^n nouns, which are equivalent in meaning to the 
 neuter of any of the adjectives which take the Infinitive, may them- 
 selves have the same construction. E. g. ^ 
 
 eaC/ia UU6ai,a wonderful thing to behold (like Oav^arhp .8c- 
 
 Note 3. (a.) In Homer verbs expressing excellence ovfiness 
 Bometlmes take tlie Infinitive (as an accusative by synecdoche), 
 like the adjectives of § 93, 2. E. g. 
 
 "EKTopo, rjde yvuf). t^ ip.ar.CeaKe fj^ixfaSai ,0ns i« the wife of 
 TleclJrM'walthefrst infghting.^ II. VI 460. 0,,X...,. e.e<a-o 
 
 ahTov\hv ^amio., 7r.pl 8WcrW ^.dx^cr6ac, ye who excel the Danai 
 '^^JcoJn^dand excel them in battle": II. I, 258 (Here ^ouX,. and 
 fidx^aeai are aUke in the accusative by synecdoche after mpt . . . 
 
 €0T€.) 
 
 (b ) Even in Attic Greek the Infinitive is sometimes used after 
 vprbs as a synecdochical accusative. The Infinitives a<ov«v a^ovo-m, 
 iv sound, and opav, t'8av, in appearance, especially, are used in this 
 wav. E.g. T . 7 ^1. , 
 
 AoK.ls oZv TL 8m(^/p«v alroijs Ibilu xaX««. ; do you think that 
 
 
 § 95, 1.] INFINITIVE AS GENITIVE OR DATIVE. 197 
 
 ihey differ at all in appearance from a brazier? Plat. Rep. VI, 495 
 E. Compare €vpurfpoff iSeV^at, II. lU, 194. 'Akovo-qi irayKoXas 
 cvet, it is very fine in its sound. Dem. F. L. 355, 29. Updynara 
 irapi^ovaiv (oi Unoi) eTTtfttXeo-^at , the horses wUl make trouhlp 
 about tending. Xen. Cyr. IV, 5, 46. 
 
 Note 4. The Homeric use of o/ioToff, equal, like^ with the In- 
 finitive is to be referred to the same principle. E. g. 
 
 AfUKoVfpoi x'-ovoi, deieiv d' dvefioLaiv ofioloi, (horses) whiter than 
 snow, and like the winds in swiftness, II. X, 437. Ov ydp ol tis 
 ofwlos eiTiaTreadaL Troalv ^ev. H. XIV, 521. 
 
 § 04. The Infinitive as genitive, dative, or accusa- 
 tive is very often governed by prepositions, or by adverbs 
 used as prepositions. In this case it always takes the 
 article rov, to?, or to, E. g. 
 
 Tove yap "Koyovs Trepl tov TiiKopfjaaa-dat ^ikinirov opS) yiyvo- 
 aivovs, for I see that the speeches are made about punishing Philip. 
 JDem. 01. in, 28, 5. Upo TOV Tovs opKovs dirobovvai, before tak- 
 ing the oaths. Id. Cor. 234, 6. *Ek tov rrpbs x^pt" ^rjfirjyopflu 
 €vlovs. Id. 01. Ill, 29, 18. UplSs T« ^xT]b€v (K T^s 7rpf(r/3ems Xa^flv, 
 besides receiving nothing for the embassy. Id. F. L. 412, 21. 'Ei/ tw 
 froXiTTjv TToieio-^at (Xapldrjfiov), in making Charidemus a citizen. 
 Id. Aristocr. 683,22. "Ei/efca toO ttXcio) iroi^aai. tt^v xmdpxovaav 
 ovaiau. Isoc. Demon, p. 6 A. § 19. 'E^au/xaCfro^ « tti tw fMfi^s 
 (;^v. Xen. Mem. IV, 8, 2. "O/^cos bia to ^ivos elvat ovk av oi« 
 ddiKTjdrjvai, on account of being a stranger, lb. II, 1, 15. Uavrav 
 dia(f)€p(ov i^alv€To, Koi €is to Taxv fxavdaveip a Scot Koi els to /coXws 
 fKaaTanoielv, Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1. 
 
 § 95. 1. The genitive and dative of the Infinitive, 
 with the article, may stand in most of the constructions 
 belonging to those cases ; as in that of the adiiominal 
 genitive, the genitive after comparatives, the genitive 
 after verbs and adjectives, the dative of manner, means, 
 &G., the dative after such verbs as incTTeva} and after 
 adjectives denoting resemblance, &c., and sometimes in 
 that of the genitive of cause or motive, E. g. 
 
 Tov IT If IV tmdvfiia, the desire to drink, Tnuc. VH, 84. IloVovy 
 be tov C^v ^860)9 TjyepLovas vofxlC^Tc. Xen. C}T. I, 5, 12. Els 
 tXiriba ^\6ov TOV iXelv {ttju ttoXw/), i, e. hope of taking the city, 
 ThuC. II, 56. (See § 92, 1, N. 2.) Ncoi? to aiydu KpeiTTou ioTi 
 TOV \a\elv. Mknand. Monos. 387. UapeicdXei emfieXdadai, tov 
 as (ppovuKaTttTou eluai. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 55. So III, 3, 11 Seo 
 
198 
 
 THE INFINITIVE, 
 
 [§ 95, 1, 
 
 § 92, 1, N. 5. (^7rtfi6X«Vat usuaUy takes ontos with the Future In- 
 dicative, by § 45.) 'E7rcVxo/i««/ tov daKpifiv, we ceaaed to weep. 
 Plat. Phaed. 117 E. (See below, § 95, 2.) Kai yap ai^^fts row 
 KaraKovtiv tiv6s eiVii/, for theij are unused to obeying any one, 
 Dem. 01. I, 15, 28. * , ^ 
 
 Ou5€J/i r5>v ndvToiV lAiov KCKpdrrjKC '^iXinnos fj tw npoT^pos irpos 
 vols TTpdynaai yiyi^ecr^ai. Id. Chers. 92, 21. *AXXa r« (pav^pos 
 (Ivai TotoGroy (oi/, by making it plain that he was such a man. Akn. 
 Mem. I, 2, 3. Ov yap dfiraye KO<Tnia>s Cn^ "^o./ Trtcrrevfn/, to trust 
 in an orderly life. Isoc. Antid. p. 315 A. § 24. "laou 8c to) tt po- 
 or eve ti/. AescH. Agam. 253. T<^ Cn^ f^'''* ^» evavriou, &airep t<o 
 fyprjyopevaiTO KaBevdetu. Plat. Phaed. 71 C. 
 
 MtVoos TO \h<ttik6v KaBripei, rov ras irpo(r68ovs fiaXKov Uvat, avr^j 
 in order that greater revenues might come in. TiiUC. I, 4. 
 
 Note. It will be seen that the nominative and accusative of the 
 Infinitive (except the accusative after prepositions) regularly stand 
 without the article ; the genitive and dative regularly with the article. 
 The Infinitive after the verbs included in § 92, 1, however, gener- 
 ally stands without the article, whatever case it represents; and 
 further, whenever any word which might govern a genitive or da- 
 tive of the Infinitive fonns a part of an expression which is equiv- 
 alent to any of the verbs of § 92, 1, the simple Infinitive may be 
 used. (See § 92, 1, Note 2.) 
 
 2. After verbs and expressions which denote hivr 
 drance or freedom from anything, two constructions 
 are allowed, — that of the simple Infinitive (§ 92^ 
 1), and that of the genitive of the Lifinitive with tov 
 (§95,1). ^ ^ 
 
 Thus we can say (a) (tpy€i ae tovto irotciu^ and (o) ctpyf* 
 <re To{5 TodTo noiflv (both with the same meaning), he pre- 
 vents you from doing this. As the Infinitive after such verbs 
 can talie the negative fiij without affecting the sense, we have 
 a third and a fourth form, still with the same meaning : — 
 (c) €ipy€i a€ fifi TOVTO TTotcii', and (d) tlpy€i ere toO/xi} tovto 
 iroteii^, he prevents you from doing this. For a fifth form with 
 the same meaning, see § 95, 3. (For the negative fi% see 
 
 Note I, a.) 
 
 If the leading verb is itself negative (or interrogative with a 
 negative implied), the double negative ^^ ov is generally used 
 instead of /xif in the form (c) with the simple Infinitive, but 
 seldom (or never) in the form {d) with the genitive of the 
 Infinitive ; as o^k tipye/ ..€ /xp oi rodro Troteo/, he dx)es not pre- 
 
 \ 
 
 §95,2.1 INFINITIVE AFTER VERBS OF HINDRANOB. 199 
 
 vent you from doing this; seldom (or never) rov /i^ ov toGto 
 iroicli'. See also § 95, 3. (For the double negative, see 
 Note 1, h,) E. g. 
 
 (a.) 'EttI ^0\vv6ov airovefXTTOva-iv, oiras flpyaxri Tom UtWcv ini- 
 Bondelv. Thuc. I, 62. El tovto tis eipyei dpav okvos, if any 
 hesitation prevents you from doing this. Plat. Soph. 242 A. JaXXws 
 8€ irasiropiC^aeaiTu cViriySfia opKOVs ^drj KaTexovras rjfias (jlddv). 
 XeN. An. Ill, 1,20. KaKOv 6c nolop eipye roOrJ e^eidtuat; ^OPII. 
 
 0. T. 129. EiJfio/ctfieii' €fi7rod(au (r(j)L(Tiv elvai. Plat. Euthyd. 
 805 D. UaiBos <Pepr}TOS, ov Oavclv eppva-dfirjv. EUR. Alc. 11. Tov 
 ^iXimrov TtaptXeelv ovk ihvvavro KuAvaai. Dem. Pac. 62, 10. 
 Ti]v mav T?js yvs ov8ev ^f KtoXvei Xc'y ftv. Plat. Phaed. 108 E. 
 
 (b.) Tov be bpa7r€T€V€iv beafxoU dneipyova-i ; Xen. Mem. II, 
 
 1, 1*6. To yap ylrevbo^icvov (jyalveadai Ka\ tov o-vyyi/co/iT;? tivos 
 T*uyxa»'f *»' e>7ro8a)V frnXiara dvdpdyirois yiyv€Tai. Id. Cyr. Ill, 1, 9. 
 Ehfv oTi Ka>\i<T€i€ (&v) ToO Kaieiv (movTas.ld. An. I, 6, 2. 
 •ATTftrxoftr;!/ tov Xa^elv tov biKaiov evcKa. Dem. F. L. 410, 18. 
 
 (c.) Elpy€ uh ^\a(TTdv€iv. Plat. Phaedr. 251 B. Ojr^p 
 Z<Tx^ }ii] T^u n(\on6vin]aov TTopO^lv, which prevented him from 
 ravaging the Peloponnesus. Thuc. I, 73. AieKcbXvcrc /ii? StaA^et- 
 pat. Id. Ill, 49. 'ETreyeVero KcoXyitiara /i^ av^ry^^vat. Id. 1, 16. 
 (§ 92, 1, N. 2.) Gi^Tovff y enavaa fifj n poade ptceaBai fxopov. 
 Aescil Prom. 248. Tov fiov (pv\d$€i a ovop-a p.r} ndax^^v KOKwy. 
 Soph. O. C. 667. 
 
 Ov yap eari "EWrjai ovbepla efcSvo-ts fxri ov bovras Xoyov ( i v a i 
 (ro{»9 bovXovs. Hdt. VIII, 100. nifxnovai KtjpvKa, IrroBt^apfvot 
 crY^(r6i./ t6v 27rapTLr)Trfu fif, ^ ^i^va,.. . . OC bvvaTol avTrjv tax^iu 
 elcri 'Apyfloi m ovk e^ei/ac. Id. IX, 12. "Qtrre ^^uov y av ovdev 
 ove\ (So-TTep av vvv, vTreKTpanolprjv pt] ov (tvv€ k(T (aC^tv. bOPH. U. 
 
 perfecdy happy t Id. Hell. IV, 1, 36. So Arist. Ran. 69a. 
 
 (d.) nds yap dcTKbs bvo &vbpas ejei toO pfi koto 80 vat, i. 6. 
 will keep two men from sinking. Xen. An. UI, 5, 1 1 . Ov ovSeif itcb 
 TTpo^fW rov M ttX^ov^x^^^^^'^P^'"''"'' ThUC. I, 76. Ei 5 ap 
 ianobii>v Ti avT^ iyivrro tov m (vOvs t6t€ diKaaaadai. Dem. 
 Apatur. 900, 22. ^HniaTaTo Tfjv iroXiv puKpov diroXnTovaav tov firj 
 Tals iaxdTais (Tvp<l>opaU iT€piir€<T€'iv. Isoc. Antid. p. 73, § 122. 
 ^AnoaotiovvTfs av €p7rob(ov ylyvoivTO Toviir}6pav avTovs to oXov 
 OTpdrevpa. Xen. Cyr. II, 4, 23. EtSor^ 6t, ^vdac^aX^i 1^<t^ rov 
 p.deunae^iv. lb. Ill, 3, 31. (See Thuc. VI, 18, quotedj 92, 
 1, N. 2.) Tov be pr) ((caKwf) ttoo-x***' f^^Tol vaaav a6f lav i;yer€, 
 you wire entirely free from fear of suffering harm. Dem. F. L. 387, 
 17. *Evoiar]i oi58fpias €T divo(TTpo(\>^r)S tov fir] to xp^f^^"- * X * • " 
 vpBs, there being no longer any escape from the conclusion that you 
 have taken bribes. Id. Timoc. 702, 26. 
 
200 
 
 THE IXFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 95, 2. 
 
 Remark. The last two examples show that fxrj ean be joined 
 with the genitive of the Infinitive, even after nouns implying hin- 
 drance or freedom. In the two following the addition of /xij is more 
 peculiar : — 
 
 'H anopia rov fiq ^avxciCfiv, t^e inaUlihj to refit. ThUC II, 49. 
 *H Toi) firf ^vfxnXflu dn-ioria, the distrust of sailing with them ; i. e. the 
 unwillingness to sail^ caused hy distrust. Id. Ill, 75, 
 
 Note 1. {a.) The use of /xif with the Infinitive in the 
 forms c and d is to be referred to the general principle, by 
 which the Infinitive after all verbs expressing a negative idea 
 (as those of denying, distrusting^ concealing, forbidding, &c.) 
 can always take the negative /xtJ, to strengthen the negation 
 implied in the leading verb. Thus we say apudTai nf} dXTjdii 
 tipai TouTo, he denies that this is true ; dniryopfvc fiTjdeva tovto 
 noiflv, he forbade any one to do this. This negative may, how- 
 ever, be omitted without aflTecting the sense. 
 
 (h.) An Infinitive which for any reason would regularly 
 
 take /ijj (either affecting the Infinitive itself, as an ordinary 
 
 negative, or strengthening a preceding negation, as in the case 
 
 just mentioned) generally takes the double negative /x^ ol, if 
 
 the verb on which it depends is itself negative. Thus the 
 
 example given above, apvilrai, ^fi aXrjBis dvai tovto, becomes, if 
 
 we negative the leading verb, ovk dpvdTai p.f) ovk d\r}6es eti/at 
 
 TOVTO, he does not deny that this is true. So, when the original 
 
 firj really negatives the Infinitive, as in dUaiov iim p.fj tovtov 
 
 d(\>uvaiy it is just not to acquit him, — if we negative the leading 
 
 verb, we shall have ov dUmou ioTi p,ri ov tovtov d^tcvat, it is 
 
 not just not to acquit him. See Plat. Rep. IV, 427 E, as 
 
 ovx, oaiov aoi hu firi ov ^or]6(iv diKaioavvjj, This applies also to 
 
 the Infinitive with to (§ 95, 3). 
 
 M^ ov is occasionally used before participles, and even before 
 nouns, on the same principle, to express an exception to a statement 
 containing a negative; as in Plat, Lys. 210 D, ovk apa eari d)l\ov 
 ra </)iXoCi/Ti ovdeu fxri ovk dvTi(f)i\ovv, unless it loves in return. Here, 
 if the negatives {ovk and ovdiv) were removed from the leading 
 verb, we should have simply p.f) dvTi(t)i.\ovv (with the same meaning), 
 which would be the ordinary Ibrm with the participle, even after a 
 negative. So firj ovk covtcs, uiiless they were. Hdt. VI, 9. So in 
 Dem. F. L. 379, 7, we find at t€ noXeis TroXXai koi ;^aXc7ra( Xa/Sfti/, 
 tt^ ov xpo"? ''"'* TToXtopKta, the cities were many and dij/icult (== not 
 easy) to capture^ except by long siege. 
 
 § 95, 3.] T6 /ijf .WITH THE INIINITIVE. 201 
 
 Remark. Mfj ov is very rarely found where the leading verb 
 does not at least imply a negative. In Xen. An. II, 3, 11, wot* 
 irdaiu alaxvvT]u thai, /i^ ov (Tv(Tirov8dC€iv, so that all were ashamed 
 not to join heartily in the work, the double negative may be explained 
 by the negative idea of unwillingness implied in aiaxyvrju. See also 
 the last e^^ample under N. 1. . 
 
 Note 2. When the leading verb expressing hindrance, &c. ia 
 itself necrative, the form c, p.f) ov with the Infinitive, is the most com- 
 mon. The form a, the Infinitive alone, is allowed after negative 
 (as well as aflirmative) verbs, as in Dem. Pac. 62, 10, quoted above 
 under a. The form b, tov with the Infinitive (without fxrj), is not 
 used after negative verbs, according to Madvig. 
 
 Even in the form c, we sometimes find the single negative fifi (for 
 liri ov), even when the leading verb is negative. E. g. 
 
 Ov noXvv xpovov p! cVtVxoi' p^h p€ vavaToXflv raxv-^ SoPH. PhiL 
 349. Ovbe p.* opLpaTos (^povpav Trap^jXBe, Toude pifj Uvaaeiv (ttoKov. 
 Id. Trach. 226. (Mjj ov here is a conjecture.) 
 
 3. The Infinitive preceded by to ^477 is sometimes 
 used after verbs and expressions denoting hindrance, 
 and also after all expressions which even imply prevm 
 tion, omission, or denial. 
 
 This Infinitive with to is less closely connected than the 
 simple Infinitive with the leading verb, and often denotes 
 merely the result of the prevention or omission of anything : it 
 may generally be explained as an accusative by synecdoche, or 
 Bomedmes as an object accusative (as after verbs of denial). 
 Here, as before (§ 95, 2), if the leading verb is itself negative, 
 or interrogative with a negative implied, (xfj ov is generally 
 used instead of fi^. E. g. 
 
 Tiv TrXetOTOu o/xtXov ^Jpyov t6 firi npo€^i6vTas t5>p o7r\(ou to iyyvi, 
 TVS TToX^cos KaKovpy^lv, they prevented them from injuring, &c. 
 Thuc. Ill, 1. (This adds a ffth expression, fipy« ae to p.r} tovto 
 TToielv, to the four already given (§ 95, 2) as eqmvalents of the 
 T^ ,-1 T j^ /v^,v, ,7r.:r,r, fhia \ tA ^* iir, XenXaTnaai 
 
 t6 ufi n^n f^^^^'' ^"^^ 'r"^"' eWcvSo/xf.;. Xen. An. IV, 8, 14. Ov< 
 dw€ax6^r]UT6 p,^ OVK cttI toOto eX^eiv. Plat. Rep. I, 3o4 B. 
 Oi^< aTT^'o-Yoin-o 0^8' dnh t^v <^iXo)i/ Th fxi) ovx* -nUov^KT^ivavTu^v 
 fr€ ,pa<r 6 ai. XeN. Cyr. I, 6, 32. Kipa>va jrapa -rp^is a^^iaav 
 ^i^c^vs Th p^ 6avar<o Crjp^ii^<ra.,l e they allowed Cimon by three 
 votes to escape the punishment of death. Dem. Aristocr. 688, 27 
 
 9* 
 
 
202 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 95, 3. 
 
 97.] 
 
 INFINITIVE EXPRESSING A PURPOSE. 
 
 203 
 
 TpfU ii fiouai ylr7i(t>oi hrjv^yKav to fxr} Bavarav Ti/A^crat, and on.^ 
 three votes prevented you from condemning him to death (lit. made the 
 difference as to condemr.lng, &c.). lb. 676, 12. ^o^oi yap avff vavov 
 napadTard to firj fJ€^ai<as ^\e(t>apa (rvfi^aXtlv Zfrp<o, i. e. stands 
 by to prevent my closing my eyes, &c. Aksch. Agam. 15. 
 
 'ETTfi irpoevpilaff, ovk (vaimaxropai to fxrj ov yfyavelv nav oaou 
 itpo(TXpriC^r€. Id. Prom. 78B. Ovhiv yap avT^ TaCrr' cnapKeaei to firj 
 ov TrTieTv artVo>s TrrcD/iar ov'< duaax^Ta, thU will not suffice to pre- 
 vent him from faUing, &c. lb. 918. AfiVfi fieu ov8' a TrpnaOev r}8fp€V 
 TO fxfi ov ^apv<TTov flvaiy they lack nothing of being heavily gnev^ 
 ous. Soph. O. T. 1232. M»;toi, Kaaiyv^TT], /x' art/iacriyff to iir] ov 
 davftv T€(TVP aolTov OavovTa 6' &y via at, do not think me too mean 
 to die with thee, &c. Id. Ant. 544. (Cf. Ant. 22, and Oed. Col. 49.) 
 AvTTiv firjv ov fxicrovvT €K(ivrjv t^v TroXtv to firj ov pfydXrjv ft" a* 
 ^va€i Kcvbalfiova, i. e. not grudging the city its right to be great, &c. 
 Arist. Av. 36. (Compare p-iarja^v piv Kvai Kvppa y f vccr^ai, 11. 
 XVII, 272.) OiJSf ly dimXtyft, to prj ov Xe^fivoTi tKaaros f^yelTai 
 TrXeioTou a^tov imoTaadai, no one objects to saying, &c. Xkn. Conv. 
 Ill, 3. Ov5* apvrjais €<ttlv avrols to prj ravff vnkp ^CklTrnov it par - 
 r€ IV, it is not even possible for them to deny that they diA these things 
 in the interest of Philip. Dem. F. L. 392, 13. M^ Trapfji to fifj ov 
 (bpdaai, do not omU to speak of it. SoPH. O. T. 283.^ Ovbeva 
 dvvaaeai KpvnTciv to prjovx ^^eW dv Kai a>p5>v iaOUiv <^^jf>^^^^f 
 no one is able to prevent people from knowing that he would gladly 
 even eat some of them raw. Xen. Hell. Ill, 3, 6. 
 
 For /i^ ov, see § 95, 2, Note 1, (6.)- 
 
 Note. The simple negative form to pr) is sometimes found even 
 •when the leading verb is negative, where regularly to pfj ov would 
 be used. This is more common here than in the corresponding 
 case, §95, 2, Note 2. E.g. 
 
 Ovk dv f(Txdpr}v to prj oTTO^XJo-ai T0vp,6v dB\iov Be pas- SoPH. 
 O. T. 1387. Ti's o-oO dTr€\€i<t)9r) to prj aoi dKoXovOflv; Xen, 
 Cyr. V, 1, 25. "Akos 8* ovdev enfjpKfdav to prj noKiv p€v woTTfp ovv 
 ?Y« iradelv. AescH. Agam. 1170. Ovk av eari prix^vi) ovhepla to 
 uri K€'ivov €iri^ov\€{>€iv (fioi. Hdt. I, 209. Kat (hrjpl ^(^(^ai, 
 KovK dirapvovfxai to pf], SoPH. Ant. 443. See also Dem. F. L. 
 392, 13, quoted above. 
 
 Remark. To prj and tov pfj can of course be used with the In- 
 finitive as ordinary negatives. See examples, § 92, 1, N. 3. So 
 cVt/AcXetTai TOV prf 8Ut]v dovvai. 
 
 § 06. The Infinitive with its subject, object, or other 
 adjuncts (sometimes including dependent verbs) may 
 be preceded by the article to, the whole sentence stand- 
 ing as a single noun, either as the subject or object of a 
 
 verb, as the object of a preposition, or in apposition 
 with a pronoun like touto. E. g. 
 
 To aev yap TroXXa diroXaXf K€vai Kard t'ov TrdXepov tTjs fjpeTepat 
 dp€\€ia5 dv Tis e€ir) diKaias ' to be pi]T€ 'ndXai toZto rt^Ttovd^vai 
 ir€<t>r)V€vai T€ Tiva r]piv (rvppaxiav tovt<ov avTipponov, &v povKapeUa 
 Yprj&Oai, T?is mp €K€iv(ov fvvoias €uepyen//i' dv eycoye detriv, Deu. UL 
 1, 12, 3. 
 
 § 97. The Infinitive without the article often ex- 
 presses a purpose. E. g. 
 
 Tpa<ov dvbpa iKaoTov («) e-XotV^^a oIvoxo^v€LV, if^ff^^'l^ 
 choose every man of the Trojans to be our cup-bearer. 11. 11, 127. &o 
 n. 1, 338, hosdy€iv, and 11, 107, 108. T^u e| 'Apeiovirayov ^ovXrjv 
 inearrjaav iTTip^XeUdat t?i, .vKoapla,, I e. for the purpose of 
 quardinq qood order. IsOC Areop. p. 147 B. § 37. Ot apxovres, ovs 
 LeZy €i\€(Tee dpx^^v pov, the rulers, whom you chose to rule me. 
 Plat. Apol. 28 E. Ae/ca U t^v vewi/ npovTrepylrav €S tov peyav Xipeva 
 TrXeiaai t€ Ka\ Kara(TKk^a(T6aL, Ka\ ktj pi $ai ,K.T.X.,i.e- they sent 
 them to sail and examine, and to proclaim, &c. Tnuc. VI, 50. Tow 
 tTTTTfa? nap€ixovTO UeXoTrovvrjaiois $v<TTpaT€veiv. Id. 11,^ 12. 
 Svveldnaav toIs UXaraifixTi irapaSovvai acjyas avTovs kol to ottAc, 
 xphcraaeai 5tc dv ^ovXcovTai, i. e. to do with them whatever they 
 pleased. Id. II, 4. (For 7rapa8odvm see § 92, 1, N. 1.) Ei ^ovXoi- 
 afOd TO) imrpeylrai fj iralbas Traibedaai, tj XPVH^t.^, diaaaxrai, 
 KT X V we should w'lsh to intrust to any one either children to instruct 
 or money to keep, kc. Xen. Mem. I, 5, 2. A? yvml^^r Trieli/ j^fW 
 crat, the women hinging them {something) to drink. Xen. HeU. Vll, 
 2, 9. 1r]V ivdXiv Ka\ Ttiv dKpav (jivXarreLV avrols irapedaKav, they 
 delivered the city and the citadel to them to guard. lb. I V, 4, 15. Os 
 yap dv vpds XdOr], toZtov d(j>i€T€ Tols OeoU KoXdC^tv. Dem. t. L. 
 
 363 25. 
 
 *H 6Cpa f] ipn dvkaxro tlarikvai t« heopha ti ipov. Xen. Hell. 
 V,l,14. OvKelxovapyvpioviTviaiTlCf(r6ai, they had no money to 
 buy provisions. Id. An. VII, 1, 7. 'Apiarapxco tbojejipipav diroXo' 
 yfjfadai, I e. a day to defend himself in. Id. HeU. I, 7, 28. Epav^ 
 TOV crot ep,peX,Tdv napix^iv ov irdvv d^boKTai. Plat. Phaedr. 228 E. 
 OU €V€vbaip.ov?}(Tai, t€ 6 ^ios opLoitos Ka\ fx/TeXeuTijcrat ^vv€fi€' 
 Tpi)er). ThUC. II, 44. , 
 
 Here, as in § 93, 2, the Infinitive is generally active or middle,^ 
 even where the passive would seem more natural; as Kravtlv tpoi, 
 viv (boaav, they gave her to me to be killed. EuR. Troad. 874. 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitive is thus used in prose chiefly after verbs 
 8i<mifyino' to choose or appoint, to give or take (the Infinitive denotr 
 ing the purpose for which anything is given or taken), and also 
 after those signifjnng to send or bring. (See the examples.) With 
 Ihe last class the Future Participle is more common. A final clause 
 after iva, &c. may also be used in the same sense. 
 
 I 
 
204 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§97. 
 
 § 98, 2.] 
 
 INFINITIVE AFTER "Got*. 
 
 205 
 
 In poetiy the same construction sometimes occurs after verbs of 
 motion, like f t/x*- ^<«' and 0alv(o\ and also after f i>i, eTrf t/xt, 
 and Trdpeifii (tobe,to he at hand), expressed or understood. E. g. 
 
 *AXXa Tis €ir] elnflv 'Arpe% ' Kyayiifivovi, Trot/xcVt Xawj/, hut let 
 some one go to tell Agamemnon. Od. XIV, 496. (See Passow, 5.i7. 
 €Tyii.) B^ Se 6€€iv, and he started to run. II. II, 182. Ovhi tis 
 ((TTiu dpt]v KoX Xoiybv a/xOi/ai , nor is there any one to keep off curse 
 and ruin. II. XXIV, 489. HoXXoi 8' aZ troi 'Axaiot euaipefxev oy 
 K€ 8vvrjai, i. e.for you to slay whomsoever you can. I^. VI, 229. Ou 
 yap (Eir dvTjp olos *08vaa€vs eaKfv, dpf]v dno oUov dfivvai.^ Od. II, 
 69. Mav3dv€ip yap iJKOfxtUy for we are come to learn. Soph. O. 
 C. 1 2. nXoKopos oSf KaTa<TT€(l>€iVf here is my hair for you to 
 wreathe. EuR. Iph. Aul. 1478. , , . , . 
 
 Even in prose, the Infinitive occasionally occurs after ft/ii in thia 
 sense, as in Plat. Phaedr. 229 A, «€i iroa KaOlCfo-dai (sc. (oriv), 
 there is grass to sit upon. See also Xen. An. II, 1, 6, noWal Se kgi 
 jrcXrai Ka\ dfxa^ai, ^(Tav (jyepfaSai eprjpoi, I e. they were left to be 
 carried away {for fuel). See the last examples under § 97. 
 
 Note 2. As &aTt is seldom used in Homer in its sense of 
 so as (§ 98, N. 3), the simple Infinitive may there express a 
 result as well as a purpose. It thus follows many expressions 
 which would not allow it in Attic Greek. E. g. 
 
 TisT ap acpQie Oewv epidi ^vvtrjKe ixdxf<r0ai; i. 6. who brought 
 them into conflict, so as to contend? II. I, 8. So I, 151 •, and epiCefie- 
 i;at, II, 214. *AXX' 6t€ dri KoiXrj vqvs tJxO^to toTo-i vkiaOai, ivhen 
 now their ship was loaded, so as {to he ready) to start. Od. XV, 
 457. Xepvi^a S* dfKp'nroXos npoxoco irrix^vf (^epovcra, . . . . i/t^/ra- 
 o-^ai, i. e./or washing. Od. I, 138. 
 
 Note 3. In Homer and Herodotus we often find dvaL intro- 
 duced to denote a purpose, where in Attic Greek a simple noun, as 
 a predicate accusative or nominative, connected directly with the 
 leading verb, would be sufficient. E. g. 
 
 ei^prjKO, Tov 7roT€ oi Ktvvprjs Sw/cf ^tivrjiou €ivai, i. e. which they 
 gave him as a present (lit. to be a present). L. XI, 20. Ai0ov ftXero 
 Xfipl Traxftrj, rov p avbp€i irpuTfpoi 6(<Tav ep-pevai oZpov dpovprjs, 
 which they had placed (to he) as a boundary. II. XXI, 405. Aapilos 
 Karaarriaas *ApTa(f>€pv€a xmapxov ilvai "Sapbioiv. Hdt. V, 25. 
 
 So in the passive construction : — TcXcoj/ dtrehix^l irdarji rrjs nrirov 
 €11/ at tnnapxos. Hdt. VII, 154. 
 
 Even in Attic prose this use of elvai sometimes occurs ; as in Dem. 
 Aph. lU, 852, 12, Mvr}pov€vov(TiP dcpedevra tovtov iXevdfpov f ti/at 
 Tore, they remember hu( having been then manumitted so as to be a free- 
 man. So d^t'i^atv avra brjfiocria elvai, Tuuc. II, 13. 
 
 Note 4. The use of the Infinitive after the comparative ani ^, 
 than, is to be referred to this principle. E. g. 
 
 ^ 
 
 •H dv0p<o7rlvri (bvais dtT0(V€(rr€pa ? Xa^f iv rex^rfv <ov av r, nrrftpos, 
 human nature is too weak, to acquire the art of those things oj which it 
 ha.^ no experience. Plat. Theaet. 149 C. T<i yap v6<Tr)iua pu^ou i; 
 <j>ep(tv, i. e. too great to bear. Soph. O. T. 1293. 
 
 "QoTf is sometimes expressed before this Infinitive ;^ as in Xen. 
 Hell. IV, 8, 23,''Hio-^ovTO avrov iXdrra tx^vra dvvapiv t) axrre rovs 
 d)iXovs wc^f Xfii/. . 
 
 So, rarely, i>s in the sense of Sxrre (§ 98, Note 1) ; as in Cyr. VI, 
 4, 17, Tas d(nriBas /ici'Covj ex'^vaiv fj a)s iroLelv ti Ka\ opav. 
 
 § 98. 1. The Infinitive is used after wo-re, so that^ 
 80 as, to express a result. E. g. 
 
 *Uv TrcTraibevfievos ovT(os <ocrr€ irdw piKpa K€KTrjp€Poi ndvv pabim 
 ?Y€ii/ dpKodura, he had been educated so as very easily to have enough, 
 although he possessed very little. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 1.^ ^vpaide o 
 KOpos UyfTai (jyiXoTipoTaros, Q><tt€ iravra ph ivovov auaTXyai, 
 Trdirra de Kivbvuou vnop^lva,. Id. Cyv.1,2, 1. 'ATrexP'/ 7"P ^^ ''^,'^ 
 yv^aOiiUKV ippUKV, &<tt^ prjd^piav fiplu€ivai Trpoy tovtou ^ia^opau, 
 so that we should have no difference with him. Dem. Aph. 1, 81d, 4. 
 noXUs eXmbas ^X<^ dpKOvirr<os €p€7v, Sxrre ^l^\\ i^^ .''^^^V'^-'^' 
 vacTS>u irpaypdra^vpffr' dyvo^aaL, K.r.X. lb. 813, 20. TotovroM 
 tfSos rjalu irapeboaav, Sxrre . . . crvvfXeflv €S ravrov. ISOC. ran. p. 
 49 B. § 43. See Pan. § 45, roaoiiTov (Cttiv, o)(tt€ Ka\ tovto 7r€pi€i' 
 XvcbOai. Ufiaopat, yap ov Toaovrov ouSeV (oarf pr) ov KaX^s 
 Bavelv. Soph. Ant. 97. 2if be axoXdCeii, &<tt€ eavpa^eiv €pe. 
 Eur. Hec. 730. Mt/S' f) ^ia af prfbapois viKr]adT(o roo-oi/Se piaeiv 
 &cTr€ rhu biKTjp Tvarelp. SoPH. Aj. 1335. A6y<op Ka\ JiovX,vpaT<op 
 Kotp<op6p ^p <r€ itoloIpto, S><tt€ prjbeep aeXeXTjOepai Z^p ^ovXop^ea 
 €l8€Pai, so that not a single one of the things we wish to know should 
 have escaped you. Xen. Cyr. VI, 1, 40. (See § 18, 3, b.) Ava- 
 KoXia Ka\ uapla TroXXaKis fls ri^p bidvoiap epmTTT.vaiP ourcos a>^re Kai 
 ra. imcrrljpa, eK^dXXeiP. Id. Mem HI, 12,6. A7roX#^..^oj, 
 &<rT€ ix^ hp hvpacrOai, iirapeXOiiP olKahe, Dem. Chers. 98, 25. 
 (For bvpatrdai, ap see N. 4.) 
 
 See § 93, 1, Note 1, last example. 
 
 Remark. When the result is to be stated as an inde- 
 pendent fact, rather than merely as a result, the Indicative 
 is used after Sxrre. See § 65, 3. 
 
 2. The Infinitive after wo-re sometimes denotes a con- 
 dition, being equivalent to the Infinitive after €(j> a> or 
 €(f a> T€ ; and sometimes it denotes a purpose, like a 
 final cause. E. g. 
 
 noiodprat SpoXoyiap Tvphs Udxrjra, Sxrn 'A^atois € Jeti^at ^ov- 
 
206 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 98, 2. 
 
 \€v<rat TTfpt T&v MvrtX»7mt«i/, fhet/ mahfii a treaty with PacheSj to (he 
 effect that the Athenians shall be permitted, &c. Tiiuc. Ill, 28. (See 
 ThuC. Ill, 114, ^Vfifiaxiav (Troifjaavro enl TottrSf, axTre . , . . firj 
 (TTparevt iV'^ E^ov avrois rau Xoirrcjv ap\fiv *EXX^i/a)i/, wot* 
 avTovs vnaKoveiv /Sao-tX^t, it being in their power to rule the rest of 
 the Greeks, on condition that they should themselves serve the King. 
 Dem. Phil. H, 68, 12. Uav TroiovaiVy SxTTt hlKrjv fifi didovai, they 
 do everything, so that they may not suffer punishment. Plat. Gorg. 
 479 C. (Here Iva p.r) with the Subjunctive might have been used.) 
 Y,^ov\r)dr)(Tav EXevtrli'a i^ib^axradBai, cdcrre eipai (r(f)i<Tt, Kara(pvyr]v, 
 (I dfrjcreie. Xen. Hell. 11,4,8. Mrj^^avai noWai flaiv, wOTf Bia- 
 <f>€vy€iv Bdvarov, there are many devices for escaping death. Plat. 
 Apol. 39 A. (See § 92, 1, N. 2.) 
 
 Note 1. *Or is sometimes used with the Infinitive instead 
 of wore ; generally, however, to express a result, seldom to 
 express a pw-pose. E. g. 
 
 Y^Xov §€ ouro) bi] Ti Xeyeraiy at ray Kopv(l)as avrov ovx oid t€ 
 €ivai ihiaOai, and it (the mountain) is said to be so high, that it is not 
 possible to see its summits. Hdt. IV, 184. 'SavpaxTjaairrfs airtVaXa 
 fifu Koi a)s avrovs eKarepovs d^tovv vikqv, and so that each thought 
 themselves the victors. TiiUC. VII, 34. Biaaofieda, ws nXeoveKTOvvTfs 
 diKTjv fxri 8i86pai. Plat. Rep. U, 365 D. *0 irorapos too-ovtos t6 
 ^d6os, 0)5 M^^ ^^ hopara virepixtiv tov ^ddovS' Xex. An. Ill, 5, 
 7. So II, 3, 10. ^epovrai Ka)6<dva, <o9 dtrb tov norapov dpixraaOai, 
 Id. Cyr. I, 2, 8. *Eu t<5 ao'^uXet rfdrj ea-ovrai, a t prjBiv hv en kukov 
 wadfiv. lb. VIII, 7, 27. (For TraBelv av see N. 4.) 
 
 Note 2. The Infinitive with dam or la is sometimes used where 
 we should expect a simple Infinitive, either after the adjectives and 
 adverbs included in § 93, or after the verbs and expressions which 
 take the Infinitive of the object (§ 92, 1, and N. 2) ; and rarely- 
 after those which regularly take an Infinitive as the subject (§ 91). 
 £.g. 
 
 Jl6T(pa Trat^ej fieri (fypoviparfpoi StO'Tt fiaOf7u ra <Ppa^6p€va fj 
 avBp€s ; i. e. are they wu^er than men in learning, &c. ? Xp:x. Cyr. 
 IV, 3, 11. 'OXiyot ka-pkv cos fy/cparfls dvai avTSav. lb. IV, 5, 15. 
 (Cf. oXtym dpvvfiv, too few to make a defence. Thuc. I, 50.) 
 ^vxpdv (eVrt to vSwp) uxrre XovcaaBai, the water is cold for 
 bathing. Xen. Mem. IH, 13, 3. (Cf. Xoixracrdai y\tvxpoT€pov, 
 and dcppoTcpov niflv, in the same section.) "^rjepia-dpevoi avrol 
 Trpmroi &(tt€ irdcrrj TvpoBvpia dpvvtiv , having voted to defend them, 
 &C. TnuC VI, 88. Eiy dvdyKrjv Kadkarapfv axrri kiv8vv€V€ iv. 
 Isoc. Archid. p. 126 C. § 51. (See § 92, 1, N. 2) So dvuapiv 
 a><TT€ kyy(V€cr6ai, Plat. Rep. IV, 433 B. 'EX^oi/rf? irpbs avrovi 
 ireiBovtriv wore p^rd <T(f)oi)v Apyet e7ri;(fip^(rai. Til UC. Ill, 102. 
 (In the same chapter, ntiBei ^AKapvdvas ^orjBrja-ai Nauyra/cro).) 
 
 ndvv pot, ipeXrjaev loa-re etSeVa*, it concerned me very much to 
 
 § 100.] INFINITIVE AFTER 'E,(^" 4 ^^ '^*^' ^^^' ^^^ 
 
 know. Xen. C>T. VI, 3, 19. 'A^u.arov ^t. ^crrc np^ay^^^ 
 roCa. (Toc^cirepoV nva iUaBa,. Plat. Prot. 338 C So Xen. 
 Mem. I, 3, 6. 
 
 Note 3. In Homer 5 o- r e is generally used like & (r j f p , in the 
 sense of as. It occurs with the Infinitive, in the sense of so as only 
 
 twice: II. IX, 42; Od. XVII, 21. 'Q., so ^^ I' -ttZh^rJZ^r 
 in Homer, who generally uses the simple Infinitive where later 
 writers would insert wore or a>s. (See § 97, N. 2.) 
 
 Note 4. The Infinitive after Sxrrf may take the adverb Sp to 
 form an apodosis, whenever an Indicative or Optative, if used in 
 the place of the Infinitive, would have re^mred an «,.. (bee § to, 
 3, Note.) The Infinitive with dp here, as in indirect quotations, fol^ 
 lows the general rule stated in § 41. (See example in § 41, N. 4 , 
 and the last examples under § 98, 1 and § 98, 2, JN. 1.) 
 
 Note 5. It will be seen that the Present and Aorist are the 
 tenses of the Infinitive regularly used after &^e. For the perfect 
 see § 18, 3, and Note; and for the Future, § 27, N. 2 {b). 
 
 § 99, The Infinitive is used after €<}> a> and €>' «t6, 
 
 on condition that, for the purpose of, E. g. 
 
 E?7re.^ Btl anelcrairBai jSovXotro, e(^' « p^re airbs rols yW^as 
 dbiKelp phrf U^ivov, Ka ie LP rds oIkIc,, Xap^a pfip r. ramrfeia 
 Scrcop deoiPTO. Xen. An. IV, 4, 6. Ua>s: &p oIto9 eBeXoiraaXXorpia 
 dnoarepelp fcb' c5 ^aKoSo^oj fJpai; Id. Ages. IV, 1. A(i>^epep ere, 
 ^^oL pLo\, e>' c5r. PV<^ri .^cXocro.^.1. • Plat. Apol. 29 
 
 aoipro Xen. Hell. II, 3, 11. (F«^^'^°^n';r''<^'.T97 N 2 Wf^* 
 1.) 'U' ^re ^or^Bhcrnp. Aeschin. Cor. § 1 14. See § 27, N. 2 (/>). 
 
 For The Future IndicMtive after .'(^' <? and i^' ^re, especial m 
 Herodotus and Thucydides, see § 65, 2. 
 
 § 100. The Infinitive may stand absolutely in par- 
 enthetical phrases, sometimes alone, but generally pre- 
 ceded by «? or ocrov. E. g. 
 
 T6 AeXra iarl Kardppvrop r. f ^ -«^ Vl .^^'^M™^^^^ 
 K€6np6s i.e. recendy, so to speak. Hdt. H, 15. (i his expression 
 
208 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § loa 
 
 Xapos 8* 08' IpoSi as arretKao-at. SoPH. O. C. 16. Kai to ^vfirrav 
 tlnelv. Thug. I, 138. (So VI, 82, €s to oKpi^is eiVeti/.) 'Qs 
 tiiKpov fi€ya\(o elKaaai. Id. IV, 36. "Qs y e/xot -x^pria-Bai lepirfj. 
 Eur. Ale. 801. *Qj irpos vpas elp^a-Baij i. e. between u,^. Plat. 
 Hep. X, 595 B. 0^5' eyu* "^iyon tovtovs, tos ye biaKovovs €i.vai 
 TTokfios. Plat. Gorg. 51 7 B. "Ocrov yt pe tlbivai.^ at least as far as 
 J know. Id. Theaet. 145 A. 
 
 So a>s fpol 8 oKe 11/ or f/xoi 8ok€(i/, like ws f/xoi 8oKft, as it seems 
 to me; oXiyov Selv, <o want little j i. e. almost. (Sec N. 1.) 
 
 Remark. The force of wr in this construction can hardly be ex- 
 pressed in English, although it resembles that of as used for wot* 
 m § 98, 2, Note 1. That it is not a demonstrative, as might be sup- 
 posed from the translation of if f tVftt/, so to speak, is plain from such 
 expressions as as avuropas flntlvy to speak concisely. 
 
 Note 1. In the phrase 6\iyov btlv (lit. to want little), little 
 
 short ofy almost, delv is often omitted, so that the genitive 
 
 oXtyov stands alone in the sense o£ almost. E. g. 
 
 'OXiyov (j)pov8os yfyivrjpai, I ain almost gone. Arist. Nub. 722. 
 The full form is found at the beginning of Dem. Phil. Ill,— UoX- 
 Xttf Xoyoiv yiy vopivav oXiyov delv Kaff €Kd(mjv CKKXrjaiav, i. e. in 
 almost ecery meeting. 
 
 Note 2. In the phrase €/c«v tlvai (sometimes t5 Uoiv 
 ctpoi), willing or willingly, tlmi appears to be superfluous : the 
 phrase is used chiefly in negative sentences. Eivai appears 
 superfluous also in such expressions as t6 pvv eti/at, at present, t6 
 niptpov €ivat, to-day, and to iir iKetPois elvai, OS far as depends 
 on them, E. g. 
 
 *Ekq>v yap €ipai ovbh ylrevcropai, willingly I will tell no falseliood. 
 Plat. Symp. 215 A. Ovk aprju ye kot dp^as VTTO crov Ikovtos €ivai 
 t^anaTTjOfjO-cadai. Id. Gorg. 499 C. (^ApuyKT) c^^**') '"')" "V'*'^^**"*' 
 Ka\ TO iKovTas elvai prjdapfj 7rpo(r8e;^fO'^ai to ^(vdos- Id. Rep. VI, 
 485 C. ^AnoxpTj poi to pvv €ipai tovt* elprjKfpai. ISOC. Antid. p. 
 119, § 270. To cV Ueivois f ii/at oTrcoXtoXcire. Xp:n. Hell. Ill, 5, 9. 
 To p€P TTjpfpop (IP a I xp'?o-"o"^«* avrfj, to use it to-day. Plat. Crat. 
 396 E. Kara tovto €ii/at, in this respect. Id. Prot. 317 A. 
 
 Similsu: is the expression Tf)P npaiTrjp €LPai (for ttjp Trparrip), at 
 first, in Hot. I, 153. So as naXaia ft vat, considering their an- 
 tiquity. Thuc. I, 21. 
 
 § 101. The Infinitive is sometimes used in the 
 sense of the Imperative, especially in Homer. E. g. 
 
 T^ PVV pr) TroT€ Koi arv yvpaiKi ttfp {jnios f ipai' prj ol pv6op anaPTa 
 9 i<^av(rK€ p€P, OP K €v €l8fjs, dXXd to ptp (fyda-dai, to de kox kc 
 
 § 104.] INFINITIVE USED IMPERATIVELY, ETC. 200 
 
 Kovppepop f ii/ot , now therefore he thou never indulgent to thy wife, &c. 
 Od XI, 441. So II. I, 20, 582; II, 10 : Hdt. I, 32 (eTrio-xeW pr]bt 
 KaXtfip): Aescii. Prom. 712. 2u 8c Tas nvXas dpoi^as vjTtKddP 
 Ka\€nfiyf<rdai, and do yon, having opened the gates, rush out and 
 press on. Tuuc. V, 9. 
 
 Remark. It will be noticed that, when the Infinitive stands 
 for the Imperative, its subject is in the nominative, but in the 
 four constructions that follow (§§ 102-105) its subject is in the 
 accusative. 
 
 § 102. The Infinitive is sometimes used for the 
 Optative in the expression of a wish referring to the 
 future. This occurs chiefly in poetry. E. g. 
 
 ZeO TraTfp, ? Aiai/ra Xax^'iv ^ TvSt'oy viop, Father Zeus, may the 
 lot fall on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus. II. VII, 179. *Ep^ '/xtto- 
 Xale, TCLP yvpaiKa Tap epap ovTa p* diroboareai topt ipaxnov paTfpa, 
 that I could sell my wife and my mother at this rate! AiiisT. 
 Acharn. 816. Gcoi TroXirat, pri pt bovXeias tvx^'^v. Aesch. Sept. 
 253. 
 
 § 103. In laws, treaties, proclamations, and formal 
 commands, the Infinitive is often used in J;he leading 
 sentences, depending on some word like e3ofe or Be- 
 Bo/craL, he it enacted, or KeKeverau, it is commanded; 
 which may be either understood, or expressed in a pre- 
 ceding sentence. E. g. 
 
 Tapias be Tap iepap XPVH'^'^^^ aipeXadai pep eK Tap^ peyiarap 
 Tipr}pdTaP' Tr}V be atpeaip TOVTap Ka\ ttjp boKipaaiap yiypeaOai 
 KaOdnep ff Tap (rrparqyap eylypeTo, and (be it enacted) that treasurers 
 of the sacred funds be chosen, &c. Plat. Leg. 759 E. So in most 
 of the laws (genuine or spurious) standing as quotations in the text 
 of the Orators, as in Dem. Aristocr. 627, 21: AiKaCftp be ttjp ep 
 'Apeia irdya (poPov Koi TpavpaTos eK irpopoias, k.t.X. En; be eLPat, 
 Tas airopbas nepTtjKOPTa, and that the treaty shaU continue fifty years. 
 Thug. V, 18. *AKOveTe Xea' tovs onXiTas pvppepl dpeXopepovs dairXa 
 dniepai irdXiP oUabe. Arist. Av. 448. 
 
 § 104. The Infinitive, with or without to, is used 
 in expressions of surprise or indignation. E. g. 
 
 To be pribe kvptjp oXKo6ep eXBelp epe top KaKobalpop exoyra, but to 
 think that I, wretched fellow, should have come from home withjut even 
 my cap! Arist. Nub. 268. Tovtop be v^piCftp; dpairpelv bi ; 
 
 N 
 
 ii 
 
210 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§104 
 
 hvfi TK ja Cn^.ayairav edct. Dem. Mid. 582, 2. T^g fuopias * t6 
 Aia vofii(eiv, ovra ttjXikovtopI, what folly/ to believe in ZeuSy now 
 you are so big ! Arist. Nub. 819. 
 
 Compare Yerg. Aen. I, 37 : Mene incepto dedstere victam. 
 
 § 105. In narration the Infinitive often appears to 
 stand for the Indicative. It depends, however, on some 
 word like Xeyerac, it is said, expressed (or at least im- 
 plied) in something that precedes. E. g. 
 
 ^ *AmKOfieuovs 5e tovs *oiWaf «V Bq ro^Apyos tovto, diarideadat 
 rov <f>6pTov, and (jhey say) that the Phoenicians, when now they were 
 come to this Argos, were setting out their cargo for sale. Hdt. I, 1. 
 (Here dtaTt^eo-^at is an Imperfect Infinitive, § 15, 3.) *'*AXX*, <» 
 Jrat," (pdvai rov *A(TTvdyrjVy "o^< dx06p,€voi ravra TrfpiTrXaj/w/xe^a.'* 
 .... *''AXXa Koi o-f," <l)dvai rov KOpoi/, "" opo)*' r.r.X. . . . Kai top 
 AarvdyTjvtatpetrdaij "ical rivi dq av T€Kpaip6fX€Pos \€y€is;'* 
 *''OTt o-e,*' (jidvaiy '^opa" k.t.X. . . . JJpos ravra fie rov ^Aarvdyrjv 
 ctfTf ii/, K.r.X. . , . Kat rov Kvpov elireiVj x.r.X. Xex. Cyr. I, 3, 5 
 and 6. (Here all these Infinitives, and twelve others which follow, 
 depend on Xe'yerat in § 4.) Ka\ rbv KfXfva-ai dovvai, and he com- 
 manded him to give it. Id. I, 3, 9. So in Hdt. I, 24 the story of 
 Arion and the dolphin is told in this construction, the Infinitives 
 all depending on a single Xeyovo-t at the beginning. See § 101, 
 Kemark. 
 
 § 106. Uplv, before^ before that, until, besides tak- 
 ing the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, like eew? 
 (§ QQ^, is also followed by the Infinitive. 
 
 For the use of the finite moods after npiv, see § 67. 
 
 1. In Homer the Infinitive follows 'rrplv after both 
 afiirmative and negative sentences. E. g. 
 
 Nat€ ht Uf)baiov nplv i\6fiv vlas *Axaiw. L. XIH, 172. *E(/)^i; 
 opt^dfuvos np\v ovrda-ai, ovd" dcpdfiaprev. II. XVI, 322. 2(l>wiv 
 ^* ^P^^^^^P "Tpdfios €XXa/3e (^alhipM yvla, nplv iroX^fiov r* Idttiv 
 noXffioid T€ fitpficpa cpya, before they saw the war^ &c. II. VIII, 452. 
 (See Note 4.) *fvy« npiv nep ofiikov do\\i(TBrip.tvai dv8pQ)v. 
 11; XV, 588. *H K (Ti TToXXot yalav odd^ elXov nplv "iXiov ftaa^t- 
 KfaOai. II. XXII, 1 7. *AXXa oi avr^ Zfvs oXfacif ^[rjv wplv fjpiv rr^pa 
 <l)vr€V(rai. Od. I V, 668. A W axfxXX' . . . «?XXo^' oX^aOai npiv iXOflv, 
 Od. XVm, 402. Ov X^^co npiv Tpwa? ddrjv tXdaai iroXepoio. II. 
 XIX,^ 423. Ovbe re 6vp^ rfpnero npiv iroXkpov aropa dvpevai 
 alparoiVTOs. II. XIX, 313. Ovd* dnoXriyd itpXv xpoos dvdpc^oto 
 otcXdeii/. II. XX, 100. Ov fi d7rorp€'^€Ls irplv x^'^^ fiaxfa-w 
 
 § 106, 2.] 
 
 INFINITIVE AFTER Upiv. 
 
 211 
 
 aeat. H. XX, 257. M)j8' dvrios Itrraa e/icTo frpiv n KaKov Tra^fm 
 11. XX, 198. 
 See § 67, Note 1. 
 
 2. Writers later than Homer use the Infinitive after 
 irplv chiefly when the leading sentence is affirmative. 
 
 Uplvavirapelvat iKclvov is rfiv^ArriKrjv, vpus icaipoff eort Trpo- 
 /3a)^^(rai h rfjv Boitoriai/, before he comes into Attica, &c. Hdt. VHl, 
 143. Olov fvp€V reaaapdKOvra Ka\ oktw napdevoiai, 7rp\v p€(Tov apap 
 iXflv, ^Kvrarov ydpov. Find. Pyth. IX, 196. UpXv vvv ra nXeiov 
 iaropelv^U r^aS' eSpac ?^X^f, before seeking further, &c. bOPH. O. 
 C. 36. *A'iroTT€p7rovaiv ovv avrov nplv aKoixrai. Thuc. U, 1 2. bo 
 II, 13, irpXv « (r/3aX € I V els rrjv *ArriKfiv. 'A<\>U(rav rh^eXr) iroXv irpiv 
 k^iKvelaOai. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 3, 60. Upiv piv ovv ^x^^^^\ ^^ 
 &Kpa ovdev idelaOe elpljvrjs. lb. Ill, 2, 12. 'Upels roiwv Uecrarivy 
 fiXopfV 7rp)v nipaas Xa^eiv rfiv ^aaiXeiav koi Kparrjaai rris 
 nneipov, Kal nplv olKiad?ivai rivas rav iroXeav ra>v EXXrjvidiav. 
 ISOC. Archid. p. 121 A. § 26. Kal irph €$ p^vas yeyovivai, ane- 
 da)K€. Plat. Prot. 320 A. 'AirtoXopiaff ap\ el kukov npoaoKropfP 
 viov TtaXai^, np\v rob' i^rjvrXfjKevai, we are ruined then, ij we shaU 
 add a new calamity to the former one, before we shall have exhausted 
 that, Eur. Med. 79. (See § 18, 3.) 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitive after Trplv was probably not accompa 
 nied by av. (See Kruger's note on Hdt. I, 140.) 
 
 Note 2. Upiv with the Infinitive after negative sentences is rare 
 in the Attic poets, but more frequent in the Attic prose. (See 
 §67, Note 2.) E.g. 
 
 OU &v peOelro, irplv Kaff r}8ovf)V kXv€IV. SopH. Tr. 197. nply 
 ibelv b\ ovbels pdvris ra>v peXXovrav, o Tt Trpd^ei. Id. Aj. 1418. ^ bo 
 Aesch. Sept. 1048, Agam. 1067 ; Arist. Av. 964. Kal St avro ov 
 irpiv irdax^iv^ aW' eVetSij iv roi ?pya> eapev, roi,s fyppdxovs rovade 
 napeKaXeaare. Thuc. I, 68. So I, 39 ; V, 10; Vll, 50. Oldejhp 
 roCrav irplv pa 6 el v ovSfls rjiriararo, Xen. Cyr. IV , 3, 10. Avrrj rj 
 yvvfi, irplv pev as "Ai^o/Soj/ eXOelv, piiav i)pepav ov< ixvpevaev. DEM, 
 Onet. I, 873, 10. 
 
 Note 3. HpXv fj, irpdrepov Ij (priusquam), irpoadev ?, and 
 even varepov Tl,hke irpiv, may be followed by the Infinitive, (bee 
 § 67, Note 3.) E. g. 
 
 01 be Alyxmrioi, irplv pev ? '^applrtxov acfyeav ^a^iXcvo-at, 
 evopiCov ecovrovs irputrovs yeveadai irdvroiv dvBpunaiV.^ , ^,^', ' 
 "EttI r ovs nopneas IT pore pov fj al ade adai avroits evBvs fx^m*"* 
 before they perceived them. Thuc. VI, 58. So I, 69. Upiv be ava- 
 crr^i/at, ercaiv varepov Uarbv ^ avrovs o i k ^ <r a e , UdppiXov Trc/ii/rov- 
 Tff es 2eXivovvra, I e. a hundred years after their awn seUlemenL Id. 
 VI, 4. 
 
^\\ 
 
 212 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 [§ 106, 2. 
 
 § 108, 2.] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 213 
 
 In Hdt. VI, 108 we find the Infinitive depending on (l)0dv(o ff, the 
 verb imph'in"' TrpoTcpovOV npLv:—(l)6air)r€ au (^avdpanobLadevTfs rj 
 Tiva TrveiaBmrjfieav, you would be reduced to dauery before any of us 
 would hear of it. 
 
 Note 4. Uplu or 'rrp\v rj is very often preceded by Trporepou, 
 irpoadfp, nap OS, or another npiv (used as an adverb), qualify- 
 ino- the learling verb. (See § 67, Note 4.) E. g. 
 
 .^..€<pr}v^mi. IlDT. 1, IttO. llapi ^ 
 
 7rpivy€ ., . v^ ■ji€ipr)6?)vai. II. V, 220. Mij irpXv rapa^jii, irptv rob 
 (V eidOaL, tUvov. Eur. Here. F. 605. 
 
 Note 5. Hapos, in the sense of irplv, is used in Homer with 
 the Infinitive, but never with the other moods. E. g. 
 
 T€»cm aypoTai i^fiKovro irdpos Trererfva y€V€(rdat. Od. XVI, 
 218. Ovbe ol vnvoi nlirrev em ^\€(j)dpoi<Ji. ndpos KaraXt^ai anav 
 TO. Od.XXIU, 309. 
 
 Remark. The rules for the tenses of the Infinitive are 
 given in Chapter Second. It will be seen from a comparison 
 of these, that the Present and Aorist are the only tenses ordi- 
 narily used in constructions in which the Infinitive in itself 
 has no reference to time, that is, in all except indirect dis- 
 course. In indirect discourse each tense has its own force, as 
 in the Indicative ; but in other constructions the Perfect is 
 used only in the cases mentioned in § 18, 3, 6, and Note ; and 
 the Future only in the few cases mentioned in § 27, Note 2, a 
 and 6. (See § 27, Note 1.) 
 
 CHAPTER YI. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 § 107. The Participle has three distinct uses: — 
 first, it may express a simple attnhde, like an ordinary 
 adjective (§ 108) ; secondly, it may define the circuwr 
 stances under which the action of the sentence takes 
 place (§§ 109-111) ; thirdly, it may form part of the 
 predicate with certain verbs, often having a force re- 
 sembling that of the Infinitive (§§ 112, 113). 
 
 Remark. As the Infinitive may be considered as a verbal noun, 
 so the Participle is always a verbal adjective; both ahke retaining 
 aU the attributes of a verb which are consistent with their nature. 
 See § 90. 
 
 § 108. 1. The Participle, like any other adjective, 
 
 may qualify a noun. , . . , 
 
 In such expressions it must often be translated by a 
 finite verb and a relative, especially when the Participle 
 is preceded by the article. E. g. 
 
 ndUs KdXXct ^^a<^^pov<Ta,a city excelling in beauty. *Avhp Ka- 
 X^icTfTraififvac'voj, a manwho has been well educated. OtTrpe- 
 Xr r;;^! *rx:;.^ t^e ambassadors -^ohadbeen 
 
 sent from Philip. ^Av8pe. ol roOro no.f}aovr.s, men who wUl do this 
 
 "e. rn U^aar^vla Jrk oCarj yi}, in the land M was once Mes^ 
 senia See §16,2. SroaTcvovaii/ in\ rhs M6\oy mj^ovs Ka\o vjx evas, 
 thTysailalainst the so-called Aeoltan islands, hi. the islands called 
 those of Aeolus, Thug. IH, 88. Al 5pt<rrac So.o.aa. ""-^^J";: 
 the natures which seem to be best Xen^ Mem. IV 1,3. Ac npo jov 
 ar6f.arosv',.svav^axoi<ra.. Tnuc VD, 23. To. .areiX,,*ora 
 Kivbvvov TTjv TToXiv. Dem. Cor. 301, 28. 
 
 2. The Participle preceded by the article may be 
 used suhstayitively, like any other adjective. It is then 
 equivalent to €Kelvo<; U (he who) and a finite verb in 
 the tense of the Participle. E. g. 
 
I! 
 
 2U 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 108. 
 
 Ot KparovvTfs, the^ conquerors. Ol TTfTrfia-fihot, those wTio have been 
 convinced. Ovtos €<m 6 tovto noirjo-as^ this is the one who did it, 
 OvToi €l(Tiv oi vfias rravras d8 iK^aovr^ s, these are the men who will 
 wrong you all. 
 
 Uapa Tois dpiarois Bokovctiv etvai, amonfj those who seem to he best, 
 Xen. Mem. I v , 2, 6. Hv Sc 6 /xeV rfjv yvQ)p.T)u raxrrqv diruiv Hficrav* 
 bpoi, and Pe'isander was the one who gave this opinion. Thuc. VIII, 
 CH. Tois *ApKa8a>v a<^(Tipoii oZai $vfip.dxois 7rpoe7nov, they pro- 
 claimed to those of the Arcadians toho were their allies. Id. V, 64. 
 * A(f)€KT€ou €ya> (f)T]fj.i fivai (rovrtov) t6 aa)(f)pov€iu 8vvT)(TOfi€Vtityfor 
 one who is to be able to be discreet. Xen. Symp. IV, 26. ' 
 
 Note 1. When the Participle, in either of these construc- 
 tions, refers to a purpose or intention, it is generally Future, 
 rarely Present. E. g. 
 
 No/io*' drjfioaiq tov ravra KvtXvaovra TfBeivrai tovtoui, they have 
 publicly enacted this law, which is to prevent these things. Dem. Mid. 
 530, 10. Tav k pyaa-ofievav (vovroiVy there being men in the country 
 to cultivate it. ^ Xen. An. II, 4, 22. (See § 110, 1.) 'o ijyiyo-d- 
 fifvos oiideU forai there unit be nobody who will lead us. lb. II, 4, 5. 
 JIoWovs €^Ofi€v rovs €Toiua)s arvvay<ayiCou.€Vovs niiiv, Isoc. Pac. 
 p. 186 D. § 139. f * r ,r 
 
 See the more common use of the Future Participle to express a 
 purpose, § 109, 5. 
 
 Note 2. Participles, like adjectives, are occasionally used 
 substantively even without the article, in an indefinite sense ; 
 but generally only in the plural. E. g. 
 
 ETrXet 8d>8€Ka Tpirjpeis f^cov tnl iroWas vavs k€ ktt] fievovs^ he 
 sailed with twelve triremes against men who had many ships. Xen. 
 Hell. V, 1, 19. Oral' 7roXf;xovfro>i/ iroKts dXco, whenever a city oj 
 belligerents is taken. Id.^ Cyr. Vn, 5, 73. Merd radra d(f)iKvovin-ai 
 tioi anayytWovTts on 6 naTrjp dcfxlrai, there come messengers 
 announcing, &c. Isoc. Trapez. p. 360 C. § 11. EiSes vo£v ?;^oi/ra 
 "Xvnovpevov koI ;i^atpoi/ra ; did you ever see a man of sense (sc. rivd) 
 grieved and rejoicing f Plat. Gorg. 498 A. 
 
 Note 8. In the poets, the Participle with the article sometimes 
 becomes so completely a substantive, that it is followed by an ad- 
 nominal genitive rather than by the case which its verbal force 
 would require. A few expressions like oi irpo(rr]KovT€s, relatives^ and 
 TO avptpepou or ra avpcbepovra, gain, advantage, are used in the s^me 
 way even in prose. L. g. 
 
 *0 Jkcivov T€ tea u, his father. EuR. El. 335. (We should expect 
 o €K(lvov TfKoiv.) To fiiKpo. (T V fi (j) € p o vT u Tfjs TToXfo)?, thc smo it ad- 
 vantages of the state. Dem. Cor. 234, 26. Bao-tX/coj Trpoafi Kovrtt 
 rufj. Thuc. I, 128. 
 
 $ 108.] 
 
 pakticiple as adjective. 
 
 215 
 
 Note 4 (a.) In the poets and in Thucydides, the neuter singu- 
 
 , %^^ ^ 7 Ti\I' * 1 •<.!, fV.o nrtiolp IS sometimes used in 
 lar of the Present Participle with the article i^ soiiict , 
 
 the sense of an abstract verbal noun, where we should expect the 
 Infinitive with the article. E. g. /. ,• 
 
 •E. ™ M u.X.rim a^«r<ir.po. ?.70^a., in the want f prc'f'f^' 
 &c tIuc! X 142. (Here we should expect ... t^ m »«'^'™''-) 
 
 ^"compare the use of the neuter singular of an adjective for the 
 corresfi)nding abstract noun ; as ri koX.!.', beauty, for ro roXXot. 
 
 fh^ A similar construction sometimes occurs when a Participle 
 a„^ 2 nin'e used instead of an Infinitive and a noun, where m 
 En<rlish we generally use a finite verb. J^. g- 
 
 mrh 8^ 2dXo>i/a oi'YoVfvov e\a^€ vi,i€crLS jieydXrjKpolaoVyi.e. 
 afTLlon las gone. U. I, 34. T^ .oX« oiJr. -Xc^ov .a^o,, 
 
 disastrous result of any war (like rov noy,.6ur.ua .aKo,. <n,^^i,.a*). 
 Xen. Mem. I, 2, 63. So is T}fKiov Karabvpra, H. 1, tJ^i- 
 Remark. Such expressions as rb Kparovv t^s Tro'Xfa)?, the rulti^ 
 
 iith the examples belon^ng under N«*«\\^!^ A le^^^ 
 merely cases of the partitive genitive after a parUciple usea as a 
 
 noun. 
 
 Note 5 Some Present Participles are occasionally used Hke 
 
 prSe adjectives after e.>' or W^r ' ^^?^ ^^^.^^^1^ and 
 ^^p<ov, ?x«/(with an adverb), 7rpoaliK<op, irp^niop, 8.ov, c^o,/, ana 
 
 "^rJ'ewt tvo. «e.Vov b.act>ep<ov; in what ^^^K^^l^f^^ 
 from that one ? Plat. Gorg. 500 C 2 v ^ </> e p o v ,7^ ri; ttoX.i, U was 
 Cllantageous to the state. Bem. F. L. 364 25. So aft^r -W^ ^ 
 Demosthenes ; as roCro p,h yhp Indpx^iv v^. cI8or« rjyov^ Jar I 
 think you are aware of this. Cor. 257, 25. 
 
 Note 6 The poets sometimes use a Present or Aorist Parti- 
 ciple wkh«>f^a^periphrasiB for the simple form of the verb In 
 prCe^ach part of such expressions has its ordinary meaning. E. g. 
 
 'A.; 7i ee\ov<ra, ndvr ifxov ^o,xi^rai, whatever she wants, she 
 
 Av u oeAovaa, '•"*" ^; ^ t 'iRO ^ Here n 5f\o v(ra IS used 
 
 always obtains from me. Soph. O. 1. 580. (.nere n ^^f^^'^^ ^ 
 
 for 6e\n) Ovk €ls 'oU6pov; oi (Ti<o'irT)(ras etrei; lb. 114b. u 
 
 Wo o"< ear. y.yu6^'vo. nap^ hl^l^ ; or is not thts scmethmg that 
 
216 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 108. 
 
 
 happens amonf^ tisf Plat. Phileb. 39 C. *Hv yap 6 effiiaroKXrjs 
 
 Themistocles was one icho manifested^ &c. Tnuc. I, 138. 
 
 For the use of the Perfect Participle in the same way, see § 1 7, 
 Note 2. For the Aorist Participle with t;^a> as a periphrasis for the 
 Perfect Indicative, see below, § 112, Note 7. 
 
 § 109. The Participle is used to define the circuTn- 
 stances under which an action takes place. It maj in 
 this sense be connected with any substantive in the 
 sentence, and agree with it in case. 
 
 The relations expressed by the participle in this use 
 are the following : — 
 
 1. Time^ the various tenses of the Participle denoting 
 various points of time, which are of course all referred 
 to that of the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 TaCra ftTTwv QTriyfi, ichen he had said this, he departed. * ATrfjVTijaa 
 ^ikimrcp drriovTi, I met Philip as he was departing. Tovto •nfiroir}- 
 k6t€s dir€\(v(rovTai . Tavra errparrf o-rpariyyoii/, he did these th ings 
 while he was general. Tavra Trpd^d a-rpaTTj-yiov^ he will do these 
 things when he w general. Tvpaweva-as di €-0] rpla *lirmas kx^pfi- 
 xmocnrov^os is 2iy€iov. TlIUC. VI. 59. 
 
 2. Means. E. g. 
 
 A.T)i(nfi€voi (acTLv, they live hy plunder. Xen. C}T. Ill, 2, 25. 
 Tovff 'EWrivas ihlha^av, ov rponov dioiKoijures rds avTa>v Trarplhas 
 Ka\ TTpos ovs 7ro\fpovvT€S p.€yd\r)v av tt)v *EXXa3a noirjaeiau. ISOC. 
 Panath. p. 241 D. § 44. Ou yap dWorpiois vpiu xpa> pevois napa- 
 dfiyfiaaiv dXX* olKflots, (vBaip.o(Tiu t^eari yeveaBaij by using not foreign 
 hut domestic examples^ &c. Dem, 01. Ill, 35, 1. (So often xp^H^ft'os 
 with the dative.) 
 
 3. Manner, and similar relations, including manner 
 of employment, <fec. E. g. 
 
 lIpofiXfTO /xaXXoy roT? vopois ip.p.€v<ov drrodavdv ^ napavopav 
 (rjv, he preferred to die abiding by the laws, rather than to live disobey- 
 ing them. Xex. Mem. IV, 4, 4. 'Apirdaavras to. onXa nopeve- 
 a-dai, to march having snatched up their arms (i. e. eagerly). Dem. 01. 
 Ill, 34, 8. Tovto cnoirja-cu Xa^wv, he did this secretly. (See below, 
 N. 8.) ^Ajrfbrjpfi T piT] papx<>iv, he was absent on duty as trierarch, 
 
 4. Cause or ground of action. E. g. 
 
 § 109, 7.j PARTICIPLE EXPRESSING CAUSE, ETC. 217 
 
 A/yfi) S€ Tovd' €V(Ka, ^ov\6fi€vos bo^ai croi oirep tfioi, and I 
 speak for thui reason^ because I wuih, &c. Plat. Phaed. 102 D. 
 Anfixovro Kfpbayv, alaxpa vopl^ovTfs eluai, because they believed 
 them to be base. ^ Xex. Mem. I, 2, 22. Ti yap av ^ovXofitvoi 
 avbp€s a-o<f)ol Cis d\r)da)s decnroTas dpfivovs avruiv (jievyotev, with what 
 object in view, &c. (i. e. wishing what) ? Plat. Phaed. 63 A. (See 
 below. Note 7.) 
 
 For the Participle with a>s, used to express a cause assigned by 
 another, see below, Note 4. 
 
 6. Purpose, olject, or intention, expressed by the Fu- 
 ture Participle, rarely by the Present. E. g. 
 
 HX^€ Xv<t6p€vos OvyarpOj he came to ransom his daughter. II. 
 I. 13. napc\r)Xvda av p.^ov\fva-a)v, I have risen to give my advice. 
 IsoC. Archid. § 1. *E^ov\(V(ravTo Tripneiv es AaKedalpova TrpeVjSety 
 ravrd re epovvras Kai Axxravhpov alrri<rovTas inX rds vavsj in 
 order to say t?iis, and to ask for Lysander as admiral. Xen. Hell. II, 
 1, 6. *Eai/ eir iroKepov (J) rrarpls) uyp t paidr^aopivov } diroBa- 
 vovpevovy TroLTjTeov ravra, even if it lead any one into war to be 
 wounded or to perish. Plat. Crit 51 B. 
 
 "Etvxov yap ai pev (prjes) eVt Kapias olxdpfuai, ...TTfpiayycX- 
 \ ova- at, ^orjdeiv, for some of the ships happened to be gone towards 
 Caria, in order to give them notice to send aid. Thuc. I, 116. So 
 dpvvpevoiy II. I, 159. (The Present here seems to express an attend- 
 ant circumstance^ rather than a mere purpose.) 
 
 6. Condition, the Participle standing for the protasis 
 of a conditional sentence, and its tenses representing 
 the various forms of protasis expressed by the Indica- 
 tive, Subjunctive, or Optative (§ 52, 1). E. g. 
 
 Gift (TV "AXktjotiv^ vnip 'Abpr^rov dnoBaveiv ai/, rj ^A^iXXca Xlarpo/cXo) 
 fTranodavelvy prj olopevovs dOdvarov pvrjprjv dpeTrjs Tre'pt iavrcov 
 eo-eo-^ai, do ijou think that Alcesiis would have died for Admetus, §'c., 
 if they had not believed, &c. Plat. Symp. 208 D. (Here pri olopi- 
 VOV9 IS equivalent to el prj ^ovro.) Ov yap av avrols epeXev pfj Toirro * 
 vTToXap^dvova-iVy for it would not have concerned them^ unless 
 they had had this idea. Dem. Phil. Ill, 122, 21. (Here ufj vTroXa/x- 
 ^dvovaiv^ is equivalent to et prj roiro xmeXdp^avov.) '^Acrrpcov av 
 eXOoip aWepos irpos dvroXds Kal yrjs evepde, dvvarbs w v 8pd(rai Td8€, 
 if I should be able to do thk {el Bvvaros eirjv). EuR. Phoen. 504. 
 
 See other examples under § 52, 1. 
 
 7. Opposition, or limitation, where the Participle is 
 often to be translated by although. E. g. 
 
 OvTos Be Ka\ peTanep(l)6qvai (/)a(r*co)i/ vtto tov narpuSy Koi eXOww 
 10 
 
218 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 109, 7 
 
 €ls Trjv oiKiav, €l<T€\3(lv fifv ov (t)r]<TiVj Ar)fW(l)ci>inos^ b oKoixrat ypa/i/«i- 
 Tf'iov avayiyvuxTKovTOi^ koi irpo€ la-eXrjXvdays koI anavra 8ta)/ioXo- 
 yrjfievos npos rov irarcpa^ and this man, although he adinits that he 
 was summoned, and although he did go to the house, yet denies thai he 
 went in^ ^c, although he had previously gone in and arranged every- 
 thing with my father. Dem. Aph. II, 839, 29. 'OXiya Bwdfievoi 
 TTpoopav TTfpi Tov ficWovTOS TToXXa €7rixfipoi>fi€v irpdrreLU, although we 
 are able to foresee few things, &c. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 2, 15. 
 
 The Participle in this sense is very often accompanied by Kalnep 
 and other particles. See below, Note 5. 
 
 8. Any attendant circumstance^ the Participle being 
 merely descriptive, E. g. 
 
 Kai Trapa\a^6vTes tovs Bokotovs iarparcva-av in\ ^dpaaKov, and 
 having taken the Boeotians with them, they marched against Pharsalus, 
 ThuC. I, 111. ITapayyeXXfi toJ KXedpx« \a^6vTi rjicdv oaov ^v 
 axfT^ OTpaTevfia. Xkn. An. I, 2, 1. "Epx^rai Mavbavrj rov Kvpov top 
 viov €x°^^^* Mandane comes with her son Cyrus. Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1. 
 (See below, N. 8.) 
 
 Note 1. (a.) The adverbs rorf, rjhr) (rort ffdrf), ivravOa, ftra, 
 cTTcira, and 6vTa>5 are often joined to the verb of the sentence in 
 which the temporal Participle stands. E. g. 
 
 'EKfXevev avTov avvhia^dvra tire it a ovras dTraWd-rreaSai, he com- 
 manded that, after he had joined them in crossing, he should then retire 
 as he proposed. Xen. An. VII, 1, 2. Ufi6op,€V(ou Be rail/ 2a^tW koX 
 a-xpVTCiV TTjV ZdyKKrjv, fvdavra oi ZayKXaioi ({ior)6fov avrp. Hdt. 
 VI, 23. * k'iTO<\)vyoiv hk koi tovtovs, UTparqyos ovro) ^A.6r)vaxoiV 
 dnebfx^^ ^^^ ^o,ving escaped these also^ he was then chosen general 
 of the Athenians. Id. VI, 104. 
 
 (b.) Eira, €ir€iTa, and ovt<o9 sometimes refer in the same way to a 
 Participle expressing opposition or limitation; in which case they 
 may be translated by nevertheless, after all. E. g. 
 
 Udvrau S' aroTrwraroi/ eWt, rjjXiKavrrju dveXouraf fiaprvplau 
 ovT<0S oUadat delv (iKjj iriar€V€aeai nap vpiu, that, although they 
 have destroyed so important a piece of eoidence, they after all think, 
 &c. Dem. Aph. II, 837, 10. Aftva /xcW' hv rra^otff, fl ^hByaCt 
 a4)iK6p.€VOS, ov rrjs 'EXXdSof irXdaTt] iarXv e^ovaia tov \(yfi.v, 
 tnfiTa (TV ivravOa tovtov p6vu£ dTvxhfrf^f-^^ ifi although you are come 
 to Athens, you should after all he the only one to fail in obtaining this. 
 Plat. Gorg. 461 E. 
 
 (c.) OvTCis, ha tovto, and bia tuvtu sometimes refer in the same 
 way to a Participle denoting a cause. E. g. 
 
 No/i 1^0)1/ dpelvovas kqI xpeiTTOvs noWcov ^ap^dpav vpas ((MU« 
 dia TOVTO npoafXa^ov. Xen. An. I, 7, 3. 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 IUJ& 
 
 s 
 
 § 109.] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 219 
 
 Note 2. The Adverbs apa, peTa^v, eldvs, alrUa, and i^alc^injt 
 are often connected (in position and in sense) with the temporal 
 Participle, although grammatically they qualify the verb of the sen- 
 tence. E. g. 
 
 A /I a npoioiv iirfCTKOiTflTO ft tl bwarov etr} tovs TroXf/xiovs dn-^ei/eor/- 
 povs noiflv, as he advanced, he looked at the same time to see whether it 
 was possible, &,c. Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 22. "A pa KaToKa^om-fs TrpoacKeaTO 
 a(f>i, as soon as they had overtaken them, they pressed hard upon them, 
 IIdt. IX, 57. Ne/cwff peTa^if opvaa-av (jravaaTO, pavTrjiov epnobiov 
 yfvopevov, Necho stopped while digging {the canal), &c. Id. II, 158. 
 HoWaxov hi] p€ €7re(rx( \eyovTa pcTa^v, it often checked me while 
 speaking. Plat. Apol. 40 B. ^Eninovto da-Krja-ei evdvs veoi ovres to 
 dvdpuov peTepxovrai, by toilsome discipline, even while they are still 
 young, &c. Thug. II, 39. T« dc^tS Ktpa evBvs dno^e^rfKOTi oi Ko- 
 pipdioi eneKfivTo, the Corinthians pressed upon the right wing, as soon 
 OS it was disembarked. Id. IV, 43. *Ap^dp€vos €v6vs KaBia-Tapevov, 
 beginning as soon as it (the ivar) broke out. Id. I, 1. AtoWo-ov X/yov- 
 crt (Oi avTiKa yevopevov is tov prjpov (veppdyf/^aTo Zevs, they say of 
 Dionysus that, as soon as he was born, Zeus sewed him into his thigh, 
 Hdt. II, 146. Tfjif yJAVx^'lv ^ecopwi/ i^aiipvijs dnoBavoirros e/caoTOW, 
 viewing the soul of each one the moment that he is dead. Plat. Gorg. 
 523 E. 
 
 Note 3. (a,) "Are, olop, or ota, as, inasmuch as, are used 
 to emphasize a Participle denoting the cause or ground of an 
 action. Here the cause assigned is stated merely on the au- 
 thority of the speaker or writer. (See N. 4.) E.g. 
 
 O 0€ Kvpos, aT€ Trals (ov Ka\ (fyikoKciKos »cat 0iXort/ioff, rjbeTo Tjj 
 (rro\ff, but Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a child, &c. Xen. Cyr. I, 8, 3. 
 So oTf 'KTj(f)6€VT(ov, Thug. VII, 85. MaXa de ^aXeTrcoy nopevopevoi, 
 ola 8t) eu WKTL t€ Koi (^6^(o diri6vT€S, (Is Alyoadeva d(f>iKvov)rrat, 
 inasmuch as they were departing by night, &c. Xen. Hell. VI, 4, 26. 
 In Herodotus Sxrre is used in the same sense; as in I, 8, coot* 
 Tavra vopLi^onv, inasmuch as he believed this. See Thug. VH, 24. 
 
 (6.) ''Q(r7r€p with the Participle occasionaUy seems to have the 
 same force as art or olov ; as in Eur. Hippol. 1307, 6 8' Sxrnfp ap 
 dUaios ovK ((f>f(Tn€To \6yois, inasmuch as he was Just, &c. 
 
 For the common use of w<nr€p with the Participle, see Note d. 
 
 Note 4. (a) *Qs may be prefixed to many of the Parti- 
 ciples of § 109, especially those denoting a cause or a pur- 
 pose. It shows that the Participle expresses the idea of the 
 subject of the leading verb, or that of some other person promi- • 
 nently mentioned in the sentence ; without implying that it la 
 al -0 the idea of the speaker or writer. E. g. 
 
220 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 109. 
 
 Tov U€piK\ea €U aiTia flx^^ ^^ Trelaavra a(i>as noKf^civ Kai K 
 UdvQv Toii ^vfKpopals'ireptneTTTiOKOTfs, they foand fault with 
 Pericles, on the ground that he had persuaded them to engage in the. 
 war, and that through him they had met with the calamities. Tiiuc. 
 II. 59. (Here Thucydides himself is not responsible for the state- 
 ments made by the Participles ; as he would be if ij were omitted.) 
 8ee § 111. ^AyavaKTovaiv a>i fxcyaXiov riviov direa-Tfprjfifvoi, they are 
 indignant, because (as they allege) they have been deprived, &c. Plat. 
 Rep. I, 329 A. BaaiXei x°P^^ laaaiu, a>s 8i* tKflvou Tvxoixrai rrjs 
 airrouoplas ravrr;?, i. e. they thank him because (as they believe) they 
 have obtained this independence through him. Isoc. Pan. p. 77 C. 
 § 175. Oi p(P fittoKOx^fS Tovs KaO'' avrovs « y irdvras viKoyvrfS, oI8 
 acyirdCovres a>s ^drj ndurfs vi kS>vt€s , one side pursuing those opposed 
 to them, thinking that they were victorious over all : and the other side 
 proceeding to plunder, thinking that they were all victorious. Xex. An. 
 I, 10, 4. Trju npocpaaiv eVotfiro (os Uia-ibas liov\6p€vos (K^aKeiVy 
 he made his pretence, (^apparently) wishing to drive out the Pisidians, 
 lb. I, 2, 1. ''EXcye dappflv ws Karaa-Trja-oufvaiv rovrav (Is t6 
 b€ov ' he said he took courage, on the ground that these ma'ters were 
 about to be settled, &c. lb. I, 3, 8. (See § 110, 1, N. 1.) 'Qsyap 
 tlboTOiv TTcpi liv €7r€p<t)Brjaap dKo{>€T€, for you hear them as nien who 
 (OA- you believe) know about what they were sent for. Dem. F. L. 342, 
 25. Oi *A6r]vaioL Trap€(TK€vdCovTo as 7ro\€ firjaovrt s , the A theninns 
 prevared with the (avowed) intention of going to war. Tnuc. II, 7. 
 ivi\ap^dp€i Kvpov i>s d7roKT€vS>v,he seizes Cyrus with the (avowed) 
 object of putting him to death. Xen. An. I, 1, 3. 
 
 It is a common mistake to suppose that as implies that the Parti- 
 ciple does not express the idea of the speaker or writer. It implies 
 nothing whatever on this point, which is determined (if at all) by the 
 context. 
 
 (b ) 'Qs may also be used before Participles with verbs of know- 
 ing, kc, included in It US. (See § 113, N. 10.) 
 
 Note 5. (a.) The Participle expressing opposition or limitation 
 is often strengthened by /caiTrcp or Kai (after a negative, by o^dc or 
 unSt, with or without ntp), Koi raira, and that too. "Opas^neverthe- 
 less, may be connected with the Participle (like dpa, &c. N. 2), be- 
 longing, however, grammatically to the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 "EKTopa Ka\ p€paaTapdxr}S(rxr](^^^^^^^ia. II. IX, (555. 'Enni- 
 KT€ipco k vLv bCarrjpop ^piras, Kainep 6vTa dvapfvrj, although he is 
 my enemy. Soph. Aj. 122. Ovk hv iTpoho[r]v, ovbk irtp rrpaaaav 
 KOKas. Eur. Phoen. 1624. TwaiKt TreiOov, firjde raXrjdi] K\vav, 
 Id. Hipp. Fr. 443. nei^ov yvvai^l, KaLrrtp ov arepyav opas. 
 Aesch. Sept. 712. (Here Spas qualifies itfiOoV, although, as usual, 
 it is joined with the Participle for emphasis.) 'A^t<fiy ort avbpa 
 rip\v TOV airovbaiSraTov diacpOdpets y(\dv dvandOav, Kal raira our« 
 nokipiov 6pTa ra yeXari. Xen. C}T. II, 2, 16. 
 
 (6.) In Homer, the two parts of Kai . . Trcp are generally separ 
 
 § 109.] 
 
 the participle. 
 
 221 
 
 rated by the Participle, or by some emphatic word connected with 
 it. Kai is here very often omitted, so that nep stands alone in the 
 sense of although. 
 
 Both of these uses are found also in the Attic poets. E. g. 
 
 Top p€P 67rfir eiao-f, Ka\ dxPvpfPt's ircp iraipov, Kf^adai. H. VIII, 
 125. Kai Kparepos nep eoiP, peptra TpiTUTT] ip\ polprj. II. XV, 195. 
 TeVXa^t, priT€p fpf], /cat apdax^o Krjbopevi] tr € p , prj ae ^t'Xr/y rr€p 
 fovaav iv 6(p6aXpol(riv idapai Oeipop^prjp' Tore 5' ov ti dvprjaropai 
 dxp^P^Pos TTf p ;(paio-/xeii'. II. I, 586. 
 
 Kdyd> (T iKPovpaL, Ka\ yvprj ntp ov(t opas- EuR. Orest. 680. 
 Td(j)OP yap avrr) kol KaTaa-Ka(})ds cyw, yvprj rrep ovaa, rate p.r]X<^vri€ro- 
 fiai. Aesch. Sept. 1037. 
 
 Remark. KaiVoi was very seldom used like Kainep with the Par- 
 ticiple, its only regular use being with finite verbs. E. g. 
 
 Ovde poi €pp€\€<os TO HirrdKeiop pep^rai, Kairoi cro(f)ov napa 
 
 (jxoTos ilprjpepov. Simon. Fr. 5 (apud Plat. Prot. 339 C). 
 
 Note 6. The Participle wi/ is sometimes omitted after the parti- 
 cles mentioned in the last three notes, leaving an adjective or a 
 noun standing by itself. E. g. 
 
 AvTOvs els TTiP iroXiTeiav ov irapabe^opeBa, are rvpappibos vpvrjrds 
 (sc. opTiis). Plat. Rep VIII, 568 B. Avto emTrjdfvovaiP as dpay- 
 Koiov dW ovx ios dyaObv (sc. op), they practise it on the ground that it 
 is necessary, and not on the ground that it is a good thing. lb. II, 358 
 C. 'H pf}P €Ti Zevs, Kainep avddbrjs (ppepap, earai Tarreivos- AesCH. 
 Prom. 907. 
 
 Note 7. (a.) The Participle with any of the meanings included 
 in § 109 may stand in relative or interrogative clauses. Such ex- 
 pressions can seldom be translated literally into English. E. g. 
 
 Tt §€ Ka\ 8ed lores acfiodpa ovtcos eneiyeade ; what do you fear y 
 that you are in such great haste f Xen. Hell. I, 7, 26. Ti &p elirap 
 <re Tis 6p6as irpoa-eiiroi ; what could one call you, so as to give you the 
 right name f Dem. Cor. 232, 20. Tap vopap aneipoi yiypoprai koi 
 Tap \6yav, ols Bel XP*^ f^^^^^ opikelp tols dpdpairoiSt which one must 
 use in his intercourse with men. Plat. Gorg. 484 D. 
 
 (b.) Here belong ri p^dav ; and ti 7ra3ap ; both of which have 
 the generjd force of wherefore? Ti padap tovto Troiet; however, 
 usually signifies lohat put it into his head to do this f or with what idea 
 does he do this? and Tina$i»v tovto ttoicI; what has happened to him 
 that he does this f E. g. 
 
 Ti tovto pa6ap irpoaeypa^ep; with what idea did he add this to 
 the lawf Dem. Lept. 495, 20. Ti Tra^oOo-at, eXirep NeAeXai y 
 elaip d\T]6as, Oprjrals fl^aai yvmi^iV; what has happened to them thai 
 they resemble mortal women f Arist. Nub. 340. 
 
 These phrases may be used even in dependent sentences, rt bc- 
 i.'oming o ti, and the whole phrase meaning because. E. g. 
 
222 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 109. 
 
 Ti' ditSs eZut Tra^fTi/ ? a7rorT(Tai, 5 tl fiaO^v ev t<o ^ko ovx ri<TVX'.av 
 ?vo./; what do I deserve to suffer, ^c. for not keeping qmetf ^'J:'pr 
 the idea which came into my head, in consequence of Jf}^<^^ I ^fj^^l 
 keep quiet. Plat. Apol 36 B. So Plat. Euthyd. 283 E, and 299 
 A. (SeeMatthiae, §567.) 
 
 Note 8. Certain Participles, when they agree with the subject 
 of a verb, have almost the force of adverbs. Such are a px ojif vos, 
 at first; t€\€vt5>v, finally; dia\ina>v, afer an interval; (t>€p<ou , 
 hastily; dut:><Tas, quickly; \adcov, secretly; Karar^iv as, ear- 
 nestly; Hx^^^ continually ; (jyOdaas, quickly. (See Passow or Lid- 
 dell and Scott, under dpxa>, &c.) 
 
 'Exfov, &y<ov, </)e'po>«', and Xa^wv may often be translated 
 with. (See example under § 109, 8.) 
 
 Note 9. "Qanep with the Participle generally belongs 
 to an implied apodosis, to which the Participle forms the pro- 
 tasis (§ 109, 6). Here Sxmfp means simply as, and the Parti- 
 ciple is translated with an if prefixed. (See § 53, N. 3.) 
 E.g. 
 
 ''Q<r'rr€pllbrj (ra(t>S>s f t' 8 o' r f 5 , oi< e^e'Xer' a<ovf tv, you are unwilling 
 to hear, as if you already knew well (i. e. as you would he if you 
 knew). Isoc. Pac. p. 160 C. § 9. (Here ,l86r€s = ^i .^S«/xf«;, § 52, 
 1.^ 'ATrnirrcov oXi>i npbs noWas fivpid8as, (oanep (p aXXorpiais 
 yjrvxaU fx^XXovr,, Kivhvv.v.iv, as if they had been ahmU to risk the 
 lives of others (i. e. wo-rrfp dTrl}VTa>v av, fl efXfWov). Id. Tan. p. &» a. 
 § 86. So lb. p. 78 C. § 179, S^anep rrpbs rbv Ma ttju x^pai/ vffio- 
 LLfvos, d\y ov TTpbs Tovs duep<i>7rovs rds <Tvuei)Ka9 TToiovtievos. as 
 (he would have done) if he had been dividing the country with Zeus, 
 and not making a treaty icith men. , -^i 
 
 That Sxnrtp means simply as (not as if) is seen when a verb with 
 €l follows; as in Sxruep et Xiyois, as if you should say. See also 11. 
 n, 780, laav, ws €i rf nvpi x^^^ ^^^"^ vepoiro, »• e*//^^"* ^^^^^ 
 was as (U would be) if the whole land should be covered with Jire. 
 
 § 1 10. 1. If a Participle, denoting any of the rela- 
 tions included in § 109, belongs to a substantive which 
 is not connected with the main construction of the sen- 
 tence, both the substantive and the Participle are put 
 in the genitive, called absolute. E. g. 
 
 TaCr* €7rpdY0rj K6va>vos (rrparTjyoCi/roy, these things were 
 done when Canon was general. Isoc. Evag. p. 200 C. § 56. A<|>t«ro 
 ScOpo t6 ttXoTo^, yu6pr<0v rS^v K^cjyaW^vcov, dvrirr parrovros roy 
 Tov, . . . KaTan\€lu, the Cephallenians having determined to sail in, 
 althouqh this man opposed it. Dem. Zenoth. 836, 1. (For the tenses 
 
 § 110, 1.] 
 
 GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 223 
 
 fr«»v< 
 
 of the Part-iciples, see § 24.) '\er,mi«,v 8c t6 "^•"ijr"/"^ !'.''.„ 
 fl^UdZersJer, Sc^HCO. I. ><>• .(S«^§ ^^'-V, a'a^frJoT 
 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 1, 3- 
 
 Note 1 The Participle in the genitive absolute may be accom- 
 raSed by all the particles mentionid in § 109. Notes 1-9, with the 
 ^me W as in oLr constructions , It may also stand m the rela- 
 tive and interrogative sentences of § 109, SH.T.t^-g- 
 
 »,c «,hUe he mis saying this, te. PtAT. Euthyd. 275 K. Ek be 
 
 rX^iro,., because (a.* they said) the tyrants were dead Xen. 
 H.ll V 4 9 rSee « 109, N. 4.) 'ATrfXoy^.raro or. ovv <»« '"»« 
 
 be^au'e they intended to be at war wUh the Greeks U. An. V.6, 3. 
 
 m, «o« Uach me. Id. Mem. II, 6, 32. KCpot 8. aTrop.ja. crnxfro. 
 
 HdtTi90. (See § 109, 1^3.) 'H. yAp aSv^aro,, o..Tre <r,«-o- 
 ", '• '■ . ^ - 1,1 VI 13G Oi EXXnws oiras nyavaiaria-ai', 
 r;;;pr,r:rExia J';J1V^^. «. ijthewhoie f Greece had 
 teendevaZlldQ. e. as they would have been^vf U had been deva^ 
 taled). Isoc. Helen, p. 217 D.§ 49. ... v <• 
 
 For the genitive absolute after i,s, m connection with verbs of 
 knowing, &c., see § 113, Note 10. 
 
 Note 2. A Participle sometimes stands alone in the genitive al^ 
 solute when a noun or pronoun can easdy be supplied from the 
 conteitTor when some general word (like a.flp<!.™., ^payp.™.) a 
 understood. E. g. 
 
 oi Se TToXW. ff Po-r.-S.-ro..., «'«»■ fir ;,,rixaCov,but the enemy, ca 
 tr.ev (^n b^ore Luioned) came on, for a ttmekeptquu:t Xek. 
 An* V 4, 16. So inayoiUv^v airoi., *HUC. I. 3. O.^. 8 .V"- 
 ,6.1- UkL ic.r.X., and things being so (sc. ,rpayf«.™i/), &c. Xen. 
 
 jr;r«rr iErFor.'ss'rfo (Her'; i.sWL is understood 
 with (TTay6vT<ov and inayyeXXonevav.) ^ 
 
 So when the Participle denotes a state of the weather ; a. vo vr o, 
 ,roXX9, when it was raining heavily. Xen. Hell. \l^,^\j^^^^^ 
 cLes the Participle is masculine, Atd. being understood. See Arist. 
 Nub. 370, dovra; and II. XII, 25, ^e S' dpa Zfvi.) 
 
 Note 3. A passive Participle may stand in the genitive absolute 
 
224 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE 
 
 [§ 110, 1. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 225 
 
 with a clause introduced by on. If the subject of such a clause is 
 plural, the Participle is itself sometimes plural, by a kind of attrac- 
 tion. E. g. 
 
 2a(f>cis drjXadevTOs on eV rais vaval rwf 'EXXjJi/coi/ ra TrpdyfiaTa 
 €y€vfTo, it having been clearly shown, that, &c. Thuc. I, 74. In I, 
 116 we find ea-ayyeXSevTcov ort 4*oivi(r(rai v^€s €ir airrovs irXiov 
 aiv, it having been announced , that, &c. ^ 
 
 Note 4. The Participle av is rarely omitted, leaving a noun and 
 an adjective alone in the genitive absolute. E. g. 
 
 'Qs €fiov fxovrji Tre'Aar (sc. ovarjs). SoPH. 0. C. 83. 
 
 Note 5. The genitive absolute is regularly used only when a 
 new subject is introduced into the sentence (§ 110, 1), and not 
 when the Participle can be joined with any substantive already be- 
 longing to the construction. Yet this rule is sometimes violated, in 
 oi-der to give greater prominence to a participial clause. E. g. 
 
 Aia^e 0t)k6tos rfdrj Ilfpt/cXeovr, fjyyeXOrj auTca on Mtyapa d<^/oTi;- 
 
 K€. Thuc. 1, 114. 
 
 2. The Participles of impersonal verbs stand in the 
 accusative absohite, in the neuter singular, when other 
 participles would stand in the genitive absolute. Such 
 are 3eoi/, efoi^, irapov, irpoarJKov, irape'^ovy fieXov^ fiera' 
 fieXov^ BoKovv, So^av, and the like ; also passive Parti- 
 ciples used impersonally (as irpocna-^Oev^ elprjfjLevov) ;, 
 and such expressions as aBvvarov ou, it being impossible, 
 composed of an adjective and ov, E. g. 
 
 Ot d* ov ^oi]Br}(ravT€s, deov, vyids dn^Xdov; and did those who 
 brought no aid when it was necessary escape safe and sound f Plat. 
 Alcib. I, 115 B. ^AnXas Be XCrras i^bv (sc. (jiepeiu), oix OLaa> 
 dinXas- Eur. Iph. Taur. 688. TlapeYou di r^s^Aairjs ndarjs dp)(€iv 
 fim€T€(osi akXo n aipfj<T€<r0€ ; Hdt. V, 49. Eu de 7rapa(T\6vj and 
 when an opportunity offers. Thuc. I, 120. Ov npoarjKov, im- 
 properly. Id. IV, 95. ^vvbo^au tw Trarpi koi rfj p-rjTpl, yapcl Tr]V 
 Kva^dpov Ovyarepa. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 5, 28. Elprj fievou kiciop 
 fivai o n av to ttX^Bos rav ^vfMfidxav y\rT)(^L<rqTai.. TlIUC. V, 30. So 
 beboyptvov, I, 125; yeypappJuov, V, 50; and TrpoareTaypevov, Plat. 
 Leg. X, 902 D. Kdl ivOivbe -ndXiv, Trpoa-raxOev poi vno roO drjpov 
 Meva>va aytiv fls 'T£.XXr](TnovTOU, ta^opr^v, Dem. Polycl. 1210, 5. 
 UaptKeXevovTo T€, dbvvarov ov iv vvktX oXXo) ro) arjp^vai. Thuc. 
 VII, 44. Eycoy*, ((f>r} 6 KDpor, oipat, apxi peu avuayopev6vTa)V fipau, 
 apa be koi, alaxpou ou to dunXeyeiv, k.t.X. Xex. Cyr. II, 2, 20, 
 (The genitive belongs under § 110, 1. See § 111.) ^Avnirapf 
 9K€vd^€To eppapev^jDS, wy p^x^js en berjaov, on the ground that tjiiere 
 
 S 111.] 
 
 tDOuld stiU he need of a battle. lb. VI, 1, 26. (See Remark, below.) 
 Ot be TpidKovra, a)S e^ov rjbrj avroh Tvpavvelv dbetos, TTpoe'tirov, ic.t.X., 
 i. e. thinking that it was now in their power, &c. Id. Hell. II, 4, 1. H 
 yhp voeU ediTTeiu (r(l)\ dTropprjTov woXei (sc. ov), when U is forbidden 
 to the city. Soph. Ant. 44. 
 
 Remark. The accusative absolute may take the same particles 
 as the genitive absolute (§ 110, 1, Note 1). It may also omit the 
 Participle ov. (See the last two examples, above.) 
 
 Note 1. Even the Particii)les of personal verbs sometimes stand 
 with their nouns in the accusative absolute, in all genders and num- 
 bers, if they are preceded by ws (used aa in § 109, Note 4), or bv 
 &<nrep, asif. E. g. 
 
 Ai'o Ka\ Tovs viels ot iraTepes drrb tS>v 7rovTipS>v^ dvdparrav eXpyovciv, 
 ft>ff TTjv pev r<5i/ XPW^^^ optXiav aaKtjffiv ovaav ttjs dperfji, rriv 
 be tS>v irovTjpoiv KaTdXvtriv (sc. o^<Tav). Xen. Mem. I, 2, 20. ^lXovs 
 KTwj/rat oas ^orjdwv beopevoi, t<ov 5* dbeX(t)wv dpeXoixriv, Sxrirep eK 
 noXiTc^v pevyiyvopevovs (^t'Xous, e^ dbeX(j)iiv be ov yiyvopevovsj 
 as if friends were made from fellow-citizens, and were not made from 
 brothers. lb. II, 3, 3. Mcyioroi/ ourco biaKeladai tcls yvatpas vpav, cas 
 €Ka<rrov UovTa Trpoevpas o n av bej] TTOirja-ovTa. Bem. Sym. 182, 
 3. (See § 113, N. 10, c.) 
 
 Note 2. The accusative absolute used personally without ©y or 
 &(nrep is very rare. It occurs chiefly with the neuter of Participles 
 which are regularly impersonal. E. g. 
 
 TIpoa-TjKOV avT^ tov kXtjoov pepos oa-ovnep epoL IsAE. V, § 12. 
 Tavra be yivopeva, nevBea peydXa tovs Alywrriovs KOTaXap^dvei.^ 
 Hdt. II, 66. "Hbq dpcjyorepoif pev boKOvv dvaxa>p€lv, KVp(o6ev be 
 ovbev, WKTos T€ emyevopevrjs, ol pev MaKeboves . . . exo>povv eV oUov- 
 Thuc. IV, 125. A6$avTa be TavTa Kai irepavdevTa, Ta arpa- 
 TevpaTa a7r^X(9f. Xen. HeU. HI, 2, 19. Ad^av lipTtv radra occurs 
 in Plat. Prot. 314 C, where we may supply rroiely. 
 
 § 111* As the Participle in the genitive (or accusative) 
 absolute denotes the same relations {time, cause, &c) as the 
 Participle in its ordinary construction (§ 109), both may be 
 used in the same sentence, and be connected by conjunctions. 
 When several Participles denoting these relations occur in 
 any sentence, those which belong to substantives already con- 
 nected with the main construction agree with those substan- 
 tives in case, while those which refer to some new subject 
 stand with that subject in the genitive absolute; any which 
 are impersonal standing in the accusative absolute. E. g. 
 
 Ol iUv''EXXrjv€S arpacpevTes irapea-KevdCovro a)S Tavrj] irpoaiSvrot 
 10* O 
 
226 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 111. 
 
 PARTICIPLE WITH VERBS. 
 
 227 
 
 jl 
 
 (sc. Tov ^a<n\ea>s) Koi Sf^o/ifvoi, tJiey prepared themselves with a 
 view to his (jhe King*s) coming up and to receiving him. Xf:^. An. I, 
 10, 6. TJ)s yap iynropias ovk ovdrjs^ ovb^ €7r ifiiyvvvTfs dbtag 
 dWfjXoiSy . . . v€ fiojjLevoi re ra iavratv,, . . .d§7/Xor ov onoTf ris 
 eireXdayv Koi dreixicrrcov a^ia ovrtov aWos d(f)atpT]a€Tai, Ttjs t€ KaO 
 Tjficpav dvayKaiov Tpocf)ris 7ravTa)(Ov av rjyovpfvoi fTriKpareiVj ov 
 XaiKenas dTraviaravTO. ThuC. I, 2. Km navra 8ia7rpa^(ip.fvoi €V 
 T^ tKKkrjaia (KXe'cai/), Ka\'^r](f>ia-ap,€v<ou 'Adrjvaiav avrcd tov ttXoOv, 
 Ta>v T€ €v tlvXti) (TTpaTTjyciv €va iTpo(T€\up,€vosy TTjv dvaydyfiu 8i(k 
 rdxovs fVoietro. Id. IV, 29. *A\Ki(^Ld8r}s rois HfXanovvrjo-iois viro- 
 TTTos av^ Koi dir avratv d<l>iKop,€vr]s eVtoroX^s Sxtt dTroKTfluatj vno- 
 Xwpft irapa Ti<Tara(l)€pvr]V. Id. VIII, 45. 
 
 See the examples collected by I^iiger, Vol. I, § 56, 14, 2 ; and 
 his note to Thug. IV, 5, 1. 
 
 § 112. The Participle may be joined with certain 
 verbs to restrict their meaning to particular actions, 
 in a sense which often resembles that of the Infinitive 
 (§ 92, 1). Such a Participle may agree in case with 
 either the subject or the object of the verb. 
 
 1. The Participle is thus used especially with verbs signi- 
 fying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease (or 
 cause to cease), to repent, to he weary of, to he pleased, dis- 
 pleased, or ashamed, to represent (as in a poem), to find. 
 
 Further, after verbs signifying to overlook or to allow (vtpio' 
 pda>, €(t)opda}, with nepif'ibou and cTreiSoi/, sometimes fidou) the 
 Participle is used in the sense of the object Infinitive, the Pres- 
 ent and Aorist Participles differing merely as the same tenses 
 of the Infinitive would differ in similar constructions (§ 15, 1 ; 
 § 23, 1). See § 24, Note 2. E. g. 
 
 (a.) "Ap^ofiai \ky(av, I will begin to speak. Plat. Symp. 186 B. 
 HavaaiXty ova a, cease speaking. EuR. Hippol. 706. (So aTreiTrftp 
 X^yav.) Ovk dv€^op.ai, ^aaa, I shall not endure to live. lb. 355. 
 Triv (l)i\o(TO<f)iav navarop ravra Xtyovaav, cause philosophy to stop 
 saying this. Plat. Gorg. 482 A. Kat cyo) rols fpoTaai xaipta 
 dnoKpivopevos, I like to answer, &c. Id. Prot. 318 D. T^ p^v 
 pa \aipov voaTrjaavri., they rejoiced in his return. Od. XIX, 463. 
 T^ff AioXiSoff x^^f'ToJff €<p€p€v d7r€(TT€pr)p.evos, he took it hardly 
 that he was deprived of Aeolis. Xen. Hell. Ill, 2, 13. Atcrxvvopai 
 \fymv, I am ashamed to say. (For alaxvvopai \iyfiv, see below, 
 N. 6.) ^AnoKapvco rpex^^v, I am weary of running. Tovs «< rqs vrjaov 
 dtanoiras pcrepeXovro dTrofifSaxoTcf, they repented oj having given 
 them up. Thuc. V, 35. TJenoiTjKe tovs €v "Atdov tov del XP^^* 
 rip.a>povp€vovs, he has represented those in Hades as suffering 
 
 § lliJ, 2.] 
 
 punishment. Plat. Gorg. 525 E. E^pev 8' fvpvojra Kpovlbrjv &Ttp 
 ijfi€vov oXXwv, she found him sitting apart. II. I, 498. bo 1, 27. 
 
 (b.) Mh 7r€pii8a>p€V i^piaeelaav t^v AaKebaipova KaitcaTa- 
 d,povTie€laav,letusnot aUow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised. 
 Isoc. Archid. 138 A. § 108. Ml, p! ihfiv OavdvO' 1/ doT^v^notto 
 see me killed. EuR. Orest. 746. TX^vai a€ 8pa>aav, that tkoushouldst 
 take courage to do. Soph. El. 943. See examples m § 24, N. 2. 
 
 Remark. In Herodotus rrupdopai is often used with ^e Parti- 
 ciple in the same way ; as ovk eneipaTo f^*«»' « ^^^P^^' ^^^^ ^"^ 
 not attempt to approach, I, 77. So I, 84; VI, 50. 
 
 ^Anob^Uvvpi, and 7rapaaKevdC<o, in the meaning to render, may take 
 the Participle as well as the Infinitive; as in Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 18, apx 
 Ka\ TdmTljLa pdUara ^xo'^ra, aTToSW^tv KaiTa accpara apicrra 
 ^Xovra,\apaaK.vdanv. So ArisT Plut. 210, ^Xe^o.r a,ro- 
 8^'^co ae, I will make you see. See these two verbs m Liddell and 
 Scott's Lexicon. 
 
 2. The Participle used with the following verbs contains 
 the leading idea of the expression: 8iaTeX«a), to continue, 
 \avedva>, to escape the notice of rvyxa»'«, to happen, (t>edva>, 
 to anticipate, to get the start of otxofiai, to be gone, and da/xi- 
 {;(o,tobe wont or to he frequent. 
 
 So in poetry with Kvpio>, to happen ; and in Herodotus 
 with avpiriirra, to happen, and with ttoWos flfii, iroWos eyKft/tat, or 
 navTolos yiyvopai, to be urgent ; and in Homer with ^^ for ?i3,. 
 
 E. g. 
 
 AtareXeviTi r5 /x^'xpt ip^v aU\ i6vT€s Acii^fpot, iJiey still remain 
 free. Hot. VH, 111. "Oarjv eCvoiav Ix®" h<^ diareXa, as muc/i 
 nood wUl as I continually bear. Dem. Cor, § 1. EXa^ei' {avTr}v) 
 Ue^vTa TraWa Koi KaTa<t>\^x^^^ra, everything took fire and w^^ 
 consumed before she knew it. Tnuc. IV, 133. (See § 24, Note 1.) 
 4fov^a TOV naM, iXdvOav^ ^6<rK<ov, he was unconsciously supporting 
 the murderer of his son. Hdt. I, 44. (See Rem. below.) Ervx.op 
 cVrnavopa oTrXIrat KaOeidovTes , soldiers happened to be sleeping 
 in the market-place. Thuc. IV, 113. Kara Bu^v yapTiva ^rvxov 
 Kadnp€vos ivTovBa, I happened to be sitting there. Plat. Euthyd. 
 272 E. Oi S' OVK t<i>6a<Tav nvOdpcvoi. tov ndXepov, Kai. . . tikov, 
 they no sooner heard of the war than they came. &c. Isoc. Paneg. 5» 
 B.§86. "EdySnaav iroXX^ oi ^Kidai tovs Uepaas (Iti tt,v y€(t>vpav 
 dTTiKopfvoi, the Scythians came to the bridge much before the Fer- 
 sians. Hdt. IV, 136. Avto\ (i>eii<rovTai tovto 8pdaavT€S,they 
 will be the first to do thUfor themselves. Plat. Rep. II, 375 L. (bee 
 § 24, N. 1.) ^Bdvovai cV avra Karacpeiy ovt€S , they are the 
 first to run to them. Aeschin. Cor. § 248. Oix^ rat <^ f v v « i/ , Ae Aa« 
 taken fiighL Upea^evoiv 4x^to, he was gone on an embassy. 2^SIH. 
 
228 
 
 THE PAKTICIPLE. 
 
 [§112,2. 
 
 § 113.] 
 
 PARTICIPLE WITH VERBS. 
 
 220 
 
 ri! 
 
 Cyr. V, 1, 3. OS n KOfiiCofifvos y€ BafuCtv, he had not been used 
 to being thus cared for. Od. VIII, 451. Oi, eafiiCfis Kara^aivfop 
 (Is Tov Ueipata, you do not come doum very often. Plat. iiep. 1, 
 
 828 C. , X X X . 7. 
 
 ToCtoi/ olaff flC^v Kvp€7; dost thou know whether he is perchance 
 living f Soph. Phil. 444. UoWbs v^ \i(r(T6^€Pos 6 ^elvos, the 
 stranger entreated urgently. Hdt. IX, 91. Tf\<ov de noXXos fve- 
 KdTo Xcywi/ Toiadf, and Gelon spoke urgently as follows. Id. VII, 
 1 58. Tore iravroloi iyevovro ^Kvdai bf ofifvoi rav 'la>v(ou XCcrat rov 
 ir6pou, they begged them in every way (lit. they took every form in 
 begging them). Id. VII, 10. 2vP€7r€7rrd>Kf€ tpis iovaa, there had 
 happened to be a quarrel. Id. I, 82. B^ (peCyoiv, he tookftight. 11. 
 U, 665. (See§97, N. 1.) 
 
 Remark. Aavddva being an active verb, meaning to escape the 
 notice of must have an object expressed or understood. AVhen no 
 object is expressed, sometimes iravras is understood, and sometimes 
 a reflexive referring to the subject. Thus eXade tovto iroifjo-as may 
 mean either he did this without any one's knowing it (sc. irdi/raO, or 
 he did this unconsciously (sc. iavrov). 
 
 Note 1. *ApKca), to be sufficient, and Uavos, rj^iav, Kpelcrtrcov, or 
 tifkrlav fiiii are sometimes used in a personal construction with the 
 Participle (like 8?i\6s ^tVi, &c., § 113, N. 1), where we should ex- 
 pect 2m impersonal construction with the Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 *ApK€(ra> 6vfi<rKov(r* eyo), it wiU be enough for me to die. Soph. 
 Ant 547. (We should expect dpKio-fi e>oi dvrjaKeiv.) Kpeia-a-tov 
 yhp ?(T^a p.r)Klr* &v ^ ^oyv Tv(f>\6s. Id. O. T. 1368. *Hdiovs ta^aB^ 
 dKov(ravT€£. Dem. Aristoc. 641, 9. 
 
 Note 2. As ai/e'xo/xat, <o endure, may govern either the ac- 
 cusative or the genitive, it may take a Participle in either^ case 
 acreeintr with the object. Thus we may say either duexfrat nva 
 Uyov?a, or dv^x^ral nvoi Xiyovros, he endures any ones say- 
 ing. 
 
 Note 3. The phrase ovk av (i>Bdvo is {or oUhv (jyOdvoiTe), you 
 could not be too soon, is used with the Participle as an exhortation, 
 meanincr the sooner the better. The third person, ovk &v (pdavoi, 
 is someSmes used, meaning, U might as weU happen now as ever (Jor 
 it must happen). See Passow. 
 
 Note 4. The Participle «v is sometimes omitted In the construc- 
 tions of §112. E.g. 
 
 Ei de Ti TvyxdP€i drjbes (sc. 3i/.) Plat. GJorg. 502 B. 
 
 Note 5. Aavddva is sometimes followed by or* and a finite verb, 
 as in Xen. Mem. Ill, 5, 24. When it is used impersonally, it regu 
 larly takes ori. 
 
 Note 6. Some verbs of this class are followed by the Infinitive 
 as well as by the Participle ; generally, however, with some diflei> 
 
 •TJ.„« nl^Wivoaai Xevwv means I am ashamed to 
 ence In meining. Thus "^^X'^.^T"* ";' ^leans / am ashamed to say 
 say (but do say); «^^X-,^«/^«' ^ ^, ^ ^ ^'' ^^^^^^^ 
 {and therefore do not say). So -^l^^^^JYleZTd, this through 
 If doing ^^^-'^^^^^^^^^^^^^ these words; 
 
 StV^dk^ta^^^^^^^^^^^ -—, KrU- 
 
 ger's note on I, 35. 
 
 Note 7 The Aorist (seldom the Perfect) Participle may to 
 
 Note4; aad§108, JSToteG. 
 
 Note 8. The Participles ^ovXififvos, fl«X<»>', 4J.5M""". 
 .po.r8.xi/— . ^°d .-X^riM-o^ sometimes ^S^^^^^^^^ 
 Zh a datiCe, which depends on ,1,1 or on a verb s.gnifymg to 
 cL or to happen; the whole forming a periphrasis for the 
 
 verb of the Participle. E. g. 
 -Ear.. airS fi ov^K 6 ,.,v 9, it is to Mm mshing it, i. •:. he ,nshes tt 
 
 Thuc. U, 60. 
 
 § 113. The Participle is used also with many verbs 
 signifying to zee, to perceive, to know, to hear or learn, to 
 r^emher, to forget, to show, to appear, to pr^e toac- 
 Imowledge, and with ayyeXXo,. to announce. The i^^rti- 
 ciple here resembles the Infinitive in indirect discourse 
 (§92, 2), each tense representing the correspondmg 
 tense of the Indicative or Optative. 
 
 The Participle may belong to either the svijeet^t the 
 olneet of these verbs, and agree with it in case. l!-. g- 
 
 , . - ' - « 7" rpmpmber that he did this ; 
 
 Ui^^^alrov rovro^o.^^avra^ 2TFmiM. (In the fir.t 
 
 caseXom^K is represented ; in the second, .ffoi^aa.) 0.6. tovtow 
 r^oil^al he know, that they ,ciUprosper; oatavro. .u ,rpaS«., 
 U& that he himself .cUl prosper. A«€» tovto. .x«po. »>ra,l 
 
230 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§118. 
 
 § 113.] 
 
 *Q£ WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 231 
 
 shall prove that he is an enemy; 8ft;^^^o-frat ovtos ^x^pos avjhe wiH 
 be proved to be an enemy. 
 
 For other examples see § 73, 2 ; where examples of the Participle 
 with av after these verbs may be found. See also § 41. 
 
 Note 1. The Participle is used in the same way with 
 
 d^Xoff ftfit and <f>av€pos et/xt. !E. g. 
 
 A^\6s T ^v ol6fA€vo9<, K.r.'K.j it was evident thai he thought^ &c. 
 Xen. An. II, 5, 27. (This is equivalent to hrfKov rjv ort oiotrc. 
 See § 112, N. 1.) See below. Note 7. *A7rt/co/xf i/ot /xeV <f)av€pol 
 fla-i eVOao-ti' iroXiv, it is evident that they came to the city Oasis. 
 Hdt. Ill, 26. So with (^avtphv ttoUq): as <f>av€pov nacriv (irolrjcrap 
 ovK I8ia 7ro\€fiovvT€s, they made it evident to all that they were not 
 fighting for themselves. Lycurg. Leocr. p. 154, § 50. 
 
 Note 2. When any of these verbs has for its object an accusa- 
 tive of the reflexive pronoun referring to its subject, the Participle 
 agrees with the reflexive. Thus we may have dei^a tfiavrou tovto 
 nf TTOirjKoray I shall show that I have done thisy for dci^u tovto ttc- 
 iroirjKa>s. 
 
 Note 3. If the Participle of an impersonal verb is used in 
 
 this construction, it must stand in the neuter singular (of 
 
 course without a noun). The following example includes this 
 
 and also the ordinary construction : — 
 
 Ufipdaofxat del^ai Koi p.fTbu ttjs TroXecos rjfuv Koi TrenovdoTa 
 (fxavTov ovx*- npoarrjKovTa^ I shall try to show not only that we have 
 rights in the city, but also that I have suffered, &c. Dem. Eubul. 1299 ^ 
 4. (The direct discourse is/xcrcori ttjs ttoXcws fjfiii/y /cat ir€Ttov6a 
 avros.) See § 111. 
 
 Note 4. Some verbs which regularly take the Infinitive in in- 
 direct discourse (§ 92, 2) occasionally take the Participle. E. g. 
 
 No/xt^e audpa ayaOou drroicTe ivav., think that you are putting to 
 death a good man. Xen. An. VI, 6, 24. 
 
 Note 5. The Participle &V may be omitted here, as well as after 
 the verbs of § 112. 
 
 Note 6. When avvoi^a and (TvyyiyviiiTKa are followed 
 by a dative of the rejlesyive pronoun referring to the subject of 
 the verb, the Participle can stand either in the dative agreeing 
 with the reflexive, or in the nominative agreeing with the sub- 
 ject; as crvvoiha efxavra rjBiKrjfjifva (or rj dtKrj fi(vos), Z am COW- 
 scious {to myself) that I have been wronged. 
 
 Note 7. The verbs included in § 113 may also be followed by 
 a clause with ort, instead of the more regular Participle. When 
 
 hrikhv ioTiv and (t>au€p6u i^mv are used impersonally, they regularly 
 take a clause with ort. (See § 112, N. 5.) 
 
 Note 8. Most of these verbs are also found with the Infinitive. 
 (See Pa^ow,or Liddell and Scott.) But ojSa takes the Infinitive 
 only when it means to know how. Thus oiba tovto '^oi^ivm^^^^ 
 I know how to do this, but olda tovto iroi<i>v means / know that I am 
 doing this. 
 
 Note 9. Verbs si^ifying to remember or to know may be fol- 
 lowed by 5t€ (when) and the Indicative, if a particular occasion is 
 referred to with emphasis. E. g. 
 
 Et yhp p^^ivrjcra. St iy<i> crot dmKpcud^lrJV for if POU remember (the 
 time) when I answered you, &c. Plat. Men. 79 D. OcoO ore 
 Xpva-€ois €4)dvrj uvv oTrXoiy. EUR. Hec. 112. 
 
 Note 10. (a.) 'Qs is sometimes prefixed to the Participle in 
 connection with the verbs of § 113 It implies that tbe ^arti^le 
 expresses the idea of the subject of the leading verb, or that of some 
 other person prominently mentioned in the sentence, (bee^ loy, 
 N 4 ) When this is also implied by the context (as it usually is m 
 Buchsentences), the o>s merely adds emphasis to the expression. Thus 
 M,, TavTa oCrcoF ?xovra means know that this is soj but tcr^t <os tuvtu 
 ovt(os txovTa means know that you may assume this to be so. ±i. g. 
 
 'Qs ari^eu f J8or' tadi p! hv dvicTTopel^, understand (that you must 
 look UDon) me as knowing nothing of ivhat you seek. Soph. fhU. 
 253. ^'Qs arjK^T 5vTa k.Ivov iv cjydei rd«, think of him asm longer 
 living. lb. 4 1 5. 'Q s raCr eTriWco bpu,p€v\ ov p^WovT ^ri, under- 
 stand that you may assume these things to be going on, &c. lb. 567. 
 Q.p) V^roX^cro,. Mtr^. eV^. cbpha, be assured that you mU not 
 bun me off from my determination. Soph. Ant. 1063. AT;Xots 6 a>s 
 Ti(Tr)aav^v vkov, you show that you have something new in your mind 
 to disclose. lb. 242. A^Xo. 7,v Kdpo, ^9 cTrrevb<op.it was evident (to 
 the minds of the soldiers) that Cyrus was m haste. Aen. An. 1, &, ». 
 nar/pa Thuohv dyy^XS^v «s oU cV Si^ra, (he comes) to announce that 
 your father is no more. Soph. O. T. 956. (In vs. 959, the messenger 
 himself says f v \o& UCwov Oavda-ipov ^€^f}KOTa.) 
 
 The force of ws here can seldom be expressed in English. 
 
 (b.) The Participle thus joined with a>s may stand with its sub- 
 stantive in the genitive or accusative absolute. This sometimes 
 happens even when the substantive would naturally be the object 
 of the verb of knowing, &c., so that if the ^s were omitted, the ac- 
 cusative would be used (as in a). E. g. 
 
 'Qs2,8* e'Yoi/rcov T^vb' kirl^rTaoBal ae xph^V^^' must understand 
 that this is so. Soph. Aj. 281. Here the genitive absolute has at 
 first the appearance of a dependent clause ; but a>j does not mean 
 that, and the literal translation would be, this being so (as you may 
 assume), you must understand it to be so. (See Schueidewm s note 
 
232 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 [§ 113. 
 
 §114, 2.] VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -rios. 
 
 233 
 
 on the passage.) 'Qi toIpvv oprap TQ>vhi aoi fxaBup ndpa, since this 
 is so, you may learn it^ i. e. you may learn that this is so. Aesch. 
 Prom. 760. 'Oy noiXefiov 6 pros nap* v/xcov oTrayyfXw ; shall I an- 
 nounce from you that there is war f lit. assuming that there is war^ 
 shall I announce it from youf Xen. An. II, 1, 21. *Qsrrdw fjioi 
 doKovvy . . . ovTas IcrOii know that I think so very decidedly^ lit. since 
 (as you must understand) this seems good to me, be sure of it. Id. 
 Mem. IV, 2, 30. 
 
 (c.) We sometimes find the Participle with as even after verbs 
 and expressions which do not regularly take the Participle by § 113. 
 E.g. 
 
 *Qs (fJ-ov ovu 1 6 pros onrf &p Ka\ vficls., ovTca t^p ypa)fir)p e^fre, he 
 of this opinion^ that I shall go^ 8ic. Xen. An. I, 3, 6. So Thuc. VII, 
 15. "Orap a>s Trero/xfi/ot eVraJ virpo} Biapofaprai, when in their sleep 
 they fancy themselves flying. Plat. Theaet. 158 B. *Q.s toIpvp prj 
 aKova-ofiipayp, ourco? Stai/oeicr^f, make up your minds then that we 
 shall not hear, lit. since then (as you must know) we shall not hear, so 
 make up your minds. Plat. Rep. I, 327 C. 'Qs a-TpaTrjyrja-oPTa 
 €p,€ /xiySejy Xeyc'ro), let no one speak of me as likely to be the general, 
 Xen. An, I, 3, 15. Ovrca o-KOTrw/xe;/, cis rd\ ap, «i tvxoi, koL romoiP 
 KaKfiPOiP avfi^dpToyp, let us look at the case, assu7ning that both this 
 and that might perhaps happen if chance should have it so. Dem. 
 Aristoc. 638, 25. (Literally, since (as we may assume) both thk and 
 that might perhaps happen if it should chance to be so, let us look at it 
 in this light.) For av, see § 41, 3. 
 
 Remark. The examples included in Note 10 (b) and (c) belong 
 properly under § 109, N. 4. (See also § 110, 1, N. 1 ; and the last 
 example under § 110, 2, N. 1.) 
 
 A 
 
 ,<!,. 
 
 % 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -T€09. 
 
 § 114. The verbal in -reo^ is used both in 2^ per- 
 gonal and an impersonal construction. 
 
 1. In the personal construction the verbal is always 
 passive in sense ; expressing necessity (like the Latin 
 Participle in -c?ws) and agreeing with its subject in case. 
 E.g. 
 
 ^Qt^tXr^ria (rot fj iroXis iarl, the city must be benefited by you. 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 6, 3. *AXXas (pavi) 4k riop ^vpfxdx<op fierairtfi- 
 nreas eipai (((prj), he said that others must be sent for. Thuc. VI, 25. 
 Ov yap irpo Trjs dXrjBeias TifirfTfos dpfjp, aXX' o Xcyo) prjTeop. PlAT. 
 Rep. A, 595 C. So VIII, 561 C. ^pdCopres o)S ov acpi irepioirTcrj 
 <OTi fi 'EXXa? dTToWvfiipTj. Hdt. VII, 168. 
 
 Note. The substantive denoting the agent is here in the dative, 
 as in the impersonal construction. 
 
 2. In the impersonal construction (which is the most 
 common) the verbal stands in the neuter of the nom- 
 inative singular (sometimes plural) with €aTi expressed 
 or understood, and is regularly active in sense. The 
 expression is equivalent to ^et, it is necessary, with the 
 Infinitive active or middle of the verb from which the 
 verbal is derived. 
 
 Active verbals of this class may take an ob/ect in the 
 same case which would follow their verbs. The agent 
 is generally expressed by the dative, sometimes by the 
 accusative. E. g. 
 
 Tavra fj^iip (or rj/ias) TroiTjTfop etTTi, we must do this, equivalent 
 to ravra fjfids Set iroi^aai. (See Rem. 2.) Olareov Tabe, it is 
 necessary to bear these things. EuR. Orest. 769. 'ATraWaKreou 
 avTov (tov <ra)/xaTOf ), Ka\ avrfj t^ "^vxfj 6 care op avra to. npdypLara. 
 Plat. Phaed. 66 E. (Aft diraWdTTea-dai airov, <cu t^ ^vx§ 
 
 m 
 
234 
 
 VERBALS IN 
 
 •T€OS. 
 
 [§ 114, 2. 
 
 0€a(rdai to irpdyfuiTa. ) (j>rjfu S^ bixn^ fiorjdrjreov eivai toU irpa- 
 yfiaaiv u/itv, that you must give assistance in two ways. Dem. 01. 1, 14, 6. 
 Ti hv avr^ noirfreov flrj ; what would he be obliged to do f Xen. 
 Mem. I, 7, 2. 'Eylrr}<pi(TavTo noXefirjTfa eimi (=5fti/ TroXc/ifti/), 
 they voted that they must go to war. Thuc. I, 88. Trju xatpavy f^ ^s 
 avToU 6pnaifi€vois rroXe pTjTi a rju. Id. VI, 50. Ovt€ fii(rdo(t)0' 
 prfriov a\\ovi ^ roxfi arparfvopfvovs, ovt€ pedfKriov tSu irpa- 
 yparcov nX^ioaiv fj irevraKiaxiXiois- M. VIII, 65. (Here both the 
 accusative and the dative of the agent are found.) See Rem. 2. 
 *Hpiv 8e ^vppaxoi aya^oi, ots ov irapaboTfa roU 'ABrjuaiois forii/, 
 ovde dUais Koi Xdyoty biaKpiria pq Xo-ycp Koi (ffpas) avrovs ^^a; 
 jTTopfvovs, dWa TipatpTjrea iv rdx^i Koi rravri aBfVd (= ovj ov 
 d€l rjpas napabovvm, k.t.X.). Id. I, 86. "irenv av (trj etaaophovi, 
 it would be best for us to go and see her. Xen. Mem. Ill, 11,1. 
 ('Hpai is understood.) Ov^€v\ TpoTrcj) (^a/xeV ckovtos^ dbiKTjrtoy dvai. 
 Plat. Crit. 49 A. *ATap ov yvvaiK&u ovSeVor' €(rd" rjTTrjTea fjpiv 
 (=zov yvvaLKwv bel fiTTaaOai), but we must never be beaten by women. 
 Arist. Lys. 450. So Soph. Ant. 678. 
 
 Note. A sentence sometimes begins with an impersonal verbal 
 in -r€ov and is continued with an infinitive, the latter depending on 
 Bel implied in the verbal. E. g. 
 
 Uavraxov TroirjTeov a av KfXevrj fj ttoXi? Ka\ rj rrarp'ts, rj irfiOeiv 
 avTTjv. Plat. Crit. 51 B. 
 
 Remark 1. The same impersonal construction is found in 
 Latin, but very seldom with verbs which take an object accusa- 
 tive; as Eundum est tibi (heov tori' aoi), — Mori end urn est omnibus, 
 
 Bella utendum est nobis (tco TroXf'/xw xP^<^'^^°^ ^^'^^ w"^*')^ ^'^ ''^^^^ 
 
 employ war. See Madvig's Latin Grammar, § 421, a and 6). 
 
 Remark 2. The dative and the accusative of the agent are both 
 allowed with the verbal in -rtov (or -Wa) ; although in the eqmva- 
 lent construction of del with the Infinitive the accusative is the only 
 form regularly used. Thus we can say rovro Tjplv noirfTeov or tovto 
 ill as iroiijrcW, but only TOVTO fjiias dci ttoiciv. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 I. On the Relations of the Greek Optative to thk 
 Subjunctive and the Indicative.* 
 
 From the time of the Alexandrian grammarians a special mood 
 called the Optative (eyicXto-ts fvicriKri) has been recognized in Greek 
 as distinct from the Subjunctive {eyKXia-is viroraKTiKfj). The an- 
 cient classification has been called in question in later times, and 
 many grammarians of high authority have adopted or favored a 
 union of the Subjunctive and Optative in one mood, to be called 
 the Subjunctive or Conjunctive, in which the Subjunctive (com- 
 monly so called) is to supply the primary tenses, and the forms 
 commonly assigned to the Optative the secondary tense. Thus the 
 Present Optative would be called an Imperfect Subjunctive; ttow 
 and noioipiy for example, being supposed to bear the same relation 
 to each other asfaciam and facerem in Latin. 
 
 This was first reduced to a systematic form by Kiihner, who, in- 
 deed discards the common names Subjunctive and Optative (except 
 as explanatory terms), and adopts the cumbrous expressions " Con- 
 junctive of the primary tenses " and " Conjunctive of the secondary 
 tenses." Rost, in his Griechische Grammatik, § 118, says : " The so- 
 called Optative is nothing but a pecuhar form of the Subjunctive, 
 and stands to the Greek Subjunctive in the same relation as in 
 other languages the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive to the 
 Present and Perfect." Donaldson in his New Cratylus (p. 617, 2d 
 ed.) says: "It has long been felt by scholars on syntactical grounds, 
 that, considered in their relations to each other and to the other 
 moods, they [the Subjunctive and Optative] must be regarded as 
 differing in tense only." Again (p. 618) : " These moods have no 
 right to a separate classification." Crosby, in his Grammar, § 591, 
 says of this classification, that " it deserves the attention of the 
 student, although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the 
 old phraseology." 
 
 As the classification of Kiihner has been introduced into many 
 elementary grammars, so that many boys are now taught to call the 
 tenses commonly known as the Present and Perfect Optative by 
 the strange names of Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, the 
 
 * Reprinted, with a few changes, from the Proceedings of the American 
 Academy of Arts and Sciences for Jan. 8, 1861 : Vol. V. pp. 96 - 102. 
 
236 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 question becomes not merely of theoretical, but eminently of prac- 
 tical importance. In fact it meets every student, and more espe- 
 cially every teacher of Greek grammar, the moment he reaches the 
 paradigm of the regular verb. If it were merely a question of con- 
 venience, therefore, it would be highly important to have it settled, 
 for the sake of uniformity. 
 
 The question What shall constitute a distinct mood in any lan- 
 guage f must be settled to some extent arbitrarily. No precise rule 
 will meet all cases ; yet we may safely maintain that, when any 
 series of verbal forms' in which the chief tenses are represented ex- 
 hibits a closer connection in form and use amon^ its members than 
 it bears as a whole to any corresponding series, it is entitled to the 
 rank of an independent mood. That this is true of the Latin Sub- 
 iunctive is clear; and it is equally clear that the Imperfect and 
 tluperfect of that mood have sufficiently strong bonds of connection 
 with the Present and Perfect to prevent them from being marked 
 off as a distinct mood. A merely superficial view of the relation of 
 the Greek Subjunctive and Optative might lead us to the idea that 
 the two combined would form a mood similar to the Latin Subjunc- 
 tive, thus simplifying the Greek conjugation and introducing a new 
 analogy with the Latin. But it is this fatal error of carrying the 
 analogy between the Greek and Latin further than the connection 
 of the* two languages warrants, which has thrown this whole subject 
 into confusion. When the Latin was looked upon as an offspring 
 of the Greek, as the result of a union of the Aeolic dialect of Greece 
 with barbarian languages in Italy, the presumption was decidedly in 
 favor of such an analogy, and it would even have required strong 
 proof to convince us of any radical difference in the modal systems 
 of the two languages. But the more correct views now entertained 
 of the origin oT the Latin would rather lead us to believe that each 
 lanfruage developed its syntax, and especially its modal system, in- 
 dependently. The modal system of the parent language of the 
 Indo-European group is of course hopelessly unknown ; and yet the 
 comparison of the Latin and Greek verb with the Sanskrit (as the 
 oldest representative of the family) sometimes enables us to deter- 
 mine special points in regard to the primitive forms with an ap- 
 proach to certainty. Thus, to take the simplest case, when we find 
 asti in Sanskrit meanin<j w, we may be sure that some similar form 
 existed with that meaning in the parent language of the Sanskrit, 
 the Greek, the Latin, the German, &c., from which eWi, est, tsty &c. 
 were derived. So when we find a Potential mood in Sanskrit, 
 which presents striking analogies both to the Greek Optative and 
 to the Latin Subjunctive, and furthermore find the analogy extend- 
 ing even to the Gothic, we must conclude that the primitive lan- 
 ffuaire contained the elements which the Greek developed into its 
 
 *«.vv.* .^c..^-.x.„ ^. any torm corresponding to tne ijrrecK Subji 
 might lead us to think that the Greek developed that mood by 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 237 
 
 ^Ah 
 
 itself; but in the Yedic dialect a few relics are found of a true Sub- 
 junctive, with a long connecting-vowel as its characteristic; for 
 example, patati, bearing the same relation to the Present Indicative 
 patati as ^ov\r]Tai, to /SouXfrai. This seems to show that a similar 
 mood existed in the parent language. If this testimony can be 
 relied on, we must conclude, not only that the Latin and Greek 
 derived the rudiments of their modal forms from a common ances- 
 tor, but that they inherited them from a period anterior to the 
 separation of the Indian branch from the Indo-European family. 
 We should therefore expect to find that the elements are generally 
 the same in the two languages, but that the development is essen- 
 tially different; and that the refinements in signification, for which 
 the Greek modal forms are especially conspicuous, have been for 
 the most part developed by each language within itself 
 
 Let us now examine the forms themselves, to see how far a paral- 
 lel can be drawn betweeen the Greek and Latin moods. In clauses 
 expressing a purpose or object after ha, onoos, &c., we certainly find 
 the Subjunctive and Optative used like primary and secondary 
 tenses of the same mood : thus where in Latin we have manetut hoc 
 faciat, and manehat ut hoc faceret, we have /xeWt Xva tovto ttoi^ , and 
 €fA€V€u iva ToiiTo TTotoiTj. But cvcu iu this case of strongest resem- 
 blance there is no place for the Future Optative, which corresponds 
 to the Future Indicative. Again, in clauses expressing general sup- 
 positions aft;er fdu or «t, or after relatives or temporal particles, de- 
 pending on verbs which denote general truths or repeated actions, 
 a correlation of the Subjunctive and Optative is found, analogous 
 to that of the two divisions of the Latin Subjunctive ; for example, 
 in €av Toi)To Troifj davud^ovcnv, and €i tovto rroiolr) €0avfia{^ov, which 
 are sometimes represented in Latin by such forms as si hoc facial 
 mirantur, and si hoc faceret mirabantur, although generally the In- 
 dicative is preferred. Here, however, the analogy ceases, if we 
 except certain cases of indirect question hereafter to be noticed, 
 and a Homeric construction in relative sentences expressing a 
 purpose^ which almost disappears from the more cultivated lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Let us turn now to the Optative in wishes; for here, if anywhere, 
 we may look for the primary meaning of this mood. From this use 
 it derives its name ; and especially this is its only regular use in 
 independent sentences, except in apodosis with au. Here some 
 have been so far misled by the supposed analogy of the Latin, as to 
 translate the Present Optative by the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive ; 
 but a slight examination will show that the Present and Aorist Op- 
 tative are here so far from being secondary tenses of the Subjunc- 
 tive, that they are equivalent to the Present Subjunctive in Latin, 
 and refer to the future, wliile the Greek Subjunctive cannot oven 
 regularly stand in such expressions. Thus ei0€ €1t}v is utinam sim, 
 that I may he; eXde yevoiTo, utinam fat, that it may happen ; whereas 
 utinam esset and utinam factum esset correspond to eWe ^v and cW* 
 cycVfro. 
 
238 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 239 
 
 In ordinary protasis and apodosis the same relation Is seen. The 
 four Greek forms, fav iroifj^ iav ttoitjo-ij ^ €i ttoioitj, and fl no ifj - 
 o-fte, find in the Latin Subjunctive only one equivalent, si facial. 
 (For the first two the Latin generally preferred the Future or 
 Future Perfect Indicative.) Here therefore the absurdity of classi- 
 fying the last two as secondary forms of the first two, in conformity 
 to a Latin analogy, is especially clear. What the Latin analogy 
 would lead us to expect as secondary forms, the equivalents of id 
 fnceret and sifecisset^ can be expressed in Greek only by the Indica- 
 tive. In apodosis the Optative with av is equivalent to the pri- 
 mary, not to the secondary, tenses of the Latin Subjunctive ; thus, 
 noirjtrcuni av is equivalent to faciam (not to fecissenij which would be 
 iroiT](ra av). Here likewise the Subjunctive cannot be used in 
 Attic Greek. This analogy between the Optative and the primary 
 tenses of the Latin Subjunctive might lead us even to the view that 
 the latter ought rather to be called an Optative, for which view 
 there are certainly much stronger reasons than for the opposite one 
 which we are considering. 
 
 An Homeric exception to the principles of the last two para- 
 graphs (explained in § 49, 2, Note 6, and § 82, Remark 2 of the 
 present work) has little or no weight in this discussion; for, al- 
 though we find examples in which the Optative in conditional 
 sentences and wishes is used like the secondary tenses of the Latin 
 Subjunctive, the ordinary use of the Optative referring to the 
 future in those constructions is perfectly well established in the 
 Homeric language. It would be a mere gratuitous assumption to 
 maintain that the exceptions (like IL V, 311 and 388) represent the 
 original idiom of the language. 
 
 Li indirect quotations and questions the Optative is used after 
 past tenses, each tense of the Indicative or Subjunctive in the 
 direct discourse being then changed to the corresponding tense of 
 the Optative. Thus, fhtv on & bvvairo noirjo-oi, he said that he would 
 do what he could, implies that the direct discourse was <i av bvv<o' 
 fiai noiTjaci, I shall do what I may be able. Here the first Optative 
 is the correlative of the Subjunctive ; but it is quite as often the 
 correlative of the Indicative, as when we say dirtv on a bvvairo 
 rroioirjy he said that he was doing what he could, where the direct dis- 
 course is A dvi/a/xai ttoicS, / am doing what I am able. One tense 
 of the Optative, the Future, can never represent a Subjunctive, as 
 that mood has no corresponding tense ; but it always represents a 
 Future Indicative. Nothing more need be said to show the absurd- 
 ity of calling this tense a secondary tense of the Subjunctive: The 
 three remaining tenses of the Optative can with no more propriety 
 be called secondary tenses of the Subjunctive than of the Indicative, 
 for they represent both on precisely the same principles. This is 
 especially obvious in regard to the Aorist, which has two distinct 
 meanings in indirect questions, — one when it represents an Aorist 
 Indicative, and another when it represents an Aorist Subjunctive, 
 the direct form. Thus, rjyvon tI iroirjaeiev may mean either hi 
 
 Incw not what he had done, or he knew not what he should do ; as the 
 direct question may have been either tl inoir)aa ; what did I do f or 
 ri' TToiljaa) ; (Aor. Subj.), what shall I do ? Strangely enough, this 
 very class of sentences Is supposed to furnish the most striking 
 analogy between the Latin Subjunctive and the Greek Subjunctive 
 and Optative combined. Non habet quo se vertat and non habebat quo 
 se verteret are indeed equivalent to ovk c^*' ^^^ Tpdirrjrai and ovk 
 ttvov oirq rpdnoiro, but a single example like rjpcirayv avrov «t ava- 
 fr\€v<r€i€Vj I asked him whether he had set sail (Dem. in Polycl. p. 
 1223, 21), in which dvanXevaeiev represents an Aorist Indicative 
 {dve7r\€V(ras ;) shows that the argument proves too much. Indirect 
 quotations and questions therefore afford us no more proof that the 
 Optative is a secondary form of the Subjunctive, than that it is a 
 secondary form of the Indicative. 
 
 Two tenses of the Indicative, the Imperfect and Pluperfect, have 
 no corresponding tenses in the Optative, so that these are regularly 
 retained in the Indicative in indirect dlscouree ; thus flnev ori ffid- 
 XovTo means he said that they had been fighting, i. e. he said (fxdxovro. 
 A rare exception to the last principle shows conclusively the pro- 
 priety of the names commonly given to the tenses of the Optative. 
 The want of a tense in the Optative to represent the Imperfect 
 Indicative in examples like the last was naturally felt as a defect ; 
 and in the Infinitive and the Participle this want was supplied by 
 using the Present in a new sense to represent the Imperfect, the 
 peculiar use being always denoted by something in the context. 
 In a few instances we find the Present Optative used in the same 
 way to supply the want of an Imperfect, the context making it clear 
 that the tense is not used in its ordinary sense. Such an instance 
 is found in Dem. Onet. I, 869, 12; dneKpivavro on ovScly pdprvs 
 Traptirj, KOfii^oiro de \ap^dva>v Ka6' oiroaovovv beoiro A(f)o^os 
 nap avrav, they replied that no witness had been present, but that 
 Aphobus had received the money from them, taking it in such sums as 
 he happened to want. Here naptlr) represents nap^v, and kohICoito 
 represents tKOfii^fTo, which would ordinarily be retained in such 
 a sentence. See § 70, 2, Note 1 (b) of the present work. If now the 
 name of Imperfect be given to the Present Optative in its ordinary 
 use, (when It represents a Present of the direct discourse, and is 
 merely translated by an Imperfect to suit the English idiom,) what 
 shall we call this true Imperfect Optative, which really repre- 
 sents an Imperfect Indicative, and stands where an Imperfect Indie* 
 ative is the regular form ? 
 
 We see thsn that the Optative was used in the whole class of con- 
 structions krown as oratio obliqua, or indirect discourse, as the corre- 
 lative not merely of the Subjunctive, but also of the Indicative, and 
 that it possessed the power of expressing In an oblique form every 
 tense of both those moods In a manner of which the Latin presents 
 hardly a trace. In fact, tliis use of the Greek Optative presents 
 one of the most striking examples of the versatility and flexibility 
 of the language, and of its wonderful adapt'ition to the expression 
 
240 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 of the nicest shades of thought of which the human mind is capable. 
 This single use of the mood seems sufficient in itself to prevent us 
 from assigning to it the subordinate rank of a secondary form 
 attached to the Subjunctive. 
 
 II. On the Time denoted by the Tenses op the In- 
 finitive WHEN THEY ARE PRECEDED BY THE ARTICLE 
 AND HAVE A SCBJECT EXPRESSED. 
 
 The able and instructive treatise of Madvig on the two uses of 
 the Aorist Infinitive in Greek (in his Bemerkungen iiber einige 
 Puncte der griechischen Wortfugungslehre, published as a supplement 
 to his Syntax der gnechischen Sprache) contains the earliest com- 
 plete statement of the ordinary uses of that tense. The same prin- 
 ciple, as far as it refers to indirect discourse, is clearly stated in 
 Sophocles's Greek Grammar (published in the same year, 1847). 
 But with these exceptions, no distinct statement had been made, 
 either in elementary grammars or in more elaborate treatises, of the 
 simple principle which distinguishes the use of the Aorist Infinitive 
 in ^ouXfrai eXdflvj he wishes to go, from that in (f)T}a\v ekdelv, he says 
 that he went. According to Madvig, however, the use of the Aorist 
 Infinitive as a past tense is not confined to indirect discourse, but 
 extends also to cases in which the Infinitive " has a subject ex- 
 pressed and at the same time is preceded by the article." This 
 principle was too hastily adopted, on Madvig's high authority, in 
 the first edition of the present work ; and, as there seemed no good 
 ground for distinguishing the Aorist from the Present Infinitive in 
 similar construction, the general principle was stated, that any tense 
 of the Infinitive could retain its designation of time (as in indirect 
 discourse) when it had at the same time the article and a subject. 
 The same class of sentences which seemed to confirm Madvig's view 
 of the Aorist furnished also examples of the Present, and the use of 
 this tense as an Imperfect made an exception here almost im- 
 possible. 
 
 A more careful review of all the examples quoted by Madvig, and 
 of all that I have met with in reading since adopting his principle, 
 has convinced me that the Aorist Infinitive here presents no pecu- 
 liarity, and that it differs from the Present only in the ordinary 
 way, by referring to a single or momentary act rather than to a 
 repeated or continued act. The single example quoted by Madvig 
 in his Syntax (§ 172) to support his principle is Dem. F. L. p 360, 
 10, § 61 : TO firjbc^uav tc3i/ TroXfoji/ &\civat, TrdXiopKtq fiiyiOTov eor* 
 arjfiflov Tov dia tovtovs Trciadevras avrovs ravra Tra^fti/, the fact 
 that no one of the cities was taken by siege is the greatest proof that they 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 241 
 
 Buffered these thingsy &c. In the later treatise he adds Thuc. I, 
 41, TO bC fjfjLas UeXoTroumja-iovs avrois fifi ^oTjdrja-at, — Xen. Mem, 
 I, 2, 1, Cyr. II, 2, 3, IV, 5, 12, — Dem. Chers. p. 105, 28; § 65,— 
 and Ajiist. Nub. 268. It will be seen that all these examples can 
 be explained by the ordinary principle of the Aorist Infinitive stated 
 above ; that is, the Infinitive is a mere verbal noun, designating no 
 time of itself, and is referred to special time only by the context, 
 which in these examples happens to refer it to the past. But when 
 the Infinitive with tov expresses a purpose (where Madvig himself 
 admits an exception) , it is referred by the context or by the general 
 meaning of the passage to the future : so in the following example 
 from Dem. Cor. p. 236, 20, § 33, where on Madvig's prmciple the 
 Infinitive must refer to the past: ^u €v <^6^(^ fi^y ft npo tov tovs 
 ^(OKcas diroXecTdai ylrr](j)L(raia6€ ^orfdelu, €K(f)vyoL to, rrpayyuvr avTov, 
 he was in fear lesty if before the Phocians should be destroyed you 
 should vote to assist them, he might lose control of the business. 
 
 Other cases in which the Aorist Infinitive might seem to retain 
 its force as a past tense are satisfactorily explained by Madvig. 
 On the whole, it would be difficult to establish an exception to the 
 general principle, that the Aorist Infinitive is a past tense only in 
 indirect discourse, when it represents an Aorist Indicative £^r 
 verbs of saying, thinking , &c. 
 
 «» \ 
 
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES 
 
 ADDED IN THE THIRD AND FOURTH EDITIONS. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 w 
 
 Page 
 
 Aeschines. 
 
 In Ctes. § 10 . . 168 
 § 114 . 207 
 
 Aristophanes. 
 Yesp. 109 . . 64 
 
 Demosthenes. 
 De Falsa Legatione. 
 p. 391, 11. § 159 99 
 
 Euripides. 
 Alcest. 386 • . 25 
 
 
 Page 
 
 
 Page 
 
 Homer. 
 
 
 Repub. IV, 434 A 
 
 115 
 
 11. XI, 21 . 
 
 171 
 
 V, 460 A 
 
 168 
 
 Odyss. II, 270 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 III, 92 . 
 
 115 
 
 
 
 IV, 167 . 
 
 138 
 
 Sophoci.es. 
 
 
 V, 216 . 
 
 171 
 
 Elect. 47 
 
 171 
 
 VI, 113 . 
 
 77 
 
 943 . 
 
 227 
 
 XI, 489 . 
 
 129 
 
 1478 
 
 171 
 
 XUI, 309 . 
 
 171 
 
 Oed. Col. 1770 . 
 
 115 
 
 
 
 Philoct. 232 . 
 
 171 
 
 
 
 Trachin. 934 . 
 
 171 
 
 Plato. 
 
 
 
 
 Apol. 30 D . 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 Gorg. 498 A 
 
 214 
 
 Xenophon. 
 
 
 Protag. 310 A 
 
 313 C . 
 
 25 
 
 79 
 
 Mem. IV, 3, 1 
 
 79» 
 
 317 A 
 
 208 
 
 
 
 317 D . 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES (1873). 
 
 Page 
 
 Aeschines, in Ctesl § 60 143 
 
 Demosthenes, De Corona, p. 256, 2, § 88 . . • 8 
 
 Herodotus, HI, 31 144 
 
 Homer, II. 1, 22 190 
 
 Plato, Men. 72 C ^^ 
 
 " Crit. 51 B 234 
 
 Sophocles, Aj. 1183 143 
 
 Thucydides, IV, 16 148 
 
 Eura, 
 
 Pers. 
 Prorn 
 
 Page 
 
 25 
 
 149 
 135 
 
 145 
 149 
 149 
 
 99 
 
 51 
 
 137 
 
 7 
 
 162 
 
 118 
 
 99 
 
 120 
 
 185 
 
 227 
 
 Aeschines 
 In Timarch. — 
 
 4 99 . 
 
 § 125 
 
 § 127 . 
 De Falsa Legat 
 
 § 2 . 
 
 § 145 (153) 
 
 4 151 (160). 
 In Ctesiph. — 
 
 §2 . . 
 
 ^7 . . 
 
 §69 . 
 
 §83 
 
 §90 . 
 
 § 110 . 
 
 § 123 . 
 
 §147 . 
 
 § 177 . 
 
 § 248 
 
 Aeschylus. 
 
 Agam 15 . , 202 
 
 37 . . 105 
 
 160 . . 135 
 
 253 . . 198 
 
 340 . . 62 
 
 584 . . 188 
 
 620 . . 106 
 
 857 . . 5 
 
 944 . 92, 93 
 
 1041 . . 35 
 
 1067 . . 211 
 
 1079 . . 195 
 
 1170 . . 202 
 
 1435 . . 128 
 
 Clioeph. 246 . . 178 
 
 594 . 106 
 
 298 . . 52 
 
 573 . . 69 
 
 691 . . 201 
 
 800 . . 181 
 
 912 . . 184 
 
 10 . . 69 
 
 152 . . 72 
 
 Proni. 165 . 
 203 
 248. 
 292 
 332 . 
 470 
 481 . 
 697 
 712 . 
 747 
 760. 
 786 
 824. 
 835 
 865. 
 905 
 907. 
 918 
 930. 
 979 
 1004. 
 1049 
 1051. 
 Sept. 38 
 195 . 
 250 
 253 . 
 429 
 462 . 
 712 
 
 720 . 
 754 
 790 . 
 1037 
 1048 . 
 1057 
 Suppl. 499 . 
 
 Page 
 145 
 . 77 
 199 
 . 106 
 181 
 . 155 
 145 
 . 143 
 209 
 . . 73 
 232 
 . 202 
 69 
 . 114 
 191 
 . 157 
 157, 221 
 . 202 
 43 
 11, 51, 105 
 181 
 . 176 
 175 
 . 184 
 111 
 37, 187 
 209 
 . 33 
 23 
 . 220 
 86 
 . 35 
 86 
 . 221 
 211 
 . 184 
 45 
 
 Page 
 
 Appian. 
 
 Bell. Civ. II, 91 . 24 
 
 Aristophanes. 
 
 Andocides. 
 
 Myst. I, 6, 38. § 43 68 
 
 Antiphon. 
 De Caed. Herod, 
 p. 131, 36. § 19 . 126 
 133, 40. § 87 . 7 
 
 Acharn. 312 
 816 
 Aves, 36 
 
 54 . 
 120 
 180 . 
 280 
 448 . 
 461 
 759 (761) 
 964 
 1187 . 
 1350 
 1375 . 
 1494 
 1508 . 
 1679 
 Eccles. 236 
 297 
 495 
 Equit. 112 
 696. 
 698 
 Lysistr. 450 
 611 
 Nubes, 5 . 
 63 
 
 116 . 
 125 
 229 . 
 268 
 296 . 
 340 
 367 . 
 870 
 439 . 
 493 
 605 . 
 620 
 635 . 
 613 
 
 . 37 
 209 
 . 202 
 179 
 . 115 
 106 
 8 
 209 
 . 186 
 . 37, 93 
 . 211 
 179 
 . 20 
 110 
 . 83 
 69 
 . 34 
 194 
 . 79 
 68 
 . 82 
 25 
 . 105 
 234 
 . 47 
 63 
 7 
 . 61, 118 
 6 
 112 
 . 209 
 186, 187 
 . 221 
 185 
 . 223 
 126 
 . 83 
 186 
 . 174 
 166 
 . 181 
 
1! 
 
 244 
 
 N!ibes,723 . 
 792. 
 819 . 
 904. 
 1130 . 
 1141. 
 1151 . 
 1250. 
 1255 . 
 1277. 
 1801 . 
 1352. 
 1383 . 
 1426. 
 1433 . 
 1436. 
 1466 . 
 Pac. 480 . 
 
 1179 
 Plut. 210 . 
 603 
 
 1027 . 
 Ran. 1 . 
 68 
 
 96&98 . 
 298 
 462 . 
 508, 509 
 624 . 
 679 
 686 . 
 695 
 830 . 
 866 
 871 . 
 955 
 
 1120 . 
 1125 
 1378 . 
 1446 
 1449 . 
 1459 
 Thesm. 372 . 
 
 870 
 Vesp. 283 
 897 . 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 245 
 
 . 208 
 110 
 . 210 
 110 
 . 42 
 38 
 . 184 
 129 
 . 174 
 22 
 . 38 
 37 
 . Ill 
 23 
 . 112 
 . 21,43 
 . 68 
 194 
 . 130 
 227 
 . 184 
 44 
 . 182 
 191 
 . 139 
 186 
 . 186 
 . 85, 185 
 . 186 
 93 
 51, 103 
 199 
 . 113 
 99 
 . 178 
 177 
 . 68 
 179 
 . 178 
 136 
 . 117 
 142 
 . 179 
 181 
 . 154 
 185 
 
 I. p. 15, 28. ^ 23 . 198 
 
 16, 3. § 23 . 188 
 16, 25. 4 26 51, 118 
 
 II. p. 20, 12. § 8 .159 
 
 20,18. §8 113,157 
 
 20, 27. § 9 45, 131 
 
 21, 1. HO . 45 
 21, 10. § 11 137 
 21,20.^2 10,108 
 
 Demosthenes. 
 
 Olynth. 
 
 I. p. 9, 3, § 1 . . 172 
 
 9, 17. M . 80 
 
 10, 1. ^ 2 . 137 
 
 12, 3. § 10 23, 203 
 
 12, 22. ^2 . 12 
 
 13, 16. 4 15 . 140 
 13, 25. § 15 . 191 
 
 13, 27. ^ 16 . 12 
 
 14, 6. § 17 . 234 
 16, 6 J 20 . 122 
 
 15, 22. \ 22 . 154 
 
 23, 14. 4 18 
 23, 27. § 20 
 
 23, 29. § 20 
 
 24, 12. \ 22 
 
 24, 23. § 23 
 
 25, 2. § 24 
 25, 19. ^ 26 
 25, 24. § 26 
 
 III. p. 28, 5. § 1 . 
 29, 18. ^ 3 
 30, 10. § 6 
 31, 1. § 9 
 
 31, 11. § 10 
 
 32, 16. § 14 
 
 84, 8. § 20 
 
 34, 17. § 21 
 
 35, 1. § 23 
 
 85, 18. § 25 
 
 Philipp. 
 I. p. 40, 1. H 
 40, 9. H • 
 
 40, 18. § 2 
 
 41, 3. § 3 . 
 
 41, 18. § 5 
 
 42, 1. § 6 . 
 
 43, 12. § 11 
 
 44, 12. § 15 . 
 44, 25. § 17 . 
 
 44, 30. { 18 . 
 
 45, 27. § 21 
 47, 24. § 27 . 
 51, 19. § 39 
 52, 17. § 43 . 
 
 53, 4. H4 
 
 54, 18. § 60 . 
 54, 20. § 50 , 
 54, 22. i 50 . 
 54, 27. (j 51 
 65, 6 & 7. § 51 
 
 II, p. 
 
 III. p 
 
 66, 15. \ 3 
 
 67, 20. § 8 
 
 68, 12. \ 11 
 
 69, 6. \ 13 
 
 70, 25. § 20 
 
 70, 25. § 20 
 10 71, 12 
 
 71, 4. § 20 
 
 72, 25. § 29 
 74, 24. § 37 
 . 110, 1. H 
 
 47 
 . 189 
 
 194 
 . 196 
 
 120 
 . 120 
 
 141 
 . 188 
 
 197 
 
 . 197 
 
 71 
 
 . 42 
 
 181 
 . Ill 
 
 216 
 . 15 
 
 216 
 . 23 
 
 . 144 
 
 95 
 . 33 
 
 134 
 
 . 95 
 
 10, 130 
 
 . 119 
 
 111 
 . 49 
 
 107 
 . 128 
 
 135 
 . 128 
 
 120 
 . 184 
 
 161 
 
 . 103 
 
 44 
 
 . 131 
 
 126, 
 
 174 
 73, 140 
 
 139 
 
 206 
 13 
 
 114 
 
 jl5, 
 
 53 
 
 63 
 
 62 
 
 140 
 
 208 
 
 in.p.114, 15. §15 17 
 
 114, 20. h 15 17 
 
 122, 21. § 45 217 
 
 123, 1. § 46 183 
 
 123, 16. § 48 60 
 
 124, 25. ^ 54 84 
 
 124, 24. \ 54 155 
 
 125, 10. i 56 80 
 
 126, 19. § 61 194 
 128,22.§69 27,130 
 
 128, 25. § 69 80 
 
 129, 14. § 71 112 
 
 130, 11. § 75 184 
 130, 14. § 75 82 
 
 De Corona. 
 
 225, 13. § 1 . 227 
 
 232, 20. § 22 . 221 
 
 234, 5. § 26 . 161 
 
 234, 6. § 26 . 197 
 
 234, 26. § 28 . 214 
 
 236, 12. 4 32 . • 75 
 
 236, 19. § 33 . 28 
 
 236, 20. ^ 33 . 81,240 
 
 236, 28. \ 34 . Ill 
 
 240, 15. § 43 . 113 
 
 241, 15. i 47 . 187 
 
 242, 10. i 49 . Ill 
 
 243, 6. § 53 . 195 
 246, 1. § 63 . 98 
 251, 28. § 79 .95 
 257, 25. § 95 . 215 
 260, 2. § 101 . 101 
 268,23.4 123. 36 
 268, 28. 4 124 . 183 
 274,28.^141. 119 
 276, 1. § 145 . 116. 
 276, 23. § 148 . 163 
 284, 21. § 169 . 151 
 291, 27. §190. 16 
 291, 28. i 190 . 11& 
 
 295, 13. { 201 . 31 
 
 296, 24. § 206 . 117 
 
 301, 28. §220. 213 
 
 302, 24. § 223 . 117 
 304, 1. § 228 . Ill 
 313, 4. § 258 . 68 
 313, 6. i 258 . 87 
 327, 1. § 303 . 5 
 331, 30. § 322 . 223 
 
 De Falsa Legatione. 
 
 341, 12. § 1 
 
 341, 14. § 2 
 
 342, 2. § 3 . 
 342, 10. § 3 
 342, 25. § 5 
 342, 28. i 6 
 345, 14. § 14 
 345, 27. h 16 
 347, 26. § 21 
 
 71 
 
 20 
 . 42 
 
 20 
 . 220 
 
 22 
 
 51, 134 
 
 20, 42 
 
 22, 15i3 
 
 p.350, 8. 4 29 . 134 
 
 851, 4. § 32 . 6 
 351, 18. 4 33 . 168 
 
 852, 26. § 37 . 158 
 
 353. 14 & 18. §39 158 
 
 353, 24. § 40 . 49 
 
 354, 8. § 41 . 161 
 
 355, 17. § 45 . 79 
 
 355, 29. § 47 . 197 
 
 356, 10. 4 48 . 158 
 856, 13. § 48 . 157 
 
 357, 3. § 51 . 64 
 360, 10. § 61 . 240 
 864, 11 & 12. §74 88, 
 
 112 
 864, 18. 4 74 45, 158 
 864, 25. § 75 . 215 
 
 369, 12. § 88 . 183 
 
 370, 22. § 94 . 79 
 372, 1. 4 99 . 84 
 878, 4. § 120 . 155 
 
 378, 23. § 122 . 151 
 
 379, 2. § 123 . 98 
 379, 7. 4 123 . 200 
 
 379. 15 & 17. §124 13, 
 
 158 
 381, 5. § 129 . 17 
 381, 10. §130 15,158 
 387, 6. § 148 . 15 
 
 387, 17. § 149 . 199 
 
 388, 4. § 150 . 14 
 388, 9. § 151 . 27 
 388, 17. § 151 . 165 
 390, 5. § 156 . 64 
 392, 13. § 163 . 202 
 896, 30. § 177 24, 160 
 402, 8. § 195 . 193 
 
 409, 25. § 221 . 188 
 
 410, 18. § 223 . 199 
 410, 28. § 223 . 23 
 412, 21. § 229 31, 197 
 416, 7. § 240 182, 183 
 416, 11. § 240 . 166 
 419, 28. § 250 . 74 
 434, 6. § 289 . 86 
 439, 3. § 305 . 15 
 439, 29. § 309 . 141 
 441, 21. §312. 69 
 460, 27. § 342 . 60 
 
 De Pace, 
 
 p. 62, 10. § 20 199, 201 
 
 De Chersoneso. 
 
 p. 90, 1. § 1 . . 98 
 
 92, 21. § 11 . 198 
 
 98, 25. § 35 . 205 
 
 99, 14. § 88 . 79 
 
 De Symraoriis. 
 p. 178, 17. § 2 .44 
 182, 3. § 14. . 226 
 
 De Rhodiis. 
 
 
 p. 197, 9. § 23 
 
 86 
 
 De Megalopol. 
 
 
 p. 202, 24. § 4 
 
 52 
 
 203, 12. § 5 . 
 
 52 
 
 207, 5. § 19 
 
 75 
 
 In Leptinem. 
 
 
 p. 495, 20. § 127 . 
 
 221 
 
 496, 8. § 129 . 
 
 113 
 
 505, 9. § 157 
 
 74 
 
 505, 19. § 158 . 
 
 193 
 
 In Midiam. 
 
 
 p. 522, 18. § 24 . 
 
 196 
 
 625, 3. § 33 . 
 
 98 
 
 625, 11. § 34 
 
 27 
 
 630, 10. 4 49 . 
 635, 15. § 64 
 
 214 
 
 126 
 
 636, 1. § 66 . 
 
 161 
 
 536, 25. 4 69 
 
 123 
 
 648, 17. § 104 . 
 
 151 
 
 648, 20. § 104 . 
 
 161 
 
 548, 24. § 105 . 
 
 168 
 
 563, 26. § 151 . 
 
 77 
 
 582, 2. § 209 . 
 
 210 
 
 582, 15. § 211 . 
 
 181 
 
 In Androtionera. 
 
 p.593, 14. §2 . 151 
 
 596, 17. § 11 . 72 
 
 598, 20. § 17 . 113 
 
 600, 5. § 22 . 137 
 
 611, 10. § 59 . 151 
 
 613, 3. § 64 . 183 
 
 In Aristocratem. 
 p. 623, 11. § 7 . 49, 73 
 
 624, 20. § 12 . 162 
 
 627, 21. § 22 . 209 
 
 629, 2. § 26 . 193 
 
 635, 15. § 48 . 127 
 
 638, 25. § 58 . 232 
 
 640, 10. § 62 . 74 
 
 641, 9. § 64 . 228 
 659, 15. § 117 . 37 
 676, 12. § 167 . 202 
 683, 22. § 188 197 
 688, 27. § 205 . 201 
 
 In Timocratem. 
 
 p. 702, 26. § 9 . 199 
 
 711, 8. § 35 . 118 
 
 721, 6. § 64 . 22 
 
 733, 20. § 106 . 75 
 
 In Aristog. I. 
 
 p. 773, 1. § 11 . 87 
 
 In Aphobum. 
 
 I, p. 813, 4. §1 . 205 
 
 813, 20. § 2 . 205 
 
 814, 4. § 3 . 123 
 828, 23. § 48 49 
 
 I, p. 828, 25, 26. §49 29, 
 
 152 
 
 829, 28. § 52 . 104 
 
 830, 8. § 53 . 120 
 
 831, 5. § 56 . 165 
 831, 10-12. §56 59, 
 
 62, 158 
 
 833, 12-19. § 63 95 
 
 834, 18. § 66 . 155 
 
 834, 24, 25. § 67 104, 
 
 123 
 
 II, p. 837, 10. § 6 . 218 
 
 837, 11. 4 5 72 
 839, 29. § 14 . 218 
 842, 9. § 20 176 
 842, 14, 15. § 21 49, 
 104 
 842, 16. § 21 . 128 
 
 III, p. 846, 15. § 6 123 
 
 849, 24. § 17 72 
 852, 12. § 25 204 
 
 In Onetorem I. 
 p. 865, 24. § 7 . 163 
 867, 1. § 10 . 20 
 
 869, 9 & 10. § 19 153, 
 
 164 
 869, 12. § 20 163, 239 
 
 869, 18. § 20 .60 
 
 870, 11. § 23 . 151 
 870, 27. § 25 . 161 
 873, 8. § 33 . 24 
 873, 10. § 33 . 211 
 
 In Zenothemin. 
 p. 886, 1. § 14 . 34, 222 
 
 In Apatnrium. 
 p. 900, 22. § 25 . 199 
 903, 22. § 34 . 142 
 
 In Phaenippum. 
 p. 1040, 20. § 6 . 40 
 
 In Olympiodorum. 
 p. 1172, 1. § 16 . 165 
 
 In Timotheum. 
 p. 1194, 13. § 35 . 165 
 1194, 20. § 35 68, 158 
 1201, 19. § 68 . 101 
 
 In Poly clem. 
 
 p. 1210, 5. § 12 . 224 
 
 1223,20,2L§65 29, 
 
 151, 239 
 
 1227, 2. § 67 . 165 
 
 De Coron. Trierarch. 
 p. 1228, 28. § 3 . 98 
 
 In Enbalidem. 
 
 p. 1299, 4. § 1 . 280 
 
 1300, 8. 4 3 . 68 
 
 1303, 2. § 14 . 160 
 
246 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 247 
 
 il 
 
 p. 1303, 22. § 16 . 163 
 1303, 25. § 16 27, 128 
 1312, 17. § 44 20, 106 
 
 1319, 8. § 65 . 34 
 
 1320, 25. \ 70 . 105 
 
 DiNARCHUS. 
 
 lnDemosth.p.91,24 72 
 
 Euclid. 
 !,» . . .21 
 
 £URIPID£)S. 
 
 Alcest. 11 
 
 
 . 199 
 
 52 . 
 
 
 106 
 
 671 
 
 
 26. 108 
 
 756 . 
 
 
 11, 108 
 
 768 
 
 
 . 142 
 
 784 . 
 
 
 150 
 
 801 
 
 
 . 208 
 
 1072 . 
 
 
 176 
 
 Androm. 61 
 
 
 . 86 
 
 333 
 
 
 179 
 
 757 
 
 
 . 185 
 
 929 
 
 
 106 
 
 Baccb. 343 
 
 
 . 186 
 
 719 
 
 
 183 
 
 Cycl. 131 
 
 
 . 179 
 
 Elect 126 . 
 
 
 175 
 
 335 
 
 
 . 214 
 
 484 . 
 
 
 56 
 
 962 
 
 
 . 179 
 
 967 . 
 
 
 37 
 
 1039 
 
 
 . 184 
 
 1061 . 
 
 
 176 
 
 1124 
 
 
 . 38 
 
 Hecub. 112 
 
 
 231 
 
 730 
 
 
 . 205 
 
 836 
 
 
 175 
 
 839 
 
 
 . 62 
 
 863 
 
 
 93 
 
 1042 
 
 
 . 183 
 
 1056 
 
 
 182 
 
 1099 
 
 
 . 182 
 
 1138 
 
 
 81 
 
 Heracl. 248 
 
 
 . 85 
 
 451 
 
 
 179 
 
 731 
 
 
 . 136 
 
 791 
 
 
 86 
 
 Here. Far. 538 
 
 7 
 
 605 
 
 212 
 
 746 
 
 . 33 
 
 1059 
 
 180 
 
 1417 
 
 . 183 
 
 Hippol. 346 
 
 
 190 
 
 393 
 
 • 
 
 . 30 
 
 567 
 
 
 180 
 
 606 
 
 • 
 
 . 186 
 
 1307 
 
 
 219 
 
 1410 
 
 * 
 
 174 
 
 Ion. 1660 . 
 
 
 6 
 
 Ipb. Aul. 462 
 1478 
 Ipb. Taur. 688 
 996 
 1014 
 1108 
 1203 
 Med. 1 
 33 . 
 79 
 
 90 . 
 941 
 1151 (1120) 
 1173 
 1320 . 
 Orest. 379 . 
 418 
 680 . 
 746 
 769 . 
 770 
 1132 . 
 1529 
 Phoeuiss. 92 
 504 
 895 
 1590 
 1624 
 Suppl. 1066 
 1084 
 Troad. 874 
 
 88 
 
 204 
 224 
 
 86 
 
 81 
 5 
 179 
 177 
 229 
 211 
 229 
 
 62 
 186, 187 
 145 
 
 37 
 141 
 135 
 221 
 227 
 233 
 
 80 
 119 
 
 31 
 
 84 
 217 
 184 
 186 
 220 
 185 
 119 
 203 
 
 104 
 
 Aeg. Frag. 5 
 
 Alcmen. Frag. 103 194 
 
 Beller. »' 
 
 Ino, 
 
 Hippol. 
 
 
 294 92 
 
 417 126 
 
 424 45 
 
 442 72 
 
 443 220 
 Frag. Incert. 1057 46 
 
 (4 
 
 Herodotus. 
 
 1,1 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 32 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 84 
 
 . 210 
 
 113 
 
 . 219 
 
 6 
 
 . 74 
 
 85 
 
 . 180 
 
 14 
 
 . 210 
 
 151 
 
 . 14 
 
 29, 151 
 
 . 141 
 
 104 
 
 . 145 
 
 209 
 
 . 141 
 
 215 
 
 1,86 
 37 . 
 89 
 42 
 44 
 
 44 . 
 44 
 
 61 . 
 63 
 
 67 . 
 68 
 
 68 . 
 69 
 
 75 . 
 77 
 
 82 . 
 88 
 
 84 . 
 85 
 
 89 . 
 94 
 99 . 
 
 116 
 129 . 
 136 
 153 . 
 165 
 165 . 
 171 
 187 . 
 190 
 199 . 
 209 
 
 n, 2 . 
 
 13 
 
 15 . 
 
 25 
 
 64 . 
 
 66 
 115 . 
 121 
 125 . 
 135 
 143 . 
 146 
 150 . 
 158 
 162 . 
 172 
 
 HI, 26 
 
 36 
 
 66 
 
 62 
 
 75 
 
 83 
 
 105 
 
 108 
 
 115 
 
 119 
 
 138 
 
 69 
 
 107 
 
 98,99 
 
 43 
 169 
 172 
 227 
 207 
 6 
 142 
 7 
 172 
 7 
 
 69 
 227 
 228 
 150 
 227 
 6 
 195 
 193 
 
 G9 
 
 29, 151 
 
 193 
 
 145 
 
 208 
 
 81 
 212 
 131 
 
 94 
 223 
 184 
 202 
 211 
 47, 131 
 207 
 207 
 193 
 226 
 171 
 164 
 207 
 141 
 142 
 219 
 131 
 219 
 
 83 
 193 
 
 280 
 
 74 
 
 193 
 
 186 
 
 20 
 
 140 
 
 193 
 
 193 
 
 170 
 
 48 
 
 194 
 
 in, 139 . 
 IV, 46 
 78 . 
 118 
 118 . 
 118 
 136 . 
 156 
 184 . 
 V,25 . 
 49 . 
 101 . 
 VI, 9 . 
 12 
 
 23 . 
 27 
 
 45 . 
 49 
 
 60 . 
 104 
 
 108 . 
 136 
 VU, 6 . 
 10 
 
 10 . 
 18 
 
 63 . 
 64 
 
 111 . 
 163 
 154 . 
 158 
 168 . 
 213 
 220 . 
 235 
 VIU,22. 
 86 
 
 100. 
 143 
 IX, 12 . 
 91 
 
 67 . 
 61 
 
 Hesiod 
 
 Op.l 
 
 1,8 
 11 
 13 
 18 
 20 
 26 
 27 
 28 
 29 
 82 
 M 
 
 HOMEB. 
 
 niad. 
 
 
 7 
 
 1,60 . 
 
 . . 107 
 
 133 
 
 61 . 
 
 98 
 
 48 
 
 66 
 
 . 115 
 
 35 
 
 81 . 
 
 109 
 
 97 
 
 82 
 
 . 121, 144 
 
 184 
 
 107 . 
 
 196 
 
 227 
 
 118 
 
 . 68 
 
 169 
 
 120 . 
 
 170 
 
 206 
 
 128 
 
 . 102 
 
 204 
 
 132 . 
 
 172 
 
 224 
 
 135 
 
 . . 114 
 
 201 
 
 136 . 
 
 77 
 
 200 
 
 137 . 
 
 67, 104, 151 
 
 195 
 
 139 . 
 
 55 
 
 218 
 
 150 . 
 
 . 183 
 
 130 
 
 151 . 
 
 204 
 
 146 
 
 159 
 
 . 217 
 
 169 
 
 161 . 
 
 158 
 
 227 
 
 168 
 
 . 133 
 
 218 
 
 166 . 
 
 108 
 
 212 
 
 174 . 
 
 56, 78 
 
 223 
 
 178 . 
 
 92 
 
 174 
 
 191 
 
 . 155 
 
 146 
 
 193 . 
 
 122 
 
 228 
 
 218 
 
 . 131 
 
 138 
 
 281 . 
 
 172 
 
 184 
 
 232 
 
 . 110 
 
 146 
 
 242 . 
 
 128 
 
 227 
 
 244 
 
 . 172 
 
 140 
 
 255 . 
 
 105 
 
 204 
 
 258 
 
 . • . 196 
 
 228 
 
 262 . 
 
 181 
 
 233 
 
 802 
 
 . . li:^' 
 
 155 
 
 322 . 
 
 178 
 
 31 
 
 324 
 
 67, 104, 182 
 
 81 
 
 338 . 
 
 203 
 
 121 
 
 344 
 
 . . 71 
 
 19 
 
 35S . 
 
 98 
 
 199 
 
 363 
 
 . 180 
 
 211 
 
 408 . 
 
 115 
 
 199 
 
 432 
 
 . 25 
 
 228 
 
 437,439 . 
 
 7 
 
 219 
 
 465 
 
 8 
 
 19 
 
 493 . 
 
 122 
 
 
 498 
 
 . 227 
 
 8 
 
 509 . 
 
 143 
 
 618 
 
 . 123 
 
 
 622 . 
 
 68 
 
 
 624 
 
 . 68, 112 
 
 204 
 172 
 
 217 
 
 655 . 
 558 
 564 . 
 680 
 
 80 
 
 78 
 
 92 
 
 . . 114 
 
 174 
 
 209 
 181 
 
 682 . 
 566 
 
 209 
 . 221 
 
 589 . 
 
 196 
 
 227 
 40 
 
 601 
 
 . 215 
 
 146 
 
 11,3 . 
 
 76 
 
 69 
 
 8 
 
 . 178 
 
 171 
 
 10 . 
 
 209 
 
 II, 36 . 
 43,45 
 80 . 
 
 106, 107 
 
 107, 108 
 119 . 
 127. 
 139 . 
 182. 
 214 . 
 236. 
 250 . 
 252. 
 259 . 
 290. 
 322 . 
 331. 
 364 . 
 381 
 
 436 . 
 665. 
 780 . 
 794. 
 
 in, 28 . 
 64 
 
 110 . 
 180 
 192 . 
 194 
 281 . 
 288 
 291 . 
 317 
 866 . 
 428 
 459 . 
 
 IV, 19 
 176 . 
 191 
 234 . 
 238 
 249 . 
 813 
 321 . 
 835 
 404 . 
 418 
 482 . 
 
 V, 66 
 86 . 
 
 127 
 220 . 
 228 
 273 . 
 298 
 308 . 
 311 
 850 . 
 388 
 407 . 
 
 10 
 
 38 
 
 7 
 
 102 
 
 8 
 
 203 
 
 196 
 
 203 
 
 , 128, 179 
 
 204 
 
 . 204 
 
 179 
 
 . 112 
 
 77 
 
 . 174 
 
 190 
 
 . 143 
 
 178 
 
 . 102 
 
 . 67 
 
 . 180 
 
 228 
 
 . 222 
 
 168 
 
 . 83 
 
 182 
 
 . 76 
 
 48 
 
 . 178 
 
 197 
 . 102 
 
 104 
 . 143 
 
 156 
 . 33 
 
 177 
 . 139 
 
 175 
 . 55 
 
 138 
 . 180 
 
 128 
 . 156 
 
 175 
 . 92 
 
 168 
 . 180 
 
 179 
 
 . 133 
 
 19 
 
 58, 101 
 
 70 
 
 . 212 
 
 22 
 
 . 107 
 
 81 
 
 . 106 
 
 101 
 . 104 
 
 101 
 . 188 
 
248 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 i 
 
 V,411 . . 
 
 . 77 
 
 433 
 
 170 
 
 456 . 
 
 . 61 
 
 679 
 
 95 
 
 ^, 49 . . 
 
 . 107 
 
 128 
 
 117 
 
 146 . 
 
 . 137 
 
 164 
 
 175 
 
 177 . 
 
 . 169 
 
 229 
 
 204 
 
 258 . 
 
 . 143 
 
 829 
 
 129 
 
 850 . 
 
 . 177 
 
 861 
 
 77 
 
 448 . 
 
 123, 182 
 
 459 
 
 182 
 
 460 . 
 
 . 196 
 
 521 
 
 129 
 
 VU, 28 . . 
 
 . 105 
 
 303, 305 
 
 7 
 
 133. 
 
 . 175 
 
 157 . 
 
 175 
 
 179. 
 
 . 209 
 
 Vin,32 . 
 
 170 
 
 36. 
 
 . 67 
 
 125 . 
 
 221 
 
 130. 
 
 . 96 
 
 366 . 
 
 96 
 
 452. 
 
 . 210 
 
 IX, 42 . 
 
 207 
 
 121. 
 
 . 181 
 
 165 . 
 
 139 
 
 167. 
 
 . 55 
 
 312 . 
 
 130, 131 
 
 820. 
 
 . 45 
 
 897 . 
 
 128 
 
 500. 
 
 . 130 
 
 519 . 
 
 6 
 
 588 . 
 
 . 146 
 
 655 . 
 
 220 
 
 684. 
 
 . 60 
 
 702 . 
 
 128 
 
 704. 
 
 . 26 
 
 X, 6-9 . 
 
 132 
 
 100 . 
 
 . 81 
 
 Ill 
 
 175 
 
 222 . 
 
 . 118 
 
 437 
 
 197 
 
 488 . 
 
 , .142 
 
 XT, 20 . 
 
 204 
 
 67-71 
 
 . 133 
 
 404 
 
 184 
 
 XII, 25 . 
 
 . 69,223 
 
 167 - 172 
 
 133 
 
 243 . 
 
 . 188 
 
 245 
 
 121 
 
 832. 
 
 . 139 
 
 407 . 
 
 32 
 
 437. 
 
 . 146 
 
 xni,i27 . 
 
 63 
 
 XIII, 172 . . 
 
 210 
 
 317 
 
 . 135 
 
 321 . 
 
 51 
 
 829 
 
 . 142 
 
 843 . 
 
 129 
 
 368 
 
 . 43 
 
 667 . 
 
 32 
 
 825 
 
 . 175 
 
 XIV, 247 . . 
 
 129 
 
 261 
 
 . 81 
 
 267 . 
 
 55 
 
 521 
 
 . 197 
 
 XV, 70 . . 
 
 143 
 
 196 
 
 . 221 
 
 218 . 
 
 104 
 
 223 
 
 5 
 
 588 . 
 
 210 
 
 701 
 
 . 43 
 
 XVI, 84 . . 
 
 69 
 
 242 
 
 . 68 
 
 322 . 
 
 34,210 
 
 389 
 
 . 46 
 
 XVU, 70 . , 
 
 101 
 
 177 . 
 
 . 45 
 
 272 . 
 
 202 
 
 XVIII, 86 . 
 
 . .177 
 
 333. 
 
 6 
 
 XIX, 59 
 
 . 177 
 
 313 . 
 
 210 
 
 423 
 
 . 210 
 
 XX, 29' . 
 
 104 
 
 100 
 
 . 210 
 
 ^ 198 . 
 
 211 
 
 257 
 
 . 211 
 
 801 . 
 
 68 
 
 XXI, 327 . 
 
 7 
 
 405 . 
 
 204 
 
 459 . 
 
 . 76 
 
 522 . 
 
 133 
 
 580 . 
 
 . 146 
 
 XXII, 317 . 
 
 6 
 
 389 . 
 
 . 121 
 
 XXUI, 71 . 
 
 180 
 
 274 . 
 
 . 102 
 
 526 . 
 
 101 
 
 653-656 
 
 . 7 
 
 805 . 
 
 86 
 
 XXIV, 253 . 
 
 . 177 
 
 489 
 
 204 
 
 751 . 
 
 . 47 
 
 Odyssey 
 
 
 I, 40 
 
 . 128 
 
 47 . . 61, 
 
 129, 175 
 
 56 
 
 . 68 
 
 76 . 
 
 76 
 
 94 
 
 . 115 
 
 138 . 
 
 204 
 
 205 
 
 . 76 
 
 217 . 
 
 127 
 
 1, 232 . 
 
 . • M 
 
 295 . 
 
 76 
 
 390 . 
 
 . 110 
 
 892. 
 
 188 
 
 n, 31 . 
 
 . 182 
 
 43 
 
 182 
 
 54 . 
 
 . 134 
 
 59. 
 
 204 
 
 Ill . 
 
 . 67 
 
 158. 
 
 196 
 
 374 '. 
 
 . 146 
 
 lU, 19 
 
 78 
 
 129 . 
 
 . . 76 
 
 205 
 
 . 174 
 
 223 . 
 
 . 105 
 
 284 
 
 68 
 
 327 . 
 
 . . 78 
 
 359 
 
 69 
 
 IV, 97 . 
 
 . . 177 
 
 163 
 
 68 
 
 171 . 
 
 . 99 
 
 181 
 
 99 
 
 195 . 
 
 . 130 
 
 863 
 
 95 
 
 477 . 
 
 . 146 
 
 545 
 
 76 
 
 668 . 
 
 . 210 
 
 733 
 
 63 
 
 735 . 
 
 . . 76 
 
 V, 2 
 
 67 
 
 '57 . 
 
 . 142 
 
 221 . 
 
 104 
 
 300 . 
 
 . 85 
 
 328. 
 
 132 
 
 385 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 465. 
 
 184 
 
 473 . 
 
 . 80 
 
 VI, 188 . 
 
 133 
 
 255 . 
 
 . 68 
 
 VII, 171 . 
 
 48 
 
 280 
 
 . 142 
 
 VIII, 20 . 
 
 69 
 
 133. 
 
 . 179 
 
 147 . 
 
 130 
 
 844. 
 
 . 78 
 
 852 . 
 
 107 
 
 451. 
 
 . 228 
 
 523-53 
 
 1 . 132 
 
 579. 
 
 . 70 
 
 IX, 376 . 
 
 168 
 
 420. 
 
 76 
 
 475 . 
 
 88 
 
 554. 
 
 . 76 
 
 X, 175 
 
 146, 146 
 
 XI, 441 . 
 
 . 209 
 
 548 . 
 
 177 
 
 XII, 17 . 
 
 . 34 
 
 156 
 
 70 
 
 295 . 
 
 . 170 
 
 883 . 
 
 1S3 
 
 XV, 
 
 XIII,209 
 214 . 
 215 
 865 . 
 376 
 
 XIV, 68 . 
 156 
 
 181 . 
 812 
 833 . 
 872 
 440 . 
 496 
 263 . 
 457 
 458 . 
 509 
 
 XVI, 24 . 
 168 
 218 . 
 437 
 
 XVII, 21 . 
 250 
 822 • 
 862 
 475 . 
 539 
 549 . 
 593 
 
 XVIII, 132 
 272 
 402 
 
 XIX, 463 
 
 XX, 121 . 
 
 XXI, 194 
 201 . 
 
 XXII, 139 
 262 . 
 414 
 
 XXIII, 43 , 
 134 
 809 , 
 
 XXIV, 334 
 
 Hymn, in Apoll. 1 
 
 ISAEUS. 
 
 Glcon. ^ 26 . 
 Dicaeog. § 12 . 
 Menecl. § 10 . 39, 
 PhUoct. § 35 . 
 
 ISOCRATES. 
 
 Aeginet. 
 p. 888 D. ^ 22 . 
 
 Antid. 
 p. 70, 4116 . 
 78, S 122 
 119, i 270 . 
 
 8 
 
 133 
 180 
 76 
 77 
 177 
 181 
 68 
 68 
 138 
 104 
 174 
 204 
 180 
 204 
 139 
 182 
 7 
 180 
 212 
 182 
 207 
 71 
 130 
 78 
 92 
 56 
 102 
 6 
 133 
 123 
 210 
 226 
 83 
 182 
 175 
 180 
 84 
 130 
 146 
 69 
 212 
 69 
 
 182 
 
 p. 811 C. 4 7 . 
 315 A. §24 
 
 Archid. 
 
 p. 116 A. § 1 . 
 121 A. § 26 . 
 126 C. f 61 
 128 C. § 60 . 
 134 A. § 87 
 138 A. § 107 . 
 138 A. § 108 
 
 Areopag. 
 
 ). 146 E. § 36 
 147 B. § 37 . 
 147 D. § 39 
 
 Busir. 
 p. 230 C. § 47 
 
 Demon, 
 p. 2 B. § 2 . 
 
 5 G. § 17 
 
 6 A. § 19 . 
 9 C. § 33 
 
 11 C. § 43 . 
 Evag. 
 
 p. 193 D. § 24 
 200 C. § 56 . 
 
 Helen, 
 p. 217 D. § 49 
 Nicocl. 
 
 p. 15 B. § 3 . 
 16 C. I 8 
 18 A. § 16 . 
 
 22 B. § 37 
 
 23 D. § 45 • 
 
 Pac. 
 
 160 
 198 
 
 217 
 211 
 206 
 86 
 94 
 104 
 227 
 
 112 
 
 203 
 
 194 
 
 . 105 
 
 . 19 
 
 108 
 
 . 197 
 
 10 
 
 . 191 
 
 . 11 
 
 17, 222 
 
 . 223 
 
 . 18 
 
 105 
 
 . 74 
 
 74 
 . 118 
 
 p. 60 C. § 95 
 60 D. § 96 . 
 64 B. § 113 
 70 B. § 142 . 
 73 D. § 157 
 
 77 C. § 175 . 
 
 78 C. § 179 
 
 79 D. § 185 . 
 
 Philipp. 
 
 p. 87 A. § 23 . 
 93 C. § 56 
 101 A. § 93 . 
 104 D. § 110 . 
 109 B. § 133 
 
 Plataic. 
 p. 303 E. § 38 
 
 Trapezit. 
 
 p. 360 C. § 11 
 361 D. § 15 . 
 361 E. § 16 
 863 B. § 22 . 
 
 160 C. § 9 . . 222 
 
 162 D. § 18 . 103 
 
 163 A. § 20 26, 103 
 186 D. \ 139 . 214 
 
 6 
 
 225 
 
 138 
 
 40 
 
 86 
 
 196 
 199 
 208 
 
 Panathen. 
 
 p. 241 D. § 44 
 254 A. { 103 . 
 
 Panegyr. 
 
 p. 43 D. § 14 . 
 44 A. § 16 . 
 19 
 
 249 
 
 81 
 86 
 140 
 111 
 116 
 220 
 222 
 140 
 
 151 
 
 95 
 
 181 
 
 195 
 
 , 160 
 
 , 81 
 
 . 214 
 
 169 
 
 . 167 
 
 40 
 
 11* 
 
 58B. § 
 
 216 
 141 
 
 21 
 146 
 145 
 
 23 
 205 
 139 
 205 
 181 
 
 23 
 113 
 222 
 227 
 
 Lycurgus. 
 
 In Leocrat. 
 3. 154, § 50 . 
 155, § 60 
 155, § 61 . 
 
 Lysias. 
 In Agorat. 
 p. 121, § 15 . 
 133, § 45 
 135, 5 62 . 
 137, § 76 
 137, § 78 . 
 139, § 94 
 
 In Alcib. II. 
 p. 145, § 8 . 
 
 De Arist. Bon. 
 p. 156, § 51 . 
 157, § 61 
 
 In Eratosth. 
 
 p. 121. § 14 . 
 
 123, § 32 
 
 124, § 48 . 
 127, § 74 
 127, § 76 . 
 
 230 
 88 
 80 
 
 162 
 162 
 88 
 88 
 108 
 118 
 
 117 
 
 82 
 123 
 
 161 
 100 
 100 
 163 
 167 
 
 De Morte Eratosth. 
 
 p. 95, § 34 . 
 
 Or. Funebr. 
 p. 192, § 22 . 
 194, § 42 
 
 Or. X. 
 p. 117, §25 . 
 
 Or. xxvn. 
 
 p. 178, §§ 8, 9 
 
 18 
 
 162 
 194 
 
 167 
 69 
 
250 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 251 
 
 li 
 
 In Philocr. 
 
 p. 182, ^2 . • 20 
 
 182, § 13 • 37 
 
 Menander. 
 
 Col.Fr. 6 . . 46 
 
 Frag. Incert. 41 . 19 
 
 Monos. 45 . • 86 
 
 387 . . 197 
 
 397 . . 37 
 
 MiMNERMUS 
 
 1.3 
 
 61, 174 
 
 t 
 
 6 
 07 
 
 78 
 78 
 
 46 
 
 67 
 
 145 
 
 68 
 
 45 
 
 211 
 
 45 
 
 56 
 
 105 
 
 Nov. Testam 
 
 Matth. XI, 3 . 
 
 XXVI, 24 . 
 Luc. IX, 40 . 
 Job. XIU, 34 . 
 
 Philemon. 
 Frag. Incert. 29 
 
 Pindar. 
 
 01. XI(X), 34 
 
 XIII, 92 . 
 
 XIV, 30 . 
 Pyth. VIII, 20 . 
 
 IX, 196 
 Neiii. VII, 25 . 
 
 VII, 68 
 Isthm. IV, 16 . 
 
 Plato. 
 
 Alcib.l, 115B . 224 
 
 Apol. 17 . . 181 
 
 17 D. • 127 
 
 18 C . . 116 
 
 20 B . . 168 
 
 21 A . . 151 
 21 B. . 38 
 21 B . . 151 
 21 C . . 151 
 
 21 D . 124, 125 
 
 22 B . . 47 
 
 25 B . .88 
 
 26 B . 117 
 28 E . . 119 
 
 28 E • 203 
 
 29 A . . 189 
 29 C . . 66 
 29 C . . 207 
 80 C . . 60 
 82 D . .95 
 
 86 B . . 222 
 
 36 C . .40 
 
 37 B . . 42 
 
 87 C . . 137 
 89 A . . 83 
 89 A . . 206 
 iO B . . 219 
 
 Apol. 42 A . 
 Charm. 156 A 
 
 163 A 
 
 164 B 
 171 E 
 
 Cratyl. 385 B 
 396 C 
 396 E 
 401 D 
 430 E 
 436 B 
 436 B 
 
 Crit. 43 B . 
 44 C . 
 
 44 D • 
 
 45 B . 
 
 46 A . 
 
 46 B . 
 
 47 D . 
 
 48 C . 
 
 49 A . 
 
 49 B . 
 
 60 A . 
 
 50 B . 
 
 61 B . 
 
 51 E . 
 
 62 C . 
 62 D . 
 62 D . 
 
 Critias, 108 C 
 Euthydem. 
 
 272 E . 
 
 275 E 
 
 275 E . 
 
 276 E 
 278 D . 
 283 C 
 283 E . 
 290 A 
 
 295 C . 
 
 296 D 
 296 E . 
 299 A ^ 
 802 A . 
 302 B 
 802 D . 
 305 D 
 
 Euthyphr. 
 
 4E . 
 
 12 D 
 
 13 D , 
 
 14 A 
 14 C , 
 16 D 
 
 Gorg. 447 D , 
 450 D 
 457 E . 
 
 461 E 
 
 462 E 
 476 D 
 
 . 191 
 
 Gorg 
 
 •. 479 A . 
 
 . 63 
 
 160 
 
 
 479 A 
 
 86 
 
 . 84 
 
 
 479 C . 
 
 12, 206 
 
 137 
 
 
 481 A 
 
 76 
 
 . 127 
 
 
 482 A . 
 
 . 226 
 
 178 
 
 
 483 C 
 
 189 
 
 . 144 
 
 
 484 D . 
 
 . 221 
 
 208 
 
 
 486 B 
 
 52 
 
 . 21 
 
 
 487 D . 
 
 86,74 
 
 83 
 
 
 489 C 
 
 6 
 
 . 83 
 
 
 499 C . 
 
 . 208 
 
 87 
 
 
 500 C 
 
 215 
 
 . 70 
 
 
 602 B . 
 
 . 228 
 
 98 
 
 
 603 A 
 
 74 
 
 . 177 
 
 
 606 B . 
 
 . 144 
 
 62 
 
 
 606 C 
 
 43 
 
 . 22 
 
 
 615 B . 
 
 . 74 
 
 194 
 
 
 616 E . 
 
 94 
 
 8 
 
 
 616 E . 
 
 . 112 
 
 114 
 
 
 617 B 
 
 208 
 
 . 234 
 
 
 622 E . 
 
 . 86 
 
 36 
 
 
 623 E 
 
 218 
 
 . 159 
 
 
 625 E . 
 
 . 227 
 
 171 
 
 Hipp. Maj. 
 
 
 . 217 
 
 
 301 A . 
 
 . 20 
 
 14 
 
 Ion. 
 
 535 B . 
 
 139 
 
 . 14 
 
 Lach. 194 A . 
 
 . 120 
 
 14 
 
 
 196 C 
 
 83 
 
 . 14 
 
 Leg. 
 
 IV, 712 E 
 
 . 55 
 
 46 
 
 ^ 
 
 V, 736 B 
 
 22 
 
 »V 
 
 
 VI, 759 E 
 
 . 209 
 
 . 227 
 
 161 
 . 223 
 
 161 
 
 . 21 
 
 76 
 
 . 222 
 
 113 
 . 146 
 
 174 
 . 170 
 
 222 
 . 129 
 
 
 X, 902 D 
 
 224 
 
 
 XI, 917 E 
 
 . 45 
 
 
 XII, 959 B 
 
 73 
 
 Lys 
 
 . 210 D . 
 214 E 
 
 . 200 
 129 
 
 
 215 B . 
 
 . 126 
 
 
 215 B 
 
 129 
 
 
 218 D . 
 
 . 84 
 
 Men. 74 B . 
 
 . 119 
 
 
 79 D . 
 
 . 231 
 
 
 89 B . 
 
 73 
 
 
 89 E . 
 
 . 123 
 
 
 92 C . 
 
 129 
 
 142 
 
 Menex. 239 B 
 
 . 196 
 
 . 184 
 
 
 245 A 
 
 142 
 
 199 
 
 Phaed. 68 A . 
 
 . 6 
 
 
 
 68 E 
 
 . 141 
 
 . 82 
 
 
 69 D. 
 
 29, 131 
 
 101 
 
 
 69 D 
 
 144 
 
 . 61 
 
 
 60 A . 
 
 . 171 
 
 61 
 
 
 60 C 
 
 35 
 
 . 95 
 
 
 62 . 
 
 . 145 
 
 . 40,50 
 
 
 63 A 
 
 217 
 
 . 101 
 
 
 66 E . 
 
 . 233 
 
 207 
 
 
 68 B 
 
 105 
 
 . 86 
 
 
 70 A. 
 
 . 81 
 
 218 
 
 
 710 
 
 198 
 
 . 83 
 
 
 72 . 
 
 . 61 
 
 189 
 
 
 72 D 
 
 191 
 
 Phaed. 78 A . . 04 
 
 84 E . 84 
 
 90 D . . 196 
 
 91 . 82 
 01 . . 112 
 05 D . 164 
 08 D . . 192 
 
 100 B . 6 
 
 101 D . . 169 
 
 102 D . 217 
 108 E . . 199 
 117 E . 198 
 
 Phaedr. 227 D . 141 
 
 228 A . 02 
 
 228 E . 183 
 
 228 E . 203 
 
 229 A . 204 
 
 230 A . 8 
 232 B . 47 
 232 E . 146 
 251 B . 199 
 257 . 81 
 263 E . 183 
 266 A . 145 
 276 A . 194 
 279 . 174 
 
 Phileb. 13 A . . 82 
 
 15 D . 183 
 
 89 . . 216 
 
 63 A . 10 
 
 Politic. 264 A .191 
 
 802 B . 196 
 
 Protag. 313 A . 101 
 
 814 . 225 
 
 816 . 33 
 
 818 D . 226 
 
 820 A . 211 
 
 828 B . 45 
 
 829 B . 107 
 832 D . 26 
 835 . 173 
 835 D . 173 
 
 838 . 207 
 
 839 . 221 
 
 De Republica. 
 
 1,827 0. . . 115 
 
 827 . . 232 
 
 828 . . . 228 
 
 829 A . . 220 
 330 A . . 157 
 837 A . . 163 
 837 A . . 78 
 837 E . . 78 
 839 A . . 78 
 841 B . . 184 
 852 E . . 64 
 854 B . . 201 
 
 n, 858 B . . 116 
 
 858 . . 221 
 
 n, 360 B 
 860 . 
 865 D 
 868 B . 
 872 E 
 
 874 D . 
 
 875 
 
 876 A . 
 376 
 379 B . 
 
 III, 393 E . 
 397 D . 
 898 A . 
 898 B . 
 408 . 
 412 A . 
 412 B . 
 412 D . 
 415 B . 
 415 O . 
 
 415 E . 
 
 416 . 
 
 IV, 427 E . 
 427 E . 
 430 A . 
 433 B . 
 433 E . 
 439 B . 
 439 £ . 
 
 V, 451 A . 
 455 B . 
 457 . 
 473 D . 
 
 VI, 485 . 
 
 489 B . 
 
 490 . 
 492 E . 
 495 E . 
 501 . 
 602 A . 
 608 C, D 
 
 Vfl,515D. 
 515 E , 
 615 E . 
 622 A . 
 
 VIII, 549 B 
 649 E . 
 653 A 
 657 B . 
 661 
 661 E , 
 664 
 656 B , 
 
 667 A 
 
 668 B . 
 
 IX, 673 . 
 580 B 
 
 X, 595 B . 
 595 
 607 . 
 
 . 140 
 
 64 
 . 206 
 
 80 
 . 183 
 
 113 
 . 227 
 26,28 
 . 36 
 
 134 
 . 40 
 
 87 
 . 64 
 
 139 
 
 . 92 
 
 38 
 
 . 36 
 
 129 
 
 . 78 
 
 82 
 
 . 194 
 
 138 
 . 43 
 
 200 
 . 40 
 
 206 
 
 . 76 
 
 64 
 
 . 153 
 
 82 
 
 . 156 
 
 180 
 . 103 
 
 208 
 . 94 
 
 193 
 . 184 
 
 197 
 
 . 143 
 
 21 
 
 . 137 
 
 63 
 
 . 64 
 
 145 
 8 
 
 129 
 
 . 78 
 
 21 
 
 . 129 
 
 233 
 
 . 21 
 
 74 
 
 . 194 
 
 69 
 
 . 221 
 
 14 
 
 . 183 
 
 208 
 
 . 233 
 
 21 
 
 X, 609 B 
 614 A . 
 
 614 B 
 
 615 D . 
 620 D 
 
 Soph. 242 A 
 
 Symp. 173 B 
 
 ^ ^ 174 D 
 
 175 0. 
 
 186 B 
 
 188 A 
 
 193 E 
 
 194 D 
 199 A 
 199 D 
 202 D 
 208 D 
 
 212 E 
 
 213 D 
 215 A 
 
 Theaet. 142 A 
 
 143 E 
 
 144 B 
 
 145 A 
 145 B 
 149 
 155 A 
 158 B 
 183 E 
 209 E 
 
 Theag. 123 B 
 Tim. 18 . 
 
 18 E . 
 
 81 B . 
 
 90 £ . 
 
 . 70 
 
 20 
 
 . 193 
 
 56 
 
 . Ill 
 
 199 
 
 . 196 
 
 193 
 
 . 15 
 
 226 
 
 . 45 
 
 49 
 
 . 139 
 
 69 
 
 . 101 
 
 62 
 
 . 217 
 
 . 87, 183 
 
 . 77 
 
 208 
 
 . 120 
 
 49 
 
 . 19 
 
 208 
 
 . 86 
 
 205 
 
 . 129 
 
 232 
 
 8 
 
 81, 188 
 
 . 101 
 
 89 
 
 . 40 
 
 18 
 
 . 195 
 
 SiMONIDBS. 
 
 Frag. 5 . . .221 
 Sophocles. 
 
 Ai. 20 . . 
 
 5 
 
 76 . , 
 
 186 
 
 122 . 
 
 . 220 
 
 281 
 
 231 
 
 889 . 
 
 . 61 
 
 403 
 
 183 
 
 496 . 
 
 . 105 
 
 636 
 
 25 
 
 650 . 
 
 . 174 
 
 655 
 
 144 
 
 660 . 
 
 . 184 
 
 667 
 
 78 
 
 672 . 
 
 . 87 
 
 674 
 
 45 
 
 715 . 
 
 . 172 
 
 986 
 
 68 
 
 1082 . 
 
 . 46 
 
 1221 
 
 62 
 
 1834 . 
 
 . 181 
 
 1835 
 
 20ft 
 
 
 '11 
 
Ii 
 
 252 
 
 Aj. 1418 
 ADtig.22 
 41 
 44 
 61 
 69 
 76 
 91 
 97 
 98 
 178 
 185 
 228 
 240 
 242 
 272 
 278 
 872 
 875 
 890 
 443 
 444 
 484 
 534 
 544 
 547 
 680 
 606 
 666 
 678 
 685 
 710 
 1063 
 1168 
 1173 
 1253 
 1255 
 1339 
 
 Elect 81 
 
 833 
 
 637 
 
 697 
 
 1029 
 
 1062 
 
 1172 
 
 1205 
 
 0«d. Col. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 253 
 
 . 211 
 202, 229 
 78, 150 
 225 
 . 149 
 62 
 . 92 
 128 
 . 205 
 92 
 . 132 
 111 
 . 170 
 . Ill 
 . 231 
 155 
 . 84 
 136 
 . 126 
 60 
 . 202 
 113 
 . 93 
 178 
 . 202 
 228 
 . 130 
 106 
 . 135 
 234 
 . 170 
 109 
 . 231 
 179 
 82, 191 
 84 
 . 110 
 113 
 
 . 183 
 
 62 
 
 . 113 
 
 184 
 
 . 184 
 
 186 
 
 . 141 
 
 68 
 
 Oed. Col. 667 . 
 
 731 . 
 
 761. 
 
 816 . 
 
 848. 
 
 966 . 
 1040. 
 1180 . 
 1442. 
 1528 . 
 1713. 
 
 Oed.Tyr. 9 
 129 . 
 283 
 364 . 
 395 
 505 . 
 543 
 548 . 
 580 
 637 . 
 651 
 736 . 
 796 
 834 . 
 840 
 918 . 
 956, 959 
 1146 . 
 1167 
 1281 . 
 1232 
 1246 . 
 1293 
 1868 . 
 1387 
 1391 . 
 
 .12 . 
 
 16 
 
 86 . 
 
 49 
 
 52 . 
 
 88 
 
 84 . 
 170 
 174 . 
 176 
 271 . 
 810 
 442 . 
 565 
 
 204 
 
 208 
 
 211 
 
 202 
 
 122 
 
 224 
 
 172 
 
 183 
 
 181 
 
 185 
 
 141 
 
 182 
 
 191 
 
 199 
 
 Phil. 75 . 
 103. 
 253 . 
 281. 
 800 . 
 825. 
 849 . 
 881. 
 415 . 
 444. 
 493 . 
 619. 
 626 . 
 b39. 
 667 . 
 694. 
 611 . 
 617. 
 674 . 
 674, 675 . 
 761 . 
 825. 
 917 . 
 
 . 199 1 
 
 Phn. 961 . 
 
 14S 
 
 181 
 
 969 . - 177 
 
 . 58 
 
 £ 
 
 ►78 . 
 
 8 
 
 44 
 
 1253 
 
 . 191 
 
 . 185 
 
 1342 . 
 
 103 
 
 37 
 
 Trach 
 
 .26 , 
 
 . 81 
 
 . 27 
 
 
 196 . 
 
 215 
 
 77 
 
 
 197 . 
 
 . 211 
 
 . 105 
 
 
 226 . 
 
 201 
 
 63 
 
 
 401 . 
 
 . 150 
 
 . 176 
 
 
 546 . 
 
 191 
 
 195 
 
 
 604 . 
 
 . . ■ 78 
 
 . 199 
 
 
 631 . 
 
 83 
 
 202 
 
 
 687 
 
 . 169 
 
 . 67 
 
 
 801 . 
 
 181 
 
 133 
 
 
 944 
 
 . 109 
 
 . 146 
 
 
 973 . 
 
 184 
 
 179 
 
 
 978 
 
 . 185 
 
 . 170 
 
 
 1129 . 
 
 81 
 
 215 
 
 
 1183 
 
 . 186 
 
 . 186 
 
 
 1233 . . 32 
 
 183 
 
 Hippon. Fr. 280 . 172 
 
 . 146 
 
 
 
 138 
 
 
 Theocritus. 
 
 27, 143 
 
 Id. I, 
 
 4 . . .102 
 
 20 
 
 J 
 
 
 . 172 
 
 
 Theognis. 
 
 231 
 
 Vs. 126 . . . 146 
 
 44, 215 
 
 153 . . 5 
 
 177 
 
 
 
 . 133 
 
 
 Thuctdides. 
 
 202 
 
 1,1 
 
 . 219 
 
 . 169 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 . . . 17 
 
 205 
 
 2 
 
 . 226 
 
 . 228 
 
 2 
 
 . . . 194 
 
 72, 202 
 
 3 
 
 . . . 15 
 
 . 72 
 
 8 
 
 223 
 
 19 
 
 4 
 
 . 198 
 
 . 184 
 
 5 
 
 150 
 
 231 
 
 9 
 
 . 94 
 
 . 139 
 
 9 
 
 113 
 
 180 
 
 10 
 
 . 34 
 
 . 52 
 
 10 
 
 111, 223 
 
 201 
 
 11 
 
 . 137 
 
 . 79 
 
 12 
 
 17 
 
 231 
 
 12 
 
 . 84 
 
 . 228 
 
 16 
 
 190, 199 
 
 88 
 
 21 
 
 . 130 
 
 . 77 
 
 21 
 
 208 
 
 . 92,179 
 
 22 
 
 128 
 
 . 179 
 
 23 
 
 81 
 
 231 
 
 24 
 
 . 81 
 
 . 48 
 
 25 
 
 . 80, 156 
 
 186 
 
 27 
 
 . 42 
 
 . 164 
 
 c 28 
 
 112 
 
 113 
 
 > 81 
 
 . . 70 
 
 . 21£ 
 
 > 85 
 
 . . . 126 
 
 182 
 . 6£ 
 
 I 36 
 1 89 
 
 . 215 
 
 . . . an 
 
 . 28.14£ 
 
 > 1 41 
 
 
 . . 241 
 
 1,45 
 
 60 . 
 
 . . 167 
 
 n, 2 . 
 
 
 . . 161 
 
 206 
 
 8 
 
 • 
 
 . 33 
 
 67 
 
 . . 76 
 
 8 . 
 
 
 70 
 
 68 . 
 
 162 
 
 4 
 
 • 
 
 . 155 
 
 68 
 
 . 170 
 
 4 . 
 
 
 . . 190 
 
 62 . 
 
 199 
 
 4 
 
 • 
 
 . 203 
 
 63 . 
 
 . 155 
 
 6 . 
 
 
 162 
 
 65 . 
 
 . . 70 
 
 5 (2 examp.) . 167 
 
 65 
 
 . . 76 
 
 7 . 
 
 
 220 
 
 68 . 
 
 . . 211 
 
 8 
 
 
 . 22 
 
 69 
 
 . 159 
 
 11 . 
 
 
 60 
 
 69 . 
 
 211 
 
 12 
 
 
 . 203 
 
 70 . 
 
 27, 46, 109 
 
 12 . 
 
 
 211 
 
 70 . 
 
 34 
 
 13 
 
 
 . 11, 151 
 
 72 . 
 
 8 
 
 13 . 
 
 
 204 
 
 73 . 
 
 . 58, 199 
 
 13 
 
 
 . 211 
 
 74 . 
 
 . 224 
 
 16 . 
 
 
 7 
 
 76 . 
 
 69 
 
 18 
 
 
 . 85, 229 
 
 76 . 
 
 . 62 
 
 20 . 
 
 
 85, 59, 158, 229 
 
 76 . 
 
 199 
 
 21 
 
 
 . 167, 172 
 
 79 . 
 
 8 
 
 24 . 
 
 
 168 
 
 81 . 
 
 234 
 
 82 
 
 
 . 13 
 
 83 . 
 
 . 123 
 
 34(2examp.) 27,130 
 
 86,88 
 
 234 
 
 87 
 
 
 . 109 
 
 90 . 
 
 88, 64, 150 
 
 89 . 
 
 
 219 
 
 90 . 
 
 143 
 
 40 
 
 
 . 160 
 
 90 
 
 . 151 
 
 41 . 
 
 
 62 
 
 91 . 
 
 . 6,167 
 
 42 
 
 
 . 42 
 
 91 
 
 . 151 
 
 44 . 
 
 
 203 
 
 91 . 
 
 170 
 
 46 
 
 
 . 46 
 
 91 . 
 
 . 193 
 
 49 . 
 
 
 61 
 
 95 . 
 
 167 
 
 49 
 
 
 . 200 
 
 99 
 
 . 131 
 
 63 . 
 
 
 195 
 
 101 . 
 
 86 
 
 66 
 
 
 . 191, 197 
 
 103 . 
 
 . 140 
 
 69 . 
 
 
 220 
 
 108 . 
 
 36 
 
 60 
 
 
 . 80 
 
 Ill . 
 
 . 218 
 
 60 . 
 
 
 117 
 
 113 . 
 
 140 
 
 60 
 
 
 . 172 
 
 114 . 
 
 . 224 
 
 60 . 
 
 
 229 
 
 116 . 
 
 86 
 
 61 
 
 
 . 126 
 
 116 
 
 . 217 
 
 61 . 
 
 
 194 
 
 116 . 
 
 224 
 
 62 
 
 
 . 130 
 
 117 . 
 
 . 86 
 
 63 . 
 
 
 61 
 
 118 . 
 
 81 
 
 64 
 
 
 . 44 
 
 120 
 
 . 224 
 
 64 . 
 
 
 132 
 
 121 . 
 
 88 
 
 65 
 
 
 . 137 
 
 126 
 
 . 224 
 
 67 . 
 
 
 . . 167 
 
 126 . 
 
 81 
 
 72 
 
 
 . 154 
 
 126 
 
 . 68 
 
 80 . 
 
 
 60 
 
 128 . 
 
 214 
 
 89 
 
 
 . 46 
 
 129 
 
 . 19 
 
 92 . 
 
 
 25 
 
 131 . 
 
 112 
 
 93 
 
 
 . 83 
 
 132 
 
 . 146 
 
 102 . 
 
 
 . 13,193 
 
 134 . 
 
 164 
 
 m, 1 
 
 
 . 201 
 
 137 
 
 6 
 
 4. 
 
 
 74 
 
 137 . 
 
 143, 162 
 
 11 
 
 
 . 68 
 
 188 . 
 
 . 208,216 
 
 22. 
 
 
 71 
 
 140 . 
 
 66 
 
 26 
 
 
 . 42 
 
 142 . 
 
 . 117 
 
 28. 
 
 
 . 42, 160 
 
 142 . 
 
 215 
 
 82 
 
 
 . . 165 
 
 ni, 38 
 
 . m 
 
 34 . 
 
 42 
 
 40 
 
 117 
 
 40 . 
 
 . 161 
 
 49 
 
 194 
 
 49 . 
 
 . 199 
 
 63 
 
 81 
 
 63 . 
 
 . 84 
 
 70 
 
 75 
 
 74 . . 
 
 . 99 
 
 76 
 
 200 
 
 80 . 
 
 . 81 
 
 83 
 
 tl 
 
 88 . 
 
 . 213 
 
 89 
 
 59 
 
 89 . 
 
 . 126 
 
 98 
 
 137 
 
 102 . 
 
 . 206 
 
 114 
 
 206 
 
 IV, 4 . 
 
 . 190 
 
 13 
 
 166 
 
 17 . . 
 
 . 133 
 
 24 
 
 33 
 
 28 . 
 
 14, 158 
 
 28 
 
 158 
 
 29 . 
 
 . 226 
 
 36 
 
 208 
 
 42 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 43 
 
 219 
 
 67 . 
 
 . 190 
 
 71 
 
 43 
 
 95 . 
 
 . 224 
 
 113 
 
 227 
 
 115 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 121 
 
 42 
 
 125 . 
 
 . 225 
 
 128 
 
 75 
 
 133 . 
 
 84, 227 
 
 V, 9 . 
 
 61 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . 209 
 
 10 
 
 211 
 
 18 . 
 
 . 209 
 
 80 
 
 224 
 
 85 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 86 
 
 226 
 
 49 . 
 
 . 164 
 
 56 
 
 224 
 
 63 . 
 
 . 193 
 
 64 
 
 214 
 
 82 . 
 
 . 60 
 
 102 
 
 215 
 
 105 . 
 
 82. 85 
 
 VI, 2 . 
 
 6 
 
 2 . 
 
 . . 82 
 
 4 
 
 211 
 
 6 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 16 . 
 
 . . 6 
 
 16 
 
 47 
 
 17 . 
 
 . . 22 
 
i 
 
 II ! 
 
 254 
 
 VI, 18 . 
 18 
 
 20 . 
 20 
 
 21 . 
 25 
 
 29 . 
 80 
 81 . 
 81 
 
 87 . 
 88 
 
 60 . 
 50 
 
 64 . 
 67 
 
 68 . 
 68 
 
 61 . 
 61 
 
 61 . 
 61 
 
 66 • 
 74 
 
 76 . 
 77 
 
 78 . 
 82 
 
 88 . 
 96 
 96 . 
 
 100 
 102 . 
 
 vn, 1 
 
 2 . 
 5 
 
 6 < 
 10 
 11 
 13 
 15 
 17 
 21 
 23 
 24 
 27 
 28 
 34 
 39 
 42 
 44 
 46 
 47 
 48 
 50 
 66 
 59 
 60 
 61 
 •7 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 255 
 
 . 63 
 190, 199 
 6 
 . 174 
 . 105 
 233 
 . 169 
 61 
 . 7 
 74 
 . 59 
 60 
 . 203 
 234 
 78,192 
 42 
 
 211 
 
 216 
 84 
 42 
 , 146 
 165 
 , 60 
 7 
 . 82 
 6 
 . 98 
 208 
 . 206 
 36 
 . 71 
 115 
 . 158 
 
 111 
 . 84 
 87 
 23,61 
 109 
 . 42 
 111 
 . 232 
 87 
 . 42 
 213 
 . 219 
 167 
 . Ill 
 206 
 . 80 
 59 
 . 224 
 43 
 . 159 
 134 
 . 211 
 42 
 . 168 
 168 
 . 61 
 76 
 
 VII, 70 . . 23 
 70 . . .191 
 71 . . 47, 109 
 72. . .23 
 77 . . 87 
 80. . . 164 
 84 . . 81, 197 
 85. . . 219 
 
 VIII, 9 . . 169 
 25. . .60 
 45 . . 226 
 56. . .42 
 65 . . 234 
 66. . . 108 
 68 . . 8,214 
 70. . . 195 
 71 . 
 74. 
 
 Ttrtaeus. 
 
 XII, 35 . 
 
 Xenophon. 
 
 Anabasis. 
 
 I, 1, 1 • • 
 1,2 
 
 1, 3 . 
 
 1,3 
 
 1, 5 . 
 
 1,6 
 
 1, 10 . 
 
 2,1 
 
 60 
 42 
 
 109 
 
 2, 1 . 
 2,2 
 2,21. 
 8,6 
 
 3, 6 • • 
 8,8 
 
 3, 14 . 
 8,15 . 
 3, 17 . 
 
 3.17 . 
 
 4, 7 . 
 
 4, 12 & 13 
 4,18 
 
 4.18 . 
 
 5, 9 . 
 
 5, 13 . 
 
 6, 2 . 
 6,8 
 7,3 . 
 7,8 
 
 7, 7 . 
 8,12 . 
 8,13. 
 
 9, 10 . 
 
 9,13. 
 
 9,21 . 
 
 9,27. 
 10,4 
 10,5 . 
 
 6 
 25 
 25 
 
 220 
 . 132 
 223 
 . Ill 
 218 
 . 220 
 33 
 . 152 
 62 
 63, 232 
 220 
 . 229 
 232 
 . 35 
 52, 86 
 115, 168 
 162 
 . 70 
 150 
 . 231 
 23 
 . 199 
 171 
 . 79 
 218 
 . 155 
 19 
 . 76 
 166 
 . 132 
 67 
 . 132 
 220 
 11, 155 
 
 1, 10, 6 
 10,9 . 
 10, 16 . 
 10,16 
 10, 17 
 
 II, 1, 3 . 
 1,4 
 1,6 . 
 1,8 
 1,10. 
 1,21 
 1,23 . 
 2, 12 
 2,21 . 
 3,6 
 3,10. 
 3,11 
 3,13. 
 3,18 
 3,19. 
 3,20 
 8,24. 
 8,25 
 8,29. 
 
 4,5 . 
 
 4,17 
 
 4,19. 
 
 4,22 
 
 4,22. 
 
 5, 13 
 
 5,14. 
 
 5,16 
 
 5,27. 
 
 5,27 
 
 6,12. 
 
 6,21 
 
 ni, 1,2 
 1,13 
 
 1,14 
 
 1,16 
 
 1,20 
 
 1,38 
 
 1,38 
 
 1,40 
 
 2,9 
 
 2,10 
 
 2,25 
 
 2,27 
 
 2,29 
 
 2,36 
 
 3,12 
 
 4,8 
 
 4,29 
 
 4,49 
 
 5,3 
 
 5,7 
 
 5,11 
 
 5,13 
 
 5,18 
 
 226 
 . 81 
 
 168 
 . 160 
 
 155 
 
 . 152 
 95 
 . 204 
 166 
 146, 157 
 232 
 151 
 184 
 11, 151 
 163 
 . 206 
 201 
 . 194 
 . 58, 158 
 . 159 
 83 
 . 143 
 141 
 27, 128 
 44 
 . 214 
 . 26,67 
 . 117 
 29 
 . 214 
 56 
 . 64 
 69 
 . 162 
 230 
 28, 131 
 . 10,67 
 
 . 154 
 199 
 . 43 
 146 
 . 199 
 29 
 . 52 
 29 
 . 161 
 223 
 . 26 
 . 9,67 
 . 25 
 52 
 . 152 
 142 
 . . 81 
 122, 142 
 . . 81 
 206 
 . 199 
 152 
 167 
 
 IV, 1, 5 . . 
 
 194 
 
 1,6. . 
 
 . 81 
 
 2,4 . . 
 
 142 
 
 2, 10 
 
 . 110 
 
 4,6 . 
 
 207 
 
 6,13 
 
 . 108 
 
 5, 30 . 
 
 29, 145 
 
 6,10 
 
 . 75 
 
 817 . . 
 
 167 
 
 8,14 
 
 . 201 
 
 V, 1, 1 . . 
 
 161 
 
 ' 1, 9 . . 
 
 . 117 
 
 2, 17 . 
 
 162 
 
 3, 1 . 
 
 . 126 
 
 4, 16 . 
 
 223 
 
 6, 3 . 
 
 . 223 
 
 6, 22 . 
 
 79 
 
 7,5 . . 
 
 . 145 
 
 7, 26 . 
 
 20,81 
 
 VI, 1, 17 . 
 
 . 76 
 
 1, 19 . 
 
 7 
 
 1,25 
 
 . 163 
 
 1,26 . 
 
 165 
 
 1,28 
 
 . 83 
 
 1, 29 . 
 
 157 
 
 4,9. . 
 
 . 126 
 
 5, 6 . 
 
 132 
 
 6,24 • . 
 
 . 230 
 
 6, 25 • 
 
 161 
 
 vn, 1, 2 
 
 . 218 
 
 1,7 . , 
 
 203 
 
 1,16 . 
 
 . 162 
 
 1, 33 . 
 
 39 
 
 8,11 . 
 
 9,103 
 
 8,13 . 
 
 154 
 
 8,43 
 
 . 85 
 
 4,2 . . 
 
 69 
 
 6,21 
 
 . 97 
 
 7, 11 . 
 
 11, 105 
 
 7,31 
 
 . 81 
 
 7, 55 . 
 
 164 
 
 Cyropaedia. 
 
 1,1,2 . . 
 
 . 130 
 
 2,1 . . 
 
 . 82, 158 
 
 2,1 . . 
 
 . 205 
 
 2,2 . . 
 
 . 45, 109 
 
 2, 8 . 
 
 . 145 
 
 2,8 . . 
 
 206 
 
 2, 16 . 
 
 . 94 
 
 8,1 
 
 197, 218 
 
 8, 8 . 
 
 . 219 
 
 8, 5&6 
 
 210 
 
 8, 9 . 
 
 . 210 
 
 8,11 . 
 
 143 
 
 8, 18 . 
 
 . 83 
 
 4,2 
 
 81 
 
 4,7 . . 
 
 . 168 
 
 4,13 
 
 155 
 
 4, 14 , 
 
 145, 168 
 
 4,21 
 
 168 
 
 1,4,23 . 
 4,25 
 5, 12 . 
 5, 13 
 
 5, 14 . 
 
 6, 3 
 6,7 . 
 6,7 
 
 6, 10 . 
 6, 18 
 6, 18 . 
 6, 19 
 6,22 . 
 6,28 
 6,32 . 
 
 II, 1, 8 
 1,9 . 
 1,21 
 1,30 
 1,31 
 2,3 . 
 2,8 
 2, 9 . 
 2, 16 
 2,20 
 8,5 
 4,7 . 
 4,10 
 4,12. 
 4,17 
 4,23. 
 4,31 
 
 III, 1, 1 . 
 
 1,1 
 1,8. 
 
 1,8 
 
 1,9. 
 
 2,1 
 
 2,8. 
 
 2,12 
 2, 13 
 
 2, 15 
 2,25 
 2,26 
 3,31 
 3,60 
 
 IV, 1, 1 
 1, 18 
 2,7 
 3,10 
 
 3, 11 
 8,16 
 4,4 
 5,15 
 5,37 
 5,46 
 
 V, 1, 3 . 
 1,25 
 2, 9 . 
 2,9 
 
 . 146 
 
 68 
 . 197 
 
 128 
 . 74 
 
 129 
 . 76 
 
 138 
 
 . 80 
 
 63 
 
 . 227 
 
 135 
 . 52 
 
 160 
 . 201 
 28, 105 
 . 119 
 68 
 . 137 
 
 129 
 . 88 
 
 167 
 . 167 
 
 220 
 
 . 224 
 
 27 
 
 29, 150 
 
 135 
 
 . 68 
 
 52 
 
 . 199 
 
 138 
 . 86 
 
 113 
 
 39, 161 
 
 68, 171 
 
 . 199 
 
 163 
 . 184 
 
 211 
 77, 103 
 
 218 
 
 . 216 
 
 41 
 
 . 199 
 
 211 
 
 . 163 
 
 77 
 
 . 22 
 
 211 
 
 . 206 
 
 83 
 
 11, 162 
 
 206 
 
 . 144 
 
 197 
 
 227, 228 
 202 
 . 81 
 212 
 
 V, 2, 12 . 
 
 82, 85 
 
 2,22 , 
 
 219 
 
 3,13. 
 
 . 61 
 
 3,27 . 
 
 103 
 
 3,55. 
 
 . 29, 130 
 
 3,55 , 
 
 108 
 
 4,17. 
 
 . 40 
 
 4,30 
 
 103 
 
 4,35. 
 
 . 108 
 
 5,13 
 
 . 9,103 
 
 5,21. 
 
 . 121 
 
 5,34 
 
 94 
 
 VI, 1, 21 
 
 . 43 
 
 1,26 
 
 225 
 
 1,40 
 
 . 205 
 
 2,30 . 
 
 85 
 
 2,39 
 
 . 14 
 
 3, 19 
 
 207 
 
 4,17 
 
 . 205 
 
 VII, 1, 10 . 
 
 . 47, 131 
 
 2, 19 
 
 . 150 
 
 3,3 
 
 171 
 
 3,7 
 
 . 167 
 
 3,13 
 
 184 
 
 3,17 
 
 . 77 
 
 5,6 
 
 142 
 
 5,73 
 
 . 214 
 
 5,81 
 
 69 
 
 6,82 
 
 . 81 
 
 5,82 
 
 80 
 
 VIII, 1,5 
 
 . 179 
 
 1,10 
 
 40 
 
 1, 10 
 
 . 161 
 
 1,43 
 
 . 40, 74 
 
 1,44 
 
 . 75, 144 
 
 2,21 
 
 110 
 
 2,25 
 
 . 195 
 
 8,5 
 
 196 
 
 8,42 
 
 . 189 
 
 4,16 
 
 155, 156 
 
 5,12 
 
 . 137 
 
 5,28 
 
 224 
 
 7,15 
 
 . 86 
 
 7,23 
 
 114 
 
 7,25 
 
 . 62 
 
 7,27 
 
 206 
 
 Hellenica. 
 
 1,1,16 . 
 
 . 223 
 
 '6,7. 
 
 162 
 
 6,32 . 
 
 . 185 
 
 7,5. 
 
 153 
 
 7,26 . 
 
 . 221 
 
 7,28 
 
 203 
 
 II, 1, 4 . 
 
 . 151 
 
 1,6 
 
 217 
 
 3,2 . 
 
 39, 137, 138 
 
 3, 11 
 
 . 39, 138, 207 
 
 3,51. 
 
 . 130 
 
 4,1 
 
 225 
 
 4,8 . 
 
 . 206 
 
I 
 
 256 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 m, 1, 20 . 
 
 105 
 
 2,6 
 
 . 164 
 
 2,13 . 
 
 226 
 
 2,19 
 
 . 225 
 
 2,20 . 
 
 143, 168 
 
 8,6 
 
 . 202 
 
 8,9 . 
 
 76 
 
 6,9 
 
 . 208 
 
 6,10 . 
 
 86 
 
 IV, 1, 86 
 
 . 199 
 
 i; 38 . 
 
 10 
 
 1,38 
 
 . 29, 174 
 
 4,15 . 
 
 203 
 
 7,3 
 
 . 160 
 
 8,2 . 
 
 162 
 
 8,16 
 
 . 70 
 
 8,23 . 
 
 205 
 
 V 1,14 
 
 . 203 
 
 1,18 . 
 
 178 
 
 1,19 
 
 . 214 
 
 2,2 . 
 
 162 
 
 2,29 
 
 . 16 
 
 2,82 . 
 
 161 
 
 2,86 
 
 . 191 
 
 4 7 . 
 
 23 
 
 4; 7 
 
 . 88 
 
 4,8 . 
 
 161 
 
 4,9 
 
 . 223 
 
 VI, 1, 5 . 
 
 132 
 
 1,14 
 
 . 86 
 
 4,6 . 
 
 161 
 
 4,26 
 
 . 219 
 
 4,27 . 
 
 40 
 
 vn,i,23 
 
 . 160 
 
 1,84 . 
 
 162 
 
 1,84 
 
 . 164 
 
 1,86 . 
 
 150 
 
 1,38 
 
 . 153 
 
 2,9 . 
 
 203 
 
 a; 7 
 
 • 135 
 
 4,84 . 
 
 161 
 
 4,87 
 
 . 142 
 
 4,89 . 
 
 155 
 
 6,3 
 
 . 40 
 
 Memorabilia. | 
 
 I, 1,6 . 
 
 94 
 
 1,13 
 
 . 168 
 
 1,16 . 
 
 69 
 
 2,1 
 
 . • 206 
 
 2,8 . 
 
 198 
 
 a,« 
 
 . 169 
 
 I, 
 
 n. 
 
 m. 
 
 2,7 . 
 
 67 
 
 2)7 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 2,18 . 
 
 17 
 
 2,20 
 
 . 225 
 
 2,22 . 
 
 217 
 
 2,86 
 
 . 183 
 
 2,46 . 
 
 176 
 
 2,65 
 
 . 197 
 
 2,63 . 
 
 215 
 
 8,3 
 
 . 165 
 
 8,6 . 
 
 207 
 
 4,19 . 
 
 . 172 
 
 6,2 . 
 
 203 
 
 6,3 
 
 87, 107 
 
 6,4 . 
 
 129 
 
 6,9 
 
 . 196 
 
 7,2 . 
 
 234 
 
 7,8 
 
 . 129 
 
 1,15 . 
 
 197 
 
 1,16 
 
 . 199 
 
 1,17 . 
 
 . 37,93 
 
 1,18 
 
 . 129 
 
 1,25 . 
 
 185 
 
 2,3 
 
 31, 141 
 
 2,3 . 
 
 184 
 
 8,3 
 
 . 225 
 
 8,4 . 
 
 172 
 
 8,9 
 
 , 192 
 
 8, 12 . 
 
 129 
 
 6,2 
 
 . 126 
 
 6,29 . 
 
 161 
 
 6,32 
 
 . 223 
 
 7,10 . 
 
 98 
 
 7, 13 
 
 . 141 
 
 9,2 . 
 
 82 
 
 9,2 
 
 . 129 
 
 10,2 . 
 
 68 
 
 1,8 
 
 . 223 
 
 2,1 . 
 
 74 
 
 2,3 
 
 9,67 
 
 8,3 . 
 
 178 
 
 8,11 
 
 192, 197 
 
 6,1 . 
 
 183 
 
 6,6 
 
 . 130 
 
 6,24 . 
 
 228 
 
 6,8 
 
 . 233 
 
 6,16 . 
 
 82 
 
 8,8 
 
 . 196 
 
 8, 10 . 
 
 207 
 
 11,1 , 
 
 . 234 
 
 12,6 . 
 
 205 
 
 13,8 
 
 . 196,206 
 
 IV, 1 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 2 
 8 
 4 
 4 
 4 
 4 
 4 
 6 
 6 
 6 
 8 
 8 
 
 1 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 20 
 
 80 
 
 82 
 
 35 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 3 
 
 4. 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 2. 
 
 7 
 
 Ages. II, 31 
 IV, 1 
 IV, 6 . 
 IX, 2 
 
 XI, 3 . 
 Apol. § 14 . 
 Cyneg. Ill, J^ . 
 Hier. VIII, 8 
 
 XI, 15 
 Hipp. IX, 2 
 Oecon. I, 2 . 
 IV, 4 
 VII, 6 . 
 VII, 20 
 VII, 39 
 VIII, 8 
 
 XII, 19 
 XIII, 4 
 XV, 2. 
 XX, 8 
 
 Rep. Ath. 1, 16 
 Rep. Lac. XIV, 
 Symp. II, 11 
 111,3 
 IV, 6 
 IV, 26 
 VII, 2 
 VI1I,26 
 
 218 
 . 80 
 
 78 
 
 . 214 
 
 80 
 
 . 83 
 
 129 
 
 . 232 
 
 134 
 
 . 46 
 
 80 
 
 11. 108 
 18 
 
 . 69 
 
 216 
 
 . 166 
 
 68 
 . 190 
 
 11 
 . 61 
 
 47. 109 
 . 197 
 
 172 
 
 . 163 
 
 207 
 . 168 
 
 137 
 . 109 
 
 178 
 . 196 
 
 179 
 
 . 184 
 
 77 
 
 . 188 
 
 183 
 . 74 
 
 139 
 . 62 
 
 172 
 . 207 
 
 191 
 
 . 163 
 
 77 
 
 . 127 
 
 36 
 
 . 81 
 
 202 
 . 172 
 
 214 
 
 . 76 
 
 74 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX, 
 
 N. B. The figures refer to Page$. 
 
 Absolute, Genitive, 222, 225, 232 ; Accusa- 
 tive, 224, 225. 
 Antecedent, definite or indefinite, 121, 122, 
 123-126. 
 
 Aorist, Indicative, 24. Distinguished from 
 Imperf., 7, 8, 24. Of verbs denoting a 
 state or condition^ 24. Used for Perf. 
 or Pluperf., 25. Expressing a momen- 
 tary action just talcing place, 25. In 
 epistles, 25. In Final clauses, 72. In 
 Protasis and Apodosis (implying non- 
 fulfilment of condition), 93 - 102 ; ho?r 
 distinguished from Imperf., 94, 96 (6) ; 
 how^ from Pluperf., 96 (b). With av in 
 Apod., 66, 93-96; rarely raferring to 
 present time, 101. Gnomic^ 45 ; with jtoA- 
 Aa/cis or ^7617, 46 ; in Uom. similes, 46 ; a 
 primary tense, 49 } see Aor. Inf. Itera- 
 tive, w. avy 47 ; iterative forms in -o-kov, 
 -tr/cd/xTji/ (w. av, in Hdt.), 47, 48. 
 
 , in dependent moods, 25 - 36. How 
 
 distinguished from Present, 8 (R.)- See 
 Contente, Chap. II. j and Subj., Opt, 
 Imperat., and Infin. 
 
 , Subjunctive, 26 - 28. As Fut Perf., 
 
 after cTTfiSay, &c., 26. How distinguished 
 from Perf. Subj., 28. With ixrj in pro- 
 hibitions, 180. With ov fi-n, 184. 
 
 , Optative, 28 - 30. After ejreiS^, &c., 
 
 29. In indirect quotations and questions, 
 29, 30 ; ambiguity o^ in indirect ques- 
 tions, 80. 
 
 , Imperative, 30. Rarely used in 
 
 prohibitions (for Aor. Subj.), 181. 
 
 ' » Infinitive, with indef. time, 30-32. 
 
 After xpaco, eeo-ffi'^u), &c., 31 ; see Pres- 
 ent. After atnos ei/Lti, 32. In indirect 
 quotation, referring to the past, 32, 33. 
 Used for the Future: after verbs of 
 hoping, promising, &c., 32 ; after verbs 
 Of thinking, saying, &.c., 33. After Acyw 
 and eln-oi', to command, 34. Primary 
 « secondary tense, 63. In a gnomic 
 
 sense, 46, 47. With av In a^osb, 60, 
 113,114,157; see'Ai'. 
 
 -, Participle, 34 - 36. With Aou/^avw, 
 
 ^ddi/w, &c , coinciding with the verb in 
 time, 84 ; with Trepiopau, &c., 35. With 
 OMoAoyew, 36. With exw, as periphras- 
 tic Per., 229. With iaoftai, as periphr. 
 Fut. Perf., 44. Primary or secondary 
 tense, 64. As protasis, equiv. to Aor. 
 Ind., Subj., or Opt., 110, 217. With ar 
 in apodosis (never in protasis), 53, 113, 
 114, 159 ; see 'Au. 
 
 Apodosis, defined, 87, 125 ; see Protasis. 
 
 Assimilation in conditional Relative clauses, 
 135, 136. 
 
 Causal sentences, 171 - 173 ; see Contents, 
 Chap. IV, Sect. V. Introduced by Rela- 
 tives, 141 ; negative particle in, 142. 
 Expressed by Participles, 216 ; by Part, 
 w. w5, 219, 220. 
 
 Caution, verbs of; see Fear. 
 
 Conditional sentences, 110 - 121 ; see Con- 
 tents, Chap. lY, Sect U. Cond. Rela* 
 tive sentences, 125 - 137. 
 
 Danger, expressions of ; see Fear, 
 
 Dative after Verbals in -re'o?, 233, 234. 
 
 Dependence of moods and tenses, 48- 
 54. 
 
 Direct Quotations, distinguished from indi- 
 rect, 147 j introduced by ort, 171. 
 
 Exhortations, Imperative in, 178. 8nbj. in, 
 179. Opt. in (poet.), 176. Fut Ind. in, 
 w. oTTiuf (sc. (TKonei), 78, 79. 
 
 Fear, caution, and danger, expressions 
 of, 80 87. Followed by /utjj w. Subj. or 
 Opt., 80, see Object clauses ; by fiTj w. 
 Fut. Ind. (seldom), 82 ; by /n^ w. Pres. 
 and Past tenses of Indie, 83 - 86 ; hj on 
 or bvoti w. Indie (as in indir. disoourBe)^ 
 
258 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 86 ; by Put. Inf., 86 ; by ei, whether^ 
 OTTO)?, how, &c., 85 •, by a causal sentence 
 with 6ti, 86 ; by Infin., 86, 87, 190.^ 
 Final clauses (j)ure\ after iva^ <i>5, otto)?, 
 6<^pa, and /iri, 67 - 73 •, distinguished from 
 object clauses, &c., 66, 67. Subj. and 
 Opt. in, 67. Fut. Ind. in, 63. Subj. in, 
 after secondary tenses, 70. Secondary 
 tenses of Indie, in, 72. ' hv or « in: 
 with Subj., 69 ; w. Opt., 69, 70. 
 Final and Object clauses w. ottw? and ottw? 
 firi, after verb* of striving, effecting, &c., 
 73 - 80. Fut. Ind. in, 73, 74. Subj. or 
 Opt. in, 73, 74 ; Fut. Opt. 74, 39. 'Ottws 
 av w. Subj. in, 76. Homeric construction 
 in, 76, 77. Mtj (without ottw?) in, 77. '^5 
 for oTTws in, 77. After verbs of exhort- 
 ing, forbidding, &c , 77,78 •, rarely intro- 
 duced by iva^ 78 ; see iva.. 'Ottw? or 
 ojTws tiri w. Fut. Ind., by ellipsis of the 
 leading verb, 78 (N. 7, o) ; m*) alone in 
 prohibitions, 79 (N. 7, b). Second Aor. 
 Subj. Act. and Mid. preferred in, 79 ; 
 Dawes's Canon, 79, 80. See Object clauses 
 after (jl^. 
 Finite moods, 1. 
 
 Future, Indicative, 36-38. In gnomic 
 sense, 36. Expressing a general truth 
 hereafter to be recognized, 36. Like mild 
 Imperative, 37. In prohibitions w. /xtj, 
 87, 79. In Final clauses, w. bn-w?, o<|)pa, 
 /i^, 68. With oTTw? or bTrws firi, after verbs 
 of striving, Meeting, &c. 73. With brrw? 
 or oTTws /ui»7, in exhortations and prohibi- 
 tions (sc. cTKOTrei), 78. With ^lr|, after verbs 
 of fearing, 82. In Protasis w. ci : ex- 
 pressing a future condition, 103 ; expr. a 
 present intention, fcc, 93. In Rel. clauses 
 expr. a purpose, 137. With ov tirj, 184 - 
 187. With av : in Homer, 55 } in Attic, 
 66. Periphrastic form of, w. /xe'AAoi, 38. 
 
 . , Optative, in indirect quotation, 38. 
 
 After oTTws or ojtw? /mrj, 39-41, 73, 74. 
 
 Infinitive, 41 - 43. After verbs of 
 
 saying, thinking, &c.,in indirect quota- 
 tion, 41. For l»res. or Aor. Inf., after 
 verbs of wishing, &c., after ware, and 
 even in other constructions, 42. Regu- 
 larly used after verbs of hoping, &c., 43. 
 With iv (rarely), 60. Primary or second- 
 ary tense, 53. 
 . , Participle, 43. Expressing a pur- 
 pose, 217, 214. With ar (rarely), 60. 
 Primary or secondary tense, 53. 
 Future Perfect, Indicative, 43-45. Com- 
 pound forms of: Perf. Part. w. iaoixai, 
 44 } rarely Aor. Part. w. €<ro/xai, 44, 216. 
 
 Often nearly — Fut., 44. In the depend- 
 ent moods, 44. 
 
 General and particular suppositions, how 
 
 distinguished, 88, 89. 
 Gemtive Absolute, 222, 225, 232. 
 Gnomic Aorist and Perf. See Aor. and 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Hindrance, verbs implying, w. Infln., 198- 
 
 202. See Infinitive. 
 Hoping, promising, &c., verbs of, w. Fut 
 
 Infln., 43 ; w. Pres. Infin., 14 } w. Aor 
 
 Inf., 32, 33. 
 
 Imperative, 2. Tenses of, see Present, Per- 
 feet, &c. Not used w. av, 67. In com- 
 mands, exhortations, &c., 178 } w. aye, 
 4>epe, let, 178 j second person w. iri?, 179. 
 After olad' 6, &c., 179. In prohibitions 
 w, M^J (Present, rarely Aor.), 180, 181. 
 Imperfect, 6-8. Distinguished from Aor., 
 7, 8, 24. Denoting attempted action, 7. 
 In sense of Pluperf. (when Pres. = Perf.), 
 7. Sometimes not distinguished from 
 Aor., 7, 8. Expressing past likelihood^ 
 intention, or danger, 7. Expressing a 
 fact just recognized, 8. In Final clauses, 
 72. In Protasis or Apodosis (implying 
 non-fulfilment of condition), 93-102; 
 how distinguished from Aor., 94, 96 (&) ; 
 how from Pluperf., 96 (6) •, in Hom. usu- 
 ally past, 96. With av, in Apodosis, 56, 
 93-96. Iterative, w. av, 47 ; iterative 
 forms in -aKov and -ffKo/nTji' (w. av, in 
 Hdt.), 47, 48. How expressed in Infln. 
 and Part. (Imperf. Inf. and Part), 15, 
 17. How expressed in Optative (Imperf. 
 Opt.), 153. 
 Indicative, 1. Tenses of, see Present, &c. 
 Primary and secondary tenses of, 3, 49, 
 60. With av, see 'Av. Fut., in Final 
 and Object clauses after ojrwv, &c. •, see 
 Future. Secondary tenses of, in Final 
 clauses, 72. Present and past tenses of, 
 after ix-q, lest, 83 - 85. Present and past 
 tenses of, in Protasis, 92. Secondary 
 tenses of, in both Protasis and Apodosis 
 (av in Apod.), 93 - 102 j see 'Av. Fut. : 
 in Protasis, 103 •, in Apodosis, 102. Foi 
 Subj. in general suppositions, 109. After 
 Relative w, definite antecedent, 122. In 
 causal Rel sentences, 141. In condi- 
 tional Rel. sentences : present and past 
 tenses, 125 ; secondary tenses (implying 
 non-fulfilment of a condition), 126. Foi 
 Subj. and Opt. in general suppositious 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 259 
 
 after Bel., 131. In Rel. sentences after a 
 general negative, 132. Secondary tenses 
 of, in cond. Rel. sentences, by assimila- 
 tion, 136. Future after Rel., expressing 
 a purpose, 137. Fut. after e(}>' ,L and 
 i(f)' wTc, 140. After oio-rc, 140. After 
 €W5, kc, until, 142 ; second, tenses, re- 
 ferring to a result 7tot attained, 143. 
 After rrpi'v, 145 ; distinguished from In- 
 fin., 144, 146, 210. In indirect quotation 
 after on and ws, and in indir. questions, 
 149, 150 ; may be retained even after 
 second, tenses, 151, 152; in depend- 
 ent clauses of indir. quot., 160 - 165. In 
 causal sentences, 171. Secondary tenses 
 of, in wishes, 173, 176. Future after ov 
 nrj, 185, 184 ; see Future. 
 Indirect Questions, 147 ; see Contents,Chap. 
 
 IV, Sect. IV. 
 Indirect Quotation, 147- ITl ; see Contents, 
 Chap. IV, Sect. IV. Moods used in, see 
 Indicative, &c. Tenses used in, see Pres- 
 ent, &c. ; and Contents, Chap. II. 
 Infinitive, 2, 188-212. Tenses of, 212; 
 see Present, &c., and Contents, Chap. II. 
 With av, see 'Av. After verbs of fearing, 
 86, 87, 190. In Apodosis, 113. In indi- 
 rect quotations, 147, 148, 167 - 159. After 
 i:i4>c\ov in wishes, 176, 177. Fut. w. ov 
 nrj, in indir. quot., 185. See Contents, 
 Chap. y. 
 
 Interrogative Subj., 182-184. In indirect 
 questions, 154. 
 
 Iterative Imperfect and Aorist. See Im- 
 perfect and Aorist. 
 
 Moods, general view of. Chap. I. Use of, 
 Chap. IV. Constructions enumerated, 65; 
 see Indicative, &c. 
 
 Narration, Infin. In, 210. 
 
 Object clauses with /tiij after Verbs of fear- 
 ing, kc, 66, 80. Subj. and Opt. in, 80. 
 Mij and /xr; ov in, 80, 67. How related to 
 Final clauses, 66, 81. Fut. Ind. in, 82. 
 •Ottw^ fx-i] (== firi) in, 82. Mrj av W. Opt 
 (in Apod.) in, 82, 83. M^ alone w. Subj., 
 by ellipsis of the leading verb, 83. Mrj 
 w. present and past tenses of Indie, in, 
 83-85, foot-note t to 84. Other construc- 
 tions allowed in, see Fear, caution, and 
 danger. 
 
 ''Optative, 2, 174. Its relations to the Indie, 
 and Subjunctive., Appendix I. Tenses 
 of, see Present, &c. ; when primary and 
 when secondary ^ 50-63. With iva, on-w?, 
 
 kc, in pure Fin. clauses, 67. With on-w? 
 and on-w? firj, after verbs of striving, kc, 
 (seldom), 73, 74. With /x^, after verbs 
 of fearing, kc, 80. In Protisis w. ei, 
 91 : in particular suppositions, 105 ; in 
 general suppos., 107, 108. In Apodosis 
 w. av, 67, 105, see 'Av : w. Protasis sup- 
 pressed, 112 ; as mild command or ex- 
 hortation, or resembling Fut. Ind , 113. 
 In conditional Rel. sentences : in par- 
 ticular suppositions, 128 ; in general 
 suppos,, 129 ; by assimilation, 136. la 
 Rel. clauses expressing a purpose (Epic, 
 rarely Attic), 138. After ew?, &c., until, 
 142, 143 ; implying & purpose, 143, 166- 
 168 (d). After n-pi'v, 145. In indirect 
 quotations and questions, 148 ; see Con- 
 tents, Chap. IV, Sect IV. In causal 
 sentences, 172. In wishes, 173, 174 ; ex- 
 pressing concession or exhortation, 175. 
 Future, 38 -41 ; rarely w. ov firj, after is 
 in indirect quotation, 185. 
 
 Participle, 3, 213-232. Tenses of, see 
 Present, &c. With dv, see *Av. Condi- 
 tional (as Protasis) representing Indie, 
 Subj., or Opt., 217, 110. As Apodosis 
 (with or without dv), 113. In indirect 
 quotation, 159, 229. See Contents, Chap. 
 \L 
 Particular and general suppositions, how 
 
 distinguished, 88, 89. 
 Perfect Indicative, 18, 19. Why primary^ 
 18. Compound form of, 18. Of certain 
 vf»rbs, in sense of Present, 19. In epis 
 ties, 19. Referring to the future for em- 
 phasis (oAwAa), 19. Not used w. dv, 65. 
 Gnomic, 45 ; see Perf. Infin. 
 
 in dependent moods, relations of to 
 
 Pres. of those moods, 19. Subj. and Opt., 
 20. Imperat, 21 : in mathematical lan- 
 guage, 21 ; second person of (rare), 22 ; 
 in sense of Present, 22. Infin., 22 : w. 
 w<^eAov in wishes, 176, 177 ; primary or 
 secondary tense, 63 ; w. dv, 59 ; in a 
 gnomic sense, 47 ; as Pluperf. Infiii., 23 
 (Rem.), 59. Partic, 23 ; primary or sec- 
 ondary, 63. 
 Pluperfect, 18, 19. Compound form of, 18. 
 Of certain verbs, in sense of Imperf., 19. 
 Sometunes nearly = Aor. (Hom. and 
 Hdt.), 19. Expressing past certainty, 
 kc, 19. In Final clauses, 72. In Pro- 
 tasis and Apodosis, how distinguished 
 from Imperf. and Aor., 96 {b). With dv, 
 in Apod., 56, 93, 94. How expressed in 
 Infin. and Partic, 23 (Rem.). 
 
"'1 ■ 
 
 ■■ 1, 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 260 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Present, Indica«ye, 4. Expressing a gen- 
 eral truth, 4, 46 j an attempted action, 6. 
 With adverbs of past time (as iroAai), 6. 
 Of certain verbs, in sense of Perf., 6. Of 
 verbs signifying to hear, to learn, &c., 
 6. Of el/Ai, as Fut., sometimes as Pres., 
 6. Expressing likelihood, intention^ or 
 danger, Q. Not used w. av, 65. Historic, 
 6 j a secondary tense, 49. 
 
 . J in dependent moods, 8-17. How 
 
 distinguished from the Aor., 8. See 
 Contents, Chap. U. ; and Subj., Opt, 
 Imperat., and Infln. 
 
 . , Subjunctive, 9, 10. In ^rsf person, 
 
 in prohibitions w. (irj, ISO} see Aor. Subj. 
 With ov ^T?, 184. 
 
 , Optative, 10 - 12. In indirect quo- 
 tations and questions, 11 ; ambiguity in 
 indirect questions, 12. 
 
 . ,, Imperative, 12. In prohibitions w. 
 
 firi, 180. See Aor. Subj. 
 — — , Infinitive, three uses of, 12. With 
 indef. time, 12. After xP«w, Oeani^ui, 
 tc, 13. In indirect quotation, 13. For 
 Fut, after verbs of hoping, &c., 14. Af- 
 ter Xe'yw and cIjtov, to command, 14. 
 As Imperfect Infln., 15, 16. With av in 
 Apodosis, 58, 113, 157 ; see 'Av. With 
 av, representing iterative Imperf., 60. 
 Primary or secondary tense, 63. 
 
 , , Participle, 18, 17. As Imperf. Part., 
 
 17. Primary or secondary, 63. As Pro- 
 tasis (= Pres. Ind., Subj., or Opt), 110, 
 217. With 5.V, in Apod, (never in Prot), 
 58, 113, 159 ; see 'Av. 
 Prevention, verbs implying, w. Inf., 198- 
 
 202. See Infinitive. 
 Primary and Secondary tenses, 3, 48 - 64 ; 
 
 see Tenses. 
 Prohibitions, Subj. and Imperat. in, 180 j 
 Aor. Imperat rare in, 181. Fut. Ind. in, 
 w. o7rw5 fin or (iiq (sc. (TKOirei), 78. See 
 ov firj. 
 Promising, verbs of ; see Hoping. 
 Protasis and Apodosis, defined, 87. Moods 
 and tenses in, see indie, &c. *, Present, 
 &c. -, and Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. II. 
 Purpose, expressed by Final clause w. Iva, 
 &c., 67 ; by Eelat w. Fut Ind., 137 ; 
 by Rel. w. Subj. and Opt. in Hom. (rare- 
 ly in Attic), 138 •, by ews w. Subj. and 
 Opt, 143, 167, 168 (rf) i by w<tt6 w. In- 
 fln., 205 } by Inf. alone, 203 ; by Fut 
 Part., 214, 217. 
 
 (Jaestions, of doubt, w. first pers. of Subj. 
 (sometimes w. ^ovXec or deXei?), 182 } 
 rarely w. third person of Subj., 183 : see 
 
 Indirect, 147 } Beelndireol 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 quotation. 
 Quotation, see Direct and Indirect. 
 
 Relative and Temporal sentences, 121 - 146$ 
 see Contents, Chap. IV., Sect lU. Eela 
 tive with Infinitive, 193. 
 
 Secondary, see Tenses. 
 Similes (Homeric): Gnomic Aor. in, 46, 
 133 } Subj. (without av) and Pres. Indie 
 
 in, 133. 
 Subjunctive, 1. Its relations to the Opt, 
 Appendix I. Tenses of ; see Pres., Perf., 
 and Aor. ', always primary, 60. With 
 iv or ice, see 'Xv. With Iva, ottws, &c., 
 in pure Final clauses, 67 : after secondary 
 tenses, 70. With on-w? and oTrw? fAi? after 
 verbs of striving, &c. (seldom), 73. 
 With firi after verbs of fearing, &c., 80. 
 In Protasis w. eav (av, tjv), 90, 91 ; in 
 particular suppositions, 102 ; in general 
 suppos., 107, 108; w. ci (without iv), see 
 *Av. In Apodosis w. Ke or iv (Hom.), 67, 
 182 -, see 'Av. In conditional Relat. sen- 
 tences : in particular suppositions, 127 } 
 in general suppos., 129; by assimilation, 
 135. In Homeric similes after ws, u« ore, 
 132. In Rel. causes expressing a purpose 
 (Epic), 138. After ea>9, &c., until, 142, 
 143 ; implying a purpose, 143, 167, 168 
 (d). After npiv, 145. In indirect ques- 
 tions, representing Interrog. Subj., 154, 
 155. In indir. quotations, repres. de 
 pendent Subj., 148, 160; may be changed 
 to Opt. or retained, after second, tenses, 
 148, 160, 166. First person of, in exhor- 
 tations, 179; see aye, «^epe. Aor. in pro- 
 hibitions w. Ml?, 180 ; Pres. only in first 
 person (rarely sing.), 180, 181. Inde- 
 pendent (like Fut Ind.) in Hom., 181 ; 
 _ » «_ ..^ -iQo tntiirrrnT. fin nuestions 
 
 Interrog. (in questions 
 With ou M'?. M strong 
 
 w. av or K€, 182. 
 of doubt), 182. 
 future, 184. 
 
 Temporal sentences, see Relative. With 
 CO,?, &c., until, 142-144. With npiv, 
 144-147,210. 
 
 Tenses, enumeration of, 3. Primary and 
 secondary, 3, 48 - 64. Relative or abso- 
 lute time denoted by, 3, 4. Gnomic and 
 iterative, 45-48. Use of, see Contents, 
 Chap. II. See also Present, &c. 
 
 Verbal in -Teo?,3; see Contents, Chap. VH 
 
 Wish, expression of, 173-177 } see Con- 
 tents, Chap. IV., Sect. VI. Ind and Opt 
 in, see Ind. and Opt. Latin and Greek 
 expressions of, compared, 177. Infin. in 
 (poet.), 209. 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 N. B. The figures refer to Paget. 
 
 Ayovaxrew ei, 120. 
 
 'Ayatrata ei, 120. 
 
 Aye or ayere w. Imperat., 178, 179, 180. 
 
 'AStKeu as Perf., 6. 
 
 Aiaxvvonax with Part and Inf., 228. Ai- 
 o'xvvofiai ei, 120. 
 
 AiTios ei/bii, w. Inf. (sometimes w. rov or 
 to), 190, 191 ; w. Aor. Inf., 32. 
 
 'Aicoveiv, oLKovcraL, in sound, 196. 
 
 'AAi(rKO/u,ai as Perf., 6. 
 
 'AAAa or avrap (like fie) in Apodosis, 121, 
 137 (Rem.). 
 
 'A/xa w. Partic, 219. 
 
 'Av (a). Adv., two uses of. In Apodosis and 
 in Protasis, 54. Not used w. Pres. and 
 Perf. Indie, 65. With Fut Ind. : in 
 early poets, 55, 104 ; in Attic, 56. With 
 secondary tenses of Ind. in Apodosis, 56, 
 87, 90, 94, 127; omitted for emphasis, 96; 
 regularly omitted in Apod, formed by 
 Infin. and expJ?v, e5ei, &c., 97-100. With 
 Imperf. and Aor. Ind. in iterative sense, 
 47. With Subjunctive : in Protasis (cav, 
 av, or ^v), 66, 87, 102, 108; in conditional 
 Rel. and Temporal clauses, 56, 125, 128, 
 130, 143, 144, 145; often omitted in Hom. 
 (rarely in Attic), 104, 105, 109, 133. In 
 Final clauses after w? ojtw?, o<^pa: w. 
 Subj., 68, 69; rarely w. Opt 69, 70. 
 Omitted from eav, orav, o? dv, &c., 
 when the Subj. is changed to Opt 
 after past tenses, 149 ; rarely retained, 
 163, 169. Seldom w. w? and Subj. 
 in Hom. similes, 132. Epic use of, w. 
 Subj. in Apodosis, 57, 104, 182. With 
 Optative, always formmg Apodosis, 67, 
 
 106, 123, see Optitive ; never w. Fut. 
 Opt, 57 ; rarely omitted, 100. With an 
 Opt. In Protasis which is also an Apod., 
 
 107, 133. El Ke w. Opt. in Horn., 107. 
 Never used w. Imperat., 67. With Infin. 
 and Part. : in Apodosis, 67 - 61, 113, 157, 
 169, 192, 232 } never in Protasis, 62 ; use 
 
 of each tense with, see Present, Ac With 
 Inf. for iterative Imperf. and Aor. w. 
 ov, 60. Position of, 61, 62. Repetition 
 of, 62-64. Without a verb, 63. Tdx* 
 av, perhaps, 64. 
 
 'Av (fi), contracted for, eav. See 'Eav. 
 
 'Avaipew, to give an oracular respontef 
 see Xpdu). 
 
 'Avexo/xai w. Part., 228. 
 
 'AnoKOLfivM w. Part, and Inf., 228. 
 
 •Apxew w. Part., 228. 
 
 'Are, are 5^, W. Part., 219. 
 
 AuTiKa w. Part., 219. 
 
 'Axpt, see "Etas. 'Axpt o5, 142. 
 
 BeXTtwv w. Part, 228. 
 
 Bow'Aei or povkeaOe w. Interrog. Subj., 182i 
 
 'BovXofievtf /ltd tovt6 eortv, 229. 
 
 reyove'vai, to btf 19. 
 
 Ae, in Apodosis, 12L In antecedent clause^ 
 
 137. 
 AeiKvuMi ^' Part, 229. 
 Aeivov coTiv ei, 120. 
 AijAo? ei/xt W. Part., 230. 
 AiaTeAe'u w. Part., 227 ; see AavdavM. 
 Ai'Sw/ni, to offer, 6. Imperf. of^ 7. 
 AiKaios w. Inf., 195. 
 AlOTrep, 171. 
 AcoTi, 171 ; w. Inf. (Hdt.), 193. 
 
 •Eav (ei av), contracted av (fl) or ^v, 68, 87, 
 104 ; w. Subj., 102, 108. 
 
 'E^ouAoMTjv with Infinitive in Apodosis, 
 without av, 98. 
 
 'ESei, kxpy\v (xP^Oj ef^"* e*^" Tpocr^#cev, 
 eutos ^v ijpp.OTTev, ^v or VTi^pxev, with 
 Infin. in Apodosis, without av, 97 - 100. 
 
 Ei, if, 87, 92, 93, 105, 108 ; see 'Av. Stt/»- 
 posing that, 115, 168. After «au/xa^<»»i 
 &c., 120. With Inf. (Hdt.), 193. St 
 yap, or ei, in wishes, 173 - 177. 
 
262 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 263 
 
 <!• 
 
 Ei, whether, 120, 147, 151 } after verbs 
 
 ot fearing 85. 
 £i yap in wishes, see £i. 
 Ei 6' aye, 111. 
 
 Ei Se firi in alternatives, 112. 
 Bl0e in wishes, 173-177. 
 Eixbs »}»- in Apodosis, see'ESei. 
 Elfii tc be going : aa Future, 6 } as Pres., 
 
 6 ; w. Inf., 204. 
 Eivai, expressing a purpose, 204. 
 EiJTov, / commanded, w. Inf., 14, 34. 
 Ei? o (for CO)?) w. Indie. (Hdt), 142. 
 EiCTOKe w. Subj. and Opt., 143 } see'Ews. 
 "LKiav elvai, 208. 
 •Eve<m, Partic. of; used personally w. Inf., 
 
 194, 195. 
 'Ei^i' in Apodosis, see'ESeu 
 •Efait^ioj? w. Part., 219. 
 "E^r]v in Apodosis, see 'ESet. 
 '^ira-v or iirnv, see'OTav. 
 'Eircav, Ionic for ttrqv. 
 'Eirei or eireiS^ (temporal) j w. Aor. Indie. 
 
 (not Pluperf ), 25 ; w. Aor. Opt., 29 ; w. 
 
 Infin., 193. Causal, 171. 
 •Enet£avy w. Aor. Subj. as Fut. Perf., 26. 
 
 See'Orav. 
 •Errt'Sof 0? w. Inf. 195. 
 'ETTiKoupto? w. Inf., 195. 
 'EnifieKeofJitu (eirt/ne'Ao/utai), W. oira>? and 
 
 Fut. Ind., 73} w. Inf., or Inf. w. toD, 
 
 192. 
 •EjTiT^Seto? w. Inf., 195. 
 'En-iTpeirw w. Part., 226. 
 'Eore, unti/, see'Ew?. 
 EOdus w. Part., 219. 
 Eifpto-Kca w. Part., 226. 
 'E<j>T}i', in Homer, 99. 
 •E(^* <? or e<^* wTc, w. Fut Ind., 140; w Inf., 
 
 207. 
 'Exp^v in Ai)odosi8. See 'ESct. 
 'Exw w. Aor. or Perf. Part, as periphrastic 
 
 Perf., 229. 
 'Ew5, eore, axpi, M^XP^' ei<rof<» o<^pa. ^n- 
 
 til, 142-144; expressing a purpose, 143, 
 
 167, 168. 
 •EuK, o<^pa, 90 long as, see Relative. 
 
 •Hku) as Perf., 6. Imperf. of, 7. 
 'Upfiorrev in Apodosis, see 'E5ei. 
 •HTTaofiai, as Perf., 6. 
 
 ^avfia liea-0aiy 196. 
 
 ^avua^oi ei, Qavtiaarov eariv «i, 130. 
 
 ©e'Aei? or deAere w. Interrog. Subjunctive 
 
 (poet.), 182. 
 9c<7irt^w, lec Xpoo). 
 
 "ISeiv, opal', tn appearance, 19(J 
 
 'I&i w. Imperat., 178. 
 
 •Ixavos w. Part., 228. 
 
 *Ik(i> or iKavo) as Perf. (Horn.), 5. 
 
 'Ivoy in Final clauses: w. Subj. and vpt., 
 
 67, 70 ; w. second, tenses of Indie 72. 
 
 Not used with av, 70; Iva »c€, 70. In 
 
 Object clauses after Aiao-o/iai (Horn.), 78; 
 
 similar constr. in N. Tsst., 78. 
 , where, with av, 70 (R.). 
 
 Ka, Doric for kc ; see 'Av. 
 
 Kai, Kainep {koI . . . irep), W. Part., 220, 
 
 221. 
 KatToi w. Part, (rare), 221. 
 Ke or KcV, see 'Ai'. 
 KeKA^fffltti, to be called, 19. 
 Kivivvevio w. Inf. in Apodosis, 99. 
 Kparew, see Nt»caa>. 
 Kpeiaaov w. Part., 228. 
 Kupew w. Part, (poet,), 227. 
 
 AavGavia, <fi9avui, rvyxo-V"^, iiareAiw, W 
 
 Part., 227 ; w. Aor. Part., 34. 
 Aeyoj, to command, w. Inf., 14, 34. 
 
 MeAAaj,w. Inf. as periphrastic Fut., 38; tense 
 of Inf. with, 38. Imperf. of, w. Inf. : ex- 
 pressing past intention, &c., 38, 99; form- 
 ing Apodosis (without av), 99. 
 
 Me>vT)fiat, / remember, 19 ; w. Part., 229; 
 W. ore, 231. 
 
 Merafu w. Part., 219. 
 
 Me'xpt, see'Ews. Me'xpi o5, 142. 
 
 M^, lest, in Final clauses : w. Subj. and 
 Opt., 67, 70 ; rarely w. Fut Ind., 68. 
 After verbs of striving, &c. (for ottw? firi), 
 77. With Fut. Ind. in prohibitions, 37, 
 79, 187. After verbs of fearing, &c. : 
 w. Subj. and Opt., 80 ; w. Fut. Ind., 82. 
 "With Subj. (by ellipsis of a verb of /«ar- 
 ing), 83. With av, 83. With present 
 and past tenses of Indie, 83-85 ; never 
 interrog., 84. With Fut. Opt. 39, 40. 
 
 , not, w. Iva, on^tos, Ac, in Final and 
 
 Object clause, 67. In Protasis, 88. In 
 Rel. clauses w. indef. anteoed., 122, 124. 
 In wishes (with and without ei), 174, 176. 
 In prohibitions, ISO. With interrog. Subj., 
 181. With Inf., after verbs implying ne- 
 gation, 198, 200, 201. 
 
 M>) ov (double neg.) : w. Inf., 198, 200, 201} 
 w. Part., 200 } before Nouns, 200. 
 
 Nucao) and Kpariut, as Perf., 6. 
 No/yii^w, oiofjiai, and <^tm*^» ^' Aoclit. Int 
 referring to the future (?), 33. 
 
 'O for oTi (in Horn.), 170. 
 
 OUa (novi), I know, 19 ; see Olado. 
 
 Oio/iai w. Aor. Inf. for Fut. (7), 33. 
 
 Oto; w. Infin., 194. Oioi/, oia, ola. b-q, W. 
 
 Part., 219. 
 Olaff 8 &pa<TOv ; 179. 
 OixoMai as Perf., 6. Imperf. of, 7. 
 •OAiyou {^elv), almost, 208. 
 *OAAw/xai as Perf. (Trag.), 6. 
 'OAwAa, 1 shall perish, 19. 
 'O/moios w. Infin. (Horn.), 197. 
 'Onorav, see Orav. 
 'Oirore, when, see Relative. Since (causal), 
 
 171. 
 'On-wj, originally Rel. Adv., 75; as indirect 
 
 Inter.og., 75, 77, 85, 154. In order that, 
 
 that, in Final clauses; w. Subj. and Opt., 
 
 67, 70 ; w. iv and Subj., 63, 69 ; w. Fut. 
 
 Ind., 68 ; w. second, tenses of ludic, 72. 
 
 After verbs of striving, &c. : w. Fut. 
 
 Ind. (sometimes Subj. and Opt.), 73 ; w. 
 
 av and Subj. (rare), 76. That (like /uitj), 
 
 after verbs of fearing, &c., 85. That 
 
 (like (0? or on), in indirect quotations, 
 
 170. 
 'Ottojs fiv (for fiiq), lest, that, after verba of 
 
 fearing, &c., 82. 
 *Opa»', iSelv, in appearance, 196. 
 •Octoi' or ws w. Absol. Infin. 207. 
 'Ocros w. Infin. 294. 
 'OcTTis av 3,*Oo-Ti5 TTOT* lativ, 134. 
 'Orav, biToraVt inav or eir^v (eiredv), and 
 
 ineiSdv, 55, 125, 127, 129 ; see 'Av. 
 'Ore, when, see Relative. After fLc>njfiat, 
 
 231. With Infin., 193. 
 , since (causal), 171. 
 •Qti, that, in indirect quotations, 147 : w. 
 
 Ind. and Opt., 148, 149, 150 ; w. Ind. or 
 
 Opt. w. av, 156. Before direct quot., 171. 
 , because (causal), 171-173, see 
 
 Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. V.; after verbs 
 
 of fearing, 86. 
 
 Tl ITOT f(rTlV,'0<TTl<: TTOT eOTlV, &c., 134. 
 
 Qv, after ii-q, lest, 67, 80. In Apodosis, 88; 
 rarely in Protasis, 88 (N.). In Rel. 
 clauses w. def. anteced., 122. In causal 
 Rel. clauses, 142 (R.). In indirect dis- 
 course, 149. 
 
 ^OuK av (ftQavoLi (</>5ai'0iTc), 228. 
 HiK oifia av ei, 62. 
 
 )u Mij, 184-187 ; see Contents, Chapter 
 
 IV., Section VIII. Dawes's Canon on, 
 
 79, 80. 
 
 "jvcKo, because, 171. 
 
 [iTW9, implying a Protasis, 110. With Opt. 
 
 In protestations, 175. Referring to a 
 I Participle, 21A 
 
 'O^eAor, see 'S14>e\ov. 
 
 '04>pa (Epic and Lyric), os final particle: 
 
 w. Subj. and Opt., 67 ; w*. av, 69. With 
 
 Fut. Ind., 68. 
 , as temporal particle, until, 142- 
 
 144 ; see ews. So long as, see Relative. 
 
 IXoAai w. Present, 5. 
 
 YlavTolo<; yiyvoixai. (Ion.) w. Participle, 227. 
 
 Uapov (like TrptV) w. Inf. (Ilom.), 212. 
 
 Ila? w. Imperat. (2d pers.), 179. 
 
 JIavM w. Part., 226. 
 
 UeiOto, to try to persuade, 6. Imperfect 
 of, 7. 
 
 IIctpaoMai w. Part. (Hdt.), 227. 
 
 Ilepiopaw, w. Part., 226 ; w. Aor. Part, 3S. 
 
 Utarevu} w. Inf. and rep, 197. 
 
 II0AA65 ci/u.1, TToAAos eyxei/xai, w. Part. 
 (Ion.), 227. 
 
 Upen-ci, Partic. of, used personally w. In- 
 fin., 194, 195. 
 
 IIpiV, w. Ind., Subj., and Opt, 146, 146. 
 With Infin., 210 - 212. As Adverb, soon- 
 er, 146 (N. 5). 
 
 Upiv y ore (Hom.), 146. 
 
 npli' ri, 146, 211, 212. 
 
 Tipo(Tbe\Ofiivia fioi tovto iariv, 229. 
 
 Ilpoa^/ccf in Apodosis, see 'E5eu 
 
 Ilpocnjxei, Partic. of, used personally w. 
 Infin., 194, 195. 
 
 UpoaOev fi, 146, 211. 
 
 UpoTcpoi/ rj, 146, 211. 
 
 II«s yap dv; Ilwf oiiK dv ; &0., 63. 
 
 2vvot£a, (TvyyiyvdJa/cw, w. Part., 230 
 
 Tax* av, 64. 
 
 TeQvriKivai, to be dead, 19. 
 
 -Tc'os (-reoi/, -reo). Verbal in, 3, 233, 234 } 
 
 see Contents, Chapter VU. 
 Tl Aef et? ; 38. 
 Tl fiaejjv; TC vadiav; wherefore f 221, 
 
 222. 
 Tt irdOia ; 183, 18l. 
 TiicTw (in tragedy) as Pert, 6. 
 To vvv tlvai, 208. 
 Tvyxdva w. Part., 227 } see AavBdwt. 
 
 'Yarepov ^ w. Infin., 2U. 
 
 ♦avepds eifjLi w. Part., 230. 9avep6v wouU 
 
 w. Part, 230. 
 <>€pe w. Imperat, 178, 179, 180. 
 *euyw as Perf., 6. 
 *7?Mi w. Aor. Inf. for Fut. (7), 33. 
 9$dvta w. Part., 227 ; see Aavedvo. ^dont 
 
 V w. Infin. (Hdt.), 213. 
 
264 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 Xpaoi, avaipew, dcoTri^o), w. Prea. or Aor. 
 Inf., 13, 31 } Bometimea w. Fut. Inf., 13. 
 
 •O?, originally Rel. Adv., 75 (R.). In order 
 that^ that, In Final clauses: vr. Subj. 
 and Opt, 67, 70 ; w. ay and Subj., 68, 69; 
 w. Fut. Ind., 68 ; w. second, tenses of 
 Indie, 72. Sometimea (for ottw?) after 
 verbs of striving, &c., 77 (N. 4) ; Ho- 
 meric construction of, with Subj. or Opt., 
 76 (N. 2.). Sometimes (for mij) after 
 verbs o{ fearing, 85. 
 
 , when, see Relative With Infln., 
 
 193. 
 
 -, that, in indirect quotation (like on), 
 
 147, 148, 149, 150. Once w. Subj. for Fut 
 tnd. (Horn.), 78, 171. 
 
 'fly, because, 171-173. 
 
 , in wishes: w. Opt., 175; w. w^eXoi', 
 
 177. With Inf., 206, 207, 208. With 
 Partic, 219, 220, 225, 231, 232 } w. Part 
 and ay 232. 
 
 'aairep w. Partic, 219, 222, 225. 
 
 'ilcrnep av ei {dxrnepavti), 63, 116. 
 
 'Ocrre, SO that, w. Indie, 140 With Inf., 
 205 ; after verba and adject, which com- 
 monly take Inf. alone, 206 (N. 2.), 205. 
 With Opt., Indie, or Inf. w. av, 141, 207. 
 With Imperat., 141. 
 
 , in Homer, = uxrntp, as if, 207. In 
 
 Hdt., w. Partic.,== are, 219, 223. 
 
 'Cl<i>e\ov or w^eAAoi' in wishes, 08, 170, 
 177. 
 
 
 THE EKD. 
 
 Cambridge : Stereotyped and Printed by Welch, Bigelow, & Ca 
 
 ■> 
 
r*_ / t^— 
 
 DUPLICATE 
 
 1010674586 
 
 887.58 
 G631 
 
 r 
 
 a a 
 
 Z